Canon Copier iRC 3200 Series I PDF

Service Manual
iR C3200 Series
iR C3220N PRT
Dec 3 2004
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical
and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol ,
the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the
delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to
indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in
"DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the
operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from
sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant
Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.4 Report Generation ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings ............................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4 User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System ................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) ........................................... 1-21
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.6 Product Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.7.2 Print Size ........................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.7.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-28
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Site Space ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Configuring the Cassette ............................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.3 Connecting the Reader Unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.2.5 Installing the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.6 Installing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit ............................................................................ 2-16
2.2.7 Connecting the Power Cord ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.8 Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Unit ....................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner Container ...................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.2.11 Connecting to the Network ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ........................................................................................................ 2-22
2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.2 Using PING .............................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ........................................................................................ 2-23
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................. 2-24
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address .......................................................................................... 2-24
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation .................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6 Relocating the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation ........................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.7 Installing the Card Reader ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.1 Checking the Contents .............................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.7.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used ......................................................................... 2-33
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ...................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ............................................................................................................... 2-34
2.9 Installing the Original Tray ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.2 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation ........................................................................................................... 2-47
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater .......................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................................................................................................................ 2-59
2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier ........................................................................................ 2-61
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 .............................................................. 2-63
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-64
2.13.1 Preparing for the Work ........................................................................................................................... 2-64
Contents
Chapter 3 Basic Operation

3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ............................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .................................................................................................................... 3-7
Chapter 4 Basic Operations (As a Printer)

4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ............................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.2 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 5 Main Controller

5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 SRAM board ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.2 Startup Sequence ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.4 Actions when HDD Error .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 Flow of Images ......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black ........................................................................ 5-17
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing .............................................................................................................. 5-18
5.6 Flow of Image Data ......................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions .................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function ................................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions .............................................................................. 5-22
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions ................................................................................... 5-23
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.3 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ......................................................................................... 5-25
Contents
5.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-25

5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.6 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates ........................................................................................ 5-26
5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet Board ............................................................................................................ 5-26
5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR Board ................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.7.1.9 Removing the SRAM PCB ................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................... 5-27
5.7.1.11 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .......................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) ....................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.2.7 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................ 5-30
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .............................................................................. 5-30
5.7.3 SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ...................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.4 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.7.5 Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.6 Differential PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 5-34
5.7.6.4 Removing the Differential PCB ......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................................................ 5-35
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Contents
Chapter 6 Original Exposure System

6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ........................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) ............. 6-6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio ....................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction .......................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................ 6-9
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) ..................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations ........................................................................................................ 6-11
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................ 6-14
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp ......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Left Cover/Reader Right Cover/Reader Front Cover .................................... 6-15
6.4.2.3 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ........................................................................................................ 6-15
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning Lamp .......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.3.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit ...................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.3.5 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB .................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.4 Interface PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ..................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.4.3 Removing the Interface PCB ............................................................................................................. 6-20
6.4.5 Inverter PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6 CCD Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit ................................................................................................................... 6-24
Contents
6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24

6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) ..................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ..................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) ......................................................... 6-25
6.4.8 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.9.3 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Cover ........................................................... 6-29
6.4.9.4 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.10.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor .......................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11 Original Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 6-30
6.4.11.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ...................................................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ....................................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit .................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.4 Removing the Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-31
6.4.12 Reader Heater (option) ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.4.12.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.12.4 Removing the Reader Heater (option; 100/230V model only) ........................................................ 6-33
Chapter 7 Image Processing System

7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Analog Image Processing .................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 CCD Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Digital Image Processing ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Chapter 8 Laser Exposure

8.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Contents
8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser .................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.2 BD Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ..................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.2.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.2 PWM Control ...................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ............................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement ................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.3.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction ....................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................. 8-13
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction ........................................................... 8-14
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction ........................................... 8-16
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................... 8-17
8.4.1 Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................... 8-20
Chapter 9 Image Formation

9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Charging Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Image Formation Process .................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer) ........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.1 At Power-On (1) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 At Power-On (2) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed) ................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed) ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ............................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page ............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High-Voltage System ............................ 9-11
9.4 Image Stabilization Control ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control ............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation) ........................................................................................................ 9-18
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction) .............................................................. 9-19
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction) ............................................................... 9-20
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control ............................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24
Contents
9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ........................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................ 9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias ....................................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush ......................................................................................................................................... 9-29
9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush .................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-30
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................ 9-34
9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6 Toner Container ............................................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container ................................................................................................................. 9-37
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive ..................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner .................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner ............................................................................................................... 9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit ........................................................................................ 9-40
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias .................................................................................................................... 9-42
9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................ 9-42
9.7.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ....................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller ................................................................................................................. 9-45
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner ..................................................................................................................... 9-45
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 9-46
9.7.4.1 Separation .......................................................................................................................................... 9-46
9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover .......................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ..................................................................................................... 9-49
9.8.1.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ............................................................................................ 9-50
9.8.1.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ......................................................................................... 9-50
9.8.1.10 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................... 9-50
9.8.1.11 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ............................................................................................. 9-51
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .................................................................................... 9-51
9.8.1.13 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .................................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ............................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ..................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.16 Removing the Drum ITB Motor ...................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 9-53
Contents

9.8.2.9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ........................................................................................ 9-56
9.8.2.12 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ............................................................................................ 9-57
9.8.2.13 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................... 9-57
9.8.2.14 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting Base ............................................................................ 9-58
9.8.2.15 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ...................................................................................................... 9-58
9.8.3 Drive Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 9-59
9.8.3.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .......................................................................... 9-59
9.8.3.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ......................................................................................... 9-59
9.8.3.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt ......................................................................................... 9-60
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive Roller ............................................................................................................... 9-62
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk) ............................................................................................................................. 9-63
9.8.4.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Bk) .............................................................................................. 9-65
9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ...................................................................................................................... 9-65
9.8.5.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ....................................................................................... 9-67
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................. 9-68
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ......................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit ............................................................................................ 9-68
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................ 9-69
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container .............................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................. 9-70
9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ........................................................................................................................ 9-70
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................................................ 9-73
9.8.10.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ....................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt ....................................................................................... 9-74
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................... 9-76
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External Roller ........................................................................................................ 9-77
9.8.11.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller ......................................................................... 9-77
Contents
9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ......................................................................................................... 9-78

9.8.12.4 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .......................................................................... 9-81
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit .................................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................. 9-82
9.8.13.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ..................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.4 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................. 9-82
9.8.13.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ............................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ........................................................................................ 9-83
9.8.13.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ................................................................................................... 9-83
9.8.13.8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting .......................................................................................... 9-84
9.8.13.9 Removing the Toner Container Drive Unit ..................................................................................... 9-84
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB ................................................................................................................... 9-85
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front Cover .............................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ............................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover .................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ................................................................................................. 9-86
9.8.14.6 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.15.10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate ...................................................... 9-89
9.8.15.11 Removing the Feedscrew Rotation Sensor .................................................................................... 9-90
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor ............................................................................................................................. 9-90
9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner Container Motor ........................................................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................................................. 9-94
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.17.3 Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................... 9-96
Contents
9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit .................................................................................................. 9-96

9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................ 9-97
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................. 9-99
9.8.20 SALT Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................................................................................... 9-101
9.8.20.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................. 9-101
9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 9-101
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT Sensor .......................................................................................................... 9-103
Chapter 10 Pickup/Feeding System

10.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers .......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths .................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.7 Route of Dive ......................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ........................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key ................................................ 10-8
10.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Delay Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ......................................................................... 10-9
10.3.2 Stationary Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams .............................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On ........................................................................................................ 10-11
10.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.6.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ............................................................................................ 10-21
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper ....................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.7 Registration Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.7.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.8.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation ............................................................................... 10-27
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation .............................................................................. 10-29
10.9 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
Contents
10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32

10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................ 10-33
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................. 10-34
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery ...................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer ......................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover .................................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .................................................................................. 10-36
10.10.1.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................... 10-37
10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit ............................................................................................................... 10-37
10.10.2.2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ................................................................................ 10-37
10.10.3 Pickup Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.4 Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.4.2 Removing the Feeding Roller ...................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.5 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................. 10-38
10.10.5.2 Removing the Separation Roller .................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover ................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ......................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.4 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ........................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover .................................................................................... 10-39
10.10.6.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................... 10-40
10.10.6.8 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 10-40
10.10.6.9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ......................................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.10 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .............................................................................................. 10-41
10.10.6.11 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ......................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.12 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-42
10.10.6.13 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor ....................................................................................... 10-42
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................ 10-43
10.10.7.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................... 10-44
10.10.7.7 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 10-44
10.10.7.8 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................ 10-44
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 10-45
Contents
10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-47

10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................ 10-48
10.10.9.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-48
10.10.9.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-48
10.10.9.5 Removing the Pickup Unit .......................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ...................................................................... 10-49
10.10.10 Slide Resistor .................................................................................................................................... 10-50
10.10.10.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit .............................................................................................. 10-50
10.10.10.2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit ...................................................................................... 10-50
10.10.10.3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover/Lower Cover .................................................. 10-51
10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide Resistor ..................................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid .................................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.1 Removing the Cassette .............................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.2 Removing the Front Right Cover .............................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11.4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover ................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.6 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit ..................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover .................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................. 10-54
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller ........................................................................................................................... 10-55
10.10.14.3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller ............................................................................................ 10-56
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-57
10.10.15.3 Removing the Motor Cover ....................................................................................................... 10-58
10.10.15.5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller ......................................................................... 10-59
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................ 10-60
10.10.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ......................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17.5 Removing the Manual Feed sensor ........................................................................................... 10-64
10.10.18 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) .................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.18.2 Removing the Transparency Sensor Mounting Plate ................................................................ 10-66
10.10.18.3 Removing the Transparency Sensor (front/rear) ....................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................... 10-66
Contents
10.10.19.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................... 10-66

10.10.19.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................ 10-69
10.10.20 Registration Motor ............................................................................................................................ 10-69
10.10.20.4 Removing the Registration Motor ............................................................................................. 10-70
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor ...................................................................................................................... 10-71
10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-Registration Motor ....................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................. 10-72
10.10.22.3 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.4 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Assembly Back Sheet ................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.5 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate ..................................................... 10-73
10.10.22.6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor ........................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23 Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23.3 Removing the Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller ........................................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.1 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-77
10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.7 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate .............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller ....................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.10.26.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ........................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray .......................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) ...................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ..................................................................... 10-80
10.10.27.5 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting Plate .................................. 10-83
10.10.27.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................ 10-84
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................. 10-84
10.10.28.6 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor .............................................. 10-85
Contents
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86

10.10.29.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ......................................................................................... 10-86
10.10.29.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................... 10-87
10.10.29.5 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting Plate ................................. 10-89
10.10.29.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch .......................................... 10-90
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .............................................................................................. 10-90
10.10.30.2 Removing the Disconnecting the Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) ................................. 10-91
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/feeder unit) ............................................................................................. 10-91
10.10.31.3 Removing the Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) .............................................................. 10-92
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1 ................................................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.32.3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 .................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor ........................................................................................................................... 10-94
10.10.33.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor ............................................................................................ 10-95
10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor .............................................................................................................. 10-96
10.10.34.4 Removing the Duplex Registration Sensor ............................................................................... 10-97
10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-97
10.10.35.4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate .................................................... 10-98
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.1 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................. 10-99
10.10.36.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ...................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.3 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ........................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.4 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.6 Removing the Front Cover ...................................................................................................... 10-100
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.8 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .............................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.9 Removing the Pickup Unit ...................................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.11 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.12 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.13 Removing the Controller Box Cover ..................................................................................... 10-102
10.10.36.14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ............................................................................. 10-102
10.10.36.15 Opening the Main Controller Box ......................................................................................... 10-103
10.10.36.16 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ................................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.17 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.18 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ................................................................................... 10-104
10.10.36.19 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .......................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.20 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ..................................................................... 10-105
Contents
10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105

10.10.36.22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor .................................................................................... 10-105
10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch ............................................................................................................. 10-106
10.10.37.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................... 10-106
10.10.37.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit ........................................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector ...................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.4 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ............................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.5 Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch .............................................................................. 10-107
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch ..................................................................................................................... 10-108
10.10.38.4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................... 10-109
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit ............................................................................................................. 10-110
10.10.39.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ........................................................................................ 10-111
10.10.39.3 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-111
10.10.39.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-111
10.10.39.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) ................................................................... 10-112
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 ......................................................................................................... 10-115
10.10.40.5 Removing the Delivery Sensor Mounting Plate ...................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.6 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor Flag .................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 .......................................................................... 10-120
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller ................................................................................................................. 10-120
10.10.41.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover ................................................................................. 10-121
10.10.41.3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ...................................................................................... 10-121
10.10.41.4 Removing the Face-Up Delivery Roller .................................................................................. 10-122
10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ....................................................................................................... 10-123
10.10.42.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ......................................................................... 10-127
10.10.42.6 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ........................................................................ 10-128
10.10.43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 ....................................................................................................... 10-128
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................................................ 10-133
10.10.44.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................. 10-137
10.10.45 Delivery Vertical Path Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-137
Contents
10.10.45.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-138
10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ........................................................................... 10-141
10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................ 10-141
10.10.46.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-141
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor .................................................................................................... 10-146
10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..................................................................... 10-149
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................ 10-154
10.10.49.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ......................................... 10-158
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ............................................................................................... 10-158
10.10.50.5 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ........................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.6 Removing the Cleaner Fan ...................................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.7 Removing the Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ................................................................ 10-162
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 ............................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ........................................................ 10-167
Chapter 11 Fixing System

11.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 Major Components ................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 Construction of the Control System ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180 sec) ................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for 180 sec or more) ............................... 11-6
Contents
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7

11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ............................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper ................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing ......................................................... 11-8
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller .................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.2 At Power-On .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.3.2.3 In Standby ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper ............................................................................................. 11-13
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode ......................................................................................................... 11-13
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ............................................................................................................. 11-14
11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper ...................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to activation of thermal switch) ................ 11-15
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors ........................................................................................... 11-16
11.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.1 Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 11-17
11.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-17
11.5.1.2 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................. 11-17
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame .............................................................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.2.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide ............................................................................................ 11-18
11.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.3 Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ......................................................... 11-23
11.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller .......................................................................................................... 11-24
11.5.4 Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ...................................................................... 11-28
11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ....................................................................................................... 11-29
11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ........................................................................................................................ 11-30
11.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ......................................................................................... 11-32
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor .......................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Sub thermistor ............................................................................................. 11-36
Contents
11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37

11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .......................................................................................... 11-40
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................................. 11-42
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................ 11-44
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ............................................................................................................... 11-45
11.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ..................................................................... 11-48
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ............................................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ........................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................ 11-50
11.5.10.3 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ........................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide ......................................................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.11.2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide .......................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide ........................................................................................................................ 11-52
11.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................. 11-53
11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ................................................................... 11-54
11.5.12.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................... 11-55
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide ............................................................................................. 11-55
11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 11-57
11.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................... 11-60
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 11-61
11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................ 11-63
11.5.15 Fixing Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 11-64
11.5.15.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................ 11-64
11.5.15.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ................................................................................... 11-65
11.5.15.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ............................................................................................... 11-65
11.5.15.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................. 11-66
11.5.15.8 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ............................................................................................... 11-66
Contents
11.5.15.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ......................................................................................... 11-67

11.5.15.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................. 11-67
11.5.15.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ............................................................................................... 11-68
11.5.15.12 Removing the Fixing Motor ...................................................................................................... 11-69
Chapter 12 Externals and Controls

12.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ...................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Counters ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print ...................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) ........................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) ................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.4 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories ........................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit .................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy .................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.3 Protection Function ............................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.4 Backup Battery ...................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ........................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ........................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ............................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ...................................................................................... 12-15
12.5.1.6 Opening the Main Controller Box ................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.1.7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..................................................................................... 12-16
12.5.1.8 Removing the High-Voltage Unit .................................................................................................. 12-17
12.5.1.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ........................................................................................... 12-17
12.5.1.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................... 12-17
12.5.1.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ................................................................................................. 12-18
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.5.2.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ........................................................................................ 12-20
Contents
12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................... 12-21

12.5.2.9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................. 12-21
12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................................................ 12-22
12.5.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .................................................................................................. 12-22
12.5.3.3 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................. 12-22
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-23
12.5.4.5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................. 12-23
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.5.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit .......................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.6 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 12-25
12.5.6.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover (small) ....................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.6.2 Removing the Inside Cover ........................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit ....................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ....................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.7.5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit ........................................................................................ 12-26
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8.4 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ..................................................................................... 12-27
12.5.8.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 12-27
12.5.8.6 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB .......................................................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter Memory PCB ........................................................................................... 12-30
12.5.10 Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.4 Removing the Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting ................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.5 Removing the Leakage Breaker .................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................. 12-32
Contents

12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................................................................................ 12-32
12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB .............................................................................................. 12-33
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 12-33
12.5.13.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ...................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay PCB 1 ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover (small) ..................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.2 Removing the Inside Cover ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.3 Removing the Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 12-35
12.5.14.4 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch PCB .......................................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ...................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.15.5 Removing the Control Panel Key PCB ........................................................................................ 12-37
12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................. 12-37
12.5.16.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ...................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.16.5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB .................................................................................. 12-38
12.5.17 Environment Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.2 Removing the Upper Right Cover ............................................................................................... 12-39
12.5.17.3 Removing the Environment Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor .............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................ 12-42
12.5.18.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................... 12-42
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................................................ 12-42
12.5.19.1 Removing the Tonner Container release Lever ........................................................................... 12-42
12.5.19.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ................................................................................................ 12-42
12.5.19.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 12-44
Contents
12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................. 12-44

12.5.20.10 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .............................................................................. 12-47
12.5.20.11 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ............................................................................................. 12-47
12.5.20.13 Removing the Main Power Supply Switch ............................................................................... 12-48
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ............................................................................. 12-48
12.5.21.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ............................................... 12-50
12.5.21.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Close Switch ................................................................ 12-50
12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch ....................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Close Switch .......................................................................... 12-52
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.23.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan .......................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan ................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24.13 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................. 12-57
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................................................. 12-58
Contents

12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan ................................................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.26.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting .................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.5 Removing the Power Supply Cooing Fan .................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan .......................................................................................................................... 12-61
12.5.27.3 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-61
12.5.27.6 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan ........................................................................................... 12-62
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan .............................................................................................................. 12-62
12.5.28.7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................... 12-64
12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt .......................................................................................................................... 12-65
12.5.29.13 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ............................................................................... 12-69
12.5.29.14 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ................................................................................................ 12-70
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................... 12-70
Chapter 13 MEAP
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 13-4
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection

14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 ..................................................................................................... 14-1
Contents
14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1

14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................... 14-4
14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-4
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-6
Chapter 15 Standards and Adjustments

15.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Image Position .................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Cassette) ........................................................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) ........................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Side Paper Deck) .............................................................................. 15-3
15.1.6 Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 15-4
15.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ...................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass .................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit ............................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-6
15.4 Image Formation System ............................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.1 After Replacing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit .............................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Fixing System ................................................................................................................................................ 15-8
15.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ...................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Electrical Components .................................................................................................................................. 15-9
15.6.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .............................................................................. 15-10
15.6.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................. 15-10
15.6.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6.6 When Replacing the HDD .................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.7 When Replacing the Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................. 15-11
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System ............................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette ...................................... 15-12
15.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ........................................... 15-13
Chapter 16 Correcting Faulty Images

16.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Site Environment .................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Checking the Paper ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ........................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts .............................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks ............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.7 Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Contents
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) ............................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) ......................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ....................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) .................................................................................................. 16-7
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) .................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 16-9
16.3.1 Symptoms ................................................................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) ........................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) .................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.2 Image Faults .......................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.1 Blank Image ................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.2 Solid Image .................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density .......................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image .................................................................................................................................. 16-24
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density .............................................................................................................................. 16-35
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus ................................................................................................................................... 16-40
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked ................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked ......................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory ............................................................................................................................. 16-60
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing ................................................................................................................................ 16-62
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction .......................................................................................................... 16-64
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking .................................................................................................................... 16-65
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding ....................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed .......................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed ...................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle .......................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl ..................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.5 Wrap ............................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.1 No Power ....................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related .................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ...................................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ........................................................................................................ 16-72
16.3.4.5 Noise .............................................................................................................................................. 16-77
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message .................................................................................................................. 16-78
16.3.4.7 Other Defect ................................................................................................................................... 16-83
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment ............................................................................................................ 16-88
16.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.1 No Output ...................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure ......................................................................................................................... 16-91
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result .................................................................................................... 16-92
16.3.6 Network ............................................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem .................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-108
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ................................................................................................................. 16-108
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem ....................................................................................................................... 16-115
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ............................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) .................................................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the cassette ....................... 16-116
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................. 16-117
Contents
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag ............ 16-117
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ........................................................................................................................ 16-117
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 .............................................................................................................. 16-118
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ........................................................................................................................ 16-118
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........................................... 16-118
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ........................................................................................................................... 16-119
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure ................................................................................................................. 16-119
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 ............................................................................................................ 16-120
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ...................................................................................................................... 16-120
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service
mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. ............................................................ 16-120
16.3.10 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of
power-on is inadequate. ........................................................................................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. ........................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. .................... 16-122
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. ... 16-123
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. ............................... 16-123
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after
implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor ............. 16-124
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB ................................................ 16-124
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning ............................................ 16-125
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions ...................................................................... 16-125
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. .......................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating ....................................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a drum ITB motor failure ................................................................................................................. 16-126
16.3.10.13 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a microswitch PCB failure ............................................................................................................... 16-127
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally ...................................................................................................................... 16-128
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse PCB is faulty .............. 16-128
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit ..................... 16-129
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. ........................ 16-129
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code ......................................................................... 16-131
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service case removed ..... 16-132
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season ................................ 16-132
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation, toner
container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) .................................................... 16-132
16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..................................................................... 16-133
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the
SALT sensor shutter .............................................................................................................................. 16-134
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-135
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-135
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-137
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after replacement
of Cyan drum unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-137
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. ............................ 16-137
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty. ........................... 16-137
Contents
16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-138

16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. .. 16-139
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-139
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. ...................... 16-140
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red ............................ 16-140
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-141
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD
unit into R-CON J205 causes. ............................................................................................................... 16-141
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning power ON ................... 16-142
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen cover ........................ 16-142
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader Controller PCB .................. 16-142
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor contact
of J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 ........................................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor controller
and the DC controller is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-143
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. ................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. .................... 16-144
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. ................................................................... 16-144
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted .............................................................. 16-144
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. ............................................................... 16-145
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on ECO-ID PCB ............. 16-145
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. .................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code ...................................................................................................................... 16-146
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. ............................................... 16-146
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) ............... 16-146
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) ............... 16-147
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. ......................................... 16-147
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. .............................................. 16-148
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. ................................................. 16-148
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) ......................................... 16-149
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) ....................................... 16-149
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction) ................. 16-150
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) ...................................... 16-150
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) .............................. 16-151
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) ......................................... 16-151
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-152
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler ........................................... 16-152
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. ......................................... 16-153
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. .................................................... 16-153
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. .............................. 16-154
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). .... 16-154
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. .......................... 16-155
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). ......................................... 16-155
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. .......................... 16-156
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. ............................... 16-156
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. ................................................... 16-157
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. ................................................ 16-157
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. ................................... 16-158
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. ................................. 16-158
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. ......... 16-159
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. ........................................... 16-160
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. ................................................ 16-160
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K] to
improve faint image ............................................................................................................................... 16-161
Contents
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-163
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y ........................................................................................ 16-165
connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................ 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ........................................ 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602
Error Code is displayed ......................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ........................... 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. .................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. .......................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the
ADF and the reader unit. ...................................................................................................................... 16-171
finisher and the cassette pedestal. .......................................................................................................... 16-171
cassette pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a
scanning fault in card reader D1 ............................................................................................................ 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared .......... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. .......................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power
supply unit PCB J158 output failure) ................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please
wait" changes to error code indication .................................................................................................. 16-176
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
Contents
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-180

16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-181
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7)
which is fixed on the controller box ..................................................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code .................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. ................................................................ 16-182
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-183
16.3.11 FAX # Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.11.1 Åî037 ......................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12 FAX ## Code .................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-183
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-184
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code .............................................................................................................. 16-184
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 16-185
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.2 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 16-186
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.3 Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-188
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-190
16.4.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................ 16-194
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.7 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................... 16-195
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-195
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-196
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal ...................................................................................................................................... 16-198
16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 ......................................................................................................................... 16-198
16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ............................ 16-199
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and
the Check Pins by PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-199
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................... 16-200
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................... 16-201
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................ 16-201
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................ 16-202
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-202
Chapter 17 Self Diagnosis

17.1 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.1 Error Code Details Table ........................................................................................................................ 17-1
Contents
Chapter 18 Service Mode

18.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ........................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Exiting service modes ............................................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 Service mode backup .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.1.5 Initial screen ........................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen ............................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.7 Sub-item screen ...................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1 COPIER .................................................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1.1 VERSION ........................................................................................................................................ 18-6
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS ......................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.1.3 ANALOG ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2.1.4 JAM ............................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.2.1.5 ERR ............................................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2.1.6 DENS ............................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18.2.1.7 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-21
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-21
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-22
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT ..................................................................................................................................... 18-25
18.2.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2 ................................................................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2 .................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2 ........................................................................................... 18-28
18.2.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-28
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ............................................................................................................................... 18-32
18.3.1 I/O (display mode) ................................................................................................................................ 18-32
18.3.2 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.3.3 R-CON .................................................................................................................................................. 18-42
18.3.4 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-44
18.3.5 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-46
18.3.6 MN-CON .............................................................................................................................................. 18-63
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY ......................................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-67
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG ...................................................................................................................................... 18-70
18.4.1.4 BLANK ......................................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.4.1.5 PASCAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-72
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ .................................................................................................................................... 18-72
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ ....................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.4.1.8 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-73
18.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.2.1 DOCST .......................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2 .................................................................................................. 18-76
18.4.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-76
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) ................................................................................................. 18-82
18.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-82
18.5.1.1 INSTALL ...................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.3 LASER .......................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.5.1.4 CST ................................................................................................................................................ 18-83
Contents
18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84

18.5.1.6 FIXING .......................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.7 PANEL ........................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.9 CLEAR .......................................................................................................................................... 18-86
18.5.1.10 MISC-R ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.11 MISC-P ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-88
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT ...................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2 .............................................................................. 18-88
18.5.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) ............................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1.1 BODY ............................................................................................................................................ 18-90
18.6.1.2 USER ............................................................................................................................................. 18-91
18.6.1.3 ACC ............................................................................................................................................... 18-91
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-92
18.6.2 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-94
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.3 BOARD ................................................................................................................................................. 18-94
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2 ................................................................ 18-95
18.6.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-95
18.6.4.2 BOARD ....................................................................................................................................... 18-112
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ............................................................................................................................ 18-113
18.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-113
18.7.1.1 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 18-113
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ...................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.2 TOTAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-116
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.4 FEEDER ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.5 JAM ............................................................................................................................................. 18-119
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-119
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-120
Chapter 19 Upgrading
19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ......................................................................... 19-5
19.2 Making Preparations ...................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.1 Registering the Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 Making Connections ............................................................................................................................. 19-11
19.3 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions .............................................................................................................. 19-18
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1 Downloading the System Software ....................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-27
Contents
19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................ 19-28

19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ..................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ........................................................................................................ 19-42
19.4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software .......................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software ..................................................................................................... 19-58
19.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-58
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 19-66
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 19-72
Chapter 20 Service Tools

20.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1
20.2 Solvents and Oils ........................................................................................................................................... 20-2
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.4 Report Generation ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings ............................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4 User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System ................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) ........................................... 1-21
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.6 Product Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.7.2 Print Size ........................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.7.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-28
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options 0000-4246
A system may be configured as follows:
[8]
[1]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[14]
[2] [4] [17]
[10]
[11]
[15]
[16]
*[5]
[12]
[15]
[16] [13]
[3]
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1] Finisher-M1 [10] Slide Paper Deck-P1
[2] Saddle Finisher-N2 [11] Card Reader-D1
[3] Finisher-N1 [12] Plain Pedestal-C1
[4] Copy Tray-H1 [13] 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1
[5] Delivery Tray (standard) [14] Anti-Condensation Heater (100/230V)
[6] NE Controller-A1 [15] Cassette Heater Kit-A1
[7] DADF-K1 [16] Cassette Heater Unit-24
[8] Copyboard Cover [17] Cassette Heater Unit-25
[9] Original Tray
*The presence of any of [1] through [3] prevents installation of [4] and [5].
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories 0006-8287
The machine may be configured as follows:
[12]
[9] [8A]
[8B]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5] [7A]
[7B]
[6]
[11]
F-1-2
[1] Super G3 Fax Board-M2

[2] Ethernet Board (standard)
[3] UFR Board or Open Interface Board
[4] USB Interface Board or TokeRing Board
[5] Image Conversion Board-A2
[6] PS Print Server Unit-C1
[7A] PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2 (boot ROM for LIPS model: 100V model only)
[7B] PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS Kanji) A2 (Boot Rom for LIPS/PS Kanji model: 100V machine only)
[8A] Color iR256 MB Expansion RAM (if 100V, optional)
[8B] Color iR512MB Expansion RAM (if 100V, optional)
[9] SEND Expansion Kit-B2/B2U (dongle for functional expansion)
[10] iR Security Kit-A2P/A2U
[11] USB Application Interface Board-C1
[12] Workplase Gateway
1-2
Chapter 1
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories 0006-8352
T-1-2
GDI-UFR printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
LIPS printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2
LIPS/PS kanji printing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS kanji)-A2
Transmitting -> - SEND Expansion Kit-B2U/B2P
- Image Conversion Board-A2
Faxing -> - Super G3 FAx Board-M2
Local printing -> - USB Interface Board-A3
- UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
LIPS printing + -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2

transmitting
- iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB

Expansion RAM
LISP printing + faxing -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
- Super G3 Fax Board-M2
- iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB

Expansion RAM
LIPS/PS kanji printing + -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2

transmitting
- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS Kanji)-A2
- iR512MB Expansion RAM
LISP/PS kanji printing + -> - UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2

faxing
- PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS/PS kanji)-A2
- Super G3 Fax Board-M2
- iR512MB Expansion RAM
MEAP (authentication -> iR256MB Expansion RAM

function only)
MEAP (various application -> iR512MB Expansion RAM

operation)
1-3
Chapter 1
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories 0006-8332
The following gives an outline of individual accessories; for details, see the descriptions found in subsequent
chapters:
1) UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
Adds GDI-UFR printing functions and scanning functions associated with ScanGear.
2) PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS)-A2

Adds LIPS printing functions. The Kt does not come with a PDL board, requiring a UFR board.
3) Color iR256MB Expansion RAM

Required when transmitting/faxing functions are added.
4) Color iR512MB Expansion RAM

Required when MEAP functions are added.
5) SEND Expansion Kit-B2P/B2U

Adds transmitting functions. It requires setup work using a PC. Select B2P (for use of a PC parallel port) or B2U (for
use of a PC USB port).
6) Image Conversion Board-A2

Addition of transmitting/faxing functions requires the Image Conversion Board-A2.
7) USB Interface Board-A3

Adds printing functions through local connection of PC (USB). Requires a UFR board.
8) Super G3 Fax Board-M2

Adds G3 fax functions.
9) PDL Expansion (LISP/PS kanji)-A2

Adds LIPS printing/PS kanji printing functions. This board does not come with a PDL board, requiring a UFR board.
10) USB Application Interface Board-C1

Connects a USB device for MEAP applications. It is an interface board.
11) Workplase Gateway

Adds security functions for image data and server functions.
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View 0000-4257
F-1-3
T-1-3
[1] Rear left cover [10] Delivery cover (2)
[2] Copyboard cover [11] Lower left cover
[3] Reader front cover [12] Rear left cover (lower)
[4] Upper left cover (small) [13] Delivery cover (1)
[5] Center delivery tray [14] Rear left cover (upper)
[6] Control panel [15] Upper left cover
[7] Front cover [16] Upper cover
[8] Cassette 1 [17] Inside upper cover
[9] Cassette 2
1-5
Chapter 1
F-1-4
T-1-4
[1] Reader right cover [8] Right cover
[2] Copyboard glass [9] Front right cover
[3] Reader rear cover [10] Manual feed tray
[4] Upper right cover (small) [11] Manual feed unit cover
[5] Upper rear cover [12] Model right cover
[6] Lower rear cover [13] Upper right cover
[7] Rear right cover
1-6
Chapter 1
1.2.1.2 Cross Section 0000-4258
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
[46]
[7]
[45]
[8]
[44]
[43]
[42]
[41]
[40] [9]
[39] [10]
[38]
[11]
[37]
[12]
[13]
[36] [14]
[15]
[16]
[35] [17]
[18]
[34]
[19]
[33]
[20]
[32] [31] [30] [29] [28][27][26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21]
F-1-5
T-1-5
[1] No. 3 mirror [24] Registration lower roller
[2] No. 2 mirror [25] Duplex roller 3
[3] No. 1 mirror [26] Secondary transfer external roller
[4] Scanning lamp [27] Secondary transfer internal roller
[5] CCD unit [28] Duplex roller 2
[6] Toner container [29] Intermediate transfer belt tension roller
[7] Laser unit [30] Cassette 2
[8] Primary transfer roller [31] Transfer cleaning unit
[9] Registration detention unit [32] Fixing lower roller (pressure roller)
[10] Manual feed pickup tray unit [33] Fixing upper roller (fixing roller)
1-7
Chapter 1
[11] Manual feed roller [34] Duplex roller 1
[12] Pre-registration roller [35] Internal delivery roller
[13] Manual feed separation roller [36] Face-up delivery roller
[14] Re-pick up roller [37] Delivery vertical path roll
[15] Pickup vertical path roller [38] Delivery vertical path roller 2
[16] Feed roller [39] Photopositive drum
[17] Pickup roller [40] Developing cylinder
[18] Separation roller [41] Drum unit
[19] Pickup assembly 1 [42] Charging roller
[20] Pickup assembly 2 [43] Delivery vertical path roller 1
[21] Cassette 1 [44] Delivery path roll
[22] Duplex roller 4 [45] Intermediate transfer belt
[23] Registration upper roller [46] Face-down delivery roller 1
1.2.2 Using the Machine
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power 0000-4259
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, the
machine is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than when it is in power save
mode, low power mode, or sleep mode).
F-1-6
1-8
Chapter 1
T-1-6
[1] Control panel power switch [3] Main power switch
[2] Main power lamp
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated.
(The machine is accessing its HDD.) Otherwise, the HDD can go out of order (E602).
Starting up. Please wait.
F-1-7
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0000-4260
Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch.
- When the Printer Is in Operation/Fax Data Is Being Sent/Received

Be sure that the Execution/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF before touching the main power switch.
(Otherwise, the data being processed can be lost.)
1-9
Chapter 1
7 8 9
* 0 # ID
Execution/Memory Error
F-1-8
- When Downloading Is Under Way

Never turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch.
(If you turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way, the machine may fail to operate.)
ON
/O
FF
F-1-9
1-10
Chapter 1
1.2.2.3 Control Panel 0000-4261
F-1-10
T-1-7
[1] Image contrast adjusting dial [10] User mode key
[2] Counter check key [11] Numeric keypad
[3] Power Save Key [12] Execute/Memory lamp
[4] Control panel power switch [13] Error lamp
[5] Touch pen holder [14] ID key
[6] Clip holder [15] Clear key
[7] Touch panel [16] Main power lamp
[8] Reset key [17] Start key
[9] Help key [18] Stop key
1-11
Chapter 1
1.2.3 User Mode Items
1.2.3.1 Common Settings 0006-0742
*Factory default.
T-1-8
Mode Description
initial functions *copy, fax, box, SEND
use it to switch the System Status screen to

the Initial screen.
(*ON/OFF)
use it to give priority to [device] of the

System Status screen for display.
(*ON/OFF)
function after auto clear *return, do not return
enable/disable buzzer input correct: *ON/OFF
input incorrect: ON/*OFF
supply alert: ON/*OFF
alert: *ON/OFF
job end: *ON/OFF
residual original: ON/*OFF
priority on text/photo upon selection of auto text, *photo

color
inch input enable inch input (ON/*OFF; ON if 120 V)
paper type registration upon cassette auto copier, printer, box, fax, other
selection
registration paper type yes
change power save mode *-10%/- 5%/- 0%, immediate recovery
power consumption in sleep state *little, much
select special tray use finisher tray for: copier, box, printer,
fax, other
priority on print copy: *1, 2, 3; printer: 1, *2, 3; fax/box/

other: 1, 2, *3
register standard mode for manually fed enable/disable standard mode for manually
paper fed
paper (ON/*OFF)
1-12
Chapter 1
Mode Description
standard mode for local print paper select (*auto), print count (*1), sorter
(*sort/group/stable), double-sided print
(*off/on),
file delete after print (*off/on), print merge

(*off/on)
switch language of display ON/*OFF
reverse screen color ON/*OFF
between-jobs shift *ON/OFF
JPEG compression rate at remote scan high, *average, low
gamma value at remote scan g1.0/g1.4/*g1.8/g2.2
initialize common settings *yes, no
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings 0005-9694
* factory settings.
T-1-9
Mode Description
set date/time if fax is installed (10-digit number)
auto sleep time 10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,
2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
change auto clear time 0: none; 1 to 9 min (*2 min)
set weekly timer 00:00 to 23:59 (1-min increments)
shift to low-power consumption 10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,
mode 2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning 0005-9696
*factory settings.
T-1-10
Mode Description
zoom fine adjust -1.0 to+1.0%: 0.1% intervals,*H270%
center binding staple edging yes
center binding position change (A3, 11x17)/B4/(A4R, LTRR)
1-13
Chapter 1
Mode Description
auto gradation correction plain paper (full correction/quick

correction), heavy paper (full correction/
quick correction)
density correction copy/box, black-and-white transmission,

color transmission; density 5 settings each
cleaning inside machine yes
cleaning of feeder yes
1.2.3.4 Report Generation 0000-4265
*factory settings.
T-1-11
Mode Description
setup>transmission transmission results report

(*only if error, ON, OFF)
communication control report>auto print at

100 communications (*ON/OFF), print at
specified time (*ON/OFF)
setup>fax fax transmission results report (*only if

error, ON, OFF)
fax communication control report>auto print

at 40 communications (*ON/OFF), print at
specified time (*ON/OFF)
fax reception results report

(only if error, ON, *OFF)
fax box reception report

(*ON, OFF)
list print>transmission destinations list
user data list
list print>fax user data list
list print>network user data list
1-14
Chapter 1
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0000-4266
*factory settings.
T-1-12
Mode Description
set system administrator info yes
group ID control register ID, control count; ON/OFF
set communication control fax settings, system box settings
enable/disable remote UI *ON/OFF
limit destinations list ID in destinations table,

access No. in destinations table
set device info device name, site of installation
set network TCP/IP setup (IP address/DNS/PING

command/SINS/LPD/RAW/IPP print (*off);
HTTP (*on); IP address settings range
NetWare setup
AppleTalk setup
SMB settings
SNMB settings
special port settings (*ON/OFF)
spool function (ON/*OFF)
start-up time settings

(0 to 300 sec; *60 sec)
e-mail/i-fax
set transfer yes
auto online/offline shift auto online shift (ON/*OFF)
auto offline shift (ON/*OFF)
register to LDAP server yes
switch limits to functions with control *partial limits, entire limits
screen setup single/standard
1-15
Chapter 1
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings 0000-4267
*factory settings.
T-1-13
Mode Description
set preference key 1/2 w/ function, *no settings
auto sort *ON/OFF
priority on image orientation ON/*OFF
indicate copy wait time ON/*OFF
enable auto vertical/horizontal *ON/OFF

rotation
change standard mode register/initialize
initialize copier ecifications settings Yes, No
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings 0000-4268
* factory settings.
T-1-14
Mode Description
common setup>transmission register sending party name (100 max.)

function setup
register user abbreviation
for FTP transmission, permit non-ASCII code (on/*off)
clear error file (*ON/OFF)
JPEG compression rate (high/*standard/low)
process transfer error file

(print always, store/print, *OFF)
number of retries (0 to 5; *3)
transmission function standard mode change>read mode,

file contraction
routine button registration>registration, name
PDF (high compression) image level>text, photo mode;

photo mode
set initial display of transmission screen (default task

button, one-touch button, *new destination)
record source of transmission

(*attach, do not attach)
1-16
Chapter 1
Mode Description
sound of transmission (*add/do not add)>location of

indication (inside of image/outside of image), telephone
number mark (*fax/tel), communication mode (G3-G4/
*G3 only)
initialize transmission function settings
common setup>reproduction record double-sided (ON/*OFF)

function setup
cassette selection>switch A, B, C, D
image resolution>image resolution (*on/off), reduction

mode (*auto/fixed), fixing mode reduction rate (97%/95%/
90%/75%), reduction direction (vertical and horizontal/
*vertical)
record 2-on-1 (ON/*OFF)
record reception info (attach, *do not attach)
fax setup>basic registration user telephone number registration>telephone number
line type selection (120, 230V: *push tone/dial, 10PPS;

100V: *20PPS/10PPS/push tone)
volume control>alarm (0-8; *4), communication volume

(0-8; *4)
fax setup>transmission function ECM transmission (*ON/OFF)

setup
pause length set (*1-15 sec; *4-11 sec; 3-6 sec)
auto redial (*on/off)>number of redials (100V: 1-15 (*2)/

230V: 1-10 (*2), redial interval (2-99 min; *2), redial at
transmission error (1 page and error page/all pages/off)
fax setup>reception function setup ECM reception (*ON/OFF)
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings 0000-4269
T-1-15
Mode Description
set up/register user box box selection (0-99), box name registration ,
ID No. (0 to 9999999), file auto deletion (0/
1/2/3/6/12 hr; 1/2/3/7/30 days; 3 days), reset
set standard mode for reading register, initialize
set/register fax box box selection (0-49), box name registration,

ID No. (0 to 999999), reset
1-17
Chapter 1
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings 0000-4270
Making settings if the machine is not equipped with any accessory.

* factory settings.
T-1-16
Mode Description
set specifications number of copies (1 to 2000: *1)
double-sided (double-sided, *single sided)
pickup>default paper size, default paper type, paper size

replacement (*yes/no)
print adjustment>super smooth (*yes/no), toner density (YMCK

density 8 settings), toner saving (yes/*no)
layout>bind position (longer side/shorter side), binding margin

(*0), vertical position (*0), horizontal position (*0)
secure print deletion time (1 hr/2/3/6/12/24)
time-out
(*time-out time (5 to 300 sec; 15)/no)
post-RIP printing (yes/*no)
sorter
(no/sort/rotation sort/rotation group)
transparency interleaf
(*disable, use blank paper, use print paper)
set reception function color mode

(common settings) (*auto switchover, full-color, monochrome)
gradation setup/gradation (*standard/smooth 1/smooth 2),

application to graphics (*yes)/application to image (*yes)
halftone selection>text (resolution/gradation/*error diffusion),

graphics (resolution/gradation/*error diffusion), image
(resolution/gradation/*error diffusion)
compression image output

(*output, error indication)
initialize printer settings
utility initialize printer
1-18
Chapter 1
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings 0000-4271
T-1-17
Mode Description
register destination yes
register name of destination yes
register one-touch button yes
1.2.4 User Maintenance
1.2.4.1 Cleaning 0000-4272
- Face of Copyboard, Back of Copyboard Cover

Instruct the user to clean the face of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month.
Cleaning Procedure
Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well-wrung), clean the face of the copyboard
glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover [2]; then, dry wipe the surfaces.
F-1-11
F-1-12
1-19
Chapter 1
1.2.4.2 Inspection 0000-4273
- Checking the Leakage Breaker

Instruct the user to check the leakage breaker periodically (once or twice a month), and keep a record of the work.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2] or the like.
3) Check to see that the breaker switch shits to the OFF side and the power goes OFF.
F-1-13
4) Turn off the main power switch.

5) Shift the breaker switch [1] to the ON side.
F-1-14
6) Turn on the main power switch.
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System 0000-4274
Laser Light in General

Laser light can prove to be very harmful to the human body, requiring full care.
About the Machine Laser System

The machinelaser optical system is sealed inside a protective housing and external covers, and the machine is
1-20
Chapter 1
constructed to prevent leakage of laser light outside it. As such, the light cannot escape the machine as long as the
machine is used for the operations for which it is designed.
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) 0000-4275
The Center for Devices and Radiation Heath (CDRH) of the United States put into effect regulations drawn up for
laser products. These regulations apply to laser products that are produced on August 1, 1976, and thereafter, and ban
the sale of laser products without certification indicated by a label obtained from the organization..
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly 0000-4276
Points to Note When Servicing the Area Around the Laser Optical System
- Do not put an object with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the path of the laser light.
- Do not wear a watch or ring during work. (They can reflect the laser light, causing damage to your eyes.)
The machinelaser light is red in color, and the covers that can reflect the light are identified with a label [1]. Pay
special attention whenever servicing an area behind these covers.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-1-15
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner 0000-4277
About the MachineToner

The machine toner is non-toxic, consisting of plastic and iron materials with a few amount of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It can explode.
1-21
Chapter 1
Toner Stains
1. If your skin or clothing has come into contact with toner, remove it with dry tissue, and then wash with water.
2. Do not use warm water; otherwise, the toner will become jell-like, permanently fusing with the fibers of the cloth
and resisting removal.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material, as they can easily react.
1.2.6 Product Specifications
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions 0005-9070
Copyboard Flat-bed
Body Desk-top
Photosensitive medium OPC drum 30.6 mm dia. (4 pc.)
Exposure method Laser exposure
Charging method Roller charging
Development method Bk Dry, 2-component Color Dry, 2-component
Cassette pickup method Separation retard
Multifeeder pickup method Simple retard
Transfer method Intermediate transfer belt
Transfer method (primary by charging roller

transfer)
Transfer method (secondary by charging roller

transfer)
Separation method Curvature separation (static eliminator)
Drum cleaning method None
Trasnsfer cleaning method Blade (equalizing operation used)
Fixing method Roller fixing
Delivery method Face-down, face-up
Warm-up time At power-on - 6 min or less (at 20 deg C room

temperature) Return from low-power mode - 30 sec
(Bk mode only)
Print area Maximum image guarantee area 301 x 452 mm

Maximum print area 305 x 452 mm
Printing resolution read resolution: 600 x 600 dpi write resolution: 9600
(equivalent) x 600 dpi
Toner level detection function Yes
Drum wear detection function Yes
1-22
Chapter 1
1.2.7 Function List
1.2.7.1 Print Speed 0006-3356
First Print Time
T-1-18
Unit: sec
Full-color Monochrome
A4, plain (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) 12.8 (simplex model) 9.5 (simplex model)
13.1 (duplex model) 9.8 (duplex model)
Printing Speed
- Plain Paper Mode (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
T-1-19
unit: prints/min
Paper size Cassette, Manual Side paper Face-down, Face-up,

single- feeder, deck, single- double-sided double-
sided single-sided sided sided
B5 32 19 32 13.5 10.25
A5R 16 16 - 7.5 7
A4 32 19 32 13.5 10.25
STMT-R 16 16 - 8 8
LTR 32 19 - 13.5 10.25
B5R 16 16 - 7.5 7
LTR-R 16 16 - 7.5 7
A4R 16 16 - 7.5 7
LGL 16 14 - 6.5 5.5
B4 16 14 - 6.5 5.5
A3 16 13 - 6.5 5.5
279mm x 432mm 16 13 - 6.5 5.5

(11 x 17)
305mm x 457mm 15 13 - 6.25 5.5

(12 x 18)
A5 - 16 - - -
320mm x 450mm - 13 - - -
(12.6 x 17.7)
1-23
Chapter 1
- Thick Paper Mode (more than 105 g/m2)
T-1-20
unit: prints/min
Paper size Cassette, Manual feeder, Side paper deck, Face-down, Face-up,
single-sided single-sided single-sided double-sided double-sided
B5 16 9.5 16 6.75 5.13
A5R 16 9.5 - 6.75 5.13
A4 16 9.5 16 6.75 5.13
STMT-R 16 9.5 - 6.75 5.13
LTR 16 9.5 16 6.75 5.13
B5R 11 8 - 3.75 3.5
LTR-R 11 8 - 3.75 3.5
A4R 11 8 - 3.75 3.5
LGL 9.5 7 - 3.25 2.75
B4 9.5 7 - 3.25 2.75
A3 8 6.5 - 3.25 2.75
279mm x 432mm 8 6.5 - 3.25 2.75

(11 x 17)
305mm x 457mm 7.5 6.5 - 3.25 2.75

(12 x 18)
A5 - 9.5 - - -
Jpn postcard - 9.5 - - -
Tab paper - 9 - - -
320mm x 450mm - 9.5 - - -

(12.6 x 17.7)
- Color Transparency Film
T-1-21
unit: prints/min
Paper size Cassette, single-sided Manual feeder, single-sided
B5 - -
A4 6 6
LTR 6 6
LTR-R 6 6
A4R 6 6
1-24
Chapter 1
- Monochrome, transparency
T-1-22
unit: prints/min
Paper size Cassette, single-sided Manual feeder, single-sided
B5 - -
A4 7 7
LTR 7 7
LTR-R 7 7
A4R 7 7
1.2.7.2 Print Size 0006-3390
T-1-23
Manual Feed Side Paper Cassette Duplexing

Cassette
Tray Deck Pedestal Unit*2
<Paper Size>
A5R yes yes no yes yes
B5 yes yes yes yes yes
B5R yes yes no yes yes
A4 yes yes yes yes yes
A4R yes yes no yes yes
B4 yes yes no yes yes
A3 yes yes no yes yes
279x432[mm]
yes yes no yes yes
(11x17)
305x457[mm]
yes yes no yes yes
(12x18)
320x450[mm]
no yes no no no
(12.6x17.7)
LGL yes no no yes yes
LTR yes no no yes yes
LTR-R yes no yes yes yes
STMT-R yes no no yes yes
postcard no yes no no no
1-25
Chapter 1
T-1-24
Manual Side Paper Cassette Duplexing

Cassette
Feed Tray Deck Pedestal Unit*2
<Paper Type>
light paper (up

yes yes yes yes no
to 64 g/m2)
plain paper (64

yes yes yes yes yes
to 105 g/m2)
heavy paper (up

yes yes yes yes yes
to 209 g/2)
recycled paper yes yes yes yes yes
transparency*1
yes yes no yes no
(A4/LTR)
bond paper *1 no yes no no yes
gloss paper*1 no yes no no no
label paper*1 no yes no no no
Japanese
no yes no no no
paper*1
tracing paper *1 no yes no no no
tab paper*1 no yes no no no
postcard no yes no no no
2-pane postcard no yes no no no
4-pane postcard no yes no no no
*1: support limited to single-sided printing.
*2: support limited on iR C3200.
1-26
Chapter 1
1.2.7.3 Others 0006-3415
T-1-25
Operation Temperature range 15 to 32.5 deg C

environment
Humidity range 25 to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa

(0.8 to 1.0 atm)
Operating noise In operation 74 dB or less
In standby 50 dB or less
Power supply 100 V
120 V
230 V
Power consumption maximum 1500 W or less (if equipped with cassette

pedestal)
In standby 100V:344W*
120V:273W*
230V:350W*
*When equipped with all accessories.
Ozone Maximum 0.05 ppm or less
Average 0.02 ppm or less
Dimensions Width (W) 620 mm
Depth (D) 786 mm
Height (H) 1040 mm (including cassette pedestal)
Weight Total 118.5 kg (including duplex unit; excluding

toner container, drum
unit, cable)
Printer unit 105.5 kg (including duplex unit)
The descriptions are subject to change for product improvement.
1-27
Chapter 1
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications 0006-3419
T-1-26
Copyboard Fixed
Original size detection Feed sensors, reading CCD; copyboard cover angle
Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum original size 297 mm x 432 mm
Reproduction ratio 100%, Reduce I (1:0.250), Reduce II (1:0.500), Reduce III

(1:0.611), Reduce IV (1:0.707), Reduce V (1:0.816), Reduce VI
(1:0.865);
Enlarge I (1:1.154), Enlarge II (1:1.224), Enlarge III (1:1.414),

Enlarge IV (1:2.000), Enlarge V (1:4.000);
Zoom (1:0.250 to 4.000; 25% to 400%: in 1% increments)
Reading resolution Main scanning direction 600 dpi
Sub scanning direction 600 dpi
Number of gradations 256

Reading maximum
Main scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 297 mm
Sub scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 420 mm
Source of light Xenon lamp
Dimensions Width (W) 585 mm
Depth (D) 543 mm
Height (H) 87 mm
Weight 12.5 kg
Option Anti-condensation heater (100/230V model only)
The descriptions are subject to change for product improvement.
1-28
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Site Space ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Configuring the Cassette ............................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.3 Connecting the Reader Unit ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer ....................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.5 Installing the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.6 Installing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit ............................................................................ 2-16
2.2.7 Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.8 Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Unit ...................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner Container ...................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.2.11 Connecting to the Network ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ....................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................ 2-22
2.3.2 Using PING .............................................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ....................................................................................... 2-23
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address ............................................................................................ 2-24
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ......................................................................................... 2-24
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation ................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6 Relocating the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation .......................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.7 Installing the Card Reader ............................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used ......................................................................... 2-33
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ...................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ............................................................................................................... 2-34
2.9 Installing the Original Tray ............................................................................................................................. 2-43
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 ................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-47
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater .......................................................................................................................... 2-48
Contents
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................................................................................................................ 2-59

2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier ........................................................................................ 2-61
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 .............................................................. 2-63
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-64
2.13.1 Preparing for the Work ........................................................................................................................... 2-64
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site 0000-4363
Select the site of installation while keeping the following in mind; if possible, visit the user's premises before the
delivery of the machine:
1. The place must provide a source of power that is as rated (±10%) and that may be used exclusively by the machine;
it also must provide a terminal for grounding.
2. The place must fall within the following ranges of temperature and humidity. The site must not be near a water
faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
Humidity (%RH)
80
75
60
40
25
20
10
0 10 15 20 27.5 30 °C
(32) (50) (59) (68) (81.5)(86) (°F)
Temperature
F-2-1
3. The site must not be near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas. If exposed to direct rays of the sun,
provide curtains.
4. The amount of ozone generated by the machine in operation is not of a level that would harm the health of
individuals around it. Some, however, may find its order unpleasant, requiring good ventilation for the work
place.
5. Be sure that the machine's feet will remain in contact with the floor and the machine will remain level.
6. Be sure that the machine will be at least 10 cm from all walls and there will be ample space for using the machine.
2-1
Chapter 2
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm 1225 mm 500 mm

min. min.
F-2-2
Without Options
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm 2000 mm 500 mm

min. min.
F-2-3
2-2
Chapter 2
With a Finisher-N1 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed
100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
500 mm 2210 mm 500 mm

min. min.
F-2-4
With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2 and Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed

7. The site must be well ventilated. Take care so that the machine will not be installed near a vent from which air is
taken into the room.
2.1.2 Site Space 0006-4577
1) Be sure the will be 10 cm or more between the machine and any wall and there will be enough space for operating
the machine.
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm 1225 mm 500 mm

min. min.
F-2-5
2-3
Chapter 2
With Accessories Installed
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
500 mm 2000 mm 500 mm

min. min.
F-2-6
With a Finisher-M1, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NEW Controller-A1 Installed
100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
500 mm 2210 mm 500 mm

min. min.
2-4
Chapter 2
F-2-7
With a Finisher-N1/Saddle Finisher-N2, Side Paper Deck-P1, and NE Controller-A1 Installed
200 mm min.
1110mm
500 mm min.
500 mm 1225 mm 500 mm

min.
F-2-8
With a PS Print Server Unit-C1 Installed

2) Be sure the room is well ventilated. Be sure also that the machine is not placed near the air vent of the room.
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories 0006-4594
Memo,
If you are installing the machine and its accessories at the same item, be sure to go through the work in the following
sequence:
1. Cassette Heater Kit-A1 (to the pedestal)

2. 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1, or Plain Pedestal-C1
3. Machine
4. Anti-condensation heater
5. DADF-K1, or copyboard cover
6. Cassette Heater Kit-A1 (to the machine)
7. Card Reader-D1
8. NE Controller-A1
9. Deck heater
10. Side Paper Deck-P1
11. Key Switch Unit-A1
12. Original holder
13. Copy Tray-H1
14. Finisher-M1, Finisher-N1, or Saddle Finisher-N2
2-5
Chapter 2
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables 0006-4602
When connecting accessories to the machine, be sure to connect the power cables as indicated:
When connecting the pedestal, paper deck, finisher, ADF, anti-condensation heater, and PS print server unit.
DADF-K1
Inlet included with anti-condensation heater)
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Inlet
Outlet1
Outlet2
Outlet3 Inlet
2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 included with
PS Print Server Unit-C1)
included with machine) included with pedestal)

F-2-9
2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work 0000-4364
Keep the following in mind when installing the machine:
1. If the machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur in its optical system, laser unit, or
pickup/feeder unit, leading to image faults. If such is the case, leave the machine alone without unpacking for 1 hr
or more before starting the work.
The term condensation refers to the phenomenon that occurs on a metal surface when it is brought from a cold to
warm location as the result of rapidly cooled vapor. It is seen as droplets of water on the metal surface.
2. The machine weighs about 120 kg (including the reader unit). Be sure to work in a group of 4.
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2 Unpacking and

Installation
2.2.1 Checking the
Contents 0006-4619
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that

none of the following is missing:
F-2-10
T-2-1
[1] Drum unit (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. 1 pc. [10] Cable clamp (round) 6 pc.
each each
[2] Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. [11] Cable clamp (angular) 2 pc.
each
[3] Transfer cleaning unit 1 pc. [12] Size plate label 2 pc.
[4] Secondary transfer outside 1 pc. [13] User's Manual 1 pc.

roller unit
[5] Delivery tray 1 pc. [14] Installation Procedure 1 pc.

(100-V model only)
[6] Power cord (for wall outlet) 1 pc. [15] QR Sheet (100-V model 1 pc.
only)
[7] Touch pen 1 pc. [16] Service Book (100-V 1 pc.

model only)
[8] Grounding cord (100-V 1 pc. [17] CD-ROM (iR C3200 only) 1 pc.
model only)
[9] Reader controller 1 pc.

communication cable
2.2.2 Configuring the all tape; then, detach the holding plate [1].
Cassette 0000-4365 [1]
1) Open the shipping box, and remove the plastic

sheets.
- If you are installing the pedestal at the same time, be
sure to follow the instructions on the sheet that
comes with the pedestal.
2) Remove all tape from the machine. F-2-11
3) Slide out the upper and lower cassettes, and remove
2-7
Chapter 2
4) Push the release button of the cassette, and slide out

the cassette to the front.
5) Find out the size of paper used by the user, and set
the slide guide [1] of each cassette to suit the paper [1]
size.
[2]
F-2-14
8) Put paper in the cassette, and put the cassette back

into the machine.
[1]
STMT R
LTR
LTR R
LGL
11X17
2.2.3 Connecting the

Reader Unit 0000-4366
1) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the left

F-2-12
side of the reader unit. (Be sure to store them away
for possible future transport.)
6) Pick the levers of the side guide plate [1] and the
rear guide plate [2], and move them to the
appropriate index.
[1]
[2]
F-2-15
2) Connect the reader controller communication cable

[1] that comes with the machine.
[1]
F-2-13
7) Attach the size label [2] to the cassette size plate

[1]; then, fit it to the cassette.
2-8
Chapter 2
2.2.4 Removing the Fixing

Members from the Printer 0006-4646
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] from the

left side of the machine.
F-2-16
3) Using 5 included round cable clamps [1], fix the

reader unit power cable [2] in place; then, using
another round cable clamp [1] and 2 angular cable
clamps, fix the reader controller communication
cable [4] in place. F-2-19
2) Shift down the fixing roller releasing lever [1] to

unlock the fixing roller; then, remove the releasing
spacers [2] from the front and the rear. (These
members will no longer be used.)
F-2-17
F-2-20
F-2-18
2-9
Chapter 2
F-2-21 F-2-23
3) Shift the fixing roller releasing lever [1] back to its 2) Remove the face cap [1]. (Save it for later.)
initial position, and push in the fixing/feeding
assembly.
F-2-24
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the inside cover

F-2-22 [2]. (Save it for later.)
2.2.5 Installing the Reader

Unit 0006-3756
If the machine comes as two separate units (printer

and reader), go through the following steps:
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the printer unit, and
detach the center delivery tray [2]. (Save all for
later.)
F-2-25
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the upper right

cover (small) [2]. (Save the screw for later; put
away the cover.)
2-10
Chapter 2
Fit it so that the sheet [1] attached to the joint plate is

under the joint [2].
F-2-26
5) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the screw [2]
(1 each); then, detach the 2 small covers [3]. (Put
away the cap; save the screws for later; put away
the cover.) F-2-29
Wrong (The sheet is above the joint.)

Place the included joint plate (front)/(rear) [1] on the
front/rear joint.
F-2-27
F-2-30
6) Fit the included joint [1] in the hole in the machine's
top as shown. (2 locations at front and rear)
(front)
F-2-28 F-2-31
7) (rear)
2-11
Chapter 2
8) For both front and rear, secure the joint grounding 10) Secure the reader connection unit [1] using the 2
spring [2] using the screw [1] removed from the included screws [2].
small cover (for the front, tighten over the plate);
then, secure the joint plate (front/rear) [4] using the
2 included screws [3] (1 each at front and rear).
F-2-35
F-2-32 11) Then, use the included 2 screws [1] to further

secure it in place.
(front)
F-2-36
F-2-33 12) Shift down the arm [1] of the reader connection
unit by 90 deg C; then, hook it on the protrusion [2]
(rear) sticking out of the machine.
9) Where the upper right cover (small) has been
removed, fit the positioning pin [A] for the bottom
of the reader connection unit [1].
F-2-37
F-2-34
2-12
Chapter 2
F-2-38 F-2-41
15) Unpack the reader unit.

16) Place the reader unit on the printer unit 7 to 8 cm
displaced to the side (temporarily).
When folding the arm, be sure that it is under the
protrusion.
7 to 8cm
F-2-42
F-2-39
17) Fit the included supports into the 2 holes in the
bottom of the reader unit; then, tighten them firmly
13) Attach the inside cover using the 2 previously
using a screwdriver so that they are fully fitted with
removed screws.
the joints.
F-2-40
F-2-43
14) Attach the center delivery tray using the 2
previously removed screws.
2-13
Chapter 2
20) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper left
cover [2]. (Save all for later.)
F-2-44
18) Open the delivery cover [1].

F-2-47
21) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader

left cover [2]. (Save all for later.)
F-2-45
19) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the 2 screws
[2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
(Save all for later.)
F-2-48
22) Hook the reader unit retainer [1] on the hole in the
reader unit; then, while pushing it down from
above, secure it in place using the 2 included screws
[2].
F-2-46
F-2-49
2-14
Chapter 2
25) Attach the reader left cover using the 2 previously

removed screws.
F-2-50
F-2-53
23) Bend and remove the 2 claws [1] found on the top
of the removed upper left cover; then, attach them 26) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the
in place using the 2 previously removed screws. left side of the reader unit. (Store away the removed
(Put away the claws.) mirror fixing screws for later, i.e., for possible
relocation of the machine.)
F-2-51
F-2-54
24) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the 2

27) Lift the reader unit slightly, and push into the tip
previously removed screws.
of the positioning pin [1] into the hole [2] in the
reader unit.
F-2-52
F-2-55
2-15
Chapter 2
28) When the positioning pin [1] is fully in place, 2.2.6 Installing the
secure it using the stepped screw [2].
Secondary Transfer
Outside Roller Unit 0006-4664
Do not touch the roller area of the secondary transfer

outside roller.
1) Open the package, and open the cardboard used to

protect the secondary transfer outside roller unit.
F-2-56
2) Slide out the machine's fixing/feeding unit.
3) Picking the tabs at both ends of the secondary
29) Secure the wire [2] in place using the included RS
transfer outside roller [1], place the roller in the
tightening stepped screw [1].
secondary transfer unit [2] inside the fixing/feeding
unit; then, push on both ends so that it fits in place. (Be
sure to force the roller until a click is heard.)
F-2-57
F-2-59
30) Using the screw [1] removed from the upper right
cover (small) and the included screw [2], secure the
reader connection unit cover [3] in place.
F-2-60
4) Close the fixing/feeding unit.

F-2-58
2-16
Chapter 2
2.2.7 Connecting the Power 2.2.8 Mounting the

Cord 0006-4669 Transfer Cleaning Unit 0000-4367
- When Using a Pedestal 1) Open the front cover.

1) Fix the power cord that comes with the machine in 2) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
place to the pedestal side using the included cable [1] in the direction of the arrow.
clamp (small) [2]; then, connect one end to the
socket.
F-2-63
F-2-61 3) Remove the waste toner container [1].
2) Remove the screw [1] from under the power cord

slot on the pedestal side; then, fit the other end [A]
(hook-shaped) of the included grounding wire [2]
to the pedestal.
Grounding Members
- grounding terminal of power outlet
- iron rod buried 75 cm or more in ground
- terminal wired to specification
F-2-64
4)Remove the screw [1], and remove the dummy

transfer cleaning unit.
Be sure to store away the removed transfer cleaning

unit. You will need it when executing the following
service mode (for freeing the machine from
F-2-62 condensation as needed by the site of installation):
COPIER>FUNCTION> INSTALL>DRY-RT.
2-17
Chapter 2
2.2.9 Fitting the Toner

Container 0000-4368
Each toner container has its specific position

according to color (viewing from the control panel
and starting at the left, Y, M, C, and Bk). Do not
force the wrong container into place.
F-2-65
1) Take out the toner container (Y) from the packing
5) box.
2) Take out the toner container (Y) from the packing
bag; then, leave it alone for a while until it becomes
used to the ambient temperature.
Do not touch the tip of the transfer cleaning unit blade.
3) Turn the fixing lever [1] of the toner container (Y)
The area is coated with lubricant.
90° clockwise.
Take out the included transfer cleaning unit from the

bag, and remove the packing material (cardboard).
6) Using the included binding screw [1], mount the
transfer cleaning unit [2]. (Be sure to match the
protrusion on the top of the waste toner feedscrew
case with the groove in the base of the transfer
cleaning unit.)
F-2-67
4) Holding the toner container (Y) [1] with both

hands, move it several times as if to rotate it.
F-2-66
7) Fit the waste toner container.

8) Shift back the intermediate transfer unit releasing
lever back to its initial position.
F-2-68
2-18
Chapter 2
5) Push it all the way in the direction of the arrow

indicated on the top edge.
F-2-71
F-2-69 4) Remove the anti-interference sheet [1].
6) Shift the fixing lever of the toner container (Y) back

to its initial position (by turning it counterclockwise
by 90°).
7) Fit the rest of the toner containers (M, C, Bk) in the
same way.
2.2.10 Fitting the Drum

Unit 0000-4369 F-2-72
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from the packing box.
5) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
2) Take out the drum unit (H) [1] from the packing
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
bag; then, take out the drying agent (silica gel).
F-2-70 F-2-73
3)
Do not remove the protective cover. It serves as a rail.
Pull out the pressure releasing hook [1] at the front

and the rear.
2-19
Chapter 2
6) Turn the open/close lever [2] of the cartridge cover

[1] clockwise by 90° to open the cartridge cover.
F-2-76
F-2-74
9)
7) Match the groove [1] found behind the machine's

cartridge cover and the protrusion [2] found on the
bottom of the protective cover; then, secure them in When pulling out the sealing tape, be sure to hold the
place. drum cartridge with your hand so that the cartridge
will not slip off.
Pull out the sealing tape [1].
F-2-75
8)
F-2-77
10) Fit the M, C, and Bk drum cartridges in the same

1. Push the drum cartridge in the direction of the arrow
way.
[1] indicated on its top edge.
11) Close the cartridge cover, and turn the open/close
2. Store away the protective cover after fitting the
lever clockwise to set it in place.
drum cartridge.
12) Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
back to its initial position.
While supporting the protective cover [2] with you
13) Close the front cover.
hand, push in the cartridge (Y) [3], thereby setting
it in place (Y, M, C, and Bk starting from left).
2-20
Chapter 2
2.2.11 Connecting to the

Network 0000-4371
Perform the following only if the model is equipped

with printer functions.
1) Turn off the control panel power switch.

2) Turn off the main power switch.
3) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn
on the main power switch.
4) Inform the user's system administrator that the
installation work is over, and ask him/her to set up
the machine for use on the user's network.
5) When network settings have been made, turn off
the control power switch, and then turn off and then
on the main power switch.
2-21
Chapter 2
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Checking the Connection to the Network 0000-8240
Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
If the user's network is in a TCP/IP environment, use the PING function to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has been
installed properly and all network settings have been made properly.
If the user's network is in an IPX/SPX or AppleTalk environment, this check is not needed.
2.3.2 Using PING 0000-4373
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network:

If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to see that the Ethernet PCB has been
correctly mounted and the network settings have been correctly made. If the user's network environment is based on
IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, you need not make a PING-based check.
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.

2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate 'NG'.
<NETWORK> < 1/1 > <READY >

PING 0. 0. 0. 0
IP address input
Result(OK/NG)
+/- OK
F-2-78
2-22
Chapter 2
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address 0000-4374
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network
environment to which the machine belongs.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following
troubleshooting steps:
2-23
Chapter 2
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network 0000-4375
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty Ethernet PCB or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network
2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable 0000-4376
1) Check to see if the network cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet PCB.
- If the connector is normal, make a check using the PING function and a loopback address or a local host address.
- if not correct, try a check once again using a remote host address.
2.4.3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address 0000-8237
A loopback address returns before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING using a loopback address
will enable you to find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once
again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.
2.4.4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 0000-8238
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which
returns after it has reached the network PCB, enables you to find out if the network PCB is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings)
assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the network PCB.
c. faulty network PCB: replace the network PCB.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator,
ask for corrective action.
2-24
Chapter 2
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations

2.5.1 Checking the Images/Operations 0000-4379
Be sure to put back the service book cover; turning on the machine's main power without doing so will cause a fault
associated with error code E020. (The protrusion [A] of the service book cover will push the segment identified as
[B] in the figure when the front cover is closed, thus opening/closing the shutter assembly of the pattern reader unit.)
F-2-79
Place a test sheet on the copyboard glass, and select the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper; then, make copies, and
check the images.
(If a 2-cassette pedestal is used, try cassette 3/4 to check images.)
- Check to be sure there is no abnormal noise.

- Check to be sure that the images are free of faults at all default reproduction ratios.
- Check to make sure that as many copies as are specified are made without a problem.
- Check to make sure that the margin (L2) to the front of the copies made with each of the cassettes as the source of
paper is 2.0 ±1.5 mm; otherwise, make the following adjustments:
1) Slide out the manual feed unit and the cassette 1/2; then, open the pickup vertical path cover.
(In the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, cassette 3/4.)
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front cover [2].
(Do the same also for a 2-cassette pedestal.)
2-25
Chapter 2
F-2-80
- Making Adjustments for Cassette 1

Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the
adjusting plate [2]. (Do the same for cassette 3/4.)
F-2-81
If the adjusting plate

is moved to the right,
image
L2
the margin to the front of

the paper will decrease.
F-2-82
- Making Adjustments for Cassette 2

3) Remove the grip [1] on the front right.
2-26
Chapter 2
F-2-83
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the
adjusting plate [2].
F-2-84
If the adjusting plate

is moved to the right,
image
L2
the margin to the front of

the paper will decrease.
F-2-85
- Check to make sure that the margin (L1) along the leading edge of paper picked from each of the cassettes is 2.5
±1.5 mm; otherwise, make the following adjustments:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
2-27
Chapter 2
2) Change the setting to make adjustments.

(A change by '1' will cause a shift of 0.1 mm; a higher value will move the image toward the leading edge of the
paper.)
L1
Image
An increase in the value of

REGIST will move the image
toward the leading edge of the paper.
F-2-86
- Adjusting the Image Area (non-image width)

1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK_T/L/B/R.
2) Change the settings to make adjustments. (An increase by '24' will increase the non-image width by about 1 mm;
the setting may be between 0 and 1000.)
- If a line is found in the output image, go through the following:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>CCD>SH-PS-ST.
2) Press the OK key so that the indication on the screen will change to 'ACTIVE' indicating that the machine is
executing automatic adjustment of shading position.
- If 'OK' is indicated on the screen,
3) See that auto adjustment has ended.
- If 'NG' is indicated on the screen,
3) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S.
4) Change the setting to adjust the shading position.
2.5.2 PASCAL Setting 0000-4380
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PASCAL.

2) Check to make sure that the setting is '1'.
3) Press the Reset key several times to end service mode.
4) Make the following selections in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction.
5) Select the appropriate type of paper, and press [full correction].
6) Place the test print 1 output on the copyboard glass, and have the machine read it.
7) Press [test print 2] to generate test print 2.
9) Press [test print 3] to generate test print 3.
When all work is done, turn the adjuster on the bottom of the pedestal to secure the machine in place.
2-28
Chapter 2
2.5.3 Preventing Anti-Condensation 0006-4719
If condensation is expected at the site of installation, enable or disable the sleep mechanism on a monthly basis to
prevent it.
Service Mode (Category 2)

COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>SLPOFF01 to 12
Setting
0: enable sleep mode
1: disable sleep mode (prevent condensation)
2-29
Chapter 2
2.6 Relocating the Machine

2.6.1 Preparing for Relocation 0000-4381
If the machine must be relocated after installation, be sure to perform the following work before relocation:
Do not use the machine's grips when moving it over a step while it is on a pedestal; otherwise, the machine and the
pedestal may separate. Be sure to hold the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] removed and stored at time of installation.
F-2-87
2) Be sure to put about 10 sheets of paper [1] over the copyboard glass.
[1]
F-2-88
2-30
Chapter 2
2.7 Installing the Card Reader

2.7.1 Checking the Contents 0000-8498
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure none of the following is missing.
F-2-89
[1] Card Reader-D1................. 1 unit

[2] Pan-head screw (small)......... 1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4)............. 4 pc.
2.7.2 Installation Procedure 0000-8502
1) Remove the face cap [1] and 2 screw [2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
F-2-90
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] from behind the upper left cover (small), and detach the inside cover [2]; then, attach it
as shown (by changing its orientation).
2-31
Chapter 2
F-2-91
F-2-92
3)
When attaching, be sure that a card may be inserted with the label on the face side.
Using the 4 included binding screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the inside cover.
F-2-93
2-32
Chapter 2
4) Secure the grounding wire [1] in place using the included pan-head screw (small) [2]; then, connect the connector
[3] of the card reader to the machine's connector.
F-2-94
5) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the previously removed screw.
6) Turn on the main power switch, and make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
Then, enter any number (from 1 to 2000) to serve as the number to identify the first card used by the user.
7) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2.7.3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant (NSA) Is Used 0000-8503
1) Check to make sure that IDs (from ID00000001 through ID00001000; i.e., if '1' is entered in
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD in service mode) have been prepareed in user mode (system control
settings>group ID control>count control).
2) Set up the following in user mode (system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address): 'IP
address', 'gateway address', 'subnet mask'.
3)
If you fail to set up 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register card
to device' when setting up NSA.
Enter any number for 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.' in user mode (under 'system administrator
info').
4) Turn off and then on the machine.
2-33
Chapter 2
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1

2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 0000-8506
Keep the following in mind when installing the controller to its host machine:
1. Be sure that the work complies with the laws and regulations of the country of installation.
2. Be sure that its host machine has properly been installed before starting the work.
3. Be sure to disconnect its host machine's power plug before starting the work.
4. Be sure to identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. Be sure to prepare the appropriate settings data on a PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper cover [1].
[1] [2]
[2]
F-2-95
2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply unit to the connector [4] as shown.
[4]
[3]
F-2-96
3) Remove the 6 screws [5], and detach the face plate [3] of the host machine's upper rear cover.
2-34
Chapter 2
F-2-97
4) Connect the cable [7] to the connector (J1511) [8] of the host machine's power distribution PCB.
F-2-98
5) Secure the controller to the host machine's rear cover using the 4 included screws.
[8]
[8]
F-2-99
2-35
Chapter 2
6) Remove the slack from the cable connecting to the host machine; as necessary, bundle any stray segment of the
cables as shown and secure it in place with a harness band [9].
[9]
F-2-100
7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2) [10] on the PCB to ON (so that the mode used to communicate with the host
machine will be IPC).
[10]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-101
8) If IC6 [11] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch (SW2) [12] to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP
switch (SW2) [16] to OFF.
If IC6 [11] is not found, you need not mount it newly.

If you must mount or replace a ROM (IC6) [11] for upgrading the controller, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch
(SW2) [12] to ON.
2-36
Chapter 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[12]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
[11]
CN3 CN2
F-2-102
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW3) [13] as indicated.
[13]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-103
T-2-2
Notation Setting Description
SW3-1 SW3-2 Description
SW3-1 OFF OFF sets the signal transmission level of the

SW3-2 See right modem to -16 dBm.
ON OFF sets the signal transmission level of the

modem to -14 dBm.
OFF ON sets the signal transmission level of the

modem to -12 dBm.
ON ON ets the signal transmission level of the

modem to -10 dBm.
2-37
Chapter 2
Notation Setting Description
SW3-3 OFF sets it to OFF at all times.
SW3-4 ON sets the line setting to tone pulse.
OFF sets the line setting to dial pulse.
SW3-5 ON sets the dial pulse speed to 20 pps.
OFF sets the dial pulse speed to 10 pps.
SW3-6 - not used
10) Connect the power plug of the power supply unit, and check to make sure that LED1 [14] (orange) on the PCB
goes ON.
[14]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-104
11) Initialize the RAM. Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the table; then, press
the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes ON.
[15]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6
[16] CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-105
2-38
Chapter 2
T-2-3
SW2 bits Setting

SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3 ON
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
OFF
SW2-7 See step 8).
SW2-8 OFF
12) When LED5 [17] (red) has gone ON, set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the
table, and press the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes OFF, indicating the end of RAM
initialization.
[15]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
2
LED4
IC6 [16] CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-106
T-2-4
SW2 bits Setting

SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3 OFF
SW2-4 ON
2-39
Chapter 2
SW2 bits Setting

SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
ON
SW2-7 See step 8).
SW2-8 OFF
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch (SW2) [18] on the PCB to OFF.
[18]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-107
14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If the connection is to the controller alone, connect the modular jack
cable to the connector (LINE) [19]. If the controller's extension function is to be used, connect the existing
telephone or fax to the connector (TEL) [2)] and then connect the telephone line to the connector (LINE) [19].
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
[20] [19]
F-2-108
2-40
Chapter 2
15) Ring the service station for initial settings of the controller. (Upon arrival, LED 4 [21] (red) will start to flash.)
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
[21]
CN3 CN2
F-2-109
16) Ring the service station, and find out if initial settings have been made. If the setup has failed, initialize the RAM
once again (steps 11) through 13)) to start over.
Be sure to check with the service station once again to make sure that the controller settings are correct.
17) Check to make sure that the controller may be used to call up the PC at the service station. Press the push switch
(SW4) [16] on the PCB so that LED6 [22] (red) goes ON. The LED goes OFF when the transmission ends
successfully; otherwise, it will start to flash.
When the push switch (SW4) [16] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, a transmission will be initiated once again.
If the push switch (SW1) [23] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, the ongoing transmission will be cancelled.
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4
[16] 2
IC6 CN4
[22] SW1
[23]
CN3 CN2
F-2-110
18) Check to make sure that the communication with its host machine is normal. Connect the host machine's power
plug, and turn on the power switch; then, check to make sure that LED2 [24] (orange) starts to flash.
[24]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-111
2-41
Chapter 2
19) Press the host machine's Start key, and check that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered.
[25]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-112
20) Attach the switch settings label [26] on the top cover, and record the switch settings.
21) Secure the upper cover [1] using 2 screws [2]. When doing so, check to make sure that the power unit cable is
secured to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the upper cover [1].
[2]
[26]
[1]
[2]
F-2-113
2-42
Chapter 2
2.9 Installing the Original Tray

Open the shiping box, and check to make sure that none of the fllowing is missing:
F-2-114
[1] Original base........ 1 pc.

[2] Stepped screw (M4)... 2 pc.
[3] Washer............... 2 pc.
1) Fit the 2 included washers [1] and 2 stepped screws [2] to the upper right cover.
F-2-115
2-43
Chapter 2
2) Separate the original tray into top and lower parts, and hook the cut-off [2] of the reinforcing plate of the original
tray (upper) [1] on the stepped screw [3] previously fitted.
F-2-116
3) Fit it to the original tray (lower) [1] together with the original tray (upper).
F-2-117
2-44
Chapter 2
2.10 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1

Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
F-2-118
[1] Key switch unit .............. 1 pc.

[2] Control key .................. 1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4)............ 1 pc.
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the host machine's center delivery tray [2].
F-2-119
2-45
Chapter 2
2) Cut out the excess [1] of the upper right cover.
F-2-120
3) Slide out the manual feed tray; then, remove tha screw [1], and detach the middle right cover.
F-2-121
4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2].
F-2-122
2-46
Chapter 2
5) Fit the plate of the key switch unit [1] into the cut-off of the upper right stay; then, secure it in place using the
included binding screw [2].
F-2-123
6) Connect the connector [1].
F-2-124
7) Attach the upper right cover using the 2 previously removed screws.
8) Attach the printer upper right cover using the 2 right screws.
2.10.3 Making Checks After Installation 0006-0710
1) Start service mode.

2) Make the following selections in service mode, and enter - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>KEY.
3) Turn OFF and then ON the host machine.
2-47
Chapter 2
2.11 Installing the Reader Heater

Be sure to turn off the host machine before starting the work and observe the points to note indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check none of the following is missing:
F-2-125
T-2-5
[1] Reader heater ... 1 pc. [6] Wire saddle ... 2 pc.
[2] Fuse PCB unit ... 1 pc. [7] Gounding cord (100v ... 1 pc.
model only)
[3] RS tightening screw ... 5 pc. [8] Power supply label ... 1 pc.
(M4x8) (100v model only)
[4] Power cable (for wall ... 1 pc.

outlet)
[5] Power cable (for copier ... 1 pc.

outlet)
2-48
Chapter 2
Before starting the work, be sure to perform the follwing:

1. Turn off the control panel power switch.
2. Turn off the main power switch.
3. Disconnect the power cable (for wall outlet).
ON
/O
FF
[1] OFF [2] OFF [3] Pull out.

F-2-126
1) Remove the copyboard cover. (If an ADF is used, you need not remove it.)
2) Release the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable.
[1]
F-2-127
2-49
Chapter 2
3) Desconnect the reader controller communication cable.

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader unit rear cover [2]. (Save it for later.)
F-2-128
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the face plate. (Save it for later.)
F-2-129
6) Using the 2 included screws [1], mount the fuse PCB unit [2].
F-2-130
2-50
Chapter 2
7) Connect the harness [1] of the fuse PCB unit to the connector [2] of the interface PCB.
F-2-131
8)
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass face and the white plate found on the back of
it. (Dirt can cause black lined in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-132
2-51
Chapter 2
F-2-133
Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
F-2-134
9)
When moving the No.1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] of the cut-out in the mirror stay shown in the
figure.
F-2-135
2-52
Chapter 2
F-2-136
Move the No.1 mirror base [1] fully to the right.
F-2-137
When shifting the mirror unit, be sure not to touch the mirror unit. Otherwise, clean it with lint-free papaer moistened
with aocohol.
2-53
Chapter 2
10) Mount the Reader heater where indicated in the figure. When doing so, be sure that the harness guide of the heater
is above the harness of the fuse PCB.
[2] [1]
F-2-138
11) Using 2 included screws [1], secure the longer segment (silver-coloured) of the Reader heater [2].
F-2-139
12) Holding it where indicated [A], shift the No.1 mirror base to the left.
F-2-140
2-54
Chapter 2
13) Fit the harness guide [1], i.e., fit it in the hole in the base plate, and shift it to the right to secure; then, fit the
harness band [2].
F-2-141
14) Secure the shorter segment (black) of the Reader heater [1] using 2 included screws [2]. (To do so, insert a
screwdriver through the hole in the lens cover.)
F-2-142
15) Connect the connector [1] of the Reader heater to the connector [2] of the fuse PCB unit.
F-2-143
2-55
Chapter 2
16) Put the No.1 mirror base to its initial position (left edge).
17) Attach the reader unit rear cover.
18)
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to touch the glass face or the white plate found on its back. (Dirt
can cause black lines in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-freee paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-144
Attach the copyboard glass.
F-2-145
2-56
Chapter 2
19) Secure the reader controller communication cable and the reader power supply cable back to their initial
positions.
20) Connect the power cable.
- If a pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, remove the 2 face stickers [1]
from the upper rear cover.
[1]
F-2-146
Connect the power cable (for wall outlet) [1] and the inlet terminal and the outlet terminal (topmost of the 3) of the
pedestal; then, secure it in place using the 2 included wire saddles.
F-2-147
2-57
Chapter 2
- If no pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, connect the power cable (for
wall outlet) [1] to the inlet terminal.
F-2-148
- Only if 100v Model

21) Remove the screw [1] found under the inlet terminal, and connect the included gounding wire [1] (i.e., if no
pedestal is connected).
F-2-149
22) Attach the included power supply label [1] to the reader unit rear cover.
F-2-150
2-58
Chapter 2
2.12 Installing the Cassette Heater

To install the heater kit, you must obtain a separately available Cassette Heater Unit-24.
Before starting the work, be sure to turn off the host machine; for installation, keep in mind the points to note
indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
Cassette Heater Kit-A1
F-2-151
T-2-6
[1] Heater PCB unit.....1 pc. [2] RS tightening screw (M4).....2 pc.
Cassette Heater Unit-24
F-2-152
T-2-7
[1] Heater unit.....1 pc. [2] Binding screw (M4).....1 pc.
2-59
Chapter 2
Before staritng the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn off the control panel power switch.
3. Disconnect the power cable (for power outlet).
ON
/O
FF

F-2-153
MEMO:
The Cassette Heater Kit-A1 is designed for installation to either a copying machine or a 2-cassette pedestal using the
same installation procedure.
The following steps (images) are based on installation to a 2-cassette pedestal.
2-60
Chapter 2
2.12.3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier 0006-0719
1) Pull out both cases of the copier.

2) Insert a screwdriver from the front of the copier, and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach the heater PCB unit cover
[1] attached to the rear side plate of the copier.
F-2-154
3)
MEMO:
When detaching the heater unit PCB cover, slide it upward while pulling the stop [1] mounted to the cover toward
the front.
F-2-155
4)
Before installing the heater PCB unit, be sure to turn off the host machine.
Using the 2 included RS tightening screws [1], mount the heater PCB unit [2], and connect the 2 connectors [3].
2-61
Chapter 2
F-2-156
5) Connect the included connector of the heater unit with the connector [2] of the heater PCB unit.
F-2-157
6)
When mounting the heater unit, be sure to securely fit the 3 protrusions, and check to make sure there is no gap.
Fit the 3 protrusions [2] of the heater unit [1] into the slits in the base plate; match the holes, and secure it to the
cassette heater unit using the included binding screw [3].
2-62
Chapter 2
F-2-158
F-2-159
7) Mount the heater PCB unit cover using the previously removed screw.
2.12.4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 0006-0720
1) Slide out both cassettes from the cassette pedestal.
Hereafter, go through the same steps used for the installation to a copier.
2-63
Chapter 2
2.13 Replacing the Drum Unit

2.13.1 Preparing for the Work 0006-0723
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from its shipping box; then, take out the drum unit (Y) [1] from its packing bag, and
also take out the drying agent [2].
F-2-160
2)
Do not remove the protective cover. It serves as a rail for installation.
Pull out the releasing hook [1] at the front and the rear.
F-2-161
2-64
Chapter 2
3) Remove the interference protective sheet [1].
F-2-162
Before starting the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn of the control panel power switch.
3. Pull out the power cable (for wall outlet).
ON
/O
FF

F-2-163
2-65
Chapter 2
1) Open the copier's front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
F-2-164
2) Turn the open/closed lever of the drum unit cover [1] counterclockwise by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover.
F-2-165
3) Match the dent [1] found in the back of the drum unit cover and the protrusion [2] on the bottom face of the
protective cover, and secure it in place.
F-2-166
4)
2-66
Chapter 2
1. Push it in the direction of the arrow [1] indicated on the top edge of the drum unit.
2. After setting the drum unit in place, be sure to store away the protective cover.
Holding the protective cover [2] level, push in the drum unit (Y) [3] to set; the units are Y, M, C, and Bk, starting
from the left.
F-2-167
5)
When pulling out the sealing tape, be sure to hold the drum unit in place so that the drum unit will not slide out.
Pull out the sealing tape [1].
F-2-168
6) Set the drum units for other colors (M, C, Bk) in the same way.
7) Close the drum unit cover, and shift the open/close lever back to its initial position.
8) Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever back to its initial position.
9) Close the front cover.
2-67
Chapter 2
2-68
Chapter 3 Basic
Operation
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction 0000-4278
The machine can broadly be divided into the following functional blocks:
Original exposure system

Reader control system
[7]
[1] Printer control

General control
system
system
DC controller
Main controller
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Image
formation system
[8]
[9] [10]
[11]
Pickup/
[12] Side paper
feeder
[13] system deck (option)
2-cassette [14]
pedestal [15]
(option)
F-3-1
T-3-1
[1] HDD [9] Secondary transfer
[2] Option boards [10] Pickup control
[3] Photosensitive drum (Y) [11] Duplexing feed
[4] Photosensitive drum (M) [12] Cassette 1
[5] Photosensitive drum (C) [13] Cassette 2
[6] Photosensitive drum (Bk) [14] Cassette 3
[7] Delivery system [15] Cassette 4
[8] Fixing system
3-1
Chapter 3
3.1.2 Arrangement of Major PCBs 0006-8366
The machine's major PCBs are wired as indicated in the following diagram:
Reader unit
[2] J102
J206 J203 J204 J103
J601 J307 J205
[1] [3] [4]
J303
Printer unit
[5]
J511
[6] [7]
J607 J608
J1301
J115 J114
J1209
[9]
J1303
[8]
[10]
J1501,J1502
J102 J1508,J1509
J105
J100 J131 [13]
J814
J75,J92 [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
[11]
J90 J95
[12]
J441
J64 J50,J59
J60,J74
J69 J54 J3
[21]
J58
[20]
J158 J5
J53 J155 J154
J153 [22] [23]
flat cable.
PCB-to-PCB connector.
F-3-2
T-3-2
[1] Inverter PCB [13] High-voltage unit
[2] Reader controller PCB [14] HV1 PCB
[3] Interface PCB [15] HV1-SUB PCB
[4] CCD/AP PCB [16] HV2 PCB
[5] Control panel CPU PCB [17] HV2-SUBY PCB
[6] BD detection PCB [18] HV4 PCB
[7] Laser driver PCB [19] HV3 PCB
[8] DC controller PCB [20] Fuse PCB
3-2
Chapter 3
[9] Main controller PCB (sub) [21] Heater control PCB
[10] Main controller PCB (main) [22] DC power supply PCB (1)
[11] Drive PCB [23] DC power supply PCB (2)
[12] Duplex driver PCB
The symbol <=> in the diagram indicates major wiring connections, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs within the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
J1400 [13]
J1301
[1] J1202
[4] [5]
J1201
[6]
J1203
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318 J1204
[3] [8]
J1207
[9]
J1205
[10]
J1206 [11]
J1213 J1210
J1513 J1507
[12]
Flat cable/signal.
J1303 PCB-to-PCB connector.

F-3-3
3-3
Chapter 3
T-3-3
[1] Main controller PCB (sub) [8] Ethernet board
[2] SRMA PCB [9] UFR board or Open I/F
[3] HDD [10] USB interface board or TokenRing board
[4] Main controller PCB (main) [11] Image conversion board
[5] Image memory (SDRAM-: 512 MB, standard) [12] Power distribution PCB
[6] Image memory (SDRAM: 512 MB, expansion) [13] Differential PCB
[7] Boot ROM (Fiash ROM)
The symbol <=> used in the diagram indicates connection between major PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction
of signals.
3-4
Chapter 3
3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-4280
T-3-4
Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) From when the main power switch is turned on until the surface temperature of
the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
SSTBY (scanner standby) From when shading correction ends until the Start key is turned on or the main
power switch is turned off.
WMUPR (warm-up From when the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C until it
rotation) reaches 190 deg C (i.e., the drive system has started up and, in addition, bias
adjustment and image stabilization correction control are under way).
PSTBY (printer standby) From WMUPR ends until the Start key is enabled.
3-5
Chapter 3
Main power switch ON

Reader unit Standby
WMUP SSTBY
30 sec Size detection/shading correction
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor Home position search
(M1)
Starts here if, when the main power is turned
ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90˚C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
Printer unit Main power switch ON have reached 190˚C)
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater 90˚C
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retention
heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
Development rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
Rotates idly for 300

sec after the drum
Auto adjustment ITB motor stops
*1: The main heater or the sub heater is
used for temperature control according to The following control is executed
the difference in the readings between the according to the surface temperature
of the fixing roller when the main
main thermistor (TH1) and the sub power is turned ON:
thermistor (TH2).
• if less than 100˚C, • if 100˚C or higher
(control at 190˚C) [1] discharge current control [1] discharge current control
[2] ATVC control [2] ATVC control
[3] ATR control [3] image position control
[4] SALT-Dmax control
[5] image position correction
[6] SALT-Dhalf control
F-3-4
3-6
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0000-4281
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-5
Period Description
SSTBY From when shading ends until the Start key is turned ON or the
main power is turned OFF.
SREADY While shading correction is under way after a press on the Start
key.
SCFW While an originals is being read (scanner forward).
SCRV While the scanner is returning to the home position after the
original is read (scanner in reverse).
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to review a print request signal.
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until the image
leading signal is sent.
PRINT Until all toner is transferred to paper.
LSTR (last rotation) From when printing ends until all drive stops.
Chapter 3
Reader unit Start key ON

SSTBY SREADY SCFW SCRV
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner
motor (M1)
Image formation Used to stabilize rotation

Start key ON ready timing
Printer unit (Bk: 2.5 sec Y/M/C: 3.5 sec)
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser scanner motor
(M2 to M5)(Y,M,C,Bk)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container motor
(M20 to 23)(Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing motor
(M12 to 15)(Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration motor
(M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant
speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)

Fixing main heater *1 *1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater *1 *1
(H2)
Fixing heat
retention motor (H3)
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater
according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2). (control at 190˚C)
F-3-5
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-6
Period Description
SSTBY While an original is being read.
SREADY While shading correction is under way after a press on the

Star key.
SCFW While an original is being read.
3-8
Chapter 3
Period Description
SCRV While the scanner is returning to the home position after an

original has been read.
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to receive a print request signal.
PSINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until when the
image leading signal is received.
PRINT Unit all toner is transferred to paper.
LSTR (last rotation) From when printing ends until al drive stops.
Reader unit Start key ON

SSTBY SREADY SCFW SCRV
Scanning
lamp (LA1)
Scanner
motor (M1)
Image formation
Start key ON ready timing Used to stabilize rotation
Printer unit (2.5 sec)
Laser scanner
motor (Bk) (M5)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container
motor (Bk) (M23)
Development
motor (Bk) (M15)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB
motor (M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, and
constant speed control (to match
transfer timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)

Fixing main *1 *1
heater (H1)
Fixing sub *1 *1
heater (H2)
heater (H3)
*1: The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control
according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2). (control at 190˚C)
F-3-6
3-9
Chapter 3
3-10
Chapter 4 Basic
Operations (As a
Printer)
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.2 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
The machine can roughly be divided into the following functional blocks:
Original exposure system

Reader control system
[7]
[1] Printer control

General control
system
system
DC controller
Main controller
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Image
formation system
[8]
[9] [10] [11]
[12]
Pickup/
[13] Side paper
feeder
[14] system deck (option)
2-cassette [15]
pedestal [16]
(option)
F-4-1
T-4-1
[1] HDD [9] Feeding system
[2] Option boards [10] Transfer system
[3] Photosensitive drum (Y) [11] Pickup control
[4] Photosensitive drum (M) [12] Duplex/feeder
[5] Photosensitive drum (C) [13] Cassette 1
[6] Photosensitive drum (Bk) [14] Cassette 2
[7] Delivery system [15] Cassette 3
[8] Fixing system [16] Cassette 4
4-1
Chapter 4
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Arrangement of Major PCBs 0006-8375
The machine's major PCBs are wired as follows:
Printer unit
[1]
J511
[2] [3]
J607 J608
J1301
J115 J114
J1209
[5]
J1303
[4]
[6]
J1501,J1502
J102 J1508,J1509
J105
J100 J131 [9]
J814
J75,J92 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[7]
J90 J95
[8]
J441
J64 J50,J59
J60,J74
J69 J54 J3
[17]
J58
[16]
J158 J5
J53 J155 J154
J153 [18] [19]
flat cable.
PCB-to-PCB connector.
F-4-2
T-4-2
[1] Control panel CPU PCB [11] HV1-SUB PCB
[2] BD detection PCB [12] HV2 PCB
[3] Laser driver PCB [13] HV2-SBU PCB
[4] DC controller PCB [14] HV4 PCB
[5] Main controller PCB (sub) [15] HV3 PCB
4-2
Chapter 4
[6] Main controller PCB (main) [16] Fuse PCB
[7] Drum ITB motor [17] Heater control PCB
[8] Duplex driver PCB [18] DC power supply PCB (1)
[9] High-voltage unit [19] DC power supply PCB (2)
[10] HV1 PCB
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs of the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
J1400 [13]
J1301
[1] J1202
[4] [5]
J1201
[6]
J1203
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318 J1204
[3] [8]
J1207
[9]
J1205
[10]
J1206 [11]
J1213 J1210
J1513 J1507
[12]
F-4-3
T-4-3
[1] Main controller PCB (sub) [8] Ethernet board
[2] SRAM PCB [9] UFR board or Open interface board
[3] HDD [10] USB interface board, TokenRing

board, or USB application interface board
[4] Main controller PCB (main)
4-3
Chapter 4
[5] 512-MB expansion RAM [11] Image conversion board or USB

application interface board
[6] 256/512MB expansion RAM [12] Power distribution PCB
[7] Boot ROM [13] Differential PCB
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
4.2.2 DC Controller PCB 0000-4449
The following is a functional diagram of the DC controller PCB:
Converts control signals sent to

D/A converter (3.3V→ 5V)
Retains various data (parameters for image

formation; margin, color displacement,
Converts signals laser adjustment value, etc.)
from CPU into
analog signals
Laser activation control
IC1019 IC1016
ATR sensor Bk C M Y
control signal BAT IC1018 IC1017
(0 to 12V)
IC1
• SALT sensor IC30 IC24

control signal
• pattern reader unit IC12
control signal(0 to 5V) Controls loads
IC25
Retains settings IC27
data; e.g., service
mode (SRAM) IC49 IC14 CPU
Stores start-up IC15
program (Boot ROM)
Interfaces with
Stores firmware external devices
(Flash ROM)
IC48
Converts signals IC43
24 VDC from CPU to Control signals
IC42
15 VDC analog signals to HVT
(0 to 12V) IC41
5 VDC
3.3 VDC IC40
J100
F-4-4
4-4
Chapter 4
4.3 Basic Sequence

T-4-4
Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) While the drive system is at rest and, in addition, until the
surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
WMUPR (warm-up rotation) After the drive system starts up and, in addition, bias
adjustment is under way.
PSTBY (printer standby) While the machine is ready for a copy/print request signal.
4-5
Chapter 4
Main power switch ON

Reader unit Standby
WMUP SSTBY
30 sec Size detection/shading correction
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor Home position search
(M1)
Starts here if, when the main power is turned
ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90˚C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
Printer unit Main power switch ON have reached 190˚C)
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater 90˚C
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater *1
(H2)
heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
Development rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
Rotates idly for 300

sec after the drum
Auto adjustment ITB motor stops
*1: The main heater or the sub heater is
used for temperature control according to The following control is executed
the difference in the readings between the according to the surface temperature
of the fixing roller when the main
main thermistor (TH1) and the sub power is turned ON:
thermistor (TH2).
• if less than 100˚C, • if 100˚C or higher
(control at 190˚C) [1] discharge current control [1] discharge current control
[2] ATVC control [2] ATVC control
[3] ATR control [3] image position control
[4] SALT-Dmax control
[5] image position correction
[6] SALT-Dhalf control
F-4-5
4-6
Chapter 4
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-5
Period Description
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to accept a copy/print

request signal.
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until an
image signal is sent.
PRINT Until all toner is transferred to paper and the paper is

delivered.
LSTR From when paper is delivered until all drive stops.
Start key Image formation Used to stabilize rotation

Printer unit ON ready timing (Bk: 2.5 sec; Y/M/C: 3.5 sec)
Laser scanner motor
(M2 to M5) (Y,M,C,Bk)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
(M20 to 23) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing motor
(M12 to 15) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant
speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)

Fixing main *1 *1
heater (H1)
Fixing sub *1 *1
heater (H2)
heater (H3)
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub
heater according to the difference in the readings of temperature between
the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 190˚C)
F-4-6
4-7
Chapter 4
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-6
Period Description
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to receive a copy/print

request signal.
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until the
image signal is sent.
PRINT Until all toner is transferred to the paper and the paper
is delivered.
LSTR From when paper is delivered until all drive stops.
Start key Image formation Used to stabilize rotation

Printer unit ON ready timing (2.5 sec)
Laser scanner
motor (Bk) (M5)
ITOP signal
Laser activation
Toner container
motor (Bk) (M23)
Development
motor (Bk) (M15)
Developing basis
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed,
constant speed control (to match
transfer timing and process speed)
Fixing motor (M24)

Fixing main *1 *1
heater (H1)
Fixing sub *1 *1
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention motor (H3)
*1: The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control
according to the difference in the readings of temperature between the main
thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 90˚C)
F-4-7
4-8
Chapter 5 Main
Controller
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 SRAM board ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.2 Startup Sequence ........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.4 Actions when HDD Error .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 Flow of Images ......................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black ........................................................................ 5-17
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing .............................................................................................................. 5-18
5.6 Flow of Image Data ......................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions .................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function ................................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions .............................................................................. 5-22
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions ................................................................................... 5-23
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................... 5-27
5.7.1.11 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ......................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) ...................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.2.7 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ........................................................................................ 5-30
Contents
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .............................................................................. 5-30
5.7.3 SRAM PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ...................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.4 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.7.5 Ethernet Board .......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.6 Differential PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.6.4 Removing the Differential PCB ......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Outline 0006-8424
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the main controller are as follows:
Main controller PCB (main)

Image memory
(512 MB, standard) (256 MB, expanded)
J1202
J1201
Flash ROM
(for boot program)
IC1003
LSI Ethernet board connector
LSI
slot (for support of
IC1012
IC1015 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx)
J1203
IC1018
J1204
UFR board or open

J1207 I/F board connection
IC1029 PCI slot
J1205
TokenRing board or
J1206 USB interface board
connection PCI slot
PCI slot for connection

of USB application
IDE hard disk (40 GB; f Image conversion board interface board
or support of ultra TA/66) connector connection PCI slot
F-5-1
Main Controller PCB (sub)
IC10
IC15
F-5-2
5-1
Chapter 5
The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks (main controller indicated with shading):
Retention of service mode settings/

HDD control information
Image memory (SDRAM)
Reader input image processing
Reader unit
Boot ROM
DC controller PCB
Main controller
SRAM board
PCB (sub)
Main controller
PCB (main)
Accessory
boards
HDD
Printer unit
• system control
• memory control
• printer output image processing
F-5-3
5-2
Chapter 5
5.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

5.2.1 Outline 0000-4283
The major mechanisms of the main controller PCB are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB.
To save on physical space, the machineís main controller PCB is divided into two: main and sub.
The sub PCB serves to process input images coming from the reader unit, while the main PCB serves to control jobs,
output images going to the printer, and memory.
5.2.2 Main Controller PCB 0000-4284
Main Controller PCB (main)
T-5-1
IC No. Description
IC1012 CPU: system control
network controller
PCI bus controller
serial communications controller
ROM/RAM controller
IC1015 image input/output and image processing
IC1003, 1018 image processing control of output image data to printer unit
IC1029 HDD control
Image memory (SDRAM) temporarily stores image data
Boot ROM (Flash ROM) storage of boot program
Main Controller PCB (sub)
T-5-2
IC No. Description
IC10 image processing control of input image data from reader unit
IC15 input/output processing
5-3
Chapter 5
5.2.3 SRAM board 0006-4436
T-5-3
Description
control information on image data stored on the HDD
service mode settings data
5.2.4 HDD 0006-4439
The hard disk is divided into 9 partitions (blocks for storage of specific type of data), with each partition possessing
its own functions:
T-5-4
Partition Description
DOSDEV stores multipurpose data
FSTDEV stores image data
DOSDEV2 stores thumbnail display data (image data)
FSPTDEV stores image data
DOSDEV3 temporarily stores multipurpose file (e.g., PDL spool)
PDLDEV stores PDL-related files
(e.g., font, stored firmware, ICC Profile, PDL color correction

information file)
DOSDEV4 stores user data (address book, transfer settings)
BOOTDEV stores system software
DOSDEV5 for future use
5-4
Chapter 5
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
HDD DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
F-5-4
5.2.5 Composition of the System Software 0006-4453
The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:
T-5-5
System software Description Location Remarks
SYSTEM system module (controls system HDD(BOOTDEV)

as a whole)
Language language module (controls LCD HDD(BOOTDEV)

indication)
RUI language module (controls HDD(BOOTDEV)

remote UI)
BOOT starts up the machine BootROM DIMM
G3FAX controls G3FAX G3FAX board DIMM
Dcon controls the DC controller DC controller PCB soldered in

place
Rcon controls the reader controller reader controller PCB soldered in

place
5-5
Chapter 5
RCON
Reader controller PCB
DCON DC controller PCB
G3Fax board
G3FAX HDD
BOOT
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
Main controller PCB
F-5-5
5-6
Chapter 5
5.3 Start-Up Sequence

5.3.1 Outline 0000-4285
The system control software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. At time of startup, the CPU on the
controller PCB follows the boot program to read the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM)
on the controller PCB.
While the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM), the control panel shows
the following screen, and the startup sequence under way is indicated by the progress bar on the screen.
Starting up. Please wait.
Progress bar
F-5-6
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The HDD is being accessed during the period, and
turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
5.3.2 Startup Sequence 0000-4286
<Boot ROM Area>

- Self Diagnosis Program
When the main power is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the start-up sequence. In the course
of the sequence, the state of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD is checked, and an error code will be
indicated if a fault is detected.
- Boot Program
When the self diagnosis program ends normally, the CPI on the main controller PCB starts up the boot program.
When the program is run, the system software is read from the HDD and is written to the system area of the image
memory (SDRAM).
<Image Memory (SDRAM) Area>
A set of instructions is executed by the system software written in the boot program, initializing various settings (e.g.,
I/F settings of the main controller).
5-7
Chapter 5
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept jobs. (The operation screen will appear
on the control panel, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green.)
- Self Diagnosis Program Is Under Way
Image memory SDRAM
System Image
area area
CPU
HDD
Self diagnos Boot

is program program
BootROM
:Access to the program at time of execution

F-5-7
- Boot Program Is Under Way
Image memory SDRAM
System Image
area area
Systems
CPU software
Self diagnos Boot

is program program HDD
BootROM
: access to program at time of execution

: flow of system program
F-5-8
5-8
Chapter 5
5.4 Actions when HDD Error

5.4.1 E602 in Detail 0006-4492
In the even that the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, different actions are required depending on
the detail code:
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn it off and then on once (so that it will execute automatic
recovery sequence).
T-5-6
xx Partition yy Description
00 HDD as a 01 The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine

whole cannot find BOOTDEV at time of start-up.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of cable
(power, IDE) coming from the HDD; then, turn the
power back on.
At this time, check to see that the HDD is rotating and
it is supplied with power.
NG
F D
02 The machine cannot find the system software of the main

controller (main) CPU in BOOTDEV.
06 The machine cannot find the system software for the main
controller (sub) CPU in BOOTDEV.
07 The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile file in

BOOTDEV/PDLDEV.
Action:
NG
B F
03 When data is being read from BOOTDEV, the machine

detects a read error sector.
Action:
NG NG
H E F
5-9
Chapter 5
T-5-7
01 DOSDEV 01 The machine suffers a read error at time of start-up.

02 FSTDEV
Action:
03 DOSDEV2
NG NG
04 FSTPDEV A B F
05 DOSDEV3
- if xxyy = 0701, 0702
06 PDLDEV
07 DOSDEV4 Action:
08 BOOTDEV Ask the user to collect address book data,
09 DOSDEV5 transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
FF not before starting the work.
identified A
NG
C
NG
F
- xxyy = 0801, FF01
Action:
NG NG
A E F
02 There is a file system error.
Action:
NG
B F
- xxyy = 0702
Action:
Ask the user to collect address book data,
transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
before starting the work.
NG
C F
- if xxyy = 0802, FF02
Action:
NG
B F
03 There is an HDD contact fault or an OS system

error.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
NG NG
E F D
5-10
Chapter 5
11,21 The HDD has poor contact.
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
NG
F D
13,25 There is a read error.
Action:
NG NG
A G F
- if xxyy= 0713, 0725
Action:
NG NG
A C F
- if xxyy = 0813, 0825
Action:
NG NG
A E F
10,12,14,2 There is a system error or a packet data error.

2,23,24
Action:
NG
B F
A:
1) Set '0' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*. (Make these selections, and press the
OK key.)
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
B:
1) By referring to the table "HDD Format," fill 'CHK-TYPE' under the following:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK key.)
C:
1) ** Start up in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the
following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD.
2) Execute DOSDEV4 (formatting) using the SST.
5-11
Chapter 5
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Mount the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM (removed from the previous board) to the new board.
E:
1) ** Start up in save mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys.)
2) Execute HDD formatting using the SST (ALL); then, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
F:
1) ** Replace the HDD, and start up in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down on the 2 and 8
keys).
2) Using the SST, format the HDD (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
G:
1) Set '1' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK
key.)
H:
1) Turn off the main power, and turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys. (In response, the machine
will automatically start its recovery program*, and the control panel will turn completely black.)
2) When the screen has turned white, turn off and then on the main power.
If the recovery program fails to start in response, go to E.
* It will take about 30 to 50 min.

** As necessary, ask the user to make a backup of the address book, transfer, and user mode data using the RUI.
T-5-8
- HDD Format
Partition CHK- Data items that will be lost
TYPE
DOSDEV 1 all relating to images (e.g., reservations, Box,

FSTDEV Fax); mode memory, routine task button
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3 2 PDL spool
PDLDEV 3 PDL-related file (e.g., font, registration form,

ICCProfile)
5-12
Chapter 5
- HDD Format
Partition CHK- Data items that will be lost
TYPE
DOSDEV4 4 user data (address book data, transfer settings,

BOOTDEV system software)
DOSDEV5 5 -
unselected 0 -
5-13
Chapter 5
5.5 Image Processing

5.5.1 Flow of Images 0000-4288
The following diagram shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's various functions:
Other iR machine
Original
A • SEND
Copy Scan • FAX
• PullScan
• E-Mail
A A BOX
Print output Image data • SEND

• FAX
• PDL Print
PC
F-5-9
5-14
Chapter 5
5.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0000-4292
The machine's major image processing is undertaken by the main controller; the construction of the modules
involved in image processing is as follows:
Image memory (SDRAM)
Reader input image processing block

Processes the image data read
by the reader unit.
Reader unit
IC10
DC controller PCB
Main controller
PCB (sub)
C,M IC1003
IC1015 IC1012
Y,Bk IC1018
Main controller
PCB (main)
Printer output image HDD

processing block
Processes image data from
IC1015 for output to the
printer. Printer unit
• JPEG conversion • CPU

• enlargement/reduction, rotation • communications control
• color space conversion • memory access control
• binary processing
• resolution conversion
F-5-10
5-15
Chapter 5
5.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing 0000-4293
The image data read by the reader unit (RGB data) is processed by the main controller PCB (sub).
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller PCB (sub)
Processing that takes the

RG phase correction
place of conventional input
Black text
masking; executes color identification
correction for the CCD's Input γ correction
RGB filters.
Input direct
mapping
ACS
identification
Applicable to monochrome • Edge emphases

mode; hereafter, Bk • Smoothing Image signal
generation
signals only.
• See-through
prevention (BE) 4
• Bk generation
(monochrome mode)
• Framing
• Blanking
• Frame erasing
RGB
IC1015

F-5-11
5-16
Chapter 5
5.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Edit Processing Black 0000-4294
The machine uses IC1015 to undertake compression/decompression and edit processing.
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
Main controller PCB (sub) PCB (main)
RGB 4 Image area signal

24
IC1015
PDL input
JPEG compression SDRAM
Resolution conversion
Enlargement/reduction JPEG decompression
PC
Rotation
IC1012
Color conversion
Binary processing JPEG compression

For fax
JPEG decompression
transmission
IC1003 IC1018
C,M Y,Bk
HDD
F-5-12
5-17
Chapter 5
5.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing 0000-4295
In this block, the machine processes image data coming from IC1015 for output to the printer.
Reader unit
RGB 24
RGB 24 4 Image area

signal
If ACS identifies the original as IC1015
being black-and-white, the Bk
RGB 24 Image area
signal is generated here 4
IC1003 signal
(if color, passed through).
IC1018
• Background removal (AE)
• Bk generation
In the case of color mode, the
Bk signal is generated here. RGB-to-CMY conversion
Output direct mapping

For the text area, UCR
processing CMYK
• F value adjustment
• Color balance correction
The LUT for correction is Output λ correction

generated using PASCAL.
Optimum screen selection
Smoothing
C,M • Framing
• Blanking
To DC controller PCB
Y,Bk

F-5-13
5-18
Chapter 5
5.6 Flow of Image Data

5.6.1 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions 0000-4296
The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB 24 image area signal

DC controller PCB
JPEG Magnification
compression
Rotation
JPEG
decompression
Color conversion
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-14
5-19
Chapter 5
5.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions 0000-4297
The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
DC controller PCB JPEG Decompression

decompression conversion
JPEG
compression
Rotation
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-15
5-20
Chapter 5
5.6.3 Flow of Image data for SEND function 0000-4298
The following shows the flow of image data for SEND functions:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)

Resolution
JPEG
conversion
decompression
for B/Wimage Binary Rotation

processing JPEG
compression
MMR
compression
HDD
SDRAM
Image conversion board
Ethernet board
F-5-16
5-21
Chapter 5
5.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions 0000-4299
The following is the flow of image data for fax transmission functions:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
RGB image area signal

JPEG Resolution
compression conversion
JPEG
decompression Rotation
MMR Binary
compression processing
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-17
5-22
Chapter 5
5.6.5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions 0000-4300
The following is the flow of image data for fax reception functions:
DC controller PCB
Resolution
conversion
Rotation
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-18
5-23
Chapter 5
5.6.6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions 0000-4301
The following is the flow of image data for PDL functions:
Reader unit
Printer unit
Main controller
PCB (sub)
SDRAM
DC controller PCB
IC1015
JPEG
IC1003
IC1012
decompression
IC1018 HDD
JPEG compression
RGB
CMYK UFR board
Option interface board

RGB
CMYK
RGB
PS Printer Server
Unit-C1
Display list data
Printer output image

LIPS data
processing block
LIPS GDI-UFR
PS data
PC
PS
F-5-19
5-24
Chapter 5
5.7 Parts Replacement [1]
Procedure
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main)
5.7.1.1 Removing the Upper

Rear Cover 0000-4303
1) Remove the upper rear cover.

F-5-21
5.7.1.2 Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover 0000-4308
1) Removing the left rear upper cover.

5.7.1.4 Removing the
5.7.1.3 Removing the DC Controller Box Cover 0000-4310
Controller PCB Cover 0000-4309 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
controller PCB cover [2].
detach the main controller cover [4].
F-5-20
When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover F-5-22

When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
5-25
Chapter 5
5.7.1.5 Removing the HDD 0000-4311 5.7.1.7 Removing the Ethernet

Board 0000-4313
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet

Points to Note When Removing the HDD board [2] together with its mounting plate.
When removing the HDD, be sure to take full care
against damage by static discharge. Moreover, do not
subject the HDD to impact.
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD
[4].
F-5-25
2) Removing the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet

board [3] from the mounting plate [2].
F-5-23
5.7.1.6 Removing the Hard

Disk Mounting Plates 0000-4312
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 hard disk

mounting plates [2].
F-5-26
F-5-24
5-26
Chapter 5
5.7.1.8 Removing the UFR

Board 0000-4314
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the UFR board

[2] together with its mounting plate.
F-5-29
5.7.1.10 Removing the Main

F-5-27 Controller PCB (sub) 0000-4316
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and

remove the flat cable [1].
[3] from its mounting plate [2].
F-5-30
F-5-28 2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and remove the main

controller PCB (sub) [2].
5.7.1.9 Removing the SRAM

PCB 0000-4315
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the SRAM

PCB [2].
F-5-31
5-27
Chapter 5

Controller PCB (main) 0000-4317
1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used for connection to

the DC controller PCB.
F-5-34
F-5-32
2) Disconnect the connectors of the PCB; then,

remove the 10 screws [1], and detach the main
controller PCB (main) [2].
F-5-35
5.7.2 Main Controller PCB (sub)


F-5-33 1) Removing the left rear upper cover.
5.7.1.12 When Replacing the 5.7.2.3 Removing the

Main Controller PCB (main) 0000-4318 Controller Box Cover 0000-4323
Be sure to use the image memory (SDRAM) [1] PCB 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power
and the boot ROM [2] from the old PCB on the new distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
main controller PCB (main). wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
5-28
Chapter 5
5.7.2.5 Removing the Hard

Disk Mounting Plates 0000-4325
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 hard disk

mounting plates [2].
F-5-38
F-5-36
5.7.2.4 Removing the HDD 0000-4324
Points to Note When Removing the HDD

against damage by static discharge. Moreover, do not
[4].
F-5-37
5-29
Chapter 5

PCB 0000-4326

PCB [2].
F-5-41
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the

Main Controller PCB (sub) 0000-4329
F-5-39
Be sure to use the SRAM PCB [1] from the old PCB
on the new main controller PCB (sub) [2].
Controller PCB (sub) 0000-4327
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and

remove the flat cable [1].
F-5-42
F-5-40
2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and remove the main

controller PCB (sub) [2].
5-30
Chapter 5
5.7.3 SRAM PCB


Controller Box Cover 0000-4332
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power

wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and F-5-44
PCB 0000-4334

PCB [2].
F-5-45
F-5-43

5.7.3.5 When Replacing the
SRAM PCB 0000-4335

When removing the HDD, be sure to take full care When the SRAM PCB is replaced, all data in its
against damage by static discharge. Moreover, do not memory will be lost (file-related, user mode-related,
subject the HDD to impact. service mode-related, history-related files). There will
be no error operation, and initialization will take place
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and automatically.
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD If you pull out the SRAM PCB from machine B and
[4]. mount it to machine A, the PCB will be initialized and
be rendered useless for machine A or B. Take full
care.
5-31
Chapter 5
1) When you turn on the power after replacing the

SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic
initialization and will indicate a message on its
panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then
on the power switch found on its right side. Follow
the message and turn off and then on the machine.
2) Using service mode, initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON
Before starting the work, be sure to inform the user

that all image data stored in the Box will be lost and
obtain his/her consent.
5.7.4 UFR Board F-5-46
5.7.4.4 Removing the UFR

Board 0000-4341
[2] together with its mounting plate.



wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and F-5-47
[3] from its mounting plate [2].
5-32
Chapter 5
F-5-48
5.7.5 Ethernet Board
5.7.5.1 Removing the Upper F-5-49

1) Remove the upper rear cover. 5.7.5.4 Removing the Ethernet

Board 0000-4346
5.7.5.2 Removing the Left 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet
Upper Rear Cover 0000-4344 board [2] together with its mounting plate.


F-5-50
2) Removing the 2 screws [1], and detach the Ethernet

board [3] from the mounting plate [2].
5-33
Chapter 5
F-5-51
5.7.6 Differential PCB
5.7.6.1 Removing the Upper F-5-52

Differential PCB 0000-4351
5.7.6.2 Removing the Left 1) Remove the flat cable [1].


F-5-53
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the

differential PCB [2].
5-34
Chapter 5
5.7.8 HDD



F-5-54
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB detach the main controller cover [4].

5.7.7.2 Removing the Power

Distribution PCB 0000-4354
1) Disconnect the connectors from the PCB, and

remove the 4 screws [1] to detach the power
distribution PCB [2].
F-5-56

F-5-55 against damage by static discharge. Moreover, do not
[4].
5-35
Chapter 5
control settings>group ID control>count control;

then, check to see that IDs from 00000001 through
00001000 have been prepared.
Make the following selections: user mode>system
control settings>network settings>TCP/IP
settings>IP address; then, set up 'IP address'
'gateway address' and 'subnet mask'
administrator setup; then, fill in 'system control
group ID' and 'system control ID No.' thereafter,
turn off and then on the machine.
If you leave out 'system control group ID' and
F-5-57 'system control ID No.' the service engineer will not
be able to 'register card to device' as part of setup
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the work for NSA.
HDD 0000-4360 3) With the machine in standby state, download the
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used card ID to be used from NSA.
1) Formatting the HDD 4) When the card data has been downloaded from
While holding down the 2 and 8 keys on the control NSA, check to see that the ID data has correctly
panel, turn on the power to start up. Using the HD been downloaded on the screen brought up by
formatting function of the SST, format all making the following selections:
partitions. user mode>system control settings>group ID control
2) Downloading the Software (Only the downloaded ID data must be indicated.)
Using the SST, download the various software 5) Make copies using a user card registered with NSA,
(system, language, RUI). The machine will take and check to see that statistical operations are made
about 10 min to start up after downloading. for the device in question.
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Used Together
with a Card Reader
The card ID used by the NSA resides on the HDD. If
you have replaced the HDD, therefore, you will have
to newly download the card data from NSA to enable
the statistical operations of NSA. After going through
steps 1) and 2) above, perform the following:
1) Set the following in service mode:
Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then,
enter the number of the first card, and press [OK].
(For instance, if cards No. 1 through No. 1000 are
used for group control, enter '1')
2) Turn off and then on the machine; when the
machine has started up, perform the following in
user mode:
5-36
Chapter 5
5.7.9 Controller Fan 5.7.9.3 Removing the

Controller Fan 0000-4302
5.7.9.1 Removing the Upper 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
Rear Cover 0000-8501 screws [2]; then, detach the controller fan [3].


F-5-59
F-5-58
5-37
Chapter 5
5-38
Chapter 6 Original
Exposure System
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) ............. 6-6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio ....................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction .......................................................... 6-9
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................ 6-9
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.3.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) ..................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations ........................................................................................................ 6-11
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp ......................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Left Cover/Reader Right Cover/Reader Front Cover .................................... 6-15
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning Lamp .......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.3.5 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB .................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.4 Interface PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.5 Inverter PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................. 6-22
6.4.6 CCD Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Contents

6.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ......................................................................................................... 6-23
6.4.6.4 Removing the CCD Unit .................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option) ..................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit (option; 100/230v model only) ......................................................... 6-25
6.4.8 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.9.3 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Cover ........................................................... 6-29
6.4.9.4 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................... 6-29
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.10.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................... 6-29
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor .......................................................................... 6-30
6.4.11 Original Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 6-30
6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover ....................................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit .................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.11.4 Removing the Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................. 6-31
6.4.12 Reader Heater (option) ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.4.12.3 Removing the Fuse PCB Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4.12.4 Removing the Reader Heater (option; 100/230V model only) ........................................................ 6-33
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0006-0654
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the original exposure system are as follows:
T-6-1
Item Description
Scanning lamp Xenon lamp
Original scanning in book mode: by moving the scanner
in ADF mode: by moving the scanner
Reading resolution 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Scanner position detection by scanner HP sensor (PS2)
Lens lens array (single focus, fixed)
Enlargement/reduction (zoom) in copyboard cover mode: 100%
in ADF mode: 100%
in main scanning direction, image processing in the

controller unit
in sub scanning direction, image processing in the controller

unit
Scanner drive control No. 1/No. 2 mirror mount (control by a pulse motor M1)
Scanning lamp [1] activation control by an inverter circuit
Activation control [2] detection of error
Original size identification [1] in book mode,
sub scanning direction: by reflection type sensor
main scanning direction: by CCD
[2] in ADF mode: by ADF
6.1.2 Major Components 0000-4383
The major components of the original exposure system are as f follows:
T-6-2
Component Notation Description
Scanning lamp LA1 xenon lamp (intensity of 35,000 lx)
Scanner motor M1 2-phase pulse motor (pulse control)
Scanner HP sensor PS2 photointerrupter (scanner home position detection)
6-1
Chapter 6
Copyboard cover open/ PS1 photointerrupter (copyboard cover state (open/closed)

closed sensor detection; identifies as being "Closed"when the
copyboard is brought down to 30 deg or lower)
Mirror --- No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 mirror
Scanner motor
Scanner HP sensor
Interface PCB
CCD unit
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Fuse PCB
Inverter PCB
Anti-condensation heater
Available as option only for Original size sensor
100/230V model (Inch)
Original size sensor
(AB, Inch)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-1
Start position Shading position
Home position sensor detection position Original size detection position
Image leading edge
Vertical size plate

White plate
Original
No. 2 mirror Scanning lamp
Copyboard glass
No. 1 mirror base (w/ integrated white plate)
No. 3 mirror No. 1 mirror Lens

CCD
No. 2 mirror base
F-6-2
6-2
Chapter 6
Scanner motor (M1)
Light-blocking plate
Scanning
Scanner HP
lamp (LA1)
sensor (PS2)
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base

F-6-3
Scanner motor (M1)
Light-blocking plate
Scanning
Scanner HP
lamp (LA1)
sensor (SR2)
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base

F-6-4
6-3
Chapter 6
6.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-4384
The control system of the original exposure system is constructed as follows:
Scanner motor (M1)

Scanner motor drive control

To printer Interface PCB
(main controller)
CCD unit
J
03 306
J3
To DF 08 02
05 J3 J2 04
J3 3 07 J2
J3 J 03 05
10 J 2 J 2
06
J2
J6
01
J6
02
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Scanning lamp
Scanner HP sensor activation control
Inverter PCB
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-5
6.1.4 Reader Controller PCB 0000-4385
The construction of the functions of the reader controller PCB is as follows:
Image processing (shading correction)
Storage of start-up program (boot ROM)
Scanner motor
Storage of firmware
(flash ROM)
Printer unit DF
Not used
DC24V J203 J202

J210
DC15V IC7 IC14
DC5V IC16 IC5
DC3.3V (CPU)
J201
J204
J206 J205 J207 IC3 J208
Original size sensor Original size sensor

Inverter
PCB
Backup of service
mode settings
(EEP ROM)
CCD unit
F-6-6
6-4
Chapter 6
6.2 Basic Sequence

CCD output gain adjustment

(for color original)
ON (to stabilize lamp intensity)
CCD output gain adjustment
Main power (for black-and-white original)
switch ON
SREADY STBY
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor(M1) Reverse Forward Forward
Shading position Original size detection position

F-6-7
Original size
HP sensor
Image Original size
Start Shading leading detection
HP position position edge position
1. (The main power switch is

turned on.)
The scanner is moved to the
shading position.
2. The scanner is moved to the

scanner size detection position.
: No. 1 mirror base position

F-6-8
6-5
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start

Key (book mode, 1 original) 0000-4387
Shading correction Shading correction

(for 1st sheet) (for 2nd sheet)
Start key
ON
STBY SREADY SCFW SCRW STBY
Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
Reverse Reverse Forward
Scanner motor(M1)
Original size Start position Start position

detection position Shading position HP
Shading position Original size
detection position
F-6-9
HP sensor
Image Original size Image

Start Shading leading detection trailing Stop
HP position position edge position edge position
1. (The Start key is pressed.)
The scanner moves to the
shading position.
2. After shading correction,
the scanner moves to the
start position.
3. The scanner scans the
original.
4. The scanner moves to
the shading position.
5. After shading correction,
the scanner moves to the
start position.
the start position.
the original size detection : No. 1 mirror base position
position.
F-6-10
6-6
Chapter 6
6.3 Various Control Mechanisms

6.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
6.3.1.1 Outline 0000-4388
The following shows the parts associated with the scanner drive system:
[1]
Reader
controller Interface
PCB PCB [2]
Scanner motor (M1)
[3]
Light-blocking
plate Scanning lamp
(LA1)
(forward)
Copyboard cover (reverse)

open/closed sensor
(PS1) Scanner HP
sensor (PS2)
No. 1 mirror base
No. 2 mirror base

F-6-11
1. Scanner Motor (M1) Drive Signal

turns on/off the motor, and controls the direction/speed of its rotation.
2. Scanner HP Detection Signal
indicates that the No. 1 mirror base is in the home position.
3. Copyboard Cover Detection Signal
identifies the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.
6-7
Chapter 6
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor 0000-4389
The following shows the construction of the control system of the scanner motor; the motor driver operates in
response to signals from the CPU to turn on/off the scanner motor or to control the direction/speed of its rotation.
Reader controller PCB Interface PCB

Scanner
+24V/15V motor
J202 J308 J306
A
3 M1
[1]
1
CPU A*
4
Motor driver B
5
2
B*
6
[1] Scanner motor control signal

F-6-12
a. Moving the Scanner in Reverse for Image Scanning

After scanning an image, the movement of the No. 1 mirror base to the shading position is controlled at a speed
twice as high as it is moved to scan an image regardless of the color mode.
b. Moving the Scanner Forward for Image Scanning
To scan an image, the movement of the No. 1 mirror base unit is controlled by the following motor control
mechanism:
Start
position Image leading edge Image trailing edge Stop
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
Travel
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Travel distance
[1] Acceleration area: accelerates to a speed suited to black-and-white/SEND
mode or full-color mode
[2] Approach speed area: allows a margin of acceleration (approach run) to ensure
stable speed
[3] Reading image area: reads images at specific speed (if black-and-white/SEND
mode, twice as fast as in full-color mode)
[4] Deceleration area: decelerates after the image trailing edge for a stop
F-6-13
MEMO:
The scanner is moved at the following speed to suit the selected mode:
- in full-color copy mode, 117 mm/sec.
- in black-and-white copy/black-and-white SEND mode, 234 mm/sec
- full-color SEND mode, 234 mm/sec (300 dpi or less);
117 mm/sec (more than 300 dpi)
6-8
Chapter 6
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction
6.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio 0000-4390
1. in copyboard cover mode, 100%

2. in ADF mode, 100%
MEMO:
- The speed of scanning is 234 mm/sec in black-and-white copy or black-and-white SEND mode (reduction by 50%);
to make up for the difference, the reading speed of the CCD is doubled, ultimately resulting in a 100%
reproduction ratio.
- The same is true of a resolution of 300 dpi or less in full-color SEND mode.
6.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4391
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in main scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
6.3.2.3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction 0000-4392
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in sub scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
6.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp
6.3.3.1 Outline 0000-4393
The items of control related to the scanning lamp and the construction of its control system are as follows:
1) turning on/off the lamp
2) checking for a fault
Inverter PCB J601 J206 Reader controller PCB

GND
1 9
GND
2 8
Xenon lamp 3 GND
7
GND
4 6
Activation 5 LAMP-ON
5
24V CPU
control circuit 6
24V
4
LA1 7 3
8 Sync signal 2
24V
9 1
F-6-14
6-9
Chapter 6
6.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp 0000-4394
The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp made up of a glass tube in which xenon gas is sealed. On the outside
of the tube are 2 terminals laid in parallel in axial direction, while the inner side of the tube is coated with fluorescent
material. When a high frequency, high voltage is applied to the terminals, the gas starts to discharge, thus causing
the fluorescent material to emit light.
Electrode Electrode
Fluorescent Open interval

material
Glass tube
Electrode Electrode
F-6-15
6.3.3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp 0000-4395
The scanning lamp is turned on/off by the drive signal (LAMP_ON) sent by the CPU on the reader controller PCB.
When the signal is sent, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency, high voltage in the activation control circuit
using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB for the activation of the xenon lamp.
6.3.3.4 Checking for an Error 0000-4396
At time of initial activation (e.g., shading correction), the lamp is checked for a fault (low intensity, activation failure;
i.e., activation error caused by lack of intensity).
E220 (lamp activation error at power-on)

Indicates a fault in the inverter PCB, reader controller PCB, or scanning
6.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals
6.3.4.1 Outline 0000-4397
The machine identifies the size of originals with reference to the combinations of the outputs of reflection type
sensors and the intensities of the CCD measured at specific points.
- in main scanning direction, of CCD (for AB, 4 points; for Inch, 2 points)
- in sub scanning direction, of reflection type photosensor (for AB, 1 point; for Inch, 2 points)
The machine identifies the size of an original using the following steps:
1. Search for External Light (main scanning direction only)
With the scanning lamp OFF, the level of the CCD at each point of detection is measured.
2. Detection of the Sensor Output Level
The scanning lamp is turned on, and the CCD level at each point of detecting in main scanning direction is
measured.
In addition, the LED of the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the output
of the sensor.
6-10
Chapter 6
The combination of these outputs is used to identify the size of the original.
For specific operation, see the pages that follow.
6.3.4.2 Points of Detection (original size) 0000-4398
For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following positions to measure the intensity of
light at each point of detection. For sub scanning direction, the outputs of the sensors mounted at the following points
are used.
AB-configuration Inch-configuration
Original Original Original

sensor 1 sensor 1 sensor 2
Original detection
position1 B5R
Original detection
position2 A4R Original detection
position 1 LTRR LGL
Original detection
position3 B5 B4
Original detection 279.4×431.8mm
Original detection A4 A3
position4 position 2 LTR (11"×17")
CCD original detection position CCD original detection position

F-6-16
6.3.4.3 Outline of Detection Operations 0000-4399
a. Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Closed
T-6-3
1. The machine is in a standby state.
Xenon lamp No. 1 mirror at original detection position

base:
Original sensor
xenon lamp: OFF
Original detection position 1
Copyboard cover Original detection position 2
Original detection position 3
original
Reader unit Original detection position 4
sensor:
Copyboard glass
Original detection positio
2. The copyboard cover is opened.
No. 1 mirror at original detection point

base:
xenon lamp: OFF

(external light)
original OFF
sensor:
6-11
Chapter 6
3. The copyboard cover is closed.
- If the external light is blocked, the machine

assumes the presence of an original; outside the
Original
(A4R)
area, where light is detected, the machine
(external light) assumes that there is no original. (search for

external light)
At this point in time, B5, B4, A4, and A3 are

excluded.
- When the copyboard cover is brought to 30

deg, the copyboard cover sensor identifies the
condition to be "cover closed," thus causing the
machine to start original size detection.
- After a search for external light, the machine
30˚ turns on the xenon lamp (for main scanning

direction), and checks the reflected light by the
CCD at 4 points. For sub scanning direction,
the machine efers to the outputs of original
sensors.
4. The copyboard cover is fully down.
- The machine monitors the outputs of the

sensors for 5 sec after the copyboard cover
sensor has identified a "closed" state.
-If there is no change in the level, the machine

assumes the presence of an original at the
sensor. The machine uses the combination of
the outputs (changes) at 5 points.
5. The machine is in a standby sate (waiting for a

press on the Start key).
No. 1 mirror at original detection position

base:
xenon lamp: OFF
original OFF
sensor:
6-12
Chapter 6
AB-configuration Inch-configuration
Original CCD detection position Original Original CCD detection Original Original
position
size 1 2 3 4 sensor 1 size 1 2 sensor 1 sensor 2
A3 11" X 17"
B4 LGL
A4R LTRR
A4 LTR
B5 None
B5R
None :change absent : change present
F-6-17
6-13
Chapter 6
6.4 Parts Replacement

Procedure
6.4.1 Copyboard Glass

Copyboard Glass 0000-4400
1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover. F-6-19

2)
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass

retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Glass
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-20
6.4.1.2 After Replacing the

Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass (F01-

301-04) using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
Use it to enter data for the standard white plate.
820686679349
F-6-21
F-6-18
6-14
Chapter 6
6.4.2 Exposure Lamp

1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover.

2)
F-6-23
Glass
it.
F-6-24
6.4.2.2 Removing the Reader

Left Cover/Reader Right
Cover/Reader Front Cover 0000-4424
1) Remove the reader left cover, reader right cover,

and reader front cover.
6.4.2.3 Removing the CCD

Unit Cover 0000-4425
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit

F-6-22 cover [2].
6-15
Chapter 6
3) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] until it matches

against the cut-off in the frame; then, remove the 3
screws [2], and remove the scanning lamp [3].
F-6-25
6.4.2.4 Removing the Scanning

Lamp 0000-4426
F-6-28
1) Peel the sheet [1] (1 each at front and rear) of the
reader frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Scanning

Lamp
To mount the scanning lamp, route the harness [1] of
the lamp unit through the white guide [2] of the No. 2
mirror base and then the black harness guide [3];
thereafter, connect the connector [4] to the inverter
PCB.
F-6-26
2) Disconnect the connector [1] from the inverter

PCB, and free the harness [3] from the edge saddle
[2] of the frame.
F-6-29
F-6-27
6-16
Chapter 6
6.4.3 Reader Controller PCB


2)
F-6-31
Glass
it.
F-6-32


cover [2].
F-6-30
F-6-33
6-17
Chapter 6
6.4.3.3 Removing the Original

Size Detection Unit 0000-8293 J203 J202
J210 IC7 IC14
IC16 IC5
(CPU)
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 J201 ON
J204 OFF
SW1
J206 J205 J207 1 2J208

screws [2]; then, detach the original size detection IC3
unit [3]. F-6-36
T-6-4
SW-1 SW-2
AB OFF OFF
A ON OFF
A/INCH OFF ON
AB/INCH ON ON
- Using the SST, download the latest firmware.

F-6-34
- Enter the values indicated on the service label in
service mode (refer to the following list).
6.4.3.4 Removing the Reader COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X
Controller PCB 0000-4432 Use it to adjust the scanner leading edge position.
1) Remove the 5 flat cables [1], disconnect the COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
connector [2], and remove the 4 screws [3]; then, Use it to adjust the CCD read start cell position.
detach the reader controller PCB [4]. COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner
shading measurement point.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X
Use it to enter white level data for the standard
while plate.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y
white plate.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z
while plate.
F-6-35
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-RG
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
6.4.3.5 When Replacing the for sub scanning direction.
Reader Controller PCB 0000-4433 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-GB
- Set the DIP switch on the reader controller PCB to Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
the same settings as the initial PCB. for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-RG
for sub scanning direction.
6-18
Chapter 6
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-GB
F-6-37
6.4.4 Interface PCB


2)
F-6-38
Glass
it.
6-19
Chapter 6

F-6-41
F-6-39 6.4.4.3 Removing the Interface

PCB 0000-4403
1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB
power cable. Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of
the rear side plate using a scriber [A].
[1]
F-6-40
2) Disconnect the reader controller communications F-6-42

cable.
3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the reader rear
cover [2]. 1) Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding
screws [2]; then, detach the I/F PCB cover [3].
6-20
Chapter 6
6.4.5 Inverter PCB


2)

F-6-43 Glass
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3]. it.
F-6-44
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and the 2 flat

cables [2], and remove the 5 screws [3] then, detach
the interface PCB unit [4].
F-6-46
F-6-45
6-21
Chapter 6
6.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter

PCB 0000-4431
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the flat

cable; then, remove the screw [3], and detach the
inverter PCB [4].
F-6-47

F-6-50
6.4.6 CCD Unit


2)
F-6-48
6.4.5.2 Removing the CCD Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Unit Cover 0000-8288 Glass
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
cover [2]. touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
it.
F-6-49
6-22
Chapter 6
F-6-53


cover [2].
F-6-51
F-6-54

F-6-52
Size Detection Unit 0000-8286
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4

screws [2]; then, detach the original size detection
unit [3].
6-23
Chapter 6
6.4.7 Fuse PCB (option)

1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader

power cable.
F-6-55
[1]

Unit 0000-4429
4) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] of the reader controller

F-6-57
PCB, 2 screws [2], and leaf spring [3]; then, detach
the CCD unit [4].
2) Disconnect the reader controller communications
cable.
cover [2].
F-6-56

F-6-58
CCD Unit 0000-4430
When you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the

values (for color displacement correction in sub
Copyboard Cover Open/
scanning direction) indicated on the label attached to
the unit in service mode: Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-4412
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the sensor

Use it to enter the image position correction value base [2].
(dependent on the CCD unit).
6-24
Chapter 6

F-6-59
6.4.7.3 Removing the Fuse

PCB Unit (option; 100/230v
model only) 0000-4413
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], ad remove the 2

screws [2]; then, remove the fuse PCB unit [3].
F-6-61
F-6-60
6.4.8 Scanner Motor

Copyboard Glass 0006-7342 F-6-62

2)

Glass
it.
6-25
Chapter 6
6.4.8.3 Removing the Interface

PCB 0000-4420
Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB

Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of
the rear side plate using a scriber [A].
F-6-63


power cable.
F-6-66
1) Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding

[1] screws [2]; then, detach the I/F PCB cover [3].
F-6-64

cable.
cover [2].
F-6-67
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2

connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
F-6-65
6-26
Chapter 6
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the scanner

motor [2].
F-6-68
3) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and the 2 flat F-6-71

cables [2], and remove the 5 screws [3] then, detach
the interface PCB unit [4]. 6.4.8.5 Mounting the Scanner
Motor 0000-4422
1) Fit the scanner motor from the machine's rear, and

attach the belt [1] on the pulley [2] of the motor unit
through the space (front side) vacated by the
copyboard glass.
F-6-69
6.4.8.4 Removing the Scanner

Motor 0000-4421
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the DF base F-6-72

[2].
2) With the belt on the pulley, pull the motor unit [1]
as far as the marking [A] you have drawn with a
scriber; then, secure it in place with 3 screws [2].
F-6-70
6-27
Chapter 6
F-6-73 F-6-75

Points to Note After Mounting the Scanner Motor Closed Sensor Mounting 0006-7327
When you have mounted the motor, either move the
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the sensor
mirror or make a test print (so as to be sure that the
base [2].
motor belt is correctly placed).
6.4.9 Original Cover Sensor


power cable.
F-6-76
[1]
F-6-74

cable.
cover [2].
6-28
Chapter 6

Closed Sensor Cover 0000-4406
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the

[1]
screws [2]; then, detach the sensor cover [3].
F-6-79

cable.
cover [2].
F-6-77

Closed Sensor 0000-4407
1) Remove the copyboard cover open/closed sensor

[1].
F-6-80

Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-4409

base [2].
F-6-78
6.4.10 Scanner HP Sensor


power cable.
F-6-81
6-29
Chapter 6
6.4.10.3 Removing the Mirror

Base Home Position Sensor 0000-4410
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the mirror

base home position sensor [2].
F-6-82
6.4.11 Original Sensor

F-6-83

2)

Glass
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.) F-6-84
6-30
Chapter 6
F-6-85 F-6-87
6.4.11.2 Removing the CCD 6.4.11.4 Removing the Original

Unit Cover 0000-8282 Size Sensor 0000-4428
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit 1) While freeing the claw at the edge, detach the
cover [2]. original size sensor [1].
F-6-88
F-6-86

6.4.12 Reader Heater (option)
Size Detection Unit 0000-4427
screws [2]; then, detach the original size detection Copyboard Glass 0000-8933
unit [3]. 1) Open the ADF or the copyboard cover.

2)

Glass
it.
6-31
Chapter 6

F-6-91


power cable.
F-6-89 [1]
F-6-92

cable.
cover [2].
F-6-90

F-6-93
6-32
Chapter 6

PCB Unit 0000-4416
1) Remove the fuse PCB unit.

Heater (option; 100/230V
model only) 0000-4417
1) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] into the direction of

the arrow. F-6-96
2) Remove the 3 screws used to secure the Reader

heater [1] in place, and remove the harness band
[3].
F-6-94
When moving the mirror base, be sure to hold the cut-

up [A] on the mirror stay.
F-6-97
3) Shift the mirror base to the farthest right, and free

the harness guide [1] at one location; then, while
shifting it to the left, detach the harness guide, and
detach the Reader heater [2].
F-6-95
F-6-98
6-33
Chapter 6
6-34
Chapter 7 Image
Processing System
Contents
Contents
7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Analog Image Processing .................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 CCD Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Digital Image Processing ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Chapter 7
7.1 Outline
The machine's image processing system has the following specifications and functions:
T-7-1
1) CCD (image sensor) number of lines:3 (RGB, 1 line each)
number of pixels:7350
size of pixel:9.3X9.3 um
2) Shading Correction shading adjustment: executed in service mode
shading correction: executed for each copy
7.1.2 Functional Construction of the PCBs 0000-4435
Analog image processing block Digital image processing block
CCD
Analog A/D
image conversion Controller block
processing Shading processing
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-1
The PCBs of the image processing system have the following functions:
T-7-2
1) CCD/P PCB: CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion
2) Reader Controller PCB: shading correction
7-1
Chapter 7
7.2 Analog Image Processing

7.2.1 Outline 0000-4436
The machine uses the CCD/AP PCB to perform analog image processing for each RGB line; the major operations
involved are as follows:
T-7-3
1
CCD drive
)
2
CCD output gain correction, offset correction
)
3
CCD output A/D conversion
)
CCD (RGB, 1 line each) J101 J204

A12V
A5V
Odd-numbered Even-numbered
pixel pixels CCD J204
Analog CCD drive control signal
image control Reader
signal controller
PCB
Analog image Even-numbered Gain
processing pixel correction data
A/D Digital
• gain correction Odd-numbered conversion image signal
pixel
• offset correction
10
J102 J205
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-2
7-2
Chapter 7
7.2.2 CCD Drive 0000-4437
The CCD sensor used in the machine is a 3-line (RGB, 1 line each) linear image sensor consisting of photocells of
7350 pixels. The signals photo-converted by the light-receiving block are sent out as analog signals of 2 channels
(even-numbered pixels EVEN and odd-numbered pixels ODD).
Output buffer
Shift register Odd-numbered data
Gate
Light-receiving block
6 5 4 3 2 1
(photodiode)
Gate
shift register Even-numbered data
Output buffer
F-7-3
CCD Block Diagram
7.2.3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction 0000-4438
The analog video signals from the CCD are modified so that the rate of its amplitude is of a specific level (gain
correction); it is also modified so that its output voltage in the absence of incident light is a specific level (offset
correction).
7.2.4 A/D Conversion of CCD Putput 0000-4439
The odd-numbered and even-numbered analog video signals after correction are further converted into 10-bit digital
signals corresponding to the levels of the pixel voltages by the A/D converter.
7-3
Chapter 7
7.3 Digital Image Processing

7.3.1 Outline 0006-0674
The machine uses the reader controller PCB for digital image processing; the major operations involved are as
follows:
1. Shading Correction

J101 J204
Gain EEP-ROM
correction data Target
CPU value
CCD/AP SRAM
PCB
J102 J205 J203
Digital
image signal Digital image signal
Shading correction
10 8
F-7-4
7.3.2 Shading Correction 0006-0678
The output of the CCD is not necessarily uniform even when the density of the original is even for the following
factors:
1. variation in sensitivity among pixels of the CCD
2. difference in transmission between the middle and the edge of the lens
3. difference in the intensity of light between the middle and the edges of the scanning lamp
4. deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine executes shading correction so as to even out the discrepancies in CCD output. Shading correction may
be shading adjustment, in which a target value is determined in service mode, or shading correction, in which a target
value is determined for each scan of the original.
Shading Adjustment
In shading adjustment, the density of the standard white plate is measured, and the result is stored in memory as
density data; the data is then computed to obtain the target value for shading correction.
Shading Correction
Shading correction is executed for each scan of the original. The density of the standard white plate is measured, and
the shading correction circuit compares the result against the target value stored in memory in advance; the result of
comparison is then used as the shading correction value to make up for the discrepancies among CCD pixels
occurring at time of scans, thus ensuring uniform image density.
7-4
Chapter 7
CCD output Characteristics

after correction
Characteristics
Target value
before correction
Measurement
taken
White
Density of original
Standard white plate
F-7-5
7-5
Chapter 7
7-6
Chapter 8 Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.2 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser .................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.2 BD Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction .................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ..................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.2.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.2 PWM Control ...................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ............................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement ................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.3.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction ....................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................. 8-13
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction ........................................................... 8-14
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction ........................................... 8-16
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................... 8-17
8.4.1 Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................... 8-20
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
T-8-1
Laser light
Wave length 780 nm (infrared)
Output 5 mW
Number of laser beams 2
T-8-2
Scanner motor
Type of motor DC brush-less
Number of revolutions 23000 rpm (approx.)
Type of bearing Oil
T-8-3
Polygon mirror
Number of facets 4 facets (f20)
T-8-4
Control mechanisms
Sync control main scanning direction
sub scanning direction
Light intensity APC control
PWM control
Color displacement correction reproduction ratio in main scanning

direction
displacement in main scanning direction
Others scanner motor control
laser shutter control
laser ON/OFF control
8-1
Chapter 8
T-8-5
Name Description
Laser driver generates laser light.
Polygon mirror scans the laser beam in main scanning direction.
guide mirror directs laser light in the direction of the drum.
Corrective lens corrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide
mirror in main scanning direction.
displacement correction moves the corrective lens to correct displacement in main

motor scanning direction.
BD detection PCB detects laser light as a BD signal.
BD mirror reflects the laser light in the direction of the BD detection

PCB.
Guide mirror
Polygon mirror
Laser driver
Corrective lens
(front)
Displacement
correction motor
(rear)
Photosensitive drum
F-8-1
8-2
Chapter 8
BD detection PCB
BD mirror
F-8-2
The laser exposure system is controlled mainly by the DC controller PCB.
Laser scanner motor control
PWM
signal ON/OFF
control
Main
APC Main scanning direction
control scanning
sync control
direction
correction
J114(Y)/J116(M)/ control
J118(C)/J120(Bk) J117
J117
J115
J1216
IC for
J113
PWMIC
control
Image data
PWM
control
DC controller PCB Main controller PCB
J129
Laser shutter control
Manual feed unit

Fixing feeder unit
Front cover
F-8-3
8-3
Chapter 8
8.2 Basic Sequence

The laser scanner motor starts to rotate when the Start key is pressed (or the print request signal is issued). When its
rotation has stabilized, the printer unit becomes ready for formation of images, causing the printer side to generate
the sync signal (PTOP).
The machine uses the signal to generate the sub scanning direction signals (Y-TOP, M-TOP, C-TOP, K-TOP) for
individual colors, and turns on the lasers of the corresponding colors.
Print request signal Image formation

(Start key ON) enable timing
Used to stabilize
Polygon motor rotation(3.5sec)
(Y,M,C,Bk)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C ON
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-4
8-4
Chapter 8
8.3 Various Control

8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser 0000-4456
The laser light is turned on/off in keeping with combinations of control signals (TRL0/1/2) from the DC controller
PCB.
T-8-6
CTR CTR CTR Status of laser A Status of laser B

L2 L1 L0
0 0 0 OFF OFF
0 0 1 OFF APC control

(bias current applied)
0 1 0 APC control OIFF

(bias current applied)
0 1 1 OFF OFF
(bias current applied) (bias current applied)
1 0 0 ON ON
(for factory adjustment) (for factory adjustment)
1 0 1 OFF ON
(bias current applied) (for factory adjustment)
1 1 0 ON OFF
(for factory adjustment) (bias current applied)
1 1 1 ON ON
(for image formation) (for image formation)
8-5
Chapter 8
Y-CRL-0
Y-CRL-1
Y-CRL-2
J114
for M: J116
for C: J118
for Bk: J120
DC controller PCB
F-8-5

PSTBY PINTR PRINT

Polygon motor
(Y, M, C, Bk)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser ON
For laser A
BD detection, APC control ON
For laser B
BD detection, APC control ON
Image equivalent of 1 line Image equivalent of 1 line
F-8-6
8-6
Chapter 8
8.3.1.2 BD Signal 0000-4457
- The machine is equipped with a laser unit that can generate 2 channels of laser light (A and B).
- These 2 channels of laser light are based on separate BD signals.
BD signal
J115
A/B
separation
BD for
laser A
BD for
laser B
DC controller PCB
F-8-7
8-7
Chapter 8
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4458
The control of synchronization in main scanning direction is based on the BD signal.
BD detection PCB
BD detection signal
The BD signal is separated
into 2 channels for laser A
and laser B.
Clock signals/
sync signals J115
based on the DC controller PCB
BD signal are
generated.
PWMIC A/B
separation
A
B
FIFO
Image signal for laser A
Image signal for laser B

Video signals are
generated in keeping
with the sync signals.
F-8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction 0000-4459
- The synchronization in sub scanning direction is controlled with reference to the PTOP signal (image formation
start signal).
- When the mechanism becomes ready for image formation, the PTOP signal (image formation start signal) is
generated, turning on the individual lasers based on the signal.
8-8
Chapter 8

Laser scanner Used to stabilize

rotation (3.5sec)
motor (Y,M,C,Bk)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C signal
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-9
8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light
8.3.2.1 APC Control 0000-4460
The machine uses the photodiode mounted on the laser driver PCB to monitor the intensify of laser light so as to
ensure that it remains at a specific level.
8.3.2.2 PWM Control 0000-4461
- A single pixel is divided into 32, and a 16-level activation pattern is selected to suit the image data in question.
Pixels
Lowest intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
16 levels of
intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
Highest intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
F-8-10
8-9
Chapter 8
8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 0000-4462
The machine uses the acceleration/deceleration signal to control the speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor so
that the BD signal from individual laser units will be of the same phase as the reference signal (if the BD signal is
behind the reference signal, accelerate; if ahead, decelerates).
Deceleration signal
Acceleration signal
BD signal
J117 J115
IC for
control
Reference
signal
DC controller PCB
F-8-11
8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter
8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0000-4463
The laser light is turned off whenever a cover (indicated) that can let laser light to escape is opened:
- front cover
- manual feed unit
- fixing feeder unit
If any of the covers (units) is opened, the operation voltage applied to the latest driver is turned off and, in addition,
the laser control signal/image signal is also turned off.
8-10
Chapter 8
Front cover switch
Manual feed unit

open/closed switch
Fixing feeder unit

open/closed switch
DC5V
Control signal
DC power
Image signal
supply unit
Front cover
open/closed sensor
PWMIC Control IC
PS23
J129
Manual feed unit

open/closed sensor
PS28
J127
Fixing feeder unit

open/closed sensor
PS5 DC controller PCB
F-8-12
8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement
8.3.5.1 Outline 0000-4464
The following factors can displace images of individual colors:

- displacement of the photosensitive drum caused by replacement of the drum unit/toner container
->displacement in sub scanning direction
- displacement of laser path caused by replacement of laser unit
->displacement/angle in main scanning direction
- displacement in laser path length caused by changes in temperature inside machine
->variation in magnification
To correct the discrepancies in images, the machine executes corrective control for image position; it detects
displacement in color by forming a pattern of a specific color on the transfer belt and reading it against the correct
position.
8-11
Chapter 8
Detecting displacement in color
• Forms an image position correction pattern on the transfer belt (direct transfer).
• Reads the individual pattern (of different colors) using the pattern reader
photo sensors.
• Identifies displacement in color with reference to the pattern signals in the

DC controller.
Displacement in sub scanning corrects the write start position in

direction sub scanning direction.
Displacement in main scanning corrects the start position in main

direction scanning direction.
Angle in main scanning corrects the laser path inside the

direction laser unit.
Discrepancy in reproduction corrects image data generation timing

ratio in main scanning direction in main scanning direction
F-8-13
Photosensor
LED
Bk
C
M Reader for individual
Y color patterns
Bk
C
M
Y
F-8-14
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction 0000-4465
The machine detects/corrects color displacement at the following timing:

- during warm-up after the main power switch is turned on
- during warm-up after jam clear
- during warm-up after return from sleep
- during warm-up after replacement of the drum unit (not when the toner container is replaced)
- during warm-up when low-power mode is turned on after opening/closing of the cover while the machine is in low-
8-12
Chapter 8
power mode
- 2 hr after the machine has been left alone in standby state
- during quick correction (auto gradation correction)
- after sheet-to-sheet auto correction when 300 sheets (small-size, equivalent in single-sided) have been fed
continuously
- during last rotation auto correction at time of counter increments occurring after intermittent jobs of 300 pages
(small-size, equivalent of single-sided)
- in response to changes in the environment
- when replacing the toner cartridge
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 0000-4466
The Y pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the degree of color displacement in sub scanning
direction with reference to the timing at which other color patterns are checked after a check on the Y pattern.
If the timing is not correct, the machine corrects the laser write start timing in sub scanning direction.
For C
For Bk
rear
For C
For Bk
Correct position Too early

front
F-8-15
Displacement in sub
scanning direction
F-8-16
8-13
Chapter 8
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4467
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference
to front/rear discrepancies of individual colors.
rear
Displacement
front
F-8-17
Angle
F-8-18
If the machine detects any angle, it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the
laser unit.
8-14
Chapter 8
Main scanning
direction correction
motor
Main scanning direction angle

correction lens
F-8-19
8-15
Chapter 8
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction 0000-4468
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine compares the length of the center line of the Bk image position
correction pattern (front) and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern (front) of individual
colors, and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects color displacement, it corrects the timing at which the laser is started in main scanning
direction.
Displacement in main
scanning direction
F-8-20
Bk C M Y
F-8-21
8-16
Chapter 8
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning

Direction 0000-4469
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine copies the center line of the Bk image correction pattern (rear)
and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns (rear), and identifies the difference between
the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects any change, it corrects the timing at which the video signals are transferred to the laser
unit.
(rear)
Bk C M Y
F-8-22
8-17
Chapter 8
Change in reproduction ratio in

main scanning direction
PWMIC
Video signal for laser A
Video signal for laser B
Frequency
control block
The machine changes the
frequency of the image clock
to change the reproduction DC controller PCB
ratio in main scanning direction.
F-8-23
8-18
Chapter 8

Procedure
8.4.1 Laser Unit
8.4.1.1 Removing the Center

Delivery Tray 0000-4289
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center

F-8-26
delivery tray [2].
3) Remove the face cap [1] and the screw [2]; then,
while lifting the rear reader unit [3] slightly, detach
the upper inside cover [4].
F-8-24
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser

F-8-27
Unit 0000-4471
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader ink 4) Shift the arm [1] of the reader link unit 90 deg to
unit cover [2]. support the reader unit.
F-8-25
F-8-28
2) Remove the stepped screw [1], and detach the
positioning pin [2] from the reader link unit. 5) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and detach the
harness guide [2].
8-19
Chapter 8
F-8-29 F-8-31
6) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cover [2]

of the laser driver PCB. (The cover for Y has a MEMO:
different shape, but may be removed in the same When mounting the laser unit, tighten the screws in
way.) diagonal sequence for proper balance.

Laser Unit 0000-4291
If you have replaced the laser unit, execute the

following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser
intensity.
F-8-30
7) Disconnect the connector[1], and remove the 4

screws [2];then, detach the laser unit [3].
8-20
Chapter 9 Image
Formation
Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System ................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Charging Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Image Formation Process .................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer) ........................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.1 At Power-On (1) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 At Power-On (2) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed) ................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed) ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ............................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page ............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High-Voltage System ............................ 9-11
9.4 Image Stabilization Control ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control ............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation) ........................................................................................................ 9-18
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction) .............................................................. 9-19
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction) ............................................................... 9-20
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control ............................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24
9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .................................................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ........................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2 Developing Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................ 9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias ....................................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush ........................................................................................................................................ 9-29
9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush ................................................................................................. 9-29
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias .......................................................................................................... 9-30
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism ............................................................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias ........................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6 Toner Container ............................................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container ................................................................................................................ 9-37
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive .................................................................................................... 9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner .................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner .............................................................................................................. 9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ..................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................. 9-40
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit ........................................................................................ 9-40
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ................................................................................................................... 9-42
Contents
9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................ 9-42

9.7.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) ....................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller ................................................................................................................. 9-45
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner ..................................................................................................................... 9-45
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 9-46
9.7.4.1 Separation .......................................................................................................................................... 9-46
9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .................................................................................... 9-51
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ............................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ..................................................................................... 9-52
9.8.1.16 Removing the Drum ITB Motor ...................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 9-53
9.8.2.12 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ............................................................................................. 9-57
9.8.2.14 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting Base ............................................................................. 9-58
9.8.2.15 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ...................................................................................................... 9-58
9.8.3 Drive Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 9-59
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive Roller ................................................................................................................ 9-62
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk) ............................................................................................................................ 9-63
Contents
9.8.4.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Bk) .............................................................................................. 9-65

9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ..................................................................................................................... 9-65
9.8.5.8 Removing the Developing Motor (Y/M/C) ....................................................................................... 9-67
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................. 9-68
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ......................................................................................... 9-68
9.8.6.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit ............................................................................................ 9-68
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ....................................................................................................................... 9-69
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container .............................................................................................. 9-69
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................. 9-70
9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ........................................................................................................................ 9-70
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller .......................................................................................................................... 9-73
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................... 9-76
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External Roller ....................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ............................................................................................................... 9-77
9.8.11.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller ......................................................................... 9-77
9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ........................................................................................................ 9-78
9.8.12.4 Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .......................................................................... 9-81
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit ................................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................ 9-82
9.8.13.2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .................................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.13.6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ....................................................................................... 9-83
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.1 Removing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front Cover .............................................................................................................. 9-85
9.8.14.3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ............................................................ 9-85
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ................................................................................................... 9-86
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ................................................................................................ 9-86
9.8.14.6 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................... 9-86
Contents
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 9-86

9.8.15.11 Removing the Feedscrew Rotation Sensor .................................................................................... 9-90
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor ............................................................................................................................ 9-90
9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner Container Motor ........................................................................................... 9-94
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case ................................................................................................................. 9-94
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.17.3 Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case .................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................................................. 9-95
9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB ............................................................................................................... 9-97
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB ................................................................................. 9-99
9.8.20 SALT Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 9-100
9.8.20.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................... 9-100
9.8.20.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................................................................................... 9-101
9.8.20.3 Removing the Upper Right Cover ................................................................................................. 9-101
9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit ................................................................................................ 9-101
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT Sensor .......................................................................................................... 9-103
Contents
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
T-9-1
Photosensitive drum
Drum unit Type of drum OPC

(D-UNIT)
Diameter of drum 30.6 mm
Cleaning mechanism Cleaner-less

The residual toner after transfer is
charged for collection by the developing
assembly.
Process speed 130 mm/sec (plain paper)

65 mm/sec (thick paper, special paper,
transparency)
T-9-2
Developing assembly
Diameter of developing cylinder 16 mm
Method of development dry, 2-component
Toner non-magnetic, negative (S toner)
Detection of toner inside ATR sensor (magnetic sensor)
developing assembly
Starter held by drum unit
T-9-3
Primary charging assembly
Method of charging roller, contact charging
Diameter of charging roller 14 mm
Cleaning mechanism cleaning sheet, in contact (reciprocating

movement of 5 mm; cycle of 1.5 sec)
9-1
Chapter 9
T-9-4
Auxiliary brush
Type of brush fur brush
Intrusion of brush 1.3 mm (upstream)

1.3 mm (downstream)
T-9-5
Others
Items of control by internal memory color of toner inside drum unit

cumulative number of prints
cumulative number of video counts
data on life of drum unit
data on toner supply control
T-9-6
Toner container Detection of toner level in reference to number of rotations made

by toner feedscrew
Toner volume Y: 490 g

M: 470 g
C: 470 g
Bk: 530 g
T-9-7
Others
Items of control by internal memory color of toner inside toner container

data on life of toner container
T-9-8
Inter-mediate Intermediae transfer belt (ITB) seamless

transfer unit Drive for belt through gears from drum ITB motor
Feeding speed 130 mm/sec (plain paper)

65 mm/sec (thick paper, special paper,
transparency)
Cleaning mechanism cleaning blade
9-2
Chapter 9
T-9-9
Image stabili- Descharge current level control to prevent image faults caused by
zation mecha- changes in environment
nism ATVC control to ensure good transfer
ATR control to correct toner density (about)
PASCAL control to correct image gradation

characteristics
SALT-Dmax control to correct development density

(maximum density) characteristics
SALT-Dhalf control to correct development density

(gradation) characteristics
9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System 0000-4474
Toner container (Bk)
Developing cylinder
D-UNIT(Bk)
Developing
assembly Primary
charging
roller
Intermediate
transfer belt Auxiliary
brushes
Photosensitive drum
D-UNIT(Y) D-UNIT(M) D-UNIT(C)
Intermediate
transfer unit Primary transfer rollers
Secondary transfer
internal roller
F-9-1
9-3
Chapter 9
9.1.3 Charging Specifications 0000-4475
Drum unit (high voltage)
T-9-10
Photosensitive drum charging
Method of primary charging roller contact
AC component rating specifications range 1300 to 2000 Vp-p (standard: 1500 Vp-p)
DC component rating specifications range -300 to -700 V (standard: -450 V)
AC component voltage correction factor environment sensor
DC component voltage correction factor environment sensor, SALT sensor
T-9-11
Auxiliary charging
Method of charging fur brush (upstream, downstream)
Upstream auxiliary brush AC component rating 200 Vp-p

specifications range
Upstream auxiliary brush DC component rating +200 to +300 V (standard: +250 V)

Downstream brush DC component rating -700 to -800 V (standard: -750 V)

Voltage correction factor environment sensor
T-9-12
Developing bias
AC component standard value 1800 Vp-p (fixed)
DC component rating specifications range -150 to -550 V (standard: -300 V)
Voltage correction factor environment sensor, SALT sensor
Transfer unit specifications (high-voltage)
T-9-13
Primary transfer
Method of transfer Roller transfer
Object of transfer Transfer belt (ITB)
DC component rating use range 0 to +1200 V
9-4
Chapter 9
Primary transfer
Voltage control factor environment sensor, print mode*
T-9-14
Secondary transfer
Method of transfer roller
Object of transfer paper (transfer media)
DC component rating use range -2500 to +7000 V
Voltage correction factor paper type, environment sensor reading, print

mode*
*Full color or monochrome mode.
Developing cylinder Primary charging roller
0V 0V
-300V
-450V
1800Vp-p 1500Vp-p
Downstream auxiliary
brush
0V
-750V
Secondary transfer Primary transfer roller Upstream auxiliary brush

external roller
+2000V
+250V
+400V 200Vp-p
0V
0V 0V
Full color, Plain paper, Normal temperature/humidify

F-9-2
9-5
Chapter 9
9.2 Image Formation Process

9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) 0000-4476
T-9-15
Functional block STEP Description
Electrostatic latent image formation 1, 2 forms an electrostatic latent image on the

block photosensitive drum.
Development block 3 deposits toner over the electrostatic latent

image, thereby turning it into a visible
image.
Transfer block 4, 5, 6 moves the toner image to the ITB or paper.
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaning 7 collects residual toner from the ITB.
block
Photosensitive drum cleaning block 8, 9, 10 collects residual toner from the

photosensitive drum.
Photosensitive drum
2.Laser beam exposure
1.Charging
10.Toner collection
9.Charging roller cleaning

3.Development
Y M C Bk
8.Auxiliary
charging
4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary

transfer transfer transfer transfer
7.ITB cleaning
ITB
Delivery 5.Secondary
Fixing 6.Separation
transfer Pickup
F-9-3
9-6
Chapter 9
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) 0000-4477
Toner not charged to a negative

potential by the downstream brush
Photosensitive drum cleaning block
[6] Colled to the

developing assembly. [5] Charging to a negative
+ +
potential by friction against
the cleaning sheet.
-
-
-
- - - - [4] Charging to a negative
- - -
potential by the downstream
- auxiliary brush.*2
-
[1] Develop- - - - -
ment
- +
- +
[3] Charging to a positive
- + potential by the upstream
auxiliary brush.*1
Development block
+
-
+
- -
- - - - - - - - -
Transfer residual toner*3

[2] Primary transfer
Primary transfer block
*1: reducing negative charges on toner (removal of charges)

*2: evening out charge to a specific level
*3: toner left behind from secondary transfer
(mix of positive and negative charges)
F-9-4
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer) 0000-4478
[1] Moving the toner from the

[3] Scraping off the toner by
photosensitive drum to the ITB
the cleaning blade
Y M C Bk
ITB Primary transfer block

Transfer residual toner*
cleaning
block
Paper
Waste tone container
Secondary
transfer
[2] Moving the toner image
block
from the ITB to paper
* Toner left behind from secondary transfer.
F-9-5
9-7
Chapter 9
9.3 Basic Sequence

9.3.1 At Power-On (1) 0000-4479
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100°C
(e.g., first time in the morning or after a long period of no use),
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 300 to 360 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization control in the following order while it is warming up:
discharge current level control
ATVC control
ATR control
SALT-Dmax control
image position control
SALT-Dhalf control
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR CNTR PSTBY

Approx. 120sec Approx. 120sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development Image stabilization
motor (Y) control (for details,
Developing (DC) see appropriate sections)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100 or more).
F-9-6
9.3.2 At Power-On (2) 0000-4480
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or more
(i.e., after it returns from jam recovery*, after it has been forced off and then on, or after its front cover has been
opened and then closed while an imaged is made).
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 80 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization in the following order while it is warming up:
ATVC control
9-8
Chapter 9
image position correction

*If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100°C after jam recovery, the machine uses the sequence
it uses at power-on (1).
Main power
switch ON
WMUPR CNTR PSTBY

Approx. 30sec Approx. 50sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y) Image stabilization
Developing (DC) control (for details, see
bias (Y) appropriate sections)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100˚C or more).
F-9-7
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed) 0000-4481
Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies/prints, Y drum unit

Characteristics
- in response to a press on the Start key, the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) stars to rotate.
- the sequence of operations for drum units after exposure starts with a delay of 0.7 sec each
- the ITB continues to rotate after delivery of paper from the fixing unit (for post-imaging control)
Start key
ON

5sec 4sec 12sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y) Scraping off toner
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
bias (Y) Scraping off toner
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Primary transfer Cleaning by second-

bias (Y) ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Y Drum Unit Sequence of Image Formation (plain paper)

F-9-8
9-9
Chapter 9
When Making Y/M/C Monochrome Copies/Prints

If not for Bk (i.e., for Y, M, C), a high voltage is applied for the 4 colors as for full-color output when making
monochrome copies/prints. (Exposure is not executed for colors other than those in question.)
When Making Bk Monochrome Copies/Prints
When making Bk monochrome copies/prints, no high voltage is applied for Y or M, and the developing motors
for these colors are not driven.
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed) 0000-4482
Full color, Thick paper/Special paper/Transparency, A4, 2 copies/prints, Y drum unit

Characteristics
- in response to a press on the Start key, the photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) start to rotate
- the sequence of operations of the drum units after exposure starts with a delay of 1.5 sec
- the photosensitive drum and the ITB continue to rotate after paper has been discharged from the fixing unit
(for post-imaging control)
Start key
ON

15sec 7sec 25sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Primary transfer Cleaning by second-
bias (Y) ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Y Drum Formation Sequence (thick paper/special paper/transparency)
F-9-9
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) 0000-4483
When a new drum unit (D-UNIT) has been installed,

Characteristics
- when a drum unit is fitted and the machine's front cover is closed, the developing cylinder starts to rotate.
- so that the developing cylinder may be coated evenly with developer, the cylinder is rotated for 30 sec at the
beginning
- if the drum unit is not new, this sequence is not executed; the sequence used at power-on (1) or (2) is executed
- about 150 sec after the drum unit has been fitted, image stabilization control is executed in the following order
ATVC control
ATR control
9-10
Chapter 9
SALT-Dmax control
image position correctionSALT-Dhalf control
New drum unit fitted,

and front cover closed
WMUPR CNTR PSTBY

Approx. 30sec Approx. 120sec Approx. 120sec
Drum/ITB
motor (M1)
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development Image stabilization
motor (Y) control (for details, see
appropriate sections)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Y Drum Unit Initialization Sequence
F-9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page 0000-4484
When making copies/prints of originals containing a color page, the machine uses the following sequence to avoid
a drop in productivity:
T-9-16
color original: full-color mode sequence
monochrome original: for 3rd and subsequent copies/prints after color page, full-
color mode sequence for 4th and subsequent copies/prints
after color page, monochrome sequence
MEMO:
A switch-over from full-color mode to monochrome mode requires a sequence in which the high voltage of YMC
must be lowered. By reducing the use of such a sequence, the machine avoids an appreciable drop in productivity.
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the
High-Voltage System 0000-4485
Drive Control
The image formation system is driven by the toner container motor, developing motor, and drum ITB motor
through gears. (For details, see the appropriate sections.)
9-11
Chapter 9
DC
controller
PCB
Toner container motor drive signal

J126
M20 M21 M22 M23
Developing motor drive signal

J110
Toner drive
motor
M12 M13 M14 M15
Drum/ITB motor
drive signal
M1 J105
Developing
motor
ITB Drum/ITB motor
F-9-11
High-Voltage Control
The high-voltage unit is used to supply high voltage to each of the blocks in the image formation system.
(For details, see the appropriate sections.)
Y M C Bk
Primary charging
Developing
roller
cylinder
Photosensitive
drum
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
Secondary
transfer
external roller
HV1 HV4
(1 each for HV2 (1 for YM; 1 HV3
YMCBk) for CBk)
High-voltage unit Secondary

transfer
high-voltage unit
HV: high-voltage PCB

F-9-12
9-12
Chapter 9
9.4 Image Stabilization Control

9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control 0000-4486
Changes in temperature/humidity or passage of time can cause the machine to produce images of varying quality. To
ensure that the quality of images remain stable, the levels of voltage outputs and volumes of toner supply are
corrected:
T-9-17
So that the machine's image

reproduction remains stable, the
following control mechanisms are
used:
ATR Control to suit changes in toner density/toner

consumption
Discharge Current Level Control to prevent faulty images in a high humidity
environment
(correction of charging AC bias)
ATVC Control to ensure good transfer
(correction of transfer bias level)
PASCAL Control/SALT Control to suit changes in image density and gradation
(correction of charging/developing/transfer bias;

correction of image correction table)
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control 0000-4487
T-9-18
Operation Discharge ATVC ATR SALT- Image SALT- Estimated

current control control Dmax position Dhalf duration
level control correction control (sec)
control
Power-on/ - if fixing roller surface temperature >= 100 deg C

jam
YES YES NO NO YES NO about 80 *6
recovery
- if fixing roller surface temperature < 100 deg C
YES YES YES YES YES YES about 240

*7
9-13
Chapter 9
T-9-19
New if the number of rotations made by the toner feedscrew has reached the threshold and,
toner in addition, the reading of the ATR sensor is lower than a specific value *8
container YES YES YES YES YES NO about
replacem
190
ent
if the number of rotations of the toner feedscrew has reached a specific value (100%) *8
NO NO NO NO NO NO about 20
T-9-20
Drum YES YES YES YES YES YES about

unit 280 *7
replacem
ent
T-9-21
Cover *1 - if fixing roller surface temperature>=100 deg C *2

opened/
NO NO NO NO NO NO about 20
closed
- if fixing roller surface temperature < 100 deg C
YES YES YES YES YES YES about

240 *7
T-9-22
Number - cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (LSTR) *3
of pages YES YES YES NO (YES: 300 NO about 30
*10
pages *9 ) (50)
- cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (INTR) *3
YES YES NO NO NO NO about 15
- cumulative output (number of pages) reaching 200 pages or more *3
YES YES YES NO (YES: 400 NO about 30

pages *9 ) (50)
- cumulative output (number of pages) reaching 500 pages or more (LSTR) *3
YES YES YES YES (YES) NO about 50

(70)
9-14
Chapter 9
T-9-23
Left alone in YES YES NO YES YES YES about

STBY for 2 hr 120
*3 /Rapid
change in
environment
T-9-24
Return - cover is not opened and closed during low power mode
from low
NO NO NO NO NO NO about 30 *4
power
- cover is opened and closed during low power mode
mode
state YES YES NO NO YES NO about 80 *6
T-9-25
Return - STBY + power save mode lasts 1.9 hr or more before starting sleep mode
from
YES YES YES YES YES YES about 240 *7
sleep
- STBY + power save mode lasts less than 1.9 hr before starting sleep mode *5
state
YES YES (YES) (YES) YES (YES) about 80 *6
(about 240 *7 )
*1The term "over"refers to all covers.

*2 If the cover is opened and then closed again before the machine will be standby state(fixing roller surface
temperature >=100 deg C), the sequence used for 'cover opened/closed'(i.e., fixing roller surface temperature <100
deg C) is executed.
*3See the description or the service mode item in question.
*4The duration refers to the period of time for the fixing roller surface temperature to reach a level ready to start a job.
*5The condition depends on the fixing roller surface temperature upon return from sleep mode.
*6time that includes about 30 sec of various operations taking place before image stabilization control starts.
*7time that includes about 120 sec of various operations taking place before image stabilization control starts.
*8the toner container is identified as having reached the end of its life.
*9if the counter reading for image position correction is 300 or higher, image position correction is executed together
with other image stabilization control mechanisms.
*10the counters used in relation to a specific number of pages are of the following 3 types:
- used to set up discharge current level control, ATVC control, ATR control
- used to set up discharge current level control, ATVC control, ATR control, SALT-Dmax control
- used to correct image position
*The control mechanism executed after processing a specific number of pages is executed at the following timing of
operation:
9-15
Chapter 9
Cumulative output
is 100 pages or
more and less
1st page 2nd page 99th page 105th page next job *1
than 200 pages
Continuous jobs
Control executed during post rotation Control executed also

of last sheet of job in excess of 100 pages during initial rotation
of next job *2
Cumulative output 199th 200th
is 200 pages or page page 201st page 400th page 401st page
more
Pickup stopped once; Pickup stopped once;
then, control executed then, control executed
between sheets every between sheets every
200 pages *2 200 pages *2
*1 : job next to the one ending in excess of 100 pages.
*2 : counter reading returns to '0' when control is executed.
: timing at which control is executed.
F-9-13
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-1
Use it to change the intervals between sessions of execution of image stabilization control (adjustment set-1) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 100
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-2
Use it to change the intervals between execution sessions of image stabilization control (adjustment set-2) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PPR-1
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions (adjustment set-1) for image stabilization control between
sheets in terms of the number of pages.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-T
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions for image stabilization control for standby.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ADJ-LVL
Use it to change the execution mode settings for image stabilization control for a specific number of pages.
9-16
Chapter 9
9.4.3 ATR Control 0000-4488
The machine executes ATR control to maintain a specific image density, which otherwise would change as more and
more toner is used.
The machine measures the concentration of toner and adjusts its supply.
Forms a sample image

(every specific number of pages)
Measures the concentration

of toner inside the developing
assembly at all items Measures the density of the sample image
(ATR sensor) (SALT sensor)
Computes the change in density from 2 sets of

measurements (data)
Verifies the volume of toner to supply
Determines the volume of

toner to be supplied
ATR control
F-9-14
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-15
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control 0000-4489
- The machine controls the level of discharge current so as to ensure the optimum level in keeping with changes in
temperature/humidify. (The term "discharge current"refers to the current that occurs between the primary
charging roller and the photosensitive drum.) The current is controlled to a level that enables prevention of faulty
images in a high humidity environment and, at the same time, permits collection of toner remaining from transfer
to the developing assembly. Operation
1. An AC bias is applied to the primary charging assembly; the level of current occurring at the time is measured by
the high-voltage PCB (HV1-SUB) and is sent to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The roller is charged using the AC charging bias corrected by the CPU.
- If thick paper, special paper, or transparency is used, the frequency of the AC bias applied to the primary charging
roller is halved.
9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) 0000-4490
The ATVC control mechanism is used to determine the optimum level of transfer voltage for transfer of images from
the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and from the ITB to paper.
The level of transfer voltage is corrected in relation to changes in temperature/humidity, deterioration of rollers, and
types of paper.
Description of Control
1. A reference voltage is applied to the transfer roller, and the level of current that occurs in response is checked by
the high-voltage PCB and communicated to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The machine executes transfer using a transfer voltage which is the result of correction by the CPU.
T-9-26
Item Description
Primary Applies a reference voltage to the primary charging roller.

transfer
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-2) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
Secondary Applies a reference voltage to the secondary transfer external roller.

transfer
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-3) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation) 0000-4491
The PASCAL control mechanism is used to stabilize gradation characteristics of images on paper.
It makes up for the changes in gradation occurring in response to changes in temperature/humidity or as the machine
is used over time.
- PASCAL Control for Half-Speed
The mechanism is used to correct the changes in the gradation characteristics that otherwise would occur when thick
paper, special paper, or transparency is used. The test print used for the mechanism is the same as the test print
used for plain paper.
Start-up
V
Prints out the test pattern stored in the main controller (3 types).
V
Uses the scanner to read the test print (previously printed out) set in the reader.
V
Prepares the image correction table A (data processing).
V
End
Timing of Control
Chapter 9
- Service Person Interaction

The mechanism is executed when 'full correction'is executed while auto gradation correction is under way in user
mode.
MEMO;
Differences Among 3 Test Patterns
- Test Print 1
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and,
therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode.
- Test Print 2
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low number of lines, which is suitable for the
expression of gradation and, therefore, is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL.
- Test Print 3
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines, which is suitable for the
achievement of a high resolution and is, therefore, used when priority is placed on PDL resolution.
Test Print
F-9-16
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction) 0000-4492
This mechanism is used to stabilize the maximum resolution on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
It is used to make up for changes in the maximum density (Dmax), changes in response to deterioration in developer
or the drum, changes in temperature/humidity, or changes occurring as the machine is used over time.
Start-up
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of the maximum solid density stored in the DC controller.
9-19
Chapter 9
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take the reading.
V
Converts density (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Determines the charging DC bias, developing DC bias, and primary charging current level.
V
End
Timing of Control
- Service Person InteractionThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction' or 'quick correction' of auto gradation
correction is under way in user mode.
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-17
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction) 0000-4493
The SALT-Dhalf control mechanism is used to stabilize the gradation of images on the ITB.
It makes up for the changes in gradation characteristics that occur in response to the deterioration in developer or
photopositive drum, changes in temperature/humidity, and changes that occur as the machine is used over time.
Gradation Density Control for Half Speed
The control mechanism is used to make up for the changes in the gradation in images when thick paper, special
paper, or transparency is used.
When the mechanism is enabled in service mode, it is activated when auto control is executed.
The time it takes is about double the time taken when plain paper is used.
Start-up*
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of a gradation pattern stored in the main
controller on the ITB.
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take a reading.
9-20
Chapter 9
V
Performs density conversion (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Prepares an image correction table B/C (data processing).
V
End
- Non-AutomaticThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction'or 'quick correction' is under way in user mode.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CAL-SW
Use it to change the conditions that initiate automatic control.
default: 0 (disable gradation density control for half speed)
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-18
9-21
Chapter 9
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control 0000-4494
Outline
The auto gradation control mechanism is used to correct image gradation by correcting the laser output so as to obtain
ideal gradation characteristics.
Image density
Actual gradation characteristics
1.45
Ideal
characteristics
0 255
Relationship between laser output
and image density
F-9-19
T-9-27
Full Correction: The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 64-
gradation density data collected from the scanner.
Quick Correction: The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 9-
gradation density data.
User Mode
The machine uses 2 types of auto gradation correction mechanisms, combining the best mechanisms to suit
individual requirements.
T-9-28
Full correction Quick correction
Description Start up Start up
| |
v v
SALT-Dmax control SALT-Dmax control

(determines developing DC, (determines developing DC,
charging DC, primary current charging DC, and primary
levels) transfer levels)
| |
v |
9-22
Chapter 9
Full correction Quick correction
PASCAL control |
(prepares image correction |
table A) |
| |
v v
Image position correction Image position correction
| |
v v
SALT-Dhalf control SALT-Dhalf control

(prepares image correction (prepares image correction
table B) table C)
| |
v v
End End
T-9-29
Image correction Image correction table A Table prepared by the result of

table for use at time including the contents of the table A to
of image formation the result of compari-son between
image correction tables B and C
T-9-30
Characteristics A test print must be printed and The machine does not use (print) a test
read by the machine. print.
9-23
Chapter 9
9.5 Drum Unit

9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit
9.5.1.1 Outline of the Drum Unit 0000-4495
The drum unit consists of the developing assembly, photosensitive drum, auxiliary brush, and charging mechanism.
As many as 4 units are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them have the same construction.
Primary charging
roller
Developing
cylinder Cleaning sheet
Developing
assembly
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
ATR sensor
Developing Photosensitive
blade drum
F-9-20
9-24
Chapter 9
9.5.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) 0000-4496
T-9-31
Parts Source of drive Remarks
Developing cylinder Developing motor (M2 driven through gears

through M15)
Toner stirring screw Developing motor (M2 driven through gears

through M15)
Charging roller Linked to photosensitive drum
Photosensitive drum Drum ITB motor (M1) driven through gears
Auxiliary brush, cleaning Drum ITB motor (M1) (reciprocating movement in
sheet drum axial direction)
DC controller PCB
ITB drum motor

Development
motor drive
drive signal
signal
Developing
motor (pulse)
M
Drum ITB
motor (DC)
Developing
M
cylinder
Cleaning sheet
Primary changing
roller
Auxiliary brushes
ATR sensor
Toner stirring Photosensitive

screw drum
F-9-21
9-25
Chapter 9
9.5.2 Developing Assembly
9.5.2.1 Construction of the Developing Assembly 0000-4497
Outline and Uses
1. turning latent static image into visible image (development)

2. collecting residual toner from photosensitive drum
- eliminates the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum
T-9-32
Component
Developing cylinder - deposits toner on the photosensitive drum.
- collects toner from the photosensitive drum coming from upstream
Developing blade - serves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer
of developerserves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of
developer
Toner stirring screw - stirs the toner and the developer inside the developing assembly (thus,
charging the toner to a negative potential).
ATR sensor - detects the amount (concentration of toner) inside the developing
assembly.
Developing cylinder
Developing assembly
Toner stirring
screw
ATR sensor Developing blade
F-9-22
9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias 0000-4498
1) AC Component
fixed; used to increase the density of output images.
2) DC Component
output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT sensor;
changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density
a-1. Route of the Developing Bias
DC power supply unit
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72

HV1(Y) HV1(M) HV1(C) HV1(Bk)
J70 J70 J70 J70
AC/DC bias for developing

cylinder
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-23
Chapter 9
a-2. Route of the Developing Cylinder Control Signal
Environment
sensor SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J109 J131-B
DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y,M DEV_CLK-A DEV_AC_CTRLT_C,K
DEV_DC_CTRL_Y,M DEV_CLK-B DEV_DC_CTRL_C,K
DEV_MODE_Y,M DEV_CLK-C DEV_MODE_C,K
High-voltage J88
unit HV2-SUB
J87
DEV_CLK-A
DEV_CLK-B
DEV_CLK-C
J97 J76 J98
HV1-SUB
J73 J75 J77 J79
DEV_AC_CLK1_Y _Y _M _M _C _C _K DEV_DC_CTRL_K
DEV_AC_CLK2_Y DEV_VIN _M DEV_VIN _C DEV_VIN _K DEV_VIN
J72 J72 J72 J72

J70 J70 J70 J70
: control signal.
F-9-24
9-28
Chapter 9
9.5.3 Auxiliary Brush
9.5.3.1 Construction of the Auxiliary Brush 0000-4499
Outline and Uses

1. removes charges from the photosensitive drum; charges residual toner
2. controls the polarity of residual toner
- thereby preventing adhesion of toner to the primary charging roller
- thereby eliminating the need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum
T-9-33
Component
Upstream auxiliary - removes charge from the photosensitive drum. (in preparation for the
brush next image formation session, the latent static image from the previous
session is removed)
- charges the residual toner to a positive potential. (to increase the effects
of charging by the downstream brush as part of the upcoming operation)
Downstream - charges the photosensitive drum to a negative potential.

auxiliary brush
- charges the residual toner to a negative potential. (to facilitate collection

by the developing assembly)
Downstream auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary brush
F-9-25
9-29
Chapter 9
9.5.3.2 Controlling the Auxiliary Bias 0000-4500
T-9-34
AC Component: level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor.

(upstream auxiliary brush)
DC Component: level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor.

(upstream/downstream auxiliary brush)
b-1. Route of the Upstream Auxiliary Brush Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76
HV1-SUB
J74 J78
J94 J94 J82

HV4(Y,M) HV4(C,Bk) HV2
J93 J93 J81
DC bias for upstream

auxiliary brush
J71 J71 J71 J71
J70 J70 J70 J70
DC bias for upstream

auxiliary brush
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-26
9-30
Chapter 9
b-2. Route of the Upstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J131-B
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
High-voltage J97 J98

unit
HV1-SUB
J74 J78
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
J94 J94
HV4(Y,M) HV4(C,Bk)
J93 J93
J71 J71 J71 J71

J70 J70 J70 J70
: control signal.
F-9-27
9-31
Chapter 9
c-1. Route of the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72

HV1(Y) HV1(M) HV1(C) HV1(K)
J70 J70 J70 J70
DC bias for
downstream
auxiliary brush
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-28
9-32
Chapter 9
c-2. Route for the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J131-B
SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y,M SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C,K
High-voltage J97 J98

unit HV1-SUB
J73 J75 J77 J79
SUB_LO_CTRL_Y SUB_LO_CTRL_M SUB_LO_CTRL_C SUB_LO_CTRL_K
J72 J72 J72 J72

J70 J70 J70 J70
: control signal.
F-9-29
9-33
Chapter 9
9.5.4 Charging Mechanism
9.5.4.1 Construction of the Charging Mechanism 0000-4501
Outline and Uses

1. charging the photosensitive drum
2. controlling the polarity of residual toner by the cleaning sheet
T-9-35
thus preventing the adhesion of toner to the

primary changing roller
thus eliminating the need for a cleaning

mechanism for the photosensitive drum
Component
Primary charging roller 1. in preparation for the next image formation

session, the photosensitive drum is evenly charged
to a negative potential.
2. returns the toner changed to a negative potential

to the photosensitive drum (for collection in the
developing assembly).
Primary charging roller cleaning charges residual toner to a negative potential by

sheet friction
(thereby returning the toner to the photosensitive

drum).
Charging roller Cleaning sheet
F-9-30
9-34
Chapter 9
9.5.4.2 Controlling the Charging Bias 0000-4502
T-9-36
AC level of output suited to discharge current control

Component:
DC level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT

Component: sensor
d-1. Route of the Primary Charging Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72 J71 J72

J70 J70 J70 J70
AC/DC bias for primary

charging roller
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-31
9-35
Chapter 9
d-2. Route for the Primary Charging Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J109 J131-B
CHRG_DC_CTRL CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y,M CH_CLK _C,K
CHRG_AC_CTRL CHRG_AC_CTRL
_Y,M _C,K
High-voltage J88
unit HV2-SUB
J87
CHRG_AC_CLK
J97 J76 J98
HV1-SUB
J73 J75 J77 J79
CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y CHRG_AC _M CHRG_AC _C CHRG_AC _K CHRG_AC
CHRG_AC_CTRL _CLK _CLK _CLK _CLK
_Y_SND _M_SND _C_SND _K_SND
J72 J72 J72 J72

J70 J70 J70 J70
: control signal.
F-9-32
9-36
Chapter 9
9.6 Toner Container

9.6.1 Outline of the Toner Container 0000-4503
The toner container consists of toner, stirring blade, and toner feedscrew;
as many as 4 containers are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them are of the same construction.
Stirring blade
Toner
Toner feedscrew
(supplies toner from the container
to the developing assembly)
F-9-33
9.6.2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive 0000-4504
T-9-37
Part Source of drive Remarks

Stirring blade Toner container motor (M20 to 23) driven through gars
Toner feedscrew Toner container motor (M20 to 23) driven through gears
DC controller PCB

drive signal
M20 M21 M22 M23
Toner stirring blade
Y M C Bk Toner feedscrew
F-9-34
9-37
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner 0000-4505
The machine checks the level of toner using the following sensors:
T-9-38
Developing ATR sensor

assembly
magnetic sensor
Description
checks the concentration of toner inside the developing assembly.
relies on the fact that a change in the ratio between carrier (magnetic)
and toner (non-magnetic) changes the force of magnetism.
detects changes to identify the level of toner.
SALT Sensor
photo sensor
Description
checks the sample toner formed on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
at such times as programmed.
checks the density of the toner image after development.
Toner Toner feedscrew rotation sensor

container
photosensor
Description
checks the number of revolutions made by the toner feedscrew.
the amount of toner supplied to the developing assembly made by a

single rotation of the feedscrew is constant, enabling the computation of
the level of remaining toner with reference to the number of revolutions.
Chapter 9
DC controller PCB
J124 J126 J125 J129

ATR_CTRL_Y,M ATR_CTRL_Y,M PATCH_P
T-CRG_PULSE_Y,M,C,K
ATR_SIG_Y,M ATR_SIG_Y,M PATCH_S
Feedscrew
rotation
sensor
Y M C Bk
SALT
ATR sensor
sensor
: control signal.
F-9-35
9.6.4 Controlling the Supply of Toner 0000-4506
1. Developing Assembly
If the ATR sensor identifies a shortage of toner inside the developing assembly, the machine starts control of toner
supply from the toner container to the developing assembly.
DC controller PCB
J124 J126
Toner container (Y)
M20
Toner feedscrew
Developing assembly
Y drum unit
ATR sensor
F-9-36
9-39
9.7 Transfer Unit
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
9.7.1.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit 0000-4507
The transfer unit consists of 2 units: intermediate transfer unit and secondary transfer unit:
Intermediate Transfer Unit
intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
primary transfer roller (1 pc. each for Y, M, C, and Bk)
ITB cleaning blade
secondary transfer internal roller
Secondary Transfer Unit
secondary transfer external roller
static eliminator
feed guide
Intermediate transfer unit
ITB cleaning
blade
Waste toner
feedscrew
Secondary transfer internal roller
Primary transfer
ITB roller
Feed guide
Transfer lower front guide
Attraction Secondary transfer external roller

plate Static eliminator
Secondary transfer unit

F-9-37
9.7.1.2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit 0000-4508
T-9-39

Drive roller Drum ITB motor (M1)
Intermediate transfer belt Linked to drive roller

(ITB)
Primary transfer roller Linked to ITB

Chapter 9

Secondary transfer internal Linked to ITB
roller
Secondary transfer external Secondary transfer internal roller driven through gears
roller
Tension roller Linked to ITB
Waste toner feedscrew Tension roller driven through gears
DC controller PCB
J105
Drum ITB motor drive signal
Drum ITB
motor M1
Tension roller Primary transfer roller

Secondary transfer external roller
Drive roller
Waste toner
feedscrew ITB
Secondary transfer internal roller
F-9-38
9-41
Chapter 9
9.7.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias
9.7.2.1 Controlling the Transfer Bias 0000-4509
1. Primary Transfer Bias

output in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor, color mode, ATVC control
2. Secondary Transfer Bias
output in keeping with the type of paper, reading of the environment sensor, color mode (full-color/monochrome),
ATVC control
e. Route of the Primary Transfer Bias/Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB DC power supply unit

J109
1_TR_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
High-voltage
unit J88 J91
HV2-SUB
J89
TR1_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
J80
HV2
J83
DC bias for
primary transfer
Primary transfer roller
: +24V
: +1kV
: control signal
F-9-39
9-42
Chapter 9
f. Route of the Secondary Transfer Bias/Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB DC power supply unit

J109
2TR_SEL
2TR_CTRL_P,N
High-voltage
unit J88 J91
HV2-SUB
J90
NCTL
PCTL
Secondary transfer PSEN
high-voltage unit
J95
HV3
T801
: +24V
Secondary transfer DC bias for
external roller secondary transfer : +1kV
: control signal.
F-9-40
9-43
9.7.3 Cleaning
9.7.3.1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 0000-4510
The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
T-9-40
Cleaning belt: remains in contact with the ITB at all times, and used to scrape
off toner from the ITB.
Scoop-up sheet: used to prevent fall of toner.
Cleaning blade
ITB
Scoop-up sheet
Waste toner feedscrew
F-9-41
Chapter 9
9.7.3.2 Secondary External Roller 0000-4511
The secondary transfer external roller is cleaned electrostatically.

A bias is applied to the secondary transfer external roller alternately using the polarity used for image formation
and the polarity opposite it for longer than the time it takes the roller to make a single rotation, thereby returning
the toner remaining on the roller to the ITB.
Timing of Control
1. when a copy/print job ends.
2. after recovery from a jam.
3. when a sample image (or test pattern) is formed as part of image stabilization control.
9.7.3.3 Collecting Waste Toner 0000-4512
The machine uses the following mechanism to collect waste toner.
Waste Toner
The waste toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade, and is moved to the waste toner box by the waste toner
feedscrew.
Waste Toner Box Full Detection
The waste toner sensor consists of a LED (light-emitting) and a phototransistor (light-receiving) to find out when
the waste toner box becomes full.
Tension roller
Waste toner sensor DC controller

(light-emitting) PCB
+5V
GND
J127
Waste toner sensor

(light-receiving)
+3.3V
WASTE_TONER_FULL
GND
F-9-42
9-45
Chapter 9
9.7.4 Separation Mechanism
9.7.4.1 Separation 0000-4513
The machine uses the following mechanism to separate paper:
T-9-41
1. Separation - Curvature (mechanical)
- Static Eliminator (static electricity)
It is grounded to lower the potential occurring on the back of

paper, thus facilitating the separation of paper from the ITB.
T-9-42
2. Separate - Feed Guide

Auxiliary
It is used to prevent increases in the potential occurring on the
Mechanism
back of paper because of friction used when it is moved to the
fixing assembly.
It is used to prevent image faults caused by contact with the

attraction plate.
- Attraction Plate
It is grounded, and is used to draw paper.
9-46
Chapter 9
The eccentric arrangement of the 2 rollers causes the paper to separate

by taking advantage of the rigidity of paper (curvature separation).
ITB
Paper
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Secondary transfer external roller
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Static eliminator
F-9-43
9-47
Chapter 9
9.8 Parts Replacement 9.8.1.5 Removing the DC

Controller PCB Cover 0000-4618
Procedure
9.8.1 Drum ITB Motor
9.8.1.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 0000-4614
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.

9.8.1.3 Removing the Lower

F-9-45
1) Remove the lower rear cover.

Controller Box Cover 0000-4617 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
[1]
F-9-46


F-9-44
9-48
Chapter 9
9.8.1.7 Opening the Main 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the
Controller Box 0000-4620 top of the main controller box.
1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC

controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
F-9-50
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the

F-9-47 main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box.
F-9-48 F-9-51
F-9-49
9-49
Chapter 9
9.8.1.8 Removing the DC

Controller Mounting 0000-4621
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free

all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove
the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB
[2] together with its base.
F-9-54
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the

connector [2]; then, detach the heat exhaust fan unit
[3].
F-9-52
9.8.1.9 Removing the Fixing

Heat Discharge Fan 0000-4622

connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge
fan [3].
F-9-55
F-9-53

Machine Heat Discharge Fan 0000-4623
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
9-50
Chapter 9

Developing Drive Unit 0000-4624
1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing

motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable
clamp [4].
F-9-58
9.8.1.12 Removing the Lattice

Connector Mounting 0000-4625
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all

F-9-56 connectors; then, detach the lattice connector
Mounting [2].
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main
controller base [2].
F-9-59
F-9-57

developing drive assembly [2].
9-51
Chapter 9
9.8.1.13 Removing the High-

Voltage Unit 0000-4626
1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit;

then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the high-
voltage unit [2].
F-9-62
9.8.1.15 Removing the Drum

ITB Motor Mounting 0000-4628
F-9-60 Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB

Motor Mounting
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate To remove, put your hand into the inside where you
[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3]. have slid out the manual feed unit; then, while holding
down the swing plate [1] found to the rear of the drum
drive unit, remove from the machine's rear side plate.
The drum drive unit is hooked on the protrusion from
the rear side plate; lift it slightly to detach.
F-9-61
9.8.1.14 Removing the Manual

Feed Cooling Fan Duct 0000-4627
F-9-63
1) Slide out the manual fee unit; then, disconnect the
connector [1] and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach
the manual feed cooling fan duct [3]. 1) Free the DC harness [1] found at the front of the
drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp [2].
9-52
Chapter 9
F-9-66
F-9-64
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3 9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit
screws [2]; then, detach the drum ITB motor base
[3]. 9.8.2.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 0006-7762
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.


F-9-65 9.8.2.4 Removing the

ITB Motor 0000-4629
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the drum ITB wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
motor [2]. detach the main controller cover [4].
9-53
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-69

F-9-67 1) Removing the left rear upper cover.
9.8.2.5 Removing the DC 9.8.2.7 Opening the Main

Controller PCB Cover 0000-4634 Controller Box 0000-4636
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC
controller PCB cover [2]. controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
F-9-70
F-9-68
When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover

9-54
Chapter 9
F-9-71
F-9-74


F-9-72
3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the

top of the main controller box.
F-9-75
F-9-73

main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
9-55
Chapter 9


fan [3].
F-9-78

F-9-76 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing

9.8.2.10 Removing the clamp [4].
F-9-79

F-9-77 controller base [2].

[3].
9-56
Chapter 9
F-9-80
F-9-82

voltage unit [2].
F-9-81

Controller Base 0000-4641
F-9-83
connectors; then, detach the lattice connector
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate
Mounting [2].
[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].
9-57
Chapter 9
F-9-84
F-9-86

2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3
ITB Motor Mounting Base 0000-4644
[3].
Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB

Motor Mounting
To remove, put your hand into the inside where you
have slid out the manual feed unit; then, while holding
F-9-87

Drive Unit 0000-8360

screws [2]: then, take out the drum drive unit [3].
F-9-85
1) Free the DC harness [1] found at the front of the

drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp [2].
9-58
Chapter 9
F-9-90

Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4527
F-9-88 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,
9.8.3 Drive Roller detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
9.8.3.1 Pressure Release of the

1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate

transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it.
2) Slide out the manual feed unit.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right
cover [2].
F-9-91
F-9-89
4) Release the escape lever [1].

F-9-92
9-59
Chapter 9
9.8.3.3 Removing the 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the
Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4528 link plate (rear) [2].
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the belt cover

[2].
F-9-96
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit
F-9-93
is upright.
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the varistor [2].
F-9-94 F-9-97
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide 6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite
plate [2]. of the middle right cover so that the intermediate
transfer unit will not fall down.
F-9-95
F-9-98
9-60
Chapter 9
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the marking on its surface is to the rear.
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg.
[1]
F-9-101
2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low

position so that the belt may be fitted from above
F-9-99 and straight down.
When you have pulled out the belt, keep it upright or

place it on paper to avoid damage.
After bending the transfer frame, pull out the transfer
belt [1] upward.
F-9-102
3) Check to make sure that the edge [A] of the belt

does not ride over the rib [B] of the tension roller.
[1] [2]
F-9-100
[2] [A] [2] [A]
Check to make sure that the secondary transfer F-9-103

internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.
Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate

Transfer Belt
1) Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the
9-61
Chapter 9
9.8.3.4 Removing the Drive

Roller 0000-4529
1)
1) The spring found at the front is under pressure;

thus, starting at the front can cause the spring to
snap out. Be sure to start at the rear.
2) When removing the gear, be sure to take care not to
lose the parallel pin.
At the rear, remove the following: E-ring [1], washer

[2], bearing [3], E-ring [4], gear [5], parallel pin [6],
gear butting spacer [7], bearing [8], and 2 E-rings [9]. F-9-105
3) Remove the bearing [1] found at the rear, and free

the drive roller [2] from the cut-off [A] of the frame
found at the front.
F-9-104
F-9-106
2) At the front, remove the following: E-ring [1],
washer [2], bearing [3], E-ring [4], washer [5],
spring [6], washer [7], bearing [8], grounding plate
[9].
Points to Note When Attaching
When attaching the washer, spring, and washer at the
front, be sure to fit the E-ring after forcing down the
spring together with the washer until the E-ring
groove [A] of the drive roller shaft is in view.
9-62
Chapter 9
F-9-107
F-9-108
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk)
9.8.4.1 Removing the Upper Controller PCB Cover 0000-4577
Rear Cover 0006-7766 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC



F-9-109
9-63
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-110
F-9-113

9.8.4.6 Opening the Main
Controller Box 0000-4578

F-9-114

F-9-111 and open it.
F-9-115
F-9-112
9-64
Chapter 9
9.8.4.7 Removing the DC 9.8.5 Developing Motor (Y/M/C)

1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free 9.8.5.1 Removing the Upper
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove Rear Cover 0006-7767



F-9-116
Developing Motor (Bk) 0000-4580
connector [2]; then, detach the developer motor
(Bk) [3].
F-9-117
F-9-118
9-65
Chapter 9
9.8.5.5 Removing the DC 9.8.5.6 Opening the Main

Controller PCB Cover 0000-4569 Controller Box 0006-7725
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC
controller PCB cover [2]. controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
F-9-121
F-9-119 2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box.

[1]
F-9-122
F-9-120
F-9-123
9-66
Chapter 9

F-9-126
F-9-124
Developing Motor (Y/M/C) 0000-4572
and open it. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main
F-9-127
F-9-125

connector [2]; then, detach the developer motor [3]
Controller Mounting 0006-7744 (starting at the right, Y, M, and C in sequence).
F-9-128
9-67
Chapter 9
9.8.6 Secondary Transfer Unit

Unit 0000-4667
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit
[2].
F-9-131
When removing the secondary transfer unit, be sure to

take care not to lose the tension spring [1] found
behind it.
F-9-129
9.8.6.2 Removing the Duplex

Open/Close Guide 0000-4669
1) Remove the duplex open/close guide [1].
F-9-132
2) Hold the grips at the front and the rear, and slide the
front side to the right to pull out the secondary
transfer unit [1].
F-9-130

Secondary Transfer Unit 0000-4670
1) Remove the screw [1] at the front, and detach the

secondary transfer unit retainer [2].
F-9-133
9-68
Chapter 9
9.8.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit


cover [2].
F-9-136
F-9-134
F-9-137
9.8.8 Transfer Cleaning Unit
9.8.8.1 Removing the Waste

Toner Container 0000-4646

transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste
toner container [2].
F-9-135

1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,

detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
F-9-138
9-69
Chapter 9
F-9-139
F-9-141
9.8.8.2 Removing the Transfer

Cleaning Unit 0000-4647
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer

cleaning unit [2].
F-9-142

F-9-140

9.8.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt

cover [2].
F-9-143
9-70
Chapter 9
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide

plate [2].
F-9-144
9.8.9.3 Removing the F-9-147
Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4522

4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the
link plate (rear) [2].
[2].
F-9-148
F-9-145
is upright.
F-9-146
F-9-149
9-71
Chapter 9
6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite

of the middle right cover so that the intermediate
F-9-152
F-9-150
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the Check to make sure that the secondary transfer
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg. internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
marking on its surface is to the rear.
[1]
F-9-151

place it on paper to avoid damage. F-9-153
belt [1] upward. 2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low
and straight down.
9-72
Chapter 9
F-9-154
F-9-156
[1] [2]
[2] [A] [2] [A]
F-9-155
F-9-157
9.8.10 Primary Transfer Roller 9.8.10.2 Removing the

9.8.10.1 Pressure Release of the 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4648 slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,
1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
cover [2].
F-9-158
9-73
Chapter 9

plate [2].
F-9-159

[2].
F-9-163
F-9-160
is upright.
F-9-161
F-9-164
9-74
Chapter 9

F-9-167
F-9-165
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the Check to make sure that the secondary transfer
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg. internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
marking on its surface is to the rear.
[1]
F-9-166

place it on paper to avoid damage. F-9-168
belt [1] upward. 2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low
and straight down.
9-75
Chapter 9
F-9-169

[1] [2]
F-9-171
[2] [A] [2] [A]
Points to Note When Mounting the Primary

Transfer Roller
F-9-170 1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the front, and
fit the edge [2] of the roller and then fit its rear side.
9.8.10.4 Removing the Primary

Transfer Roller 0000-4653
1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the rear; while
picking the edge [3] of the primary transfer
roller[2], detach it upward.
F-9-172
2) Check to make sure that the edge of the sheet [1] is

on the inner side of the rib [2].
9-76
Chapter 9
Take care not to touch the surface of the secondary

transfer external roller.
Holding the tabs [1] at both ends, remove the

secondary transfer roller [2].
F-9-173
9.8.11 Secondary Transfer External

Roller F-9-175

Unit 0000-4661
1) If the white spacer [2] of the secondary transfer
roller [1] becomes soiled with toner or the like, the
roller can fail to rotate, causing lines. Be sure to see
[2].
to it that the spacer moves.
F-9-174

F-9-176
Secondary Transfer External
Roller 0000-4663 2) When mounting the roller [1], be sure that the edge
1) of the leaf spring [2] found at the rear and used for
electrical continuity is not bent over.
9-77
Chapter 9
cover [2].
F-9-177
F-9-179
3) Be sure that the spring [1] is securely fitted to the
back of the tab used to remove/attach the roller. 4) Release the escape lever [1].
Pay attention to the orientation of the spring, as
different types are used between front and rear.
F-9-180

F-9-178 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal

Roller


F-9-181
9-78
Chapter 9

plate [2].
F-9-182

[2].
F-9-186
F-9-183
is upright.
F-9-184
F-9-187
9-79
Chapter 9

Check to make sure that the secondary transfer

internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.

Transfer Belt
F-9-188 marking on its surface is to the rear.
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the [1]
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg.
F-9-191
2) When fitting the belt, place the unit in a low

and straight down.
F-9-189

place it on paper to avoid damage.
belt [1] upward.
F-9-192

F-9-190
9-80
Chapter 9
[1] [2]
[2] [A] [2] [A]
F-9-193

Secondary Transfer Internal
F-9-195
Roller 0000-4659
1) Extend the belt frame, and fit the link plate at both 4) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the
front and rear. front; then, remove the secondary transfer internal
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the roller [3].
positioning block [2] at the rear.
F-9-196
F-9-194
3) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and bushing [3].
Points to Note When Attacing the Secondary

Transfer Internal Roller
When Attaching the bushing at the front, be sure to fit
the bushing [2] while avoiding the spring [1] found on
the inner side of the frame.
9-81
Chapter 9
F-9-199
F-9-197

9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit 1) Remove the upper rear cover.
9.8.13.1 Removing the Waste 9.8.13.3 Removing the Lower

Toner Container 0006-0801 Rear Cover 0000-4583
1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate 1) Remove the lower rear cover.
toner container [2]. 9.8.13.4 Removing the Left


F-9-198
9-82
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-202

F-9-200 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC

F-9-203
F-9-201

F-9-204
9-83
Chapter 9


F-9-205

F-9-208
9.8.13.9 Removing the Toner

Container Drive Unit 0000-4589
1) Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB 1,

and feed the harness of the developer motor from
the cable clamp; then, remove the 4 screws [1], and
F-9-206
detach the relay PCB 1 together with its base [2].

and open it.
F-9-209

screws [2]; then, detach the toner container drive
unit [3].
F-9-207
9-84
Chapter 9
9.8.14.2 Removing the Front

Cover 0000-4560
1) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 hinge pins [2];

then, detach the front cover.
F-9-210
9.8.14 Waste Toner Detection PCB

F-9-213

Releasing Lever 0000-4561
toner container [2]. 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the intermediate
transfer unit releasing lever [2].
F-9-211
F-9-214
F-9-212
9-85
Chapter 9
9.8.14.4 Removing the Cleaner

Fan Cover 0006-8837
1) Open the front cover.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cleaner fan
cover [2].
F-9-217
2) Detach the waste toner detection PCB [1] from the

cover, and disconnect the connector [2] for
replacement.
F-9-215
9.8.14.5 Removing the Inside

Cover (lower) 0000-4563

screws [2]; then, detach the inside cover (lower)
[3].
F-9-218
9.8.15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor


F-9-216 transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste
Toner Detection PCB 0000-4564
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] found behind the fixing/

feeder unit; then, detach the waste toner detection
PCB cover [2].
9-86
Chapter 9
F-9-219
F-9-221


F-9-220 controller PCB cover [2].



1) Removing the left rear upper cover. F-9-222

1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
detach the main controller cover [4]. cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
9-87
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-223
F-9-226


F-9-227

F-9-228
F-9-225
9-88
Chapter 9


F-9-231

Container Drive Assembly
Upper Plate 0000-4611
F-9-229
1) Remove the screw [1], 2 E-rings [2], and 2 bushings
[3]; then, free the harness from the edge saddle [4];
then, free the harness [5] of the toner container
Container Drive Unit 0000-4610 motor from the cord clamp [6] to detach the toner
1) Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB 1, container drive assembly top plate [7].
F-9-230
F-9-232
unit [3].
Points to Note When Attaching the Toner

Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate
9-89
Chapter 9
When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit

the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against
the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the 9.8.15.11 Removing the
bottom plate. Feedscrew Rotation Sensor 0000-4612

feedscrew rotation sensor [2].
F-9-233
F-9-236
9.8.16 Tone Container Motor


F-9-234
F-9-237
F-9-235
9-90
Chapter 9
F-9-238

9.8.16.3 Removing the Lower F-9-239

9.8.16.4 Removing the Left 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC
Upper Rear Cover 0000-4593 controller PCB cover [2].


F-9-240

9-91
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-241
F-9-244


F-9-245

F-9-246
F-9-243
9-92
Chapter 9


F-9-249

Container Drive Assembly
Upper Plate 0000-4599
F-9-247
1) Remove the screw [1], 2 E-rings [2], and 2 bushings
[3]; then, free the harness from the edge saddle [4];
then, free the harness [5] of the toner container
Container Drive Unit 0000-4598 motor from the cord clamp [6] to detach the toner
1) Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB 1, container drive assembly top plate [7].
F-9-248
F-9-250
unit [3].
Points to Note When Attaching the Toner

Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate
9-93
Chapter 9
When mounting the top plate, check to be sure to fit

the edge of the idler gear [1] after matching it against
the hole [2] in the top plate and the hole [3] in the 9.8.16.11 Removing the Toner
bottom plate. Container Motor 0000-4600
1) Remove the gear [2] that is engaged with the gear

[1] found at the tip of the toner container motor.
F-9-251
F-9-254

connector [2]; then, detach the toner container
motor [3].
F-9-252
F-9-255
9.8.17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case


F-9-253 transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste
9-94
Chapter 9
Points to Note When Removing the Waste Toner

Feedscrew Case
Remove the waste toner feedscrew only when a jam
has occurred and the sheet [1] attached to the
feedscrew has become damaged or bent (rendered
useless).
F-9-256
F-9-259
1) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever

[1] slightly counterclockwise, and remove the
F-9-257 screw [2]; then, remove the waste toner feedscrew
case[3].
9.8.17.2 Removing the Transfer
Cleaning Unit 0000-4557
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer

cleaning unit [2].
F-9-260
9.8.18 Pattern Reader Unit
F-9-258 9.8.18.1 Pressure Release of the

Toner Feedscrew Case 0000-4558 transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it.
9-95
Chapter 9

cover [2].
F-9-264

F-9-261
Right Cover 0000-4533
4) Release the escape lever [1]. 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right
cover [2].
F-9-262
F-9-265
Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4532 9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern
1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, Reader Unit 0000-4534
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then, 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. screw [2]; then, free the plate [4] from the hook of
the upper right stay [3], and detach the pattern
reader unit [5].
F-9-263
9-96
Chapter 9
F-9-268
3) Connect the connector [1]; then, while pulling the

escape lever [2] toward the front, hook the plate [3]
on the left/right claw [4], and secure it in place with
F-9-266 a screw [5] over the screw hole.
Point to Note When Attaching the Pattern Reader

Unit
<Mounting to the Machine>
1) Match the boss [1] with the rail [2].
F-9-269
9.8.19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB

F-9-267
2) While pushing the cleaning member [1] to the right,
fit it in while taking care so that it will not hit the
slide rail [2] of the intermediate transfer unit on the
cover [2].
side of the machine's side plate.
9-97
Chapter 9
F-9-273
F-9-270

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right

cover [2].
F-9-271

Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4549 F-9-274

9.8.19.4 Removing the Pattern
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. Reader Unit 0000-4551
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the

screw [2]; then, free the plate [4] from the hook of
reader unit [5].
F-9-272
9-98
Chapter 9
F-9-277

F-9-275 a screw [5] over the screw hole.

Unit
F-9-278
9.8.19.5 Removing the Auto

Registration Sensor PCB 0000-4553
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the plate

found to the rear of the pattern reader unit [2].
F-9-276

9-99
Chapter 9
F-9-279 F-9-281
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2

connectors [2]; then, remove the auto registration
sensor PCB (front) [3]. 9.8.20 SALT Sensor
MEMO:
The auto registration sensor PCB (rear) is also
removed in the same way. Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4536

cover [2].
F-9-280
F-9-282
Points to Note When Attaching the Auto
Registration Sensor PCB 4) Release the escape lever [1].
When Attaching the plate [1], be sure that its edge is
farther on the inner side than the cleaning member [2].
9-100
Chapter 9


cover [2].
F-9-283

1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, F-9-286
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. 9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern
Reader Unit 0000-4541

screw [2]; then, free the plate [4] from the hook of
reader unit [5].
F-9-284
F-9-287
F-9-285
9-101
Chapter 9

Unit
F-9-290
F-9-288

F-9-289

a screw [5] over the screw hole.
9-102
Chapter 9
9.8.20.5 Removing the SALT

Sensor 0000-4543
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the plate from

the rear of the pattern reader unit [2].
F-9-293
F-9-291

connector [2]; then, detach the SALT sensor [3].
F-9-292
Points to Note When Attaching the Plate

When Attaching the plate [1], be sure to position it so
that it is farther on the inner side than the cleaning
member [2].
9-103
Chapter 9
9-104
Chapter 10 Pickup/
Feeding System
Contents
Contents
10.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers .......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths .................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.7 Route of Dive ......................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ........................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key ................................................ 10-8
10.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Delay Jams ............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly ......................................................................... 10-9
10.3.2 Stationary Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams .............................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On ........................................................................................................ 10-11
10.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-17
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.6.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Basic Sequence of Operations .............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ............................................................................................ 10-21
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper ....................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.7 Registration Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.7.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.8.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation ............................................................................... 10-27
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation .............................................................................. 10-29
10.9 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32
10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................ 10-33
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................ 10-34
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery ...................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer ......................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit .......................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.10.1.1 Removing the Cassette ................................................................................................................ 10-36
10.10.1.2 Removing the Front Right Cover ................................................................................................ 10-36
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ................................................................................................. 10-36
Contents

10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit .............................................................................................................. 10-37
10.10.2.2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ................................................................................ 10-37
10.10.3 Pickup Roller ...................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.4 Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.4.2 Removing the Feeding Roller ...................................................................................................... 10-38
10.10.5 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.10.5.2 Removing the Separation Roller .................................................................................................. 10-39
10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.10.6.9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base ......................................................................................... 10-41
10.10.6.13 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor ....................................................................................... 10-42
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................... 10-43
10.10.7.7 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 10-44
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 10-45
10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................... 10-47
10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................................................................................................... 10-48
10.10.9.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ...................................................................... 10-49
Contents
10.10.10 Slide Resistor .................................................................................................................................... 10-50

10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide Resistor ..................................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.1 Removing the Cassette .............................................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.2 Removing the Front Right Cover .............................................................................................. 10-52
10.10.11.3 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................... 10-52
10.10.11.5 Removing the Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................ 10-53
10.10.11.6 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit .................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................. 10-54
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller .......................................................................................................................... 10-55
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation Roller ........................................................................................................ 10-57
10.10.15.5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller ......................................................................... 10-59
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ....................................................................................................... 10-60
10.10.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor ......................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 10-62
10.10.17.5 Removing the Manual Feed sensor ........................................................................................... 10-64
10.10.18 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) ................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.18.3 Removing the Transparency Sensor (front/rear) ....................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................... 10-66
10.10.19.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................... 10-69
10.10.20 Registration Motor ........................................................................................................................... 10-69
10.10.20.4 Removing the Registration Motor ............................................................................................. 10-70
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor ..................................................................................................................... 10-71
Contents

10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-Registration Motor ....................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22 Horizontal Registration Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-72
10.10.22.3 Removing the Duplex Open/Close Guide ................................................................................. 10-73
10.10.22.5 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate ..................................................... 10-73
10.10.22.6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor ........................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23 Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 10-74
10.10.23.3 Removing the Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................................ 10-75
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller .......................................................................................................................... 10-76
10.10.25.6 Removing the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate ............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.7 Mounting the Pick-up System Sensor Mounting Plate .............................................................. 10-77
10.10.25.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller ....................................................................................................................... 10-78
10.10.26.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ........................................................................................ 10-78
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-79
10.10.27.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................ 10-84
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................. 10-84
10.10.28.6 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor .............................................. 10-85
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86
10.10.29.6 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ........................................... 10-90
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .............................................................................................. 10-90
10.10.30.2 Removing the Disconnecting the Drawer Connector (manual feed unit) .................................. 10-91
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/feeder unit) ............................................................................................. 10-91
Contents

10.10.31.3 Removing the Drawer Connector (fixing feeder unit) .............................................................. 10-92
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1 ................................................................................................................................ 10-92
10.10.32.3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 .................................................................................................. 10-92
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor .......................................................................................................................... 10-94
10.10.33.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor ............................................................................................ 10-95
10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor .............................................................................................................. 10-96
10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor ............................................................................................ 10-97
10.10.35.4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate .................................................... 10-98
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.1 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ............................................................................................. 10-99
10.10.36.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever ...................................................... 10-99
10.10.36.3 Removing the Inside Cover (lower) ........................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.4 Removing the Cassette ............................................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................ 10-100
10.10.36.6 Removing the Front Cover ...................................................................................................... 10-100
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Right Cover ............................................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.8 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover .............................................................................. 10-101
10.10.36.9 Removing the Pickup Unit ...................................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.11 Removing the Lower Rear Cover .......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.12 Removing the High-Voltage Unit ......................................................................................... 10-101
10.10.36.13 Removing the Controller Box Cover ..................................................................................... 10-102
10.10.36.14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover ............................................................................. 10-102
10.10.36.15 Opening the Main Controller Box ......................................................................................... 10-103
10.10.36.16 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ................................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.17 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................ 10-104
10.10.36.18 Removing the Developing Drive Unit ................................................................................... 10-104
10.10.36.19 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting .......................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.20 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct ..................................................................... 10-105
10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105
10.10.36.22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor .................................................................................... 10-105
10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch ............................................................................................................ 10-106
10.10.37.3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector ..................................................................... 10-107
10.10.37.5 Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch .............................................................................. 10-107
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch .................................................................................................................... 10-108
Contents

10.10.38.4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch ...................................................................................... 10-109
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit ............................................................................................................ 10-110
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 ......................................................................................................... 10-115
10.10.40.5 Removing the Delivery Sensor Mounting Plate ...................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.6 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor Flag .................................................................... 10-119
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 .......................................................................... 10-120
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller ................................................................................................................. 10-120
10.10.41.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover ................................................................................. 10-121
10.10.41.3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller ...................................................................................... 10-121
10.10.41.4 Removing the Face-Up Delivery Roller .................................................................................. 10-122
10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 ...................................................................................................... 10-123
10.10.43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 ...................................................................................................... 10-128
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................................................ 10-133
10.10.44.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Motor ............................................................................. 10-137
10.10.45 Delivery Vertical Path Motor ......................................................................................................... 10-137
10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ........................................................................... 10-141
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ................................................................................................... 10-146
Contents

10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..................................................................... 10-149
10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ....................................................................................................... 10-150
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ....................................................................... 10-154
10.10.49.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ......................................... 10-158
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 .............................................................................................. 10-158
10.10.50.5 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ........................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.6 Removing the Cleaner Fan ...................................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 .............................................................................................. 10-163
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ........................................................ 10-167
Contents
Chapter 10
10.1 Construction
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup feeder system are as follows:
T-10-1
Item Description
Method of paper Front loading
accommodation
Method of pickup Separation retard
Paper feed reference Center
Size of paper Cassette 1/2 550 sheets (80 g/m2)

accommodation
Manual feed tray 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Size of paper Cassette 1/2 A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R,
A5R,
12x18, 11x17, LGL, LTR,

LTRR, STMTR
Manual feed tray 98 to 320 mm (main scanning

direction)
148 to 457.2 mm (sub

scanning direction)
Type of paper Plain , Heavy, transparency 64 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (from

cassette)
64 g/m2 to 253 g/m2 (from

manual feeder)
Paper size switching Cassette 1/2 by user
Manual feed tray by user
Duplex print Through path
10-1
Chapter 10
10.1.2 Arrangement of he Units 0000-4672
[1] [8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3] [4] [5]

F-10-1
T-10-2
[1] Delivery assembly [5] Pickup unit
[2] Fixing unit [6] Registration unit
[3] Duplex unit [7] Manual feed unit
[4] Secondary transfer unit [8] Intermediate transfer unit
10-2
Chapter 10
10.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers 0000-4673
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[23] [22] [21] [20]
[7]
[5]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[8]
[11] [12] [15]

[9] [10] [13]
[14]
F-10-2
T-10-3
[1] Face-down delivery roller 1 [13] Pickup roller
[2] Face-down delivery roller 2 [14] Separation roller
[3] Delivery vertical path roller 1 [15] Feed roller
[4] Delivery vertical path roller 2 [16] Pickup vertical path roller
[5] Face-up delivery roller [17] Re-pickup roller
[6] Internal delivery roller [18] Manual feed separation roller
[7] Fixing roller (fixing upper roller) [19] Manual feed roller
[8] Pressure roller (fixing lower roller) [20] Pre-registration roller
[9] Duplex roller 1 [21] Lower registration roller
[10] Duplex roller 2 [22] Upper registration roller
[11] Duplex roller 3 [23] Secondary transfer roller
[12] Duplex roller 4
10-3
Chapter 10
10.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Paths 0000-4674
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down
delivery
(copy tray)
Pickup from
manual feeder
Face-up delivery
(side delivery tray)
Pickup from cassette 1 Pickup from

paper deck
Pickup from cassette 2
F-10-3
10-4
Chapter 10
10.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors 0000-4675
[1] [26] [25] [24] [23] [22]
[2] [21]
[3]
[20]
[4]
[19]
[5]
[6] [18]
[7]
[17]
[8]
[16]
[9]
[10]
[15]
[11] [12] [13] [14]
F-10-4
T-10-4
[1] Center delivery tray full sensor (PS8) [14] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (A; PS20)
[2] Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12) [15] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS19)
[3] Face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6) [16] Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
[4] Delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS13) [17] Caste 1 paper sensor (PS7)
[5] Fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor (PS5) [18] Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
[6] Fixing delivery sensor (PS25) 19] Pickup vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS11)
[7] Fixing inlet sensor (PS27) [20] Manual feed last paper sensor (PS9)
[8] Duplex registration sensor (PS21) [21] Manual fed unit open/closed sensor (PS28)
[9] Duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS22) [22] Manual feed paper sensor (PS10)
[10] Duplex pick sensor (PS24) [23] Front cover open/closed sensor (PS23)
[11] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (B; PS15) [24] Transparency sensor (front; OHP1)
[12] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (A; PS14) [25] Transparency sensor (rear; OHP2)
[13] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (B; PS18) [26] Registration sensor (PS26)
10-5
Chapter 10
10.1.6 Arrangement of the Clutches and Solenoids 0000-4676
[1]
[7]
SL
SL SL
[2] [6]
CL
CL
SL
[5]
[3]
SL
[4]
F-10-5
T-10-5
[1] Delivery path switching solenoid 1 (SL2) [5] Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL3)
[2] Delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5) [6] Duplex pickup solenoid (CL2)
[3] Duplex registration clutch (CL1) [7] manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1)
[4] Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL4)
10-6
Chapter 10
10.1.7 Route of Dive 0000-4677
M11
M1
M10 M8 M9
SL1
M24
M6
SL3
CL1
M7
M26 CL2
SL4
F-10-6
T-10-6
CL1 duplex registration clutch M10 delivery vertical path motor
CL2 duplex pickup clutch M11 face-down delivery motor
M1 drum ITB motor M24 fixing motor
M6 cassette 1 pickup motor M26 duplex feeder motor
M7 caste 2 pickup motor SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid
M8 registration motor SL3 caste 1 pickup solenoid
M9 pre-registration motor SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid
10-7
Chapter 10
10.2 Basic Sequence

Main power
switch ON
Printer unit
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec (approx.)
Drum ITB motor

(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup *1
motor (M6)
Cassette 2 pickup *1
motor (M7)
Registration motor *1
(M8)
Pre-registration *1
motor (M9)
Delivery vertical *1
path motor (M10)
Face-down delivery *1
motor (M11)
Fixing motor
(M24)
Duplex feeder *1
motor (M26)
*1: rotates for about 4.0 sec; a stationary jam will be identified if the sensor goes ON during the period.
F-10-7
10.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start

Key 0000-4679
Print start
PRINT LSTR
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-8
10-8
Chapter 10
10.3 Detecting Jams

10.3.1 Delay Jams
10.3.1.1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0000-4680
The leading edge of paper is not at the sensor within a specific period of time (for feeding) after the motor has gone
ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR / PRINT
[1] [1]
Pickup motor
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
[1]: specific feed time.

F-10-9
T-10-7
Source Motor Sensor
Cassette 1 Pickup motor (M6) Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
Cassette 2 Pickup motor (M7) Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
10.3.1.2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0000-4681
A delay jam occurring outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified at the following timing:
The period of time during which paper is moved form the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N in question is
controlled, and a delay jam will be identified if the delay jam sensor N in question does not go ON within a specific
period of time after the sensor N-1 has gone ON.
Start key ON
or PRINT setting
accepted
INTR / PRINT
[1] [1]
Sensor N-1
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
[1]: specific period of feed.

F-10-10
10-9
Chapter 10
T-10-8
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS26)
Fixing delivery sensor (PS25)
Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
Duplex registration sensor (PS21)
Duplex pickup sensor (PS24)
10.3.2 Stationary Jams
10.3.2.1 Stationary Jams 0000-4682
A stationary jam will be identified if the sensor N does not go OFF within a specific period of tie after the sensor N
has gone ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR / PRINT
L+A L+A
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
(L = paper length feed distance; A = specific feed distance)

F-10-11
T-10-9
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
Caste 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
Face-down deliver y sensor 2 (PS6)
10-10
Chapter 10
10.3.2.2 Stationary Jams at Power-On 0000-4683
The machine checks the absence of paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotations at
power-on:
T-10-10
Sensor
Caste 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
Fixing inlet sensor (PS27)
10-11
Chapter 10
10.4 Cassette
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size 0000-4684
The machine identifies the size of paper into the cassette with reference to the slide guide (15 settings) of the cassette.
The 4-in-a-row actuator designed for the identification of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON/OFF
according to the position of the slide guide, permitting the machine to identify 15 settings. In the absence of a
cassette, all 4 actuators will go OFF.
Paper size
slide guide
Cassette size
detecting switch
Size detecting
actuator
Cassette open Cassette closed
Cassette
F-10-12
T-10-11
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear Front
Paper size Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
1 STMT R ON
2 LTR ON
3 LTR R ON ON
10-12
Chapter 10
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear Front
Paper size Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
4 LGL ON ON
5 11X17*1 ON
6 A5 R ON ON
7 A4 ON ON
8 A4 R ON ON
9 A3 ON ON ON
10 B5 ON ON ON
11 B5 R ON ON ON
12 B4 ON ON ON ON
13 12X18*2 ON ON ON
14 U1 ON ON
15 U2 ON
16 no cassette
ON: actuator pressed (i.e... '0'in reference to a check in I/O mode).
*1:279 x 431.8[mm]
*2:305 x 457[mm]
10-13
Chapter 10
10.4.2 Detecting the Level of Paper 0000-4685
The level of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors:
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
F-10-13
T-10-12
[1] Flag [6] Paper level sensor flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor [7] Lifter gear
[3] Gear [8] Tray
[4] Cassette paper level sensor (A) [9] Paper
[5] Cassette paper level sensor (B)
10-14
Chapter 10
View from the Front of the Machine
If the cassette is full of paper

Cassette paper Cassette paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A) Paper
OFF OFF
If the cassette is half full of paper
Cassette paper Cassette paper Paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A)
OFF ON
If the cassette has little paper
Cassette paper Cassette paper Paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A)
ON ON Cassette paper sensor

Flag
Paper tray
If the cassette has no paper
F-10-14
T-10-13
Paper level sensor (A) Paper level sensor (B) Paper sensor Level of paper Indication on control panel
off off off 100% to 50% of capacity
ON off off about 50% to about 50 sheets
ON ON off About 50 sheets or less
--- --- ON No paper
10-15
Chapter 10
10.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

10.5.1 Outline 0005-9837
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate, and the pickup roller is borught down to the paper for
pickup.
The feed roller and the srpaton roller are used to make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved to the
feeing assembly; the pickup vertical path roller/pre-registration roller is then used to move the paper a fara as the
kegistatoin roller (upper, lower).
The pickup vertical path roller and the pre-registration roller are each driven by the pickup 1 motor and the pre-
registration motor, respectively.
[5] [4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
F-10-15
T-10-14
[1] Vertical path guide [7] Holding plate
[2] Caste retray paper sensor [8] Lifter plate
[3] Pickup vertical path roller [9] Retard guide
[4] Feed roller (roller B) [10] Separation ton roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup roller (roller A) [11] Retard spring
[6] Cassette paper sensor
10-16
Chapter 10
10.5.2 Basci Sequence of Operations 0005-9838
Print start
PRINT LSTR
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-16
10-17
Chapter 10
10.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

10.6.1 Outline 0000-4688
The paper in the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the pickup feeder roller as the lifter moves up, an a single
sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[6] [7]
F-10-17
T-10-15
[1] Paper tray [6] Manual feeder separation roller
[2] Side guide plate [7] Registration multi frame
[3] Paper flag [8] Last paper pick roll
[4] Manual feed feeder roller [9] Lifter
[5] Pickup guide plate
10-18
Chapter 10
Manual feeder
Torque limter
pickup feed roller
Torque delay
mehcainsm
DC drive direct link
Separation roller Manual feeder

holder separation roller
F-10-18
Initial Torque delay mechanism Torque limiter in

condition in operation operation
Manual feed
feeder roller
Paper
Tortion spring
Damper core
Spring pin
Separation Separation
roller shaft roller
Torque delay mechanism Separation roller shaft
direction of rotation direction of rotation
F-10-19
Print start
PRINT LSTR
1.9 sec (approx.)
Manual feed pickup

Solenoid (SL1)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Registration motor
(M8)
F-10-20
10-19
Chapter 10
10.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper 0000-4690
The machine checks the widht of paper in reference to the level of output ffrom the variable resistor operating in
conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle. The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the
user when he/she deposit paper.
Variable resistor
Manual feed tray
Slide guide (rear)
Slide guide (front)
F-10-21
10-20
Chapter 10
10.6.4 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper 0000-4691
When paper is placed, its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag, thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor
(PS10) to detect the presence of paper.
Paper detecting
flag Paper
Manual feed paper

sensor (PS10)
Paper
Manual feed paper Paper detecting

sensor (PS10) flag
F-10-22
10-21
Chapter 10
10.6.5 Detecting the Last paper 0000-4692
When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit in the roll cuses the output of the last paper sensor (PS9) to beocme
wave-form pusles. The last paper roll rotates only when the last paper is picked up; otherwise, it remains still. The
machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor.
Last paper
Manual feed
last paper
sensor (PS9)
Last paper
detecting roll
Last paper
If 4 or more output pulses are detected,
the paper is identified as being the last.
Manual feed lsat paper

sensor (PS9)
Last paper detecting roll

F-10-23
10-22
Chapter 10
10.7 Registration Unit

10.7.1 Outline 0000-4693
The upper registraont roller an the lower registration roller are dreiven by the registration motor (M8), and are used
to make user aht the paper an the image on the intermediate transfer rbelt mach at a specific position. The upper guide
locking arm latches in place when the unit is fitted to the machine.
When fitted to the machine

Area of upper
Upper guide
Upper registration guide to be
locking arm
roller locked in place
Lower registration Machine rail Upper guide preasure Mobile rail

roller spring
When the multi upper guide is shifted up
Registration Nip Released

The shape of the cam causes
the registration upper roller
to move up by 1.5 mm during
rotation, releasing the nip Registration multi
where paper moves.
upper guide
Area of upper guide

to be locked
in place
Upper guide locking

arm open (unlocked)
Machine rail Upper guide pressure spring Mobile rail

F-10-24
10-23
Chapter 10
Registration motor (M8) Pre-registration motor (M9)

Manual feed
pickup solenoid
Manual feed
control gear
Upper Lower Pre-registration Duplex Manual feed

registration registration roller roller shaft roller shaft
roller roller
F-10-25
10-24
Chapter 10
10.8 Duplex Feeding Unit

10.8.1 Outline 0000-4694
The duplex nit is drivn by the duplex motor (M26), and is sued when making double-sided prints.
[1]
[2]
[3] [7]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
F-10-26
T-10-16
[1] Reversing sheet [9] Delivery cooling duct
[2] Reversing rollre [10] Arching assembly
[3] Reversing sheet [11] Duplex roller 2
[12] Duplex horizontal registration

[4] Face-up delivery roller
sensor (PS22)
[5] Cross path flapper [13] Duplex roller 3
[6] Duple roller 1 [14] Duplex roller 4
[7] FU/FD swtycing flapper [15] Re-pickup roller
[8] Internal delivery roller
10-25
Chapter 10
10.8.2 Controling Horizontal Registration 0000-4695
When in duplexing mode, the machine executes horizontal registration detection for paper coming from the duplex
feed assembly to see if there is any discrepancy in main scanning direction (front-rear direction), thus adjusting the
point of laser exposure.
T-10-17
Detecting of paper duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS22)

position:
Timing of detection: starts a specifi peirrod of time after pasage over the duplex
registraont neosr (PS21)
Dive horizontal registration motor (M25)
Identifiaotin of with refenced to the pulse form the horizontal registration

position: motor
Horizontal registration
motor (M25)
Duplex horizontal registration

sensor (PS22)
Paper
Home Detection start

position position
Paper
10 mm (approx.)
F-10-27
10-26
Chapter 10
10.8.3 Face-Down Delivery, A4, 5 Sheets in Circulation 0000-4696
The number on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side,
respse3ctively.
1 point of reversal
1 duplex pre-registration
2
(1) (2) (3)
1 check on horizontal
registration
(4)
2 3
3
1 4
in wait for
1 re-pickup 2 1
2
(6) with 2 sheets inside duplex unit

(5) (7)
10-27
Chapter 10
1
4
3 2
(8)
1 2
1 1
4 5 3
2
4 3
3 5 4
5
(10)
(9) thereafter, repeats (7) through (10) (11)
3
2
1
(12)
10-28
Chapter 10
5
4
3 4
2 3
1 2
1
(13) (14)
10.8.4 Face-Down Delivery, A3, 3 Sheets in Cirucilation 0000-4697
The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side,
respectively.
1 point of reversal
1 duplex pre-registration
1
(1) (2) (3)
10-29
Chapter 10
1 check on horizontal
registration
(4)
2 point of reversal
non-contact reversal
2 1 1
1 in wait for 2
re-pickup
(5) (6) (7)
(8)
thereafter, repeats (6) through (8)
10-30
Chapter 10
2 3
2
1
1
(9) (10)
10-31
Chapter 10
10.9 Delivery
10.9.1 Delivery 0000-4698
The machine uses any of the following 3 types of delivery (paper apths):
face-deown delivery (center delivery tray)
face-down delivery (copy tray)
face-up device r(side delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(copy tray)
Face-up delivery
F-10-28
10-32
Chapter 10
10.9.2 Movement in the Direction of Face-Down Delivery 0000-4699
After moving thtough the fixing unit, the paper moves along the FU/FD switching flapper now facing downawar; it
then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face-down delivery.
Plastic sheet
FU/FD
switching
flapper
F-10-29
10-33
Chapter 10
10.9.3 Movement in the Direction of Face-Up Delivery 0000-4700
After moving through he fixing unit, the paper moves uder the FU/FD swtichign flapper, which has been shfited up
by the delivery path switching solenoid (SL2); at this time the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work
of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5), thus guding the paper into the direction of face-up delivery.
FU/FD
switching
flapper
Face-up delivery
Cross path
flapper
F-10-30
10.9.4 Movement for CenterTray delivery 0000-4701
The paper moves while pushing down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead for center tray delivery.
Paper Center tray delivery
Plastic sheet
F-10-31
10-34
Chapter 10
10.9.5 Moement for Copy Tray Dievyer 0000-4702
The paper meos while pushign down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead in the direction of the centra tray.
Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops, at which time the
movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray.
Paper
Copy tray delivery
Plastic sheet
Paper
Copy tray delivery Paper

movement
reverse
Plastic sheet
F-10-32
10-35
Chapter 10
10.10 Parts Replacement cover [2].
Procedure
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit

Cassette 0000-4704
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
F-10-34
1) Slide out the cassette.

10.10.1.4 Removing the Pickup
10.10.1.2 Removing the Front Vertical Path Cover 0000-4707
Right Cover 0006-8859 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover [3].
vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2].
F-10-35
F-10-33
10.10.1.3 Removing the Rear

The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right
10-36
Chapter 10

Unit 0000-4708

screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3].
F-10-37
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and push the

protrusion [A] from the left to release the lock;
F-10-36
then, detach the cassette size detection unit [2] for
the machine's front.
10.10.2 Cassette Size Detection Unit

Cassette 0000-4778
MEMO:
1) Slide out the cassette. F-10-38

MEMO:
Cassette Size Detection Unit 0000-4779
When attaching the cassette size detection unit, try
pushing the 4 protrusions into the holes of the
lower left cover [2].
machine's stay.
10-37
Chapter 10
10.10.3 Pickup Roller 10.10.4.2 Removing the

Feeding Roller 0000-4714
10.10.3.1 Removing the 1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then,
Cassette 0000-4710 pick the tab [A] of the feed roller, and pull it out.
MEMO:

Roller 0000-4711
1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then, F-10-40

pick the tab [A] of the pickup roller [1], and pull it
out. 10.10.5 Separation Roller

Cassette 0000-4716
MEMO:

F-10-39
10.10.4 Feed Roller

Cassette 0000-4713
MEMO:
10-38
Chapter 10

Separation Roller 0000-4717
1) Put your hand through the front of the machine;

then, pick the tab [A] of the separation roller [1],
and pull it out.
F-10-42


F-10-41 distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
10.10.6 Cassette Pickup Motor detach the main controller cover [4].




Power Supply Unit 0000-4759 F-10-43
connectors of the fuse PCB; then, detach the DC 10.10.6.6 Removing the DC
power supply unit [2]. Controller PCB Cover 0000-4761

10-39
Chapter 10
F-10-46
F-10-44

When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable
When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off clamp [4].
[1]
F-10-47
F-10-45



fan [3].
F-10-48
10-40
Chapter 10

F-10-51

F-10-49 [2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].

Controller Base 0000-4765

Mounting [2].
F-10-52

Manual Feed Cooling Fan
Duct 0000-4767

F-10-50 the manual feed cooling fan duct [3].

High-Voltage Unit 0000-4766

voltage unit [2].
10-41
Chapter 10
F-10-53 F-10-55
10.10.6.12 Removing the Rear 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
Right Cover 0000-4768 screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor
unit [3].

cover [2].
F-10-56

screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor
unit [3].
F-10-54

Cassette Pickup Motor 0000-4769
1) Remove the grip [1].
10-42
Chapter 10


cover [2].
F-10-57
10.10.7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

Cassette 0000-4732
MEMO:
F-10-59
1) Slide out the cassette. 10.10.7.4 Removing the Pickup

Vertical Path Cover 0000-4735
10.10.7.2 Removing the Front 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
Right Cover 0000-4733 path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
F-10-60
F-10-58
10-43
Chapter 10

Unit 0000-4736

F-10-63

F-10-61 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 0000-4738
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the

10.10.7.6 Removing the Pick-
cassette retry paper sensor [2].
up System Sensor Mounting
Plate 0000-4737
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the

bracket [2].
F-10-64
10.10.7.8 Mounting the Pick-

Plate 0000-4739
F-10-62
Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw
Mounting Plate
[1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
Any of the gears can drop off. When attaching the
Thereafter,remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the
sensor mounting plate, be sure that the pickup unit
sensor mounting plate [5].
will not face downward.
1) Attach the bushing [1] to the frame; then, attach the

gear shaft [2].
10-44
Chapter 10
10.10.8 Cassette Paper Sensor

Cassette 0000-4740
MEMO:
F-10-65
2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly
into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure 10.10.8.2 Removing the Front
the sensor mounting plate [2] in place.
F-10-66
3) Attach the gear [1] and the E-ring [2].
F-10-68

F-10-67
4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth. cover [2].
10-45
Chapter 10
F-10-71
F-10-69
10.10.8.4 Removing the Pickup up System Sensor Mounting
Vertical Path Cover 0000-4743 Plate 0000-4745
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup bracket [2].
F-10-70
F-10-72
10.10.8.5 Removing the Pickup 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw
Unit 0000-4744 [1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 Thereafter,remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. sensor mounting plate [5].
10-46
Chapter 10
F-10-75

F-10-73 into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure
Cassette Paper Sensor 0000-4746

cassette paper sensor [2].
F-10-76

F-10-74

Plate 0000-4747

Mounting Plate
Any of the gears can drop off. When attaching the F-10-77
will not face downward. 4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth.

gear shaft [2].
10-47
Chapter 10
10.10.9 Cassette Paper Level Sensor

(A/B)

Cassette 0000-4748
MEMO:
1) Slide out the cassette. F-10-79
10.10.9.2 Removing the Front 10.10.9.4 Removing the Pickup

Right Cover 0000-4749 Vertical Path Cover 0000-4751
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
vertical path cover. path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's vertical path cover [3].
F-10-80
F-10-78
10.10.9.3 Removing the Rear Unit 0000-4752

cover [2].
10-48
Chapter 10
F-10-81
F-10-83
up System Sensor Mounting 10.10.9.7 Removing the
Plate 0000-4753
Cassette Paper Level Sensor
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the (A/B) 0000-4754
bracket [2].
cassette paper sensor (A/B) [2].
F-10-82 F-10-84
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 10.10.9.8 Mounting the Pick-
[1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3]. up System Sensor Mounting
Plate 0000-4755

Mounting Plate
10-49
Chapter 10
1) Attach the bushing [1] to the frame; then, attach the 10.10.10 Slide Resistor
gear shaft [2].

Manual Feed Unit 0000-4995
1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right

side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
F-10-85

into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure
F-10-88
2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];

then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-10-86
F-10-89

Manual Feed Tray Unit 0000-4996
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2].
F-10-87
4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth.
10-50
Chapter 10
F-10-90 F-10-92
2) Disconnect the connector [1] at the rear; then, while

opening the face plate [2], shift the manual feed tray MEMO:
[3] 90 deg or more to detach it upward. When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower
cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side,
and slide them into place.
F-10-91
F-10-93
Manual Feed Tray Upper
Cover/Lower Cover 0000-4997
1) Spread the side guide [1] of the manual feed tray

unit, and separate it into the upper cover [2] and the
lower cover [3] (for detachment).
10-51
Chapter 10
10.10.10.4 Removing the Slide 10.10.11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid

Resistor 0000-4998

Cassette 0000-4771
Points to Note Removing the Slide Resistor
When detaching the slide resistor, do not apply excess MEMO:
force when spreading the claw of the lower cover; The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
otherwise, the claw can break. removed in the same way.
When attaching the slide resistor, take care not to
touch the connector [1] at the edge of the slide resistor. 1) Slide out the cassette.
Try to match the black protrusion [A] behind the slide
resistor against the hole [A] in the tray. 10.10.11.2 Removing the Front
F-10-94
1) Disconnect the connector [1] on the lower cover

side, spread the claw [A], and detach the slide
resistor [2].
F-10-96


cover [2].
F-10-95
10-52
Chapter 10
F-10-99
F-10-97
10.10.11.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0000-4776
Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4774 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup solenoid [3].
F-10-100
F-10-98
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit
Pickup Unit 0000-4775 10.10.12.1 Removing the
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4949
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
10-53
Chapter 10

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2].
F-10-101
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4]. F-10-104

opening the face plate [2], shift the manual feed tray
[3] 90 deg or more to detach it upward.
F-10-102
F-10-105
10.10.13 Manual Feed Unit

F-10-103 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
10-54
Chapter 10
F-10-106 F-10-108
2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2]; 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-10-107 F-10-109
10.10.14 Manual Feed Roller 10.10.14.2 Removing the

Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4961
10.10.14.1 Removing the 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
Manual Feed Unit 0000-4960 side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].

F-10-110
10-55
Chapter 10
unit cover [4].
F-10-113
2) Remove the gear [1] at the front, and detach the

F-10-111 bushing [2].
(For both gear and the bushing, free the claw fitted
in the groove of the roller for detachment.)
F-10-112
F-10-114

3) Remove the bushing [1] at the rear.
Manual Feed Roller 0000-4962
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the mounting

plate [2].
F-10-115
4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the

manual feed roller [2].
10-56
Chapter 10
10.10.15 Manual Feed Separation

Roller
When attaching the manual feed roller, be sure that the
groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear.

F-10-116
F-10-118
When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front,
check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove
of the roller.
F-10-119

F-10-117

10-57
Chapter 10

Motor Cover 0006-8853
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the motor cover

[2] at the rear.
F-10-120
unit cover [4]. F-10-123


plate [2].
F-10-121
F-10-124

bushing [2].
F-10-122
10-58
Chapter 10

of the roller.
F-10-125
F-10-128

Manual Feed Separation
F-10-126
Roller 0000-4968
4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the 1)

Take care not to lose the spring found at the front
when detaching the face plate.

Detach the face plate [1].
F-10-129
F-10-127
10-59
Chapter 10
When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring

[2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the
arm.
F-10-132
10.10.16 Manual Feed Last Paper

Sensor
F-10-130

2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2]. Manual Feed Unit 0000-5000
(Free the snap-in claw.) 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
F-10-131
F-10-133
3) Pick the tab [A] of the manual feed separation roller
[2], and pull it out in the direction of the arrow. 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
10-60
Chapter 10
F-10-134

F-10-136
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2]. 10.10.16.3 Removing the
Manual Feed Tray Upper
Cover/Lower Cover 0000-5002
1) Spread the side guide [1] of the manual feed tray

unit, and separate it into the upper cover [2] and the
lower cover [3] (for detachment).
F-10-135

opening the face plate [2], shift the manual feed tray
[3] 90 deg or more to detach it upward.
F-10-137
MEMO:
When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower
cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side,
and slide them into place.
10-61
Chapter 10
10.10.17 Manual Feed Sensor


F-10-138

Manual Feed Last Paper
Sensor 0000-5003
1) Free the needle spring [1] from the hook, and

detach the detecting roll [2]. F-10-141

F-10-139

F-10-142
manual feed last paper sensor [2].


F-10-140
10-62
Chapter 10


plate [2].
F-10-143
unit cover [4].
F-10-146

bushing [2].
F-10-144
F-10-147
F-10-145
10-63
Chapter 10
F-10-148
4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the

F-10-150

[2] at the rear.
F-10-149 F-10-151

Manual Feed sensor 0000-4975
When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front, 1)
of the roller. Take care not to lose the spring found at the front
when detaching the face plate.
Detach the face plate [1].
10-64
Chapter 10
F-10-152 F-10-154
3) Remove the sensor flag [2] attached to the middle

guide [1].
When attaching the face plate, be sure that the spring
[2] fits into the hole [1] found on the front side of the
arm.
F-10-155
4) Disconnect the connector [1] from behind the

middle guide, and detach the manual feed paper
F-10-153
sensor [2].
2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2].
(Free the snap-in claw.)
F-10-156
10-65
Chapter 10
10.10.18 Transparency Sensor

(Front/Rear)


F-10-159

Transparency Sensor (front/
rear) 0000-4954
1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting

face, detach the transparency sensor [1].
F-10-157

F-10-160
10.10.19 Manual Feed Pickup

Solenoid
F-10-158

Transparency Sensor
Mounting Plate 0000-4953
screws [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3] found at
the bottom.
10-66
Chapter 10
unit cover [4].
F-10-161

then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. F-10-164
F-10-162
10.10.19.2 Removing the F-10-165

plate [2].
F-10-163
10-67
Chapter 10

F-10-166

bushing [2].
(For both gear and the bushing, free the claw fitted F-10-169

of the roller.
F-10-167
F-10-170

F-10-168
4) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull out the [2] at the rear.
10-68
Chapter 10
[A]
[1] [B] [2]

F-10-173
F-10-171
10.10.20 Registration Motor
Manual Feed Pickup
Solenoid 0000-4981
[2]; then, detach the manual feed pickup solenoid
[3].
F-10-172 F-10-174

Points to Note When Attaching the Manual Feed

Pickup Solenoid
When attaching the solenoid [1], be sure to hook the
flapper [A] on the claw [B] of the gear [2].
F-10-175
10-69
Chapter 10


F-10-178


F-10-176
[2] at the rear.
unit cover [4].
F-10-179

Registration Motor 0000-4993
F-10-177
screws [2]; then, detach the registration motor [3].
10-70
Chapter 10
F-10-182
F-10-180
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4984

10.10.21.1 Removing the side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].

F-10-183
F-10-181
unit cover [4].

F-10-184
10-71
Chapter 10
F-10-185 F-10-187
10.10.21.3 Removing the 10.10.22 Horizontal Registration

Motor
[2] at the rear.
Fixing Unit 0000-4882

[2].
F-10-186
10.10.21.4 Removing the Pre-

Registration Motor 0000-4987
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 F-10-188

screws [2]; then, detach the pre-registration motor
[3]. 10.10.22.2 Removing the
Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4883
1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/

feeder unit [2].
10-72
Chapter 10
F-10-191
F-10-189 1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the

bottom.
10.10.22.3 Removing the 2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then,
detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder
Duplex Open/Close Guide 0000-4884
assembly.
F-10-190 F-10-192
10.10.22.4 Removing the 10.10.22.5 Removing the

Fixing/Feeder Assembly Horizontal Registration
Back Sheet 0000-4885 Motor Support Plate 0000-4886

screws [2]; then, detach the horizontal registration
- When placing the fixing feeder unit upright, be sure motor support plate [3].
to use paper to prevent dirt from collecting.
- If you forgot to use paper, make a double-sided test
copy before ending the work.
10-73
Chapter 10
F-10-195
F-10-193
10.10.23 Registration Sensor
- When attaching the horizontal registration motor 10.10.23.1 Removing the

support plate [1], be sure to bring the horizontal Manual Feed Unit 0000-4956
registration motor support plate firmly in contact 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
with the grounding lead spring [2] found under the side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
guide plate.
- After replacement, check to make sure that the
sensor flag moves smoothly.
F-10-196

F-10-194

Horizontal Registration
Motor 0000-4887

screws [2]; then, detach the horizontal registration
motor [3].
10-74
Chapter 10
F-10-197
F-10-199

10.10.24 Fixing/Feeder Unit
Transparency Sensor
Mounting Plate 0000-4957
screws [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3] found at
the bottom. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
[2].
F-10-198
F-10-200
Registration Sensor 0000-4958 10.10.24.2 Removing the
1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4782
face of the transparency sensor [1], detach the 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/
registration sensor [2]. feeder unit [2].
10-75
Chapter 10


cover [2].
F-10-201
10.10.25 Vertical Path Roller

Cassette 0000-4718
MEMO:
F-10-203

Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4721
10.10.25.2 Removing the Front 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
F-10-204
F-10-202
10-76
Chapter 10

Pickup Unit 0000-4722

F-10-207

F-10-205 up System Sensor Mounting
Plate 0000-4725
Plate 0000-4723
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the
Mounting Plate
bracket [2].

gear shaft [2].
F-10-206

F-10-208
[1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure
10-77
Chapter 10
2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front;

shift the vertical path roller [2] to the rear and then
pull it upward to detach.
F-10-209
F-10-212
10.10.26 Inside Delivery Roller

Inside Delivery Roller 0000-4945
1) Open the fixing feeder unit cover.

F-10-210
4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth.

Vertical Path Roller 0000-4724
1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear, and
detach the gear and the bushing [2].
F-10-213
2) Remove the E-ring[1] and the bushing [2] at the

front; then, remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4]
at the rear.
F-10-211
10-78
Chapter 10
F-10-216
F-10-214
3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off

of the frame at the front; then, detach it. Center Delivery Tray 0000-4786

delivery tray [2].
F-10-215
10.10.27 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/ F-10-217

Closed Sensor
10.10.27.1 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit
Upper Left Cover 0000-4785 (Old) 0000-4787
1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and

remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left
cover [3]. In case following models, refer to "Removing the
Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
1) Detach the strap [1] from the delivery vertical

cover; then, detach the delivery vertical path cover
10-79
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-218
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery F-10-220

internal cover [2].
Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery

Vertical Path Unit
When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found
on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the
plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with
screws. (Be sure to tighten the left screw first.)
F-10-219

screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
F-10-221

Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(New) 0006-8955
10-80
Chapter 10
Disconnect the 2 concoctors [1], and remove the 4

For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3].
version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be
(The delivery path unit will no longer be used.)
sure to check its version in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>D-CON.

2) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then,
remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper left
cover [3].
F-10-224
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop

F-10-222
[2] from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then,
detach the strap [3] from the delivery inside cover.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
(The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be
inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical
used.)
path cover [3] from the machine.
F-10-223
F-10-225
4)
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside

cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];
To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
and then pull it out toward the front.
10-81
Chapter 10
F-10-226
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the F-10-228

machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be
used.) 9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path
unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At
this time, check to make sure that the machine
positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-227
8) Fit the top [1] of the new delivery vertical path

inside of the machine plate [2].
When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure

to lift it once before setting it in place.
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine F-10-229
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
unit in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to
the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
in place using a screw [3].
10-82
Chapter 10
F-10-230 F-10-232
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial [2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the
position. fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting
plate [4].
F-10-231

Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting
Plate 0000-4788
Before detaching the fixing/feeder unit, be sure to

mark its position using a scriber. F-10-233
10-83
Chapter 10

1) Remove the fixing/feeder open/closed sensor [1].
F-10-235

F-10-234
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
Open/Closed Sensor
10.10.28.1 Removing the cover [2].
Cassette 0000-4726
MEMO:

vertical path cover. F-10-236
front right cover [2]. 10.10.28.4 Removing the
Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4729
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical

10-84
Chapter 10
F-10-237 F-10-239
10.10.28.5 Removing the 2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the sensor flag
Pickup Unit 0000-4730 [2].

F-10-240
3) Remove the pickup vertical path cover open/closed

F-10-238
sensor [1].

Pickup Vertical Path Cover
Open/Closed Sensor 0000-4731

[2]; then, detach the sensor mounting plate [3].
F-10-241
10-85
Chapter 10
10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/ 10.10.29.3 Removing the

Closed Detecting Switch Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(Old) 0000-4795

Upper Left Cover 0000-4793
In case following models, refer to "Removing the
- flom MLW01838
cover [3].
- flom MLX02392

[2].
F-10-242

Center Delivery Tray 0000-4794 F-10-244
delivery tray [2]. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
internal cover [2].
F-10-243
F-10-245

unit [3].
10-86
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-246

Vertical Path Unit
When attaching, engage the left/right hook [1] found F-10-248
plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
screws. (Be sure to tighten the left screw first.) inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical
F-10-247
F-10-249
4)

To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
(New) 0006-8956
10-87
Chapter 10

F-10-252
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the

F-10-250 used.)

used.)
F-10-253


F-10-251
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; unit in place.
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
10-88
Chapter 10
F-10-256
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-254
9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path

F-10-257

Closed Sensor Mounting
Plate 0000-4796
Before detaching the fixing/feeder unit, be sure to

mark its position using a scriber.
F-10-255
10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to

10-89
Chapter 10
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing/

feeder open/closed sensor [2].
F-10-258
1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals

[2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the
fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting
plate [4]. F-10-260
10.10.30 Drawer Connector (manual

feed unit)


F-10-259
10.10.29.6 Removing the F-10-261

Closed Detecting Switch 0000-4797 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
MEMO:
The fixing/feeder unit open/closed switches 1 and 2
may be removed in the same way.
10-90
Chapter 10
10.10.31 Drawer Connector (fixing/

feeder unit)


[2].
F-10-262

Disconnecting the Drawer
Connector (manual feed unit) 0000-8485

drawer connector [2].
F-10-265


feeder unit [2].
F-10-263
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] from behind, and

disconnect the drawer connector [2].
F-10-266
F-10-264
10-91
Chapter 10

Drawer Connector (fixing
feeder unit) 0000-5007
1) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [1], and
disconnect the 2 connectors [3], and remove the 2
screws [4]; then, detach the connector base [5].
F-10-269


feeder unit [2].
F-10-267
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer

connector [2].
F-10-270

Duplex Roller 1 0000-4942
1) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1].

F-10-268
10.10.32 Duplex Roller 1


[2].
10-92
Chapter 10
F-10-271 F-10-273
2) Remove the duct. 5) Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2] at the rear.
When removing the gear, pay attention not to lose the

parallel pin found at the rear.
3) Remove the 2 E-rings [1], gear [2], and link [3];

then, remove the screw [4] to detach the grounding
wire [5].
F-10-274
6) Remove the 2 duplex auxiliary guides [1] of the

duplex roller.
F-10-272
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the motor base

[2].
F-10-275
10-93
Chapter 10
7) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the

connector [2]; then, detach the delivery path
Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Roller
switching solenoid 2 [3] together with the base.
1) Be sure that the longer side [A] of the D-cut in the
roller shaft [1] is toward the front.
F-10-276
8) Free the claw of the gear [1] at the front; then, slide
F-10-279
the roller to the rear, and remove the gear [1] and
the bearing [2].
2) When monting, be sure that the front tip of the
roller shaft is in contact with the grounding plate
[A].
F-10-277
9) Remove the duplexing roller [1].
F-10-280
10.10.33 Duplex Feed Motor

F-10-278
10-94
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-283
F-10-281
2) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1], and
10.10.33.2 Removing the remove the screw [1], then detach the duct [2].

feeder unit [2].
F-10-284
3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and free the boss
[A] and the hook [B]; then, detach the cover (rear)
[2].
F-10-282

Duplex Feed Motor 0000-4907
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex feeder

motor from the bottom.
F-10-285
10-95
Chapter 10
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the duplex 10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor
feeder motor [2] in the direction indicated to detach.


[2].
F-10-286
F-10-288
Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Feed

Motor 10.10.34.2 Removing the
1) Be sure that the connector area is at the bottom. Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-8480
2) Be sure to tighten the lower right screw [1] together 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/
with the grounding wire [2]. feeder unit [2].
F-10-287
F-10-289

Fixing/Feeder Assembly
Back Sheet 0000-8481
10-96
Chapter 10
- When placing the fixing feeder unit upright, be sure

F-10-290
F-10-292
1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the
bottom. 10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal
2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then,
detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder Registration Sensor
assembly.

[2].
F-10-291

Duplex Registration Sensor 0000-8482
1) Disconnect the connector [1], free the 2 claws [2], F-10-293

and remove the sensor base [3]; then, detach the
duplex registration sensor [4].
10-97
Chapter 10
10.10.35.2 Removing the detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder
Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4891 assembly.

feeder unit [2].
F-10-296

F-10-294 Horizontal Registration
Motor Support Plate 0000-4893
10.10.35.3 Removing the 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2
Fixing/Feeder Assembly screws [2]; then, detach the horizontal registration
Back Sheet 0000-4892 motor support plate [3].
- When placing the fixing feeder unit upright, be sure

F-10-297
F-10-295 - When attaching the horizontal registration motor

support plate [1], be sure to bring the horizontal
registration motor support plate firmly in contact
1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the with the grounding lead spring [2] found under the
bottom. guide plate.
2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then, - After replacement, check to make sure that the
10-98
Chapter 10
sensor flag moves smoothly.
F-10-298 F-10-300
After replacement, check to make sure that the sensor

flag moves smoothly.
Duplex Registration Sensor 0000-4894
10.10.36 Duplex Pickup Sensor
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the duplex
horizontal registration sensor [2].
Cleaner Fan Cover 0000-4915

cover [2].
F-10-299
Be sure to mach the protrusion [B] of the harness

guide found behind the guide plate against the area F-10-301
[A] marked on the flat cable [1] coming from the
duplex horizontal registration sensor.
(if you twist it inadvertently, the loop area will not
move smoothly.)
Releasing Lever 0000-4916
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the intermediate

transfer unit releasing lever [2].
10-99
Chapter 10


F-10-302

Inside Cover (lower) 0000-4917

F-10-304
screws [2]; then, detach the inside cover (lower)
[3].
F-10-305
F-10-303
10.10.36.4 Removing the 10.10.36.6 Removing the Front

Cassette 0000-4918
Cover 0000-4921
1) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 hinge pins [2];

then, detach the front cover.
MEMO:
10-100
Chapter 10
F-10-308
F-10-306
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Pickup Unit 0000-4924
Right Cover 0000-4922 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4

cover [2].
F-10-309


F-10-307 Lower Rear Cover 0000-4926

Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4923 10.10.36.12 Removing the
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical High-Voltage Unit 0000-4927
voltage unit [2].
10-101
Chapter 10
F-10-310

F-10-312


F-10-311


F-10-313

10-102
Chapter 10
[1]
F-10-314
F-10-317


F-10-318

F-10-319
F-10-316
10-103
Chapter 10


F-10-322

F-10-320

Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000-4933

fan [3].
F-10-323

F-10-321


clamp [4]. F-10-324
10-104
Chapter 10

Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-4935

Mounting [2].
F-10-327

Duplex Pickup Sensor 0000-4937
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the rear side plate

F-10-325
side, and detach the rail support plate [2] of the
manual feed unit.
Duct 0000-4936

the manual feed cooling fan duct [3].
F-10-328
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] from the side of the rear

side plate and the 2 screws [2] from the side of the
F-10-326
front side plate; then, detach the rail guide [3] of the
manual feed unit as shown.
Duplex Driver PCB 0006-3015
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the duplex

driver PCB [2].
10-105
Chapter 10

[2]; then, detach the sensor support plate [3].
F-10-332
F-10-329
6) Remove the duplex pickup sensor [1].

connector support plate [2].
F-10-333
F-10-330 10.10.37 Duplex Registration Clutch
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the lower 10.10.37.1 Removing the
guide plate [2].

[2].
F-10-331
10-106
Chapter 10
F-10-334 F-10-336

feeder unit [2].
F-10-337
F-10-335
Duplex Registration Clutch 0000-4880
10.10.37.3 Removing the 1) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].

Duplex Feeder Motor
Connector 0000-4878
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex feeder

motor from the base side.
F-10-338
10-107
Chapter 10
2) Slide the bushing [1] to free the duplex feed roller

3 [2].
F-10-341
F-10-339
4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex
registration clutch [2].
When attaching it, fit it while turning the duplex feed

roller 3 [2] so as not to bend the sheet [1] of the duplex
guide plate. (Do not shift up the sheet by hand.)
F-10-342
10.10.38 Duplex Pickup Clutch
F-10-340

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the [2].
clutch stop [2]; then, pull the duplex registration
clutch [3] upward to detach.
10-108
Chapter 10
F-10-343
F-10-345

Duplex Pickup Clutch 0000-4901
1) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1].
feeder unit [2].
F-10-346
2) Remove the 2 E-rings [1].

F-10-344

F-10-347
10-109
Chapter 10
3) Shift the bushing [1] to the inside of the duplex

feeder guide.
When attaching, be sure that the stop [A] of the clutch
is at the bottommost.
[A]
F-10-351
F-10-348
4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the duplex pickup

clutch. Make sure that the front side of the roller shaft is in
contact with the leaf spring [1].
F-10-349
F-10-352
5) Remove the roller shaft, and remove the E-ring [1];
then, detach the duplex pickup clutch [2].
10.10.39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit


[2].
F-10-350
10-110
Chapter 10
F-10-353
F-10-355
Center Delivery Tray 0000-4801
delivery tray [2].
(Old) 0000-4802

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

F-10-354 [2].


cover [3].
F-10-356

internal cover [2].
10-111
Chapter 10
F-10-357
F-10-359
unit [3].

(New) 0006-4883


F-10-358
cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-360
10-112
Chapter 10
inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical used.)

F-10-361
F-10-363
4)

F-10-364

used.)
F-10-362

10-113
Chapter 10
F-10-365

When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure F-10-367

Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path in place using a screw [3].
unit in place.
F-10-368
position.
F-10-366

10-114
Chapter 10
F-10-369
10.10.40 Face-Down Delivery Roller F-10-371
1 10.10.40.3 Removing the

10.10.40.1 Removing the (Old) 0000-4823

cover [3].
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2].
F-10-370


F-10-372
delivery tray [2].

internal cover [2].
10-115
Chapter 10
F-10-373
F-10-375
unit [3].

(New) 0006-8958


F-10-374
cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-376
10-116
Chapter 10

F-10-377
F-10-379
4)

F-10-380

used.)
F-10-378

10-117
Chapter 10
F-10-381


unit in place.
F-10-384
position.
F-10-382

10-118
Chapter 10
F-10-385
F-10-387

Delivery Sensor Mounting MEMO:
Plate 0006-0709 The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape,
permitting it to be removed upward.
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor
mounting plate [2].
F-10-388
Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag

When attaching the sensor flag, be sure to match the
F-10-386 L-shaped area [A] of the spring against the groove [B]
of the face-down delivery sub frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Delivery

Sensor Mounting Plate
When attaching the sensor mounting plate, secure it in
place with screws first and then route the wire to
facilitate the work.
10.10.40.6 Removing the Face-

Down Delivery Sensor Flag 0006-3776
1) Shift up the sensor flag [1] of the face-down

F-10-389
delivery sensor 1, and pull it upward to detach.
10-119
Chapter 10
Spring
When attaching, shape the grounding leaf plate
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face- removed in 3) into a half-loop, and work so that the
Down Delivery Roller 1 0000-4826 frame plate [1] and the grounding leaf spring [2] are in
contact.
1) Shift up the grounding leaf spring [1] using a flat-
blade screwdriver, and free the 2 claws.
F-10-392
3) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2], and

remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4] found to the
rear of the face-down delivery roller 1; then, detach
F-10-390 the face-down delivery roller 1 [5].
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the sensor

cable [2] from the face-down delivery sub frame;
then, remove the flag [3] of the face-down delivery
sensor 1, and detach the face-down delivery sub
frame [4].
F-10-393
10.10.41 Face-Up Delivery Roller

F-10-391

Points to Note When Attaching the grounding Leaf 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/
10-120
Chapter 10
feeder unit [2].
F-10-396

F-10-394
Inside Delivery Roller 0000-4844
10.10.41.2 Removing the 1) Open the fixing feeder unit cover.
Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover 0000-4843
1) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, grounding wire

[2], and E-ring [3]; then, release the link [4].
F-10-397
2) Remove the E-ring[1] and the bushing [2] at the

front; then, remove the gear [3] and the bushing [4]
at the rear.
F-10-395
2) Remove the screw [1] at the front and the cover

fixing pin [2]; then, detach the fixing/feeder unit
cover.
F-10-398
10-121
Chapter 10
3) Free the internal delivery roller [1] from the cut-off 3)

of the frame at the front; then, detach it.
The spring [1] hooked on the flapper of the upper

guide is small and can easily be lost. Detach it in
advance.
F-10-399

Up Delivery Roller 0000-4845
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the lower F-10-402

guide 2 [2].
Remove the screw [2] of the gear mounting plate [1],

and remove the screw [3]; then, detach the upper
guide [4].
F-10-400
2) Remove the E-ring [1] at the rear, and detach the

gear [2].
F-10-403
4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the lower

guide [2].
F-10-401
10-122
Chapter 10
F-10-404
F-10-406
5)
10.10.42 Delivery Vertical Path
When detaching the gear [3], be sure to pay attention

Roller 1
so as not to lose the parallel pin found at the rear.
Remove the 3 E-rings [1], gear [2], bushing [4], and Upper Left Cover 0000-4846
gear mounting plate [5] at the rear.
cover [3].
F-10-405
6) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the

front; then, detach the face-up delivery roller [3]. F-10-407


delivery tray [2].
10-123
Chapter 10
F-10-408 F-10-410
10.10.42.3 Removing the 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
unit [3].
(Old) 0000-4848

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2].
F-10-411

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-409 plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with
internal cover [2].
10-124
Chapter 10

F-10-412
F-10-414
4)
(New) 0006-8959 To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit


cover [3].
F-10-415
F-10-413
10-125
Chapter 10

used.)
F-10-418


F-10-416 to lift it once before setting it in place.
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. unit in place.
F-10-417

10-126
Chapter 10
F-10-422

Down Delivery Sensor 2 0000-4849
1) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1],

screws [4]; then, detach the face-down delivery
motor mounting plate [5].
F-10-420

F-10-423
F-10-421 2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face-
down delivery sensor 2 [2].
position.
F-10-424
10-127
Chapter 10

When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of
the inside spring [2] and hook the other end on the
flag.
F-10-427

Roller 2
F-10-425

Delivery Vertical Path Roller
cover [3].
1 0000-4850
1) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the

front; then, remove the gear [3], and detach the belt
[4]. Thereafter, remove the bushing [5], and detach
the delivery vertical path roller 1 [6].
F-10-428


delivery tray [2].
F-10-426
10-128
Chapter 10
F-10-429 F-10-431
10.10.43.3 Removing the 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
unit [3].
(Old) 0000-4854

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2].
F-10-432

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-430 plate on the side of the machine, and secure it with
internal cover [2].
10-129
Chapter 10

F-10-433
F-10-435
4)


cover [3].
F-10-436
5) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the slip-stop [2]

F-10-434
from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then, detach
the strap [3] from the delivery inside cover. (The
delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used.)
10-130
Chapter 10
F-10-439

F-10-437

then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. When mounting the delivery vertical path unit, be sure

unit in place.
F-10-438

used.)
F-10-440

10-131
Chapter 10
F-10-443

Delivery Vertical Path Roller
2 0000-4855
1) Disconnect the connector [1[, and remove the 2

motor [3] together with the mounting plate.
F-10-441

F-10-444
F-10-442 2) Remove the gear [1] and the bushing [2].
position.
F-10-445
10-132
Chapter 10
3) Remove the gear [1] and detach the belt [2] at the
rear; then, remove the bushing [3], and detach the
delivery vertical roller 2 [4].
F-10-448

F-10-446
10.10.44 Face-Down Delivery Motor (Old) 0000-4835

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
cover [3].

[2].
F-10-447
10.10.44.2 Removing the F-10-449

internal cover [2].
delivery tray [2].
10-133
Chapter 10
F-10-450
F-10-452
unit [3].

(New) 0006-8961


F-10-451
cover [3].

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-453
10-134
Chapter 10
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery (The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be
F-10-454
F-10-456
4)

F-10-457

used.)
F-10-455

10-135
Chapter 10
F-10-458


unit in place.
F-10-461
position.
F-10-459

10-136
Chapter 10
F-10-462

Down Delivery Motor 0000-4836 F-10-464

motor [3]. Center Delivery Tray 0000-4858

delivery tray [2].
F-10-463
F-10-465
Motor
(Old) 0000-4859

remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left In case following models, refer to "Removing the
cover [3]. Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
10-137
Chapter 10

[2].
F-10-466 F-10-468

internal cover [2].
Vertical Path Unit
F-10-467

unit [3].
F-10-469

(New) 0006-8962
10-138
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-472

F-10-470
used.)
F-10-471
F-10-473
4)

10-139
Chapter 10
F-10-474

F-10-475


10-140
Chapter 10
10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery

Sensor 1


F-10-478 cover [3].
position.
F-10-481
F-10-479 10.10.46.2 Removing the

10.10.45.5 Removing the 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center
Delivery Vertical Path Motor 0000-4860 delivery tray [2].
motor [3].
F-10-482
F-10-480
10-141
Chapter 10

(Old) 0000-4812

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2]. F-10-485

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-483

internal cover [2].
F-10-486
F-10-484
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 Delivery Vertical Path Unit
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path (New) 0006-8963
unit [3].
10-142
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-489

F-10-487
used.)
F-10-488
F-10-490
4)

10-143
Chapter 10
F-10-491

F-10-492


10-144
Chapter 10
F-10-495
F-10-498
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial MEMO:
position. The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape,
permitting it to be removed upward.
F-10-496 F-10-499

1) Shift up the sensor flag [1] of the face-down When attaching the sensor flag, be sure to match the
delivery sensor 1, and pull it upward to detach. L-shaped area [A] of the spring against the groove [B]
in the face-down delivery sub frame.
F-10-497
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the face-

down delivery sensor 1 [2].
F-10-500
10-145
Chapter 10

10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full (Old) 0000-4864
sensor
10.10.47.1 Removing the In case following models, refer to "Removing the

Upper Left Cover 0000-4862 Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
cover [3].
[2].
F-10-501
F-10-503
Center Delivery Tray 0000-4863 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center internal cover [2].
delivery tray [2].
F-10-504
F-10-502
unit [3].
10-146
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-505

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-506
F-10-508
4)

(New) 0006-8964
10-147
Chapter 10

F-10-511

F-10-509 used.)

used.)
F-10-512


F-10-510
10-148
Chapter 10
F-10-515
position.
F-10-513

F-10-516

Center Delivery Tray Full
sensor 0000-4865
1) Remove the sensor flag [1]; then, disconnect the

connector [2], and detach the center delivery tray
full sensor [3].
F-10-514

F-10-517
10-149
Chapter 10
10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery 10.10.48.3 Removing the

Sensor 2 Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(Old) 0000-4818

- flom MLW01838
cover [3].
- flom MLX02392

[2].
F-10-518

Center Delivery Tray 0000-4817 F-10-520
delivery tray [2]. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
internal cover [2].
F-10-519
F-10-521

unit [3].
10-150
Chapter 10


cover [3].
F-10-522

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-523
F-10-525
4)

(New) 0006-8965
10-151
Chapter 10

F-10-528

F-10-526 used.)

used.)
F-10-529


F-10-527
10-152
Chapter 10
F-10-532
position.
F-10-530

F-10-533

1) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1],

motor mounting plate [5].
F-10-531

F-10-534
10-153
Chapter 10
2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face- remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left
down delivery sensor 2 [2]. cover [3].
F-10-535
F-10-537

When attaching the sensor flag [1], hook one end of
the inside spring [2] and hook the other end on the
delivery tray [2].
flag.
F-10-538
F-10-536
(Old) 0000-4806
Cover Open/Closed Sensor
10.10.49.1 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392
10-154
Chapter 10

[2].
F-10-539 F-10-541

internal cover [2].
Vertical Path Unit
F-10-540

unit [3].
F-10-542
10-155
Chapter 10


For the new delivery vertical path unit to function, the screws [2]; then, detach the delivery path unit [3].
version of the DC controller must be 3.06 or later. Be (The delivery path unit will no longer be used.)

cover [3].
F-10-545

F-10-543 [2] from the delivery vertical path cover [1]; then,
F-10-544
F-10-546
4)
10-156
Chapter 10

F-10-549
F-10-547
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At
machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be this time, check to make sure that the machine
used.) positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-548


unit in place.
10-157
Chapter 10
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching

Solenoid 1


F-10-551 cover [3].
position.
F-10-554
F-10-552 10.10.50.2 Removing the

10.10.49.5 Removing the 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center
Delivery Vertical Path Cover delivery tray [2].
Open/Closed Sensor 0000-4808

delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor [2].
F-10-555
F-10-553
10-158
Chapter 10

(Old) 0000-4869

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2]. F-10-558

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-556

internal cover [2].
F-10-559
F-10-557

unit [3].
10-159
Chapter 10



cover [3].
F-10-562

F-10-561
F-10-563
4)
10-160
Chapter 10

F-10-566
F-10-564
F-10-565


unit in place.
10-161
Chapter 10

Cleaner Fan 0006-2819
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws;

then, detach the cleaner fan [2].
F-10-568
position.
F-10-571

Delivery Path Switching
Solenoid 1 0000-8475

[2]; then, detach the delivery path switching
F-10-569 solenoid 1 [3].


cover [2].
F-10-572
F-10-570
10-162
Chapter 10
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching 10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller

Solenoid 2 1 Drive Belt

Delivery Path Switching Upper Left Cover 0000-4828
Solenoid 2 0000-4874 1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and
1) Open the fixing/feeder unit cover. remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left
cover [3].
F-10-573

F-10-575
connector [2]; then, detach the delivery path
switching solenoid 2 [3] together with the mounting
plate.

delivery tray [2].
F-10-574
F-10-576
10-163
Chapter 10

(Old) 0000-4830

- flom MLW01838
- flom MLX02392

[2]. F-10-579

Vertical Path Unit
F-10-577

internal cover [2].
F-10-580
F-10-578

unit [3].
10-164
Chapter 10



cover [3].
F-10-583

F-10-582
F-10-584
4)
10-165
Chapter 10

F-10-587
F-10-585
F-10-586


unit in place.
10-166
Chapter 10
F-10-589
F-10-591
position.
F-10-590

Down Delivery Roller 1
Drive Belt 0000-4831
1) Free the protrusion [1] of the belt pulley (upper or

lower) from the groove of the shaft, and shift it;
then, detach the belt [2].
10-167
Chapter 10
10-168
Chapter 11 Fixing
System
Contents
Contents
11.1 Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1

11.1.2 Major Components ................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 Construction of the Control System ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180 sec) ................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for 180 sec or more) ............................... 11-6
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ............................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper .................................................................. 11-7
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing ......................................................... 11-8
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller .................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................ 11-8
11.3.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2.2 At Power-On .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.3.2.3 In Standby ...................................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper ............................................................................................. 11-13
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode ........................................................................................................ 11-13
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ............................................................................................................ 11-14
11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper ...................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to activation of thermal switch) ................ 11-15
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors .......................................................................................... 11-16
11.5.1 Fixing Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ............................................................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.3 Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ........................................................ 11-23
11.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller .......................................................................................................... 11-24
11.5.4 Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................................................... 11-26
11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ..................................................................... 11-28
11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ....................................................................................................... 11-29
Contents

11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ........................................................................................................................ 11-30
11.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor ......................................................................................... 11-32
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor .......................................................................................................................... 11-34
11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Sub thermistor ............................................................................................. 11-36
11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37
11.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................................... 11-40
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater ................................................................................................ 11-42
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater ......................................................... 11-44
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ............................................................................................................... 11-45
11.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater ...................................................................... 11-48
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ............................................................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ................................................................................................ 11-50
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide ......................................................................................................................... 11-51
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide ........................................................................................................................ 11-52
11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater .................................................................... 11-54
11.5.12.5 Removing the Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................... 11-55
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide ............................................................................................. 11-55
11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 11-57
11.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................... 11-60
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 11-61
Contents

11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................ 11-63
11.5.15 Fixing Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 11-64
11.5.15.10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ............................................................. 11-67
11.5.15.11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ............................................................................................... 11-68
11.5.15.12 Removing the Fixing Motor ...................................................................................................... 11-69
Chapter 11
11.1 Construction
The major functions of the fixing system are as follows:
T-11-1
Item Description
Fixing method Heat roller
Fixing heater 2 fixing rollers (main heater, sub heater)
1 pressure roller (heat retaining heater)
Control temperature 190 deg C (in PSTBY)
Fixing drive control Fixing roller speed control (by paper type and mode)
Fixing temperature Main thermistor (non-contact; TH1, center of fixing roller)

detection
Sub thermistor (TH2; rear end of fixing roller)
Protective Error detection as follows; upon detection of error, cuts off

mechanism power to fixing heater:
- temperature detection by thermistor (TH1/TH2)
- temperature control by fixing thermal switch (TP1;front end of

fixing roller; operating temperature of 222 -/+8 deg C
Separation claw Non-contact type (facilitates separation of paper in high-

humidity environment; under normal conditions, separation by
fixing/pressure roller)
Cleaning None (cleaning-less mechanism; no element in paper path of

fixing/pressure roller)
The fixing system consists of the following major components:
T-11-2
Fixing roller 48.5 mm (external diameter)
Pressure roller 38.0 mm (external diameter)
Main heater (halogen) H1 100/120V: 500W 230V: 545W
Sub heater (halogen) H2 100/120V: 330W 230V: 360W
11-1
Chapter 11
Heat retaining heater H3 100/120/230V:80W (no temperature control)
Main thermistor TH1 Non-contact type (temperature control/overheating detection)
Sub thermistor TH2 Temperature control, overheating detection
Thermal switch TP1 222 -/+8 deg C (operating temperature)
Separation claw Non-contact type (facilitates paper separation in high-humidity environment)
Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Detection of passage of paper to fixing unit)
Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Detection of delivery of paper after fixing
Sub thermistor
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact)
Non-contact
separation claw
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Sub heater (H2)
Fixing roller
Pressure roller
Main heater (H1)

Fixing inlet guide
Heat retaining heater

F-11-1
Fixing roller
Fixing
delivery
sensor Pressure
(PS25) roller Fixing inlet
sensor
(PS27)
F-11-2
11-2
Chapter 11
The major components of the fixing system are arranged as follows:
Fuse PCB DC controller PCB

J62 J51_14 H3_ON J105A_1
J108A-5
J51_2 H1_ON J105A_14 J108A-2
J51_1 H2_ON
J105A_13 J105-6 to 9
J54_11
J54_12
MAIN_FUSER_ THM1 J108-10

SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
FUSER DELI_SNS
FUSER ENTER_SNS
PM-FUSER
H1_ON
H2_ON
J69_1
J69_2
Heater driver
PCB
Fixing motor
Sub
J2_2
J2_3
J2_1
thermistor
(TH2)
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact) Fixing delivery
sensor (PS25)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Fixing inlet sensor

(PS27)
Sub heater(H2)
Main heater(H1)
Heat retaining heater(H3)

F-11-3
11-3
Chapter 11
11.2 Basic Sequence

11.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-5014
Starts here if the surface temperature

of the fixing roller is 90˚C or more when
Main power
the main power switch is turned on.
switch ON
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
Here, alternately ON for 3

sec and OFF for 1.5 sec
Fixing system
Fixing main heater 360sec

*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater 90˚C 190˚C *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retaining
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
300 sec
Rotates idly for 300 sec after

end of drum ITB motor rotation
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according to the
reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-4
11-4
Chapter 11
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180
sec) 0000-5015
Start
key ON

Fixing motor Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled
(M24) to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C
Fixing system
Fixing main heater

(H1) *1 *1
Fixing sub heater

(H2) *1 *1
Fixing heat retain-

ing heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 130 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according
to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-5
11-5
Chapter 11
11.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (during printing; plain paper, for

180 sec or more) 0000-5016
Start
key ON

Fixing motor Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled
to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C Idle rotation
(M24)
Fixing system
Fixing main heater

(H1) *1 *1
Fixing sub heater Controlled

(H2) *1 to 170˚C *1
Fixing heat retain-

ing heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 130 sec or more 30 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according to the reading
of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-6
11-6
Chapter 11
11.3 Various Control Mechanisms

11.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller
11.3.1.1 Outline 0000-5017
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
1) speed to suit the type of medium used
2) speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
3) configuration to prevent partial deformation otherwise caused by a long period of no use
*PM-FUSER-B _6
Fixing motor
PM-FUSER-B _7
J105B
M24 *PM-FUSER-A _8
PM-FUSER-A _9
Fixing roller
DC controller
PCB
Pressure
roller
F-11-7
11.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper 0000-5018
Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper

The machine controls the fixing roller to the following 2 speeds to suit the type of medium used:
T-11-3
Medium Fixing speed
Plain paper 129.1 mm/sec
Thick paper 64.55 mm/sec
Monochrome transparency 129.1 mm/sec
Color transparency 64.55 mm/sec
Note: The speed of the fixing roller is reduced (to half) to ensure good fixing on thick paper (thick paper speed) or
on a full-color transparency (full-color transparency mode).
11-7
Chapter 11
11.3.1.3 Controlling the Speed According to the Quantity of Printing 0000-5019
If left unattended, the heat of the pressure roller would be absorbed by paper when a large quality of printing is under
way, causing the paper to curl appreciably upon delivery and, thus, making proper stacking difficult.To prevent
excess curling, the speed of the roller is reduced to half (as set in service mode) when as many as 100 large-size sheets
or as many as 200 small-size sheets have been handled.
Service Mode (level 2)

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DWNSQ-SW
11.3.1.4 Preventing Partial Deformation of the Roller 0000-5020
To prevent deformation otherwise caused by the nip pressure of the fixing roller as occurring when the machine is
left unattended for a long period of time, the fixing roller is rotated for 0.5 sec at half speed (64.55 mm/sec) every 30
min after it has stopped (i.e., during standby/low power mode).
11.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature
11.3.2.1 Outline 0000-5021
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
[1] speed to suit the type of medium used
[2] speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
[3] during printing
[4] between long sheet intervals
[5] in response to overheating in non-paper contact area
[6] during return from low-power mode
11-8
Chapter 11
Fuse PCB DC controller PCB

J62 J51_14 H3_ON
J105A_1
J51_2 H1_ON
J105A_14
H2_ON
J54_12
J54_11
J51_1 J105A_13

SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
H1_ON
H2_ON
J69_1
J69_2
Heater drive PCB

J2_2
J2_3
J2_1
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
24V
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Sub heater (H2)
Main heater (H1)
Heat retaining heater (H3)
F-11-8
11-9
Chapter 11
11.3.2.2 At Power-On 0000-5022
The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (main heater H1, sub heater H2).
The main heater repeats remaining ON for 3.5 sec and OFF for 1.5 sec until the fixing temperature reaches 190 deg C.
The sub heater, on the other hand, remains ON throughout.
The pressure roller is kept warm by the heat retaining heater (which remains ON throughout).
The fixing motor starts to rotate when the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
It keeps rotating for a further 300 sec after the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C (warm-up state; so
as to maintain the temperature of the pressure roller; the machine accepts a print job during this period).
Starts here if the surface temperature

Main power of the fixing roller is 90˚C or more when
switch ON the main power switch is turned on.
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
Repeats ON for 3.5 sec

and OFF for 1.5 sec.
Fixing main heater

Fixing system
360sec
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater 90˚C 190˚C *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retain-
ing heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
300 sec
Rotates idly for 300 sec

after the drum ITB motor stops.
*1: The main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2) performs temperature control (to 190˚C)
according to the reading of the main sub heater or the sub heater.
F-11-9
11.3.2.3 In Standby 0000-5023
The machine controls the fixing roller (to 190 deg C) according to the reading of the non-contact thermistor TH1 or
sub thermistor TH2.
If the reading of the main thermistor is assumed to be Th1 and that of the sub thermistor is assumed to be Th2,
if Th1 > Th2, the temperature control will be by the sub heater.
if Th1 <= Th2, the temperature control will be by the main heater.
The temperature of the pressure roller is controlled by the heat retaining heater, which repeatedly remains on for 480
sec and, thereafter, remainsON for 4.2 sec and OFF for 1.6 sec.
11-10
Chapter 11
WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing main heater
*1
(H1)
Fixing system
Fixing sub heater
*1
(H2)
Fixing heat retain-
*2
ing heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
300 sec 480 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature

control (to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main
thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The fixing heat retaining heater repeatedly remains ON
for 4.2 sec and OFF for 1.6 sec.
F-11-10
11.3.2.4 During Printing 0000-5024
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled by turning on and off the main heater according to the reading taken
by the main thermistor.
During printing, the control (i.e., timing at which control is initiated) varies according to the type of paper being used.
The following shows the sequence of temperature control when printing on plain paper:
Start
key ON

Fixing motor
(M24)
Fixing system
Fixing main heater Controlled Controlled Controlled

(H1) *1 to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C *1
Fixing sub heater

(H2) *1 *1
Fixing heat retain-

ing heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
Controlled
to 164˚C
10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 130 sec
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control
(to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-11
11-11
Chapter 11
If a print job exceeds 180 sec, the fixing roller is rotated for 30 sec after the job
(so that the heat of the fixing roller is transmitted evenly to the pressure roller).
Start
key ON

Fixing motor Idle rotation
(M24)
Fixing system
Fixing main heater Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled

(H1) *1 to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C *1
Controlled
Fixing sub heater
*1 to 170˚C *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retain-

ing heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 130 sec or more 30 sec
F-11-12
11.3.2.5 Between Sheets 0000-5025
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled over the distance between sheets within a print job:
1. If the distance is 15 sec or more and less than 60 sec,
The fixing temperature sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are continued over the distance.
2. If the distance is 60 sec or more
The fixing temperature control sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are performed over the distance
up to 60 sec; thereafter, only the heater sequence control is performed.
11-12
Chapter 11
Start
key ON

Fixing motor
(M24)
Fixing system Fixing main Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled
*1 to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C to 164˚C to 174˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C *1
heater (H1)
Fixing sub *1 *1
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retaining
heater (H3)
1st sheet passed
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C Passage of paper

(60 sec and later)
Paper
passed
10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 15 to 60 sec 60 to sec 10 sec 20 sec
N
N: sheet-to-sheet
distance after 60 sec.
F-11-13
11.3.2.6 Overheating in Areas Without Paper 0000-5026
If the sub thermistor (TH2) registers 195 deg C or more, the machine turns off the sub heater.
If it registers 210 deg C or more, the machine also turns off the main heater.
When the temperature at the ends falls below 210 deg C, the machine turns on the main heater.
If the temperature at the ends falls below 195 deg C, the machine also turns on the sub heater.
If the reading of the main thermistor is below the control temperature at this time, the heaters are turned on.
11.3.2.7 Return for Low-Power Mode 0000-5027
After a lapse of 30 sec, the machine becomes ready to accept a job only in black mono mode.
In the case of color mode, the machine will not accept a job until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg
C after a lapse of 30 sec.
11-13
Chapter 11
11.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper
11.3.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 0000-5028
The mechanisms involved in the detection of the passage of paper in the fixing unit are as follows:
1. Fixing Inlet Sensor
Detects passage of paper being moved into the fixing unit.
2. Fixing Delivery Sensor
Detects the passage of paper being moved from the fixing assembly.
Fixing roller
DC controller
Fixing PCB
delivery
sensor Pressure
(PS25) roller Fixing
inlet sensor
(PS27)
+5V
J108_6
J108_5
FUSER_ENTER_SNS
J108_4
+5V
J108_3
J108_2
FUSER_DELI_SNS
J108_1
F-11-14
11-14
Chapter 11
11.4 Protective Functions

11.4.1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating (in response to
activation of thermal switch) 0006-0741
Once its contact has opened, the thermal switch will not return to its initial state even after the error temperature has
been corrected. Be sure to replace it.
If the internal temperature of the thermal switch exceeds 222 -/+8 deg C, the thermal switch goes OFF to cut the
power to the fixing heater.
Heater control PCB

J4
DC controller J5 CB
PCB
J105A
13
14
12
9
RL Triac short- Triac short-

circuit Heater circuit Heater
detection drive detection drive
PCB circuit PCB circuit
J2_1
Q10 Q20
2
1
3
6
J51
Q23 Q11 Q22 Q21
6 J69_7 HRLY_ON
Fuse PCB 3 J69_9 TR_ERR*
J54
2 J69_11 H2_ON
1 J69_12 H1_ON
J2_2
J2_3
TP
H1
Fixing roller
H2
F-11-15
11-15
Chapter 11
11.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors 0000-5029
When the sub thermistor mounted at the end of the fixing roller detects 239 deg C, the signal from the DC controller
turns off the heater drive circuit, thus cutting off power to the main heater and the sub heater.
CPU DC controller
PCB
J108 J105
-1
-9
-12
-13
-14
-8
Main thermistor detection signal (by infrared) -10
Main thermistor detection signal (by temperature) -11
-14
Heater control PCB

-6
-3
-2
-1
Sub thermistor detection signal
CB
J51
Fuse
PCB
RL
SW
Fuse Triac short- Heater Triac short- Heater

circuit detec- drive circuit circuit detec- drive circuit
tion circuit tion circuit
(1sec)
J62
-2
-1
TH2 TH1
Fixing roller H1
H2
H3
F-11-16
11-16
Chapter 11

Procedure
11.5.1 Fixing Unit

Unit 0000-5031

[2].
F-11-18
2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the

following service mode to measure the nip:
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
c 1.5mm
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
F-11-17 (5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
11.5.1.2 After Disassembling F-11-19

the Fixing Unit 0000-8566
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear:
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows:
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that
MEMO:
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm.
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
If the median value of the measured nip is toward the

higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
side with a higher nip value at the edge.
If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
about 0.3 mm.
11-17
Chapter 11
F-11-21

Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5042
1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3

snap-on claws)
F-11-20
Service Mode
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-22
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame
2) Remove the insulating cover [1].

Unit 0000-5041

[2].
F-11-23
3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws)
11-18
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-24
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-27
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-25
F-11-28
Upper Frame 0000-5043 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-29
F-11-26
11-19
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.2.4 After Disassembling
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. the Fixing Unit 0000-5044

F-11-30
6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing

upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
F-11-33

c 1.5mm
F-11-31 Standard:
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower (5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. a
F-11-34

F-11-32
11-20
Chapter 11
MEMO: 11.5.3 Fixing Roller

0.4 mm.
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the Unit 0000-5052
rear by 0.2 mm. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.

If the median value of the measured nip is toward the [2].
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-36


snap-on claws)
F-11-35
F-11-37
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
measurement.
11-21
Chapter 11

Upper Frame 0000-5054

(AC heater line)
F-11-38
F-11-41

connector [2].
F-11-39
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
F-11-42

thermal switch).
F-11-40
11-22
Chapter 11
F-11-43
F-11-46
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-44
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing F-11-47

upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
11.5.3.4 Remove the Fixing
Main Heater and the Fixing
Sub Heater 0000-5055
1) Remove the heater retaining spring (needle-shaped)

[1] at the rear.
F-11-45

11-23
Chapter 11

Roller 0000-5057
1) Remove the separation claw [1].
F-11-48
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater

at the front. F-11-51
Points to Note When Attaching hte Separation

Claw
When attaching the separation claw, be sure that it is
mounted as indicated.
F-11-49
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
sub heater [2].
F-11-52
2) Remove the fixing roller [1].
F-11-50
11-24
Chapter 11
c 1.5mm
Standard:
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-55

F-11-53 the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
11.5.3.6 After Disassembling MEMO:

the Fixing Unit 0000-5058 A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-54

11-25
Chapter 11
F-11-57


snap-on claws)
F-11-56
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-58
11.5.4 Pressure Roller

Unit 0000-5066

[2].
F-11-59
11-26
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-60
thermal switch).
F-11-61
F-11-64
(AC heater line)
F-11-65
F-11-62
11-27
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5069
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and pull out the 2

fastons [2].
F-11-66

F-11-69
2) Remove the screw [1] front the sub heater contact

at the front.
F-11-67
F-11-70
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. 3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the
heater retaining plate [2].
F-11-68
11-28
Chapter 11
11.5.4.6 After Disassembling


F-11-71
4) Remove the fixing heat retaining heater [1].
F-11-74
F-11-72

11.5.4.5 Removing the Pressure
Roller 0000-5070 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
1) While opening the delivery lower guide [1], remove
c 1.5mm
the pressure roller [2]. Standard:
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-75

F-11-73
11-29
Chapter 11
MEMO: 11.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor

0.4 mm.
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the Unit 0000-5073
rear by 0.2 mm. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.

If the median value of the measured nip is toward the [2].
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-77


snap-on claws)
F-11-76
F-11-78
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
measurement.
11-30
Chapter 11


(AC heater line)
F-11-79
F-11-82

connector [2].
F-11-80
F-11-83

thermal switch).
F-11-81
11-31
Chapter 11
F-11-84
F-11-87
F-11-85

Main Thermistor 0006-2112
1) While freeing the retaining screw [1] of the upper

frame, detach the fixing main thermistor [2].
F-11-86

11-32
Chapter 11
F-11-89 F-11-90

Points to Note When Attaching hte Main
Thermistor c 1.5mm
Standard:
When attaching, be sure so that the retaining spring Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
forces the fixing thermistor in place. |a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-91
the Fixing Unit 0000-5077 3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear:
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to 4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that MEMO:
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm. A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
11-33
Chapter 11
F-11-93


snap-on claws)
F-11-92
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-94
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor

Unit 0000-5079

[2].
F-11-95
11-34
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-96
thermal switch).
F-11-97
F-11-100
(AC heater line)
F-11-101
F-11-98
11-35
Chapter 11
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Sub thermistor 0000-5082
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing sub

thermistor [2].
F-11-102

F-11-105


F-11-103

F-11-106
F-11-104
11-36
Chapter 11

c 1.5mm
Standard:
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-107

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
F-11-108
rear by 0.2 mm.
Service Mode
measurement.
about 0.3 mm. 11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch

Unit 0000-5085

[2].
11-37
Chapter 11
F-11-109 F-11-112
11.5.7.2 Removing the 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5086 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
snap-on claws)
F-11-113
F-11-110


(AC heater line)
F-11-111
3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) F-11-114
11-38
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
connector [2].
F-11-118
F-11-115
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
thermal switch).
F-11-116 F-11-119
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
F-11-117
F-11-120
11-39
Chapter 11

Thermal Switch 0000-5088
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the upper frame, and

detach the fixing thermal switch [2].
F-11-122
- Check the thermal switch for improper installation

1) After attaching the thermal switch to the fixing
F-11-121 assembly, use the scale to measure the intervals (A/
B) between the leaf spring and the fixing assembly
frame.
Points to Note When Attaching the Thermal

Switch
Ensure to check the following points when attaching
the thermal switch to the fixing assembly.
- Check the leaf springs on the thermal switch for
deformation
1) Place a scale on the leaf springs on the thermal
switch (See the illustration below), and check the
B A
leaf springs for deformation.
F-11-123
2) Check that the gap between the intervals (A and B)

is within 3.1mm+/-1mm. When the gap is more
than 3.1mm+/-1mm, it means that the springs are
not properly attached or that the springs are
deformed. Therefore, it is necessary to use another
thermal switch.
11-40
Chapter 11
11.5.7.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5089 rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-124

c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-126
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
F-11-125 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
MEMO:
0.4 mm.
11-41
Chapter 11
11.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing

Sub Heater

Unit 0000-5046

[2].
F-11-129
F-11-127

1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3 F-11-130

snap-on claws)
F-11-128
F-11-131
11-42
Chapter 11


(AC heater line)
F-11-134
F-11-132

connector [2].
F-11-135

F-11-133

thermal switch).
F-11-136

11-43
Chapter 11
F-11-139
F-11-137
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower at the front.
F-11-140
F-11-138
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing sub heater [2].
Main Heater and the Fixing
Sub Heater 0000-5049
1) Remove the heater retaining spring (needle-shaped)

[1] at the rear.
F-11-141
11-44
Chapter 11

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-142

c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-144
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 11.5.9.1 Removing the Fixing
0.4 mm. Unit 0000-5060
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
11-45
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws)
[2].
F-11-148
F-11-145
11.5.9.2 Removing the 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].

snap-on claws)
F-11-149
F-11-146
2) Remove the insulating cover [1]. Upper Frame 0000-5062

(AC heater line)
F-11-147
11-46
Chapter 11
F-11-150
F-11-153
connector [2]. 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
F-11-151
F-11-154
thermal switch). 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
F-11-152
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. F-11-155
11-47
Chapter 11

F-11-158
3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the

F-11-156

Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5063

fastons [2].
F-11-159
F-11-157

at the front.
F-11-160
11-48
Chapter 11

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-161

c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-163
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
MEMO:
0.4 mm.
11-49
Chapter 11
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide 1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that

Unit 0000-5037

[2].
F-11-166
F-11-164 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Inlet Guide 0000-5038
c 1.5mm
Standard:
1) While pushing its claw [2] at the front, detach the Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
fixing inlet guide [1] to the front. Standard:
|a c| = 0.5mm or less
Center 5000 sheets)
of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-167

MEMO:
F-11-165 0.4 mm.

11-50
Chapter 11

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-169


snap-on claws)
F-11-168
F-11-170
Service Mode 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].

measurement.
11.5.11 Delivery Upper Guide

Unit 0000-5033

F-11-171
[2].
11-51
Chapter 11
F-11-172 F-11-174
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the 11.5.12.2 Removing the
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5104

snap-on claws)
F-11-173
F-11-175
11.5.12 Delivery Lower Guide 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].

Unit 0000-5103

[2].
F-11-176
11-52
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-177
thermal switch).
F-11-178
F-11-181
(AC heater line)
F-11-182
F-11-179
11-53
Chapter 11
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5106

fastons [2].
F-11-183

F-11-186

at the front.
F-11-184
F-11-187
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. 3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the
F-11-185
11-54
Chapter 11
11.5.12.6 Remove the Delivery

Lower Guide 0000-5108
1) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the static

eliminator.
F-11-188
F-11-191
2) Remove the fixing pin [1] of the delivery lower

guide.
F-11-189

Pressure Roller 0000-5107
F-11-192
1) While opening the delivery lower guide [1], remove
the pressure roller [2].
3)
When removing the side plate at the front/rear, be sure

to start at the rear.
Otherwise, the side plate at the rear can break the
boss on the lower frame.
Remove the 2 screws [1] from the bottom face of the

lower frame, and detach the side plate [2] at the front
and the side plate [3] at the rear (the releasing shaft [4]
F-11-190 and the delivery lower guide [5] are kept attached).
11-55
Chapter 11
Guide
When mounting, be sure to set the spring [1] on either
end of the delivery lower guide as indicated.
F-11-193
F-11-196
F-11-194
F-11-197
4) Remove the delivery lower guide [1] from the front/
rear side plate.


F-11-195
Point to Attaching When the Delivery Lower
11-56
Chapter 11
about 0.3 mm.
F-11-198

c 1.5mm F-11-200
Standard:
(5000 sheets
or more) Service Mode
a 1.5mm
the side with a lower nip value at the edge. 11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor
MEMO: 11.5.13.1 Removing the Fixing

Unit 0000-5091
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit
rear by 0.2 mm. [2].

11-57
Chapter 11
F-11-201 F-11-204
11.5.13.2 Removing the 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5092 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
snap-on claws)
F-11-205
F-11-202


(AC heater line)
F-11-203
3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws) F-11-206
11-58
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
connector [2].
F-11-210
F-11-207
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
thermal switch).
F-11-208 F-11-211
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
F-11-209
F-11-212
11-59
Chapter 11

c 1.5mm
Inlet Sensor 0000-5094 Standard:
8.75mm±0.25mm
Paper
1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the lower frame Standard:
|a c| = 0.5mm or less
Center 5000 sheets)
of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
side, and detach the fixing inlet sensor [2]. or more)
1.5mm
a
F-11-215

MEMO:
F-11-213 0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.

about 0.3 mm.
F-11-214

11-60
Chapter 11
F-11-217


snap-on claws)
F-11-216
Service Mode
measurement.
F-11-218
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor

Unit 0000-5097

[2].
F-11-219
11-61
Chapter 11

connector [2].
F-11-220
thermal switch).
F-11-221
F-11-224
(AC heater line)
F-11-225
F-11-222
11-62
Chapter 11
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Delivery Sensor 0000-5100
1) Detach the fixing delivery sensor [1] form the

lower frame side.
F-11-226


F-11-227

F-11-230

F-11-228
11-63
Chapter 11
c 1.5mm
Standard:
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-231

MEMO:
0.4 mm.
rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-232
Service Mode
measurement.
about 0.3 mm.
11.5.15 Fixing Motor



11-64
Chapter 11

[1]
F-11-235


F-11-236
F-11-234
11-65
Chapter 11
F-11-237
F-11-240


fan [3].
F-11-238

F-11-241


voltage unit [2].
F-11-239

and open it.
11-66
Chapter 11
F-11-242
F-11-244
2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage
cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the
cable clamp [3]; then, detach it from the edge
saddle [4] of the high-voltage unit base.
F-11-243

Lower Rear cover 0006-2308
F-11-245
1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1]

slightly to the front, and free the high-voltage cable
Secondary Transfer High- [3] from the cable clamp [2].
1) Free the DC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2];

then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3], and remove
the 2 screws [4].
11-67
Chapter 11

Fixing Drive Unit 0006-2311
1) Slide out the fixing feeder assembly. Disconnect

the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2];
then, detach the fixing drive unit [3].
F-11-246
4) Remove the secondary transfer high-voltage unit

together with the delivery cooling fan.
connector [2]; then, detach the secondary transfer
high-voltage unit [3].
F-11-248
F-11-247
11-68
Chapter 11

Fixing Motor 0006-2312
1)
When mounting the fixing motor to the motor base, be

sure that the connector [2] of the motor [1] is located
as shown.
F-11-249
Remove the tension spring [1] and the 3 screws [2]

found inside the fixing drive assembly; then, detach
the fixing motor [3].
F-11-250
11-69
Chapter 11
11-70
Chapter 12 Externals and
Controls
Contents
Contents
12.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU ...................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Counters ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print ...................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) ........................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) ................................................................................................................. 12-7
12.4 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1 Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply ................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories ........................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit .................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy .................................................................................. 12-11
12.4.3 Protection Function .............................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms .................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.4 Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ....................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit ................................................................................................................................. 12-15
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.5.2.7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting ........................................................................................ 12-20
12.5.2.9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................. 12-21
Contents

12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................................................ 12-22
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................................................ 12-23
12.5.4.5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage Unit ................................................................. 12-23
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit ......................................................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.5.3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................... 12-24
12.5.6 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 12-25
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit ....................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.3 Removing the Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ........................................................................................ 12-26
12.5.7.5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit ......................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 12-26
12.5.8.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 12-27
12.5.8.6 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ...................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB .......................................................................................................................... 12-28
12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter Memory PCB ............................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10 Fuse PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.5.10.4 Removing the Fuse PCB .............................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting .................................................................. 12-31
12.5.11.5 Removing the Leakage Breaker ................................................................................................... 12-31
12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................. 12-32
Contents
12.5.12.3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting ................................................................................ 12-32

12.5.12.4 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB .............................................................................................. 12-33
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-33
12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay PCB 1 ......................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.3 Removing the Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 12-35
12.5.14.4 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch PCB .......................................................................................................... 12-36
12.5.15.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ..................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.15.5 Removing the Control Panel Key PCB ....................................................................................... 12-37
12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.5.16.4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate ..................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.16.5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................. 12-38
12.5.17 Environment Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .................................................................... 12-38
12.5.17.2 Removing the Upper Right Cover ............................................................................................... 12-39
12.5.17.3 Removing the Environment Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.5.18.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ............................................... 12-42
12.5.18.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................... 12-42
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor ....................................................................................................... 12-42
12.5.19.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor .................................................................... 12-44
12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................ 12-44
Contents

12.5.20.13 Removing the Main Power Supply Switch ................................................................................ 12-48
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ............................................................................. 12-48
12.5.21.8 Removing the Registration Unit Open/Closed Sensor Mounting ................................................ 12-50
12.5.21.9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open/Close Switch ................................................................. 12-50
12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch ...................................................................................... 12-51
12.5.22.9 Removing the Front Cover Open/Close Switch .......................................................................... 12-52
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan ......................................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.23.2 Removing the Cleaner Fan .......................................................................................................... 12-53
12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................................................. 12-53
12.5.24.13 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan .................................................................................. 12-57
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ................................................................................................................. 12-58
Contents

12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan .................................................................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting ................................................................. 12-60
12.5.26.5 Removing the Power Supply Cooing Fan ................................................................................... 12-60
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan ......................................................................................................................... 12-61
12.5.27.6 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan ........................................................................................... 12-62
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................................................. 12-62
12.5.28.7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan ............................................................................... 12-64
12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................................................... 12-65
12.5.29.13 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting ............................................................................... 12-69
12.5.29.14 Removing the Drum Drive Unit ................................................................................................ 12-70
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum Unit Drive Belt ......................................................................................... 12-70
Contents
Chapter 12
12.1 Control Panel

12.1.1 Outline 0000-5110
The machine's control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below; the control panel is associated
with the following functions:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hard key input

J1304A,J1304B
J511A,J511B
Touch panel J1114 Control panel CPU PCB

J1112
J1113 J1110,J1111
Color LCD
J1119 J1116,J1117
Control Keypad PCB
panel
inverter PCB
Control panel
F-12-1
12.1.2 LCD Processing 0000-5111
The CPU on the main controller PCB sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed
by various programs.
The data is moved through the control panel CPU PCB to reach the color LCD.
12.1.3 LCD Contras Adjustment 0000-5112
The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel designed for use by the user for adjustment of the LCD
contrast.
12-1
Chapter 12
12.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU 0000-5113
- Monitoring key inputs (relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main controller
PCB)
- Controlling the buzzer sound
- Turning on/off thecontrolpanel LEDs
12-2
Chapter 12
12.2 Counters
12.2.1 Outline 0000-5114
The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of the number of prints made according to the type of print;
a specific counter reading is shown in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.The particulars of
the counter settings made at time of shipment from factory and grouped by model are as follows:
T-12-1
Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
100V Total 1 Total Copy Print (disabled at (disabled at

(*1) (B&W 1) (full color + (full color + default) default)
mono color/1) mono color/1) May be May be
changed changed
in service in service
mode mode
101 108 232 324 0 0
120V Total 1 Total Copy + print Copy + print Total (disabled at

(*2) (B&W 1) (full color/ (full color/ (mono default)
large) small) color/1) May be
changed
in service
mode
101 108 401 402 118 0
120V Total 1 Total Copy Copy Print Print

(*3) (B&W 1) (full color + (full color (full color + (full color
mono color/ +mono color/ mono color/ +mono color/
large) small) large) small)
101 108 229 230 321 322
230V Total 1 Total Copy + print Copy + print Total Total (duplex)
(*4) (B&W 1) (full color/ (full color/ (mono
large) small) color/1)
101 108 401 402 118 114
12-3
Chapter 12
Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
240V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1)
(*5) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono small) large) small)
color;
large)
101 122 123 112 113 501
240V Total 1 Total Copy Copy Print Print

(*6) (B&W 1) (full color + (full color (full color + (full color
mono color/ +mono color/ mono color/ +mono color/
large) small) large) small)
101 108 229 230 321 322
color;
large)
101 122 123 112 113 501
color;
large)
101 122 123 112 113 501
mono large) large) small)
color;
large)
101 122 123 112 113 501
230V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (back- scan (total 1)
mono large) large) small)
color;
large)
101 122 123 112 113 501
12-4
Chapter 12
T-12-2
Guide to Notation:
large: large-size paper (in excess of 364 mm in feed length; increment by 1)
small: small-size paper (364 mm or less in feed direction)
total: all copies (C + P); increment by 1
duplex: auto duplex copy; increment by 1
3 digits in Counter column: settings in following:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER1 through 6
(for details, see description in Service Mode)
These counters may be set in service mode to serve for different counter readings. (In the case
of the 120/230V model, all counters may be assigned different counter readings.)
T-12-3
Medium Order (printer unit)
*1: F14-2412/2413/2416/2417/2512/2514/2516/2518 *2: F14-2501 *3: F14-2531/

2532
*4: F14-2541/2560/2570 *5: F14-2551 *6: F14-2561 *7: F14-2571
*8: F14-2581 *9: F14-2591 *10: F14-2521
12.2.2 Signal-Sided Print and 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print 0000-5116
When making a single-side print or printing on the 2nd side of a double-side print, the counter reading is incremented
when the trailing edge of paper leaves the machine, as indicated by the output of the following sensor:
T-12-4
Condition Sensor
Finisher absent face-down delivery (center tray): center delivery tray full sensor (PS8)
face-down delivery (copy tray): face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
face-up delivery (side tray): fixing delivery sensor (PS25)
Finisher present finisher delivery sensor
12.2.3 Side of a Duplex Print (duplex model only) 0000-5117
The machine identifies the end of printing on the 1st side of a double-sided print and increments the counter reading
when the duplex pickup sensor (PS24) goes ON.
12-5
Chapter 12
12.3 Fans
12.3.1 Outline 0000-5118
The names and functions of the fans used inside the machine are as follows:
T-12-5
Notation Name Description
FM3 machine cooling fan cools the drum cartridge and the developing
motor
FM2 fixing heat exhaust fan discharges the heat generated by the fixing
assembly to the outside of the machine
FM1 power supply cooling fan cools the power supply
FM4 cleaner cooling fan cools the cleaner
FM5 delivery cooling fan cools the delivery assembly
FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools the pre-registration motor (duplex model
only)
FM7 controller fan cools the controller
FM7
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM8
FM4
FM1
F-12-2
12-6
Chapter 12
12.3.2 Sequence of Operations (fan) 0000-5119
The following is the sequence of operations used by the machine to drive the fans:
When the control panel power switch is pressed to start sleep mode, the control panel LCD goes OFF. If the reading
of the environment sensor is 30 deg C or higher at this timing, the machine rotates the fixing heat discharge fan,
power supply cooling fan, and cleaner cooling fan for 30 min continuously and, thereafter, moves into sleep mode.
Main
Control panel power
Main power Print request power switch switch
switch ON signal OFF OFF
Warm-up Standby Printing Standby Low-power mode Power-save mode Sleep mode
Power supply cooling

fan (FM3)
Fixing heat exhaust
fan (FM2)
Cleaner cooling fan
(FM4)
Delivery cooling fan
(FM5)
Machine cooling fan
(FM1)
Manual feed cooling
fan (FM6)
Controller fan
(FM7)
Delivery vertical
path fan (FM8)*
*: FM8 rotates in case either thick paper (210 to 253 g/m2)

: half speed. : full speed.
or glossy paper is fed to face-down delivery.
F-12-3
12-7
Chapter 12
12.4 Power Supply

12.4.1 Power Supply
12.4.1.1 Timing of Power Supply 0005-9431
The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing of operation:
Standby
Main power switch Sleep mode

turned ON
Power plug connected Power save mode

to outlet
PSTBY
DC 24V
F-12-4
12.4.1.2 Wiring to Various Accessories 0006-0745
The power supply of the printer unit and the various accessories are wired as follows:
The anti-condensation heater inside the reader unit and the power supply cable are as shown. The machine's power
supply uses no more than 2 lines to connect to any external power outlet.
T-12-6
Pedestal Target of reader heater power supply cable

Absent External outlet
Present Pedestal outlet
12-8
Chapter 12
DADF-K1 For heater

Inlet (If a pedestal is
Reader C1 installed, connect it
to its outlet.)
Finisher-
M1/N1/N2
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Side Paper Printer

Deck-P1
Inlet
Outlet1
Cable for Outlet2
deck heater
Outlet3 Inlet
Pedestal
If a pedestal is installed,
connect the pedestal power
cable to its outlet 2.
F-12-5
12.4.1.3 Route of Power Supply 0005-9433
The machine uses the I/F PCB to produce the following types of DC voltage from the 24 VDC supplied by the printer
unit:
- 5 VDC (for sensors)
- 3.3 VDC (for ICs)
- 2.5 VDC (for ICs)
- 15 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
- 24 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
The reader controller PCB produces the following type of DC voltage:
- 12 VDC (for CCD unit)
12-9
Chapter 12
Interface PCB
5 VDC generation 15 VDC Reader controller

3.3 VDC generation 24 VDC PCB
12 VDC
2.5 VDC generation generation
15 VDC generation
To DF 24 VDC generation 5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
J3
06
05
J3
01
24 VDC J3 04
From printer unit J3 09 J2
11 J3
J2 06
01 J2
100/230 VAC
24 VDC
J6
01
100/230 VAC
Fuse PCB
24 VDC Inverter PCB

15 VDC
5 VDC
3.3 VDC
F-12-6
12.4.1.4 Power Supply Route lnside the Printer Unit 0006-1651
The machine's DC power supply is fed with power by the 2 DC power supply PCB (DCP1, DCP2) and the DC power
supply PCB (for accessories) built inside the pedestal (plain, cassette pedestal).
DC Power Supply PCB
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against current/voltage
- supplies DC power to loads
DC Power Supply PCB for Accessories (inside pedestal)
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against overcurrent/voltage
- supplies DC power to accessories (paper deck, finisher)
12-10
Chapter 12
Power supply unit
Leakage
breaker
Main
Heater
power
control PCB
switch
DCP1 PCB 3.3V

Main
3.3VAN
controller PDL board
12VAN
DCP2 PCB PCB (main)
3.3V 5V 5V
12V
Control
5V
Main
3.3V controller panel unit
Power 3.3VAN PCB (sub)
distribution
24V
PCB 12V Coin

3.3VAN 5V
5V HDD manager or
12VAN
Card reader
5V
3.3V Laser
12V 24V
scanner motor
24V
(Y,M,C,K)
24V
5V Laser
5V DC driver PCB
12V controller (Y,M,C,K)
3.3V PCB
Fuse PCB Scanner unit
24V Reader
Intermediate Drum
24V 24VATR
transfer motor drive unit
24V (Y,M,C,K)
Duplex
5V
driver PCB
3.3V HVI(Y,M,C,K)
3.3VAN FAX board
5V (option) HVI-SUB
5VAN
HV2
24V
HV2-SUB
HV4(YM/CK)
HV3
High-voltage unit
VAN: All Night Voltage
24V,5V Cassette
feeder
unit 1/2
F-12-7
12.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB
12.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Machine Power Suppy 0006-0760
The rated output and the power supply tolerance of the DC power supply PCB (DCP1 PCB, DCP2 PCB) of the
printer unit are as follows:
T-12-7
Output 3.3 V 3.3 VAN 5V 5 VAN 12 V 12 VAN 24 V
Tolerance -4%/ -4%/+5% -5%/ -5%/ -8%/ -9%/ -9%/

+5% +5% +5% +10% +10% +10%
12-11
Chapter 12
12.4.3 Protection Function
12.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms 0006-0766
The machine's power supply PCB and the power supply PCBs of its accessories are equipped with an overcurrent/
voltage protective mechanisms that prevent damage to the power supply circuit by automatically cutting off the
output voltage in the event of an overcurrent/voltage caused, for example, by a short-circuit in any of its loads.
If the protective function has gone ON, turn off the power switch of the printer unit, disconnect the power plug of
the printer unit or the accessories power supply circuit, and remove the cause of activation; then, leave the machine
alone for about 3 min, and turn it on to reset.
12.4.4 Backup Battery
12.4.4.1 Backup Power Supply 0006-0767
The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine's main controller PCB are each equipped with a lithium
battery for backup in the event of a power outage or disconnection of the power plug.
T-12-8
SRAM PCB manganese dioxide/lithium battery (3 V, 1000

mAh)
DC controller PCB lithium battery (3 V, 560 mAh)
T-12-9
Battery life 10 yr or more (for both; with power plug

disconnected)
Battery replacement not possible (on its own, in the field)
After replacement of battery in input of values indicated on service label

workshop
The lithium battery must be replaced only with the one indicated in the Parts Catalog; otherwise, it may trigger
a fire or explosion.
Do not charge, disassemble, or incinerate the lithium battery; mishandling can lead to a fire or a chemical explosion.
Keep the lithium battery out of reach of children. Be sure to dispose of a used battery strictly in accordance with all
applicable regulations.
12-12
Chapter 12
12.4.5 Energy-Saving Function
12.4.5.1 Outline 0006-0772
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the machine is in operation or is ready to operate, with all its parts supplied with power.
2. Power-Save Mode
The term "power-save mode" is used generically to refer to the following modes, in which the machine is supplied
with power differently than it is in normal mode: power-save, low-power, sleep. A shift in the direction of 'resent
power-save mode' to 'low-power mode' and then to 'sleep' mode occurs automatically.
- Power-Save Mode
T-12-10
Shift: A shift to power-save mode is initiated only in response to a press on the Save
Power button on the control panel.
Description: The power used by the machine is reduced according to the settings made in
user mode (immediate recovery, -10%, -25%, -50%; the fixing unit is
controlled to 190 deg C).
- Low-Power Mode (factory setting)

This mode conforms to the standards under Energy Star.
T-12-11
Shift: A shift is made only in response to the passage of time (auto low-power shift
time) selected in user mode.
Description: The power used by the machine is reduced to enable the machine to remain in
a state that satisfies the standards under Energy Star.The power supplied to the
reader unit will remain ON except the +24V power, which the reader unit uses
to generate internal power. (All operations remain at rest.)
The printer unit keeps the temperature of the fixing unit to a specific level (190
deg C) which is lower than when the machine is in normal operating mode.
- Sleep Mode (sleep mode 1 or sleep mode 2)
T-12-12
Shift: A shift is made in response to the passage of time (auto sleep shift time)
specified in user mode or in response to a press on the control panel software
power switch.
12-13
Chapter 12
Description: In sleep mode 1 (relatively higher power consumption), the fixing assembly
is totally deprived of power. The DC controller PCB, however, remains
supplied with power.
In sleep mode 2 (relatively lower power consumption), on the other hand, the
printer unit (including the fixing assembly) remains OFF; the main controller
PCB is supplied with all-night power as indicated in the table:
T-12-13
Controller +3.3 VAN CPU, main memory
+12 VAN controller cooling fan
FAX +5 VAN fax arrival detection
3. AC OFF Mode
AC OFF mode occurs when the main power switch is turned off, i.e., all parts of the machine is deprived of power.
The supply of power to the various systems of the machine in each of the foregoing modes is as follows:
T-12-14
Standby Power- Low- Sleep Sleep AC

mode save power mode 1 mode 2 OFF
mode mode mode
Main Non-all +12V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

controller night power
+5V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
+3.3V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
All-night +3.3VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF

power
+12VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF
Reader unit +24V ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Printer unit +24V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
FAX Non-all +5V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

night power
All-night +5VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF

power
12-14
Chapter 12
12.5 Parts Replacement 12.5.1.5 Removing the DC

Procedure
12.5.1 Fixing Drive Unit



Upper Rear Cover 0000-5131 F-12-9

Controller Box Cover 0000-5129 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
[1]
F-12-10


F-12-8 controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
12-15
Chapter 12
F-12-11 F-12-14
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
and open it.
F-12-12
F-12-15


fan [3].
F-12-13

12-16
Chapter 12
F-12-16 F-12-18
12.5.1.8 Removing the High- 12.5.1.9 Removing the Left

Voltage Unit 0000-5134 Lower Rear cover 0000-5135
1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit; 1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
voltage unit [2]. 12.5.1.10 Removing the
Secondary Transfer High-

the 2 screws [4].
F-12-17

F-12-19

12-17
Chapter 12
F-12-20
F-12-22
3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1]

[3] from the cable clamp [2]. Drive Unit 0000-5137

the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2];
F-12-21

high-voltage unit [3]. F-12-23
12.5.2 Developing Drive Unit

12-18
Chapter 12




distribution PCB, and free the harness from the F-12-25

[1]
F-12-26
F-12-24

controller PCB cover [2]. 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC
12-19
Chapter 12
F-12-27 F-12-30
and open it.
F-12-28
F-12-31


F-12-29

12-20
Chapter 12
F-12-32
F-12-34
[3].
fan [3].
F-12-35
F-12-33

clamp [4].
12-21
Chapter 12
12.5.3 High-Voltage Unit


F-12-36 12.5.3.3 Removing the High-

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main 1) Disconnect all connectors of the high-voltage unit;
controller base [2]. then, remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the high-
voltage unit [2].
F-12-37
F-12-39
F-12-38
12-22
Chapter 12

F-12-40
12.5.4 Secondary Transfer High- F-12-42
Voltage Unit 12.5.4.4 Removing the Left

Lower Rear cover 0000-5144
1) Remove the upper rear cover. 12.5.4.5 Removing the

Secondary Transfer High-
1) Remove the lower rear cover. then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3], and remove
the 2 screws [4].

voltage unit [2].
F-12-43
F-12-41
12-23
Chapter 12

F-12-46
12.5.5 DC Power Supply Unit

F-12-44
3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1] Rear Cover 0000-5168
[3] from the cable clamp [2].


Power Supply Unit 0000-5170

connectors of the fuse PCB; then, detach the DC
power supply unit [2].
F-12-45

high-voltage unit [3].
F-12-47
12-24
Chapter 12
12.5.6 Control Panel control panel [2].

Left Cover (small) 0000-5171
1) Remove the upper left cover (small).

Cover 0000-5172
1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover.

2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside
F-12-50
cover [2].
12.5.7 Control Panel LCD Unit


Cover 0000-5188

F-12-48
cover [2].
12.5.6.3 Removing the Control

Panel 0000-5173
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the control

panel [2] toward the front.
F-12-51

F-12-49 Panel 0000-5189

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the panel [2] toward the front.
12-25
Chapter 12
F-12-52
F-12-54
control panel [2]. 12.5.7.5 Removing the Control
Panel LCD Unit 0000-5191

panel LCD unit [2].
F-12-53

Panel Back Plate 0000-5190
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU F-12-55

PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2
connectors [3] from the inverter PCB, remove the
12.5.8 DC Controller PCB
binding screw [4], and remove the 8 self-tapping
screws [5]; then, detach the control panel back plate
[6]. 12.5.8.1 Removing the Upper

12-26
Chapter 12

[1]
F-12-58

Controller PCB 0000-5283
F-12-56 1) Disconnect all connectors of the PCB, and remove
the 2 flat cables [1] and the 10 screws [2]; then,
12.5.8.4 Removing the DC detach the DC controller PCB [3].

F-12-59
F-12-57
12-27
Chapter 12
12.5.8.6 When Replacing the 12.5.9.3 Removing the Left

DC Controller PCB 0000-5284 Upper Rear Cover 0000-5319
1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the 1) Removing the left rear upper cover.
following service mode to initialize the memory of
the DC controller PCB: 12.5.9.4 Removing the
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON Controller Box Cover 0000-5317
2) Enter the settings indicated on the service label
using the following service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the laser
beam position.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration
roller clutch goes ON.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-
pickup.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray.
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4
manual feed tray.
4) Make the following selections in service mode: F-12-60
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0.
5) Press the OK key. (The machine starts auto 12.5.9.5 Removing the DC
adjustment and will indicate 'END' at its end.) Controller PCB Cover 0000-5318

12.5.9 Counter Memory PCB controller PCB cover [2].


12-28
Chapter 12
F-12-63

[1]
F-12-64
F-12-62

1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC F-12-65

12-29
Chapter 12
F-12-66
F-12-68
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.10 Fuse PCB
and open it.



F-12-67
12.5.9.7 Removing the Counter
Memory PCB 0000-5321

screws [2]; then, detach the counter memory PCB
[3].
F-12-69
12-30
Chapter 12

PCB 0000-5325
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the 5 card

spacers [2]; then, detach the fuse PCB [3].
F-12-71

Supply Cooling Fan
Mounting 0000-5301
F-12-70 1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power

supply cooling fan mointing plate[2]; then, detach
12.5.11 Leakage Breaker the connector [3].



F-12-72
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all 12.5.11.5 Removing the
Leakage Breaker 0000-5302
connectors from the fuse PCB; then, detach the
power supply PCB base [2].
12-31
Chapter 12
F-12-76
F-12-73
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the protective 12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB
plate [1].


Connector Mounting 0000-5313
F-12-74
3) Remove the 4 terminals [1] and the 2 screws [2]; connectors; then, detach the lattice connector
Mounting [2].
then, detach the leakage breaker [3].
F-12-75
F-12-77
12-32
Chapter 12

Duplex Driver PCB 0000-5314
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the duplex

driver PCB [2].
F-12-79
F-12-78
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 Controller PCB Cover 0000-5306

12.5.13.1 Removing the Upper controller PCB cover [2].




wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
detach the main controller cover [4]. When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
12-33
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-81
F-12-84


F-12-85

F-12-86
F-12-83
12-34
Chapter 12
12.5.13.7 Removing the DC 12.5.14.2 Removing the Inside

Controller Mounting 0000-5309 Cover 0000-5180
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover.
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside
the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
F-12-89
F-12-87

12.5.13.8 Removing the Relay
Control Panel 0000-5181
PCB 1 0000-5310
1) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1] and the 8 screws panel [2] toward the front.
[2] from the PCB; then, detach the relay PCB 1 [3].
F-12-88
F-12-90
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2].
12-35
Chapter 12

Cover 0000-5175

cover [2].
F-12-91

Control Panel CPU PCB 0000-5182

flat cables [2]; then, detach the control panel CPU
PCB [4].
F-12-93


F-12-92
F-12-94
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch
PCB 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2].

12-36
Chapter 12
F-12-95
F-12-97
Control Panel Back Plate 0000-5177 12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU
PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2 12.5.16.1 Removing the Upper
[6].
Cover 0000-5184

cover [2].
F-12-96

Control Panel Key PCB 0000-5178

panel key PCB [2]. F-12-98


12-37
Chapter 12
F-12-99
F-12-101
control panel [2]. 12.5.16.5 Removing the
Control Panel Inverter PCB 0000-5186

screws [2]; then, detach the control panel inverter
PCB [3].
F-12-100

Control Panel Back Plate 0006-2163
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU

PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2
[6]. F-12-102
12.5.17 Environment Sensor
12.5.17.1 Pressure Release of

the Intermediate Transfer
Unit 0006-2169

12-38
Chapter 12
2) Slide out the manual feed unit. 12.5.17.3 Removing the

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the middle right Environment Sensor 0000-5344
cover [2].
1) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the upper
right stay of the machine, and remove the screw [1];
then, detach the environment sensor mounting plate
[2].
F-12-103

F-12-106
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the claw [2]

of the sensor base; then, detach the environment
sensor [3].
F-12-104


cover [2]. F-12-107
12.5.18 Manual Feed Unit Open/

Closed Sensor

F-12-105
12-39
Chapter 12




distribution PCB, and free the harness from the F-12-109

[1]
F-12-110
F-12-108

controller PCB cover [2]. 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC
12-40
Chapter 12
F-12-111 F-12-114
and open it.
F-12-112
F-12-115


F-12-113

12-41
Chapter 12
F-12-118
F-12-116
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed
12.5.18.8 Removing the Sensor
Registration Unit Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5234 12.5.19.1 Removing the
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the Tonner Container release
screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/
Lever 0006-2360
closed sensor mounting [3].
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and the 4 tonner container
release levers [2].
F-12-117

Manual Feed Unit Open/ F-12-119
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 12.5.19.2 Removing the
registration unit open/closed sensor [2]. Cleaner Fan Cover 0000-5216

cover [2].
12-42
Chapter 12



F-12-120

Cover 0000-5217

cover [2].
F-12-122

F-12-121
[1]



F-12-123
12-43
Chapter 12


F-12-126
12.5.20 Main Power Switch


F-12-124

Cover Open/Closed Sensor 0000-5226
cover [2].


F-12-125
2) Remove the front cover open closed sensor [1].
12-44
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-129


F-12-130
F-12-128

F-12-131
12-45
Chapter 12


F-12-132

F-12-135


fan [3].
F-12-133

and open it.
F-12-136

Drive Unit 0000-5200

F-12-134 the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2];
12-46
Chapter 12
F-12-139
F-12-137

Mounting [2].
F-12-140

Duct 0000-5203

F-12-138 connector [1] and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach

voltage unit [2].
12-47
Chapter 12
12.5.21 Manual Feed Unit Open/

Closed Detecting Switch


F-12-141 Rear Cover 0000-5237

Power Supply Switch 0000-5204 12.5.21.3 Removing the Left
1) Remove the 2 terminals [1]. Upper Rear Cover 0000-5240


F-12-142
2) Pick the stopper segment [A], and detach it.
F-12-143 F-12-144
12-48
Chapter 12


F-12-147
F-12-145

cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose. F-12-148
[1]
F-12-146
F-12-149
12.5.21.6 Opening the Main 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the

12-49
Chapter 12
F-12-150
F-12-152
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.21.8 Removing the
and open it.
Registration Unit Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5243

screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/
closed sensor mounting [3].
F-12-151

F-12-153
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove 12.5.21.9 Removing the
Manual Feed Unit Open/
Close Switch 0000-5244
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the manual feed

unit open/close switch [2].
12-50
Chapter 12
F-12-156
F-12-154

12.5.22 Front Cover Open/Closed
Cover 0000-5206
Detecting Switch 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover.
12.5.22.1 Removing the cover [2].
Tonner Container release
Lever 0006-2374

2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and the 4 tonner container
release levers [2].
F-12-157


F-12-155

cover [2].
12-51
Chapter 12
12.5.22.6 Removing the Left 12.5.22.8 Removing the DC

Upper Rear Cover 0000-5211 Controller Mounting 0000-5213
1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free
12.5.22.7 Removing the DC the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB
Controller PCB Cover 0000-5210 [2] together with its base.

F-12-160

F-12-158 Cover Open/Close Switch 0000-5215
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the retaining

plate [2]; then, push it inside the front side cover.

[1]
F-12-161

screws [2]; then, slide out the sensor base [3]. (The
sensor flag pushing plate is found running from the
F-12-159 front side plate to the rear side plate.)
12-52
Chapter 12
F-12-164
F-12-162
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the front cover Cleaner Fan 0000-5292
open/close switch [2].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws;
then, detach the cleaner fan [2].
F-12-163
12.5.23 Cleaner Fan F-12-165
12.5.23.1 Removing the 12.5.24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cleaner fan Rear Cover 0000-5245
cover [2]. 1) Remove the upper rear cover.

12-53
Chapter 12



F-12-167

[1]
F-12-166

Controller PCB Cover 0000-5248 F-12-168


12-54
Chapter 12
F-12-169 F-12-172
and open it.
F-12-170
F-12-173


F-12-171

12-55
Chapter 12
F-12-174
F-12-176

Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5252 controller base [2].
fan [3].
F-12-177

F-12-175 developing drive assembly [2].


clamp [4].
F-12-178
12-56
Chapter 12


Mounting [2].
F-12-181

Duct 0000-5256

F-12-179 connector [1] and remove the 2 screws [2] to detach

voltage unit [2].
F-12-182

Manual Feed Cooling Fan 0000-5257
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the manual

feed cooling fan [2].
F-12-180

12-57
Chapter 12
F-12-183
12.5.25 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan

F-12-184




F-12-185

12-58
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-186
F-12-189


F-12-190

F-12-191
F-12-188
12-59
Chapter 12


fan [3].
F-12-193

Supply Cooling Fan
Mounting 0000-5296
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and remove the power

F-12-192
supply cooling fan mointing plate[2]; then, detach
the connector [3].
12.5.26 Power Supply Cooing Fan


12.5.26.3 Removing the DC F-12-194


connectors of the fuse PCB; then, detach the DC Supply Cooing Fan 0000-5297
power supply unit [2]. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the power
supply cooling fan [2].
12-60
Chapter 12

F-12-195
F-12-197
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan
12.5.27.1 Removing the Upper Lower Rear cover 0000-5288
12.5.27.2 Removing the Lower Secondary Transfer High-
Rear Cover 0000-5286 Voltage Unit 0000-5289
1) Remove the lower rear cover. 1) Free the DC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2];
12.5.27.3 Removing the High- the 2 screws [4].

voltage unit [2].
F-12-198
F-12-196
12-61
Chapter 12

F-12-201

F-12-199 Delivery Cooling Fan 0000-5290

3) Pull the secondary transfer high-voltage unit [1] screws [2]; then, detach the fan [3].
[3] from the cable clamp [2].
F-12-202
F-12-200
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan
connector [2]; then, detach the secondary transfer Rear Cover 0000-5272
high-voltage unit [3]. 1) Remove the upper rear cover.

12-62
Chapter 12



F-12-204

[1]
F-12-203

Controller PCB Cover 0000-5275 F-12-205


12-63
Chapter 12
F-12-206 F-12-209
and open it.
F-12-207
F-12-210

F-12-208

12-64
Chapter 12



F-12-211

[3].
F-12-213
F-12-212 12.5.29.5 Removing the DC

12.5.29 Drum Unit Drive Belt

12-65
Chapter 12
F-12-216

[1]
F-12-217
F-12-215

1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC F-12-218

12-66
Chapter 12
F-12-219
F-12-221
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.29.8 Removing the Fixing
and open it.

fan [3].
F-12-220

F-12-222

the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB Developing Drive Unit 0000-5334
[2] together with its base. 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing
clamp [4].
12-67
Chapter 12


Mounting [2].
F-12-223

F-12-226


voltage unit [2].
F-12-224

F-12-227

F-12-225
12-68
Chapter 12
F-12-228
F-12-230

Manual Feed Cooling Fan 1) Free the DC harness [1] found at the front of the
Duct 0000-5337 drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp [2].
F-12-231
F-12-229 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3

12.5.29.13 Removing the [3].
Drum ITB Motor Mounting 0000-5338
Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB

Motor Mounting
To remove, put your hand into the inside where you
have slid out the manual feed unit; then, while holding
12-69
Chapter 12
tension on the belt.)
F-12-234
F-12-232
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the belt

12.5.29.14 Removing the tension pulley cover [2]. (2 locations left/right)
Drum Drive Unit 0000-5339

screws [2]: then, take out the drum drive unit [3].
F-12-235
2) Remove the belt retaining roll [1] found on the right

side, and detach the drum unit drive belt [2].
F-12-233
12.5.29.15 Detaching the Drum

Unit Drive Belt 0000-5340
Never remove the screws [1] (identified by a red F-12-236

marking) used to secure the belt tension plate in place.
(The plate is used to maintain a specific degree of
12-70
Chapter 13 MEAP
Contents
Contents
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 13-4
Chapter 13
13.1 Overview 0007-0341
The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a
platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java
2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or
uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC.
As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.
13-1
Chapter 13
13.2 MEAP Counter 0007-0359
In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter
mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP
applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on
the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP
counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question.
A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when
the application sends instructions; or, it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus
increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-13-1
Type Count item
forced total
total (black-and-white 1)
total (black-and-while large)
scan (total 1)
black-and-white scan (total 1)
in response to instructions from application black-and-white scan 1
black-and-white scan 2
application-independent free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
free 12
13-2
Chapter 13
Notes:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from
the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.
13-3
Chapter 13
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 0007-0346
In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions
calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP
applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content,
calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For
version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software.
The following shows the components of a MEAP application:
[5] [7] [8]

[1]
[6]
[2] [4]
[3]
F-13-1
[1] User Interface Control Bock

installed as part of the system software
[2] Device Control Block
[3] Operating System
[4] Java VM
[5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO)
installed as part of MEAP content
[6] Device Control Class Library
installed as part of MEAP content
[7] internally developed application
[8] externally developed application
13-4
Chapter 14 Maintenance
and Inspection
Contents
Contents
14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................... 14-4
14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-4
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) ........................................................................................................ 14-6
Chapter 14
14.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

14.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 0005-9998
Some parts of the machine must be periodically replaced to ensure a specific level of product performance (i.e., they
may not show wear but can significantly affect the machine performance once they fail). If possible, schedule any
periodical replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.
The guide to periodical replacement is subject to change according to the site of installation and habits of use.
14.1.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 0006-0000
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
14.1.3 Printer Unit 0006-0001
The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
14-1
Chapter 14
14.2 Durables and Consumables

14.2.1 Outline 0006-0002
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the life of the product because of deterioration
or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the guide.
Find Out When to Replace
Use the following service mode to find out when it is best to replace a specific durable part.
- Copier
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
- Option
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
14.2.2 Reader Unit/Color Image Reader-C1 0006-0004
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that are designated as "durables."
14.2.3 Printer Unit 0006-0005
T-14-1
as of May 2004
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks
[1] Waste toner container FG6-8992 1 60,000 prints*
[2] Secondary transfer outside FG6-8997 1 300,000 prints* actual number of

roller (120/230-V) prints
[3] Transfer cleaning unit FG6-8989 1 100,000 prints*
[4] Fixing roller FB6-3641 1 100,000 prints* actual number of

prints
[5] Pressure roller FB6-3653 1 100,000 prints* actual number of

prints
[6] Transfer belt FB6-2930 1 300,000 prints* actual number of

prints
[7] Drive roller FB6-2931 1 300,000 prints* actual number of

prints
[8] Primary toner roller RB2-6870 4 300,000 prints*
[9] Secondary transfer inside FB6-2934 1 300,000 prints* actual number of

roller prints
[10] Feed roller (each cassette FB6-3406 2 250,000 prints* actual number of
holder) prints
14-2
Chapter 14
as of May 2004
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks
[11] Separation roller (each FB6-3406 2 250,000 prints* actual number of

cassette holder) prints
[12] Feed roller (manual feeder) FB1-8581 1 120,000 prints* actual number of
prints
[13] Separation roller (manual FB5-0873 1 120,000 prints* actual number of

feeder) prints
[14] Fixing upper frame unit FG6-9645 1 100,000 prints*
[15] Fixing unit (100 V) FG6-9070 1 200,000 prints*
[16] Pressure roller bearing XG9-0478 2 100,000 prints* actual number of

prints
*: Assumes the use of A4 originals with a 5% image ratio.
[8] [7]
[12]
[6]
[13]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[11]
[1]
[16] [15]
[5]
[16]
F-14-1
14-3
Chapter 14
14.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

14.3.1 Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit) 0006-0013
Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein.
T-14-2
Unit name Location Cleaning Remarks
Optical assembly Scanner cable inspect if dirt is appreciable
Optical path Scanner rail lubricate if dirt is appreciable
Copyboard glass clean if dirt is appreciable
No. 1 through No. 3 clean if dirt is appreciable

mirrors
Original reflecting plate clean if dirt is appreciable
Original size sensor clean if dirt is appreciable
Lens clean if dirt is appreciable
Points to Note About Scheduled Servicing

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, use lint-free paper and alcohol for cleaning.
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
14-4
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass
Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate.
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper. Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Lens Original size sensor
Scanner cable Use a blower brush. Use a blower brush.
Inspect.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
Face-down transfer belt
delivery roller 2 (ITB; when
replacing it)
Reversing roller Drive roller

(when replacing
the ITB)
Tension roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Pre-registration
roller
Reversing roller
External delivery Pickup vertical

roller path roller
Internal delivery
roller Registration
Duplex feed roller upper roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex Secondary Duplex Registration
guide
transfer rear feed transfer feed lower roller
Delivery lower
guide guide roller internal roller
Fixing inlet guide roller
(when replacing
Dry wipe with the ITB)
lint-free paper.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated and for guides coming into

contact with paper, use lint-free paper and alcohol.
F-14-2
14-5
Chapter 14
14.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit) 0006-0015
Do not use solvents or oils that are not indicated herein.
T-14-3
Maintenance
intervals
Unit name Location every 150,000 Other Remarks

40,000
Delivery unit Internal delivery clean if dirt is

roller appreciable
External delivery clean if dirt is

roller appreciable
Duplex feed unit Duplex roller 1 clean if dirt is

appreciable
Duplex roller 2 clean if dirt is

appreciable

appreciable

appreciable
Delivery vertical Reversing roller clean

path unit
Face-down delivery clean
roller 1
Face-down delivery clean

roller 2
Fixing unit Fixing inlet guide clean if dirt is

appreciable
Fixing inlet roll clean if dirt is

appreciable
Delivery upper guide clean if dirt is

appreciable
Delivery lower guide clean if dirt is

appreciable
14-6
Maintenance
intervals
Unit name Location every 150,000 Other Remarks

40,000
Manual feed Pre-registration clean if dirt is

registration unit roller appreciable
Registration upper clean if dirt is

roller appreciable
Registration lower clean if dirt is

roller appreciable
Pickup vertical path clean if dirt is

roller appreciable
Intermediate Drive roller clean or, when replacing

transfer unit the intermediate
transfer belt
Tension roller clean or, when replacing

the intermediate
transfer belt
Secondary transfer clean or, when replacing

internal roller the intermediate
transfer belt
Internal transfer belt clean or, when replacing

(inside) the intermediate
transfer belt
Secondary Secondary transfer clean if dirt is

transfer unit rear guide appreciable
Points to Note About Scheduled Servicing

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, use lint-free paper and alcohol for cleaning.
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass
Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate.
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper. Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Lens Original size sensor
Scanner cable Use a blower brush. Use a blower brush.
Inspect.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
Face-down transfer belt
delivery roller 2 (ITB; when
replacing it)
Reversing roller Drive roller

(when replacing
the ITB)
Tension roller
(when replacing
the ITB)
Pre-registration
roller
Reversing roller
External delivery Pickup vertical

roller path roller
Internal delivery
roller Registration
Duplex feed roller upper roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex Secondary Duplex Registration
guide
transfer rear feed transfer feed lower roller
Delivery lower
guide guide roller internal roller
Fixing inlet guide roller
(when replacing
Dry wipe with the ITB)
lint-free paper.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated and for guides coming into

contact with paper, use lint-free paper and alcohol.
F-14-3
14-8
Chapter 15 Standards and
Adjustments
Contents
Contents
15.1 Image Adjustments ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.2 Checking the Image Position .................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Cassette) ........................................................................................... 15-2
15.1.4 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Manual Feed Tray) ........................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (Side Paper Deck) .............................................................................. 15-3
15.1.6 Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 15-4
15.2 Scanning System ........................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ...................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass .................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit ............................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-6
15.4 Image Formation System ............................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.1 After Replacing the Drum Unit .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.4.2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit .......................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4.3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit .............................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Fixing System ................................................................................................................................................ 15-8
15.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ...................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Electrical Components .................................................................................................................................. 15-9
15.6.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ......................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 15-9
15.6.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) .............................................................................. 15-10
15.6.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................. 15-10
15.6.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6.6 When Replacing the HDD .................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.7 When Replacing the Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................. 15-11
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System ............................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette ...................................... 15-12
15.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit ........................................... 15-13
Chapter 15
15.1 Image Adjustments 2.0±1.5mm

(2nd side of double-side copy:
2.0±1.5mm)
15.1.1 Standards for Image
0
Position 0000-5345
2
The standards for the image margin/non-image width 4
5
of prints made at 100% are as follows: 6
8
2.5±1.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided
copy: 2.5±2.0mm) 10
F-15-4
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 15.1.2 Checking the Image

F-15-1
Position 0000-5346
Make 10 prints each using the following as the source

2.0±1.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided copy: of paper, and check to see that the image margin and
2.0±1.5mm) non-image width are as indicated:
[1] individual cassettes
0
[2] manual feed tray
2
[3] side paper deck
4
5 [4] duplex unit
6
If not, perform the following:
8 1) left/right image margin adjustment (horizontal
10 registration adjustment)
2) leading edge image margin adjustment (registration
F-15-2
adjustment)
3) left-right non-image width adjustment (CCD read
2.5±1.5mm start cell position adjustment)
(2nd side of double-sided
copy:2.5±2.0mm) 4) leading edge non-image width adjustment (scanner
image leading edge position adjustment)
Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin
1) Make the following selections in service mode, and
see that the image margin is as indicated:
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
F-15-3
15-1
Chapter 15
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front

Decease the
value of REGIST. cover [2].
2.5±1.5mm (A decrease of ‘10’
(2nd side of duplex will increase
copy: 2.5±2.0mm) the margin by 1 mm.)
Leading edge of paper
Increase the
value of REGIST.
0 2 456 8 101214161820 (An increase of ‘10’
will decrease
the margin by 1 mm.)
F-15-5
Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width

1) Make the following selections in service mode, and
see that the non-image width is as indicated:
F-15-8
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y.
3) Detach the grip [1] found at the right front. (If

Decrease the
2.5±1.5mm
value of ADJ-X. only the cassette 2.)
(A decrease of ‘10’
(2nd side of
will decrease
double-sided
the non-image
copy: 2.5±2.0mm)
width by 1 mm.)
Image leading edge
Increase the
0 2 456 8 101214161820 value of ADJ-X.
(An increase of ‘10’
will increase
the non-image
width by 1 mm.)
F-15-6
Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width

1) Make the following selections in service mode, and F-15-9
see that the non-image width is as indicated:
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X. 4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right
front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
Edge of image
Increase the value of ADJ-Y.
(An increase of ‘10’ will increase
position of the adjusting plate [2].
Decrease the
the non-image width by 1 mm.)
value of ADJ-Y.
(A decrease of ‘10’ 2.0±1.5mm
will decrease (2nd side of double-sided
the non-image copy: 2.5±1.5mm)
width by 1 mm.)
0
2
4
5
6
8
10
F-15-7
15.1.3 Adjusting the Left/

Right Margin (Cassette) 0000-5347 F-15-10
1) Slide out the cassette 1/2, and open the pickup

15-2
Chapter 15

Right Margin (Manual
Feed Tray) 0000-5348
Loosen the 2 screws [1], and move the position of the

Moving the adjusting
plate to the right slide guide [2] to make adjustments.
Image
L2
Decrease the margin at

the front of the paper.
F-15-11
- For output from each cassette, check to make

sure that the margin (L1) along the leading edge
is 2.5±1.5 mm; if not, make the following
adjustments:
1) Make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
F-15-13
(A change of '1' will cause a shift of 0.1 mm, and a
higher value will move the image toward the
leading edge.)
Right Margin (Side Paper
L1
Deck) 0000-5349
1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust the position

of the latch plate [1] of the compartment opening
Image
solenoid (SL102) using the 2 screws. (When doing
so, refer to the index [3] on the latch plate.)
Increasing the value of FEED-ADJ will move [1] [3] [2]

the image toward the leading edge of the paper.
F-15-12
- Adjusting the Image Area (non-image width)

COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-T/L/B/R.
(An increase by '24'increases the non-image width by
(left rear of compartment)
about 1mm, with the range of settings being between
F-15-14
0 and 100.)
15-3
Chapter 15
15.1.6 Duplex Unit 0000-5350
Loosen the adjusting screw [1] to make adjustments.

(A single graduation in the index will cause a change
of approximately 1 mm.)
- To move the paper to the rear, move it to the left.
- To move the paper to the front, move it to the right.
[1]
left right
F-15-15
15-4
Chapter 15
15.2 Scanning System

15.2.1 After Replacing the
Scanning Lamp 0000-5354
There is no particular work to perform after replacing

the scanning lamp.

Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass (F01-

301-04) using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
Use it to enter data for the standard white plate.
820686679349
F-15-16

CCD Unit 0000-5356
When you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the

values (for color displacement correction in sub
scanning direction) indicated on the label attached to
the unit in service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB
Use it to enter the image position correction value
(dependent on the CCD unit).
15-5
Chapter 15
15.3 Laser Exposure System

Laser Unit 0000-5357
If you have replaced the laser unit, execute the

following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser
intensity.
15-6
Chapter 15
15.4 Image Formation

System
Drum Unit 0000-5358

the drum unit.

Transfer Unit 0000-5359

the transfer unit (intermediate transfer unit, secondary
transfer unit).

Pattern Reading Unit 0000-5360

the pattern reading unit.
15-7
Chapter 15
15.5 Fixing System A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
15.5.1 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to If the median value of the measured nip is toward the
secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be side with a higher nip value at the edge.
sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows: If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm. may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
about 0.3 mm.
F-15-17

c 1.5mm
Standard:
F-15-19
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm Service Mode
MEMO:
15-8
Chapter 15
15.6 Electrical Components Use it to enter a color displacement correction value

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-GB
15.6.1 When Replacing the Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
Reader Controller PCB 0000-5362
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-RG
- Set the DIP switch on the reader controller PCB to Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
the same settings as the initial PCB. for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB
J203 J202
J210 IC7 IC14
IC16 IC5
J201
(CPU) ON SW1
J204 OFF
J206 J205 J207
IC3
1 2J208
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG
F-15-20 Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
T-15-1 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB
SW-1 SW-2 for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
AB OFF OFF
A ON OFF
A/INCH OFF ON COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB
AB/INCH ON ON Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
- Using the SST, download the latest firmware. COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG
- Enter the values indicated on the service label in Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
service mode (refer to the following list). for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-GB
Use it to adjust the scanner leading edge position. Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y for sub scanning direction.
Use it to adjust the CCD read start cell position.
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S 15.6.2 When Replacing the
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner
DC Controller PCB 0000-5363
shading measurement point.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X 1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the
Use it to enter white level data for the standard following service mode to initialize the memory of
while plate. the DC controller PCB:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON
Use it to enter white level data for the standard 2) Enter the settings indicated on the service label
white plate. using the following service mode:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
Use it to enter white level data for the standard Use it to enter an adjustment value for the laser
while plate. beam position.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CLF-R-RG COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST
15-9
Chapter 15
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration

roller clutch goes ON.
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-
pickup.
manual feed tray.
F-15-22
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the 15.6.4 When Replacing the
manual feed tray. Main Controller PCB
(sub) 0006-3263
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0.
Be sure to use the SRAM PCB [1] from the old PCB
5) Press the OK key. (The machine starts auto
on the new main controller PCB (sub) [2].
adjustment and will indicate 'END' at its end.)
15.6.3 When Replacing the

Main Controller PCB
(main) 0000-5364
Be sure to use the image memory (SDRAM) [1] PCB

and the boot ROM [2] from the old PCB on the new
main controller PCB (main).
F-15-23

SRAM PCB 0000-5365
When the SRAM PCB is replaced, all data in its

memory will be lost (file-related, user mode-related,
F-15-21 service mode-related, history-related files). There will
be no error operation, and initialization will take place
automatically.
If you pull out the SRAM PCB from machine B and
mount it to machine A, the PCB will be initialized and
be rendered useless for machine A or B. Take full
15-10
Chapter 15
care. 2) Turn off and then on the machine; when the

machine has started up, perform the following in
1) When you turn on the power after replacing the user mode:
SRAM PCB, the machine will execute automatic Make the following selections: user mode>system
initialization and will indicate a message on its control settings>group ID control>count control;
panel to the effect that you are to turn off and then then, check to see that IDs from 00000001 through
on the power switch found on its right side. Follow 00001000 have been prepared.
the message and turn off and then on the machine. Make the following selections: user mode>system
2) Using service mode, initialize the RAM. control settings>network settings>TCP/IP
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON settings>IP address; then, set up 'IP address'
'gateway address' and 'subnet mask'
administrator setup; then, fill in 'system control
Before starting the work, be sure to inform the user
group ID' and 'system control ID No.' thereafter,
that all image data stored in the Box will be lost and
turn off and then on the machine.
obtain his/her consent.
If you leave out 'system control group ID' and
'system control ID No.' the service engineer will not
be able to 'register card to device' as part of setup
15.6.6 When Replacing the work for NSA.
HDD 0000-5366 3) With the machine in standby state, download the
card ID to be used from NSA.
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used 4) When the card data has been downloaded from
1) Formatting the HDD NSA, check to see that the ID data has correctly
While holding down the 2 and 8 keys on the control been downloaded on the screen brought up by
panel, turn on the power to start up. Using the HD making the following selections:
formatting function of the SST, format all user mode>system control settings>group ID control
partitions. (Only the downloaded ID data must be indicated.)
2) Downloading the Software 5) Make copies using a user card registered with NSA,
Using the SST, download the various software and check to see that statistical operations are made
(system, language, RUI). The machine will take for the device in question.
about 10 min to start up after downloading.
If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Used Together
with a Card Reader
The card ID used by the NSA resides on the HDD. If Power Supply PCB 0000-5367
you have replaced the HDD, therefore, you will have
to newly download the card data from NSA to enable
the power supply PCB.
the statistical operations of NSA. After going through
steps 1) and 2) above, perform the following:
1) Set the following in service mode:
Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then,
enter the number of the first card, and press [OK].
(For instance, if cards No. 1 through No. 1000 are
used for group control, enter '1')
15-11
Chapter 15
15.7 Pickup/Feeding System

15.7.1 Adjusting the
When Replacing the
Pickup Cassette 0000-5368
Make a test copy of the A3 Test Chart, and check to

be sure that the margin on the front side of the image F-15-25
is correct (L2 = 2.0 ±1.5 mm); otherwise, go through
the following steps to make adjustments, starting with
the 1st side and then the 2nd side:
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 1st Side
1) Slide out the manual feed unit and the cassette 1/2;
then, open the pickup vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the front right Moving the adjusting
plate to the right
cover [2].
Image
L2
will decrease the margin on

the front side of the paper.
F-15-26
- Adjusting the Cassette 2 Side

3) Remove the grip [1] from the front right.
F-15-24
- Adjusting the Cassette 1 Side

3) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front
right stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
F-15-27
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front

right stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the
15-12
Chapter 15
F-15-28
Moving the adjusting

plate to the right
Image
L2
will decrease the margin on

the front side of the paper.
F-15-29
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration on the 2nd Side

Use the following service mode to make adjustments:
15.7.2 Adjusting the

When Replacing the
Duplex Unit 0000-5370
After replacing the horizontal registration motor,

horizontal registration sensor, duplex unit, and fixing
delivery unit, follow the adjustment showing below.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED>ADJ>ADJ-REFE
15-13
Chapter 15
15-14
Chapter 16 Correcting
Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
16.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1.1 Site Environment .................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Checking the Paper ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ........................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts .............................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks ............................................................................................ 16-1
16.1.7 Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ..................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) ............................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) ......................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ....................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) .................................................................................................. 16-7
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) .................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 16-9
16.3.1 Symptoms ............................................................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) ........................................................................................................ 16-9
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) .................................................................................................... 16-14
16.3.2 Image Faults .......................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.1 Blank Image ................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.2 Solid Image .................................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density .......................................................................................................... 16-18
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image .................................................................................................................................. 16-24
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density ............................................................................................................................. 16-35
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus .................................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked ................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked ......................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory ............................................................................................................................. 16-60
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing ................................................................................................................................ 16-62
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction .......................................................................................................... 16-64
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking .................................................................................................................... 16-65
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding ...................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed .......................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed ..................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle .......................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl .................................................................................................................................... 16-67
16.3.3.5 Wrap .............................................................................................................................................. 16-68
16.3.4 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.1 No Power ....................................................................................................................................... 16-68
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ..................................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ....................................................................................................... 16-72
16.3.4.5 Noise .............................................................................................................................................. 16-77
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message .................................................................................................................. 16-78
16.3.4.7 Other Defect .................................................................................................................................. 16-83
Contents
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment ............................................................................................................ 16-88

16.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.1 No Output ...................................................................................................................................... 16-88
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure ......................................................................................................................... 16-91
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result .................................................................................................... 16-92
16.3.6 Network ............................................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem .................................................................................................................... 16-107
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ................................................................................................................... 16-108
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ................................................................................................................. 16-108
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem ....................................................................................................................... 16-115
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ............................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) .................................................................................................................................. 16-116
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the cassette ....................... 16-116
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................. 16-117
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag ............. 16-117
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ......................................................................................................................... 16-117
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 ............................................................................................................... 16-118
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ......................................................................................................................... 16-118
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........................................... 16-118
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................ 16-119
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a duplexing
driver PCB failure .................................................................................................................................. 16-119
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 ............................................................................................................. 16-120
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ...................................................................................................................... 16-120
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service mode,
although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. ....................................................................... 16-120
16.3.10 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on
is inadequate. ........................................................................................................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. ............................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. .................... 16-122
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. ... 16-123
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. ............................... 16-123
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after
implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor .............. 16-124
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB ................................................ 16-124
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning ............................................ 16-125
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions ....................................................................... 16-125
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. .......................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating ....................................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a drum
ITB motor failure .................................................................................................................................. 16-126
microswitch PCB failure ....................................................................................................................... 16-127
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and Fuse PCB
work normally ........................................................................................................................................ 16-128
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse PCB is faulty .............. 16-128
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit ..................... 16-129
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. ........................ 16-129
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code ......................................................................... 16-131
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service case removed ..... 16-132
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season ................................ 16-132
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation, toner container
Contents
motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) .................................................................... 16-132

16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..................................................................... 16-133
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the SALT
sensor shutter ......................................................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-135
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-135
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-137
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after replacement of Cyan
drum unit ............................................................................................................................................... 16-137
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. ............................ 16-137
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty. ........................... 16-137
16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-138
16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. .. 16-139
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-139
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. ..................... 16-140
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red ........................... 16-140
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-141
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into
R-CON J205 causes. ............................................................................................................................. 16-141
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning power ON .................. 16-142
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen cover ........................ 16-142
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader Controller PCB ................. 16-142
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor contact of
J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 ............................................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor controller and
the DC controller is faulty. ................................................................................................................... 16-143
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. ................................................................ 16-143
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. .................... 16-144
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. ................................................................... 16-144
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted .............................................................. 16-144
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. .............................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on ECO-ID PCB ............. 16-145
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. .................................................. 16-145
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code ...................................................................................................................... 16-146
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. ............................................... 16-146
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) .............. 16-146
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) ............... 16-147
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. ........................................ 16-147
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. ............................................. 16-148
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. ................................................. 16-148
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-149
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) ....................................... 16-149
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction) ................ 16-150
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) ...................................... 16-150
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) .............................. 16-151
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) ........................................ 16-151
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) ........................................ 16-152
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler ........................................... 16-152
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. ......................................... 16-153
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. .................................................... 16-153
Contents
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. .............................. 16-154
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). .... 16-154
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. .......................... 16-155
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). ......................................... 16-155
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. .......................... 16-156
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. ............................... 16-156
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. ................................................... 16-157
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. ................................................ 16-157
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. ................................... 16-158
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. ................................. 16-158
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. ......... 16-159
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. ........................................... 16-160
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. ................................................ 16-160
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K] to improve
faint image ............................................................................................................................................. 16-161
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a failure of the
Distribution Board PCB Ass'y .............................................................................................................. 16-165
16.3.10.87 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a connection
failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................................... 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ......................................... 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602 Error
Code is displayed ................................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ............................ 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. ..................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. ........................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the ADF
and the reader unit. ................................................................................................................................ 16-171
16.3.10.104 E713 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the finisher
and the cassette pedestal. ....................................................................................................................... 16-171
16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the cassette
pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................................. 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault
in card reader D1 .................................................................................................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared ........... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. ........................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for about
Contents
2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power supply
unit PCB J158 output failure) ............................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please wait"
changes to error code indication ............................................................................................................ 16-176
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-181
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7) which is
fixed on the controller box ................................................................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code .................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. ................................................................ 16-182
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-183
16.3.11 FAX # Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.11.1 Åî037 ......................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12 FAX ## Code .................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code ................................................................................................. 16-183
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-184
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-184
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 16-185
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.2 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 16-186
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.3 Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-188
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-190
16.4.5 Switch ................................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................ 16-194
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.7 PCBs ................................................................................................................................................... 16-195
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-195
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-196
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal ...................................................................................................................................... 16-198
Contents
16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 ......................................................................................................................... 16-198

16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ............................ 16-199
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and the Check
Pins by PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 16-199
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................... 16-200
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................... 16-201
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................ 16-201
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................ 16-202
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB .......................................................................................................................... 16-202
Chapter 16
16.1 Making lnitial Checks

16.1.1 Site Environment 0006-5663
Be sure of the following:

a. The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The power plug remains connected throughout day and night.
b. The site is not a high temperature/humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), and it is
not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
c. The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
d. The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
e. The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
f. The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
16.1.2 Checking the Paper 0006-5664
a. The paper is of a recommended type.

b. The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
16.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0006-5665
a. Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level.
b. If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
16.1.4 Checking the Durables 0006-5666
Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
16.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts 0006-5667
Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached
the time of replacement.
16.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks 0006-5668
[Reader Unit]
- Check the optical system (mirror, while plate, copyboard glass, reflecting plate) for damage and foreign matter.
- Check the mirror base to see that it moves smoothly and its rail is free of dirt.
- Check the scanning lamp to see it is free of flickering.
- Check the scanner cable to see that it is correctly routed.
- Check the scanner to see that it is free of condensation.
[Process System]
- Check to see that the toner container contains toner.
- Check to see that the drum unit is properly fitted.
- Check the photosensitive drum to see that it is free of damage and dirt.
16-1
Chapter 16
- Check the window of the SALT sensor to see if it is free of dirt.

[Transfer System]
- Check the secondary transfer unit to see that it is free of foreign matter.
- Check the ITB/secondary transfer external roller for wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the blade of the ITB cleaning unit for tear, peeling, deformation, and stray toner.
[Fixing System]
- Check the fixing roller/pressure roller for wear, tear, and deformation.
- Check the fixing heater (main/sub) to see that it operates when power is turned on.
- Check the fixing thermistor to see that it is free of an open circuit.
- Check the thermal switch to see that there is electrical continuity.
[Paper Feeding System]
- Check to see if there is residual paper or other foreign matter.
- Check to see if there is a buildup of paper lint on the pickup, feeding, and separation rollers. Check the rollers for
wear, tear, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the pre-registration roller, registration roller (upper/lower), and paper path roller for wear, tear, and dirt, and
deformation.
- Check the feeding guide for wear, tear, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and absorption of moisture.
- Check the paper and/or transparency to see if it is a recommended type. If not, try a recommended type to see if the
symptom in question still occurs.
[Mechanical System]
- Check to see if the load of the drive system is excessive.
- Check the gears for wear and tear (chipping).
[Cassettes]
- Check to see if the cassettes are properly fitted. Check to see if the paper size is correctly set. Try replacing with a
normal cassette to see if the symptom in question still occurs.
- Check to see that the holding plate of the cassette moves smoothly and that it is free of deformation.
- Check to see that the side guide plate and the rear guide plate of the cassette are fitted correctly.
- Check to see if the switch of the cassette heater is turned on (if the machine is equipped with a cassette heater).
[Service Mode]
- Check to see if the various CCD adjustment values are as indicated on the service label.
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check to see if the machine executes registration adjustment.
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST/ADJ-REFE)
- Check to see if the machine correctly detects the internal temperature/humidity.
(COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP/ABS-HUM)
- Check to see if the image read position is correctly adjusted.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y/ADJ-Z)
- Check to see if the paper reference value data is correct.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CST-ADJ)
- Check to see that the value of ADJUST/OPTION is as indicated on the service label.
- Check to see if 'error clear' has been initialized.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
[General]
16-2
Chapter 16
- Is the power plug properly connected?

- Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet?
- Are the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operating normally? Are the connectors free of poor contact?
(Be sure to check the routes of power and signals by referring to the general circuit diagram.)
- Has the leakage breaker or the circuit breaker gone ON?
- Is there biting of a wire or a loose screw?
- Are all eternal covers attached properly?
- Are the main power switch and the control panel power switch ON?
- Are the power cable and the signal cable to all accessories routed correctly?
- Does the cover switch operate normally?
- Is the fuse on each PCB blown?
- Is the user aware of the correct use of the machine?
16.1.7 Others 0006-5670
If a machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur inside it, leading to various problems:
a. condensation on the BD sensor can cause problems associated with E110.
b. condensation on the LDE lens can cause image in sub scanning direction to be too light.
c. condensation on the mirror of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause images to be too light.
d. condensation on the pickup or feeder guide can cause paper feeding faults.
If any of the foregoing (a through c) occurs, use the following service mode to correct it
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>DRY-RT
Use it to eliminate condensation at time of installation work.
If d has occurred, dry wipe the pickup and feeder units.

Moreover, the toner container and the drum unit can also develop condensation if it is brought in from a cold to warm
place (unpacked). To prevent condensation, advise the user to leave them alone for 1 to 2 hours before unpacking
them at the site.
As necessary after installation, use the following service mode
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLPOFF01 to SLPOFF12
Use it to disable sleep mode.
16-3
Chapter 16
16.2 Test Print

16.2.1 Outline 0006-5673
The machine offers 6 types of test prints (TYPE), enabling identification of a fault in images with reference to test
prints.
If a fault appearing on a normal print does not show on a test print, the cause may be assumed to be on the PDL input
side or the reader unit side.
16.2.2 Test Print TYPE 0006-5686
T-16-1
TYPE NO. Description
0 normal copy/print
1 to 3 - (for R&D)
4 16 gradations
5 full halftone
6 grid
7 to 9 - (for R&D)
10 MCYBk horizontal stripe (sub scanning direction)
11 - (for R&D)
12 64 gradations
13 - (for R&D)
14 full color 16 gradations
15 to 100 - (for R&D)
16.2.3 Selecting a Test Print TYPE 0006-5694
1) Set the print count and paper size.

2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>FG.
3) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE.
4) Using the keypad, enter the desired TYPE No., and press the OK key.
5) Using 'COLOR-Y/M/C/K', select the desired color (output at '1').
6) Using 'DENS-Y/M/C/K', set the desired density. (valid only for TYPE=5)
7) Press the Start key.
16-4
Chapter 16
16.2.4 Gradations (TYPE=4) 0006-5696
Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, or uneven density at the front/rear.
a. Gradation
If the reproduction of 16 gradations is not as expected, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system.
b. Fogging
If fogging is limited to the white area of the following illustration, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser
exposure unit.
c. Vertical White Lines/Black Lines
If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system.
d. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer unit.
16 gradations
F-16-1
16.2.5 Full Halftone (TYPE=5) 0006-5698
Use this test print to check transfer failure, black lines, white lines, or irregular intervals.
MEMO:
1. You can select a specific color to develop in user mode using 'COLORY/M/C/K' in service mode
(COPIER>TEST>PG).
2. If you want to change the density of the test print, use the following in service mode: TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K.
a. Transfer Failure
If transfer failure occurs, suspect a fault in the transfer (intermediate/secondary) unit.
b. Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum drive unit, drum ITB
motor, or drum unit.
c. Uneven Density in Vertical Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect dirt on the LDE lens, a fault in the drum unit, or
deterioration of the intermediate transfer belt.
16-5
Chapter 16
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-16-2
16.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) 0006-5700
Use this test print to check color displacement, right angle, or straight line.
a. Color Displacement
If color displacement occurs, suspect a fault in any of the laser exposure system, transfer (intermediate/secondary)
unit, or photosensitive drum drive unit.
b. Right Angle, Straight Line
If right angles or straight lines are faulty, suspect a fault in the laser exposure system, registration
(upper/lower) roller, or secondary external roller (i.e., the shape of the rollers).
F-16-3
16-6
Chapter 16
16.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripe (TYPE=10) 0006-5702
Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines in
relation to development.
a. Solid Density of Colors and Balance Among Colors
- The density must not be appreciably low (light).
- If the density of a specific color is too low, suspect a fault in the developer, primary transfer roller, laser exposure
system, or high-voltage system used for that color.
b. White/Black Lines
If a white/black line occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit used for that color or dirt in the laser
optical path.
c. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer
(intermediate/secondary) unit.
If uneven density occurs for all colors, suspect deterioration of the intermediate transfer unit.
2.5±1.5 mm
2.0±1.5 mm
F-16-4
16-7
Chapter 16
16.2.8 Gradations (TYPE=12) 0006-5704
Use this test print to check the reproduction of gradation for all colors (YMCBk) at once.
F-16-5
16.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradations (TYPE=14) 0006-5705
Use this test print to check gray balance, the reproduction of gradation for individual colors (YMCBk), or fogging.
a. Gray Balance
Check to see if each color is reproduced at an even level of density in the gray scale area.
b. Gradation
Check the reproduction of gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for the difference, if any, in density.
c. Fogging
If fogging occurs in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum, or improper
adjustment of the laser exposure system.
Light area
White area White area
F-16-6
16-8
Chapter 16
16.3 Troubleshooting
16.3.1 Symptoms
16.3.1.1 Image Fault Case Studies (A4) 0000-5378
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A4 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
A. Image Fault Case Samples
1. Light Image in Middle
F-16-7
2. Toner Collection Along Image End
F-16-8
16-9
Chapter 16
3. Uneven Density at 44-mm Intervals
F-16-9
4. Uneven Density at Angle at 12-mm Intervals
F-16-10
5. Uneven Density in vertical direction
F-16-11
16-10
Chapter 16
6. Mottled Image
F-16-12
7. Flow image on Side
F-16-13
8. Toner Stray
F-16-14
16-11
Chapter 16
9. 47-mm Horizontal Line
F-16-15
10. 100-mm Horizontal Line
F-16-16
11. White Spot Along Trailing Edge
F-16-17
16-12
Chapter 16
12. Vertical Lines (Charging Roller)
F-16-18
13. Trace of Delivery Clip
F-16-19
14. Trace of Pickup Roller Along Leading Edge
F-16-20
16-13
Chapter 16
15. Trace of Pickup Roller
F-16-21
16.3.1.2 Image Fault Case Samples (A3) 0000-5379
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A3 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
1. White Spot on Edge
F-16-22
16-14
Chapter 16
2. 20 to 30-mm White Spot
F-16-23
3. White Spots Leading Edge
F-16-24
16-15
Chapter 16
4. Fine White Spot Near 30 mm of Trailing Edge
F-16-25
5. Line Along Trailing Edge
F-16-26
16-16
Chapter 16
6. Poor Parallel Reproduction Along Trailing Edge
F-16-27
7. Rub off Along Trailing Edge
F-16-28
16-17
Chapter 16
16.3.2 Image Faults
16.3.2.1 Blank Image
16.3.2.1.1 Blank page is output when printing scanned image 0004-0707

[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
Launch the file in question with 'Imaging' (selectable software by right-clicking) and print it. If the result is OK,
the application software is likely to be a cause, so check its settings.
16.3.2.2 Solid Image
16.3.2.2.1 Solid black image on prints and FAX RX documents 0005-6110

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG6-2854
16.3.2.3 Light Image / Weak Density
16.3.2.3.1 Density is light on paper corresponding to machine rear side: Occurs concurrently with
diagonal uneven density of 12mm intervals when continuously outputting high image duty
original 0002-3362
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This symptom occurs because toner replenishment cannot keep pace with toner consumption.
Field Remedy
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> SLV-UP], select "1" or "2".
Note: The drum life will be shortened as a negative effect of "1". In addition to this, the print productivity will
decrease as a negative effect of "2".
16.3.2.3.2 Density fluctuation: appreciable after outputting images of a high color ratio continuously 0002-3372
Cause
The balance in toner inside the developing assembly fails; when the image stabilization mechanism goes ON in
this condition, the machine tends to base its contrast potential on the existing condition. When the balance
between the toner and the carrier inside the developing assembly returns, the density fluctuates in relation to the
selected contrast potential.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction
16-18
Chapter 16
16.3.2.3.3 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when
continuously generating an image with a high color ratio 0002-3391
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light). It tends to occur simultaneously with uneven density in diagonal direction at intervals of 12 mm.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to'1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also
decrease.
16.3.2.3.4 Uneven gloss of 155mm width along the leading edge of the 1st print: when attempting to
print an image with a high color ratio on thick paper (209g or more and coated paper) 0002-3398
Symptom
Uneven gloss (about 155 mm) occurs along the leading edge of the 1st print when an image with a high color
ratio is printed on thick paper (209 g or more and coated paper).
Cause
There is an appreciable difference in temperature between the 1st rotation of the fixing roller and its 2nd and
subsequent rotations (with a peripheral length of 155 mm).
Field Remedy
If prints are made continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.If prints are made
continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.
16.3.2.3.5 Flow image along the edges of the sheet: after the machine has been left alone in a high
humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days) 0002-3411
Symptom
If the machine has been left alone in a high humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days), flow image can
occur along the edges of the sheet.
Cause
The chemical elements on the surface of the photosensitive drum absorbs moisture from the atmosphere, thus
decreasing the resistance on the surface of the drum.
16-19
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater (to keep the inside of the machine warm).
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
The symptom may disappear when several prints have been made on A3 paper.
16.3.2.3.6 Traces of delivery roller on thick paper (particularly, coated paper): When making copy
of high image duty original 0002-3503
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If thick paper (particularly, coated paper) is used on machines manufactured in the early stage of production (old
type of the delivery vertical path ass'y is installed), there might occur a difference in gloss between the area where
the delivery rollers come in contact and the other area, when the paper passes through the rollers, depending on
the paper in use and the toner duty of the original document.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the three parts listed below with a new one respectively.
2. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CTM-MARK], change the set value to "1".
Note: As a result of the setting change above, the paper delivery speed when the delivery vertical path ass'y is used
will be changed and thus the productivity might be affected. Therefore, be sure not to change it if the machine
operates normally.
FG6-9654 Delivery Vertical Path Ass'y
FG6-9655 Vertical Path Panel Ass'y
VS1-6318-003 Snap Tight Connector
16.3.2.3.7 Traces of pickup roller in Bk solid image printed on paper with a high moisture content 0002-3506
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur in Bk solid images printed on moist paper.
Cause
The moisture content of the area coming into contact with the pickup roller is low, showing a resistance higher
than the areas with a higher moisture content.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater and/or cassette internal sheet.
16.3.2.3.8 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when 0002-4598
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light) and, thereafter, the overall density tends to decrease.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
16-20
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
decrease.
16.3.2.3.9 Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or
A3 0002-4782
Symptom
Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or A3
Description
This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on the test print or printed images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the CCD unit was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Make a reduction copy, and if the portion of light image moves together with the image, replace the CCD unit
with a new one.
16-21
Chapter 16
F-16-29
16.3.2.3.10 Light image: appearing all over the page 0002-8528
Symptom
Light image: appearing all over the page
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
16-22
Chapter 16
F-16-30
16.3.2.3.11 Fine lines are not printed sharply when printing via UFR 0004-2919
Field Remedy
On the window of UFR printer properties, press 'Quality' tab and select 'Designs (CAD)' that appears under
'Objective'.
16.3.2.3.12 When executing UFR printing in monochrome, density of color area of original is too
light 0005-1894
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the setting changes on the printer driver improved the symptom.
Follow the steps below:

Click [Quality] tab> select [Designs (CAD)] under [Objective]> click [Details]> select [Pattern 1] under
[Halftones].
16-23
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4 Foggy Image
16.3.2.4.1 Ground color of cut-and-paste newspaper transferred to the copied image 0002-3252
Symptom
When you use a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original, the ground color of the newspaper remains on the
printed document.
Description
When you put newspaper on the whole copy board glass for an original, the ground color of the newspaper can
be suppressed with the AE Function.
Cause
The AE measurement fails, because the cut-and-paste newspaper is located outside of the AE measurement
coverage.
Spot Disposal
Expalin to the users that they should select 'Application Mode>Image adjustment> Ground Color Suppression'
to make a copy in using a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original.
16.3.2.4.2 Fogging on the entire Magenta image: as if it were combed with a brush 0002-3322
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a magenta wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the magenta drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-
2110-000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the magenta earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.3 Fogging appears on the entire image as if it were combed with brush: all colors affected 0002-3327
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the grounding pins of the drum unit door guide, which come in contact
with the grounding plates of each color's drum unit, were misaligned or soiled and finally had poor contact with the
grounding plate.
Field Remedy
Align or clean the grounding pin for the affected color in the drum unit door guide.
16-24
Chapter 16
F-16-31
16.3.2.4.4 Fogging appearing on the entire Black image as if it were combed with a brush 0002-3330
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a black wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the black drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-2110-
000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the black earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.5 Density fluctuation (increase): immediately after replacement of the drum unit in a high
humidity environment 0002-3368
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after replacement of the
drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after
replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase)
immediately after replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate
(increase) immediately after replacement of the drum unit.
16-25
Chapter 16
Cause
The developer is exposed to the moisture of the environment and, as a result, the charge on the toner decreases
to increase the density.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation adjustment>full correction.
16.3.2.4.6 Reverse fogging: appreciable when the drum unit has been in use for a long time in a low
Symptom
In a low humidity environment, reverse fogging tends to occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long
time.
Cause
The toner has deteriorated, thus not being able to take on adequate negative charge.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question.As a temporary measure, turn off and then on the main power
switch so that the formation of a sample image (for image stabilization control) will remove the faulty toner
from the drum.
16.3.2.4.7 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment 0002-3375
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, fogging occurs in Y areas if the machine has been left alone for a long time
(e.g., 2 days).
Cause
The toner (MCBk) charged to a positive potential and existing on the photosensitive drum is drawn to the Y
toner charged to a negative potential and existing on the ITB.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.8 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment 0002-3377
Symptom
Toner collection occurs along image end when the machine is left alone for a long time (e.g., 1 week).
16-26
Chapter 16
Cause
When the machine is left alone for a long time, the level of charge on the toner tends to decrease.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.9 Color shift/Uneven density (rough texture): when continuously generating an image with
low color ratio 0002-3406
Symptom
The hues are not appropriate or the density is not even when images with a low color ratio have been generated
continuously.
Cause
The toner inside the developing assembly has remained unconsumed without being stirred for a long time, thus
increasing the charge of the toner and, ultimately, causing re-transfer or mixing of colors.
Field Remedy
Set '1'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-PTH.
Adverse effect of setting it to'1' the life of the toner container will decrease.
16.3.2.4.10 Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored-area 0002-3590
Symptom
Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored-area
Description
This symptom appears only on copied images, not on printed ones.
Cause
Main Controller PCB Ass'y is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB Ass'y with a new one.
16.3.2.4.11 Light density at center of halftone image: appreciable after feeding transparencies in a
high humidity environment 0002-4638
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the middle of a halftone image tends to become low in density after passage of
a transparency.
Cause
The coating agent on the surface of the transparency sticks to the ITB, making transfer of toner from the ITB to
paper difficult.
16-27
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
16.3.2.4.12 Fogging on the entire Cyan and Yellow images 0003-2364

Description
This symptom does not appear on the test print.
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the CCD unit solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Try replacing the CCD unit with a new one. After replacement, be sure to execute CCD-ADJ in service mode.
16.3.2.4.13 Fogging on the entire Cyan image 0003-2390

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
Cause
There is a case in the field that unplugging/insertion of the connectors on the reader controller PCB solved the
problem.
Field Remedy
Unplug and insert the connectors J204, J205 and J206 on the reader controller PCB. If the problem is not solved,
replace the reader controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-32
16-28
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.14 Fogging on white area 0003-2700

Description
Fogging on white area
Cause
There is an actual case in the field that the symptom was solved by the following actions: unplugging/reinsertion
of the flat cables of the Interface PCB, replacement of the Interface PCB.
Field Remedy
Try unplugging/inserting the flat cables J307 and J308 on the Interface PCB. If the symptom is still not solved,
try replacing the Interface PCB with a new one.
16.3.2.4.15 Fogging in Magenta appearing on entire image 0003-3077

Description
Cause
Field Remedy
At first, output a test print to check whether fogging does not appear on the entire image. Next, unplug and
insert the connectors J204 and J205 on the reader controller PCB. If the symptom still appears, replace the CCD
unit with a new one.
F-16-33
16-29
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.16 86mm-wide fogging in sub scanning direction 0003-8743

Description
This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on a test print or printed images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Execute 'CCD0ADJ' and 'SH-PS-ST' in service mode [COPIER>Function>CCD].
2. If the symptom still recurs, replace the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB with a new one in this order.
3. If the symptom still recurs, this indicates that the reader unit is normal. Replace the DDI-S board with a new
one.
4. If the symptom still recurs, this indicates that the interface between the reader unit and the printer unit is
normal. Replace the main controller PCB (sub) with a new one.
CCD unit:FM2-0023
READER CONTROLLER:FG3-2570
SUB CONTROLLER:FG3-3129
F-16-34
16-30
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.17 Fogging: after upgrading System Software to Ver.9.05 0003-8768

[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
On System Software Ver.9.05, the gradation adjustment was improved. When upgrading it from Ver.8.04 and
earlier to Ver.9.05 and later, be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after upgrading.
16.3.2.4.18 Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper 0004-2926

Field Remedy
Press [Special Features>Image Quality Adjustment>Remove Background].
If the symptom still recurs, press [Fine Adjustment] that appears by the side of 'Remove Background' key to
adjust the density of the background you want to remove. Adjusting it to the direction of 'minus' will lighten
the background.
16.3.2.4.19 Fogging in Magenta as if noise had occurred 0004-9715

Field Remedy
It is possible that the flexible cables inside the CCD unit (two cables are aligned at the back of the CCD unit)
are not securely fitted. Make sure that they are securely fitted.
F-16-35
16-31
Chapter 16
F-16-36
16.3.2.4.20 Fogging in Magenta appearing at position corresponding to machine front side, during
continuous copying 0004-9720
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by adjusting the auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment). So, execute it in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment> Full
Adjustment].
16.3.2.4.21 Fogging under low humidity environment 0004-9774

Field Remedy
Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01),
the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur under low
humidity environment.
This service mode switches a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment from -800V to
-850V. If fogging occurs under low humidity environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later. The current
setting can be checked in the service mode below.
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>LSUB-DWY/DWM/DWC]

0: -850V [Factory default/A setting value after RAM is cleared: 0]
1: -800V
16-32
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.22 Fogging with BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time 0004-9776
Field Remedy
Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01),
the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur with the
BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time.
This service mode switches the amount of toner in the BK developing assembly whose cartridge has been used
for a certain period of time. If fogging occurs under such environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later.
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>BKTC-DWN]

0: The amount of toner in the developing assembly: small [Factory default/A setting value after RAM is cleared:
0]
1: The amount of toner in the developing assembly: large
16.3.2.4.23 Adjustments to be executed upon occurrence of fogging (Addition of service mode

items) 0004-9782
Field Remedy
The service mode items below have newly been added to DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be
installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01) in order to ease fogging.
- Adjusting the upper limit of VD:

Service mode (level 2) [COPIER> Adjust> VCONT> VD-LIM-Y/M/C/K]
The smaller the set value is, the lesser the fogging becomes.
- Adjusting the amount of toner replenishment:

Service mode (level 2) [COPIER> Adjust> DENS> T-SPLY-Y/M/C/K]
The smaller the set value is, the lesser the fogging becomes.
- Enables to switch a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment (-800V to -850V):
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>LSUB-DWY/DWM/DWC]
- Enables to change the toner amount in the developing ass'y which has been used for a certain period of time:
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>BKTC-DWN]
16.3.2.4.24 Fogging during continuous duplex copying or printing 0004-9813

Field Remedy
During continuous duplex-copying or -printing the image in low density, it is likely to be fogging. This
symptom has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01 and
later.
16-33
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.25 Fogging in reddish purple appears on entire page, Message [Correctly place the test
print on the platen glass.] is displayed: No problem on print from computer and test print 0005-1922
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Reader Controller PCB was faulty. If this symptom occurs,
replace it with a new one.
Reader Controller PCB Ass'y: FG3-2564 (100V), FG3-2570 (120/220/240V)
F-16-37
16.3.2.4.26 Fogging in Cyan on entire page; no problem with test prints 0005-6106
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the flat cable connecting to J203 on
the Reader Controller PCB was not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert the flat cable of J203 once again.
16.3.2.4.27 Overall fogging with margins: Occurs only on black-and-white copies, no problem with
color copies and test prints 0006-4448
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the CCD unit was faulty.
Field Remedy
16-34
Chapter 16

1. Make sure that the interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is securely fitted.
2. Check whether this symptom was resolved by performing "CCD-ADJ" and "SH-PS-ST" in service mode
[COPIER> Function> CCD> CCD-ADJ, SH-PS-ST]. When selecting the item, the adjustment will start
automatically.
3. Make sure that the connectors between the CCD unit, the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB are
securely fitted.
4) If the symptom still recurs even after the Steps 1 through 3, replace the CCD unit with a new one.
After replacement of the CCD unit, enter the values (for color displacement correction in sub scanning direction)
indicated on the label attached to the unit in service mode [COPIER> Adjust> CCD> CCDU-RG, CCDU-GB].
CCD Unit: FM2-0023
F-16-38
16.3.2.5 Uneven Density
16.3.2.5.1 Uneven color around characters: when being printed on half-tone background in
combination with MacOS and QuarkXpress 0002-3290
Field Remedy
In the field, the setting change on Mac side improved the symptom. Select [Printer Functions> Halftone>
Resolution].
Description
When "Resolution" is selected for the Halftone setting, the reproductivity for halftone will be improved and thus
uneven color will be relieved.
16-35
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.2 Uneven density at about 6mm intervals in the sub scanning direction 0002-3292
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the secondary transfer roller was not properly installed at
the designated position.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the secondary transfer roller once again.
16.3.2.5.3 Uneven density at 44 mm intervals: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time 0002-3389
Symptom
Uneven density at an angle and at 12 mm intervals; tending to occur simultaneously with low density at the rear
or over the entire image when an original of a high color ratio is printed continuously.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, and soils it.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.
adverse effect of setting it to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
decrease.
16.3.2.5.4 Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are
generated in large volumes. 0002-3393
Symptom
Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are generated in large volumes.
Cause
Filming (white soiling) occurs on the surface of the photosensitive drum, affecting exposure.
Field Remedy
Be sure to refer to the instructions indicated on how to clean the photosensitive drum (dry wiping the
photosensitive drum of the color in question).
16.3.2.5.5 Uneven density at 0.8mm intervals 0002-3396
Symptom
Uneven density occurs at 0.8 mm intervals, tending to be noticeable in halftone images.
Cause
The rotation of the photosensitive drum drive gear is uneven.
16-36
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.5.6 Mottled image: when large numbers of prints are made daily and, the drum unit has been
in use for a long time 0002-3400
Cause
The toner in the developing assembly is caking into lumps.
Field Remedy
Clean the inside of the machine in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Cleaning inside Main Unit].
Note: It is recommended to execute the mode every 4000 prints or more, as a guide.
16.3.2.5.7 Uneven image (rough texture) in halftone images 0002-3404

Cause
The level of secondary transfer current is so high that the transfer efficiency decreases because of re-transfer.
Field Remedy
1. Clean the inside of the machine in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Cleaning inside Main Unit].
2. In service mode level 2 [COPIER> Adjust> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-
DUP], change the set value with extra care.
Note: As adverse effects of changing the setting, it is possible toner scattering or spots will worsen.
16.3.2.5.8 Uneven density (rough texture) in Bk solid images: in a high humidity environment 0002-3408
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, uneven density occurs in Bk solid images. (rough texture)
Cause
The level of secondary transfer current is too high, thus decreasing the transfer efficiency because of re-transfer.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction. Or, add a cassette
heater.
16.3.2.5.9 Toner scattering around image with a high color ration in a low humidity environment 0002-3413
Symptom
Toner stray tends to occur around an image with a high color ratio in a low humidity environment.
Cause
The level of the secondary transfer current is too low, thus failing to transfer the toner from the ITB.
16-37
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
With care, use the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/
TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: it can worsen white spots, transfer faults, or fogging (rough texture).
16.3.2.5.10 Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color 0002-8530
Symptom
Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
F-16-39
16-38
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.11 Uneven image of 47mm intervals in main scanning direction 0005-7242

Field Remedy
1. Output a test print to specify the color causing this symptom: in service mode [COPIER> Test>PG].
2. Replace the drum unit of the affected color.
3. If the symptom still recurs, it is possible that the drum drive unit is faulty. Replace the drum drive unit with
a new one.
Drum Drive Ass'y: FG6-8964
16.3.2.5.12 Coarse image or brushed image only on Cyan areas: Occurs on both copies and test
prints 0006-4447
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the DC Controller PCB (J117 and J118) and the Cyan
laser unit (J613, J614, and J616).
2. Swap the Cyan laser unit with a different color's and check the image once again. If the symptom occurs with
the different color, the laser unit is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one. If the symptom is not changed,
the DC Controller PCB is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
Laser Unit: FG6-8962
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
F-16-40
16-39
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6 Out of Focus
16.3.2.6.1 Torsion spring coming off or displaced: locating close to the back of the pattern reader
unit 0002-3218
Symptom
Printed image is displaced, because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the
pattern reader unit, has come off, or because the spring hook is not properly located.
Cause
Because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the pattern reader unit, has come
off, or because the spring hook is not properly located, the pattern reader unit is not fixed in the proper position
and is free, which displaces image output by laser, leading to the printed image displacement.
Items to Check
Remove the two screws on the right inside cover, and you can check whether a spring is attached to the pattern
reader unit. Remove the pattern reader unit, referring to the service manual, and you can check whether the
springs is properly located.
Field Remedy
Attach the spring FB6-3289-000.
16.3.2.6.2 Color displacement in sub scanning direction 0002-3498
Symptom
Color displacement occurs (several mm) in sub scanning direction.
Cause
Toner has stuck to the ITB drive roller, causing the ITB to slip against the ITB drive roller.
Field Remedy
Clean the ITB drive roller, tension roller, and secondary transfer internal roller.
16.3.2.6.3 Image misalignment in main scanning direction/Black is copied in green 0002-3578
Symptom
Image misalignment in main scanning direction/Black is copied in green
Cause
CCD unit is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
16-40
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.4 Registration failure of image on duplex side 0003-6292

[ Manual-related ]
Simptom
Registration failure of image on duplex side
Field Remedy
An adjustment for duplex side registration has been added with System software Ver.4.03. It can be made in
service mode [COPIER>Adjust>FEED-ADJ>REGIST2].
16.3.2.6.5 Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction 0003-6310
Simptom
Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction
Field Remedy
A solution against color registration failure of thick paper has been added with System software Ver.3.16. In
service mode level 2 [COPIER>Option>CLR-SHIFT], set it as '1' to activate the solution. Note that this will
decrease the productivity of thick paper to approx. one-third.
16.3.2.6.6 Color registration failure in sub scanning direction 0003-8593

Description
In the field, this symptom was solved by clearing RAM of the DC Controller PCB or replacement of the ITB unit.
Field Remedy
Perform the steps below in the order presented (they are listed in order of decreasing possibility):
1. Inspect whether the 42T gear in the ITB unit is broken or not. If a breakage is confirmed, replace it with a new one.
2. Clear RAM of the DC controller PCB in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON].
3. Replace the ITB unit with a new one.
4. Replace the ITB drive unit with a new one.
FU3-0266 42T Gear
FG6-8942 Inter Transfer Belt Ass'y
FG6-9663 ITB Drive Ass'y
16.3.2.6.7 Color registration failure in main scanning direction 0003-8749

Field Remedy
1. Check whether jam code 0105 was recorded in the jam history or E110-0110 was in the error log. If either of
them was recorded, inspect the fixing/feeder sensor flag to make sure that mylar is attached to it. If not, replace
the sensor flag with a new type.
2. If mylar is attached or the new type of the sensor flag has already been installed, clear DCON in service mode
[COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON].
3. If the symptom still recurs, swap the laser units for all colors.
FB6-3143-020 Fixing/Feeder Sensor Flag (New type as of June 15, 2004)
16-41
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.8 Color displaces approx. 3mm away from right position in sub scanning direction 0005-1908
Field Remedy
If the back side of the ITB soils after long usage, the ITB is not driven properly and each color displaced
approximately 3mm away from their right position.
If this symptom occurs, clean the back side of the ITB and the drive gears by following the instructions in the
attachment.
F-16-41
16.3.2.6.9 Blurred image in sub scanning direction 0005-4661

< Field Remedy >
If the host machine has been left for a long time in stand-by state or low-power mode state, the fixing roller may
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing blurred images in sub scanning direction. This symptom has been
corrected with the DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03). Thus, if
paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace the fixing
roller or the fixing ass'y.
A change that has been implemented is as follows:
Before change: Fixing roller will rotate in every 30 minutes in stand-by or low-power mode.
After change: Fixing roller will rotate in every 5 minutes in stand-by and in every 12 minutes in low-power
mode.
16-42
Chapter 16
Fixing Roller: FB6-3641

Fixing Ass'y: FG6-9069 (120V), FG6-9070 (220/240V)
16.3.2.6.10 Image is shifted in main scanning direction when printing via UFR, no problem on
copied or scanned images 0005-6104
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was
faulty.
Unplug and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.2.6.11 Abnormal images (image shift in main scanning direction, color void) when making pull
scan 0005-6128
< Field Remedy >
16.3.2.7 Partially Blank/Streaked
16.3.2.7.1 Black lines at 2mm intervals in main scanning direction 0002-1289
Symptom
Black lines at 2mm intervals in main scanning direction
Description
Once this symptom occurs, it keeps occurring continuously.
Cause
High voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) is faulty.
FieldRemedy
Replace the high voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-43
Chapter 16
F-16-42
16.3.2.7.2 White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear 0002-3291
Symptom
White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear
Cause
A ground is unstable because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of
the machine.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that a ground cannot be established because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the
secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine. Visually inspect the grounding plate for warpage.
Location of the grounding plate
16-44
Chapter 16
F-16-43
16.3.2.7.3 47mm horizontal line on full color image: when the amount of toner deposited on the
drum changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3419
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when full color
image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16-45
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.4 47mm horizontal line on Bk image: when the amount of toner deposited on the drum
changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3421
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when
monochrome image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set'1'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>BK-4CSW.
16.3.2.7.5 47-mm horizontal line at the leading edge of paper 0002-3423
Symptom
A 47-mm horizontal line occurs in the leading edge of paper.
Cause
A yellow pattern made in blank (for progress in image) has occurred uneven rotation of the drum and ultimately,
causing a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.7.6 An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the
drum axis. It is a 100-mm horizontal line. 0002-3426
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis. It is a 100-
mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the intermediate transfer belt, causing
uneven rotation of the belt and, ultimately a discrepancy in primary transfer.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>Y-PTN.adverse effect of setting it to '2'
the white area and the image on the paper tend to show a yellowish hue.
16-46
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.7 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print made
after generating several sheets of simplex print in a high humidity environment (e.g. for the first
time in the morning) 0002-3429
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the trailing edge of a halftone image on the 2nd side
of a double-sided print made after generating a single-sided print and turning on the power (e.g., for the first
time in the morning).
Cause
The fixing heat causes the moisture in the paper to evaporate, causing condensation on the delivery guide; if it
moves to the leading edge of the 1st side of a double-sided print, a transfer fault will occur along the trailing
edge of the 2nd side.
Field Remedy
Allow about 10 min between making a single-sided print and making a double-sided print so as to prevent
condensation on the delivery guide (thus the symptom).
16.3.2.7.8 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low
Symptom
A white spot occurs in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low humidity
environment.
Cause
The resistance of the secondary transfer external roller is too low, causing the voltage lower limit limiter to go
ON (the level of the secondary transfer current is too high)
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-
ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.adverse effect of changing the setting: toner can move astray, worsening
white spots.
16.3.2.7.9 White spots along the trailing edge: when feeding dry paper (e.g., freshly opened paper) 0002-3455
Symptom
White spots occur along the trailing edge when dry paper is used (e.g., fresh out of package).
Cause
When the trailing edge of paper moves past the nip area of the secondary transfer external roller, the current
flowing to the trailing edge of the paper is limited.
16-47
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Adjust the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-B.The symptom
maybe corrected when the trailing edge margin is increased by about 4 mm.
16.3.2.7.10 White spots (like small flower) along the leading edge: when feeding paper with high
resistance in a low humidity environment 0002-3457
Symptom
White spots (like small flower) occurs along the leading edge, where the resistance tends to be high in a low
Cause
A transfer fault occurs during secondary transfer (i.e., the level of the secondary transfer current is too high).
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-
ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
adverse effect of changing the setting: toner may move astray, worsening the occurrence of white spots.
16.3.2.7.11 A fine, white line around 30mm of the trailing edge on A3 paper 0002-3460
Cause
When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this
condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper jumps.
Field Remedy
Install the Spur (FG6-9649) to the ITB locking shaft. For the installation procedure, refer to Service Manual
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output has transfer faults/lines. >
Mounting the Spur (FG6-9649)].
16.3.2.7.12 White spots (mottled) 0002-3463
Symptom
White spots occur in images (mottled).
Cause
Paper lint sticks to paper from the pre-registration roller, causing a transfer fault during secondary transfer.
Field Remedy
Clean the clips (2 pc. above the pre-registration roller).
16-48
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.13 Lines along the trailing edge on A3 or larger paper 0002-3474

Cause
As paper is looped between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, an electrical discharge occurs
when its trailing edge leaves the intermediate transfer belt.
Field Remedy
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output is soiled/has lines. >
16.3.2.7.14 A single line in the drum axial direction on solid image 0002-3482
Symptom
A single line occurs in the drum axial direction when a solid image is generated.
Cause
The tube of the fixing roller was inadvertently given a crease during production.
Field Remedy
Replace both fixing roller and pressure roller; or, replace the fixing unit.
16.3.2.7.15 Traces of pickup roller along the leading edge of transparency when its source is
cassette. 0002-3504
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur along the leading edge of a transparency when the source of the transparency
is the cassette.
Cause
When a stack of transparencies is used, the leading edge of the bottom transparency is subjected to friction at
time of pickup, thus causing it to develop a scratch.
Field Remedy
Fan out the stack before placing it to correct the fault. Recommend the use of manual feeding.
16.3.2.7.16 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print in a
16-49
Chapter 16
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the edge of the paper in a halftone image on the 2nd
side of a double-sided print.
Cause
The paper is moist, and tends to become wavy after fixing on its 1st side; as a result, the wavy area prevents
proper transfer on the 2nd side and, ultimately, causes a white spot.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater, or recommend replacement of paper.
16.3.2.7.17 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a
low humidity environment 0002-4671
Symptom
A 20 to 30 mm white spot occurs along the trailing edge of prints made on A3 paper.
Cause
The paper arches between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, and discharge occurs when
the trailing edge of the paper leaves the intermediate transfer belt, leaving traces.
Field Remedy
Set '1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-SPD.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: parallel lines may fail to be parallel along the trailing edge.
16.3.2.7.18 White streaks at 10cm intervals in main scanning direction 0003-3073

Cause
There is a case in the field that a tip of teeth of the ITB drive gear (FU3-0354) was partially cracked, causing
this symptom.
Field Remedy
Inspect the teeth of the ITB drive gear (FU3-0354) for any cracks on the teeth. If any abnormalities are found,
replace the gear with a new one.
16-50
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.19 Void appearing at approx. 9.5mm from the edge (corresponding to machine's front side)
in sub scanning direction 0004-0688
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because grease was transferred to the secondary
transfer roller.
Field Remedy
1. It is possible that grease adheres to the surface of the secondary transfer roller. So, remove grease from the roller.
If it cannot be removed completely, replace the secondary transfer roller or the Secondary Transfer Ass'y with a new
one.
2. It is possible that excessive amount of grease has been applied to the lower registration roller. Inspect the affected
area and wipe grease off the roller if excessive amount of grease is confirmed. Refer to the attached files for the
location. In addition, make sure that grease does not adhere to the paper path between the lower registration roller
and the secondary transfer roller.
FB6-3131 Secondary Transfer Roller
FG6-8993 Secondary Transfer Ass'y
F-16-44
16-51
Chapter 16
F-16-45
16-52
Chapter 16
F-16-46
16.3.2.7.20 Black and yellow are not printed 0004-5068

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that replacement of the laser unit for BK (black) and Y (yellow) solved the problem.
Laser unit (common in colors): FG6-8962
16.3.2.7.21 40mm-wide void appearing at all four perimeters of paper 0004-9002

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that this symptom occurred because the set value in service mode
[COPIER>Adjust>BLANK-T/L/R/B] was 1000 (max). Check the set value with the machine you are servicing.
In addition, make sure that the other set values are proper.
16.3.2.7.22 Streaks appearing in sub scanning direction when making a copy of color and
monochrome originals at a time 0004-9761
Field Remedy
This problem has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01
and later.
16-53
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.23 Color voids at image lead edge when outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper 0004-9762
Field Remedy
When outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper under the measure for color displacement on thick paper activated in
service mode, color voids may occur at the image lead edge.
This symptom has been corrected with the System Ver.10.01, so upgrade it to Ver.10.01 and later if this
happens.
If the following service mode is set at [1], the measure for color displacement is activated: Service mode (level
2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CLR-SHIFT> 1].
16.3.2.7.24 PS-C1: When outputting data created with Illustrator on MacOS9.2.2, image is printed
partially 0004-9763
Field Remedy
When outputting the data created with Illustrator 8/9/10 on MacOS9.2.2, most of the image may lack.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked
16.3.2.8.1 Soiled image due to waste toner 0002-3602
Symptom
Soiled image due to waste toner
Cause
The gear at the rear side in the waste toner feed unit is missing. As the waste toner screw is not activated, waste
toner overflows without being delivered.
Field Remedy
Install the gear (25T Gear: FS7-0579) driving the waste toner screw.
16.3.2.8.2 Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF. 0002-1581
Symptom
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Description
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Field Remedy
By decreasing the value of the Parameter instructedbelow by 10 from factory setting, the reading possition will
16-54
Chapter 16
be moved 1mm toward the delivery (rear) side In service mode no 6 SCANNER>7.CCD>>Parameter 018(xxx)
If you implement the procedure above mentioned, the position is moved 1mm forward, and then increase the
following value by 10 from the factory setting so that the leading registration can be adjusted by 1mm. In service
mode NO 6 SCANNER>7 CCD>Parameter 024(xxx).
If damage appears on the image by implementing the process above, we suggest that you chaange those setting
to default setting.
16.3.2.8.3 Vertical streaks of charging roller: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time 0002-3465
Symptom
Vertical lines (charging roller) occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long time.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, thus soiling it.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question. (Generate a 16-gradation test pattern (TYPE=4) to identify the
color.
16.3.2.8.4 Vertical streaks 0002-3470
Symptom
Vertical lines occur.
Cause
The while plate/mirror of the reader unit is soiled. The copyboard glass is soiled with foreign matter.
Field Remedy
Clean the white plate/mirror with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
16.3.2.8.5 Back of paper soiled: first in the morning after generating a double-sided print of a
halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day 0002-3471
Symptom
The back of a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) is soiled after making a double-
sided print of a halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day.
Cause
The surface temperature of the fixing roller has grown too high causing toner to move from paper to the fixing
roller; the toner then moves to the surface of the pressure roller, soiling the back of the 1st print made for the
first time when the power is turned on the next time.
16-55
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
The symptom is limited to 120 mm along the leading edge of the 1st print (on the back; 120 mm being the
peripheral length of the pressure roller).
16.3.2.8.6 Black spots at 64mm intervals 0002-3483
Symptom
A black spot occurs (64 mm).
Cause
Foreign matter (non-conductive) exists on the secondary transfer internal roller.
Spot Disposal
Clean the secondary transfer internal roller.
16.3.2.8.7 Rubbing mark at trailing edge of A3 paper 0002-3525

Cause
When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this
condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper rubs against the ITB when it passes through the secondary transfer
external roller.
Field Remedy
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output is soiled/has lines. >
16.3.2.8.8 White lines at 1.5mm intervals in main scanning direction 0003-2383

Field Remedy
The similar kind of image can be output when the counterfeit-proof function works. There is no solution at this
moment. Adjust the document orientation or the scanning density.
16.3.2.8.9 Shade of original appears at lead edge of output image when making a copy by selecting
'Entire Image' 0003-2777
Cause
If one-by-one (direct) copy is selected, shade of the original will not appear on the output image because it
should be printed on the lead edge margin area. On the other hand, in the case of 'Entire Image' copy, the
original will be scaled down and the shade should be printed inside the lead edge margin area, appearing on the
output image.
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Adjust>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X], increase the set value so that the scanning start position
will be shifted backward and shade of the original will not appear. However, note that backward-shifting of the
scanning start position will widen the lead edge of original that is not printed on the output image.
16-56
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.10 Lines as if noise occurred appearing in sub scanning direction: when printing via UFR 0003-8737
Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was solved by replacement of the UFR board.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the UFR board. If the symptom still recurs, replace the UFR board with a new one.
F-16-47
16.3.2.8.11 35mm-wide lines in sub scanning direction appearing at a location corresponding to the
machine's rear side 0003-8742
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty. (In this inspection, the symptom
continuously occurred once it started; however, it did not always occur.)
Field Remedy
Try replacing the main controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-3129
16-57
Chapter 16
F-16-48
16.3.2.8.12 Fine lines appearing randomly in main scanning direction 0003-8791

Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB (sub) was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB (sub) with a new one.
SUB CONTROLLER BOARD Ass'y:FG3-3133
<Tips for identifying a failure part>

1. Whether the problem is caused by the reader unit or printer unit?
- Output a test print and check whether the image is abnormal.
Yes: problem in the printer unit
No: problem in the reader unit
2. Whether the test print has margins (lead, trail, right and left)?
Yes: no problem in high voltage output
No: problem in high voltage output
3. If fines lines appear at dot intervals, it is possible that the main controller PCB can be possibly faulty.
16-58
Chapter 16
F-16-49
16.3.2.8.13 Toner soiling 0004-0726

Description
This symptom is likely to occur during continuous outputting.
Field Remedy
1. If the soiling occurs with primary colors (YMCK), the drum unit is likely to be faulty. So, inspect the drum
unit.
2. If the soiling occurs with mixed colors, the ITB cleaning failure is likely to be a cause. So, inspect the ITB
cleaning unit.
16.3.2.8.14 Streaks appearing as if they had been caused by cleaning failure (with all four colors) 0004-9714
Field Remedy
It is possible that a symptom like this can occur because the secondary transfer roller is not securely fitted,
causing a leak. So, reinstall the secondary transfer roller securely.
16-59
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.15 Lines on entire image when making copy using preset zoom feature 0005-6129
< Field Remedy >
16.3.2.8.16 When printing via UFR, lines appear only on images that are pasted on document: no
problem with document containing texts only 0005-6180
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the UFR board was faulty. Remove and install it once again. If the
symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
UFR Board Ass'y: FG6-8983
16.3.2.8.17 Lines appear in main scanning direction on A4-sized copies, in sub scanning direction
on A3-sized copies 0005-9418
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was
faulty. So, unplug and reinsert the connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a
new one.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-2570
16.3.2.9 Ghost / Memory
16.3.2.9.1 Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately
10cm intervals 0002-1792
Symptom
Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately 10cm intervals
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following causes are found:
1. The degree of auxiliary charging is not appropriate because of a broken spring installed at the auxiliary brush
in the drum unit.
2. High voltage transformer PCB (FG6-9673) is faulty.
Field Remedy
1. If ghosting is accompanied by fogging as shown in Image1, replace the drum unit(s) of the color in which the
symptom appears.
2. If ghosting is NOT accompanied by fogging as shown in Image2, replace the high voltage transformer PCB
(FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-60
Chapter 16
Image1
F-16-50
Image2
F-16-51
16-61
Chapter 16
16.3.2.9.2 Drum positive ghost in halftone image: occurring after outputting solid images 0002-3486
Symptom
A drum positive ghost occurs in a halftone image after generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.9.3 Drum reverse ghost: on halftone image after outputting solid images and on solid image
after outputting images having larger areas of halftone 0002-3491
Symptom
A drum reverse ghost occurs in a solid image after generation of a halftone image or an image of white against
a black background following the generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>NEGA-GST.
16.3.2.9.4 Slipping ghost: after generating fine lines with a high color ratio 0002-3494
Symptom
A slipping ghost occurs after generation of fine lines with a high color ratio.
Cause
Toner remains on the photosensitive drum (from collection of toner to the developing assembly).
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction.
16.3.2.10 Poor Finxing
16.3.2.10.1 Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.) 0002-3545
Symptom
Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.)
Cause
16-62
Chapter 16
1. Because of chattering of the fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor, the DC controller PCB mistakenly
considers the fixing feeder unit to be slid out and starts the temperature control of the fixing unit at 0 degrees C.
2. Because of a software bug, the cooling fan does not rotate in the low power mode, which causes a heat
deformation of the fixing/feeder sensor flag. Accordingly, even after the fixing feeder unit is closed, chattering
occurs and a failure of the temperature control also occurs as in the case of '1'.
Field Remedy
1. Upgrade the system to Ver4.03 and the DCON to Ver6.02.
2. Attach a sheet of mylar to the fixing/feeder sensor flag.

* For the mylar, please contact a division handling this issue.
16.3.2.10.2 Poor fixing, Toner peel-off 0002-3257

Cause
Due to chattering of the fixing feeder open/close sensor, noise of 200msec or less is generated. This makes the DC
Controller PCB mistakenly consider the fixing feeder unit open and start the temperature control of the fixing unit at
0 degrees C.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the ROM of the DC controller to Ver.4.03.
16.3.2.10.3 Flap of envelope is glued after passing through machine 0003-8657

Field Remedy
If the flap of an envelope is glued in "Envelope" mode, make a copy or print in "Plain Paper" mode by following
the steps below:
a. For copy
Press [Paper Select> Stack Bypass> Irreg. Size> enter the envelope size> OK> Next> Plain Paper> OK], and load
the envelopes on the stack bypass.
b. For print
1. As in the case of copy, make the stack bypass settings.
2. Register the size of an envelope to be used into "Custom Paper Size" in the printer driver:
[Start> Settings> Printers> iRC3200> Properties> General> Printing Preference> Custom Paper Size> enter any
name (e.g. envelope) in Name of Custom Paper Size> enter the envelope size in Paper Size> Register> OK].
3. Select the registered paper in the printer driver and start to print:
[Print> iRC3200> Properties> Page Setup> select the registered paper in step 2 from Output Size> OK].
Note: The steps above enable envelopes to be fed at a normal speed. Accordingly, this symptom will not occur at
a high rate. However, if it still recurs, decrease the fixing temperature in service mode [COPIER> Option>
BODY> TEMP-TBL> set to "1" or "2"].
16.3.2.10.4 Poor fixing on postcard 0005-4289

[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
If this symptom occurs, check whether the set value in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> TEMP-TBL]
is set at [2] (to decrease fixing temperature by 10 degrees C). In such a case, change the set value to [0] (normal
fixing temperature).
16-63
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11 Faulty Color Reproduction
16.3.2.11.1 White area becomes gray when making a copy by selecting 'Nega/Posi' 0003-8641
Field Remedy
Color reproductivity for 'Nega/Posi' copy has been improved to the level of the previous models with System
software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.2.11.2 Faulty color reproduction 0003-2394

Description
Gray area is tinged with blue and cyan area is fogged with yellow.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the reader controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Unplug and insert the connectors J204, J205 and J206 on the reader controller PCB. If the problem is not solved,
replace the reader controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-52
16-64
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11.3 Color of output image is different from that of original: when thick paper is used 0003-2775
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Auto gradation adjustment has two different modes: for plain paper and for thick paper. If color reproductivity
is not stabilized with thick paper, execute auto gradation adjustment by selecting 'thick paper' mode.
16.3.2.11.4 Image is normal at 10cm area from image lead edge; however, right and left images
become interchanged on rearward area: paper size is A3 0004-9718
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the problem was solved by clearing the reader controller PCB's RAM. Turn the
power OFF/ON, and if the symptom still recurs, clear the reader controller PCB's RAM.
Before clearing the RAM, print the service mode setting values in service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-
P> P-PRINT] in order to enter them as necessary after clearing the RAM.
Clear of RCON RAM can be done in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> R-CON].
16.3.2.11.5 PS-C1: Running 'ColorCAL' degrades gradation quality 0004-9854

Field Remedy
The quality of gradation may be degraded by running 'ColorCAL', as compared with the previous.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens. Then, run 'ColorCAL' again.
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking
16.3.2.12.1 Image at trailing edge on 2nd side of A3 is distorted 0002-3500

Cause
Since the rotation speed of the fixing roller is faster relative to the secondary transfer external roller, it is possible the
image can be stretched depending on the condition.
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 [COPIER> Option> BODY> FX-SPD], set it to "-1".
As adverse effects of changing the setting, voids of 20mm-30mm long, image rubbing or voids along the trailing edge
could worsen. At that time, install the Spur (FG6-9657) to the ITB locking shaft. For the installation procedure,
refer to Service Manual [Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output has
color displacement. > Mounting the Spur (FG6-9657)].
16-65
Chapter 16
16.3.3 Faulty Feeding
16.3.3.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed
16.3.3.1.1 Multifeed of transparencies 0002-3527
Symptom
Multiple transparencies are moved at the same time.
Cause
The transparencies are attracted to each other by the work of static charge.
Field Remedy
Fan out the transparencies.
16.3.3.1.2 Multifeed (gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper) 0002-3532
Symptom
Multiple sheets of gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper are moved at the same time.
Cause
The bonding between sheets is too strong, causing the separation mechanism to fail.
Field Remedy
Recommend the use of the manual feed tray, feeding the sheets individually.Types of media in question: gloss
paper (coated), tracing paper, and thick paper.
16.3.3.2 Skew Feed
16.3.3.2.1 DADF-K1: Thin original is jammed 0003-8649

Cause
There is a case in the field that the occurrence ratio of thin original jams was decreased by activating the DADF silent
reading mode.
Field Remedy
Activate the DADF-K1 silent reading mode, which slows down the paper delivery speed. In service mode (level
2) [COPIER>Option>ACC>DF-MUTE], select '1'.
16-66
Chapter 16
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle
16.3.3.3.1 Paper wrinkle: when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette in a high
Symptom
Paper tends to wrinkle when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette at time of pickup in a high
Cause
The paper is likely to be moist, thus tending to become wavy.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette internal sheet.
16.3.3.3.2 Paper wrinkle 0005-4653

< Field Remedy >
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing paper to be wrinkled. This symptom has been corrected with the
DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03). Thus, if paper wrinkle
occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace the fixing roller or the
fixing ass'y.
mode.
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl
16.3.3.4.1 Jam of special postcard (such as double-sided postcard with adhesive inside) 0004-0701
Description
Because the double-sided portion swells out when it passes though the fixing unit.
Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by changing the fixing temperature control.
Field Remedy
Try changing the fixing temperature control in service mode [COPIER>Option>BODY>TEMP-TBL].
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-67
Chapter 16
16.3.3.5 Wrap
16.3.3.5.1 Paper separation failure at fuser: when generating an image with a high color ratio in a
Symptom
The leading edge of paper tends to resist separation in a high humidity environment and when the image has a
high color ratio.
Cause
The rigidity of paper is too low so that it tends to wrap around the fixing roller, preventing it from separating
from the roller at time of delivery.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater.
16.3.4 Malfunction
16.3.4.1 No Power
16.3.4.1.1 No power: Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power
lamp nor the control panel lights up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156) 0002-2493
Symptom
Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights
up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
DC power supply PCB failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J56 from the DC power supply PCB J156. If no, check
the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC supply,
replace the DC power supply PCB.
Field Remedy
DC Power Supply PCB Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-68
Chapter 16
16.3.4.1.2 Machine not booting up, LCD not lighting up: Even after three minutes have passed from
the power-ON, only the power lamp lights up, but not the LCD. (Output failure of the DC power
supply PCB J157) 0002-2501
Symptom
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
Items to Check
Field Remedy
16.3.4.1.3 When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if
the main unit operates normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization. 0002-2504
Symptom
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
Items to Check
16-69
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
16.3.4.1.4 PS-C1: Not start up while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying. iRC3200 Ver.9.05, PS-C1
Ver1.1.1 0005-3242
< Field Remedy >
Shut down the power of PS-C1 and iRC3200, and unplug the LAN cable connecting to network. Then, turn ON
the power of both devices.
a. If PS-C1 starts up normally
It is possible that the IP address for communication between PS-C1 and the user's LAN environment and the
one for communication between PS-C1 and iRC3200 might be identical. Download the patch file (1-
7RJ592.ps) into PS-C1 for a solution against overlap of IP addresses.
b. If PS-C1 does not start up normally while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying
Reinstall the system of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1 again. If the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) has already been downloaded,
follow the steps below:
1. After reinstalling the System of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1, shut down the power of PS-C1.
2. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], set at [0]. Then, shut down
and turn on the power of iRC3200.
3. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], se at [3]. Then, shut down the
power of iRC3200.
4. Turn on the power of PS-C1 and then iRC3200. After making sure that the both devices start up normally,
download the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) into PS-C1.
16.3.4.1.5 DADF-K1: iRC3200 does not start up while progress bar is stopping halfway, with
DADF-K1 installed 0005-6120
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Interface PCB: FM2-0036
16.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related
16.3.4.2.1 iRC3200 does not start up: After indication of message 'Starting up. Wait a moment.',
LCD alternates between black and blue 0002-3343
Cause
Due to faulty soldering of J1204 (for the Ethernet board) on the Main Controller PCB, a problem occurs with the
LCD during a power-on communication checking.
16-70
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
When this symptom occurs, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB
16.3.4.2.2 LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black 0002-3464
Symptom
LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black
Description
The main power indicator lights up and the machine starts the initial rotation.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the SDRAM on the main controller was found not to be fitted securely on the main
controller PCB.
Field Remedy
Check whether the SDRAM is securely fitted on the main controller PCB. If not, reinsert it securely.
16.3.4.2.3 LCD on control panel does not come on remaining black 0003-2353
Description
In the field, this symptom was solved by an insertion of the BootROM, the connector of the HDD, the Resolution
Switching Board and the SDRAM.
Field Remedy
Perform the steps below in the order presented. Note that there are relatively many cases that reinsertion of the
BootROM solved the problem in the field.
1. Remove and insert the BootROM.
2. Unplug and insert the connectors of the HDD.
3. Remove and insert the Resolution Switching Board.
4. Remove and insert the SDRAM. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SDRAM with a new one.
WA7-2645 SDRAM DIMM Ass'y
16.3.4.2.4 How to adjust touch position on LCD 0003-2404

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Function>PANEL>TOUCHCHK], press 'OK'. And press '+' indicated on the touch
panel at nine locations in sequence.
16-71
Chapter 16
16.3.4.2.5 'Send' screen does not appear although SEND board has been installed 0005-6116
< Field Remedy >
1. Make sure that [UI-SEND] is set to [1] in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-SEND].
2. Execute setup once again. In the middle of setup, if a message is displayed saying that the option has been
already installed, it means normal completion of setup. If it is not displayed, continue to setup.
3. Since this symptom occurred in the field because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty, remove and reinstall
it once again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.4.2.6 Control panel switch (ON/OFF key) does not work although control panel is replaced 0005-6133
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom was solved by unplugging/reinserting the cable that connects the Main Controller
PCB (Sub) to the control panel CPU PCB. Unplug and reinsert the connectors J1304 on the Main Controller
PCB and J1221 that connects to the control panel CPU PCB.
16.3.4.2.7 Streaks appear at intervals of 2cm; recurs after replacement of control panel 0005-9419
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was
faulty. If the symptom still recurs even after replacement of the control panel, replace the Main Controller PCB
(Sub) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FG3-2855
16.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction
16.3.4.3.1 Card Reader-D1: Counter does not increment after executing PWD-CLR, although
copying is possible 0005-6119
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When executing PWD-CLR in service mode, it is necessary to set up the card reader once again. In service
mode [COPIER> Function>INSTALL>CARD], enter [1] and then start up the host machine again.
16.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection
16.3.4.4.1 'Close the front cover' is indicated 0002-1876
Symptom
'Close the front cover' is indicated
16-72
Chapter 16
Cause
Static noise would be happened if optinal cassette unit and iR1600 are not connected well to ground. It causes
bad communication between optinal cassette unit and iR1600, then iR1600 stopps paper feeding.'Close the front
cover' message would be indicated when paper jam happen caused by reason above, the message will be
indicated though jammed paper is removed and front cover is closed.
Field Remedy
Fix the grounding plate of optinal cassette unit located on the rear side of the iR1600 by binding screw with
washer.
16.3.4.4.2 Document detection failure of DADF-K1: Open/close of DADF-K1 not detected 0002-3026
Symptom
Installed DADF-K1 but the feeder open/ close detection is not working, so documents cannot be detected.
Cause
During installation, the cover plate had not been fitted to the reader upper assembly cover, so the open/close
sensor could not switch ON/ OFF.
Field Remedy
Attach the cover plate.
16.3.4.4.3 Service mode [COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>HDD] not completed for two hours 0002-3262
Symptom
When service mode > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > HDD is run, the operation is still not finished two
hours later.
Cause
Even though this service mode was not being run, service mode was being displayed.
Field Remedy
Alternative service modes are as follows.
When service mode level 1 > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE is set to '0' and run, a check and
recovery is run on the whole hard disk.
[Service mode display problem]

When the main unit system software is upgraded to Ver. ?? service mode level 1 > COPIER > Function >
SYSTEM > HDD is deleted.
16-73
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.4 Host machine reboots when "Reservation copies can be made." message is displayed on
LCD: FAX unit is installed 0002-3467
Description
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON].
If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
Note: Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD.
FG3-2856 SRAM Board PCB Ass'y
16.3.4.4.5 Host machine locks up with message "Starting up. Please wait." 0002-8527
Cause
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Check whether E719-0000 was recorded in ERR of service mode. If it was, it is possible the SRAM Board PCB is
faulty. Accordingly, make sure that it is properly installed. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board
PCB with a new one.
Description
In this case, the machine locked up when the progress bar which appears at start up reached at the end. E719-0000
was recorded in the error log; however, there was no indication on the LCD. E719-0000 is an error code occurring
when the coin vendor cannot be detected. The machine, in this case, is not equipped with a coin vendor.
16.3.4.4.6 Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key 0002-8532
Symptom
Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key
Description
This symptom occurs after the FAX board was installed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that reinstallation of the FAX board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the FAX board.
16.3.4.4.7 Half of image is missing when A3-sized original is copied 0003-8605

Description
Image is copied only in the half of page (A4 size).
16-74
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Initialize 'Copy Settings'. In user mode [Copy Settings>Initialize Copy Settings], select 'Yes'.
16.3.4.4.8 Machine rebooting or hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) upon release of FAX line 0003-8643
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier
than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.9 Machine hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) during auto gradation adjustment (full
correction) 0003-8645
Field Remedy
16.3.4.4.10 Set values in service mode (level 2) [COPIER>Adjust>COLOR (to adjust color balance
for each level of density)] return to '0' after power OFF/ON0Ç…ñ?ÇÈ 0003-8652
Field Remedy
This symptom was corrected with System software Ver.9.05. Upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.11 Machine rebooting upon completion of broadcasting 0004-0628

Description
This symptom can occur upon outputting Send TX Report with the image after broadcasting to more than 50
destinations has been completed.
Field Remedy
16.3.4.4.12 PS-C1: Setup Information of PS-C1 disappears on rare occasions 0004-9870

Field Remedy
The setup information of PS-C1 can disappear on rare occasions. This symptom has been corrected with the
PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later.
16.3.4.4.13 iRC3200 displays Mailbox window on touch panel, not Copy, after startup is completed 0005-6102
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug
and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16-75
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.14 iRC3200 reboots repeatedly after FAX board is installed 0005-6103

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was
faulty. If this symptom does not recur without it, replace the Main Controller PCB (Sub) with a new one.
16.3.4.4.15 iRC3200 locks up while displaying 'Copying' even when pressing Start key 0005-6122
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.4.4.16 iRC3200 shuts down and reboots unintentionally during FAX transmission 0005-6160
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and install it once
again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.4.4.17 iRC3200 reboots unintentionally: USB Interface Board is installed 0005-6161

Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the USB interface board was faulty. Install the board once again.
If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
(Note that the USB interface board is not assigned as a service part.)
16.3.4.4.18 When making copy, iRC3200 goes back to ready state and fails to output paper after
scanning: FAX Board is installed 0005-6163
Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom did not occur without the original FAX board but recurred when installing other FAX
board. It was found in the field that the DC fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the
DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
DC Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
16.3.4.4.19 iRC3220 reboots when progress bar reaches right end and it almost starts up following
power-on upon installation 0008-1577
Description
The captioned symptom occurred because the connector J308 on the Reader Controller PCB in the reader unit.
16-76
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Check the connection of J308 on the Reader Controller PCB. If poor contact is found, reinsert it once again.
FG3-2570 Reader Controller PCB
16.3.4.5 Noise
16.3.4.5.1 Abnormal noise from DADF-K1 0003-8608

Cause
There is a case in the field that noise was heard from the drive unit of the ADF transfer belt because the belt was
held under a strong tension.
Field Remedy
Slightly decrease the tension of the ADF transfer belt. Shifting the position of the stoppers at the front and the
rear can adjust the tension.
16.3.4.5.2 DADF-K1 Continuous scanning sound is noisy: How to set DADF silent scanning mode 0003-8648
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 [COIPIER>Option>ACC>DF-MUTE], set at '1' to activate the DADF silent reading
mode. However, the speed of scanning the originals will slow down from 750mm/s to 420mm/s.
16.3.4.5.3 Abnormal noise when paper is picked up from Cassette 0005-3237

< Field Remedy >
It is possible that abnormal noise might occur at the time of paper separation. Although the level of noise is
within the specification, replace the separation roller with the one (FB5-0873) used in the Multi Feed Ass'y, if
the customer complaints it.
16.3.4.5.4 PS-C1: Fan is noisy 0005-4286

< Field Remedy >
The fan has been changed to a low-noise type. When changing the fan, install nylon snaps (4 pieces per one
fan) together.
Fan (low-noise type): FH9-0803
Nylon Snap: FH9-0802
16-77
Chapter 16
16.3.4.5.5 Abnormal noise from fixing ass'y 0005-4657

< Field Remedy >
be deformed due to its nip pressure, causing abnormal noise from the fixing ass'y during printing. This symptom
has been corrected with the DCON Ver.11.02 (software of DCON to be used together with System Ver.11.03).
Thus, if paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller, upgrade the DCON to Ver.11.02 as well as replace
the fixing roller or the fixing ass'y.
mode.
16.3.4.5.6 Abnormal noise from fixing exhaust fan (FM2): Because delivery cooling fan cable 0008-1578
Description
The cable was connected to the delivery cooling fan in order to prevent the internal delivery roller from being
deformed by heat; however, abnormal noise was heard from the fixing exhaust fan or the cable was cut because
the cable was not fixed into the two cable cramps and interfered with the fixing exhaust fan.
Field Remedy
Inspect the cable to check whether it is fixed with two cable cramps securely. And, if you pull out the cable for
any service work, be sure to fix it with the cable cramps after the work.
FG3-3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable
16.3.4.6 User Warning Message
16.3.4.6.1 Indication of message 'Replace the toner container.' 0002-1879
Symptom
Indication of message 'Replace the toner container.'
Cause
There is a possibility that the waste toner container moves a little during operational vibration because of its
backlash, leading to misdetection.
Field Remedy
Clean the upper part of the waste toner container and a pair of waste toner sensors (light-emitting and receiving).
As a factory measure, a small part has been attached to the back of the front cover in order to hold the waste
toner container.
16-78
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.2 Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed. 0002-1883
Symptom
Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed.
Field Remedy
Although a specific cause has not been determined, try turning the power OFF/ON.
FYI
1) Status line = 'Waiting', Dialog = 'Waiting':
The above are displayed when the job cannot be started for some reasons during the waiting status.
2) Status line = 'Preparing', Dialog = 'Waiting':

The above are displayed when the job cannot be started because the previous job is being in operation.
16.3.4.6.3 'Check network settings' not disappearing: even by swithcing 'Auto Detect' OFF in user
mode [System Settings>Network Settings>Ethernet Driver Settings] 0002-2523
Symptom
In user mode > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings, 'Auto Detect' is switched OFF
but a message 'Check network settings' cannot turn off.
Cause
This is a specification of this product.
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > NWERR-SW, change the value from '1' to '0' and turn the power
OFF/ON.
0: Not display, 1: Display [Factory setting value/ post-RAM clear value]
16.3.4.6.4 How to indicate the timing when the drum should be changed. 0002-2538
Symptom
Want to show the timing when the drum should be changed.
Cause
The default settings (in service mode) of this product is as follows: Whether the degree of wear of the
photosensitive drum is displayed or not --> not displayed, whether the drum unit is suspended when it has
reached to the drum life --> not suspended. In other words, there is no indication available to encourage the
user to change the drum unit.
16-79
Chapter 16
Items to Check
The drum life can be checked in the following service mode.
Service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > Y, M, C, K-DRM-LF
Drum unit life (Y/M/C/K ) appropriate range is 0 to 100.
Field Remedy
The default settings can be changed according to the following service mode:
*Service mode level 1 COPIER > OPTION > BODY >DLIFE-SW
Whether or not the degree of wear of the photosensitive drum is displayed.
0: not displayed [factory setting/post-RAM clear value)]
1: displayed (the degree of wear of the drum unit is displayed on user screen under 'System status' >
'Consumables'.
*Service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > USER > P-CRG-LF
Whether or not the drum unit is suspended when it has reached to the drum life.
0: not suspended [factory setting/post-RAM clear value]
1: suspended
(Method 1) DLIFE-SW '1', P-CRG-LF '1'
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, a warning is given at 90% and a message 'Replace drum (all
colors)' is shown at 100% and the machine will be suspended.
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, when the drum life reaches 100%, the error lamp flashes red and the machine will be
suspended.
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine
will not be suspended and still can be used.
(Method 4) DLIFE-SW '0', P-CRG-LF '0' (default settings)
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine will not be suspended and still
can be used.
16.3.4.6.5 When an arbitrary paper size is programmed in user mode [Common Settings>Stack
Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper sizes cannot be copied from the manual feed
tray. 0002-3350
Symptom
When an arbitrary paper size is programmed into user mode > common spec. settings > manual feed paper
standard mote registration, different sized paper is set in the manual feed tray and copies cannot be made.
Cause
If you register optional paper size in " User Mode> Common Specification Setting > Standard Mode
Registration for Manual Feed Paper", you can make a copy only on the registered size paper through manual
feeding. This is specified on this machine.
16-80
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
If you want to use paper of several sizes on manual feeding tray, explain to your users that they should not select
the "Standard Mode for Manual Feed Paper" in User Mode.
16.3.4.6.6 Message 'Close the front cover.' keeps displaying 0003-2348

Description
This message does not disappear even after replacement of the front cover open/close switch.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the front cover open/closed sensor (PS23) of the door switch unit was faulty.
Field Remedy
Whether the front cover is open or close is detected by the front cover open/closed sensor (PS23), not by the
front cover open/close switch.
In service mode [COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>P05>bit11], check the operation of the sensor. If a problem is found,
replace the front cover open/closed sensor (FH7-7312) with a new one.
16.3.4.6.7 Indication of paper size that has been registered as Stack Bypass Standard Settings
disappears by removing paper from manual tray 0003-8639
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05 so that the registered paper size keeps
displaying although no paper is loaded in the manual tray. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than
Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.6.8 When attempting to use Remote UI, 'RUI Model Version 0902' message appears on a
computer display and unable to access host machine 0004-0721
Description
System Version: Ver.9.05
RUI: Ver.4.02
Cause
This symptom is caused by a mismatch in versions between System and Remote UI.
Field Remedy
Upgrade Remote UI to Ver.9.03.
16.3.4.6.9 Message 'Replace the waste toner container.' is displayed even after addition of sponge to
fix the waste toner container 0004-9851
Field Remedy
happens.
16-81
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.10 Machine locking up/hanging up/nonoperational with message 'Adjusting gradation.

Please wait a moment.' 0004-9853
Field Remedy
When the front cover is opened during quick correction/full correction/at-rest gradation control, a message
'Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment.' keeps displaying in the next job.
happens.
16.3.4.6.11 When installing Send Kit, message 'Protect Key Device is not connected.' is displayed 0005-1900
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Protect Key Device Driver is not installed. Double-click [hdd32.exe] in [iR Series Send
System Setup Tool] and install [Protect Key Device Driver] by following the instructions on the monitor. Then,
execute the setup.
16.3.4.6.12 #853 User Error Code during printing 0005-3252

[ Manual-related ]
< Cause >
If the host machine stops printing because of no paper or no toner remaining, or if the speed of data input is
faster than the one of data processing (e.g. a large volume of print job is sent to the host machine), the area of
spooling on network will become full and communication clogging occur. As a result, a timeout occurs on the
computer and #853 is displayed without a completion of the job.
< Field Remedy >
1. Make sure that the host machine does not stop for any reasons such as no paper or no toner.
2. Enable network spooling function in user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Use Spooler> On] so
that it will become faster to release the computer that sends the job from network environment.
16.3.4.6.13 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax. No programs can
process the file attachment.' is printed out with text of received I-Fax 0005-4587
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This symptom can occur when the files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not
compatible with this machine. In that case, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files,
but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message above is printed out with the text of the
received I-fax.
For your information, iRC3200 I-Fax can support only TIFF format (MH, MR, MMR).
16.3.4.6.14 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission 0005-6092
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
#899 can be displayed when the e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent; however, it is unknown whether or
not reception has been complete because transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
16-82
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.15 Message 'Insert drum cartridge. (color)' is displayed 0005-6127

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Memory PCB was faulty. If the message does not disappear
even after the drum unit is replaced, replace the Memory PCB with a new one.
Memory PCB: FG3-2345
16.3.4.6.16 When attempting to access iRC3200 via Remote UI, message 'User information is
invalid' is displayed 0005-6207
It is impossible that the above message will be displayed when the privacy preference setting is set to 'High'.
Try changing the privacy preference setting to 'Medium'.
In the Internet Explorer's case, click [Tool]> [Internet Option]> [Privacy].
16.3.4.6.17 #802 when attempting to send e-mail 0004-0694

[ Manual-related ]
Description
This error can occur when the host machine cannot connect to SMTP server and DNS server because of wrong
settings of SMTP server and DNS server name.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the settings of SMTP server or NDS server for e-mail/I-fax are wrong. Check the settings:
SMTP server settings:

In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>E-mail/I-Fax>SMTP Server]
DNS settings:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>TCP/IP Settings>DNS Server Settings]
16.3.4.7 Other Defect
16.3.4.7.1 Pick up roller of ADF-J1 remains down 0002-1574
Symptom
Pick up roller of ADF-J1 remains down
Cause
It is caused by faulty spring clutch which should be locked as pick up roller is raised.
Field Remedy
Replace spring clutch. Part number is FG3-3485-000
16-83
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.2 Flaming or Blanking inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, the function
[Special Features>Area Designation>Pen Entry>Flaming or Blanking] is inoperative. 0002-2517
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, the following feature is not available: Special Features > Area Designation
> Pen Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Cause
This is a specification of this product. However, the following feature is available: Special Features > Area
Designation > Numeric Key Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.3 [Two-page Separation] is inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, [Special
Features>Two-page Separation] is inoperative. 0002-2520
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, Special Features > Two-page Separation is not available.
Cause
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.4 When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only
'Device' can be seen. When the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'U 0002-2533
Symptom
When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only 'Device' can be seen. When
the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'User mode', he is prompted to enter 'User name' and
'Password', and the items cannot be viewed.
Symptom
This is a specification of this product. Please refer to 'SpotDisposal' for more information.
Field Remedy
When the card reader C1/D1 is installed or 'Dept. ID Management' is activated in user mode, the following items
cannot be viewed: 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' in service mode, and information related to print
volume and billing through the remote UI.. 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' which are registered
in user mode should be entered into 'User name' and 'Password', respectively. Then, all the items can be viewed
through the remote UI.
16-84
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.5 Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation 0002-2656
Symptom
Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation
Field Remedy
The installation procedures for the Card Reader-D1 is that the lowest number of the cards that are to be used
should be entered in service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>CARD], and then the power is turned OFF/
ON.
DO NOT turn the power OFF until the entered number is displayed on the LCD (it will take 5 to 10 seconds).
It is possible that a mismatch in the data of SDRAM will occur and the machine will not start up with a message
'Starting up. Please wait.'.
16.3.4.7.6 Paper stacking failure: when outputting media of low rigidity in a high humidity
environment 0002-3536
Symptom
The medium tends to wave or curl if stacking is poor, as when the medium is of high rigidity and used in a high
Cause
The medium absorbs moisture, and tends to curl appreciably downward.
Field Remedy
Set'1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-FAN
16.3.4.7.7 Control key not working 0003-2739

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>KEY], set it at '1'.
16.3.4.7.8 PS-C1: Calibration cannot be performed 0003-3070

[Case in the field]
Cause
There is an actual case in the field that activating 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown IDs' solved the problem.
Field Remedy
If 'Dept. ID Management' is activated, calibration cannot be performed with 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown
IDs' is set at 'Off'. So, select 'ON' for 'Accept Scan Job with Unknown IDs' and then perform calibration.
16-85
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.9 Even after installing send kit, 'SEND' tab is not displayed on LCD 0004-0681
Description
Installation of the send kit has been successfully completed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by reinstalling the Resolution Switching Board.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Resolution Switching Board is not properly recognized. So, try reinstalling it. If the
symptom is not corrected, replace it with a new one.
16.3.4.7.10 Unable to format or install HDD 0004-0719

[ Manual-related ]
Description
SST Ver.1.41 is used.
Field Remedy
The version of the SST which is applicable to iRC3200 is Ver.1.63 and later. Upgrade the SST to Ver.1.63 and
later.
16.3.4.7.11 #705 0004-0733

[ Manual-related ]
Cause
The data size of image that is being sent is larger than that specified in 'Maximum Data Size for Sending'.
Field Remedy
Change the maximum data size for sending: in user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/
I-Fax Settings>Maximum Data Seize for Sending].
16.3.4.7.12 Air bubbles are generated on surface of glossy paper 0004-2974

Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by changing the fixing temperature control.
Field Remedy
1. Select 'Glossy Paper' that appears under 'Special Paper Types' for stack bypass paper selection.
2. If air bubbles are still generated, try changing the fixing temperature control in service mode
[COPIER>Option>BODY>TEMP-TBL].
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-86
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.13 PS-C1: Screen does not change while 'Please Wait' screen keeps displaying 0004-9713
Field Remedy
When 'Please Wait' screen appears, it does not change until pressing Close button. This symptom has been
corrected with a combination of the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1 and iRC3200 system Ver.10.01 so that the next
screen will automatically appear without pressing Close button.
16.3.4.7.14 PS-C1: Not start up after turning power of host machine OFF/ON 0004-9849
Field Remedy
If only the host machine is turned OFF/ON, it is possible that the system of PS-C1 does not start up normally.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if this
happens.
16.3.4.7.15 PS-C1: Machine locking up (hanging up/nonoperational) after forcibly outputting paper 0004-9850
Field Remedy
After a paper size error occurs during printing, if the job is forcibly output through an operation on the host
machine control panel, PS-C1 can lock up. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1,
so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this happens.
16.3.4.7.16 PS-C1: PS error when outputting image prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9 0004-9859
Field Remedy
When attempting to output the binary mode image file prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9, PS error might
occur. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if
this happens.
16.3.4.7.17 Reader unit does not operate after startup 0005-6112

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the flat cables between the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface
PCB were not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert it.
Interface PCB: J307, J308
Reader Controller PCB: J202, J203
16.3.4.7.18 FAX board cannot be detected even although it is replaced 0005-6132

< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the
connectors (particularly J1309 and J1336) on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16-87
Chapter 16
16.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment
16.3.4.8.1 DADF-K1 does not start to pick up originals 0005-6114

< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the 14T gear (FS7-0478) in the
separation drive unit was faulty. Inspect it to make sure that there is no abnormality such as breakage. If so,
replace it with a new one.
14T Gear: FS7-0478
16.3.5 Printing/scanning
16.3.5.1 No Output
16.3.5.1.1 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation 0002-3598
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
16.3.5.1.2 Unable to print 0002-8534
Symptom
Unable to print
Description
A print job can be sent from a PC, and PING also worked fine.
Field Remedy
If the setting in user mode [System Settings>Dept. ID Management>Accept Jobs With Unknown ID] is set at
'OFF', the same symptom will occur. Change it to 'ON'.
16.3.5.1.3 Unable to print from Windows98-equipped computer 0003-2342

Description
This machine is used as a UFR printer. Any print jobs from a WindowsMe-equipped computer is acceptable.
Field Remedy
Disable 'bidirectional' of spool setting in the printer driver and try it again.
16-88
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.4 Machine locking up when attempting to output massive size of data: machine is
configured as a UFR printer 0003-2360
Description
This symptom occurred with a 3.7MB PDF file.
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the UFR board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the printer driver to the latest version. If the problem is not still solved, try replacing the UFR board
with a new one.
16.3.5.1.5 PS-C1: Hanging up during continuous scanning 0003-2779

Cause
When FieryScan is kept running, the data will remain inside memory without being released (memory full).
This will cause PS-C1 to hang up.
Field Remedy
Install a patch file '1-8XS7M'.
[Installation Procedure]
1. Launch Fiery Downloader and set the connection type to PS-C1 as 'Direct queue'.
2. Download the patch file to PS-C1.
3. After at least 60 seconds, reboot PS-C1.
4. Press 'Extension' button on the LCD of iRC3200 and select the printer. When the LCD indicates [Idle], reboot
PS-C1 again.
5. After PS-C1 reboots, output [Configuration Page] and make sure that [Update Information] indicates [1-
8XS7M].
16.3.5.1.6 Unable to output via UFR with 'Processing' indication 0003-8581

Cause
There is a case in the field that initialization of the printer solved the problem.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Utility>Reset Printer], initialize the printer.
16.3.5.1.7 PS-C1: Unable to print 0003-8636

Description
This symptom can occur because of a communication error between the host machine and PS-C1.
Field Remedy
16-89
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.8 Unable to output attached file in e-mail sent from computer to iRC3200 0004-0658
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
A file attached to an e-mail from a computer to iRC3200 should be: A4, monochrome, resolution 200x200dpi
and TIFF format. If not, it will result in an error.
Note that there is no limitation when an e-mail is sent from iRC3200 to a computer.
16.3.5.1.9 Machine locking up when attempting to print during sleep mode 0004-0723
Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected after the setting of energy consumption in sleep
mode was set at 'High'.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode], set it 'High'.
16.3.5.1.10 When attempting to print document selected with Envelope and stored in Inbox, unable
to print with message 'The paper type cannot be used with this mode.' 0004-2929
Field Remedy
If 'Envelope' is selected for the paper type, the finisher mode cannot be set. (The finisher mode is set by default.)
So, cancel the finisher mode and make a print. Refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-9.
16.3.5.1.11 Unable to print with message 'Suspended' 0004-9731

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by replacement of the UFR board. Remove and
install the UFR board, and if the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
UFR Board Ass'y: FG6-8983
16.3.5.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to print Text file attached to body of email when attempting to print
using E-mail client, resulting in PDL error 0004-9760
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text file attached to the body of the email cannot be printed.
16.3.5.1.13 PS-C1: Unable to print texts in body of email when attempting to print using E-mail
client 0004-9771
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text in the body of the email cannot be printed. For more details, refer
to the Printing Guide on page 8-3.
16-90
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.14 Second sheet and later are not output during LPR printing 0005-4294
< Field Remedy >
As a temporary solution, do not launch Norton Firewall so that printing can be made properly.
As a permanent solution, update the file by executing LiveUpdate of Norton Firewall.
16.3.5.1.15 iRC3200 keeps displaying 'Processing' and does not print any data from computer 0005-6101
< Field Remedy >
16.3.5.1.16 When printing via UFR, iRC3200 locks up (becomes unoperational) with 'Waiting to
print' after outputting documents, unable to cancelé~Ç‡ÇÝÇ´Ç»Ç¢ 0005-6218
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.5.1.17 When printing through UFR, host machine halts with message 'Canceling' 0005-6596
< Field Remedy >
When the print job reaches the upper impression limit that has been specified using [Dept. ID Management]
feature, the host machine may halt with a message 'Canceling'. This symptom has been corrected with the UFR
Ver.1.02, so upgrade the UFR driver applicable to your computer's operating system to Ver.1.02 and later when
it occurs.
For your information, a temporary solution is to enable [Print After Completing RIP] in user mode [Printer
Settings> Settings> Print After Completing RIP> On]. (This process is not necessary when UFR is upgraded
to Ver.1.02 and later.)
16.3.5.2 Installation Failure
16.3.5.2.1 Unable to install UFR printer driver on Windows NT4.0 0003-2330

[ Manual-related ]
Cause
Field Remedy
UFR is applicable only with the following OSs: Win98/Me/2000/XP. WinNT is not supported.
16-91
Chapter 16
16.3.5.2.2 Color Network Scan Gear cannot be installed 0003-2790

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If a computer is Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, log in by [Administrator] and install the color network scan gear.
16.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result
16.3.5.3.1 Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF 0002-1577
Symptom
Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF
Description
When documents are set on the ADF and scanned under auto duplex mode, the pages of a PDF file get out of
order.
Cause
This is a specification limitation of Adobe Acrobat 5.x.
Field Remedy
Set the scanning settings on Acrobat at 'Simplex'.
16.3.5.3.2 Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10.x. 0002-1850
Symptom
Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10.x.
Description
Even when a file containing multiple pages are printed in duplex mode, it is output in simplex.
Field Remedy
Save the file in a form of Illustrator9.0 compatibility and print it in duplex mode from Illustrator9.x.
16-92
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.3 Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed 0002-1859
Symptom
Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed
Field Remedy
PS-C1 is applicable only with MN-CONT Ver.6.02 and later.
The setup menu can be displayed in the following procedure:

In service mode [COPIER>Option>INT-FACE>IMG-CONT], change from '0' to '3'. Then, press the button
'Expansion' on the control panel so that the setup menu will be displayed. Make settings for Server, Network
and Printer in this order and store the settings in each step.
16.3.5.3.4 Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions. 0002-1892
Symptom
Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions.
Description
This symptom concerns only Japanese fonts.
16.3.5.3.5 Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4 0002-3563
Symptom
Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4
Cause
Fiery Scan3.4 does not support iRC3200.
Field Remedy
If a scanning is done with iRC3200 PS-C1, install Fiery RemoteStan5 which is contained in a CD supplied with
iRC3200 PS-C1.
16.3.5.3.6 Unable to transfer scanned image to Windows XP Home-equipped PC 0003-2327

Field Remedy
If a Windows XP Home-equipped PC is used, right-click on the shared folder and select [Sharing/Security >
Sharing tab], and place a checkmark on the following:
'Sharing on the network'
'Share this folder on the network within security'
'Allow network users to change my files'
It is unnecessary to make the above settings for Windows XP Pro.
16-93
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.7 How to set image density scanned by network scan 0003-2386

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings>Gamma Value for Remote Scans], select a desired value. The default is
Gamma 1.8.
16.3.5.3.8 Output order is retrograde when making a copy from DF after 'Tray B' has been
designated as a delivery tray for copy 0003-2402
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This is the specification of this product.
Field Remedy
If the side delivery tray (referred to as 'Tray B') is designated as a delivery tray for copy in a state of none of the
finisher products being installed, the back-side up delivery function becomes ineffective. This means that the
printed paper will be delivered right-side up and the output order will be retrograde against the original.
16.3.5.3.9 How to adjust image density when printing via UFR 0003-2781
[Manual-related]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Settings>Image Quality>Density], adjust the density of each color.
16.3.5.3.10 PS-C1: Color around texts is different from background when outputting data of Quark
Xpress (for Mac4.1) 0004-0645
Field Remedy
Check the settings for printerfont on Mac side. If there are any fonts on which a check mark is not placed for
'Font exists', place the check mark on all the fonts.
16.3.5.3.11 When merging multiple documents in inbox, print settings for individual documents
become ineffective 0004-0696
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If you combine multiple documents and print them as one document, they are printed using the Standard Local
Print settings in stead of the individual settings of the respective documents. When the print is completed, the
individual settings become effective again.
For the detail of merging documents, refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-28. For the standard local print settings,
refer to Reference Guide on page 4-48.
16.3.5.3.12 Document stored in Inbox from computer cannot be printed in monochrome 0004-2954
Field Remedy
A document stored in Inbox from a computer cannot be printed in monochrome mode. Refer to Mail Box Guide
on page 5-25 for more details.
16-94
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.13 PS-C1: When outputting to Direct queue on MacOS, halftone setting specified on
Illustrator not reflected on actual printing 0004-9765
Field Remedy
When outputting to Direct queue, the halftone setting specified on Illustrator may not be reflected to the actual
printing but changed to the default setting.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.5.3.14 PS-C1: When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, it is printed by
Simplex 0004-9789
Field Remedy
When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, the job can be printed by Simplex depending on the
size. The supported size is [182 - 457.2] x [105 - 305]mm.
16.3.5.3.15 PS-C1: 11x17-sized paper is not output in proper direction when attempting to output
LTR and 11x17 simultaneously 0004-9865
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Select 'Large Paper Only' for [Rotate 180] in Print Options. For more details, refer to Appendix A: Print Options
in the Printing Guide.
How to set for Windows:

1. On you application, select [Print].
2. Click [Property].
3. Click [Fiery Print] tab.
4. From the print option bar, select [Rotate 180> Large Paper Only].
16.3.5.3.16 Color of output image is different from that shown on computer monitor when printing
via UFR: Windows2000 or XP-equipped PC is used 0005-3351
< Field Remedy >
On the window of UFR printer driver properties, click [Quality] tab> [Manual Color Settings]> [Color
Settings], and select [ICM Mode] for Matching Mode and [Perceptual (Monitor Color Matched)] for Matching
Method.
16-95
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.17 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when printing multiple sheets of
MS Excel data 0005-4584
< Field Remedy >
In order to print multiple sheets of MS Excel data with some special features (e.g. duplex mode, specifying a
particular paper source), it is necessary to make those settings for every sheet. Before printing, make the
appropriate settings in [Properties] of the printer driver for every sheet.
16.3.5.3.18 When printing three-page document (PDF in this case) via UFR, 1st page is misaligned
and iRC3200 locks up with 'Waiting to print' indication during printing 3rd page 0005-6179
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.5.3.19 PS-C1: Image data attached to document becomes mirror image 0003-8610
Description
This symptom can occur in the combination below:
Operating System: Windows 98/Me
Application Software: Word2000
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with a patch file '1-9C5YH'. Install it at the time of its occurrence.
16.3.5.3.20 To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver 0002-5425
Symptom
To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver
Overview
Select a color profile when you select ICM Mode for the Matching Mode in the Color Settings dialog.
Cause
There are two tab sheets for ICM controls on the driver. Without properly setting the relevant controls, you cannot
get the print results as desired.
Field Remedy
Field Countermeasure
Take the following steps for setting a color profile.
1. Open the Color Management tab sheet in the Properties for the printer.
2. Select Manual radio button.
Note: When Automatic is selected, the printer driver automatically selects the printer profile that matches the printer.
When Manual is selected, the color profile selected in the Color Profiles list box is used for printing.
3. If the list does not have the desired profile, click Add button, select the desired profile, and click Add button to
add the profile in the list.
16-96
Chapter 16
4. Select a profile from the list and click Set As Default button.
5. Click OK button to close the properties.
Then, select ICM Mode from the Matching Mode list box on the Matching tab sheet in the Color Settings dialog and
submit the job to the printer.
Remarks
Note that selecting improper profiles may cause undesirable print results.
ICC
F-16-53
16-97
Chapter 16
ICM
F-16-54
16.3.5.3.21 To Set Custom Paper Size 0002-5432

Symptom
Overview
This document shows how to set custom pager sizes.
Cause
For each driver version, you have to open different dialogs to reach to the Custom Paper Size Setting dialog. It is
not easy to find the dialog.
Field Remedy
On the Properties Dialog that Features Custom Paper Size Button
Select Start > Settings > Printers and open the Properties for the printer for setting custom paper size.
To Open Printer Properties
Click Printing Preferences button on General tab sheet.
General Tab Sheet
16-98
Chapter 16
PrinterPropaties
F-16-55
Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet.

Page Setup Tab Sheet
Page Setup
F-16-56
16-99
Chapter 16
Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet.

Page Setup Tab Sheet
Custom Paper Size Settings
F-16-57
16-100
Chapter 16
Select the defined paper size from the Output Size dropdown list box on the Page Setup tab sheet.
Output Size
(Fig)
OutPutSize
F-16-58
16-101
Chapter 16
On Device Settings tab sheet, click Form to Tray Assignment button.

Select Stack Bypass from Paper Source list and the defined paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box.
(Fig)
Device Settings
F-16-59
16-102
Chapter 16
On the Properties Dialog without Custom Paper Size Button

No Custom Paper Size Button!
(Fig)
No Custom Paper Size Button
F-16-60
16-103
Chapter 16
Select Start > Settings > Printers and select the printer for setting custom paper size. On the menu bar in Printers
window, select File > Server Properties.
Server Properties
(Fig)
Server Propaties
F-16-61
16-104
Chapter 16
On Form tab sheet, select the Create a New Form option. Enter an appropriate name in the Form Description text
box. Under Measurements, enter appropriate values for Paper Size and Printer Area Margins fields.
Notes:
For setting Paper Size and Printer Area Margins, enter values within the range specified for the printer. The printer
driver does not show the custom paper sizes with values that exceed the specified range.
Enter 5 mm or larger values for the margins.
In Form to Tray Assignment dialog, select Stack Bypass from the Paper Source list and the defined paper size from
the Paper Size dropdown list box.
(Fig)
Create a new form
F-16-62
16-105
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.22 Printing Does Not Restart after Making up Paper 0002-5438

Symptom
Overview
The conditions to reproduce the problem are:
After making up, leave the printer for about 3 to 25 minutes before it restarts printing.
On Windows 2000 with SP1, SP2, and SP3. It does not occur on Windows 2000 without service pack.
With Standard TCP/IP (RAW) Port
Cause
The host does not send SNMP for several minutes, holding the spooler status in error. As a result, the printer does
not print for several minutes.
Field Remedy
In Properties dialog for the printer, select Ports tab and click Configure Port button to open the Configure Port dialog.
Then change either or both of the settings shows below.
Setting 1: Change the Protocol from RAW to LPR.
Setting 2: Turn off the SNMP Status Enabled option.
Remarks
If the LPR is used for protocol, transmitted data is not buffered in the NIC so that the symptom does not occur.
SNMP OFF
F-16-63
16-106
Chapter 16
16.3.6 Network
16.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure
16.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other
functions 0005-6123
< Field Remedy >
It is possible that [SNMP Settings] and [Enable Dedicated Port] are set to 'Off'. If so, change them to 'On'.
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP
to obtain information, set it to 'On'.
[Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer
driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.
16.3.6.2 Connection Problem
16.3.6.2.1 Facsimile mark is occasionally displayed at lower-left corner of LCD, message 'POP
server connection error' is displayed 0004-0729
Description
This symptom can occur when the host machine has been configured to receive e-mail or I-fax via POP server.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the host machine is not properly connected to the POP server. Check the connection settings
of POP server:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>E-mail/I-Fax], check [POP Server], [POP Address] and
[POP Password].
16.3.6.2.2 To Hide Check TCP/IP Connection Message 0002-5440

Symptom
Overview
This document shows how to hide the Check TCP/IP Connection message even when the network cable is connected.
Cause
When the driver cannot detect the TCP/IP, it displays the message for warning.
Field Remedy
Countermeasure 1: In Service Mode LEVEL2, select > COPY > OPTION > BODY > NWERR-S. Then change the
NWERR-SW from 1 to 0. The switch turns on and off the network error display.
Countermeasure 2: Select Add Function > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings. Then
click Off button for Auto Detect.
16-107
Chapter 16
16.3.6.2.3 Printing Is Not Performed after Long Time Sleep 0002-5442

Symptom
Overview
Printing is not performed after a log time sleep when the network uses 10/100 Base hubs.
Cause
While iR C3200 is sleeping, it cannot communicate with the hub. The network board in the printer cannot detect the
hub's transfer rate properly.
Field Remedy
Select Off button for Auto Detect, Full Duplex button for Communication Mode, and 100 Base-TX button for
Ethernet Type in the Ethernet Driver Settings dialog.
If transfer rate can be changed in the hub, change the setting for the port connected to the printer from the automatic
option to 100 M of fixed rate option.
Ethernet Driver Settings
F-16-64
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related
16.3.7.1 Transmission Problem
16.3.7.1.1 ##796 displaying at FAX transmission 0002-1848
Symptom
##796 displaying at FAX transmission
Field Remedy
This error is related to ECM.
Try to make 'ECM TX' invalid or replace the FAX board.
16-108
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.2 ##765 only with a specific destination 0002-1955
Symptom
##765 only with a specific destination
Description
The result is the same even by dialing the fax number on numerical keys.
Field Remedy
Change the following settings as below:
1. Transmission speed: 9600 bps
2. Echo protect tone in high speed transmission (SW03-1): Send
3. Bit output from DIS signal bit 33 onward (SW05-3): Prohibit
4. Protocol signals final flag sequences (SW04-2): 2
16.3.7.1.3 E674-0001: When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard
and no transmission can be made. Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history. (Output
failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to SymptomExplanation> 0002-2506
Symptom
When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard and no transmission can be made.
Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history. (Output failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to
SymptomExplanation>
Description
There was no indication that this problem had occurred as far as the following were checked: 'Sending Job
Status', 'Receiving Job Status' and 'Job History'.
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the Super G3 Fax board PCB J560 from the fuse PCB J61. If no, check
the output of J61 on the fuse PCB.
2) If there is no DC output from the fuse PCB J61, check whether DC is input into the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57
and J58 from the DC power supply PCB. If DC is supplied from the DC power supply PCB, the fuse PCB is
likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
Fuse PCB Ass'y Part No. FG3-2337-000
16-109
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.4 Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at
receiving side 0002-4750
Symptom
Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at receiving side
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-65
16-110
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.5 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side 0003-2300

Field Remedy
Make the sender information smaller or change the printing position of the transmission terminal ID.
[How to make sender information smaller]

In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIAL-B>SW28], change bit6 to '1'.
[How to change TX transmission terminal ID position]

In user mode [Communications Settings>Common Settings>TX Settings>TX Terminal
ID>On>Option>Printing Position], select 'Inside'.
16.3.7.1.6 Message 'Data exceeds available size.' is displayed at iFAX transmission 0003-2334
Cause
It is possible that the data size of the document exceeds the upper limit specified in user mode.
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-FAX Settings>Maximum Data Size For
Sending], try increasing the data size.
16.3.7.1.7 Density of FAX-sent document is light 0003-2338

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning>Exposure Recalibration>Send (B & W)], make it darker.
16.3.7.1.8 Documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes are sent in a file after selecting all documents
(pressing 'Select All') 0003-8603
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When attempting to send all documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes by pressing 'Select All', they will be sent
in a file, not in a separate file if MTIFF or PDF is selected as a file type.
In order to send the documents in a separate file, select 'TIFF' or 'JPEG' as a file type.
16.3.7.1.9 Unable to send documents by e-mail 0003-8762

[ Manual-related ]
Description
This symptom can occur if the subject of that e-mail is blank.
Field Remedy
For the security purposes, e-mails cannot be sent with its subject being blank depending on network
environments.
In user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-Fax Settings] check whether the field of
'Default Subject' is not blank. ('Attached Image' is entered by default.)
16-111
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.10 Transmission error sometimes occurring when sending I-Fax 0004-2921

Description
E-mail transmission results in successfully.
Field Remedy
If the data size of the document to be sent exceeds the upper limit, a transmission error occurs when being sent
as an I-Fax. (The documents will be sent by dividing into multiple mails when being sent as an e-mail.)
Change the upper limit of the transmission data size:

Sending]
16.3.7.1.11 E-mail is sometimes sent by dividing into multiple mails 0004-2923

[ Manual-related ]
Cause
Field Remedy
If the data size of the document to be sent exceeds the upper limit, the documents will be sent by dividing into
multiple mails when being sent as an e-mail.
Change the upper limit of the transmission data size:

Sending]
16.3.7.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to download PDF files from FieryDownloader with Direct connection 0004-9712
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. When attempting to download PDF files with Direct connection, the print
job will be spooled to the Print queue and then printed. If the Print queue is not enabled, the job is spooled to
the Hold queue and must be released for printing by the operator.
For more details, refer to the Printing Guide on page 4-5.
16.3.7.1.13 PS-C1: Unable to send Booklet job to BOX 0004-9792

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. When sending a booklet job to a BOX, it is canceled.
16-112
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.14 Message like 'Check the settings for the server.' is displayed when attempting to send
push scan to computer; push scan to Inbox is available 0004-9847
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If push scan to any Inboxes can be sent, the Resolution Switching Board and the sending function operate
normally. So, check the settings for the file server on the network. Refer to the Network Guide, on page 3-46
for FTP server, and on page 5-16 for configuration of the shared folder for Windows.
How to send push scan to any Inboxes:

Place a document> Press [Send] tab> Press [Store in User Inbox]> Select any Inbox> Press [Start] key
16.3.7.1.15 Unable to send scanned documents stored in Inbox 0004-9875

[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. If the document you are attempting to send is [Scan Doc.] or [Print Doc.],
it is impossible. If you want to send them, store the document as [System Doc.] in the Inbox by following the
steps below:
Place a document> Press [Send] tab> Press [Store in User Inbox]> Select any Inbox> Press [Start] key
16.3.7.1.16 E-mail cannot be sent: Field of e-mail address of iRC3200 is blank 0005-4293
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
E-mail cannot be sent if the e-mail address of iRC3200 is not registered. Register the e-mail address in user
mode [System Settings> Network Settings> E-mail/I-Fax> E-mail Address].
16.3.7.1.17 iRC3200 displays 'Too many jobs are specified.' upon FAX TX, with Resolution Switch
PCB installed 0005-6107
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Replace it with a new one.
16.3.7.1.18 When attempting to send FAX, iRC3200 does not dial destination's number after
scanning 0005-6176
Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom recurred even after installing other Fax board. It was found in the field that the DC
fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs,
replace the PCB with a new one.
16-113
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.19 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit) 0007-4511
Description
If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to
the "Send" screen (this is not a proper procedure), the machine has to start up the entry screen of the fax number
and cannot accept any entry of the numerical keys in a fraction of a second because of software constraints. This
is to prevent any operational error even if some key operations are done during transition of the screens. In this
failure case, one digit of the fax number was not entered because the operator pressed the number during the
affected period of time.
Field Remedy
According to the proper procedure, press the "Fax" key after switching to the "Send" screen, and then enter the fax
number using the numerical keys. Or, enter the number slowly after making sure that the screen has been switched.
For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using
the New Address Tab> Specifying a Fax Number].
16.3.7.1.20 Address Book List Cannot Be Selected 0002-5500

Symptom
Address Book List Cannot Be Selected
Overview
When registering the Address Book for the Fax driver, users of the Users group cannot select Address Book List on
Windows XP in NTFS drive.
Cause
Users of the Users group for Windows do not have the privilege to access the Address Book file.
Field Remedy
To edit the Address Book, the user must have the privilege for the Power Users or higher group.
Remarks
In FAT32 drives, users who have the privilege lower than the Power Users can edit the Address Book.
16.3.7.1.21 End Code # 899 0002-5498

Symptom
Overview
Question
Sending a mail from iR C3200 to the mail server of the provider results in End Code # 899. What does the End Code
mean?
Answer
The chapter 12 in the Sending Guide has descriptions for this code, as shown below.
Cause
The iR C3200 has successfully sent out the email or ifax from the SMTP server, but cannot confirm that it has arrived
16-114
Chapter 16
the recipient server because it would be relayed via multiple servers.

Remedy 1: Confirm that the recipient has received it.
Remedy 2: Check if you have received an error notification.
Cause
The # 899 proves that the iR C3200 itself has sent the mail successfully.
In the Simple mode for iFax or email, iR C3200 is responsible for sending out data from its SMTP server but is not
responsible for tracing further transmission pathway to the recipient's mail server. Thus, it cannot judge if the
recipient can receive the data properly. In this sense, iR C3200 displays the # 899 to notify that it has sent data out
from the SMTP server successfully.
Field Remedy
Please explain the users the meaning of the # 899.
Remarks
This code appears when data is transmitted in Canon FTP with iW Gateway.
16.3.7.2 Reception Problem
16.3.7.2.1 Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image 0002-4748
Symptom
Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
16.3.7.2.2 iRC3200 displays 'Printing' after FAX reception and does not output RX documents 0005-6100
< Field Remedy >
16-115
Chapter 16
16.3.7.2.3 iRC3200 does not output FAX RX documents although reception has been completed
successfully 0005-6108
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and reinsert the
PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
16.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect
16.3.7.3.1 Alarm tone (Success tone, Error tone) emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax 0004-8987
[ Manual-related ]
Description
According to Sending Guide/Facsimile Guide, the alarm volume is the tone that is emitted when an original has
been successfully sent/received using a fax, or when a send/receive error has occurred. However, the alarm tone
is not emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax.
Field Remedy
In order to emit the alarm tone, the following setting change is required in service mode. So, set it upon request
from your customer.
1. For the success tone:

In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIALB>SW04], change bit1 at '1' (to emit).
'0' (not emit: default)
2. For the error tone:

In service mode [FAX>NCU>SPECIALB>SW04], change bit0 at '1' (to emit).
'0' (not emit: default)
16.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the
cassette 0002-3284
Symptom
Sensor detects cassette paper, though no paper is present.
Cause
When the cassette is set, though the pickup roller should descends and stop on the paper surface, the pickup
assembly spring (FS7-2800-000) was out of place so the roller returned to the original position and paper could
not be picked up.
Field Remedy
Remove the pickup assembly and attach the spring (FS7-2800-000).
16-116
Chapter 16
16.3.8.2 0102 Jam Code 0004-9729

Field Remedy
0102 indicates that a delay jam is detected by the cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17).
1. Remove the paper pick-up ass'y and install a different one, and check whether the symptom can be corrected.
2. If the symptom can be corrected, replace the paper pick-up roller, the feed roller and the separation roller. If
the symptom cannot be corrected by these roller's replacement, replace the paper pick-up ass'y with a new one.
3. If the symptom cannot be corrected in the step 1, loosen the batch of paper loaded in the cassettes, or load a
new batch.
Paper pick-up roller: FB6-3405

Feed/separation roller: FB6-3407
Paper pick-up ass'y: FG6-9028
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder
sensor flag 0002-3570

Field Remedy
Check whether the mylar sheet is properly attached to the fixing/feeder sensor flag. If not, reattach it or replace
the sensor flag with a new one.
FB6-3143-020 Fixing/Feeder Sensor Flag (New type as of June 15, 2004)
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 0003-8653

Description
This jam code indicates a delay jam at the fixing delivery sensor (PS25).
Cause
There is a case in the field that the lock lever applying pressure to the ITB was broken at a portion where the
spring is hooked and the ITB did not rotate, resulting in a paper jam.
Field Remedy
Check whether the fixing delivery sensor (PS25) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>DC-
CON>P007>bit4]. If there is no problem, inspect whether the lock levers (front and rear) for the ITB are broken
at the spring hook portion. If any breakage is found, replace it with a new one (FB6-2965-000).
16-117
Chapter 16
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 0002-3575
Symptom
JAM CODE 0108, 0207
Cause
Pins of the connectors in the delivery vertical path unit are bent.
Field Remedy
Because of a bend, there is a possibility that the connectors are not securely connected. Correct the bend if the
pins are bent.
Location of the connectors:

Slide out the Fixing Feeder Ass'y and open the delivery vertical path cover. Remove the delivery internal cover
by unfastening a screw. Two connectors can be seen there.
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 0003-8651

Description
This jam code indicates a stationary jam at the fixing delivery sensor (PS25).
Field Remedy
Check whether the fixing delivery sensor (PS25) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>DC-
CON>P007>bit4]. If any problems are found with the sensor, replace it with a new one (FH7-7312).
* Replacement of the fixing ass'y often solved the problem in the field; however, there are several cases where
toner adhering to the internal delivery roller or pinched wires of delivery vertical path motor caused this
symptom.
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller 0007-9931

Description
The internal delivery roller was deformed by heat after long use and this degraded its paper delivery capability,
causing a paper jam. As a solution, in order to prevent the roller from being deformed by heat, a new part
"Delivery Cooling Fan Cable" is added and also the rotational sequence of the delivery cooling fan (FM5) is
modified. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps in Field Remedy below. The rotational sequence of the
fan is changed as follows:
- Original sequence:
The fan is off during standby and simplex copy, and rotates at full speed during duplex copy.
- New sequence:
The fan rotates at half speed during standby, and at full speed during simplex and duplex copy.
In addition, the following are starting serial numbers of the machine with the cable:
iR C3200 (120V): MSK23249
iR C3200 (120V): MSL01214
iR C3200 (EUR 230V): UKF03623
iR C3200N (EUR 230V): JAF05213
16-118
Chapter 16
iR C3200 (UK 230V): QLZ01829

iR C3200N (UK 230V): JBC02062
iR C3200 (FRN 230V): SLZ01812
iR C3200N (FRN 230V): JBQ02319
iR C3200 (GER 230V): TLZ01233
iR C3200N (GER 230V): JCJ01781
iR C3200 (ITA 230V): SSX00987
iR C3200N (ITA 230V): JCK00405
iR C3200 (A/B 230V): SSY00265
iR C3200N (A/B 230V): JCL01323
iR C3200 (AU 230V): RLZ02229
iR C3200 (TW 120V): MSN00125
iR C3200 (KR 230V): RQZ00321
iR C3200 (CN 230V): RQY00131
Field Remedy
1. Replace the internal delivery roller with a new one.
2. Connect the delivery cooling fan cable so as to change the rotational sequence of the delivery cooling fan.
Note: After connecting the cable, fix it with two pieces of the cable cramp adjacent to the delivery fan in order to
prevent the cable from interfering with the fan.
FB6-4862 Internal Delivery Roller
FG3-3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code 0004-9723

Field Remedy
0A06 indicates that a stationary jam is detected at the fixing inlet sensor (PS27) at power-ON.
1. Check whether or not the fixing inlet sensor (PS27) operates normally in service mode [COPIER> I/O> P007
bit3 (1: ON, 0: OFF)]. If it does not operate normally, replace it with a new one (FH7-7312).
2. If it operates normally, check whether the sensor flag moves smoothly
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure 0002-2026
Symptom
About 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, a jam (0A0A) occurs due to a failure of the duplexing driver PCB.
Cause
Duplexing driver failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J70.
2) Check whether DC line is supplied to the duplexing driver PCB J440 from the fuse PCB J70.
16-119
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the duplexing driver PCB, if faulty.
Duplexing Driver PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9671-000
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 0002-5010
Symptom
JAM CODE 0B00/0105:
0B00 Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Jam
0105 Registration Delay Jam
Field Remedy
JAM CODE 0B00 is for front cover open/close jam and JAM CODE 0105 is for registration delay jam.
Check whether the delivery vertical path cover open/close sensor in the delivery vertical path ass'y is securely
installed. In the past, displacement of this sensor caused this
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder)
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under
service mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. 0002-3047
Symptom
Service mode history shows frequent feeder document jams (008C). However, the jams are not reproduced
when a paper feed test is run.
Cause
Jams happened because mixed documents of the same size system were copies without pressing the 'Mixed
sized documents' key.
Field Remedy
Explain to the customer that she must press the 'Mixed size documents' key to copy mixed size documents.
Also, explain that documents of different size systems cannot be mixed.
16-120
Chapter 16
16.3.10 Error Code
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time
of power-on is inadequate. 0002-1288
Symptom
E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-2
Detail Description Timing of detection
0001 After power-on, the output of the noncontact

thermistor does not reach 40°C within 180 sec.
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. 0002-1380
Symptom
E001 The fixing unit is overheating. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-3
0001 The high-temperature detection port ontinues to remain ON

for 500 msec.
0003 The reading of the no-contact thermistor remains 250°C for

500 msec.
0004 The difference in temperature between the non-contact

thermistor and the end thermistor remains 80°C or more for
500 msec.
0005 At the end of initial rotation, the difference in temperature

between the sub (end) thermistor and the main (non-
contact)thermistor is 20°C or more for 100 msec.
(A reversal in temperature (caused, for
example, by a piece of residual paper) is detected.)
16-121
Chapter 16
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is
inadequate. 0002-1593
Symptom
E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-4
0002 The output of the non-contact thermistor does not reach

60°C within 240 sec after it has reached 40°C.






120°C within 300 sec after power-on.

16-122
Chapter 16
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally
low after standby. 0002-1594
Symptom
E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-5
0001 After standby, the reading of the non-contact thermistor

remains 120°C or less for 10 sec.
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. 0002-1615
Symptom
E004 The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-6
0001 A short circuit of the triac is detected for 500 msec

continuously.
0002 An open circuit of the temperature detection thermistor

inside the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0003 A short circuit of the temperature detecting thermistor

inside the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0004 An open circuit of the infrared detecting thermistor inside

the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
0005 A short circuit of the infrared detecting thermistor inside

the non-contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
16-123
Chapter 16
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher
trays.': after implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder
unit open/closed sensor 0002-4676
Symptom
E004-0003 or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after implementing countermeasure against
malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor Error Code
Description
This symptom occurs after attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag for the fixing feeder unit open/closed
sensor as a countermeasure against malfunction
Cause
1. While attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag, the delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor comes
off and short-circuited due to a contact with the sheet metal. Finally, the DC fuse PCB (FG3-2337) is broken.
2. Since the face-down delivery sensor 1 comes off, a message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.' is
displayed.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the DC fuse PCB with a new one.
2. Reinstall the face-down delivery sensor 1.
Note: When implementing the countermeasure, be careful not to detach the face-down delivery sensor 1 and the
delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor.
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB 0006-2042

Description
E004-0005 can be displayed when a short circuit of the main thermistor (TH1) is detected for 500 msec
continuously.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Measure the electrical resistance with a tester to check whether the main thermistor is short-circuited. If so,
replace the main thermistor with a new one.
2. Inspect the cables and the connectors between the drawer connector of the fixing unit and the main thermistor
for any abnormality.
3. Inspect the cable and the connectors between J108A on the DC Controller PCB and the drawer connector deep
inside the machine for any abnormality.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
- Main Thermistor: FH7-7586
- Fixing Drawer Cable Ass'y (Fixing Ass'y): FG6-9644 for 100V, FG6-9646 for 120V, FG6-9647 for 220/240V
- Fixing Drawer Cable (Host Machine): FG3-2310
- DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
16-124
Chapter 16
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning 0006-4441

Description
E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found:
- When a jam code "0107" was recorded in the jam history together with E004-0007:
Since adhesive agent for locking the screws of the fixing drive motor (FG6-9079) stuck to the damper, the
vibration of the fixing drive motor cannot be absorbed by the damper, and thus the motor drive was not delivered
to the fixing roller, causing the roller fail to rotate. Accordingly, the surface temperature of the roller did not
become even, resulting in the error code.
- The DC Controller PCB is faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Visually inspect the motor damper of the fixing drive motor. If adhesive agent sticks to it, remove it using a
jewelers screwdriver and check whether the error code will be resolved. If not, go on to the Step 2.
2. Visually inspect the fixing roller drive gears in the fixing unit for any abnormality.
3. Check the sub thermistor for any abnormality.
4. Check whether the gears in the fixing drive unit located on the back side of the host machine rotate at power-
on. If not, remove the fixing drive unit and inspect the gears for any abnormality.
If no problem is found in the Steps 2 through 3, go to the next step.
5. In the field, this symptom was resolved by disabling the sleep mode in service mode [COPIER> Option>
USER> SLEEP> 0]. So, try this if possible.
6. If the Step 4 is impossible or the symptom still recurs, replace the fixing drive unit with a new one.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
FH7-7587 Sub Thermistor (TH2)
FG6-9011 Fixing Drive Unit
FG3-2356 DC Controller PCB
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions 0006-4444
[ Manual-related ]
Description
E004-0006 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the main thermistor becomes 150 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the main thermistor is faulty.
E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the sub thermistor is faulty.
16-125
Chapter 16
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. 0002-1616
Symptom
E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-7
0001 The ITB drum motor The lock (normal state) signal is not detected
fails to rotate. within 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control
signal has gone ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002 The ITB drum motor The lock (normal state) signal stops 0.5 sec later.
fails to rotate after it has
rotated.
0003 The lock (normal state) signal remains even when

the ITB drum motor has been stopped (i.e., the
lock (normal state) signal is detected continuously
for 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control signal
has been turned OFF).
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating 0002-1619
Symptom
E012-0001: ITB motor not rotating
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the long arm is unable to actuate the front door switch because it almost comes off.
Make sure that the arm is placed securely.
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a drum ITB motor failure 0002-2015
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed due to a drum ITB motor failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
16-126
Chapter 16
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and also whether 24V is
supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the microswitch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the microswitch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2, check
the microswitch PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum ITB motor.
DC Brushless Motor Part No. FH6-1971-000
due to a microswitch PCB failure 0002-2018
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed, due to a microswitch PCB failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB (microswitch PCB) and
also whether 24V is supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the double switch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the double switch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely
faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2,
check the double switch PCB.
16-127
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Replace the double switch PCB.
Double Switch PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9015-000
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally 0005-6214

Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Door Switch Ass'y was faulty.
Check whether or not 24V is supplied to the pin 1 of the connector J71 on the Fuse PCB while the door switch
is being actuated. If not, replace the Door Switch Ass'y with a new one.
Door Switch Ass'y: FG6-9013
For your information, if 24V is not supplied to the Fuse PCB, the relay on the PCB does not work and
consequently 24V is not supplied to the Drum ITB motor that is required to drive the ITB.
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse
PCB is faulty 0006-4440

Description
E012-0001 can be displayed when the drum ITB motor fails to rotate.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found to be a cause. They are listed in order of decreasing number.
- The drum ITB motor is faulty.
- The Fuse PCB is faulty.
- Either of the open/close switches for the front cover, the manual feed tray unit or the fixing feeder unit is faulty.
- The connectors on the DC Controller PCB are not securely fitted.
Field Remedy
1. Remove the ITB unit and check whether the belt rotates smoothly.
2. Disconnect the connector J71 from the Fuse PCB and check the continuity between J71-1 and J71-3 with a
tester. If no continuity is verified, it indicates that either of the three switches above is not turned ON.
3. Check whether the drum ITB motor J93-1 is supplied with DC24V from the Fuse PCB J70-3. If not, replace
the Fuse PCB after checking the connection of the connectors on it.
4. Check whether the drum ITB motor J814-2 is supplied with DC5V from the DC Controller PCB J105B-16. If
not, replace the DC Controller PCB after checking the connection of the connectors on it.
5. If no problem is found in the Step 1 through 4, replace the drum ITB motor with a new one.
Front Cover Open/Close Switch (MSW1, 2): FG6-9015
Fixing Feeder Open/Close Switch (MSW5, 6): RH7-6037
Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
Drum ITB Motor: FH6-1971ÉhÉâÉÄITBÉÇÅ[É^ FH6-1971
16-128
Chapter 16
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow

drum unit 0002-1622
Symptom
E020-0134: recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit
Cause
The ITB is not properly pressurized and a sample patch for ATR control is not formed on the ITB.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the ITB is not pressurized due to a breakage of the lock lever in the are applying the
pressure to the ITB. Also, there is a report from the field that the tension spring was broken.
Lock Lever (Front/Rear): FB6-2965-000

Tension Spring (Front/Rear): FS7-2785-000
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/
developer. 0002-1627
Symptom
E020 There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-8
For the first 2 digits of detail code xx20 through xxD0,

xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: Bk
xx20 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum
ATR sensor. The drum unit is not unit has been fitted. It is detected in
fitted normally, or is faulty. about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of
the developing assembly.
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detected during
ATR control or in about 150 sec after
idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
16-129
Chapter 16
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detected during
The ITB has deteriorated. ATR control or in about 150 sec after
assembly.
ATR sensor. The setting of the ATR unit has been fitted. It is detected in
sensor computation value is wrong. about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of
The drum unit is not fitted properly, or the developing assembly.
is faulty.
xx34 The sample image fails to be drawn in The fault can occur as when a new drum
ATR control. There is a fault/open unit has been fitted. It is detected during
circuit in the SALT sensor. The drum ATR control or in about 150 sec after
unit is faulty. The ITB has idle rotation of the developing
deteriorated. assembly.
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detached
during ATR control or in about 150 sec
after idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
xx40 The ATR sensor communication The fault can occur as when a new drum
value is faulty. There is a fault/open unit has been fitted. It is detected in
circuit in the ATR sensor. The drum about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of
unit has been fitted improperly. (The the developing assembly.
machine cannot detect the drum unit).
The drum unit is faulty.
xx50 The developer concentration The fault occurs when an image is

computation value is faulty (set when being formed. It is detected when toner
a new drum unit is fitted). supply operation is started.
xx60 The developer concentration target The fault occurs when an image is
value is faulty (set when a new drum is being formed. It is detected when toner
fitted; the value is extremely small). supply operation is started.
xx70 The developer concentration target The fault occurs when an image is
value is faulty (set when a new drum being formed. It is detected when toner
unit is fitted; the value is extremely supply operation is started.
small).
xx80 The actual value is considerably high The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit is
fitted. The SALT sensor is faulty.
16-130
Chapter 16
xx81 The actual value is considerably high The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is fitted.
xxA0 The measured value of the developer The fault occurs when an image is
concentration is considerably low. being formed. It is detected when toner
The ATR sensor is faulty. The SALT supply operation is started.
sensor is faulty. The ITB is soiled.
xxB0 The drum unit is approaching the end The fault occurs when an image is
of its life and is causing the T/D ratio being formed. It is detected when toner
to drop. The ATR sensor has an open supply operation is started.
circuit.
xxC0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing assembly being formed.
is faulty. The developing assembly is
supplied with toner excessively. The
ATR sensor has an open circuit.
xxD0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing assembly being formed and, in addition, when the
has failed. The toner cartridge motor T/D ratio drops while 20 prints are
fails to rotate. The toner container is being made continuously. It is detected
empty. The toner supply mouth of the when toner supply operation is started.
drum unit is damaged. The ATR
sensor has an open circuit.
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code 0002-1894
Symptom
E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the coefficient of the SALT sensor contamination becomes lower than the
specified value; 70 or less in service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>WINDOW-Y/M/C/K].
Cause
1. E020-0181: Since the service case storing the service book is not installed inside the front door, the SALT
sensor shutter is not opened. Consequently, the SALT sensor is unable to measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control on the transfer belt.
2. E020-xx81: Since the SALT sensor is soiled, it is unable to precisely measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control.
16-131
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
1. When E020-0181 occurs, first check whether the service case is installed inside the front door. If not, install
it to the designated position.
2. Check whether the SALT sensor is soiled with toner. If it is, slide the cleaning device several times or clean
the sensor with a blower brush. Do not rub the sensor surface with a dry cloth as it can be electrically charged
and soiled with toner again.
If E020-xx81 recurs even performing the above, replace the SALT sensor (FH7-7601) with a new one.
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service
case removed 0002-2508
Symptom
When a copy is made with the service case removed, E020-0081 is displayed.
Cause
There is a projection on the service case, which opens/closes the SALT sensor shutter. Therefore, if a copy is
made without the service case, E020-0081 is displayed.
Field Remedy
Re-attach the service case.
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season 0002-3219
Symptom
The E020-0X34, or the E020-0X21 lights on when you install this machine in the cold season.
Cause
If you carry in this machine which has been placed in cold environment, condensation occurs because of the
temperature difference between the body and the room.
Condensation on the surface of the drum prevents toner from attaching to the drum, which causes the E020-
0X34 to light on.
Condensation on the patch sensor decreases the amount of light of the patch detecting sensor, which causes the
E020-0X24 to light on.
Field Remedy
Leave it as it is for about 15 minutes until condensation recovers.
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation,
toner container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) 0002-3278
16-132
Chapter 16
Symptom
After installation, when about 200 to 300 sheets have been fed through, the toner container motor (Bk) does not
rotate and error E020-04B0 is displayed. (Supplementary reference)
Description
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-K.
Cause
Upon shipment from the factory, the cable relay jack (J674) of the toner container motor (Bk), leading from
the DC controller PCB was loose.
Items to Check
1 The operation of the toner container motor (Bk) can be checked with the following service mode procedure.
Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 5 and press OK.
2 Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press OK.
If everything is normal, the toner container motor (Bk) will come ON in 10 seconds.
The problem in this case was that the motor did not rotate.
Field Remedy
First, check the listed items.
If the toner container motor is not operating, check the cables from the DC controller PCB J126-B4 to the cable
relay jack (J674) and to the toner container motor (Bk).
If the toner relay jack is loose, secure it.
If there is no toner container motor (Bk) drive signal output from the DC controller J126-B4, check the DC input
to the DC controller and, if there is nothing wrong, replace the DC controller.
16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit 0002-3282
Symptom
Caution when replacing drum unit when E020-04B0 is displayed.
Cause
The treatment for E020-0xB0 is explained under Field Action.
16-133
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-Y/M/C/K. If the level is between -
3.0% and -4.0%, an error will be generated.
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of

the SALT sensor shutter 0002-3334
Symptom
SALT sensor open/ close failure caused E020-0X83
Description
E020-0x83 detection timing
When the ITB surface reflection ratio measurement value detected by the SALT sensor is extremely low.
Cause
Faulty detection because SALT sensor shutter does not open/close properly due to failure of service book cover
SALT sensor shutter open/close rod assembly not pressing home against the main unit, due to a loose screw in
the service book cover, or similar.
Field Remedy
Check for any play in the front cover. Check that the screws in the service book cover are properly tightened.
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code 0002-3480
Symptom
E020-0124 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that pins of the connectors connecting the pattern reader ass'y and the DC
controller PCB were bent, causing a malfunction.
Field Remedy
Check whether the pins of the connectors are straight.
16-134
Chapter 16
F-16-66
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code 0002-3551
Symptom
E020-0XB0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y becomes low. It is also
displayed when the drum unit has exceeded the end of its life.
Field Remedy
1. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum unit side and the main unit side.
2. As a contact failure is possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
3. Check whether the sealing tape in the toner cartridge blocks the opening for toner supply. If it does, remove
it completely and replace the drum unit with a new one.
4. If the DCON is Ver4.03 or smaller, upgrade it to Ver5.05 or higher.
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code 0002-3553
Symptom
E020-xx24
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe it off
with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-135
Chapter 16
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code 0002-3556
Symptom
E020-xxA0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y has exceeded the specified value.
The measured value of developer concentration is 15 or less in service mode
[COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K].
Field Remedy
1. Check whether the cables of the ATR sensor in the developing ass'y are broken or not. If the value displayed
by selecting service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K] is 0, the cables can be broken.
2. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum cartridge side and the main unit side. As a contact failure is
possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code 0002-3560
Symptom
E020-xxD0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y drops while 20 prints are
being made continuously.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the opening for toner supply of the toner cartridge is not damaged. If it is damaged, replace the
toner cartridge with a new one.
2. Make sure that the connectors of the toner container motors (M20 to M23) are securely inserted. If they are
unplugged, insert them securely.
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code 0002-3566
Symptom
E020-xx34
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is lower than the specified
value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe
it off with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-136
Chapter 16
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code 0004-5069

Field Remedy
E020-0125 can be displayed when there is a fault/open circuit in the SALT sensor, a fault in the drum unit, or
the ITB is deteriorated.
As a result of inspection, it was found that a pin of the connector of the SALT sensor was deformed, causing
poor contact. Check whether the pin of the connector is deformed.
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after
replacement of Cyan drum unit 0004-8989

Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
For your information, when the overall fogging with no margin occurs, there is a high possibility that there is a
problem with the DC controller PCB or the H.V. transformer PCB. On the other hand, if there is a margin, it is
possible that the main controller PCB or the sub controller PCB is faulty.
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to
operate. 0002-1631
Symptom
E032 The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-9
0000 The counter function of the NE controller fails to operate.
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is
faulty. 0002-1634
Symptom
E110 The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty.(Error code detail)
16-137
Chapter 16
Description
T-16-10
0110 The rotation of the Y laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner
motor is in operation.
0210 The rotation of the M laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
0310 The rotation of the C laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
0410 The rotation of the K laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code 0004-8993

Field Remedy
E110-0x10 can be displayed when the rotational failure of the laser scanner motor has been detected.
1. Swap the affected laser unit with others.

2. Check whether or not the sub code of E110 will be changed.
- If the sub code is changed, the laser unit is faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
- If the sub code is not changed, it is possible that the DC controller PCB is faulty. So, replace it with a new
one. In the field, replacement of the DC controller PCB solved the problem.
DC controller PCB: FG3-3003 (100V), FG3-2356 (120/220/240V)

Laser Unit: FG6-8962
16-138
Chapter 16
16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1
mirror home position. 0002-1639
Symptom
E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-11
0000 The No. 1 mirror base moves in The home position sensor does not
reverse but does not move to its home go ON within a specific period of
position. time.
0001 The No. 1 mirror base moves forward The home position sensor does not
but does not move from its home go OFF within a specific period of
position. time.
16.3.10.36 E202-0000 Error Code 0002-8538
Symptom
Description
E202-0000 is displayed when the optical home position sensor (SR2) does not go ON within a specific period
of time.
Cause
There is a case in the field that unplugging/reinserting the connector on the interface PCB solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the optical home position sensor (SR2) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>R-
CON>P004>bit5].
If there is no problem with the sensor (SR2), unplug and insert the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305,
J306, J309, J311).
16-139
Chapter 16
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning
lamp. 0002-1641
Symptom
E220 A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-12
0000 The intensity of the scanning During shading adjustment at time of

lamp has dropped. power-on, the intensity detected by the
CCD is below a specific level.
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with
red 0002-2536

Cause
Field Remedy
Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
FM2-0023 CCD Unit
F-16-67
16-140
Chapter 16
[Image tinged with red]
F-16-68
[Normal Image]
16.3.10.39 E220-0000 Error Code 0002-3288
Symptom
E220-0000
Description
Although the power lamp lights up once, E220-0000 is displayed immediately.
Cause
Poor contact of the flat cable (J102) which is connected to the CCD unit.
Poor contact of the flat cable (J205) which is connected to the RCON.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cables.
CCD unit side: J102
RCON side: J205
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the
CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes. 0002-3358
Symptom
Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes E220-0000.
Cause
Connection failure in the flat cable that goes into R-CON J205.
Field Remedy
Insert the flat cable properly.
16-141
Chapter 16
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning
power ON 0004-8991

Field Remedy
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the CCD becomes below a specific level during
shading adjustment at time of power-ON.
Unplug and insert the flat cable connecting the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB (CCD side: J102, RCON
side: J205). If the symptom still recurs, replace the reader controller PCB with a new one because its
replacement solved the problem in the field.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-2564 (100V), FG3-2570 (120/220/240V)
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen
cover 0005-6111

< Field Remedy >
It is possible that the connectors connecting to the Interface PCB are not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert
them on the Interface PCB.
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader
Controller PCB 0005-6124

Description
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the
CCD is below a specific level during shading adjustment at power-on.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Inverter PCB was faulty (specifically, the fuse F1 opened.).
Field Remedy
Check continuity of the fuse F1 on the Inverter PCB. If it opens, replace the PCB with a new one.
Inverter PCB: FH3-7213
16-142
Chapter 16
16.3.10.44 E220-0000 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, because of poor

contact of J204 on Reader Controller PCB, iRC3220 0008-1581

Description
Because the flat cable J204 on the Reader Controller PCB had poor contact, E220 was displayed at power-on upon
installation.
E220-0000 can be displayed when the intensity detected by the
CCD is below a specific level during shading adjustment at power-on.
Field Remedy
Check the connection of J207 on the Reader Controller PCB. If poor contact is found, reinsert it once again. Be
sure to lock it after insertion.
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor
controller and the DC controller is faulty. 0002-1644
Symptom
E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-13
0000 There is a fault in the serial communication between the

main controller and the DC controller.
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. 0002-1645
Symptom
E243 The control panel is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-14
0000 There is a fault in the communication between the

controller and the control panel.
16-143
Chapter 16
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading
correction. 0002-1647
Symptom
E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-15
0000 A time-out has occurred in The shading processing does not end 1
shading operation. sec after it has started.
0001 A time-out has occurred in The gain/offset correction (setting

gain/offset correction by the operator) by the analog processor does
analog processor. not end 1 sec after it has started.
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. 0002-1650
Symptom
E315 The image data is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-16
0001 A time-out condition has occurred in encoding/

decoding processing of image data.
16.3.10.49 E315-0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted 0002-3583
Symptom
E315-0010 Error Code: only for FAX is transmitted
Cause
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
16-144
Chapter 16
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. 0002-1651
Symptom
E351 The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-17
0000 There is a fault in the initial communication.
16.3.10.51 E351-0000 Error Code: Because of poor connection of connector on

ECO-ID PCB 0006-6281

Description
E351-0000 can be displayed when an error occurs in initial communication of the ECO-ID PCB.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the connector between the ECO-ID PCB
and J1315 on the Main Controller PCB (Main) was not securely fitted. So, check the connection.
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. 0002-1653
Symptom
E402 There is a fault in the feeder motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-18
The feeder motor (M2) fails to The feeder motor encoder pulse is not
rotate. The feeder motor clock detected within 0.3 sec after the DF
sensor (SR1) is faulty. feeder motor drive signal has been
turned ON.
16-145
Chapter 16
16.3.10.53 E402 Error Code 0003-8600

Description
This error code can be displayed when the feeder motor encoder pulse is not detected within 0.3 sec after the
DF feeder motor drive signal has been turned ON.
Cause
There is a case in the field that an adjustment of the ADF transfer belt solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the feeder motor (M2) and the feeder motor clock sensor (SR1) are operating normally. If there
is no problem, adjust the tension of the belt.
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. 0002-1656
Symptom
E404 There is a fault in the delivery motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-19
The face-down delivery motor The face-down delivery motor encoder

(M3) fails to rotate. The pulse is not detected within 0.3 sec after
facedown delivery motor clock the face-down delivery motor drive
sensor (SR7) is faulty. signal has been turned ON.
16.3.10.55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication.

(Finisher-N1) 0002-1665
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-20
There is a fault in data The communication between the machine

communication. and the finisher remains disrupted for 5 sec or
more.
16-146
Chapter 16
16.3.10.56 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication.

(Finisher-M1) 0002-1671
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-21
There is a fault in The communication between the machine and the

data communication. finisher is disrupted and, in addition, an attempt at
recovery within 5 sec fails.
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. 0002-1673
Symptom
E503 There is a fault in saddle communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-22
0002 There is a fault in data The communication between the saddle stitcher
communication. controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB
remains disrupted for 5 sec or more.
16-147
Chapter 16
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. 0002-1675
Symptom
E504 There is a fault in stack size detection. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-23
0001 The height sensor (PS1) is The communication between the height
faulty. sensor and the finisher controller PCB is
prevented. Or, there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002 The height sensor (PS1) is The communication between the height
faulty. sensor and the finisher controller PCB is
prevented for 0.1 sec or more.
0003 The connector of the height This fault is detected at power-on.

sensor (PS1) is faulty.
0004 The DIP switch for the There is a fault in the adjustment of the
height sensor (PS1) is not sensor by the DIP switch.
adjusted correctly.
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. 0002-1677
Symptom
E505 There is a fault in the backup RAM. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-24
0001 The checksum value of the finisher controller This fault is detected at
PCB is faulty. power-on.
16-148
Chapter 16
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1679
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-25
0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor fails to
(M2), or feed motor clock generate the target number of clock
sensor (PI10) is faulty. pulses within 10 sec at the start of
operation.
0002 The delivery roller, feeder There is no clock pulse for a feed
motor (M2), or feeder motor equivalent for 0.2 during
clock sensor (PI10) is faulty. communication.
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1687
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-26
The delivery motor (M1) or the The delivery clock sensor signal is
delivery clock sensor (S1) is faulty. not detected when the delivery
The connector is disconnected. motor has been driven for 70 mm.
16-149
Chapter 16
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise
direction) 0002-1692
Symptom
E514 There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-27
The stack processing motor (M2) or The stack delivery lever fails to
the stack delivery lever home position reach its home position when the
sensor (S8) is faulty. The connector is stack processing motor has been
disconnected. The stack delivery belt driven for a specific period of time
or the return roller is faulty. at start of operation.
16.3.10.63 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) 0002-1695
Symptom
E530 There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-28
0001 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not leave the
alignment motor (M3), aligning aligning plate home position sensor
plate home position sensor (PI6), when the alignment motor has been
or aligning plate. driven for 2 sec.
0002 There is an excess load on the rear The aligning plate does not return to its
alignment motor (M3), rear home position when the aligning plate
aligning plate home position sensor motor has been driven for 2 sec.
(PI6), or rear aligning plate.
16-150
Chapter 16
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1698
Symptom
E530 There is a fault in rear alignment.(Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-29
The rear alignment motor (M4) The rear aligning plate fails to reach the
or the rear aligning plate home home position sensor or fails to leave the
position sensor (S7) is faulty. aligning plate home position sensor when
An excess load is imposed on the rear aligning plate has been driven for
the rear aligning plate. a specific period of time.
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1700
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-30
The stapler motor (M6) or The stapler fails to leave the stapling home
the stapling home position position sensor when the stapler shift motor
sensor (S17) is faulty. The has been driven for 0.5 sec, or does not return
stapler harness is faulty. to the stapler home position sensor.
16-151
Chapter 16
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1702
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-31
0001 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not leave the
stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty. stapler shift motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not return from the
for 0.5 sec.
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler 0002-1704
Symptom
E532 There is a fault in the shift of the stapler. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-32
0001 The stapler shift motor (M4) or the The stapler shift base does not
stapler shift home position sensor leave the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the position sensor when the stapler
path of the stapler shift base. shift motor has been driven for 4
sec.
0002 The stapler shift motor (M4) or the The stapler shift base does not
stapler shift home position sensor return from the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the position sensor when the stapler
path of the stapler shift base. shift motor has been driven for 4
sec.
16-152
Chapter 16
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. 0002-1706
Symptom
E535 There is a fault in the swing mechanism. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-33
0001 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide closed switch does not
swing guide open sensor (PI18) go ON when the swing motor has been
is faulty. rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0002 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide open switch does not go
swing guide closed switch ON when the swing motor has been
(MS6) is faulty. rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0003 The safety area switch (MS3) The swing guide closed switch is OFF
or the swing guide switch 2 when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF position
(MS6) is faulty. of the safety area switch while the tray
ascent/ descent motor is in operation.
0004 The swing motor (M7) or the There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec while
swing motor clock sensor swinging operation is under way.
(PI20) is faulty.
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. 0002-1709
Symptom
E537 There is a fault in front alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-34
The front alignment motor The aligning plate fails to reach the
(M3) or the front aligning plate aligning plate home position sensor when
home position sensor (S6) is the rear alignment motor has been driven
faulty. An excess load is for a specific period of time, or fails to
imposed on the front aligning leave the aligning plate home position
plate. sensor.
16-153
Chapter 16
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. 0002-1711
Symptom
E540 There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-35
0001 The tray ascent/descent motor The ascent/descent operation does not end
(M5), the tray ascent/descent within 15 sec after the tray assent/descent
motor clock sensor (PI9/PI19), motor has been driven; or, the tray home
or tray home position sensor position is not detected when it has been
(PIE) is faulty. driven for 15 sec.
0002 The tray upper limit detecting The tray upper limit detecting switch is
switch (MS5) is faulty. ON during tray ascent/descent operation.
0003 The tray ascent/descent motor There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec or more
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent from the clock sensor when the tray
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/ ascent/descent motor has been driven.
PI19) is faulty.
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing

(counterclockwise direction). 0002-1714
Symptom
E577 There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-36
The stack processing motor (M2) or the The return roller fails to reach the
return controller home position sensor return roller home position sensor
(S3) is faulty. The connector is when the stack processing motor
disconnected. The stack delivery lever has been driven for a required
or the return roller is faulty. period of time.
16-154
Chapter 16
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack
tray. 0002-1716
Symptom
E580 There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-37
The stack tray ascent/descent The stack tray upper limit sensor goes
motor (M5), stack tray paper ON while the stack tray ascent/descent
height sensor (S10), or the stack motor is in operation, or the clock pulse
tray ascent/descent motor clock of the stack tray direction motor clock
sensor (S9) is faulty. The sensor is not detected 15 times or more
connector is disconnected. An within 0.8 sec.
excess load is imposed on the The stack tray does not reach the stack
stack tray ascent/descent motor. tray height sensor within 4 sec after the
stack tray ascent/descent motor has
started ascent operation.
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). 0002-1718
Symptom
E584 There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-38
0001 The No. 2 feed motor (M8) The shutter open sensor does not go ON
or the shutter open sensor when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(PI5) is faulty. in reverse for 1 sec or more.
0002 The No 2 feed motor (M8) or The shutter closed switch does not go ON
the shutter closed switch when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(MS4) is faulty. in reverse for 1 sec or more.
0003 The safety area detecting The shutter closed switch is OFF when the
switch (MS3) or the shutter tray 1/2 is in the OFF position of the safety
closed switch (MS4) is area switch while the tray ascent/ descent
faulty. motor is in operation.
16-155
Chapter 16
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the
saddle. 0002-1719
Symptom
E5F0 There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-39
0001 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go ON when the
positioning plate home position paper positioning plate motor has been
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. driven for 1.33 sec.
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go OFF when the
positioning plate home position paper position plate motor has been
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. driven for 1 sec.
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. 0002-1720
Symptom
E5F1 There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-40
0001 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The number of detection pluses of the
the paper fold motor clock paper fold motor clock sensor falls below
sensor (PI4S) is faulty. a specific value.
0002 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The state of the paper fold home position
the paper fold motor clock sensor remains unchanged when the paper
sensor (PI4S) is faulty. fold motor has been driven for 3 sec.
16-156
Chapter 16
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. 0002-1722
Symptom
E5F2 There is a fault in the saddle guide. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-41
0001 The guide motor (M2S) or the The guide home position sensor does not
guide home position sensor go ON when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty. rotated for 0.455 sec.
0002 The guide motor (M3S) or the The guide home position sensor does not
guide home position sensor go OFF when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty. driven for 1 sec.
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. 0002-1743
Symptom
E5F3 There is a fault in saddle alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-42
0001 The alignment motor (M5S) or The aligning plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home does not go ON when the alignment motor
position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. has been driven for 0.5 sec. (initially,
driven for 1.67 sec)
0002 The alignment motor (M5S) or The alignment plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home does not go OFF when the alignment
position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1 sec.
16-157
Chapter 16
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. 0002-1752
Symptom
E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-43
0001 The stapler motor (rear, M6S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stacking home position not go OFF when the stitch motor (rear)
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. has been rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stitch motor (rear, M67S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go ON when the stitch motor (rear)has
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. been rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. 0002-1753
Symptom
E5F5 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-44
0001 The stitch motor (front, M7S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go OFF when the stitch motor (front)
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. has been driven clockwise for 0.5 sec or
more.
0002 The stitch motor (front, M7S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go ON when the stitch motor (front)
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. has been driven in reverse for 0.5 sec or
more.
16-158
Chapter 16
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper
pushing plate. 0002-1756
Symptom
E5F6 There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-45
0001 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home position
(M8S) or the paper pushing sensor does not go ON when the paper
plate home position sensor pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty. 0.3 sec or more.
0002 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home position
(M8S) or the paper pushing sensor does not go OFF when the paper
plate home position sensor pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty. 80 msec.
0003 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading edge
(M8S) or the paper pushing position sensor does not go OFF when the
plate leading edge position paper pushing plate motor has been
sensor (PI15S) is faulty. driven for 80 msec.
0004 The paper pushing plate motor The number of detection pulses of the
(M8S) or the paper pushing paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
plate motor clock sensor has dropped below a specific value.
(PI1S) is faulty.
0005 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading edge
(M8S) or the paper pushing positioning sensor does not go ON when
plate leading edge position the paper pushing plate motor has been
sensor (PI15S) is faulty. driven for 0.3 sec or more.
16-159
Chapter 16
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. 0002-1758
Symptom
E5F8 There is a fault in the saddle connector. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-46
0001 The connector of the guide The connector of the guide home position
home position sensor (PI13S) sensor has been identified to have been
is faulty. disconnected.
0002 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate home position home position sensor is identified to have
sensor (PI14S) is faulty. been disconnected.
0003 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate leading edge position sensor is identified to have been
position sensor (PI15S) is disconnected.
faulty.
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. 0002-1759
Symptom
E5F9 There is a fault in the saddle switch. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-47
0001 The inlet cover switch The inlet cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS1S), front cover 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
switch (MS2S), or printing in the host machine with any of the
delivery cover switch following sensor identifying the cover to be
(MS3S) is faulty. closed:
. inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
. front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
. delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
16-160
Chapter 16
0002 The front cover switch The front cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS2S) or the delivery 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
cover switch (MS3S) is printing in the host machine with any of the
faulty. following sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
0003 The delivery cover The delivery cover switch is identified to be open
switch (MS3S) is faulty. for 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation
or of printing in the host machine with any of the
following sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K]

to improve faint image 0002-3339
Symptom
When adjusting faint image in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K, E061-0xdd is
displayed.
Cause
The adjustment range of service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K is -30 to +30. When
adjusted in the + direction, the image gets darker.
Depending on the life of the drum, as the adjustment moves in the + direction, the charge DC exceeds the upper
limit and E061-0xdd is generated.
Field Remedy
Adjust image faintness as described below.
1 In service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > Y/M/C/K-DRM-LF, check the drum life. The correct range
is from 0 to 100%. If the life has been exceeded, replace the drum.
2 Perform user mode > adjust/ cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
3 In service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1, and output at each setting with
service mode level 1
COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14
Compare the maximum density areas output at 'THRU 0' and 'THRU 1' and if the densities are different proceed
to step 4.
4 Adjust in service mode level 1 COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-Y/M/C/K, and again, in service
mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting, output service mode
level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
16-161
Chapter 16
If the maximum density areas at 'THRU 0' are the same as those of 'THRU 1', carry out user mode > adjust/
cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
*Make a test copy. If the correct density is produced, the procedure is finished.
*If the correct density is not produced, go to step 5.
5 In service mode level 2 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K, check the Vd value.
6Again, in in service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting,
output service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
If 'THRU 0' is faint, adjust in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VCONT-Y/M/C/K (1
unit: 10V). If the image is faint, increase the value.
Input a value that is 650V or lower when added to the the original value (as displayed in CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K)
by VCONT. If this value is exceeded, E061-0xdd will be generated and then the full correction performed in
step 7 will be disabled.
7 Perform user mode > adjustment/ cleaning> automatic gradation correction> full correction.
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon

occurrence of error code 0002-1761
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The captioned error codes are displayed when:
a. E602-0001: the host machine detects that the system is not properly installed in the HDD when the HDD starts
up.
b. E602-0002: the host machine detects an error during reading the data from the HDD when the HDD starts up.
c. E602-0003: there occurs a discrepancy between the control data for the data stored in the HDD and the actual
data. (HDD sector Write Abort)
Field Remedy
a. E602-0001
Check a connection between the HDD and the Main Controller PCB. If there is no problem, replace the HDD with
a new one and reinstall the system software.
Or, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one if it is faulty.
b. E602-0002
Reinstall the system software.
c. E602-0003
There are four partitions inside the HDD. The following are solutions depending on in which sector a write abort
occurs.
c-1. Write Abort in Image Storage Area
Turn the power OFF/ON, which can recover errors automatically.
c-2. Write Abort in other areas than Image Storage Area
c-2-1. If you can enter service mode:
c-2-1-1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> STSTEM> CHK-TYPE], select "0" and perform [HD-CHECK].
The required time depends on a capacity of the HDD, usually approximately 20 to 40 minutes.
c-2-1-2. Turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally.
c-2-1-3. If no, perform [HD-CLEAR] by selecting "1" and "2".
c-2-1-4. Reinstall the system software.
16-162
Chapter 16
c-2-2. If you cannot enter service mode:

c-2-2-1. While pressing the numerical keys 1 and 9 simultaneously, turn the power ON. The recovery program
will automatically start and the LCD will go out.
c-2-2-2. Then, the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally.
c-2-2-3. If not, perform [HD-CLEAR] by selecting "1" and "2".
c-2-2-4. Reinstall the system software.
WM2-5210 HDD
FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. 0002-1776
Symptom
E602 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-48
0001 The fault may be a HD detection error, in which the HD

cannot be detected. The machine may fail to become ready
(returning an error code).
0002 The startup file is absent. The program for the main CPU
does not exist on the HD, in BOOTDEV/BOOT or the like.
0003 The fault is a HD write/abort error. The machine fails to read

sectors of the HD.
0005 It is a fault in the detection of the HD controller IC. It is

detected when the HD controller IC cannot be recognized or
an error is detected in it.
0006 The auxiliary startup file is absent. The correct SUB CPU
program does not exist on the HD or in BOOTDEV/BOOT
or the like.
0007 The color profile file does not exist. The correct color profile
file does not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL or the like.
01XX The partition DOSDEV is faulty.

(For detail code, see below.)
02XX The partition PSTDEV is faulty.

03XX The partition DOSDEV2 is faulty.

16-163
Chapter 16
04XX The partition FSTPDEV is faulty.


06XX The partition PDLDEV is faulty.


08XX The partition BOOTDEV is faulty.


FFXX A fault exists in a partition that cannot be identified. (For

detail code, see below.)
Detail code of E602
Last 2 bytes of detail

code (indicated by Description
XX)
01 Device error: sector, write/abort, other HDD access (driver)
error
02 File system (logic) error: error detection by check

processing; mounting failure
03 Other error: HDD connector fault; HDD detection failure;

secondary error as of DRAM fault
10 HD controller HD controller IC, driver No. error
11 HD controller IC, driver not installed
12 HD controller IC, system error
13 HD controller IC, device error
14 HD controller IC, parameter error
21 packet R/W file operation, system error
22 packet R/W file operation, parameter error
23 packet R/W file operation, packet DMC error
24 packet R/W file operation, packet DMAC time-out
25 packet R/W file operation, HD controller IC error
16-164
Chapter 16
due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y 0002-2029
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001 is displayed due to a failure of the Distribution Board
PCB Ass'y.
Cause
Distribution board failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether 12V DC is input to the HDD unit J44-1 and 5V to J44-4. If no, check whether 12V DC is
output from the distribution board PCB J1505-1 and 5V from J1505-4.
If there is DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check the connection of the flat cable between the
HDD and the main controller. If there is no problem there, the HDD is likely faulty.
2) If there is no DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check whether 5V is input to the distribution
board PCB J1501-1 and 12V to J1501-8. If no, check the fuse PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the distribution board PCB Ass'y.
Distribution Board PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-9676-000
due to a connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main
controller 0002-2486
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001is displayed due to a connection failure of the flat cable
between the HDD unit and the main controller.
Cause
Faulty connection of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller
Items to Check
Check whether 5V DC is supplied to J44-1 and 12V to J44-4 on the HDD unit.
If No, the distribution board PCB Ass'y or the DC power supply PCB Ass'y.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller.
16-165
Chapter 16
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK 0002-3294

Description
E602-0202 is an error code occurring when a file system logical error occurs in the partition FSTDEV of the HDD.
Field Remedy
In the field, the following service mode recovered the host machine.
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter "1" and then press OK. "1": Image storage
area
2. In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> HD-CHECK], press OK.
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB 0002-3476

Description
E602-0202 is an error code occurring when a file system logical error occurs in the partition FSTDEV of the HDD.
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty in this case.
Field Remedy
Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON].
If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
Note: Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD.
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then
E602 Error Code is displayed 0004-4203

Field Remedy
In this case, executing clear of 'MN-CON' in service mode enabled the machine to start up; however, it took for
as long as 60 seconds (normally less than 40 seconds). Replacement of the HDD solved the problem.
HDD: WM2-5188
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main

controller PCB 0004-5067

Field Remedy
E602-0402 can be displayed when a file system error occurs. There is a case in the field that replacement of the
SRAM board PCB which holds administrative data for the HDD.
SRAM Board PCB: FG3-2856
16-166
Chapter 16
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code 0005-3232

< Field Remedy >
When the power is turned ON, iRC3200 checks the control table for HDD stored in SRAM on the SRAM board.
E602-0x02 can possibly be displayed during checking unassigned field in SRAM.
This symptom has been corrected with the system Ver.11.03, so upgrade it to Ver.11.03 and later if this happens.
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code 0005-8612

Cause
Because of temperature rising around iRC3200, 5V input voltage into the HDD will become unsteady and
finally the HDD will detect low voltage input, leading to E602-0001 indication.
Field Remedy
When E602-0001 is displayed, check the 8-digit lot number on the DC Fuse PCB. If the last two digits show
[01] or [02], replace the PCB with [03] or bigger.
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 0008-1586

Description
When E602-0402 was displayed at power-on upon installation, MN-CONT clear was executed and the symptom
was solved. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps in Field Remedy.
E602-0402 can be displayed when the partition FSTPDEV inside the HDD is faulty. The detail code indicates a
file system error.
Field Remedy
1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CONT], press OK. The host machine will restart
automatically.
2. Turn the control panel switch OFF and then turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
Note: MN-CONT clear will erase all the image data stored in the HDD.
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory

(SDRAM). 0002-1778
Symptom
E604 There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-49
0000 The remaining space in image memory is inadequate for

the intended write/read operation.
16-167
Chapter 16
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM 0006-4445

Description
E604-0000 can be displayed when the capacity of the actually-mounted memory is smaller than the intended capacity.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the expansion RAM was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Check the capacity of the actually-mounted memory in service mode [COPIER> Display> ACC-STS> RAM]
(768MB: expansion RAM exists, 512MB: no expansion RAM). If it shows "512MB", remove and insert the
expansion RAM to see whether "768MB" will be displayed.
2. In order to identify the root cause whether the expansion RAM or the slot on the Main Controller PCB (Main)
is faulty, remote the original SDRAM (512MB) and insert into the expansion RAM slot to see whether the host
machine will start up normally.
3. If the host machine start up normally, replace the expansion RAM with a new one. If not, replace the Main
Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
Expansion RAM: WA7-2383
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. 0002-1782
Symptom
E605 The battery for image memory is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-50
0000 A specific drop in voltage has been detected.
16-168
Chapter 16
16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. 0002-1783
Symptom
E606 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-51
0001 A HD mounting error is detected when the HD is booted from

BOOT ROM.
0002 A reading error is detected when the HD is booted from

BOOTROM.
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. 0002-1785
Symptom
E674 The fax board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-52
0000 A communication error occurred though the FAX board

is detected.
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code 0004-9766
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
E677-0002 can be displayed when executing [Run Setup] of PS-C1 during printing. [Run Setup] must be
executed when the status is Idle.
16-169
Chapter 16
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC

communication.(DADF-K1) 0002-1787
Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1)(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-53
0001 There is a fault in data communication. An error has been detected 4

The ADF controller or the reader times or more within 1.5 sec
controller PCB is faulty. The connector after the communication
between the reader unit and the ADF has between the reader unit and the
poor connection. ADF has been disrupted.

The finisher controller, pedestal times or more within 1.5 sec
controller, or DC controller PCB is after the communication
faulty. The connector between the between the finisher and the
finisher and the cassette pedestal has machine has been disrupted.
poor contact.
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. 0002-1789
Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-54

The ADF controller or the reader times or more for 1.5 sec after
controller PCB is faulty. The connector the communication is disrupted
between the reader unit and the DADF between the reader unit and the
has poor contact. DADF.
16-170
Chapter 16

The finisher controller, pedestal times or more for 1.5 sec after
controller, or DC controller PCB is the communication between
faulty. The connector between the the finisher and the machine is
finisher and the machine has poor disrupted and, in addition, an
connection. attempt at recovery has failed.
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between
the ADF and the reader unit. 0002-1793
Symptom
E712 There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-55
There is a fault in data communication. The An attempt at recovery fails 5

ADF controller or the reader controller PCB sec or more after the
is faulty. The connector between the reader communication between the
unit an the ADF has poor contact. reader unit and the ADF has
been disrupted.
the finisher and the cassette pedestal. 0002-1796
Symptom
E713 There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-56
There is a fault in data communication. The The communication between

cassette pedestal controller or the finisher the finisher and the machine is
controller PCB is faulty. disrupted.
16-171
Chapter 16
the cassette pedestal and the printer unit. 0002-1798
Symptom
E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-57
There is a fault in data An attempt at recovery fails for 2 sec or

communication. The DC controller more after the communication between
or the cassette pedestal controller the cassette pedestal and the machine
PCB is faulty. has failed.
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history 0002-3272
Symptom
The service mode error history shows E716-0000. However, the main unit was operating normally.
Cause
When the main unit is in standby, if the power cord from the cassette pedestal is pulled out, an error is generated.
The main cause is that, when the main unit is moved forward, the power cord from the pedestal gets tugged out
and the power cord from the main unit is prone to being pulled out.
Items to Check
Check that the cassette pedestal power cord is not being tugged by something.
Field Remedy
If the power cord is being pulled out, explain to the user that, if the power cord is pulled out while the main unit
is activated, an error will be generated.
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is
faulty. 0002-1800
Symptom
E717 The communication with the NE controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
16-172
Chapter 16
T-16-58
0000 The communication with the NE controller is disrupted and

is not resumed within 3 sec thereafter.
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. 0002-1801
Symptom
E719 The coin vendor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-59
0000 The coin vendor cannot be detected at startup.
0011 The card reader cannot be detected at startup.
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a

scanning fault in card reader D1 0002-1960
Symptom
E719-0011 is displayed when the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault in card reader D1.
Description
At the time of installation of the card reader, service mode COPIER > Function > INSTALL > CARD is
performed and then the main unit communicates with the card reader D1. At this time, if the cable is suddenly
disconnected, E000719-0011 will occur.
Cause
Communication error when the card reader D1 cable is disconnected.
Field Remedy
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR, press OK and then turn OFF the main switch.
2) Turn ON the power.
3) When the main unit starts up, 'Department ID and Personal Identification Number entry window' will appear.
Press OK in service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > PWD-CLR and close service mode.
16-173
Chapter 16
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable
to be cleared 0002-1991
Symptom
When the coin vendor is disconnected, E719-0001 is displayed and cannot be cleared, even in the service mode.
Cause
A communication error occurs between the main unit and the coin vendor because the power is turned ON
without resetting the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0'.
Field Remedy
Reset the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0', and turn the power OFF/ON.
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. 0002-1803
Symptom
E731 There is a fault in the UFR board. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-60
3000 The UFR board cannot be recognized.
3001 The UFR board cannot be initialized.
3002 The RAM bus cannot be initialized.
3015 No image data arrives at the main controller PCB.
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. 0002-1809
Symptom
E732 There is a reader communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-61
0001 The reader unit cannot be detected at startup.
9999 The reader unit cannot be detected. The display indicates "Turn the main power switch OFF & ON again".
16-174
Chapter 16
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service
mode COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON 0002-2011
[ Manual-related ]
Description
On a machine equipped with a reader unit, when you perform service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR>
MN-CON], the set value will be changed from "1" to "0" in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> W/
SCNR]. This indicates that the machine is set up as a printer model. At that time, a communication error occurs
between the reader unit, causing E732-9999 to be recorded in the error log. Then, a message like "Turn the
power OFF/ON" appears, and turning the power OFF/ON will automatically make the machine detect the reader
once again (the set value in [W/SCNR] will return from "0" to "1").
Consequently, there is no problem in the machine operation if E733-9999 appears in the error log.
Note: Take notice the following when you need to perform [MN-CON].
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to explain to your customer that all the images stored in the Inboxes
will be cleared.
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to output "P-PRINT" and "USER-PRINT". After performing,
compare the values on the both prints and enter the original values if they are changed.
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) 0002-2012
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, a message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) is displayed. (Refer to SymptomExplanation.)
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
DC power supply unit PCB (1) failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J58 from the DC power supply PCB J158. If there is no
input, check the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC line
input, the DC power supply PCB is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the DC power supply PCB, if faulty.
DC Power Supply PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-175
Chapter 16
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting
up. Please wait" changes to error code indication 0002-2049

Cause
As a result of inspection, the following were found to be a main cause:
- The interface cable connecting the reader unit and the printer unit is not securely fitted.
- The Reader Controller PCB is faulty.
The following incidents were also found although they are not so many.
- The fuse (FU25) on the Fuse PCB is blown out.
- The DC Power Supply PCB is faulty.
- The Interface PCB is faulty.
- The DDI-S Board PCB is faulty.
- The CCD unit and the Reader Controller PCB is not securely connected.
Field Remedy
1. Unplug and plug the interface cable between the reader unit and the printer unit to see whether the host machine
will recover.
2. Make sure that all the connectors on the Interface PCB and the Reader Controller PCB in the reader unit are
securely fitted. If the symptom still recur, go to the step 3.
3. Check whether DC is output from J67 on the Fuse PCB located at the back side of the host machine. If DC output
is confirmed, go to the step 4. If not, go to the step 5.
4. Remove and install the DDI-S Board PCB and the Main Controller PCB (Sub) inside the controller box to see
whether the host machine will recover. If not, replace the Reader Controller PCB with a new one.
5. Check whether DC is input to J53/J56/J57/J58 on the Fuse PCB from the DC Power Supply PCB. If DC input is
confirmed, replace the Fuse PCB with a new one. If not, go to the step 6.
6. Check whether AC is input to the DC Power Supply PCB. If no problem is found with AC power supply, replace
the DC Power Supply PCB with a new one.
In addition to the above, it is possible that the Interface PCB (FM2-0036) or the DDI-S Board PCB (FG3-3136) is
faulty, so check them if necessary.
FG3-2337 Fuse PCB
FG6-8970 (100/120V) / FG6-8971(220/240V) DC Power Supply PCB
FM2-0036 Interface PCB
FG3-3136 DDI-S Board PCB
16-176
Chapter 16
16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results 0002-2488
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, the message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 is displayed.
Cause
DC output failure from the DC fuse PCB J67
Items to Check
1) Check whether the lattice connector of the interface cable is securely inserted. The lattice connector connects
the reader and the printer (located at the back).
2) Check whether the wiring from the lattice connector to the distribution board J67 is secured.
3) Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J67.
4) If no, check whether DC line is output to the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57 and J58 from the DC power supply PCB.
If yes, the fuse PCB Ass'y is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
Fuse PCB Ass'y Part No. FG3-2337-000
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. 0002-1811
Symptom
E733 There is a printer communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-62
0000 The printer unit cannot be detected at startup.
0001 There is no response to an error command from the printer

unit.
16-177
Chapter 16
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error 0002-3608
SymptomTitle
E733-0001: Printer communication error Error Code
SpotDisposal
Since there is a possibility that the connector J112 on the DC controller PCB is not securely connected, check
the connection.
In the past, the flat cable connected to the main controller PCB was unintentionally disconnected at the time of
installation of the Resolution Switching Board, resulting in this error code.
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. 0002-1816
Symptom
E740 The Ethernet board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-63
0002 The MAC address is illegal.
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. 0002-1817
Symptom
E744 The language file is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-64
0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and the
bootable version differ.
0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too big.
0003 The language specified in Config.txt on the HDD

cannot be found.
0004 A switchover to a language on the HDD cannot be

made.
1000 The installed boot ROM is of a different type.
16-178
Chapter 16
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. 0002-1818
Symptom
E745 The TokenRing board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-65
0001 An attempt at initialization fails (PCI).
0002 The MAC address is faulty.
0003 The board information cannot be obtained.
0004 There is a connection fault.
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code 0005-6125

Description
E747-8702 can be displayed when the image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is
faulty.
Cause
In the field, the tip of the flat cable that connects the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB was peeled
off, causing an error in communication.
Field Remedy
Inspect the flat cable to make sure of no abnormality. If there is, replace it with a new one.
Flat Cable: FH2-6983
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory
control/communication ASIC is faulty. 0002-1836
Symptom
E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-66
--- IC1010 (for image processing ASIC) on the main controller PCB
or IC1012 (memory control/ communication control ASIC,
CPU) has a fault (e.g., image data transfer error).
16-179
Chapter 16
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation 0002-4682
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code.
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code 0002-8535
Symptom
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the interface PCB solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305, J306, J309, J399) are not connected properly.
Unplug and insert all of them. If the symptom is not still solved, replace the PCB with a new one.
16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code 0005-6126

Description
E747-00FF can be displayed when image signal is not sent within a specific period of time.
Cause
In the field, the tip of the flat cable that connects the Reader Controller PCB and the Interface PCB was peeled
off, causing an error in communication.
Field Remedy
Inspect the flat cable to make sure of no abnormality. If there is, replace it with a new one.
Flat Cable: FH2-6983
16-180
Chapter 16
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code 0003-8583

Description
This error code indicates that an error has occurred during data writing to the internal memory of the drum unit.
It can be displayed at FAX reception and during auto gradation adjustment. It will not disappear even after
replacement of the Bk drum.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the memory PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the memory PCB (FG3-2345) with a new one.
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. 0002-1839
Symptom
E804 The cooling fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-67
0000 The power supply cooling The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has
fan is faulty been identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
0004 The controller fan is faulty. The controller fan has been identified as being at rest.
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code 0002-1900
Symptom
Description
This error code is displayed when a halt of the cooling fan (FM7) in the main controller ass'y is detected.
Cause
The connector of the cooling fan (FM7) attached to the rear cover of the main controller ass'y is disconnected.
Field Remedy
Check whether the snap tight connector of the cooling fan (FM7) is securely connected. If not, securely connect
it.
16-181
Chapter 16
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan
(FM7) which is fixed on the controller box 0002-2937
Symptom
Don't know where to install the jack of the controller fan (FM7) that is installed onto the controller box cover.
If the fan jack is not inserted, E804-000 is displayed.
Cause
The controller fan (FM7) cable should be inserted into J1512 on the distribution board PCB at the bottom of the
controller box, but the position can't be seen because of the cables inside the machine.
Field Remedy
Insert the controller fan (FM7) cable into J1512 on the distribution board PCB.
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code 0002-8536
Symptom
E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code
Description
E804-0004 is displayed when a halt of the controller fan (FM7) is detected.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the fuse PCB was found to be faulty (FU12 was burnt.).
Field Remedy
There is a snap-tight connector of the controller fan (FM7) at the rear cover of the main controller. Check the
connection.
- If the connection is poor, reinsert the connector.
- If there is no problem in the connection, it is possible that the fuse (FU12) has been burnt. So, check whether
it is burnt or not. If it seems to be burnt, replace the fuse PCB with a new one.
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. 0002-1841
Symptom
E805 The cleaner fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-68
0001 The DC controller tried to start it, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
16-182
Chapter 16
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. 0002-1844
Symptom
E805 The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-69
0000 The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
16.3.11 FAX # Code
16.3.11.1 Åî037 0004-0666
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This code indicates that an image memory over error has occurred upon FAX reception. It can be cleared by
turning the power OFF/ON.
16.3.12 FAX ## Code
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code 0003-8644

Cause
Because of a software bug, there might occurs a mismatch during the communication process between the FAX
board and the main controller PCB.
Field Remedy
16-183
Chapter 16
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code 0004-8998
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
##281: Displayed when the number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal has been exceeded.
##104: Displayed when RTN or PIN has been received.
Change the settings in the order designated below:

1. In service mode [FAX>#2MENU 007], set at '8'. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW
SW17>bit1], set at '1' in order to extend the setting range for the transmission level higher than -7dB. Then,
change the transmission level again.
2. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW03>bit4], set at '1' in order to prevent any
error occurrences caused by an echo.
3. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW04>bit2], set at '1' so that the procedure
signal can be detected more easily by other party.
4. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#2MENU 005], set at '1' in order to activate the NL
equalizer.
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code 0003-6301

Cause
##796 can be displayed when multiple sheets of A4R have been sent.
Field Remedy
16-184
Chapter 16
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components

16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit 0001-0290
The reader unit has no clutch or solenoid.
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit 0001-0320
T-16-70
Item Notation Name Description
Clutch CL1 duplex registration clutch matches the position of images on

double-sided prints.
CL2 duplex pickup clutch controls the timing of pickup for

double-sided printing.
Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup for
the manual feed block.
SL2 delivery path switching solenoid 1 switches over positions of the

delivery tray.
SL3 cassette 1 pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup from

the cassette 1.
SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup from

the cassette 2.
SL5 delivery path switching solenoid 2 switches over the paths in the
delivery/feeder unit.
16-185
Chapter 16
SL1
CL2
SL3
SL5 SL4
CL1
SL2
F-16-69
16.4.2 Motor
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit 0001-0335
T-16-71
Motor M1 scanner motor drives the scanner system.
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit 0001-0355
T-16-72
Motor M1 drum ITB motor drives the drum/intermediate transfer unit.
M2 laser scanner motor (Y) drives the laser scanner (Y).
M3 laser scanner motor (M) drives the laser scanner (M).
M4 laser scanner motor (C) drives the laser scanner (C).
M5 laser scanner motor (Bk) drives the laser scanner (Bk).
M6 cassette 1 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 1.
M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2.
M8 registration motor drives the registration roller.
M9 pre-registration motor drives the pre-registration roller.
16-186
Chapter 16
M10 delivery vertical path motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 2.
M11 face-down delivery motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 1.
M12 developing motor (Y) drives the developing unit (Y).
M13 developing motor (M) drives the developing unit (M).
M14 developing motor (C) drives the developing unit (C).
M15 developing motor (Bk) drives the developing unit (Bk).
M16 image slope correction motor (Y) corrects image slope (Y).
M17 image slope correction motor (M) corrects image slope (M).
M18 image slope correction motor (C) corrects image slope (C).
M19 image slope control motor (Bk) corrects image slope (Bk).
M20 toner container motor (Y) stirs toner inside the toner container (Y).
M21 toner container motor (M) stirs toner inside the toner container (M).
M22 toner container motor (C) stirs toner inside the toner container (C).
M23 toner container motor (Bk) stirs toner inside the toner container (Bk).
M24 fixing motor drives the fixing unit.
M25 horizontal registration motor matches the horizontal registration position for paper.
M26 duplex feeder motor moves paper to the duplex unit.
16-187
M1
M9
M8
M26
M25
M2 M11
M3
M4 M16
M17 M10
M5 M20
M18
M21
M19
M22
M23 M12
M13 M24
M14
M15
M1
M6
M7
F-16-70
16.4.3 Fan
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit 0001-0392
The reader unit does not have fans.
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit 0001-0384
T-16-73
Fan FM 1 power supply cooling fan cools the power supply unit.
FM2 fixing heat discharge fan discharges heat from the fixing unit.
FM3 machine heat discharge fan discharges heat from inside the machine.
FM4 cleaner fan limits overheating inside the machine.
FM5 delivery cooling fan cools paper for delivery.

Chapter 16
FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools paper for manual feeding.
FM7 controller fan cools the inside of the controller box.
FM7
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM5
FM4
FM1
F-16-71
16.4.4 Sensor
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit 0001-0393
T-16-74
Sensor CF1 original size sensor detects original size.
CF2 original size sensor detects original size.
SR1 copyboard cover sensor detects the state (open/closed) of the

copyboard cover.
SR2 home position sensor detects the home position of the

scanner.
16-189
Chapter 16
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit 0001-0396
T-16-75
Sensor PS1 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(Y) inside the toner container (Y).
PS2 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(M) inside the toner container (M)
(C) inside the toner container (C)
(Bk) inside the toner container (Bk)
PS5 fixing feeder unit open/closed detects the sate (open/closed) of the
Sensor fixing feeder unit.
PS6 face-down delivery sensor 2 detects the passage of paper in the

face-down delivery assembly.
PS7 cassette 1 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of

power inside the cassette 1.
PS8 center delivery tray full sensors detects the state (full of paper) inside
the face-down delivery assembly.
PS9 manual feed last paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS10 manual feed paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS11 pickup vertical path cover open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed sensor pickup vertical path cover.
PS12 face-down delivery sensor 1 detects face-down delivery.
PS13 delivery vertical path cover detects the state (open/closed) of the
open/closed sensor delivery vertical path cover.
PS14 cassette 1 paper level sensor (A) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 1 (A)
PS15 cassette 1 paper level sensor (B) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 1 B
PS16 cassette 1 retry paper sensor detects paper retry operation for the
cassette 1
PS17 cassette 2 retry paper sensor detects paper retry operation for the
cassette 2
PS18 cassette 2 paper level sensor (B) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 2 (B)
PS19 cassette 2 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of

paper inside the cassette 2.
16-190
Chapter 16
PS20 cassette 2 paper level sensor (A) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 2 (A)
PS21 duplex registration sensor detects double-sided registration.
PS22 duplex horizontal registration detects the position of paper in sub

Sensor scanning direction.
PS23 front cover open/closed sensor detects the state (open/closed) of the
front cover.
PS24 duplex pickup sensor detects pickup from the duplex unit.
PS25 fixing delivery sensor detects delivery in the fixing unit.
PS26 registration sensor detects paper before registration.
PS27 fixing inlet sensor detects movement of paper to the

fixing unit.
PS28 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
Sensor manual feed unit.
VR1 slide resistor detects the width of paper for manual

feed.
OHP1 transparency sensor (front) detects a transparency.
OHP2 transparency sensor (rear) detects a transparency.
EV1 environment sensor environment sensor
TH1 fixing main thermistor detect the temperature in the middle

of the fixing roller.
TH2 fixing sub thermistor detects the temperature at the ends of

the fixing roller.
TP1 fixing thermal switch detects the temperature at the ends of

the fixing roller.
TPS1 SALT sensor stabilizes development

characteristics (SALT).
TS1 ATR sensor (Y) executes automatic toner density

correction
(ATR; Y)
TS2 ATR sensor (M) executes automatic toner density

correction
(ATR; M)
TS3 ATR sensor (C) executes automatic toner density

correction
(ATR; C)
TS4 ATR sensor (Bk) executes automatic toner density

correction
(ATR; Bk)
16-191
PS16
PS7
PS14
CF2 PS15
CF1 PS17
PS19
SR1 SR2
PS20
PS18
VR1
PS10
PS9
OHP2
PS26
OHP1
PS25 PS22
PS27
PS21
PS23
PS4 PS28
PS3
PS2 EV1
PS8
PS1
TS4
PS13 TPS1
PS12 TS3
PS6
TS2
TS1
PS5
PS24
TH2
PS11
TH1
TP1
F-16-72
16.4.5 Switch
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit 0001-0425
The reader unit does not have switches.
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit 0001-0430
T-16-76
Switch SW1 main power switch turns on/off the main power.
SW2 cassette 1 size detecting detects the size of paper inside the
switch cassette 1.
Chapter 16
SW3 cassette 2 size detecting detects the size of paper inside the
switch cassette 2.
MSW1 front cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the

detection switch 1 front Cover
MSW2 front cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the

detection switch 2 front Cover
MSW3 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
detection switch 1 manual feed unit.
MSW4 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
detection switch 2 manual feed unit.
MSW5 fixing feeding unit open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed detection switch 1 fixing feeder unit.
MSW6 fixing feeding unit open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed detection switch 2 fixing feeder unit.
MSW5
MSW6
MSW1
MSW2
MSW3
MSW4
SW2
SW1
SW3
F-16-73
16-193
Chapter 16
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit 0001-0436
T-16-77
Lamp LA1 scanning lamp illuminates an original.
Heater H1 anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on a mirror.
H2 anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on a lens.
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit 0001-0437
T-16-78
Heater H1 fixing main heater main main heater (controls the temperature
of the fixing roller)
H2 fixing sub heater sub heater (controls the temperature of

the fixing roller)
H3 fixing heat retaining heat retaining heater (keeps the

heater pressure roller heated)
H4 cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by

paper inside the cassette.
Breaker ELCB1 leakage breaker leakage breaker
Power cord PLG1 power cord power cord
Speaker SP1 speaker speaker
16-194
Chapter 16
H2
LA1
H1
H1
H2
H3
H4
SP1
ELCB1
PLG1
F-16-74
16.4.7 PCBs
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit 0001-0442
T-16-79
Ref. Name Description
[1] reader controller PCB controls the reader unit/ADF.
[2] interface PCB communicates image information read by the reader unit to
the printer unit.
[3] inverter PCB controls the scanning lamp.
[4] CCD/AP PCB drives the CCD/processes analog images.
[5] fuse PCB controls mirrors/lens heater.
16-195
Chapter 16
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit 0001-0448
T-16-80
[6] DC controller PCB controls the power supply to the printer unit/
accessories
[7] Laser driver PCB (Y) controls the drive of the laser unit (Y)
[8] Laser driver PCB (M) controls the drive of the laser unit (M)
[9] Laser driver PCB (C) controls the drive of the laser unit (C)
[10] Laser driver PCB (Bk) controls the drive of the laser unit (Bk)
[11] BD detection PCB (Y) detects the laser beam (Y)
[12] BD detection PCB (M) detects the laser beam (M)
[13] BD detection PCB (C) detects the laser beam (C)
[14] BD detection PCB (Bk) detects the laser beam (Bk)
[15] Waste toner detection PCB (light- detects the level of toner inside the waste
emitting) toner container
[16] Waste toner detection PCB (light- detects the level of toner inside the waste
receiving) toner container
[17] Auto registration sensor F (light- reads the image position correction pattern
emitting) detection PCB
[18] Auto registration sensor F (light- reads the image position correction pattern
receiving) detection PCB
[19] Auto registration sensor R (light- reads the image position correction pattern
emitting) detection PCB
[20] Auto registration sensor R (light- reads the image position correction pattern
receiving) detection PCB
[21] Duplex driver PCB controls the sensors and motors inside the
duplex unit
[22] Microswitch PCB detects the state (open/closed) of the manual

feed unit and front cover
[23] DC power supply PCB (1) supplies DC power
[24] DC power supply PCB (2) supplies DC power
[25] Fuse PCB distributes voltage from the DC power

supply; communicates with the controller
unit and DC controller PCB
[26] Heater control PCB controls the main heater
[27] HV1 PCB executes charging/development
[28] HV2 PCB executes primary transfer
16-196
Chapter 16
[29] HV1-SUB PCB detects charging AC current; controls

developing AC output; distributes signals;
assists upstream mechanisms, assists
downstream mechanisms
[30] HV2-SUB PCB power input
[31] HV3 PCB secondary transfer
[32] HV4 PCB assists upstream mechanisms (sends to HV1)
[33] Relay PCB 1 reads memory information from the drum

unit
[34] Cassette heater PCB controls the cassette heater
[35] Power distribution PCB relays power to individual PCBs
[36] ECO-ID PCB assists image processing
[37] Control key PCB control key
[38] Main controller PCB (main) processes image data for output to the printer
unit
[39] Main controller PCB (sub) processes conversion input image data of
signals from the reader unit
[40] Differential PCB converts signals from the reader unit
[41] Control panel CPU PCB controls the control panel
[42] Control panel KEY PCB controls the input from the keypad
[43] Control panel inverter PCB controls the backlight of the LCD
16-197
[33]
[10]
[39]
[9]
[8] [14]
[7] [13]
[38]
[12] [42]
[35]
[11]
[43]
[34] [25] [41]
[26]
[24]
[23]
[15]
[16]
[5]
[3]
[4] [36]
[37] [2]
[1]
[40]
[18]
[17] [22] [6] [29]
[19] [31]
[20]
[32]
[27]
[27]
[24]
[28]
[31]
[27]
[27]
[21]
F-16-75
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal
16.4.8.1 Plain Pedestal-C1 0001-0488
T-16-81
Name Ref. Description
PCB [1] pedestal controller PCB controls the pedestal.
[2] power supply PCB supplies power.

Chapter 16
[1]
[2]
F-16-76
16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by
PCB
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),
and the Check Pins by PCB 0001-0494
Of the resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine, those needed in servicing
the machine in the field are discussed:
Those VRs and check pins that are not found in the lists are designed exclusively for use at the factory, requiring
special tools and measuring instruments. Do not touch them in the field.
Some LEDs permit flow of current when OFF; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
---VRs that may be used in the field.
---VRs that must not be used in the field.
16-199
Chapter 16
16.4.9.2 Main Controller PCB (main) 0001-0514
LED1001
LED1002 LED1003
F-16-77
T-16-82
Notation Description
LED1001 in operation
LED1002 +3.3V (non-all night) being supplied
LED1003 +3.3V (all-night) being supplied
16-200
Chapter 16
16.4.9.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) 0001-0728
LED3 LED2 LED1

F-16-78
T-16-83
LED1 +3.3V (all-nigh) being supplied
LED3 +5V (non-all night) being supplied
16.4.9.4 Reader Controller PCB 0001-0730
SW1
F-16-79
T-16-84
SW1 selects paper configuration for original size detection
16-201
Chapter 16
SW1 SW1 SW1

ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
1 2 1 2 1 2
AB configuration A configuration Inch configuration
F-16-80
16.4.9.5 Inverter PCB 0001-0732
VR31
F-16-81
T-16-85
VR31 for factory
16.4.9.6 Differential PCB 0001-0734
LED1
F-16-82
T-16-86
16-202
Chapter 17 Self
Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
17.1 Error Code Details ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1

17.1.1 Error Code Details Table ........................................................................................................................ 17-1
Chapter 17
17.1 Error Code Details

17.1.1 Error Code Details Table 0006-4868
T-17-1
Code Detail Description Timing of detection
E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate.
0001 After power-on, the output of the

noncontact thermistor does not
reach 40 deg C within 180 sec.
E001 The fixing unit is overheating.
0001 The high-temperature detection

port continues to remain ON for
500 msec.
0003 The reading of the no-contact

thermistor remains 250 deg C for
500 msec.
0004 The difference in temperature

between the non-contact thermistor
and the end thermistor remains 80
deg C or more for 500 msec.
0005 At the end of initial rotation, the

difference in temperature between
the sub (end) thermistor and the
main (non-contact) thermistor is 20
deg C or more for 100 msec.
(A reversal in temperature (caused,
for example, by a piece of residual
paper) is detected.)
E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate.
0002 The output of the non-contact

thermistor does not reach 60 deg C
within 240 sec after it has reached
40 deg C.

60 deg C.
17-1
Chapter 17

90 deg C.

120 deg C.

140 deg C.

160 deg C.

180 deg C.

within 300 sec after power-on.

120 deg C.
E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby.
0001 After standby, the reading of the

non-contact thermistor remains 120
deg C or less for 10 sec.
E004 The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty.
0001 A short circuit of the triac is

detected fo 500 msec continuously.
0002 An open circuit of the temperature

detection thermistor inside the non-
contact thermistor is detected for
500 msec continuously.
17-2
Chapter 17
0003 A short circuit of the temperature

detecting thermistor inside the non-
0004 An open circuit of the infrared

0005 A short circuit of the infrared

0006 While printing is under way, the

thermistor detects 150 deg C or less.
0007 While printing is under way, the

thermistor detects 140 deg C or less.
E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty.
0001 The ITB drum motor fails to The lock (normal state) signal is not
rotate. detected within 2 sec after the ITB
drum motor control signal has gone
ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002 The ITB drum motor fails to The lock (normal state) signal stops
rotate after it has rotated. 0.5 sec later.
0003 The lock (normal state) signal

remains even when the ITB drum
motor has been stopped (i.e., the
lock (normal state) signal is
detected continuously for 2 sec after
the ITB drum motor control signal
has been turned OFF).
E020 There is a fault associated with the drum/developer.
For the first 2 digits of detail code xx12 through xxD0,
xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: Bk
17-3
Chapter 17
xx20 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
ATR sensor. The drum unit is not drum unit has been fitted. It is
fitted normally, or is faulty. detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
assembly.
SALT sensor. drum unit has been fitted. It is
detected during ATR control or in
about 150 sec after idle rotation of
The ITB has deteriorated. detected during ATR control or in
ATR sensor. The setting of the drum unit has been fitted. It is
ATR sensor computation value is detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
wrong.. The drum unit is not idle rotation of the developing
fitted properly, or is faulty. assembly.
xx34 The sample image fails to be The fault can occur as when a new
drawn in ATR control. There is a drum unit has been fitted. It is
fault/open circuit in the SALT detected during ATR control or in
sensor. The drum unit is faulty. about 150 sec after idle rotation of
The ITB has deteriorated. the developing assembly.
detached during ATR control or in
xx40 The ATR sensor communication The fault can occur as when a new
value is faulty. There is a fault/ drum unit has been fitted. It is
open circuit in the ATR sensor. detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
The drum unit has been fitted idle rotation of the developing
improperly. (The machine cannot assembly.
detect the drum unit). The drum
unit is faulty.

computation value is faulty (set being formed. It is detected when
when a new drum unit is fitted). toner supply operation is started.
17-4
Chapter 17

target value is faulty (set when a being formed. It is detected when
new drum is fitted; the value is toner supply operation is started.
extremely small).

target value is faulty (set when a being formed. It is detected when
new drum unit is fitted; the value toner supply operation is started.
is extremely small).
xx80 The actual value is considerably The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit
is fitted. The SALT sensor is
faulty.
xx81 The actual value is considerably The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is
fitted.
xx83 The detected ITB surface

reflection rate is faulty. (The
value is appreciably high.)
xxA0 The measured value of the The fault occurs when an image is
developer concentration is being formed. It is detected when
considerably low. The ATR toner supply operation is started.
sensor is faulty. The SALT
sensor is faulty. The ITB is
soiled.
xxB0 The drum unit is approaching the The fault occurs when an image is
end of its life and is causing the being formed. It is detected when
T/D ratio to drop. The ATR toner supply operation is started.
xxB2 The value is extremely high when

compared with the T/D ratio
detected when a new drum unit is
set.
xxC0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing being formed.
assembly is faulty. The
developing assembly is supplied
with toner excessively. The ATR
17-5
Chapter 17
xxD0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing being formed and, in addition, when
assembly has failed. The toner the T/D ratio drops while 20 prints
cartridge motor fails to rotate. are being made continuously. It is
The toner container is empty. The detected when toner supply
toner supply mouth of the drum operation is started.
unit is damaged. The ATR sensor
has an open circuit.
For the first 2 digits of detail code
xxEE,
xx=00: fault in access to drum
unit
xx=01: fault in access to toner
container
E032 The counter of the NE controller fails to operate.
0000 The counter function of the NE

controller fails to operate.
E061 Charging error
xxdd The charging DC bias exceeds

the upper limit.
E110 The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty.
0110 The rotation of the Y laser The motor lock signal remains in an
scanner motor is faulty. unlock state for 1 sec or more while
the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
0210 The rotation of the M laser The motor lock signal remains in an
operation.
0310 The rotation of the C laser The motor lock signal remains in an
operation.
0410 The rotation of the K laser The motor lock signal remains in an
operation.
E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position.
0000 The No. 1 mirror base moves in The home position sensor does not
reverse but does not move to its go ON within a specific period of
home position. time.
17-6
Chapter 17
0001 The No. 1 mirror base moves The home position sensor does not
forward but does not move from go OFF within a specific period of
its home position. time.
E220 A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp.
0000 The intensity of the scanning During shading adjustment at time

lamp has dropped. of power-on, the intensity detected
by the CCD is below a specific
level.
E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty.
0000 There is a fault in the serial

communication between the main
controller and the DC controller.
0002 While print is under way, there is no

appropriate response from the DC
controller within a specific period
of time.
E243 The control panel is faulty.
0000 There is a fault in the

communication between the
controller and the control panel.
E248 The EEPROM on the reader controller PCB is faulty.
0000 The ID stored in EEPROM (read

when the main power is turned on)
and the ID stored in the flash ROM
fail to match.
E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction.
0000 A time-out has occurred in The shading processing does not

shading operation. end 1 sec after it has started.
0001 A time-out has occurred in gain/ The gain/offset correction (setting

offset correction by the analog operator) by the analog processor
processor. does not end 1 sec after it has
started.
E315 The image data is faulty.
0001 A time-out condition has occurred

in encoding/decoding processing of
image data.
17-7
Chapter 17
0008 The ASIC (used for compression/

expansion processing) on the image
conversion board is faulty.
While encoding is under way, a
time-out condition occurs (i.e.,
there is no response within 30 sec).
000e The data is damaged, there is a

memory error on the HD.

expansion) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While decoding is under way, a
time-out condition occurs.

board is faulty.
While rotation processing is under
way, an image data transfer error
occurs.

board is faulty.
While rotation processing is under
way, a time-out condition occurs.
0034 The ASIC (used for enlargement/

reduction) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While enlargement/reduction
processing is under way, an image
data transfer error occurs.
0036 The ASIC (used for enlargement/

reduction) on the image conversion
board is faulty.
While enlargement/reduction
processing is under way, a time-out
condition occurs.
E351 The ECO-ID PCB is faulty.
0000 There is a fault in the initial

communication.
E402 There is a fault in the feeder motor.
17-8
Chapter 17
The feeder motor (M2) fails to The feeder motor encoder pulse is
rotate. The feeder motor clock not detected within 0.3 sec after the
sensor (SR1) is faulty. DF feeder motor drive signal has
been turned ON.
E404 There is a fault in the delivery motor.
The face-down delivery motor The face-down delivery motor

(M3) fails to rotate. The encoder pulse is not detected within
facedown delivery motor clock 0.3 sec after the face-down delivery
sensor (SR7) is faulty. motor drive signal has been turned
ON.
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication.
There is a fault in data The communication between the

communication. machine and the finisher remains
disrupted for 5 sec or more.
E503 There is a fault in saddle communication.
0002 There is a fault in data The communication between the

communication. saddle stitcher controller PCB and
the finisher controller PCB remains
disrupted for 5 sec or more.
E504 There is a fault in stack size detection.
0001 The height sensor (PS1) is faulty. The communication between the
height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented. Or,
there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002 The height sensor (PS1) is faulty. The communication between the
height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented for 0.1
sec or more.
0003 The connector of the height This fault is detected at power-on.

sensor (PS1) is faulty.
0004 The DIP switch for the height There is a fault in the adjustment of
sensor (PS1) is not adjusted the sensor by the DIP switch.
correctly.
E505 There is a fault in the backup RAM.
0001 The checksum value of the This fault is detected at power-on.

finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E512 There is a fault in delivery.
17-9
Chapter 17
0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor
(M2), or feed motor clock sensor fails to generate the target number
(PI10) is faulty. of clock pulses within 10 sec at the
start of operation.
0002 The delivery roller, feeder motor There is no clock pulse for a feed
(M2), or feeder motor clock equivalent for 0.2 during
sensor (PI10) is faulty. communication.
E514 There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction).
The stack processing motor (M2) The stack delivery lever fails to
or the stack delivery lever home reach its home position when the
position sensor (S8) is faulty. The stack processing motor has been
connector is disconnected. The driven for a specific period of time
stack delivery belt or the return at start of operation.
roller is faulty.
E530 There is a fault in alignment.
0001 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not leave
alignment motor (M3), aligning the aligning plate home position
plate home position sensor (PI6), sensor when the alignment motor
or aligning plate. has been driven for 2 sec.
0002 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not return to
rear alignment motor (M3), rear its home position when the aligning
aligning plate home position plate motor has been driven for 2
sensor (PI6), or rear aligning sec.
plate.
E531 There is a fault in stapling.
0001 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not leave the
for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not return from the
for 0.5 sec.
E532 There is a fault in the shift of the stapler.
0001 The stapler shift motor (M4) or The stapler shift base does not leave
the stapler shift home position the stapler shift home position
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a sensor when the stapler shift motor
fault in the path of the stapler has been driven for 4 sec.
shift base.
17-10
Chapter 17
0002 The stapler shift motor (M4) or The stapler shift base does not
the stapler shift home position return from the stapler shift home
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a position sensor when the stapler
fault in the path of the stapler shift motor has been driven for 4
shift base. sec.
E535 There is a fault in the swing mechanism.
0001 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide closed switch does
swing guide open sensor (PI18) is not go ON when the swing motor
faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0002 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide open switch does
swing guide closed switch (MS6) not go ON when the swing motor
is faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0003 The safety area switch (MS3) or The swing guide closed switch is
the swing guide switch 2 (MS6) OFF when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
is faulty. position of the safety area switch
while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
0004 The swing motor (M7) or the There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
swing motor clock sensor (PI20) while swinging operation is under
is faulty. way.
E537 There is a fault in front alignment.
The front alignment motor (M3) The aligning plate fails to reach the
or the front aligning plate home aligning plate home position sensor
position sensor (S6) is faulty. An when the rear alignment motor has
excess load is imposed on the been driven for a specific period of
front aligning plate. time, or fails to leave the aligning
plate home position sensor.
E540 There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray.
0001 The tray ascent/descent motor The ascent/descent operation does

(M5), the tray ascent/descent not end within 15 sec after the tray
motor clock sensor (PI9/PI19), or assent/descent motor has been
tray home position sensor (PIE) driven; or, the tray home position is
is faulty. not detected when it has been
driven for 15 sec.
0002 The tray upper limit detecting The tray upper limit detecting
switch (MS5) is faulty. switch is ON during tray ascent/
descent operation.
0003 The tray ascent/descent motor There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent or more from the clock sensor when
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/ the tray ascent/descent motor has
PI19) is faulty. been driven.
17-11
Chapter 17
E577 There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction).
The stack processing motor (M2) The return roller fails to reach the
or the return controller home return roller home position sensor
position sensor (S3) is faulty. The when the stack processing motor
connector is disconnected. The has been driven for a required
stack delivery lever or the return period of time.
roller is faulty.
E580 There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray.
The stack tray ascent/descent The stack tray upper limit sensor
motor (M5), stack tray paper goes ON while the stack tray
height sensor (S10), or the stack ascent/descent motor is in
tray ascent/descent motor clock operation, or the clock pulse of the
sensor (S9) is faulty. The stack tray direction motor clock
connector is disconnected. An sensor is not detected 15 times or
excess load is imposed on the more within 0.8 sec.
stack tray ascent/descent motor. The stack tray does not reach the
stack tray height sensor within 4 sec
after the stack tray ascent/descent
motor has started ascent operation.
E584 There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2).
0001 The No. 2 feed motor (M8) or the The shutter open sensor does not go
shutter open sensor (PI5) is ON when the No. 2 feed motor has
faulty. been rotated in reverse for 1 sec or
more.
0002 The No 2 feed motor (M8) or the The shutter closed switch does not
shutter closed switch (MS4) is go ON when the No. 2 feed motor
faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec
or more.
0003 The safety area detecting switch The shutter closed switch is OFF
(MS3) or the shutter closed when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
switch (MS4) is faulty. position of the safety area switch
while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
E5F0 There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle.
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go ON
positioning plate home position when the paper positioning plate
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1.33 sec.
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go OFF
positioning plate home position when the paper position plate motor
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. has been driven for 1 sec.
17-12
Chapter 17
E5F1 There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle.
0001 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The number of detection pluses of
the paper fold motor clock sensor the paper fold motor clock sensor
(PI4S) is faulty. falls below a specific value.
0002 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The state of the paper fold home
the paper fold motor clock sensor position sensor remains unchanged
(PI4S) is faulty. when the paper fold motor has been
driven for 3 sec.
E5F2 There is a fault in the saddle guide.
0001 The guide motor (M2S) or the The guide home position sensor
guide home position sensor does notgo ON when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty. motor has been rotated for 0.455
sec.
0002 The guide motor (M3S) or the The guide home position sensor
guide home position sensor does not go OFF when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1 sec.
E5F3 There is a fault in saddle alignment.
0001 The alignment motor (M5S) or The aligning plate home position
the aligning plate home position sensor does not go ON when the
sensor (PI5S) is faulty. alignment motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec. (initially, driven for
1.67 sec)
0002 The alignment motor (M5S) or The alignment plate home position
the aligning plate home position sensor does not go OFF when the
sensor (PI5S) is faulty. alignment motor has been driven
for 1 sec.
E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear.
0001 The stapler motor (rear, M6S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stacking home position does not go OFF when the stitch
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. motor (rear) has been rotated
clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stitch motor (rear, M67S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go ON when the stitch
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. motor (rear) has been rotated in
reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
E5F5 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front.
0001 The stitch motor (front, M7S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go OFF when the stitch
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. motor (front) has been driven
clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
17-13
Chapter 17
0002 The stitch motor (front, M7S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go ON when the stitch
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. motor (front) has been driven in
reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
E5F6 There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate.
0001 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate position sensor does not go ON
home position sensor (PI4S) is when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty. has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
0002 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate position sensor does not go OFF
home position sensor (PI14S) is when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty. has been driven for 80 msec.
0003 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate edge position sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor OFF when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 80 msec.
0004 The paper pushing plate motor The number of detection pulses of
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate the paper pushing plate motor clock
motor clock sensor (PI1S) is sensor has dropped below a specific
faulty. value.
0005 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate edge positioning sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor ON when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or
more.
E5F8 There is a fault in the saddle connector.
0001 The connector of the guide home The connector of the guide home
position sensor (PI13S) is faulty. position sensor has been identified
to have been disconnected.
0002 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate home position plate home position sensor is
sensor (PI14S) is faulty. identified to have been
disconnected.
0003 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate leading edge plate position sensor is identified to
position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. have been disconnected.
E5F9 There is a fault in the saddle switch.
17-14
Chapter 17
0001 The inlet cover switch (MS1S), The inlet cover switch is identified
front cover switch (MS2S), or to be open for 1 sec or more after
delivery cover switch (MS3S) is the start of initial rotation or of
faulty. printing in the host machine with
any of the following sensor
identifying the cover to be closed:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
0002 The front cover switch (MS2S) or The front cover switch is identified
the delivery cover switch (MS3S) to be open for 1 sec or more after
is faulty. the start of initial rotation or of
printing in the host machine with
any of the following sensors
identifying the cover to be closed:
(PI2S)
0003 The delivery cover switch The delivery cover switch is

(MS3S) is faulty. identified to be open for 1 sec or
more after the start of initial
rotation or of printing in the host
machine with any of the following
sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
(PI2S)
E602 The hard disk is faulty.
0001 The fault may be a HD detection

error, in which the HD cannot be
detected. The machine may fail to
become ready (returning an error
code).
0002 The startup file is absent. The

program for the main CPU does not
exist on the HD, in BOOTDEV/
BOOT or the like.
17-15
Chapter 17
0003 The fault is a HD write/abort error.

The machine fails to read sectors of
the HD.
0004 At power-on, an error is detected as

part of a check made on the control
table for "image storage area." (Re-
install the system software, or
replace the HDD.)
0005 It is a fault in the detection of the

HD controller IC. It is detected
when the HD controller IC cannot
be recognized or an error is detected
in it.
0006 The auxiliary startup file is absent.

The correct SUB CPU program
does not exist on the HD or in
BOOTDEV/BOOT or the like.
0007 The color profile file does not exist.

The correct color profile file does
not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL or the
like.
01XX The partition DOSDEV is faulty.

02XX The partition FSTDEV is faulty.


04XX The partition FSTPDEV is faulty.


06XX The partition PDLDEV is faulty.


08XX The partition BOOTDEV is faulty.


17-16
Chapter 17
FFXX A fault exists in a partition that

cannot be identified. (For detail
code, see below.)
Detail code of E602
Last 2 bytes of detail code (indicated by XX) Description
01 Device error: sector, write/abort,

other HDD access (driver) error
02 File system (logic) error: error

detection by check processing;
mounting failure
03 Other error: HDD connector fault;

HDD detection failure; secondary
error as of DRAM fault
10 HD controller HD controller IC,

driver No. error
11 HD controller IC, driver not

installed
12 HD controller IC, system error
13 HD controller IC, device error
14 HD controller IC, parameter error
21 packet R/W file operation, system

error
22 packet R/W file operation,

parameter error
23 packet R/W file operation, packet

DMC error
24 packet R/W file operation, packet

DMAC time-out
25 packet R/W file operation, HD

controller IC error
E604 There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM).
0000 The remaining space in image

memory is inadequate for the
intended write/read operation.
E605 The battery for image memory is faulty.
A specific drop in voltage has been

detected.
E606 The hard disk is faulty.
17-17
Chapter 17
0001 A HD mounting error is detected

when the HD is booted from BOOT
ROM.
0002 A reading error is detected when the

HD is booted from BOOTROM.
E674 The fax board is faulty.
0000
E674 Communication error with PS print server unit C1
0003 While the PS Print Server Unit C1

is starting up, a communication
error occurs.
0010 A controller other than a PS Print

Server Unit C1 is detected.
0080 A communication error occurs after

the PS Print Server Unit C1 has
started up.
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication.
0001 There is a fault in data An error has been detected 4 times

communication. The ADF or more for 1.5 sec after the
controller or the reader controller communication is disrupted
PCB is faulty. The connector between the reader unit and the
between the reader unit and the DADF.
DADF has poor contact.
0002 There is a fault in data An error has been detected 4 times

communication. The finisher or more for 1.5 sec after the
controller, pedestal controller, or communication between the
DC controller PCB is faulty. The finisher and the machine is
connector between the finisher disrupted and, in addition, an
and the machine has poor attempt at recovery has failed.
connection.
E712 There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit.
0000 There is a fault in data An attempt at recovery fails 5 sec or

communication. The ADF more after the communication
controller or the reader controller between the reader unit and the
PCB is faulty. The connector ADF has been disrupted.
between the reader unit an the
ADF has poor contact.
E713 There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal.
17-18
Chapter 17
0004 There is a fault in data The communication between the

communication. The cassette finisher and the machine is
pedestal controller or the finisher disrupted.
controller PCB is faulty.
E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.
0000 There is a fault in data An attempt at recovery fails for 2

communication. The DC sec or more after the
controller or the cassette pedestal communication between the
controller PCB is faulty. cassette pedestal and the machine
has failed.
E717 The communication with the NE controller is faulty.
0000 The communication with the NE

controller is disrupted and is not
resumed within 3 sec thereafter.
0001 While the new controller is starting

up, an error occurs. (Detection was
normal before the power has been
turned off, but detection fails when
the power is turned o)
0002 While the new controller is in

operation, an IPC error occurs (The
system assumes that IPC
communication cannot be restored.)
E719 The coin vendor is faulty.
0000 The coin vendor cannot be detected

at startup.
0001 While the coin manager is starting

up, an error occurs. (Detection was
normal before the power has been
turned off, but detection fails when
the power is turned on.)
0002 While the coin manager is in

operation, an error occurs. (The
communication cannot be restored,
there is an open circuit for the
pickup/delivery signal, or there is
an illegal connection.)
17-19
Chapter 17
0011 While the mew card reader is

starting up, an error occurs.
(Detection is normal before the
power has been turned off, but
detection fails when the power is
turned on.)
0012 While the new card reader is in

operation, an error occurs. (The
communication cannot be restored.)
E731 There is a fault in the UFR board.
3000 The UFR board cannot be

recognized.
3001 The UFR board cannot be

initialized.
3002 The RAM bus cannot be

initialized.
3015 No image data arrives at the main

controller PCB.
E732 There is a reader communication error.
0000 The reader unit cannot be detected

at startup.
E733 There is a printer communication error.
0000 The printer unit cannot be detected

at startup.
0001 There is no response to an error

command from the printer unit.
E740 The Ethernet board is faulty.
0002 The MAC address is illegal.
E744 The language file is faulty.
0001 The version of the language file on

the HDD and the bootable version
differ.
0002 The size of the language file on the

HDD is too big.
0003 The language specified in

Config.txt on the HDD cannot be
found.
0004 A switchover to a language on the

HDD cannot be made.
17-20
Chapter 17
1000 The installed boot ROM is of a

different type.
E745 The TokenRing board is faulty.
0001 An attempt at initialization fails

(PCI).
0002 The MAC address is faulty.
0003 The board information cannot

be obtained.
0004 There is a connection fault.
E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty.
--- IC1010 (for image processing

ASIC) on the main controller PCB
or IC1012 (memory control/
communication control ASIC,
CPU) has a fault (e.g., image data
transfer error).
E804 The power supply cooling fan is faulty.
0000 The DC controller tried to start it

up, but the fan has been identified as
being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
The controller fan is faulty.
0004 The controller fan has been

identified as being at rest.
E805 The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty.
0000 The DC controller tried to start it

up, but the fan has been identified as
E805 The cleaner fan is faulty.
0001 The DC controller tried to start it,

but the fan has been identified as
17-21
Chapter 17
17-22
Chapter 18 Service Mode
Contents
Contents
18.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration ........................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Exiting service modes ............................................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 Service mode backup .............................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.1.5 Initial screen ........................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen ............................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.7 Sub-item screen ...................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1 COPIER .................................................................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.1.1 VERSION ........................................................................................................................................ 18-6
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS ......................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.1.3 ANALOG ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2.1.4 JAM ............................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.2.1.5 ERR ............................................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2.1.6 DENS ............................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18.2.1.7 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-21
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-21
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 18-22
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT ..................................................................................................................................... 18-25
18.2.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-26
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2 ................................................................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2 .................................................................................. 18-26
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2 ........................................................................................... 18-28
18.2.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-28
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ............................................................................................................................... 18-32
18.3.1 I/O (display mode) ................................................................................................................................ 18-32
18.3.2 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.3.3 R-CON .................................................................................................................................................. 18-42
18.3.4 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-44
18.3.5 SORTER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-46
18.3.6 MN-CON .............................................................................................................................................. 18-63
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-65
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY ......................................................................................................................................... 18-65
18.4.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-67
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG ...................................................................................................................................... 18-70
18.4.1.4 BLANK ......................................................................................................................................... 18-71
18.4.1.5 PASCAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-72
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ .................................................................................................................................... 18-72
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ ....................................................................................................................................... 18-73
18.4.1.8 MISC ............................................................................................................................................. 18-73
18.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.2.1 DOCST .......................................................................................................................................... 18-74
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2 .................................................................................................. 18-76
18.4.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-76
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) ................................................................................................. 18-82
18.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-82
Contents
18.5.1.1 INSTALL ....................................................................................................................................... 18-82

18.5.1.2 CCD ............................................................................................................................................... 18-82
18.5.1.3 LASER ........................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.5.1.4 CST ................................................................................................................................................ 18-83
18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.6 FIXING .......................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.5.1.7 PANEL ........................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK ................................................................................................................................... 18-85
18.5.1.9 CLEAR .......................................................................................................................................... 18-86
18.5.1.10 MISC-R ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.11 MISC-P ........................................................................................................................................ 18-86
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 18-87
18.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-88
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT ...................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2 .............................................................................. 18-88
18.5.3.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-88
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) ............................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................. 18-90
18.6.1.1 BODY ............................................................................................................................................ 18-90
18.6.1.2 USER ............................................................................................................................................. 18-91
18.6.1.3 ACC ............................................................................................................................................... 18-91
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE ..................................................................................................................................... 18-92
18.6.2 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................ 18-94
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.3 BOARD ................................................................................................................................................. 18-94
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF ..................................................................................................................................... 18-94
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2 ................................................................ 18-95
18.6.4.1 COPIER ......................................................................................................................................... 18-95
18.6.4.2 BOARD ....................................................................................................................................... 18-112
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ............................................................................................................................ 18-113
18.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-113
18.7.1.1 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 18-113
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ...................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 18-115
18.8.1.2 TOTAL ........................................................................................................................................ 18-116
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.4 FEEDER ...................................................................................................................................... 18-118
18.8.1.5 JAM ............................................................................................................................................. 18-119
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-119
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-120
Chapter 18
18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration 0000-5388
As shown below, the service modes use three screen levels: initial screen → main/intermediate item screen → sub-
item screen.
One set of modes are used for normal maintenance (Level 1 modes), and another set are used for troubleshooting
(Level 2 modes).
User screen
( )(2,8)( )
Reset key
Initial screen
(Level 1)
Initial screen
( )(2) (Level 2)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate (Select an item.)

item screen
(Level 1)
Main/intermediate
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)
(The corresponding intermediate items are item screen
then displayed and can be selected.) (Level 2)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)

(The corresponding intermediate items are
then displayed and can be selected.)
Sub-item screen Sub-item screen
(Level 1) (Level 1)
Sub-item screen Sub-item screen

Previous/next page
(Level 2) (Level 2)
Previous/next page
F-18-1
18-1
Chapter 18
The copier has the 7 service modes listed below.
COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY Status display mode
SORTER
I/O I/O display mode
BOARD
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation/inspection mode
OPTION Specifications setting mode
TEST Test print mode
COUNTER Counter mode
F-18-2
18.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes 0000-5389
To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from
the network before entering the desired mode. Take care when using the FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode)
mode, as the copier may malfunction and be damaged if a print job is received from outside while an operation is
executing with this mode in effect.
1) Press the asterisk key ( ) on the operation panel.

2) Press 2 and 8 simultaneously on the numeric keypad.
3) Press the asterisk key ( )on the operation panel.

The initial screen (see below) now appears.
Copier service modes

COPIER
ADF service modes FEEDER

Displayed only when the ADF is attached.
SORTER
Sorter/finisher service modes
Displayed only when the finisher is attached.
(There are no modes for the sorter,
so SORTER isn’t displayed even
when the sorter is attached.)
Option board service modes BOARD

Displayed only when an option board is
attached.
F-18-3
18-2
Chapter 18
18.1.3 Exiting service modes 0000-5390
When the reset key is pressed once, the display returns to the service mode initial screen (F00-102-01).
When the reset key is pressed twice, the service modes are exited, and the display returns to the user screen (standard
screen).
When using the ADJUST, FUNCTION or OPTION service mode, be sure to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
after exiting the mode.
18.1.4 Service mode backup 0000-5391
Each copier is adjusted at time of factory shipment, and the adjusted values are written on the service labels.
If you replace the reader controller PCB or DC controller PCB, or clear the RAM, the adjusted ADJUST and
OPTION values are restored to their default values, Therefore, always enter the new service mode values on the
service labels when you change the values as a result of adjusting the copier in the market, If the item you need to
enter is not listed on the service label, enter it in a balnk box.
- Reader controller PCB service label:
Back side of reader unit's left cover [1]
[1]
F-18-4
- Main controller PCB/DC controller PCB service label:

Back side of service book case [1] on inside of printer unit front cover (see figure below)
[1]
F-18-5
18-3
Chapter 18
18.1.5 Initial screen 0000-5392
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select it.
SORTER
BOARD
F-18-6
18.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen 0000-5393
Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

Main items
Touch an item to VERSION
select it.
USER
ACC-STS
ANALOG
Intermediate items
CST-STS
Touch an item to
select it. JAM
ERR
F-18-7
18-4
Chapter 18
18.1.7 Sub-item screen 0000-5394
Number of pages

<VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY >
Selected Copier status display
intermediate DC-CON
READY: Ready to receive service/copy
item
IP operation.
JAM: Paper jam
PANEL SERVICE: Executing service mode.
ANAPRO WAITING: Performing warmup or similar
operation.
POWER DOOR: Cover open
COPYING: Copying
Sub-items ERROR: Error
NO-TONER: No toner
WTNR-FUL: Waste toner full
NO-PAPER: No paper
ALERM: Alarm
PREV NEXT +/- OK
Returns to previous page.

Advances to next page.
F-18-8
<ADJ-XY> < 1/3 > < READY >

ADJ-X xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb}
Pressing an item displays Range of values that

Value before change can be entered
it in reverse.
ADJ-X Entered value
PREV NEXT +/- OK
Sets entered value.
Toggles value’s sign (±).

Stop key: Stops running operations.
Clear key: Clears value.
Start key: Starts copying without exiting service mode.
F-18-9
18-5
Chapter 18
18.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

18.2.1 COPIER
18.2.1.1 VERSION
18.2.1.1.1 COPIER 0001-2229

The following screen appears in response to selecting COPIER>DISPLAY (Level 1):
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS DENS
ANALOG
JAM MISC
ERR ALARM-2
F-18-10
18.2.1.1.2 Outline 0000-5395

Displays the ROM version of each PCB (for the copier and options).
- Example display: <R-CON XX.YY> XX: Version number,YY: Development management number
- If no PCB is connected, <--.--> is displayed.
18.2.1.1.3 DC-CON 0006-0645

ROM version of DC controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.4 R-CON 0006-0649

ROM version of reader controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.5 PANEL 0006-0652

ROM version of control panel CPU PCB.
18.2.1.1.6 ECO 0006-0653

ROM version of ECO PCB.
18-6
Chapter 18
18.2.1.1.7 FEEDER 0006-0656

ROM version of DADF controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.8 SORTER 0006-0657

ROM version of finisher controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.9 FAX 0006-0658

ROM version of fax board.
18.2.1.1.10 NIB 0006-0660

Network software version.
18.2.1.1.11 PS/PCL 0006-0661

UFR board (PS/PCL function) version.
18.2.1.1.12 LIPS 0006-0662

UFR board (LIPS function) version.
18.2.1.1.13 SDL-STCH 0006-0663

ROM version of saddle stitcher controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.14 OP-CON 0006-0664

ROM version of cassette pedestal controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.15 MN-CON 0006-0665

System software version of main controller PCB.
18.2.1.1.16 BOOT-ROM 0006-0666

BOOT ROM version of main controller PCB.
- Copy model/GDI-UFR model: xx.yy C
- LIPS model: xx.yy L
- PL/PCL model: xx.yy N
18.2.1.1.17 DIAG-DVC 0006-0667

ROM version of card reader D1/NE controller A1.
18.2.1.1.18 RUI 0006-0668

Remote UI version.
18.2.1.1.19 LANG-EN 0006-0669

English language file version.
18-7
Chapter 18
18.2.1.1.20 LANG-FR 0006-0670

French language file version.
18.2.1.1.21 LANG-DE 0006-0671

German language file version.
18.2.1.1.22 LANG-IT 0006-0672

Italian language file version.
18.2.1.1.23 LANG-JP 0006-0673

Japanese language file version.
18.2.1.1.24 GDI-UFR 0006-0675

UFR board (GDI-UFR function) version.
18.2.1.1.25 MEAP 0006-8433

Use it to indicate the version of MEAP content.
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS
18.2.1.2.1 FEEDER 0000-5396

Displays whether DADF is connected.
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
18.2.1.2.2 SORTER 0006-0690

Displays whether finisher is connected.
0: Not connected, 1: Finisher M1 or N1 connected,
2: Saddle finisher N2 connected
18.2.1.2.3 DECK 0006-0696

Displays whether paper deck is connected.
18.2.1.2.4 CARD 0006-0699

Displays whether card reader is connected.
18.2.1.2.5 DATA-CON 0006-0700

Displays whether NE controller/A1 is connected.
18-8
Chapter 18
18.2.1.2.6 RAM 0006-0701

Displays memory capacity of memory mounted on main controller PCB.
512 MB, 768 MB
18.2.1.2.7 COINROBO 0006-0703

Displays whether coin vendor is connected.
18.2.1.2.8 NIB 0006-0704

Displays whether network board is connected.
0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet board connected,
2: Token ring board connected,
3: Ethernet board and token ring board connected
18.2.1.2.9 NETWARE 0006-0705

Displays whether NetWare firmware is installed.
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
18.2.1.2.10 SEND 0006-0707

Indicates whether SEND function is appended.
0: No SEND function, 1: SEND function
18.2.1.2.11 USB-HOST 0007-6058

USB host board connection status
0: The board is not connected.
1: The USB host board for the E201A/E307 is connected.
2: The USB host board for the E82G is connected.
18.2.1.3 ANALOG
18.2.1.3.1 TEMP 0000-5397

Copier's internal temperature (environment sensor) in deg C
18.2.1.3.2 HUM 0006-0713

Copier's internal humidity (environment sensor) in %RH
18.2.1.3.3 ABS-HUM 0006-0714

Amount of moisture (environment sensor) in grams
18.2.1.3.4 FIX-C 0006-0715

Fixing roller's surface temperature (main thermistor's detected temperature) in deg C
18-9
Chapter 18
18.2.1.3.5 FIX-E 0006-0717

Fixing roller's surface temperature (sub-thermisto's detected temperature) in deg C
18.2.1.4 JAM
18.2.1.4.1 JAM 0000-5398

Displays jam data.

< JAM > < 1/7 > < READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
F-18-11
T-18-1
AA
Jam sequence number
1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the jam)
T-18-2
BBBB
Date of jam
T-18-3
CCCC
Time of jam
18-10
Chapter 18
T-18-4
DDDD
Time jam was restored
T-18-5
Jam location
0: Copier
1: DADF
2: Finisher
T-18-6
FFff
Jam code
FF: Jam type
ff: Jam sensor
T-18-7
Paper feed position
T-18-8
HHHHHH
Paper feed level software counter value
T-18-9
IIIII
Paper size
18-11
Chapter 18
FF: Jam type
T-18-10
Code Jam type

00xx Unused
01xx Delay jam
02xx Pileup jam
0Axx Jam at power ON/jam during warmup
0Bxx cover open jam (applies to all covers)
0Dxx Transparency-related jam
ff: Jam sensor (printer unit)
T-18-11
Code Sensor type
xx01 Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
xx05 Registration sensor (PS26)
xx06 Fixing inlet sensor (PS27)
xx07 Fixing paper delivery sensor (PS25)
xx08 Face-down paper delivery sensor 1 (PS12)
xx09 Face-down paper delivery sensor 2 (PS6)
xx0A Two-sided registration sensor (PS21)
xx0B Two-sided paper feed sensor (PS24)
xx0C Deck paper feed sensor (PS6D)
xx0D Deck conveyor sensor (PS1D)
0D90 Transparency sensor (front OHP1, inner OHP2)
0D91 Manual feed paper sensor (PS10)
18-12
Chapter 18
ff: Jam sensor (finisher)
T-18-12
Code Finisher M1 sensor/type Finisher N1/saddle finisher N2

sensor/type
1103 Copier paper delivery delay jam -
1104 Paper delivery pileup jam -
1105 - Jam due to early arrival while

switching trays
1500 Staple jam in stapler Staple jam in stapler
1300 Jam at power ON Jam at power ON
1400 - Front top cover OPEN jam
1011 - Inlet path sensor delay jam
1013 - Buffer path sensor delay jam
1014 - Paper delivery path sensor delay

jam
1121 - Inlet path sensor pileup jam
1123 - Buffer path sensor pileup jam
1124 - Paper delivery path sensor pileup

jam
1125 - Staple tray sensor pileup jam
1181 Jam when pressing bundle -
1182 Jam when returning bundle -
1186 - Staple jam in saddle stapler
1187 - Saddle power ON jam
1188 - Front lower cover OPEN jam
1191 - Saddle conveying path sensor

delay jam
1192 - Saddle fold path sensor delay jam
11A1 - Saddle conveying path sensor

pileup jam
11A2 - Saddle fold path sensor pileup

jam
18-13
Chapter 18
ff: Jam sensor (DADF)
T-18-13
Jam name Code Sensor Condition
Separation delay 0002 SR3 Separation sensor (SR3) didn't

turn ON within 500 msec
after separation motor (M1)
switched to drive (forward).
Paper feed delay 0003 U502 Registration front sensor

(U502) didn't turn ON within 1
sec from separation sensor
(SR3) (for small size) or near
separation sensor (for large
size).
Paper feed pileup 0005 U502 Registration front sensor

(U502) didn't turn OFF after
conveyor motor turned ON and
operated for 500 msec, after
formation of resist loop.
Separation early delivery 0006 SR3 Separation sensor (SR3) was

ON during start of document
separation.
Reverse outlet delay 0011 U505 Reverse outlet sensor (U505)

didn't turn ON at specified
amount of time after trailing
edge of document passed
right edge of belt's presser
roller.
Reverse outlet pileup 0012 U505 Reverse outlet sensor (U505)

didn't turn OFF when paper
was conveyed by paper
delivery motor for 500 msec
after trailing edge of document
was detected by reverse paper
delivery resist sensor (SR5).
Two-sided 0023 U505 Conveyor motor operated at

constant speed with reverse
outlet sensor (U505) still ON
after a two-sided copy finished
reversing.
18-14
Chapter 18
Paper delivery inlet 0041 SR4 Reverse paper delivery inlet

delay sensor (SR4) didn't turn ON
when conveyor motor (M2)
conveyed paper for 100 mm
from start of document paper
feed (for small size document)
or from 51 mm in front of
reverse paper delivery
inlet sensor (SR4) (for large
size/two-sided document).
Paper delivery inlet 0042 SR4 Reverse inlet sensor (SR5)

pileup didn't turn OFF in specified
amount of time after
document's leading edge
arrived at reverse registration
roller nip (for small size), or
after document's leading edge
arrived at reverse outlet sensor
(U505) (for large size/two-
sided document).
Reverse registration 0043 SR5 Reverse paper delivery

delay registration sensor (SR5) didn't
turn ON at specified amount of
time after reverse inlet sensor
(SR4) turned ON.
Reverse registration 0044 SR5 Reverse registration sensor

pileup (SR5) didn't turn OFF at
specified amount of time after
reverse paper delivery inlet
sensor (SR4) turned OFF.
Reverse flapper failure 0045 U505 Flapper didn't switch when

flapper switching for each
paper delivery was checked by
reverse outlet sensor (U505).
Paper delivery sensor 0046 SR5 Paper delivery sensor (SR5)

delay (small size) didn't turn OFF after specified
amount of time had elapsed
from start of reverse operation
of reverse paper delivery motor
(M3).
18-15
Chapter 18
Paper delivery sensor 0047 SR5 Paper delivery sensor (SR5)

pileup (small size) didn't turn OFF after paper was
conveyed 50 mm after
document trailing edge passed
paper delivery sensor (SR5).
Paper delivery sensor 0048 SR4 Reverse inlet sensor (SR5)

delay (large size/ didn't turn ON after specified
twosided document) amount of time elapsed after
start of paper delivery.
Reverse paper delivery 0080 SR8 Reverse paper delivery unit

unit cover OPEN cover was opened when copier
was stopped due to lack of
paper.
DADF OPEN 0081 SR6 DADF was opened when

copier was stopped due to lack
of paper.
Paper feed cover OPEN 0082 SR2 Paper feed unit cover was
opened when copier was
stopped due to lack of paper.
Document not removed 0088 SR4, SR5 Attempt to start paper feed was
made with document left on
document stand glass. Detected
by reverse paper delivery
inlet sensor (SR4) and reverse
paper delivery registration
sensor (SR5).
Timing failure 1 008A Paper feed timing for second

side of paper failed during
two-sided copy operation.
Alternately, end of task wasn't
detected by inter-task
monitoring after specified
amount of time.
18-16
Chapter 18
Timing failure 2 008B During document conveying

mode, when paper delivery
clock sensor (SR7) was
counting conveyed volume of
document to deliver, paper feed
of next document completed,
and reverse paper delivery
motor (M3) encoder
pulse could no longer be
detected.
Timing failure 3 008C When the document is sent as a

mixed load even though
document mixed loading hasn't
been set, the document
size error alarm (0014) is
generated, but since the jam
must be processed, this jam
display appears. 008C (jam)
and 0014 (alarm) are displayed
together, and the jam is
restored automatically 5
seconds after being processed.
User DADF OPEN 0091 SR6 DADF was opened during

DADF operation.
User cover OPEN 0092 SR2,SR8 Cover was opened during

DADF operation.
Separation sensor initial 0094 SR3 Separation sensor (SR3) was

status ON before separation of first
document sheet.
Registration front sensor 0095 U502 Registration front sensor

initial status (U502) was ON before
separation of first document
sheet.
Reverse paper delivery 0096 SR4 Reverse paper delivery inlet

inlet sensor initial status sensor (SR4) was ON before
separation of first document
sheet.
Reverse paper delivery 0097 SR5 Reverse paper delivery

registration sensor registration sensor (SR5) was
ON before separation of first
document sheet.
18-17
Chapter 18
G: Paper feed position
T-18-14
Code Description
0 Except for 1 to 10
1 Cassette 1
2 Cassette 2
3 Cassette 3
4 Cassette 4
5 Side paper deck
6 to 8 not used
9 duplex unit
10 manual feed tray
18.2.1.5 ERR
18.2.1.5.1 ERR 0000-5399

Displays error data.

< ERR > < 1/7 > < READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
F-18-12
T-18-15
AA
Error sequence number
1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the error)
18-18
Chapter 18
T-18-16
BBBB
Date of error
T-18-17
CCCC
Time of error
T-18-18
DDDD
Time error was restored
T-18-19
EEEE
Error code
T-18-20
FFff
Detail code
"0000" if none.
T-18-21
Error location
0: Main controller
1: DADF
2: Finisher
3: Unused
4: Reader unit
5: Printer unit
6: PDL boards
7: Fax board
18-19
Chapter 18
18.2.1.6 DENS
18.2.1.6.1 DENS-Y/M/C/K 0005-9741
T-18-22
Calculated value of developer concentration (indicated

as % off target value)
Appropriate values -2.0 to 2.0%
Note Value is updated when toner is supplied after main

power switch ON.
18.2.1.6.2 WINDOW-Y,M,C,K 0006-0722
T-18-23
SALT sensor window dirt coefficient (Y/M/C/Bk). The

smaller the value, the dirtier the sensor window.
Appropriate values 50 or higher
Note Value is updated when ATR control operation is

performed after main power switch ON.
18.2.1.6.3 SGNL-Y,M,C,K 0000-5400
T-18-24
Measured value of developer concentration (Y/M/C/

Bk)
Measured when each job is received.
Appropriate values 16 to 192
Note Value is updated when toner is supplied after main

power switch ON.
18-20
Chapter 18
18.2.1.7 MISC
18.2.1.7.1 ENV-TR 0000-5401
T-18-25
(printer internal environment display)
1: Low humidity environment (5.8 g or less moisture)
2: Normal humidity environment (5.9 to 17.3 g moisture)
3: High humidity environment (17.4 g or more moisture)
18.2.1.7.2 Y,M,C,K-DRM-LF 0006-0738
T-18-26
Drum unit life (Y/M/C/Bk)
Expresses how much of life has expired (as percentage).
Appropriate values 0 to 100 (%)

Note 0% when new drum unit is inserted.
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1
18.2.1.8.1 IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K 0006-5081

- indicates the average of image ratios for copy/print jobs
indicates the average image ratio (color ratio) within the drum unit
18-21
Chapter 18
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2
18.2.1.9.1 ALARM2 0000-5402

Displays alarm data.

<ALARM-2 > < 1/7 > < READY >
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH
F-18-13
T-18-27
Item Description Remarks
AA Alarm sequence number

1 to 50 (the larger the number, the older the
error)
BBBB Date of alarm
CCCC Time of alarm
DDDD Time alarm was restored
EE Alarm location code (see table on next page)
FFFF Alarm code (see table on next page)
GGGG Alarm detail code (for R&D)
HHHHH Total counter value when alarm is generated

H
T-18-28
EE Alarm location code FFFFAlarm code
04 Paper feed/conveying 0008: Side deck lifter alarm
0009: Horizontal registration detection

alarm
18-22
Chapter 18
09 Drum unit 0001: Drum life (Y)
0002: Drum life (M)
0003: Drum life (C)
0004: Drum life (K)
10 Developer unit 0001: Toner out (Bk)
0002: Toner out (C)
0003: Toner out (M)
0004: Toner out (Y)
11 Waste toner conveying 0001: Waste toner box full (intermediate

copy belt)
33 Fan 0007: Paper delivery cooling fan (FM5)

alarm
0012: Manual feed cooling fan (FM6)

alarm
0013: Copier exhaust heat fan (FM3)

alarm
34 Image position compensation 0001: Incorrect data read (zero included in

control image position pattern read data)
0002: Incorrect data read (abnormal data

in at least 8 of the 10 sets of image
position patterns)
0003: Pattern read timeout alarm
0004: Attempt was made to compensate

abnormally large slant as result of image
position compensation.
0005: Attempt was made to correct large

abnormally large magnification as result
of image position compensation.
61 Finisher staples 0001: No staples
62 Saddle stitcher 0001: No stitch needle
70 PDL 0001: memory overflow
0002: font memory overflow
0003: micro font memory overflow
0004: image font memory overflow
0005: pattern font memory overflow
0006: hard disk write error
18-23
Chapter 18
72 UFR board 0001: Register access failed.
0002: Data transfer to memory failed (or

timeout).
0003: Rendering error (ECI module)
0004: Rendering error (EM module)
0005: Rendering error (IE module)
0006: Rendering error (IDM module)
0007: Rendering error (LAM module)
0008: Rendering error (MI module)
0009: Rendering error (PCM module)
0010:Rendering error (PGM module)
0011: Rendering error (VII module)
0012: Rendering error (VOI module)
0013: Stores compressed image during

FallBack.
73 LIPS 0001:Download overflow
0002: Insufficient work memory needed

during system data processing (mainly
figure processing, text processing).
0003: Translator was specified that was

not mounted by LIPS emulation start
command.
0004: Translator work memory overflow
0006: Configuration acquiring/

management error
0007: LIPS internal memory management

error
0008: LIPS internal file management error
0009: Received data management error
0010: Page control error
0011: Macro management error
0012: Color management error
0013: Layout control error
0014: Font management error
0015: Character drawing error
18-24
Chapter 18
0016: Figure drawing error
0017: Image drawing error
0018: LCD display error
0019: Text mode command layer error
0020: Vector mode command layer error
0021: Utility execution control error
0022: LIPS internal database management

error
0023: LIPS internal menu control error
0024: LIPS internal boot error
74 GDI-UFR 0001: Incorrect Job Wrapper Format

version
0002: Incorrect command sequence
75 PS print server unit-C1 0001: Error in PS print server unit-C1
0002: Error due to incorrect SVG analysis

received from PS print server unit-C1
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT
18.2.1.10.1 Overview 0006-8546

<ENVRNT>
Displaying Environment Logs

Use it to indicate logs of changes that may have taken place for [machine inside temperature (deg C)/humidity (%)/
fixing roller surface (middle) temperature (deg C)] collected from the monitor output of the fixing thermistor (main)
and the environment sensor.
Remarks
The intervals of data collection may be set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-IN.
F-18-14
18-25
Chapter 18
T-18-29
Item Description
No. number of a data piece (higher the number, older the data piece)
DATE date of data collection
TIME time of data collection
D + deg C machine inside temperature
E+% machine inside humidity
F + deg C fixing roller surface (middle) temperature
18.2.2 FEEDER
18.2.2.1 FEEDSIZE 0000-5403
T-18-30
Displays the document size detected by the ADF.
Note Displays the document size as a paper size such as A4 or LTR.
For paper names, see COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U1,
CST-U2.
18.2.3 DISPLAY Level 2
18.2.3.1 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) - Level 2 0000-5404
The following screen appears in response to selecting COPIER>DISPLAY (Level 2):
VERSION CCD
USER DPOT
DENS
CST-STS
MISC
F-18-15
18-26
Chapter 18
VERSION
- LANG-CS (indicates the version of the Czech language file)
- LANG-DA (indicates the version of the Danish language file)
- LANG-EL (indicates the version of the Greek language file)
- LANG-ES (indicates the version of the Spanish language file)
- LANG-ET (indicates the version of the Estonian language file)
- LANG-FI (indicates the version of the Finnish language file)
- LANG-HU (indicates the version of the Hungarian language file)
- LANG-KO (indicates the version of the Korean language file)
- LANG-NL (indicates the version of the Dutch language file)
- LANG-NO (indicates the version of the Norwegian language file)
- LANG-PL (indicates the version of the Polish language file)
- LANG-PT (indicates the version of the Portuguese language file)
- LANG-RU (indicates the version of the Russian language file)
- LANG-SL (indicates the version of the Slovenian language file)
- LANG-SV (indicates the version for the Swedish language file)
- LANG-TW (indicates the version of the classical Chinese language file)
- ECO-ID (Use it to check the ECO-ID number)
- LANG-ZH (indicates the version of the simplified Chinese language file)
- LANG-BU (indicates the version fort the Bulgarian language file)
- LANG-CR (indicates the version of the Croatian language file)
- LANG-RM (indicates the version of the Rumanian language file)
- LANG-SK (indicates the version of the Slovakian language file)
- LANG-TK (indicates the version of the Turkish language file)
CST-STS
- WIDTH-ME (indicates the paper width for the manual feed tray; in mm)
DPOT
- 2TR-PPR (indicates the output level of the paper assigned voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 2TR-BASE (indicates the output level of the reference voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- CHG-AC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging AC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
18-27
Chapter 18
DENS
- CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most recently)
- DENS-S-Y/M/C/K (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- D-Y/M/C/K -TRGT (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- P-SENS-P/S (indicates the detected light intensity (P wave/S wave) of the background (ITB) for ATR control)
- D-CRNT-P/S (indicates the measurements (P waste/S wave) of the dark current at time of ATR control)
CCD
- GAIN-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAINB-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-and-
white)
- GAINB-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-and-white)
18.2.4 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) Level 2
18.2.4.1 COPIER
18.2.4.1.1 VERSION
<LANG-CS> 0001-0125
Use it to check the version of the Czech language file.
<LANG-DA> 0001-0126
Use it to check the version of the Danish language file.
<LANG-EL> 0001-0127
Use it to check the version f the Greek language file.
18-28
Chapter 18
<LANG-ES> 0001-0128
Use it to check the version of the Spanish language file.
<LANG-ET> 0001-0129
Use it to check the version of the Estonian language file.
<LANG-FI> 0001-0130
Use it to check the version of the Finnish language file.
<LANG-HU> 0001-0131
Use it to check the version of the Hungarian language file.
<LANG-KO> 0001-0132
Use it to check the version of the Korean language file.
<LANG-NL> 0001-0133
Use it to check the version of the Dutch language file.
<LANG-NO> 0001-0134
Use it to check the version of the Norwegian language file.
<LANG-PL> 0001-0135
Use it to check the version of the Polish language file.
<LANG-PT> 0001-0136
Use it to check the version of the Portuguese language file.
<LANG-RU> 0001-0138
Use it to check the version of the Russian langue file.
<LANG-SL> 0001-0139
Use it to check the version of the Slovenian language file.
<LANG-SV> 0001-0140
Use it to check the version of the Swedish language file.
<LANG-TW> 0001-0141
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (traditional text).
<LANG-ZH> 0001-0143
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (simplified text).
<ECO-ID> 0007-6055
Use it to check the ECO-ID number
<LANG-BU> 0001-0144
Use it to check the version of the Bulgarian language file.
<LANG-CR> 0001-0145
Use it to check the version of the Croatian language file.
<LANG-RM> 0001-0146
Use it to check the version of the Romanian language file.
<LANG-SK> 0001-0147
Use it to check the version of the Slovakian language file.
<LANG-TK> 0001-0148
Use it to check the version of the Turkish language file.
18-29
Chapter 18
18.2.4.1.2 CST-STS
<WIDTH-MF> 0001-0149
Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm).
18.2.4.1.3 CCD
GAIN-OB 0006-1757
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OG 0006-1758
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OR 0006-1759
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EB 0006-1760
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EG 0006-1761
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-ER 0006-1762
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAINB-OB 0006-1763
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OG 0006-1764
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OR 0006-1765
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EB 0006-1766
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EG 0006-1767
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-ER 0006-1768
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
18.2.4.1.4 DPOT
<2TR-PPR> 0001-0150
Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<2TR-BASE> 0001-0152
Use it to check the output value of the reference voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<1TR-DC-Y> 0001-0153
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y) generated last.
<1TR-DC-M> 0001-1231
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (M) generated last.
<1TR-DC-C> 0001-1232
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (C) generated last.
18-30
Chapter 18
<1TR-DC-K> 0001-1233
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (K) generated last.
CHG-AC-Y 0005-9754
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Y) output last
CHG-AC-M 0005-9755
output value of primary charge AC voltage (M) output last)
CHG-AC-C 0005-9756
output value of primary charge AC voltage (C) output last)
CHG-AC-K 0005-9752
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Bk) output last)
18.2.4.1.5 DENS
<DENS-S-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0157
Use it to check the density value (Y/M/C/Bk) detected of the sample image formed at time of ATR control.
<D-Y/M/C/K-TRGT> 0005-9757
target value (Y/M/C/Bk) of developer concentration
<DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0156
Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0155
Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<D-CRNT-P/S> 0001-0160
Uses it to indicate the value (P wave/S wave) measured of the dark current at time of ATR control.
<P-SENS-P/S> 0005-9768
detected light quantity value (P wave/S wave) of backing (ITB) during ATR control
18-31
Chapter 18
18.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

18.3.1 I/O (display mode) 0000-5405
The COPIER > I/O screen is shown below. The screen items (only the items required for
market service) are described on the next page.
DC-CON
R-CON
FEEDER
SORTER
MN-CONT
F-18-16
<Reading the screen>
<DC-CON> < 1/3 > < READY >

P001 xxxxxxxx
P002 xxxxxxxx
P003 xxxxxxxx
P004 xxxxxxxx
P005 xxxxxxxx
P006 xxxxxxxx
P007 xxxxxxxx
P008 xxxxxxxx
0
7
F-18-17
18-32
Chapter 18
18.3.2 DC-CON 0000-5406
T-18-31
Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks
P001 0 Cassette 1 size 4 bits enable 16 types of size

detection 0 detection (see Table T05-401-01).
(input)
1 Cassette 1 size
detection 1
2 Cassette 1 size
detection 2
3 Cassette 1 size
detection 3
4 Cassette 2 size Size detection 0 to 3 enable 16

detection 0 settings (see Table T05-401-01).
5 Cassette 2 size
detection 1
6 Cassette 2 size
detection 2
7 Cassette 2 size
detection 3
8 PS14 Cassette 1 remaining 1: Remaining volume is roughly

volume sensor A half or less

volume sensor B 50 sheets or less

volume sensor A half or less

volume sensor B 50 sheets or less
12 PS7 Cassette 1 paper sensor 1: ON
13 PS19 Cassette 2 paper sensor 1: ON
14 PS10 Manual paper feed 1: ON

paper sensor
15 PS9 Manual paper feed last 1: ON

paper sensor
18-33
Chapter 18
T-18-32
4-ream actuator
Inner Front
Cassette paper size Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
1 STMT R 0 1 1 1
2 LTR 1 0 1 1
3 LTR R 0 1 0 1
4 LGL 1 0 1 0
5 11×17 1 1 0 1
6 A5 R 0 1 1 0
7 A4 0 0 1 1
8 A4 R 1 0 0 1
9 A3 0 1 0 0
10 B5 0 0 1 0
11 B5 R 0 0 0 1
12 B4 0 0 0 0
13 12×18 1 0 0 0
14 U1 1 1 0 0
15 U2 1 1 1 0
16 No cassette 1 1 1 1
0: Actuator pressed
T-18-33
P002 0 Developing bias mode (Y) 0: Rectangular wave
(output) 1 Developing bias mode (M) 0: Rectangular wave
2 Developing bias mode (C) 0: Rectangular wave
3 Developing bias mode (K) 0: Rectangular wave
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 High-pressure remote 0: High pressure ON

permitted
9 For R&D
18-34
Chapter 18
10 For R&D
11 Drum ITB motor operation 0: Forward

direction
12 Drum ITB motor 0: ON
13 Fixing exhaust heat fan half- 1: Half-speed

speed
14 Cleaner fan half-speed 1: Half-speed
15 Power cooling fan half-speed 0: Half-speed
P003 0 Cassette 1 paper feed solenoid 1: ON
(output) 1 Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid 1: ON
2 Manual paper feed unit paper 1: ON

feed solenoid
3 Paper delivery path switching 0: Back side paper delivery,

solenoid 1
1: Front side paper delivery
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 Transparency detection LED 1: ON
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
P004 0 For R&D
(input) 1 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
18-35
Chapter 18
9 Two-sided PCB connection 0: Connected
10 Paper delivery cooling fan lock 0: Running, 1: Stopped

detection
(only operates during two-

sided copying)
11 Copier exhaust heat fan lock 0: Running, 1: Stopped

detection
12 Manual feed cooling fan lock 0: Running, 1: Stopped

detection
13 Power cooling fan lock 0: Running, 1: Stopped

detection
14 Cleaner fan lock detection 0: Running, 1: Stopped
15 Fixing exhaust heat fan lock 0: Running, 1: Stopped

detection
P005 0 For R&D
(input) 1 For R&D
2 Cassette pedestal connection 0: Connected
3 Cassette pedestal power ready 0: Ready
4 PS5 Fixing conveyor unit OPEN/ 1: CLOSED

CLOSED detection
5 Fixing heater enable 0: Enabled
6 For R&D
7 PS13 Delivery vertical path cover 0: OPEN, 1: CLOSED

detection
8 PS28 Manual feed unit OPEN/ 1: CLOSED

CLOSED detection
9 PS8 Center paper delivery tray full 1: Full

sensor
10 PS11 Paper feed vertical path cover 1: CLOSED

OPEN/CLOSED sensor
11 PS23 Front cover OPEN/CLOSED 1: CLOSED

sensor
12 For R&D
13 Drum ITB motor lock 0: Running

detection
14 TRIAC short detection 0: Error
15 Fixing unit high temperature 1: Error

detection
18-36
Chapter 18
P006 0 For R&D
(output) 1 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 24-V ON 0: ON
5 Secondary transfer positive/ 0: Positive output,

negative switching
1: Negative output
6 Drum unit operation signal 1: ON
7 Cassette heater (for cassette 1/ 0: Heater ON, 1: Heater

2) ON OFF
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 Paper delivery cooling fan full 1: Full speed (during two-

speed sided output)
14 For R&D
15 Copier exhaust heat fan full 1: Full speed (during output

speed when temperature inside
copier is 30°C or more)
P007 0 PS17 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor 1: ON
(input) 1 PS16 Cassette 1 retry paper sensor 1: ON
2 PS26 Resist sensor 1: ON
3 PS27 Fixing inlet sensor 1: ON
4 PS25 Fixing paper delivery sensor 1: ON
5 PS12 Face-down paper delivery 1: ON

sensor 1
6 PS21 Two-sided resist sensor 1: ON
7 PS24 Two-sided paper feed sensor 1: ON
8 PS6 Face-down paper delivery 1: ON

sensor 2
9 PS22 Two-sided horizontal resist 1: ON

sensor
10 Transparency sensor (front) 1: ON
11 Transparency sensor (inner) 1: ON
18-37
Chapter 18
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
P008 0 Paper delivery vertical path See separate Table T05-

motor current switching 0 401-08.
(output)
1 Paper delivery vertical path

motor current switching 1
2 Face-down paper delivery See separate Table T05-

motor current switching 0 401-08.
3 Face-down paper delivery

motor current switching 1
4 Manual feed cooling fan 1: ON
5 Cleaner fan 1: ON
6 Fixing exhaust heat fan 1: ON
7 Power cooling fan 0: ON
8 Transparency sensor (front) 1: Gain large, 0: Gain small

gain switching
9 Transparency sensor (inner) 1: Gain large, 0: Gain small

gain switching
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
P009 0 Two-sided resist clutch 1: ON two-sided
(input/ 1 Two-sided paper feed clutch 1: ON two-sided

output)
2 Paper delivery path switching 1: ON

solenoid 2
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 Horizontal registration voltage 1: Voltage down two-sided

down
18-38
Chapter 18
7 Horizontal registration 0: Excitation ON (voltage

excitation down status)
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
P010 0 to For R&D

7
to P018
(for R&D)
P019 0 Cassette 3 size detection 0 Size detection 0 to 3 enable

16 settings (see Table T05-
401-01).
(input)
1 Cassette 3 size detection 1
4 Cassette 4 size detection 0 Size detection 0 to 3 enable

16 settings (see Table T05-
401-01).
P020 0 Cassette 3 remaining volume 1: Remaining volume is

detection A roughly half or less
(input)
1 Cassette 3 remaining volume 1: Remaining volume is

detection B roughly 50 sheets or less

detection A roughly half or less

detection B roughly 50 sheets or less
18-39
Chapter 18
4 Right cover OPEN/CLOSED 1: CLOSED

detection
5 PS5D Deck attachment 0: Deck released from

copier
6 PS8D Deck paper volume sensor top 0: No paper
7 Deck connection signal 1: Connected

detection
P021 0 Deck LED switch 0: LED switch pressed
(input) 1 PS4D Deck lifter sensor 1: Lifter at paper feed

position
2 Deck lifter motor error 0: Lifter error detected

detection
3 PS3D Deck lifter upper limit sensor 1: Lifter has reached upper
limit
4 PS7D Deck paper volume sensor 0: No paper

bottom
5 PS6D Deck paper feed sensor 1: Paper
6 Deck lifter lower limit sensor 1: Lifter has reached lower

limit
7 PS9D Deck open sensor 0: Storage compartment is

open
P022 0 Paper feed 3 solenoid 1: ON
(output) 1 Paper feed 4 solenoid 1: ON
2 CL2D Deck paper feed clutch 1: ON
3 SL1D Deck paper feed solenoid 1: ON
4 Deck lifter motor 0: Lifter motor ON
5 Deck lifter motor DOWN 1: Lift DOWN,
0: Lift UP
6 SL2D Deck paper compartment 1: SL ON

OPEN SL
7 Deck paper compartment 1: LED lit

button LED
P023 0 to 7 For R&D
to P025
(for R&D)
P026 0 For R&D
18-40
Chapter 18
(input/ 1 For R&D

output)
2 For R&D
3 Cassette heater (for cassette 3/ 0: Heater ON, 1: Heater

4) ON OFF
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
P027 0 For R&D
(input/ 1 For R&D

output) 2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 Deck motor current switching See Table T05-401-09.

signal 0
7 Deck motor current switching See Table T05-401-09.

signal 1
P028 0 Cassette 3 paper feed current See pulse motor current

switching signal 0 setting
(input/ table (Table T05-401-08).

output) 1 Cassette 3 paper feed current
switching signal 1
2 Cassette 4 paper feed current See pulse motor current

switching signal 0 setting
table (Table T05-401-08).
3 Cassette 4 paper feed current

switching signal 1
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
P029 0 Cassette 3 retry sensor 1: Paper
(input/ 1 Cassette 4 retry sensor 1: Paper

output)
2 PS2D Deck no paper detection 1: Paper
3 PS1D Deck outlet paper sensor 1: Paper
4 Cassette 3 paper detection 1: Paper
18-41
Chapter 18
5 Cassette 4 paper detection 1: Paper
6 Pedestal model detection 1: Plain pedestal, 0:

Cassette pedestal
7 CL1D Deck conveyor CL 1: CL ON
T-18-34
0 1 Pulse motor current setting
0 0 100%
1 0 70%
0 1 31%
1 1 0%
T-18-35
0 1 Paper deck pulse motor current setting
0 0 100%
1 0 70%
0 1 50%
1 1 35%
18.3.3 R-CON 0000-5407
T-18-36
P001 0 Image leading edge signal 0: Image leading edge

detected
(input/ 1 12 V, 24 V 0: 12 V supply,
output) 1: 24 V supply
2 For R&D
3 Optical motor clock signal 1: Optical motor running

(input)
4 Optical motor clock signal 1: Optical motor running

(output)
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
18-42
Chapter 18
7 Size detection sensor drive 1: Document size detected

signal
P002 0 For R&D
(input) 1 For R&D
2 Size detection signal (AB/ 0: Detect document

inch)
3 Size detection signal (inch) 0: Detect document
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
P003: For R&D
P004 0 For R&D
(input) 1 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 Pressure platen CLOSED 1: Detect pressure platen

detection signal closed 30°
5 Optical home position 1: Detect optical home

detection signal position
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
P005 to P007: For R&D
P008 0 Document illumination lamp 1: Document illumination

lit signal lamp lit
(output)
1 CCD drive signal 1: CCD drive
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
P009: For R&D
18-43
Chapter 18
18.3.4 FEEDER 0000-5408
T-18-37
P001 0 SR5 Reverse paper delivery resist 1: ON

sensor
(input) 1 SR4 Reverse paper delivery inlet 1: ON

sensor
2 SR3 Separation sensor 1: ON
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
P002 0 to 7 -
(for R&D)
P003 0 U505 Reverse outlet sensor 1: ON
(input) 1 U502 Resist front sensor 1: ON
2 U503 Document set sensor 1: ON
3 U504 Final document detection 1: ON

sensor
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
P004 0
(input) 1 SR1 Conveyor motor clock sensor Alternates between 1 and 0
when motor is running.
2 SR7 Reverse paper delivery motor Alternates between 1 and 0

clock sensor
when motor is running.
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
18-44
Chapter 18
7 -
P005 0 to 7 -
(for R&D)
P006 0 Separation motor reverse 1: ON

operation
(output) 1 Separation motor forward 1: ON

operation
2 Separation motor PWM 1: ON
3 - -
4 Conveyor motor PWM 1: ON
5 Brake 1: ON
6 Paper delivery motor PWM 1: ON
7 - -
P007 0 - -
(output) 1 Document display LED 1: Lit
2 LED1 0: Lit (flashes when paper

doesn't go through)
3 LED2 0: Lit
4 Conveyor motor reverse 1: ON

operation
5 Conveyor motor forward 1: ON

operation
6 Paper delivery motor reverse 1: ON

operation
7 Paper delivery motor forward 1: ON

operation
P008 0 - -
(input) 1 - -
2 Push switch 1: ON
3 SR8 Reverse paper delivery unit 0: OPEN

cover sensor
4 SR2 Paper feed unit cover sensor 0: OPEN
5 SR6 ADF OPEN/CLOSED sensor 0: OPEN
6 - -
7 - -
P009 0 to 7 - -
(for R&D)
18-45
Chapter 18
P010 0 DIP SW bit 1 1: ON
(input) 1 DIP SW bit 2 1: ON
2 DIP SW bit 3 1: ON
18.3.5 SORTER 0000-5409
T-18-38
P001 0 S10D Stack tray home 1: Home position

position detection
(input) 1 S2D Inlet paper detection 1: Paper
2 S12D Stack tray lower 1: Lower limit

limit detection
3 S13D Stack tray upper 1: Upper limit

limit detection
4 S11D Stack tray paper 1: Paper

detection
5 S4D Copier, finisher 1: Connection

connection detection released
6 S5D Processing tray 1: Paper

paper detection
7 S6D Return roller home 1: Home position

position detection
P002 0 to 7 - -
(for R&D)
P003 0 S6D Front junction plate 1: Home position

home position
junction detection
(input)
18-46
Chapter 18
1 S7D Rear junction plate 1: Home position

home position
junction detection
2 S8D Bundle paper 0: Home position

delivery lever home
position detection
3 - - -
4 S18D Staple cartridge 1: No cartridge

detection
5 S15D Staple detection 1: No staples
6 S17D Stapling home 0: Home position

position detection
7 S16D Staple leading edge 1: No staple

detection leading edge
P004 0 S1D Paper delivery motor 1: Startup

clock detection detection
(input) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
P005 0 M5D1 Stack tray UP/ 1: UP

DOWN motor
operation 1 (output)
(input/
output)
1 - - -
2 M5D2 Stack tray UP/ 1: DOWN

DOWN motor
reverse operation 1
(output)
3 - - -
18-47
Chapter 18
4 S9D Stack tray UP/ 1: Startup

DOWN motor clock detection
detection
5 S14D Staple safety 1: Obstruction

detection
6 - - -
7 - - -
P006 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - Front junction motor 1: Permit

junction signal
(output)
3 - Rear junction motor 1: Permit

permission signal
(output)
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 M6DA Staple motor 0: Forward

7 M6DB Staple motor reverse 0: Reverse

P007 0 M6DA Staple motor 0: Forward

(output) 1 M6DB Staple motor reverse 0: Reverse

2 M5D1 Stack tray UP/ 1: UP

DOWN motor
reverse operation 2
(output)
3 M5D2 Stack motor UP/ 1: DOWN

DOWN motor
reverse operation 2
(output)
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
18-48
Chapter 18
7 - Paper delivery motor 0: Current ON

OFF signal (output)
P008 0 - Push switch (output) 0: ON
(input/ 1 - - -
output)
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - 24VP detection -
P009 0 to 7 - - -
(for R&D)
P010 0 - Paper delivery motor 1: Current low, 0:

current switching Current high
(output)
(output)
1 - Bundle processing 1: Current low, 0:

motor current Current high
switching 1 (output)
2 - Bundle processing 1: Current low,

motor current
switching 2 (output)
0: Current medium
3 - Front matching 1: Current low, 0:

motor current Current high
switching (output)
4 - Rear matching motor 1: Current low, 0:

current switching Current high
(output)
5 - LED1 0: ON
6 - LED2 0: ON
7 - LED3 0: ON
P011 0 - DIPSW1 bit 1 0: ON
(input) 1 - DIPSW1 bit 2 0: ON
18-49
Chapter 18
2 - DIPSW1 bit 3 0: ON
T-18-39
P001 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 M8 Second feed motor A -

phase output
3 M8 Second feed motor B -

phase output
4 M4 Staple mover motor -

B phase output
5 M4 Staple mover motor -

A phase output
6 M3 Matching motor B -
phase output
7 M3 Matching motor A -
phase output
8 to 15 - - -
P002 0 M5 Tray UP/DOWN -

motor PWM
(output) 1 M2 Paper delivery motor -

PWM
2 M7 Rotary motor PWM -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
18-50
Chapter 18
6 M5 Tray UP/DOWN 1: DOWN

motor DOWN drive
output
7 M5 Tray UP/DOWN 1: UP
motor UP/DOWN
drive output
8 to 15 - - -
P003 0 - - -
(output) 1 - LED2 lighting signal 0: Lit

output
2 - - -
3 PS1 Height sensor (input) -
4 - LED1 lighting signal 1: Lit

output
5 PS1 Height sensor -

external clock
(input)
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P004 0 - - -
(output) 1 - 24 V output -
interruption
detection signal
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P005 0 M9 Inlet feed motor A -

phase output
(output) 1 M9 Inlet feed motor B -

phase output
18-51
Chapter 18
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P006 0 - Staple tray paper 0: Paper

detection signal
(output) 1 - - -
2 M1 First feed motor A -

phase (output)
3 M1 First feed motor B -

phase (output)
4 M8 Second feed motor -

clock input
5 M9 Inlet feed motor -

clock input
6 M1 First feed motor -

clock input
7 - Paper delivery motor -

clock detection
signal
8 to 15 - - -
P007 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 M5 Tray UP/DOWN -
motor clock
detection signal 1
6 M5 Tray UP/DOWN -
motor clock
detection signal 2
18-52
Chapter 18
7 M7 Rotary motor clock -

detection signal
8 to 15 - - -
P008 0 - Stacker unit -

EEPROM clock
(output) 1 - Stacker unit -

EEPROM data
output
2 - Stacker unit -
EEPROM CS
3 - * LWR (input/ -
output)
4 - * HWR (input/ -
output)
5 - * RD (input/output) -
6 - * AS (input/output) -
7 - Stacker unit -
EEPROM data input
(input)
8 to 15 - - -
P009 0 - Buffer path input 0: Paper

paper detection
signal
(output) 1 - Paper delivery paper 1: Paper

detection signal
2 - Buffer path paper 0: Paper

detection signal
3 - Input detection 0: Paper

signal
4 PI7 Staple drive home 1: Home position

position detection
signal
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-53
Chapter 18
P010 0 to 15 - - -
(for R&D)
P011 0 to 15 - - -
(for R&D)
P012 0 - Stapler connection 1: Connected

detection signal
(output) 1 MS7 Staple cartridge 1: Cartridge

detection
2 - - -
3 - No staple detection 1: Staple

signal
4 - - -
5 PI11 Tray 1 detection 1: Paper

signal
6 PI12 Tray 2 detection 1: Paper

signal
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P013 0 to 15 - - -
(not used)
P014 0 to 15 - - -
(not used)
P015 0 - Push switch 3 -
(output) 1 - Push switch 2 -
2 - - -
3 PI22 Staple mover 1: Home position

position detection
signal
4 PI6 Matching plate home 1: Home position

position detection
signal
5 PI8 Tray home position 1: Home position

detection signal
6 PI5 Shutter OPEN 1: OPEN

detection signal
18-54
Chapter 18
7 PI18 Rotary guide OPEN 1: OPEN

detection signal
8 to 15 - - -
P016 0 - DIP SW3 bit 1 1: ON
(output) 1 - DIP SW3 bit 2 1: ON
2 - DIP SW3 bit 3 1: ON
8 to 15 - - -
P017 0 - Joint detection signal 1: Connected
(output) 1 - Front top cover 1: CLOSED

OPEN/CLOSED
detection signal
2 MS5 Saddle unit -

connection detection
signal
3 MS5 Tray upper limit 1: Upper limit

detection switch
signal
4 MS3 Tray safety switch 0: Safe

signal
5 - Front top cover 0: CLOSED

OPEN/CLOSED
detection signal
6 MS4 Shutter CLOSED 1: CLOSED

detection switch
signal
7 MS2 Rotary guide

CLOSED detection
switch signal
8 to 15 - - -
P018 0 M7 Rotary motor 1: Forward

forward drive output
18-55
Chapter 18
(output) 1 M7 Rotary motor reverse 1: Reverse

drive output
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 M2 Paper delivery motor 1: Reverse

reverse drive output
5 M2 Paper delivery motor output1: Forward

forward drive
6 M6 Staple motor reverse 1: Reverse

drive output
7 M6 Staple motor 1: Forward

8 to 15 - - -
P019 0 - First feed motor OFF 1: OFF
(output) 1 - - -
2 M9 Inlet feed motor 0: During drive

connectivity
switching 2
3 M9 Inlet feed motor 0: During drive

connectivity
switching 1
4 M8 Second feed motor 0: During drive

current switching 2
5 M8 Second feed motor 0: During drive

current switching 1
6 M1 First feed motor 0: During drive

current switching 2
7 M1 First feed motor 0: During drive

current switching 1
8 to 15 - - -
P020 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
18-56
Chapter 18
5 PS1 Height sensor ON/ -

OFF
6 M4 Staple mover motor 0: During drive

current switching
7 M3 Matching motor 0: During drive

current switching
8 to 15 - - -
P021 0 - Belt retraction 1: ON

solenoid drive signal
(output) 1 - Buffer outlet 1: ON

solenoid drive signal
2 - - -
3 - Buffer inlet solenoid 1: ON

drive signal
4 - Flapper solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
5 - Paddle solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
6 - Solenoid timer -
output
7 - Retraction solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
8 to 15 - - -
T-18-40
P023 0 M6S Stitch motor (inner) 0: Forward

(output) 1 M6S Stitch motor (inner) 0: Reverse

2 M7S Stitch motor (front) 0: Forward

3 M7S Stitch motor (front) 0: Reverse

4 M2S Paper folder motor 0: Forward

18-57
Chapter 18
5 M2S Paper folder motor 0: Reverse

6 SL1S First deflecting plate signal1: ON

solenoid drive
7 SL2S Second deflecting 1: ON

plate solenoid drive
signal
8 to 15 - - -
P024 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - Conveyor plate- 1: ON
adjoining solenoid
drive signal
6 - - -
7 - Paper positioning 0: During drive

plate motor current
switching
8to 15 - - -
P025 0 - 24 V output 1: Down

interruption
detection signal
(output) 1 PI15S Paper push plate 0: Leading edge

leading edge
position signal
2 PI11S Paper delivery 0: Paper

detection signal
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-58
Chapter 18
P026 0 PI4S Paper folder motor -

clock detection
signal
(output) 1 PI1S Paper push plate -

motor clock
detection signal
2 PI14S Paper push plate 1: Home position

home position
detection signal
3 PI5S Matching plate home 0: Home position

position detection
signal
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P027 0 - Paper positioning 0: Home position

plate home position
detection signal
(output)
1 PI16S Stitcher storage 0: Stored

detection signal
2 - PUSH SW2 ON/ -

OFF
3 PI17S Vertical path paper 1: Paper

detection signal
4 PI12S Crescent roller phase 0: Home position

detection signal
5 PI13S Guide home position 0: Home position

detection signal
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-59
Chapter 18
P028 0 M4S Paper positioning -

plate motor A phase
output
(output)
1 M4S Paper positioning -

plate motor B phase
output
2 M8S Paper push plate -

motor PWM
3 M1S Feed motor current 0: Drive

switching
4 M1S Feed motor A phase -

output
5 M1S Feed motor B phase -

output
6 - - -
7 M8S Paper push plate 0: Reverse

motor reverse drive
output
8 to 15 - - -
P029 0 M5S Matching motor A -

phase output
(output) 1 M5S Matching motor B -

phase output
2 M2S Paper folder motor -

PWM
3 M8S Paper push plate 0: Forward

motor forward drive
output
4 M3S Guide motor A -

phase output
5 M3S Guide motor B phase -

output
6 M3S Guide motor current 0: Drive

switching
7 M5S Matching motor 0: Drive

current switching
18-60
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
P030 0 PI19S Second paper sensor 0: Paper

paper detection
signal
(output)
1 PI20S Third paper sensor 0: Paper

paper detection
signal
2 MS5S Stitch operation 1: Home position

home position
detection signal 2
3 MS7S Stitch operation 1: Home position

home position
detection signal 1
4 MS8S Paper positioning 0: Paper

plate paper detection
signal
5 MS6S Tray paper detection 0: Paper

signal
6 MS18S First paper sensor 0: Paper

paper detection
signal
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P031 0 - Matching plate home 1: Connected

position sensor
(output) connector
1 - Paper fold home 1: Connection

position sensor
connector
2 - Paper delivery cover 1: Connected

sensor connector
3 - Front bottom cover 1: Connected

OPEN/CLOSED
18-61
Chapter 18
sensor connector
4 - Paper positioning 1: Connected

plate home position
sensor connector
5 - Paper fold home 0: Home position

position detection
signal
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P032 0 to 15 - - -
P033 0 MS4S No staple detection 1: Staple

signal 2
(output) 1 MS6S No staple detection 1: Staple

signal 1
2 MS1S Inlet cover OPEN 0: CLOSED

detection switch
signal
3 - Front bottom cover 0: CLOSED

OPEN detection
switch signal
4 PI3S Paper delivery cover 0: CLOSED

OPEN switch signal
5 - Front bottom cover 1: CLOSED

OPEN detection
signal
6 PI9S Inlet cover OPEN 1: CLOSED

detection signal
7 MS3S Paper delivery cover 1: CLOSED

OPEN detection
switch signal
8 to 15 - - -
P034 0 - DIP SW1 bit 1 0: ON
(output) 1 - DIP SW1 bit 2 0: ON
18-62
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
P035 to - - - -
P050
18.3.6 MN-CON 0000-5410
T-18-41
P001 0 GPDATA PWR1 1: During normal

operation
(output) 1 PWR2 1: During normal

operation
2 For R&D Alternates between 1 and

0 every 50 msec
3 For R&D
4 Cooling fan ON Cooling fan control
P002 0 to 16 For R&D
P003 10 GPO Paper feed count (for coin

vendor, assistance)
(output)
11 Paper delivery count (for

coin vendor, assistance)
12 LCD backlight control 0: OFF, 1: ON
P004 0 GPI SRAM board detection 0: YES, 1: NO
(input) 1 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 Operation permission (key 0: Permitted, 1: Not

switch) permitted
18-63
Chapter 18
4 Operation permission 0: Permitted, 1: Not

(control card) permitted
5 Operation permission (coin 0: Permitted, 1: Not

vendor) permitted
P005 0 to 7 For R&D
P006 8 Open interface control 0: Ready, 1: Not ready

(PRDY signal)
(input) 9 Open interface setting Mode 0
10 Open interface setting Mode 1
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 Open interface board 0: YES, 1: NO

detection
15 Open interface board 0: Ready, 1: Not ready

control (CRDY)
P007 16 Fax option 0: Connected, 1: Not

connected
(input)
P008 4 Printer power ready 0: Ready, 1: Not ready
(input) 5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
9 Scanner power ready 0: Ready, 1: Not ready
P009 5 PCPRDY 0: Ready, 1: Not ready
(output) 6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 Controller power ready 0: Ready, 1: Not ready
18-64
Chapter 18
18.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

18.4.1 COPIER
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY
18.4.1.1.1 ADJ-X 0000-5411
T-18-42
Used to adjust the optical image leading edge position (image read
start position in the sub-scanning direction).
Adjustment method - If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value, the
setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
- Increasing the setting value by 1 moves the image read start

position by 0.1 mm in the direction of the trailing edge.
(The image read range moves in the direction of the trailing edge.)
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced

the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment 220 to 320 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-

range adjusted value)
(Value after RAM clear: 265)

Caution 1 After changing the setting value of this item, execute the following:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > SH-PS-ST
Caution 2 After changing the setting value of this item, enter the new value on
the service label.
Image’s leading
edge Platen glass
Vertical size plate (incorporating white plate)
White plate
Document
Decreasing setting value Increasing setting value

(read start position moves (read start position moves
in direction of leading edge) in direction of trailing edge)
Document illumination lamp
F-18-18
18-65
Chapter 18
18.4.1.1.2 ADJ-Y 0006-0838
T-18-43
Used to adjust the CCD's read start cell position (image read start
position in the main scanning direction).
Adjustment method - If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value,
method the setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
- Increasing the setting value by 1 moves the image read start

position by 0.1 mm toward you.
(The image read range moves toward you.)
- If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or

replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service
label.
Adjustment 0 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-

range adjusted value)

Caution After changing the setting value of this item, enter the new value
on the service label.
Decreasing setting value

(read start position moves
away from you)
Read start position
Increasing setting value

(read start position
moves toward you)
Document
Vertical size plate

F-18-19
18-66
Chapter 18
18.4.1.1.3 ADJ-S 0006-0840
T-18-44
Used to enter the adjusted value of the optical shading measurement position.
- If white or black lines appear in the image after executing COPIER > FUNCTION
> CCD > SH-PS-ST (to automatically adjust the shading measurement position), you
can adjust the shading measurement position manually by changing the setting value.
- Decreasing the setting value by 1 moves the shading measurement position by 0.1
mm in the direction of the leading edge.
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment range 120 to 150 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)

Caution When adjusting the optical shading measurement position, use the following mode:
- COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > SH-PS-ST
18.4.1.2 CCD
18.4.1.2.1 W-PLT-X/Y/Z 0000-5412
T-18-45
Used to enter white level data for standard white plate.
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the values on the service label.
- If you have replaced the platen glass, enter the values on the platen glass (see
figure below).
Adjustment range 0 to 10000 (Values at time of factory shipment: Factory-measured values)
(Values after RAM clear: W-PLT-X = 8271

W-PLT-Y = 8725
W-PLT-Z = 9418)
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X value W-PLT-Z value

W-PLT-Y value
F-18-20
18-67
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.2 CCDU-RG/GB 0006-0842
T-18-46
Used to enter color shift compensation value in sub-scanning

direction (between R and G/G and B for document reading
dependent on CCD unit + lens).
Adjustment - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
- If you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the value on the label
attached to the CCD unit
(also enter this value on the service label).
Adjustment -1000 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-

range measured value)
Note Of the color shift in the sub-scanning direction generated by the

read optics, the amount dependent on the CCD unit + lens is
compensated by adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation
amount between R and G.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the main

controller PCB.
18.4.1.2.3 CL-R-RG/GB 0006-0844
T-18-47
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during normal

reading in color mode) in the sub-scanning direction.


Note During normal reading in color mode, the color shift in the sub-
scanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is compensated by
adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation amount between R
and G/G and B.

controller PCB.
18-68
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.4 BW-R-RG/GB 0006-0845
T-18-48
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during

normal reading in black and white mode) in the sub-scanning
direction.


Note During normal reading in black and white mode, the color shift in
the subscanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is
amount between R and G/G and B.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the

main controller PCB.
18.4.1.2.5 CLF-R-RG/GB 0006-0846
T-18-49
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (during high-

speed reading in color mode) in the sub-scanning direction.

(Value after RAM clear: 0)]

Note During high-speed reading in color mode, the color shift in the sub-
scanning direction due entirely to the reader unit is compensated by
adjusting the 3-line CCD sensor's compensation amount between R
and G/G and B.
Image compensation is performed by image processing by the

main controller PCB.
18-69
Chapter 18
18.4.1.2.6 FCCDU-RG/GB 0006-0847
T-18-50
Used to enter the color shift compensation value (between

R and G/G and B for document reading dependent on
CCD unit + lens at time of factory shipment) in the sub-
scanning direction.
Adjustment - 1000 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-


Note Of the color shift in the sub-scanning direction generated by the
read optics, the amount dependent on the CCD unit + lens is
amount between G and B.

controller PCB.
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG
18.4.1.3.1 MAG-H-K 0000-5414
T-18-51
Used to adjust magnification of the Bk image's main

scanning direction.
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced
the DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment range - 10 to 10 (Value at time of factory shipment/value

after RAM clear: 0)
Note This item is to enable input of the factory-adjusted value, and
should not be adjusted in the market.
18-70
Chapter 18
18.4.1.4 BLANK
18.4.1.4.1 BLANK-T 0000-5415
T-18-52
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (leading

edge).
Adjustment - If you have cleared the main controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the SRAM PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment 0 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM

range clear: +59)
18.4.1.4.2 BLANK-L 0006-1544
T-18-53
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (left

edge).

range clear: +47)
18.4.1.4.3 BLANK-R 0006-1545
T-18-54
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (right

edge).

range clear: +47)
18-71
Chapter 18
18.4.1.4.4 BLANK-B 0006-1629
T-18-55
Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width (trailing

edge).

range clear: +59)
18.4.1.5 PASCAL
18.4.1.5.1 OFST-P-Y/M/C/K 0000-5416
T-18-56
Performs offset adjustment on the test print read signal for

PASCAL control during automatic gradation compensation (full
compensation).
Adjustment Increasing the value makes the image after automatic gradation
method compensation (full compensation) denser.
Adjustment -128 to +128

range
(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM
clear:0)
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ
18.4.1.6.1 REGIST 0000-5417
T-18-57
Used to adjust the registration roller clutch ON timing.
Adjustment - Increasing the value by 1 moves the image by 0.1 mm in the direction
method of the leading edge of the paper.
- If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced the DC

controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment - 50 to 50 (0.1 mm units)

range
(Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
(Value after RAM clear: -20)
18-72
Chapter 18
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ
18.4.1.7.1 MF-A4R 0000-5418
T-18-58
Used to enter the basic value for the manual feed tray's paper width
(A4R).
Adjustment - If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced the
method DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
- When replacing the paper width detection VR or registering a new

value, execute the following service mode: FUNCTION>CST.
Adjustment 0 to 255
range
(Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
18.4.1.8 MISC
18.4.1.8.1 SEG-ADJ 0000-5419
T-18-59
Used to adjust the text and photo separation level for text/photo/
map mode.
Adjustment - To make documents more easily recognized as photo documents,

method increase the setting value.
- To make documents more easily recognized as text documents,

decrease the setting value.
Adjustment -4to 4 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM

range clear: 0)
18-73
Chapter 18
18.4.2 FEEDER
18.4.2.1 DOCST 0000-5420
T-18-60
Used to adjust the document stop position during ADF paper feed
(document tray paper feed).
Note - Increasing the value makes the leading edge blank smaller.
Adjustment -100 to 100 (0.337 mm units)

range
Caution Delivering the document makes the setting value valid, so be sure
to press the OK key to deliver the document.
Operation method 1) Place the document on the ADF document tray.
2) Select the item, use the numeric keypad to change the setting
value, then press the OK key to set it.
3) Press the OK key again to deliver the document and stop it

(aligned left) on the platen glass.
4) Open the ADF carefully, and check the stop position of the
document.
Standard: Stop position L4 = 0 -/+ 1 mm
L4: Distance from vertical size plate edge to document edge
L4
Paper
F-18-21
T-18-61
- If the document is farther left than the arrow in the figure below: Increase the value (the
leading edge blank is made smaller).
18-74
Chapter 18
Document position
alignment mark Horizontal size plate
Paper
Increase value of DOCST.

F-18-22
T-18-62
- If the document is farther right than the arrow in the figure below: Decrease the value
(the leading edge blank is made larger).
Document position
alignment mark Horizontal size plate
Paper
Decrease value of DOCST.

F-18-23
T-18-63
5) Carefully close the ADF and press the OK button to deliver the document to the
document tray.
18-75
Chapter 18
18.4.3 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) Level 2
18.4.3.1 COPIER
18.4.3.1.1 DENS
T-SPLY-Y 0007-6096
T-18-64
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (Y color)
Adjustment Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
Adjustment range -3 to 5 [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
T-SPLY-M 0007-6098
T-18-65
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (M color)
T-SPLY-C 0007-6106
T-18-66
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (C color)
T-SPLY-K 0007-6107
T-18-67
Adjusting the amount of toner supply (K color)
18-76
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.2 V-CONT
VCONT-Y/M/C/K 0001-2375
- VCONT-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for image contrast.)
Adjustment range: -30 to 30 (10 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the higher the density.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
VBACK-Y/M/C/K 0006-0862
- VBACK-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for removing image fog.)
Adjustment range: Y/M -6 to 12 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
C/K -12 to 6 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the more fog is reduced.
VD-LIM-Y 0007-6165
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.
Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
VD-LIM-M 0007-6166
Adjustment range:
VD-LIM-C 0007-6168
Adjustment range:
VD-LIM-K 0007-6169
Adjustment range:
18-77
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.3 COLOR
LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K 0001-2382
- LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust low-density color balance.)
MD-OFS-/Y/M/C/K 0006-0885
- MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust medium-density color balance.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -1)
HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K 0006-0888
- HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust high-density color balance.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -2)
18.4.3.1.4 HV-PRI
USUB-Y/M/C/KAC 0001-2384
- USUB-Y/M/C/KAC (Used to adjust upstream auxiliary brush charge voltage.)
DIS-TGY/M/C/K 0006-0890
- DIS-TGY/M/C/K (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (normal paper).)
DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2 0006-0892
- DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2 (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (card/special
paper/transparencies).)
18.4.3.1.5 HV-TR
Outline 0001-2385
The adjusted offset doesn't become valid unless all of the following 6 items are entered: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-
PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR and TRDUP.
The settings entered for all 6 items make up a single pattern. 8 patterns can be stored in memory.
2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0896
- 2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer target current.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (2 µA units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after
RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches,
rough-textured half-tones.
2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0898
- 2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer paper-portion voltage.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (100 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches, rough-textured half-tones.
18-78
Chapter 18
TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0899
- TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (paper type item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: Plain(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Recycled
3: Bond
4: Tracing Paper
5: Heavy1
6: Heavy2
7: Special paper 1 (including labels)
8: Glossy paper
9: Special paper 2 (including Japanese paper)
10: Postcards/envelopes
11: Transparencies (color)
12: Transparencies (monochrome)
TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0900
- TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (environmental item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
Enter value of COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ENV-TR.
1: Low-humidity environment (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Normal-humidity environment
3: High-humidity environment
TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0901
- TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (color mode item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: Full-color mode (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Monochrome mode
TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0902
- TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (one/two-sided item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: One-sided (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Automatic two-sided
3: Manual feed two-sided
1TR-TGY 0007-6172
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (Y)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
18-79
Chapter 18
1TR-TGM 0007-6174
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (M)
'-' direction.
1TR-TGC 0007-6176
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (C)
'-' direction.
1TR-TGK1 0007-6178
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: Black (monochrome) mode)
'-' direction.
1TR-TGK4 0007-6181
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: 4C mode)
'-' direction.
18-80
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.6 MISC
ACS-EN 0006-0903
- ACS-EN (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone.)
Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone.
ACS-CNT 0006-0904
- ACS-CNT (Used to adjust color recognition pixel count zone during ACS recognition.)
ACS-DF 0006-0905
- ACS-DF (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone during DF use.)
18-81
Chapter 18
18.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

18.5.1 COPIER
18.5.1.1 INSTALL
18.5.1.1.1 CARD 0000-5421

Used to make card reader installation settings.
T-18-68
Setting values 1 to 2001 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after

RAM clear: 1)
Operation method Enter the number of cards to use.
(You can use up to 1,000 cards from the entered number.)
Initialize the card management information.
- Initialize the card name (department ID) (from the entered

number).
- Initialize the card's password.
18.5.1.2 CCD
18.5.1.2.1 CCD-ADJ 0000-5422
T-18-69
Adjusts gain of analog processor unit (in CCD PCB).
Operation method 1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key.
The operation starts. When the operation finishes, it stops

automatically.
MEMO:
When you turn the main power switch ON, the same automatic adjustment operation done by this item is performed.
18-82
Chapter 18
18.5.1.3 LASER
18.5.1.3.1 L-ADJ-O 0000-5423
T-18-70
Automatically adjusts laser emission quantity.
Operation method Execute this item in the following cases:
- If a laser unit was replaced (if the Y, M, C or K unit was

replaced or if multiple units were replaced simultaneously)
- If the DC controller PCB was replaced
- If the DC controller PCB's RAM was cleared
1) Remove all 4 color drum units, and close the front cover.
2) Select this item, and press the OK key to execute the

operation. The operation stops automatically.
3) When automatic adjustment has finished, 'END'is displayed

in thescreen.
Note The DC controller uses the photo diode in the laser unit to
automatically measure the light quantity when each laser emits
its minimum light quantity. This operation is used to
compensate the time the laser lights during minimum light
quantity emission.
Each laser unit (Y/M/C/K) is adjusted in sequence.
18.5.1.4 CST
18.5.1.4.1 MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4 0000-5424
T-18-71
Registers basic value of manual feeder's (DADF's) paper width.
A4R width: 210mm, A6R width: 105mm, A4 width: 297mm
- Once registered, the basic value can be fine-tuned by executing COPIER>

ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R, MF-A6R or MF-A4.
Operation method 1) Place A4R size paper in the manual feeder, and set the size guide to the A4R
width.
2) In this service mode, select 'MF-A4R' to display the item in reverse. Press the
OK key to perform automatic adjustment and register the value.
3) Repeat Steps 1) and 2) to register the basic values for the A6R and A4 sizes.
18-83
Chapter 18
18.5.1.5 CLEANING
18.5.1.5.1 TBLT-CLN 0000-5425
T-18-72
Cleans intermediate transfer belt.
Image imperfections are improved by removing

impurities adhering to the intermediate transfer belt
(such as fingerprints, grease and paper dust).
Operation method 1) Press 'TBLT-CLN' to display the item in reverse and

select it.
The cleaning operation lasts about 80 seconds, then

ends automatically.
18.5.1.6 FIXING
18.5.1.6.1 NIP-CHK 0000-5426
T-18-73
Fixing nip width automatic measurement output.
Operation method 1)If the finisher is connected, remove it from the copier and pull out the
lattice cable.
2)Place A4 (LTR) size paper in the manual feed tray.
3)Press the OK key (the paper in the manual feed tray is fed).
4)When the fed paper is pressed by the fixing roller, it stops, and is
delivered about 15 seconds later.
5)Check that the nip width of the delivered paper is the standard value.
1.5 mm
Paper
advance Standard value:
direction b Paper 8.75 mm ± 0.25 mm
Standard value: (less than 5,000 sheets)
center 9.25 mm ± 0.25 mm
a - c = 0.5 mm max.
(5,000 sheets or more)
1.5 mm
a
F-18-24
18-84
Chapter 18
T-18-74
6) If the standard value isn'tmet, adjust the value. See the Printer
Manual, Chapter 6, 'Fixing System' 4. 'Disassembly and
assembly' 4.2 'After fixing unit disassembly'
7) After completing the operation, output a test print
(COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE (6): Grid).
Remark The paper is delivered from the side paper delivery tray.
18.5.1.7 PANEL
18.5.1.7.1 LCD-CHK 0000-5427
T-18-75
Used to check missing dots in LCD.
Operation method 1) Select this item, then press the OK key to start the operation.
The touch panel's front surface should light repeatedly in the

sequence: white, black, red, green and blue. (Check that it does.)
2) Press the stop key (the clear key on printer models) to end the
operation.
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK
18.5.1.8.1 CL 0000-5428
T-18-76
Used to specify clutch for operation check.
(Range: 1 to 10, 5 and above are reserved.)
Operation 1) Select this item.

method
2) Enter the desired clutch code on the numeric keypad.
1: Two-sided registration clutch CL1
2: Two-sided paper feed clutch CL2
3: Conveyor clutch CL1 (paper deck)
4: Paper feed clutch CL2 (paper deck)
4) Press CL-ON, and check the operation.
18-85
Chapter 18
18.5.1.9 CLEAR
18.5.1.9.1 ERR 0000-5429
T-18-77
Clears error codes.
(Cleared error codes: E000, E001, E002, E003)
Operation 1) Select this item, and press the OK key.

method
2) Turn the main power OFF/ON.
18.5.1.10 MISC-R
18.5.1.10.1 SCANLAMP 0000-5430
T-18-78
Executes document illumination lamp lighting operation.
2) Press the OK key. The document illumination lamp lights for

3 seconds.
18.5.1.11 MISC-P
18.5.1.11.1 P-PRINT 0000-5431
T-18-79
Prints service mode setting values.
2) Press the OK key to print the setting values.
Note Printing takes about 15 seconds to start.
18-86
Chapter 18
18.5.1.11.2 D-PRINT 0007-6114
T-18-80
Printing out service mode (DISPLAY)
Procedure 1) Select this mode.
2) Press OK to print out.
Reference Only DISPLAY items are printed out. (Items of P-PRINT/LBL-

PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM are excluded.)
18.5.1.11.3 ENV-PRT 0007-6117
T-18-81
Outputting logs of inside machine temperature and humidity/fixing

roller surface temperature
Procedure 1) Select this mode.
2) Press OK to output logs of inside machine temperature and

humidity/fixing roller surface temperature.
Reference This mode is to output logs of [inside temperature(Åé)/humidity(%)/

fixing roller surface (center) temperature (Åé)] variations using signals
of the attached temperature/humidity (environmental) sensor and
fixing thermistor (main). (Max. 100 records)
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM
18.5.1.12.1 DOWNLOAD 0000-5432
T-18-82
Switches to download mode.
2) Press OK to enter download mode and have the copier wait

for commands (wait for connection). ("STNDBY" is now
displayed, next to the DOWNLOAD sub-items.)
3) Use the service support tool to start downloading.

("CONNECTED"is displayed during communication with the
PC.)
4) When communication ends, "HOLD"is displayed. (The

power can be turned off when "HOLD"is displayed.)
18-87
Chapter 18
18.5.2 FEEDER
18.5.2.1 SENS-INT 0000-5433
T-18-83
Used to adjust the initialization of ADF sensors.
Caution Execute this item when you have replaced the ADF controller
PCB, document placement sensor, pre-registration sensor, final
document detection sensor or reverse outlet sensor.
Note See the DIP switch function list in Chapter 5,

"Troubleshooting"in the DADF-D1/K1 Service Manual.
Operation method 1) Paste black paper (solid black) on the final document
detection sensor in the document tray.
(Make sure the black paper doesn't cover the document

placement sensor. The document placement display LED
must not light.)
2) Close the ADF, select this item, then press the OK key.
3) After about 15 seconds, the document detection LED flashes

twice. When <SERVICE> in the display changes to
<READY>, automatic adjustment is finished.
(<SERVICE> appears at the top right of the display during

automatic adjustment.)
18.5.3 FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode): Level 2
18.5.3.1 COPIER
18.5.3.1.1 LASER
LD-ADJ-Y/M/C 0007-5909
T-18-84
Making the tilt correction motor return to the initial position

automatically.
Operating 1) Select this mode.

Instructions

- The operation starts. It automatically stops when it is
completed.
18-88
Chapter 18
Reference The tilt correction motor may get locked when the tilt amount in
Information the horizontal scanning direction exceeds the expected range,
and consequently color displacement cannot be corrected even
though automatic registration is conducted.
When this symptom occurs, use this mode to make the tilt
correction motor return to the center position automatically.
(If you try to do this operation manually by opening the scanner
unit, you may touch the lens. For this reason, be sure to do it by
the automatic operation.)
This Service Mode is used to correct the tilt of Y, M, and C

against BK, which is used as a reference, when the tilt is large
(when the horizontal lines are higher at the right).
18.5.3.1.2 MISC-P
KEY-HIST 0001-2419
- KEY-HIST (Prints the operation panel's key input history.)
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.
HIST-PRT 0006-1033
- HIST-PRT (Prints the jam history and error history.)
TRS-DATA 0006-1037
- TRS-DATA (Moves the data received in memory to the BOX.)
18-89
Chapter 18
18.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

18.6.1 COPIER
18.6.1.1 BODY
18.6.1.1.1 MODEL-SZ 0000-5434
T-18-85
Used to select standard variable magnification display and

ADF document size detection.
Caution The setting value takes effect after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
Setting values 0: AB (6R5E)
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
18.6.1.1.2 BASE-SW 0006-8601
T-18-86
Switching from MEAP-Full model to MEAP-Base model
Settings 0: Base model
1: Full model
18.6.1.1.3 CNTR-DSP 0006-8629
T-18-87
Selecting screen in response to the external controller
Settings 0: The external controller icon is displayed on the control panel of

the copier
[Factory default/After RAM clear]
(When the color image server is connected.)
1: The control panel of the copier becomes nondisplay mode
(When the control panel-mounted external controller is

connected.)
18-90
Chapter 18
18.6.1.1.4 ENVP-INT 0006-8647
T-18-88
Setting log correction interval of inner machine temperature/humidity/

fixing temperature
Setting log collection interval to COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-

P>ENV-PRT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT
Settings 0 to 480 <min.>

[Factory default/After RAM clear:60]
Reference Log is not collected when '0' is set.
18.6.1.2 USER
18.6.1.2.1 COPY-LIM 0000-5435
T-18-89
Used to change upper limit value setting for number of

sheets to copy.
Setting values 1 to 999 sheets (Value at time of factory shipment/

value after RAM clear: 999)
18.6.1.3 ACC
18.6.1.3.1 COIN 0000-5436
T-18-90
Used to switch coin vendor setting.
Setting values 0: OFF (value at time of factory shipment)
1: ON
18-91
Chapter 18
18.6.1.3.2 USB-MSK 0007-6225
T-18-91
Limiting the number of USB-HOST channels on the models with

the USB-HOST installed.
Setting values 0 to 2
The relevant channels of the USB-HOST are masked

(deactivated).
(e.g.)
When there are two channels of CH0 and CH1,
0: Not mask any channel.
1: Masks CH1.
2: Reserved
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE
18.6.1.4.1 IMG-CONT 0001-2655
T-18-92
Used to set connection to PS print server unit.
Setting 0: Normal mode (no PS print server unit) (value at time of factory
values shipment)
1: Not used
2: Not used
3: PS print server unit
4: Not used
5: Not used
Caution When 1 is selected as the setting value, the following user mode items are
restored to their initial values:
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > IP address
address settings > Sub-net mask
address settings > Gateway address
- System management settings > Network settings > Ethernet driver

settings > Communication method
18-92
Chapter 18

settings > Ethernet type
- System management settings > Network settings > Startup time
- Common specifications settings
The following user mode settings are turned OFF:
address setting > DHCP use
address settings > RARP use
address settings > BOOTP use

settings > Automatic detection
- System management settings > Network settings > Spool function use
When 3 or 4 is selected as the setting value, the following settings are

turned OFF in addition to the items above.
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
RAW setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
LPD setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IPP
printing
- System management settings > Network settings > SMB setting
The items above are not restored when the setting value is returned to "0:
Normal mode", so must be set again as needed.
18-93
Chapter 18
18.6.2 SORTER
18.6.2.1 BLNK-SW 0000-5437
T-18-93
Used to set blank width (W) on both sides of fold position

when saddle stitcher is in use.
Setting values 0:Normal width (5 mm), 1: Large width (10 mm) (value at time
of factory shipment)
F-18-25
18.6.3 BOARD
18.6.3.1 SURF-OFF 0000-5438
T-18-94
Releases UFR board function.
Setting values 0: Even without UFR board, copier operates as copy model
without values displaying E codes.
1: UFR board recognition check is performed. If no UFR board

exists, E codes are displayed.
18-94
Chapter 18
18.6.4 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode): Level 2
18.6.4.1 COPIER
18.6.4.1.1 BODY
SCANSLCT 0001-2693
Used to turn ON/OFF function that calculates scan area from selected paper size.
0: OFF (Scan area is determined by document detection.)

(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: ON (Scan area is determined by paper size.)
RAW-DATA 0006-1145
Sets whether to print out raw received data.
0: Normal operation (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Print out raw received data
RMT-LANG 0006-1148
Used to select language of remote UI used from Web.
Select language code with + and - keys.
IFAX-LIM 0006-1151
Used to select whether number of output lines will be restricted when largevolume data is received by IFAX.
0: No restriction
1 to 999 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 500)
TC-REF 0006-1152
Used to turn ON/OFF environmental compensation on ATR sensor output
Normally, the ATR sensor output value used is the value compensated for the environment.
0: Environmental compensation OFF
1: Environmental compensation ON (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
If fogging occurs in a low-humidity environment, set this item to 0.
SMTPTXPN 0006-1153
Used to change SMTP send port number.
0 to 65535 (increments of 1) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 25)
SMTPRXPN 0006-1155
Used to change SMTP receive port number.
POP3PN 0006-1158
Used to change POP receive port number.
ORG-LGL 0006-1162
Used to set special paper size not compatible with DF size recognition.
0: LEGAL (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LEGAL
2: FOOLSCAP
18-95
Chapter 18
3: A-FOOLSCAP
4: FORIO
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: M-OFFICIO
9: B-OFFICIO
ORG-LTR 0006-1164
0: LTR (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR
2: A-LTR
3: EXECUTIVE
ORG-LTRR 0006-1167
0: LTR-R (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR-R
2: A-LTR-R
3: EXECUTIVE-R
UI-BOX 0006-1168
Used to select whether to display operation panel box screen.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
UI-SEND 0006-1170
Used to select whether to display operation panel send screen.
0: Don't display
UI-FAX 0006-1171
Used to select whether to display operation panel fax screen.
0: Don't display
UI-EXT 0006-1172
Used to select whether to display operation panel extension screen.
0: Don't display
C4HTR-DT 0006-1174
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 4th level.
C2HTR-DT 0006-1175
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 2nd level.
18-96
Chapter 18
Y-PTN 0006-1178
Used to eliminate 100 mm horizontal lines.
0: Don't imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt.
1: Imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt (only when reading color documents; value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear).
2: Imprint more Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt than when value of 1 is set.
K dot patterns are imprinted on intermediate transfer belt during monochrome document reading only when value of
2 is set.
SCR-SLCT 0006-1180
Used to select half-tone process for photographic printing paper/photo mode.
0: Use error diffusion method
1: Use low-line-count screen (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: Use high-line-count screen
TMC-SLCT 0006-1181
Used to select coefficient used in error diffusion process.
0: Low granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
1: Y/M/C -> Low granularity, low dot stability, Bk -> high granularity, low dot stability (value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: High granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
LOW-DZL 0006-1182
Used to change document illumination lamp lighting (document size detection operation) time.
0: Normal operation (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Dazzle reduction mode (Document illumination lamp is lit only once momentarily to detect document size.)
D-CLN-TM 0006-1183
Cleans light-sensitive drum surface.
CAL-SW 0006-1186
Used to switch condition for executing calibration control.
CLN-PTH 0006-1187
Sets threshold value (number of sheets) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
CLN-VTH 0006-1190
Sets threshold value (image density) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
DEVL-VTH 0006-1194
Sets threshold value (video count) for starting toner forcible consumption sequence.
FTPTXPN 0006-1213
Used to specify port (FTP) number to send to.
0 to 65535 (16-bit value) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 21)
18-97
Chapter 18
PRNT-ORD 0006-1214
Used to switch order of output to side tray.
SLPOFF01 to 12 0006-1215
Used to turn sleep mode OFF as way to eliminate condensation: January to December.
Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
INTPPR-1 0006-1216
Sets interval (number of sheets) for executing image stabilization control (adjustment set 1) between sheets.
0.50 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 100)
DWNSQ-SW 0006-1219
Used to improve tray loading during one-sided continuous printing.
IMG-OFF 0006-1222
Forcibly adds trailing-edge blank on second side of two-sided sheets.
PRN-FLG 0006-1223
Used to select area flag for PDL images.
SCN-FLG 0006-1225
Used to select area flag for copy images.
T-LW-LVL 0006-1226
Used to switch timing for display of remaining toner volume warning message.
DVTGT-Y/M/C/K 0006-1228
developer concentration target value offsets
Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
NWERR-SW 0006-1229
Used to select whether to display network error messages.
0: Don't display
FX-SPD 0006-1232
Used to adjust fixing roller speed.
-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value increases the fixing roller's speed (in 0.8% increments).
Setting this value automatically increases the operation speed of the paper delivery vertical path motor (the speed
increases by the same ratio as the speed of the fixing roller).
EX-PS-SP 0006-1233
Used to adjust paper delivery vertical path motor speed.
-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
FX-N-ROT 0006-1236
Used to turn fixing motor idle after warmup ON/OFF.
18-98
Chapter 18
0: ON (idle) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)

1: OFF (don't idle)
Setting this value to 1 increases the amount of paper curl, and reduces the capacity for the load on the paper delivery
tray.
FX-SUB 0006-1238
Sets the fixing sub-heater's lighting ratio.
0: Normal (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
Increasing this setting value decreases the lighting ratio (shortens the lighting time).
SLV-UP 0006-1239
Used to increase developing cylinder operation speed.
0: Normal (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Operate developing cylinder at 120% of normal speed.
2: Operate developing cylinder at 120% of normal speed and expand interval between sheets as well.
Setting this value to 2 decreases productivity ( -> 24 ppm).
STS-PORT 0006-1240
Used to turn TOT asynchronous status communication port ON/OFF.
For future expansion
CMD-PORT 0006-1241
Used to turn TOT synchronous command communication port ON/OFF.
For future expansion
BK-4CSW 0006-1242
Used to select color mode used in photo mode.
0: OFF (Use monochrome mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing
paper photo mode.)
1: ON (Use simple color mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing
paper photo mode.)
Instead of creating monochrome images in 4 colors, simple color mode applies only a very small amount of Y/M/C
toner to the ITB.
NEGA-GST 0006-5164
Additional Setting to the Sequence of Preconditioning Exposure (except laser)
0: OFF
1: ON (preconditioning exposure during initial rotations only)
2: ON (Preconditioning exposure during initial rotations and paper interval)
[Factory Setting/ Setting after RAM-clear]
Reference
Problem occurring when “2” is selected:
- Lower Productivity (=> delay by 2 or 3 seconds)
18-99
Chapter 18
NS-CMD5 0007-6192
T-18-95
Use it to set CRAM-MD5 authentication under SMTP authentication.
setting 0: dependent on SMTP server
1: disable
NS-GSAPI 0007-6194
T-18-96
Use it to set GSSAPI authentication under SMTP authentication.
1: disable
NS-NTLM 0007-6196
T-18-97
Use it to set NTLM authentication under SMTP authentication.
1: disable it
NS-PLNWS 0007-6202
T-18-98
Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.
<environment in which communication packets are subjected to

coding>
1: disable
18-100
Chapter 18
NS-PLN 0007-6204
T-18-99
Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN under SMTP authentication.
<environment in which communication packages are not subjected to

coding>
1: disable
NS-LGN 0007-6206
T-18-100
Use it to set LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication.
1: disable
SVMD-ENT 0007-7319
T-18-101
Switching the method of entering the Service Mode.
Setting Values 0: [User Mode key] -> Press [2] and [8] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key] [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: [User Mode key] -> Press [4] and [9] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key]
Reference Support for Siemens

Information
MEAP-DSP 0006-8669
T-18-102
Disabling screen transition from the MEAP screen to the standard screen
Settings 0: Enabling to shift to the standard screen [Factory default/After

RAM clear: 0]
1: Disabling to shift to the standard screen
18-101
Chapter 18
MEAP-PN 0006-8671
T-18-103
Setting the port No. of HTTP server used for MEAP application
Settings 0 to 65535 [Factory default/After RAM clear: 8000]
Note Do not use 1 to 1023 excepting 80 (HTTP) if specifying the port No. of
HTTP server as MEAP port.
(Because standard servers use numbers in this range.)
LSUB-DWY 0007-6213
Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Increasing DC bias of the lower auxiliary brush has the effect of retaining/charging remaining transfer toner.
(Countermeasures against fogged image)
However, faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result. Set this mode to '1'
if such faulty image occurs.
LSUB-DWM 0007-6214
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
LSUB-DWC 0007-6215
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
18-102
Chapter 18
BKTC-DWN 0007-6216
Countermeasures against fogged image due to Bk supply
Settings:
0: OFF
1: ON
Set this mode to [1 (countermeasures: ON)] when fogged image due to Bk supply occurs.
ANIM-SW 0006-8676
T-18-104
Disabling to display all jam/alarm messages when MEAP application is

running
Settings 0: Warning messages are displayed. [Factory default/After RAM

clear]
1: Warning messages are not displayed.
DA-PORT 0006-8679
T-18-105
Setting port for communication with DA
Settings 0: Close [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
1: Open
Note The following modes also become ON when

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-CNCT is set to '1'.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CMD-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-PORT
DA-CNCT 0006-8705
T-18-106
Setting connection to DA
Settings 1: DA is used
2: DA is not used [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
18-103
Chapter 18

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
CHNG-STS 0006-8722
T-18-107
Setting the port number for status connection under TUIF over
TCP/IP
Settings 1-65535
CHNG-CMD 0006-8727
T-18-108
Setting the port number for command connection under TUIF

over TCP/IP
Settings 1-65535
SSH-SW 0006-8737
T-18-109
SSH server ON/OFF

Settings 0: Sever is not started up

1: Server is started up

18-104
Chapter 18
RMT-LGIN 0006-8760
T-18-110
ON/OFF setting of remote login operation to SSH server

Settings 0: Remote login operation to SSH server is disabled
1: Remote login operation to SSH server is enabled
RE-PKEY 0006-8763
T-18-111
ON/OFF setting of SSH server key reproduction

Settings 0: SSH server key is not reproduced.
1: SSH server key is reproduced.
Note This mode is enabled only when

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW is set to '1'.
HDD-TMP 0007-6132
T-18-112
Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for

detecting a low temperature error.
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has
been turned off and then on again.
Settings 0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
HDD-TIM 0007-6134
T-18-113
Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and
then on again.
Settings 0 to 200 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10
18-105
Chapter 18
HDD-SW 0007-6135
T-18-114
Use it to enable/disable E code indication of a low temperature error
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been
turned off and then on again
Settings 0: indicate
1: do not indicate
at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
DV-RT-LG 0007-6222
Switching the developing assembly idle rotation time of first thing in the morning
Settings
0: 1 minute
1: 2 minutes
Default of idle rotation time is 1 minute since iR C3200/iR C3220 Dcon V12.1 However, use this mode to set 2
minutes if any trouble (faulty image etc.) occurs due to reduction of the time.
DH-TMG 0007-7315
T-18-115
Setting up a threshold for the accumulated number of outputs for the Dhalf control
sequence operation trigger.
Control If the fixing unit is lower than a specified temperature when the machine is turned on
or recovered from the sleep mode, use this mode to make automatic full adjustments
during initial multiple rotations.
At this time, the Dhalf control is performed only if the number of outputs accumulated
since the last Dhalf control exceeds the value specified in this Service Mode.
Changing the timing of or canceling the Dhalf control (according to the number of
accumulated outputs) by using this mode can reduce the downtime in the morning. (A
measure for a complaint about the downtime in the morning)
Meanwhile, there is a possibility that gray scale (half-tone image) might be degraded
when the Dhalf control is cancelled.
With regard to the accumulated number of outputs, a small-size copy is regarded as 1
count, and a large-size copy is regarded as 2 counts.
When the Dhalf control is performed first thing in the morning or from the User Mode
(quick correction, full correction), the accumulated number of outputs is reset.
Settings 1 to 5000 [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear: 1000]
18-106
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.2 USER
SIZE-DET 0001-2745
Used to turn document size detection function ON/OFF.
0: OFF
1: ON (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear) (When pressure plate opens/closes, optics don't
light, eliminating dazzle.)
DATE-DSP 0006-1247
Used to switch date display.
0: 'YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM'YY
2: MM/DD/YY
MB-CCV 0006-1248
Used to select whether to restrict mailbox control card users.
0: Don't restrict
1: Restrict
TRY-STP 0006-1253
Used to set mode in which output stops when tray is full.
0: Normal mode (Interrupted when finisher tray is full.)
1: Interrupted only by height detection
CNT-DISP 0006-1254
Used to select whether to display serial number when counter check key is pressed.
0: Display serial number.
1: Don't display serial number.
OP-SZ-DT 0006-1255
Used to turn document size detection when pressure plate is open ON/OFF.
0: Enter document size in control panel.
1: Detect document when start key is turned ON with pressure plate open.
NW-SCAN 0006-1258
Used to select whether to permit network scan function.
0: Don't permit
1: Permit (Invalid when UFR board or open interface board isn't connected.)
HDCR-DSP 0006-1259
Used to turn off display of user mode hard disk clear mode and switch clear operations.
0: Don't display and don't clear
1: Clear once with zeroes
2: Clear once with random data
3: Clear 3 times with random data (mode displayed for settings 1 to 3)
JOB-INVL 0006-1262
Used to set job interval during interrupt.
0: Standard setting (Output next job continuously during interrupt copy job.)
1: Start output of next job after last sheet of interrupt copy job has been delivered.
2: Start output of next job after last sheet of any job has been delivered.
18-107
Chapter 18
LGSW-DSP 0006-1264
Used to select whether to display "Log display ON/OFF setting" on user mode screen.
0: Don't display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
1: Display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
P-CRG-LF 0006-1266
Used to select operation performed when drum unit has reached end of service life.
0: Don't stop
1: Stop
PCL-COPY 0006-1267
Used to set compatible mode for "COPIES" PCL command.
0: Perform control on each page individually, according to value of COPIES command specified for each page (value
at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear).
1: Compatible (other controller) mode (not in use)
2: Reserved
FREG-SW 0006-8770
T-18-116
Switching display/nondisplay of a free register area of SEND MEAP

counter
Settings 0: Nondisplay [Factory default/After RAM clear]
1: Display
IFAX-SZL 0006-8775
T-18-117
Switching transmission size limitation during IFAX transmission

(Only when bypassing server)
Settings 0: Transmission size limitation is enabled (via/bypassing server)
1: Transmission size limitation is disabled (bypassing server only)
IFAX-PGD 0006-8777
T-18-118
Permitting the divided transmission per page (only when the

upper limit of the transmission data size is exceeded).
Settings 0: Not permit the divided transmission per page upon transmission
in the IFAX Simple mode.
18-108
Chapter 18
[initial factory setting/setting after RAM clear]
1: Permits the divided transmission per page upon

transmission in the IFAX Simple mode.
MEAPSAFE 0006-8774
T-18-119
Switching over to the MEAP safe mode.
Settings 0: Normal mode [initial factory setting/setting after RAM clear]
1: Safe mode
TRAY-FLL 0006-8786
T-18-120
Setting the timing to issue an output-tray-full warning.

Settings 0: Issues an output-tray-full warning when all the delivery trays
become full.
1: Issues an output-tray-full warning when all the specified

trays become full.
AFN-PSWD 0006-8779
T-18-121
Limiting access to the User Mode.

Settings 0: Normal mode (Enters the User Mode without asking a password)
1: Enters the User Mode after a password matches.
18-109
Chapter 18
DPT-ID-7 0007-7320
T-18-122
Registering a department ID and inputting a 7-digit code for

authentication.
Setting Values 0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: Inputting a 7-digit code

Information
RUI-RJT 0007-7321
T-18-123
Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from

RUI are recognized.
Setting Values 0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: Valid

Information
CTM-S06 0006-8781
T-18-124
Setting password deletion from the export file of file

transmission address
Settings 0: Password is not deleted from the export file
1: Password is deleted from the export file
18-110
Chapter 18
CTM-S07 0006-8782
T-18-125
Setting deletion of transmission password source on the edit

screen/UI address
Settings 0: Transmission password source on the edit screen is not deleted.
1: Transmission password source on the edit screen is deleted.
18.6.4.1.3 CST
U1-NAME 0001-2753
Used to turn paper name display when U1 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U1" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U1" service mode item.
U2-NAME 0006-1276
Used to turn paper name display when U2 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U2" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U2" service mode item.
CST-U1 0006-1277
Used to specify paper name used by U1 paper size group.
CST-U2 0006-1278
Used to specify paper name used by U2 paper size group.
24: FOOLSCAP (CST-U2: Default)
25: Australian FOOLSCAP
26: OFFICIO
27: Ecuador OFFICIO
28: Bolivia OFFICIO
29: Argentine LETTER
30: Argentine LETTER-R
31: Government LETTER
32: Government LETTER-R
34: Government LEGAL
35: FOLIO
36: Argentine OFFICIO
37: Mexico OFFICIO
38: EXECTIVE (CST-U2: Default)
18-111
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.4 ACC
STPL-LMT 0001-2748
Used to restrict number of sheets for saddle binding.
0: 5 sheets (no white band)
1: 10 sheets (no white band)
2: 10 sheets (white band)
3: 15 sheets (no white band) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
DF-MUTE 0006-1268
DADF silent reading mode
0: Normal mode (750 mm/s) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Silent mode (420 mm/s)
SC-TYPE 0006-1270
Used to switch type of coin vendor-compatible model
18.6.4.1.5 INT-FACE
AP-OPT 0001-2751
Used to set whether printing from application PrintMe in PS print server unit is possible.
0: Printing permitted for all department IDs (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Printing refused (printing is only possible for specified department ID).
AP-ACCNT 0005-9725
Used to set (CPCA) department ID for printing (print jobs) from application PrintMe in PS print server unit.
0 to 9999999 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
AP-CODE 0006-5130
T-18-126
Use it to set a path for printing from an external controller

(CPCA).
Setting: 0 (upon shipment from factory/RAM initialization)
Setting range: 0 to 9999
18.6.4.2 BOARD
18.6.4.2.1 MENU-1 to 4 0006-1280

Used to select whether to display Levels 1 to 4 of printer settings menu.
0: Don't display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Display
18.6.4.2.2 TR-DSP 0006-1281

Used to select whether to display toner reduction function switch.
18-112
Chapter 18
18.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

18.7.1 COPIER
18.7.1.1 NETWORK
18.7.1.1.1 PING 0000-5440
T-18-127
Checks connection between copier and network (during TCP/IP

connection only).
Caution Use this item when checking the connection to the network at
time of installation or when there is a network connection
problem.
< NETWORK > < 1/1 > < READY >

PING 0. 0. 0. 0
Result display (OK/NG) IP address input
+/- OK
F-18-26
18-113
Chapter 18
T-18-128
Operation method 1) Turn the main power switch OFF.
2) Connect the network cable to the copier and turn the main power
switch ON.
3) Tell the user's system administrator that copier installation is

complete, and have them him/her the network settings.
4) Ask the system administrator to allow you to perform a network

connection check, and check the address of the remote host (IP
address of the PC terminal in the user network) to send the PING.
5) Select the COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING service mode
item, enter the IP address checked in Step 4 on the operation panel's
numeric keypad, and press the OK key.
If the copier is connected to the network normally, "OK" is

displayed (and the procedure is finished).
If "NG" is displayed, first check the connection of the network

cable. If the connection is normal, go to Step 6. If there is a problem
with the network cable's connection, redo the connection and redo
Step 5.
item, enter the loop back address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK
key followed by the start key.
If "NG" is displayed, there is a problem with the local TCP/IP

settings. Go back to Step 3 and check the settings again.
If "OK" is displayed, there is no problem with the local TCP/IP

settings. However, there could be a problem with the network
interface board (NIC) connection or the NIC itself. Go to Step 7 to
check the NIC.
*The loop back address returns the signal in front of the NIC,
enabling checking of the local TCP/IP settings.
item, enter the local host address (local IP address), then press the
OK key.
If "OG" is displayed, there could be a problem with the NIC

connection or the NIC itself. In this case, check the NIC connection
or replace the NIC.
If "OK" is displayed, there is no problem with the local network

settings or NIC.
In this case, the problem may be with the user's network

environment. Explain the situation to the system administrator, and
ask them to deal with it.
18-114
Chapter 18
18.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

18.8.1 COPIER
18.8.1.1 Overview
18.8.1.1.1 Outline 0006-5189
The COPIER/COUNTER screen is shown below. The items are described starting on the next page.
F-18-27
<Clearing counter values>

1) Select the item to clear, displaying it in reverse.
2) Press the clear key on the operation panel.
- The counter is cleared, resetting it to "00000000".
<Small size and large size in this mode>
- TOTAL/PICKUP/FEEDER/JAM
Large (L) size: Paper larger than A4, LTR size
Small (S) size: A4, LTR size and smaller paper
- DRBL-1/DRBL-2 (PD-PU-RL, C3-PU-RL, C4-PU-RL)
Large (L) size: Paper longer than 324 mm in the feed direction
Small (S) size: Paper 324 mm or shorter in the feed direction
- DRBL-2 (DF-PU-RL, DF-SP-PD, DF-F-BLT, DF-SP-RL)
Large (L) size: Paper longer than the LTR length (216 mm) in the feed direction
Small (S) size: Paper of the LTR length (216 mm) or shorter in the feed direction
<Reading counters for consumable parts/parts needing periodic replacement>
The copier has special counters (DRBL-1/DRBL-2) that can be used to provide a guideline for when to replace
consumable parts or parts needing periodic replacement.
Small size sheets are counted in increments of 1, large size sheets are counted in increments of 2.
18-115
Chapter 18
T-18-129
<Example>
TR-BELT / 00000201 / 00240000 / 0% !! 000082

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[1]: Displays the part name. In this example, the intermediate transfer belt unit.
[2]: Displays the counter value (actual number of sheets used). The value is cleared by pressing the clear key when
the part is replaced.
[3]: Displays the limit value (number of sheets as guideline for replacement). You can select the item and change the
value with the numeric keypad. After changing the value, press the OK key.
[4]: Displays the ratio of the counter value to the limit value.
[5]: When the ratio is between 90% and 100%, a single exclamation mark (!) is displayed.
When the ratio is over 100%, two exclamation marks (!!) appear. In the example above, no exclamation marks would
appear.
[6]: Displays the predicted number of days until replacement. The example above shows 82 days.
18.8.1.2 TOTAL
18.8.1.2.1 SERVICE1 0001-2807

Service total counter 1
Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer.
(Incremented for both large and small size sheets.)
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.2.2 SERVICE2 0006-1293

Service total counter 2
Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer.
(Incremented by 2 for large size sheets, and by 1 for small size sheets.)
18.8.1.2.3 COPY 0006-1295

Total copies counter
Incremented when a copy operation is executed and paper is delivered outside the printer.
18.8.1.2.4 PDL-PRT 0006-1296

PDL print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter during PDL printing, when paper is delivered outside the copier and two-
sided paper is loaded.
Blank sheets are not counted. Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets.
18-116
Chapter 18
18.8.1.2.5 FAX-PRT 0006-1298

Fax received print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a fax is received, when a print is delivered outside the copier and
two-sided paper is loaded.
Blank sheets are not counted. Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets. Can be cleared.
18.8.1.2.6 RMT-PRT 0006-1299

Remote print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a remote print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier
and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.7 BOX-PRT 0006-1301

Box print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a box print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier and
two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.8 RPT-PRT 0006-1303

Report print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a report print is made, when paper is delivered outside the copier
and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.9 2-SIDE 0006-1304

Two-sided copy/print counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a two-sided copy/print is made, when paper is delivered outside the
copier and two-sided paper is loaded.
18.8.1.2.10 SCAN 0006-1306

Scan counter
Incremented along with the billing counter when a scan is made, when reading finishes.
Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets. Can be cleared.
18-117
Chapter 18
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP
18.8.1.3.1 C1 0001-2811
Cassette 1 paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 1.
18.8.1.3.2 C2 0006-1307
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 2.
18.8.1.3.3 C3 0006-1308
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 3 (top level of cassette pedestal).
18.8.1.3.4 C4 0006-1309
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 4 (bottom level of cassette pedestal).
18.8.1.3.5 MF 0006-1310
Manual paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from manual paper feed unit.
18.8.1.3.6 DK 0006-1311
Deck paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from deck paper feed unit.
18.8.1.3.7 2-SIDE 0006-1312

Two-sided paper feed total counter
Displays number of two-sided sheets fed.
18.8.1.4 FEEDER
18.8.1.4.1 FEED 0006-1359

ADF document feed total counter
18-118
Chapter 18
18.8.1.5 JAM
18.8.1.5.1 TOTAL 0001-2852

Total jam counter for copier
18.8.1.5.2 FEEDER 0006-1315

Total jam counter for feeder
18.8.1.5.3 SORTER 0006-1316

Total jam counter for finisher
18.8.1.5.4 2-SIDE 0006-1319

Jam counter for two-sided unit
18.8.1.5.5 MF 0006-1320
Jam counter for multi-feeder
18.8.1.5.6 C1 0006-1322
Jam counter for cassette 1
18.8.1.5.7 C2 0006-1324
18.8.1.5.8 C3 0006-1326
18.8.1.5.9 C4 0006-1327
18.8.1.5.10 DK 0006-1328
Jam counter for side paper deck
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1
18.8.1.6.1 SCN-LMP 0001-2857

Number of sheets document illumination lamp has lit (count value is stored
in controller).
18.8.1.6.2 T-CLN-BD 0006-1330

Number of sheets that have passed through transfer cleaning unit (count value is stored in controller).
18-119
Chapter 18
18.8.1.6.3 TR-BLT 0006-1331

Number of sheets that have passed through intermediate transfer belt unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.4 TR-ROLL 0006-1332

Number of sheets that have passed through secondary transfer outer roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.5 C1-PU-RL 0006-1334

Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 1 paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.6 C2-PU-RL 0006-1335

Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 2 paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.7 M-PU-RL 0006-1336

Number of sheets that have passed through manual paper feed roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.8 FX-UP-RL 0006-1338

Number of sheets that have passed through fixing roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.9 FX-LW-RL 0006-1339

Number of sheets that have passed through pressure roller (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.10 FX-UNIT 0006-1341

Number of sheets that have passed through fixing unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.6.11 FX-UP-FR 0006-1343

Number of sheets that have passed through fixing upper frame unit (count value is stored in controller).
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2
18.8.1.7.1 DF-PU-RL 0006-1344

Number of sheets that have passed through ADF paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.2 DF-SP-PD 0006-1347

Number of sheets that have passed through ADF separation pad.
18.8.1.7.3 DF-F-BLT 0006-1348

Number of sheets that have passed through ADF conveyor belt.
Incremented by 3 for S-size two-sided sheets, and L-size one-sided/twosided sheets.
18.8.1.7.4 DF-SP-RL 0006-1349

Number of sheets that have passed through ADF separation roller.
18-120
Chapter 18
18.8.1.7.5 PD-PU-RL 0006-1351

Number of sheets that have passed through paper deck paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.6 C3-PU-RL 0006-1352

Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 3 paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.7 C4-PU-RL 0006-1353

Number of sheets that have passed through cassette 4 paper feed roller.
18.8.1.7.8 SORT 0006-1354

Number of sheets that have passed through sort path.
Incremented by 1 even for L-size sheets.
18.8.1.7.9 FIN-STPR 0006-1355

Number of staple operations.
18.8.1.7.10 FIN-PDDL 0006-1356

Number of sheets that have passed through finisher paddle.
18.8.1.7.11 SADDLE 0006-1357

Number of saddle operations.
18.8.1.7.12 SDL-STPL 0006-1358

Number of saddle staple operations.
18-121
Chapter 18
18-122
Chapter 19 Upgrading
Contents
Contents
19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1

19.1.1 Construction of Firmware ...................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ........................................................................ 19-5
19.2 Making Preparations ...................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.1 Registering the Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 Making Connections ............................................................................................................................. 19-11
19.3 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................. 19-18
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1 Downloading the System Software ...................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module .................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-35
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ....................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-42
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software ......................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-50
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software .................................................................................................... 19-58
19.4.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-58
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 19-65
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 19-66
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 19-72
Chapter 19
19.1 Outline
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware 0000-5449
The iR C3200 is taken as an example from this section. (i.e., The information described from here are common in iR
C3200 series.)
The construction of the machine's firmware is as follows:
T-19-1
Firmware Function Location Remarks
System Control of the system as a whole HDD
Language Display of control panel screens HDD
RUI Display of the RUI HDD
Boot Startup of the machine BootROM DIMM
G3FAX Control of the G3 FAX Board G3 FAX Board DIMM
Dcon ROM Control of DC controller DC controller PCB Soldered to a flash ROM
Rcon ROM Control of the reader controller Reader controller PCB Soldered to a flash ROM
Flash ROM Rcon

Flash ROM Dcon DC controller PCB
G3Fax board
Flash ROM DIMM Boot ROM

G3Fax
HDD
System Boot
Language
RUI
Main controller PCB

F-19-1
19-1
Chapter 19
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool 0000-5450
The service support tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:
PC for servicing work iRC3200
SST
Initializing the HDD
HDD settings information
HDD
Downloading firmware
Firmware
Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data
Downloading backup data
Back up RAM
F-19-2
To use the SST, you must first set the machine to download mode.
The machine's download mode consists of 2 types, selected by pressing a combination of appropriate keys (keypad)
when starting up the machine.
[1] normal mode: 1 + 7
after startup, start service mode, and make the following selections:
COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
[2] safe mode: 2 + 8
19-2
Chapter 19
on keypad, 2 + 8
Main power on keypad, 1 + 7
switch ON
Download control
program Boot ROM Boot program
(safe mode)
HDD
System program
In service mode:
COPIER > Function >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
Download control
program
(normal mode)
Download mode Download mode

(safe mode) (normal mode)
F-19-3
Use safe mode for the following:

- after replacing the HDD.
- if the system fails to operate normally (E602-0001, -0002).
19-3
Chapter 19
The following shows combinations of functions that may be used in association with the SST and the machine when
the machine is in download mode:
T-19-2
Function Download mode
Normal mode Safe mode
Formatting the HDD All inclusive

DOSDEV BOOTDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5
Downloading firmware - System - System

- Language - Language
- RUI - RUI
- Boot - Boot
- G3Fax
- Dcon
- Rcon
Uploading backup data - SramImg - SramImg

- SramDCON
- SramRCON
Downloading backup data - SramImg - SramImg

- SramDCON
- SramRCON
19-4
Chapter 19
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use 0000-5451
The machine communicates with the SST using the Ethernet protocol (TCP/IP).
The machine offers the following 2 sets of network settings:
user environment network settings (user mode>system control settings>network settings)
service network settings (IP address: 172.16.1.100; subnet mask: 255.255.255.0, fixed)
The network settings are dependent on how the machine is started up.
The user environment settings are retained while the service settings are selected.
You need not change the user mode network settings before or after the use of the SST.
iRC3200
User network environment
User environment network settings

Ethernet I/F
Service network settings
Power OFF
Power ON in response to 1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
Service PC

(settings are retained)
Ethernet I/F
SST in use

IP address: 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Power OFF
Normal power ON
iRC3200
User network environment

Ethernet I/F (settings retained in memory)

F-19-4
19-5
Chapter 19
If you start up the machine by pressing 1 + 7, the machine indicates 'FIXIP' in the upper right of the LCD to
distinguish its state from normal.
F-19-5
19-6
Chapter 19
If a TokenRing board is installed, the Ethernet interface is disabled.

If you, on the other hand, start up the machine by pressing 1 + 7 or 2 + 8, the TokenRing interface will be disabled
while the Ethernet interface remains enabled; thus, you need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the
SST.
User network environment iRC3200

(TokenRing)
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
Power OFF
Power ON by s1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
PC for service
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
SST in use
F-19-6
19-7
Chapter 19
19.2 Making Preparations

19.2.1 Registering the Firmware 0000-5452
You will be registering the firmware stored on the system CD to the SST.
Before Starting the Work
Keep the following on hand:
- PC to which SST v1.61 or later has been installed.
- system CD for iRC3200
(in the case of Netware support, iRC3200N system CD)
Registering the Firmware
1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click "Next"under "Data management"
F-19-7
19-8
Chapter 19
5) Click "Register Firmware"
F-19-8
6) Click "Register from selected folder"
F-19-9
19-9
Chapter 19
7) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click "Search"
F-19-10
8) When the list of firmware items contained on the system CD has appeared, click "Register All" when it becomes
enabled.
F-19-11
19-10
Chapter 19
9) When the results of the registration have appeared, press "OK"
F-19-12
19.2.2 Making Connections 0000-5453
You will be connecting the PC to the machine.
Before Starting the Work

Keep the following on hand:
- PC to which SST v1.61 or later has been installed and iRC3200 firmware has been registered
- Twisted pair 10Base-T (category 3 or 5)

Cross cable 100Base-TX(category 5)
Procedure
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
Type "IPCONFIG" in response to the command prompt, and press the Return key.
Check to see that the network settings are as follows:
IP address: 172.16.1.160 (other than 172.16.1.0, 172.16.1.100, 172.16.1.255)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any
19-11
Chapter 19
C:\ Command Prompt

M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 [ Ve r s i o n 5 . 0 0 . 2 1 9 5 ]
( C ) C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 - 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p.
C:\ ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.1.160
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\
F-19-13
If the settings are not as indicated, change the PC network settings:

3) Check to see that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF; then, turn off the machine's main power
switch.
4) Connect the machine and the PC with a cross cable.
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Cross cable
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
10Base-T: category 3, 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-19-14
19-12
Chapter 19
5) While holding down the keys (keypad) suited to the download mode you are going to use, turn on the machine's
main power switch.
- if normal mode, 1 + 7
enter source mode, and make the following selections : COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
- if safe mode, 2 + 8
6) Start up the SST.
If you are connecting your PC to a different network after using the SST, you must be sure to change the PC network
settings to suit the settings of the new network.
If you connect to a different network using the IP address you used for the SST, the possible presence of the same IP
address on the network can cause serious problems to the network functions.
7) Click "Next under Download/Upload"
F-19-15
19-13
Chapter 19
8) Select the model of the machine.
F-19-16
9) Select the unit you want, and click "Connect"
F-19-17
19-14
Chapter 19
10) Click "Set host name"
F-19-18
11) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click "OK".
F-19-19
19-15
Chapter 19
12) Click "OK" so that the machine makes a connection.
F-19-20
13) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-21
19-16
Chapter 19
19.3 Formatting the HDD

19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions 0000-5454
You will be setting up partitions on the HDD and formatting (initializing) them for use by the main controller.
HDD
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
Formatting all partitions DOSDEV2
(only if in safe mode)
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
HDD offered as service part HDD after formatting

(partitions are not set up)
F-19-22
E602-0001
- Indicates that the BOOTDEV partition, in which the system program are stored, cannot be found at time of start-up.
- To correct, format all partitions in safe mode, and download the following: system, language, RUI.
19-17
Chapter 19
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions 0000-5455
You will be formatting (initializing) partitions that you have selected.
HDD
FSTPDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2 May be formatted in normal mode
DOSDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV May be formatted in safe mode*
DOSDEV5
Partitions on HDD *After formatting, requires downloading

of the following: system, language, RUI.
F-19-23
T-19-3
Partition Description Error code for

data error
DOSDEV Area for general work E602-0401
FSTDEV Storage of image data E602-0201
DOSDEV2 Storage of thumbnail display data of image data E602-0301
FSTPDEV Storage of image data E602-0101
DOSDEV3 Temporary storage of PDL job E602-0501
PDLDEV PDL processing E602-0601
DOSDEV4 Storage of address book, filter E602-0701
BOOTDEV System area (stores system, language, RUI) E602-0801
DOSDEV5 Reserved E602-0901
19-18
Chapter 19
E602-0x01
- Indicates the presence of a data error in the identified partition.
- To correct, format the identified partition.
Formatting Partitions Using the SST
T-19-4
Name of partition that may be selected by Partition that is formatted

the SST
FSTDEV FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV,

DOSDEV2
DOSDEV3 DOSDEV3
PDLDEV PDLDEV
DOSDEV4 DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5 DOSDEV5
BOOTDEV BOOTDEV
FSTDEV and FSTPDEV retains image data as it accumulates while DOSDEV and DOSDEV2 retains its associated
data; these 4 partitions, therefore, must be formatted at the same time.
To do so, select FSTDEV using the SST.
The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it
takes as long as the following:
FSTDEV:2 min (approx.)
PDLDEV:5 min (approx.)
all partitions:7 min (approx.; i.e., FSTDEV + PDLDEV)
The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress
bar.
Formatting of DOSDEV4 requires the use of the SST.
19-19
Chapter 19
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions 0000-5456
1) Click "To Next" under "Download/upload"
F-19-24
2) Select HD Format, and click "Connect"
F-19-25
19-20
Chapter 19
3) Click "Set host name"
F-19-26
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click "OK"
F-19-27
19-21
Chapter 19
5) Click "OK" to start connection.
F-19-28
6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-29
19-22
Chapter 19
7) Click "Format".
F-19-30
8) Select the partition you want to format form the list, and click "Start".
To format all partitions, click "Start" shown for all partitions (enabled if in safe mode).
F-19-31
19-23
Chapter 19
T-19-5
Normal Mode
F-19-32
T-19-6
Safe Mode
19-24
Chapter 19
9) When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time, click "Start".
F-19-33
10) When the machine indicates the message to indicate the end of formatting, click "OK".
F-19-34
19-25
Chapter 19
11) Click "return to unit selection screen"
If you have formatted all partitions or BOOTDEV, you must download the following: system, language, RUI. If you
fail to download system, an error (E602-0002) will occur when the main power is turned on.
Formatting of PDLDEV and DOSDEV2 takes place when the main power is turned on the next time.
Although varying according to the state of the HDD, formatting lasts as long as the following: for all partitions, about
7 min; for PDLDEV, about 5 min; for DOSDEV2, about 2 min.
The progress bar indicated at time of power-on will advance gradually while formatting is taking place.
Turning off the power at this time prevents access to the HDD, causing E0602.
You must not turn off the machine's main power while the progress bar is shown.
19-26
Chapter 19
19.4 Downloading System Software

19.4.1 Downloading the System Software
19.4.1.1 Outline 0000-5457
PC for service iRC3200
SST
iRC3200 Main controller block
System
HDD
(System-Main)
(System-Sub) Download
(ICC Profile) BOOTDEV
iRC3200N*
(System-Main)
System (System-Sub)
(System-Main) (ICC Profile)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
*Only for Japan.

F-19-35
The system software comes in 3 types, selected depending on the country of installation and support of NetWare.
In the case of Japan, an appropriate model must be selected with reference to the presence/absence of support for
NetWare.
T-19-7
Country SST Firmware NetWare Remarks

installation
model
Japan iRC3200 System-JP ja Not Installed at time of shipment

supported
(to iRC3200/3200S)
iRC3200N System-JP ja Supported Installed at time of shipment
(to iRC3200N)
Other iRC3200 System-USen Supported Installed at time of shipment
19-27
Chapter 19
The machines' firmware consists of multiple files.

The SST handles these files in groups, and transfers them in succession at time of downloading.
Files Making Up the System Software
T-19-8
System-Main program for main CPU
System-Sub program for sub CPU
ICC Profile color correction information file for PDL functions
E602-0002
- the system software for the main CPU cannot be found when the machine is started up.
- to correct, download the system software.
E602-0006
- the system file cannot be found for the sub CPU when the machine is started up.
E602-0007
- the IC profile cannot be found when the machine is started up.
19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure 0000-5458
Making Checks in Advance (only in Japan)

Check the type of system software installed to the machine (support of NetWare) in service mode.
COPIER > Display > ACC-STS > NETWARE
NetWare not supported: 0
NetWare Supported: 1
Select the type of system software to download using the name of the model:
iRC3200
System-JP ja (for Japan): NetWare not supported
iRC3200N
System-JP ja (for Japan): NetWare supported
Procedure
Download Mode
if E602-0002 is indicated, safe mode
otherwise, normal mode
19-28
Chapter 19
1) Click [To next] under "Download/upload"
F-19-36
2) Select the system software of the iRC3200, and click [Connect].

In Japan and if NetWare is supported, be sure to select the system software of the iRC3200N.
F-19-37
19-29
Chapter 19
3) Click [Set host name].
F-19-38
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically. Click [OK].
F-19-39
19-30
Chapter 19
5) Click [OK] to start connection.
F-19-40
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-41
19-31
Chapter 19
7) Click [System Software Download].
F-19-42
8) Select the version to download, and click [Start].
F-19-43
19-32
Chapter 19
9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, click [OK].
F-19-44
10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine to start up.
19-33
Chapter 19
F-19-45
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat and download the following:
system software, language files, and RUI files.
19-34
Chapter 19
19.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module
19.4.2.1 Outline 0000-5459
iRC3200
Network
LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen RUI-XXen
Language-XXit RUI-XXit
Language-XXja RUI-XXja RUI(ja)

• •
• •
Language RUI
Network PC
F-19-46
T-19-9
Language used on control panel LCD Language used in RUI
Check the versions of the system software and language files. Select on the RUI.
- If the versions are correct, selections may be made in - A specific language may be
user mode: selected for a specific PC.
user mode>common specifications settings>display language

switchover
- If the versions are not correct, "E744" will be indicated.
Turn off and then on the main power so that the system
language will be used:
System Language
System-JP ja: Japanese (inside Japan)
System-USen: English (outside Japan)
19-35
Chapter 19
T-19-10
Language code Language Language code Language
de German it Italian
en English ja Japanese
fr French
E744
- Indicates that the version of the system software and that of the language files do not mach.
- Uses the (built-in) system language for the LCD when the main power is turned off and then on.
- To correct, download the language that matches the version of the system software.
PC for service iRC3200
SST
iRC3200 Main controller block
HDD
Language
XXen Download
XXja BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
RUI Language-XXja
XXen RUI-XXen
XXja
RUI-XXja
F-19-47
Procedure
Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode.
The following describes downloading of the language files; both language and RUI files may be downloaded in
common among models (here, the iRC3200 is selected):
19-36
Chapter 19
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/upload"
F-19-48
2) Select "language" for the iRC3200, and click [Connect].
F-19-49
19-37
Chapter 19
F-19-50
4) The machine's IP address will be entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-51
19-38
Chapter 19
5) Click [OK] to start making a connection.
F-19-52
F-19-53
19-39
Chapter 19
7) Click [Language Download].
F-19-54
F-19-55
19-40
Chapter 19
9) When the result of downloading is indicated, click [OK].
F-19-56
10) Click [To Unit Selection Screen].
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine from starting up.
19-41
Chapter 19
F-19-57
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat, and download the following:
system software, language files, RUI files.
19.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software
19.4.3.1 Outline 0000-5461
The boot ROM differs according to the machine's functions:
T-19-11
Boot ROM Service mode Country Machine function

type indication
Copy xx.yyC Worldwide Copy
LIPS xx.yyL Japan Copy+LIPS
PSPCL xx.yyN Outside Japan Copy+PSPCL
19-42
Chapter 19
PC for service
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Select a function
suited to the type
of boot ROM. May be upgraded
by DIMM replacement
iRC3200
SST
Japan
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200L
Boot (LIPS) Download Boot ROM
Outside Japan (Flash ROM DIMM)
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200N Only if boot of
Boot (PSPCL) same type Main controller block
F-19-58
If downloading fails, the boot ROM will have to be repalced.
The type of boot ROM mounted to the machine may be checked using service mode:
COPIER > Display > VERSION > BOOT-ROM
Copy:xx.yyC
LIPS: xx.yyL (Japan)
PSPCL: xx.yyN (outside Japan)
19-43
Chapter 19
Downloading may take place in normal mode or in safe mode.
1) Click [next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-59
19-44
Chapter 19
2) Select "Boot"for the iRC3200 (if a LIPS model, select iRC3200L; if a PSPCL model, select iRC3200N); then,
click [Connect].
F-19-60
F-19-61
19-45
Chapter 19
4) The machine's IP address will be entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-62
F-19-63
19-46
Chapter 19
F-19-64
If the wrong type of boot ROM has been selected, the following screen will appear; select the correct model:
F-19-65
19-47
Chapter 19
7) Click [Boot ROM Download].
F-19-66
F-19-67
19-48
Chapter 19
9) When the result of downloading has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-68
10) Click [return to unit select screen].
After Downloading
When you have upgraded the boot ROM, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch so that the
new version will be validated.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, the machine will fail writting to the
boot ROM and may not start up.
19-49
Chapter 19
F-19-69
If the machine fails to start up, replace the boot ROM.
19.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software
19.4.4.1 Outline 0000-5463
The DC controller/reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
Both DC controller PCB and the reader controller PCB are equipped with boot ROMs, permitting retries if
downloading fails.
19-50
Chapter 19
iRC3200
PC for service
SST Printer unit Reader unit

Flash ROM
iRC3200 Download Main Signal cable
controller CPU
Dcon Downloading block
possible only Boot ROM
Rcon in normal mode
Power cable
Flash ROM
CPU Power
supply
Power supply cable
Boot ROM control signal
DC controller PCB
F-19-70
Unless the DC controller has started up normally, the power supply control signal will not be validated, not supplying
the reader unit with power and not permitting downloading of reader controller files.
Making Pre-Checks
Power cable Signal cable
• No error code must be indicated.

• In the case of downloading reader
controller files, the version of 'DCCON'
must be indicated in service mode.
F-19-71
19-51
Chapter 19
Procedure
The following describes downloading of DC controller files (both DC controller and reader controller files are
shared in common among models; herein, the iRC3200 is selected):
1) Click [To Next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-72
19-52
Chapter 19
2) Select "DCON"and click [Connect].
F-19-73
F-19-74
19-53
Chapter 19
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; click [OK].
F-19-75
F-19-76
19-54
Chapter 19
F-19-77
7) Click [DCON Download].
F-19-78
19-55
Chapter 19
F-19-79
F-19-80
19-56
Chapter 19
10) Click [return to unit selection screen].
After Downloading
If you have downloaded DC controller or reader controller files, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
switch. You cannot download the DC controller and reader controller files in succession.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to "DCON/RCON"can fail,
indicated by the following error codes:
DCON:E733
RCON:E732
F-19-81
If an error code is indicated, be sure to download the appropriate firmware.
19-57
Chapter 19
19.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software
19.4.5.1 Outline 0000-5465
The G3Fax files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
iRC3200
PC for service G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Upgrading may be
by DIMM replacement
SST
Downloading
iRC3200 G3Fax
CPU (Flash ROM DIMM)
G3Fax
Main controller
PCB G3 fax board
Downloading possible
only in normal mode
F-19-82
If downloading fails, the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced.
19-58
Chapter 19
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
1) Click [To Next] under "Downloading/Uploading"
F-19-83
19-59
Chapter 19
2) Select "G3FAX" and click [Connect].
F-19-84
F-19-85
19-60
Chapter 19
F-19-86
F-19-87
19-61
Chapter 19
F-19-88
7) Click [G3Fax Download].
F-19-89
19-62
Chapter 19
F-19-90
F-19-91
19-63
Chapter 19
After Downloading
When you have downloaded G3Fax files, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
You cannot download G3Fax files twice in succession.

(Once downloading ends, the G3 fax board will be reset, leaving download mode.)
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated.
Writing to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board will fail, preventing the G3 fax board functions from operating
normally.
F-19-92
If the G3 fax board fails to operate, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM on the G3 fax board.
19-64
Chapter 19
19.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

19.5.1 Outline 0000-5467
The machine's backup data is stored on the SRAM PCB, DC controller PCB, and reader controller PCB.
Any backup data is selected with reference to its file name used when uploading it.
T-19-12
Backup data File name selected at time of uploading
SRAM PCB (main controller block) SramImg. bin
DC controller PCB SramDCON. bin
Reader controller PCB SramRCON. bin
If you plan to replace the DC controller PCB or the reader controller PCB, it is a good idea to upload its data in
advance, and download it after replacement so that parts counter readings and the like may be retained.
Reader unit Reader controller PCB
PC for service EEPROM CPU

SST SramRCON.bin
iRC3200
Printer unit
Upload/download
System Main controller PCB
Possible only in normal mode
SramImg
SramDCON Sub controller PCB
SramRCON
SRAM PCB
SRAM CPU SRAM
SramDCON.bina SramImg.bin
DC controller PCB Main controller block
F-19-93
19-65
Chapter 19
If you download the SramImg data that has previously been uploaded from a specific machine to a machine with a
different serial number, the image data, user mode settings, and service mode settings stored in Box or the like will
all be lost.
Be sure not to download the SramImg data to any other machine.
19.5.2 Uploading Procedure 0000-5468
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/Upload"
F-19-94
19-66
Chapter 19
2) Select "SYSTEM"under "iRC3200" and click [Connect].
F-19-95
F-19-96
19-67
Chapter 19
F-19-97
F-19-98
19-68
Chapter 19
F-19-99
7) Click [Upload the Backup Data].
F-19-100
19-69
Chapter 19
8) Select the data to upload, and click [Start Storing].

SRAM PCB: SramImg.bin
DC controller PCB: SramDCON.bin
Reader controller PCB: SramRCON.bin
F-19-101
19-70
Chapter 19
9) When uploading has ended, enter a file name to use, an click [Save].
F-19-102
10) When the file has been saved, click [OK].
F-19-103
19-71
Chapter 19
19.5.3 Downloading Procedure 0000-5469
Procedure
Use normal mode to download.
1) Click [To Next] under "Download/Upload"
F-19-104
19-72
Chapter 19
2) Select "SYSTEM" under "iRC3200" and click [Connect].
F-19-105
F-19-106
19-73
Chapter 19
F-19-107
5) Click [OK] to start a connection.
F-19-108
19-74
Chapter 19
F-19-109
7) Click [Download the Backup Data].
F-19-110
19-75
Chapter 19
8) Select the file to download, and click [Start Writing].
F-19-111
9) When downloading has ended, click [OK].
F-19-112
10) Click [return to unit selection screen].
19-76
Chapter 20 Service Tools
Contents
Contents
20.1 Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1

20.2 Solvents and Oils ........................................................................................................................................... 20-2
Chapter 20
20.1 Special Tools 0006-1412
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
T-20-1
No. Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks
1 Digital FY9-2002 A Used for electrical

multimeter checks; for adjustment
of laser power in com-
bination with the laser
power checker.
2 Cover switch TKN-0093 A
3 Tester FY9-3038 A
extension pin
4 Tester FY9-3039 A Used as a probe ex-

extension tension when
pin(L-shaped) makingelectrical
checks.
5 Mirror FY9-3040-000 B Used for adjusting the

positioning tool distance between No.
(front, rear) 1 and No. 2 mirrors
(used in combination
8 CA1 Test Sheet FY9-9030 A Used foradjusting/

checking images.
20-1
Chapter 20
20.2 Solvents and Oils 0006-1436
T-20-2
No Name Uses Composition Remarks

.
1 Alcohol Cleaning; e.g., glass, Fluoride-family - Do not bring near fire.

plastic, rubber; hydrocarbon - Procure locally.
external covers. Alcohol Substitute: IPA (isopropyl
Surface activating alcohol)
agent
Water
2 Solvent Cleaning; e.g., metal; Fluoride-family - Do not bring near fire.

#160 oil or toner stain. hydrocarbon - Procure locally
Chlorine-family Substitute: MEK
hydrocarbon
Alcohol
3 Heat-resisting Lubrication; e.g., Mineral oil-family - MO-138S

grease fixing drive areas. lithium soap Tool No.: CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Molybdenum
disulfide
4 Lubricating oil Mineral oil Tool No.: CK-0524 (100 cc)

(paraffin-family)
5 Lubricating oil Lubrication; i.e., drive Silicone oil Tool No.: CK-0551 (20 g)
areas, friction areas.
6 Lubricating oil Lubrication; e.g., Special oil Tool No.: HY9-0007

(EM-50L) gears. Special solid
lubricating agent
Lithium soap
7 Lubricating oil Lubrication; e.g., Silicone oil Tool No.: FY9-6011 (50 cc)
scanner rail
20-2
PARTS CATALOG
iR C3200/Color
imageRUNNER C3200
Aug 20 2004
Contents
Parts List Index
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220 .............................1-1
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
A ASSEMBLY LOCATION DIAGRAM ......................................2-1

100 EXTERNAL COVERS, PANELS, ETC. ....................................2-6
101 MACHINE FRONT PLATE ...................................................2-10
102 INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1 ...............................................2-14
107 MACHINE REAR PLATE 1 ...................................................2-27
108 MACHINE REAR PLATE 2 ...................................................2-29
120 DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY ................................................2-31
125 VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (OLD) ......................2-32
125A VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (NEW) .....................2-34
130 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY ...........................................2-36
190 FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY ...................................2-38
191 CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY .............................2-39
192 MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY ..............................2-40
193 DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY ..............................2-41
194 MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE) ..........................2-42
251 DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY ..................................................2-43
260 PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY .................................2-45
270 DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY ......................................2-46
271 INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY .....2-47
272 TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................2-49
280 FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY .................................................2-51
300 CASSETTE ...........................................................................2-52
305 CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY (OPTION) ........................2-55
310 PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY ...............................................2-56
315 MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY ....................................................2-60
316 MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY .........................................2-66
321 PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY .........................................2-68
330 FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE) ......................2-70
350 FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE) ...............2-73
351 DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (OLD) ...............2-75
351A DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (NEW) ..............2-78
360 DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE) .........................2-82
361 EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE) 2-88
Contents
365 MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASSEMBLY .........................2-91

460 LASER UNIT ........................................................................2-94
535 INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY .................2-95
537 TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY ...................................2-98
560 SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY ................................2-99
810 FIXING ASSEMBLY ...........................................................2-101
900 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY ...............................................2-105
910 DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY ......................................2-108
930 DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY ..................................2-110
980 H.V. TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY .............................2-111
981 2ND TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY ..........................2-112
B LIST OF CONNECTORS .....................................................2-113
NUMERICAL INDEX
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FA1-0056-000 315 - 5 FB6-2951-000 535 - 14 FB6-3129-000 101 - 41C
FA2-7162-000 100 - 18A FB6-2953-000 535 - 29 FB6-3131-000 560 - 12G
FA3-0652-000 810 - 31 FB6-2954-000 535 - 30 FB6-3134-000 560 - 12A
FA3-8727-000 104 - 10 FB6-2955-000 535 - 31 FB6-3135-000 560 - 1
FA3-8894-000 810 - 1 FB6-2957-000 535 - 15 FB6-3136-000 560 - 2
FA4-1159-000 315 - 6 FB6-2958-000 535 - 16 FB6-3137-000 108 - 5
FA9-3941-000 810 - 27 FB6-2960-000 103 - 9 FB6-3138-000 108 - 6
FA9-3942-000 810 - 51 FB6-2961-000 103 - 10 FB6-3139-000 100 - 18D
FA9-4035-000 810 - 4 FB6-2964-000 103 - 15 FB6-3143-020 105 - 9
FB1-7173-000 101 - 1 FB6-2965-000 103 - 11 FB6-3145-000 105 - 10
FB1-8581-000 315 - 8 FB6-2967-000 103 - 17 FB6-3146-000 560 - 3
FB2-4456-000 100 - 28 FB6-2968-000 103 - 12 FB6-3149-000 560 - 12B
FB2-6285-000 271 - 1 FB6-2972-000 100 - 55 FB6-3150-000 560 - 9
FB2-6285-000 315 - 88 FB6-2973-000 100 - 18B FB6-3150-000 810 - 37
FB2-7867-030 101 - 21 FB6-2974-000 535 - 17 FB6-3152-000 104 - 16
FB4-3064-000 120 - 1 FB6-2985-000 102 - 24 FB6-3156-000 108 - 7
FB4-3066-000 120 - 2 FB6-2986-000 102 - 23 FB6-3158-000 101 - 3
FB4-5967-000 125 - 6 FB6-2987-000 101 - 20 FB6-3163-000 272 - 1
FB4-5967-000 125A - 6 FB6-2988-000 101 - 40 FB6-3167-000 190 - 1
FB5-0873-000 315 - 9 FB6-2990-000 101 - 2 FB6-3169-000 107 - 2A
FB5-2172-000 130 - 1 FB6-2991-000 103 - 1 FB6-3172-000 103 - 26
FB5-3698-000 130 - 2 FB6-2992-000 102 - 1 FB6-3172-000 104 - 24
FB5-3699-000 130 - 3 FB6-2993-000 103 - 2 FB6-3173-000 104 - 25
FB5-3728-000 130 - 4 FB6-2994-000 100 - 18C FB6-3175-000 104 - 26
FB5-4896-000 351 - 2 FB6-2995-000 101 - 50 FB6-3187-000 104 - 1
FB5-4896-000 351A - 2 FB6-3006-000 100 - 48 FB6-3188-000 104 - 2
FB5-8385-000 100 - 27 FB6-3051-000 100 - 38 FB6-3189-000 104 - 3
FB5-8385-000 102 - 22 FB6-3072-000 900 - 24 FB6-3190-000 104 - 20
FB5-9570-000 351 - 3 FB6-3073-000 900 - 1 FB6-3192-000 104 - 31
FB5-9803-000 351 - 4 FB6-3076-000 900 - 2 FB6-3193-000 104 - 32
FB5-9803-000 351A - 4 FB6-3095-000 981 - 1 FB6-3194-000 101 - 48
FB6-2930-000 535 - 1 FB6-3096-000 981 - 2 FB6-3195-000 101 - 4
FB6-2931-000 535 - 37 FB6-3104-000 900 - 3 FB6-3196-000 101 - 5
FB6-2934-000 535 - 3 FB6-3105-000 100 - 39 FB6-3199-000 101 - 22
FB6-2936-000 535 - 4 FB6-3106-000 100 - 40 FB6-3202-000 101 - 23
FB6-2938-000 535 - 5 FB6-3109-000 108 - 1 FB6-3203-000 101 - 24
FB6-2939-000 535 - 6 FB6-3113-000 537 - 2 FB6-3205-000 101 - 25
FB6-2940-000 535 - 7 FB6-3116-000 104 - 11 FB6-3207-000 101 - 26
FB6-2941-000 535 - 8 FB6-3117-000 104 - 12 FB6-3216-000 120 - 3
FB6-2942-000 535 - 9 FB6-3118-000 104 - 13 FB6-3218-000 120 - 4
FB6-2944-000 535 - 10 FB6-3119-000 104 - 14 FB6-3232-000 106 - 3
FB6-2945-000 535 - 11 FB6-3120-000 104 - 15 FB6-3234-000 100 - 56
FB6-2947-000 535 - 12 FB6-3124-020 101 - 10A FB6-3235-000 910 - 5
FB6-2948-000 535 - 13 FB6-3127-000 101 - 10B FB6-3237-000 280 - 9
1-1
NUMERICAL INDEX
FB6-3261-000 105 - 1 FB6-3359-000 365 - 11 FB6-3465-000 315 - 31
FB6-3262-000 105 - 2 FB6-3360-000 365 - 12 FB6-3466-000 315 - 32
FB6-3263-000 105 - 3 FB6-3361-000 365 - 13 FB6-3467-000 315 - 33
FB6-3273-000 321 - 1 FB6-3366-000 105 - 12 FB6-3470-000 315 - 35
FB6-3275-000 321 - 5A FB6-3371-000 103 - 5 FB6-3471-000 315 - 36
FB6-3277-000 103 - 25 FB6-3376-000 100 - 49 FB6-3472-000 315 - 2
FB6-3278-000 103 - 21 FB6-3380-000 310 - 1 FB6-3473-000 315 - 77
FB6-3279-000 103 - 22 FB6-3386-000 310 - 2 FB6-3474-000 315 - 78
FB6-3280-000 103 - 23 FB6-3387-000 310 - 3 FB6-3475-000 300 - 1
FB6-3281-000 103 - 24 FB6-3388-000 310 - 4 FB6-3478-000 300 - 2
FB6-3282-000 101 - 45 FB6-3389-000 310 - 5 FB6-3479-000 300 - 3
FB6-3283-000 101 - 46 FB6-3390-000 310 - 6 FB6-3480-000 300 - 4
FB6-3285-000 103 - 27 FB6-3391-000 310 - 7 FB6-3481-000 300 - 5
FB6-3288-000 103 - 3 FB6-3392-000 310 - 8 FB6-3482-000 300 - 6
FB6-3289-000 103 - 4 FB6-3393-000 310 - 9 FB6-3483-000 300 - 7
FB6-3291-000 321 - 2 FB6-3394-000 310 - 10 FB6-3484-000 300 - 8
FB6-3292-000 321 - 3 FB6-3395-000 310 - 11 FB6-3485-000 300 - 9
FB6-3293-000 321 - 4 FB6-3396-010 310 - 12 FB6-3486-000 300 - 10
FB6-3302-000 315 - 11 FB6-3397-000 310 - 13 FB6-3487-000 300 - 11
FB6-3303-000 315 - 12 FB6-3399-000 310 - 15 FB6-3488-000 300 - 12
FB6-3305-000 315 - 14 FB6-3402-000 310 - 18 FB6-3489-000 300 - 13
FB6-3306-000 315 - 15 FB6-3403-000 310 - 19 FB6-3490-000 300 - 14
FB6-3308-000 315 - 16 FB6-3404-000 310 - 20 FB6-3491-000 300 - 15
FB6-3309-000 315 - 17 FB6-3405-000 310 - 21 FB6-3492-000 102 - 17
FB6-3310-000 315 - 18 FB6-3406-000 310 - 22 FB6-3493-000 102 - 16
FB6-3311-000 315 - 19 FB6-3408-000 310 - 23 FB6-3494-000 102 - 15
FB6-3313-000 100 - 22A FB6-3410-000 310 - 17 FB6-3495-000 102 - 28
FB6-3313-000 315 - 20 FB6-3410-000 315 - 27 FB6-3497-000 102 - 27
FB6-3314-000 315 - 1 FB6-3411-000 310 - 24 FB6-3499-000 300 - 17A
FB6-3315-000 315 - 21 FB6-3413-000 310 - 29 FB6-3503-000 100 - 22B
FB6-3316-000 106 - 5 FB6-3440-000 107 - 1 FB6-3504-000 100 - 2
FB6-3317-000 315 - 26 FB6-3442-000 102 - 2 FB6-3506-000 300 - 16
FB6-3320-000 315 - 22 FB6-3443-000 100 - 1 FB6-3507-000 102 - 10
FB6-3323-000 315 - 24 FB6-3450-000 316 - 1 FB6-3508-000 316 - 11
FB6-3331-000 100 - 22C FB6-3451-000 316 - 2 FB6-3522-000 300 - 23
FB6-3332-000 100 - 22D FB6-3452-000 316 - 3 FB6-3523-000 300 - 24
FB6-3346-000 365 - 3 FB6-3454-000 316 - 4 FB6-3524-000 300 - 25
FB6-3348-000 365 - 4 FB6-3455-000 316 - 5 FB6-3526-000 106 - 6
FB6-3349-000 365 - 5 FB6-3456-000 316 - 6 FB6-3527-000 106 - 6
FB6-3350-000 365 - 6 FB6-3457-000 316 - 7 FB6-3528-000 106 - 6
FB6-3351-000 365 - 7 FB6-3458-000 316 - 8 FB6-3529-000 106 - 6
FB6-3356-000 365 - 8 FB6-3459-000 316 - 9 FB6-3532-000 351 - 5
FB6-3357-000 365 - 9 FB6-3463-000 315 - 29 FB6-3532-000 351A - 5
FB6-3358-000 365 - 10 FB6-3464-000 315 - 30 FB6-3534-000 351 - 7
1-2
NUMERICAL INDEX
FB6-3534-000 351A - 7 FB6-3595-000 360 - 19 FB6-3662-000 810 - 20
FB6-3541-000 351 - 10 FB6-3599-000 360 - 22 FB6-3663-000 810 - 21
FB6-3544-000 351 - 11 FB6-3600-000 330 - 3 FB6-3664-000 810 - 22
FB6-3544-000 351A - 11 FB6-3600-000 360 - 23 FB6-3665-000 810 - 23
FB6-3545-000 351 - 12 FB6-3602-000 361 - 5 FB6-3666-000 810 - 24
FB6-3545-000 351A - 12 FB6-3603-000 361 - 6 FB6-3667-000 810 - 25
FB6-3547-000 125 - 7 FB6-3604-000 361 - 1 FB6-3668-000 810 - 26
FB6-3547-000 125A - 7 FB6-3606-000 361 - 7 FB6-3669-000 810 - 43C
FB6-3551-020 125 - 9 FB6-3610-000 350 - 1 FB6-3670-000 810 - 28
FB6-3551-020 125A - 9 FB6-3610-000 361 - 9 FB6-3671-000 810 - 29
FB6-3552-000 125 - 10 FB6-3611-000 350 - 2 FB6-3673-000 810 - 30
FB6-3552-000 125A - 10 FB6-3611-000 361 - 10 FB6-3675-000 810 - 32
FB6-3553-000 125 - 11 FB6-3612-000 350 - 3 FB6-3676-000 810 - 33
FB6-3553-000 125A - 11 FB6-3612-000 361 - 28 FB6-3677-000 810 - 34
FB6-3554-000 125 - 12 FB6-3613-000 361 - 11 FB6-3678-000 810 - 35
FB6-3554-000 125A - 12 FB6-3614-000 361 - 12 FB6-3679-000 106 - 1
FB6-3555-000 125 - 13 FB6-3617-000 361 - 24B FB6-3683-000 330 - 5
FB6-3555-000 125A - 13 FB6-3618-000 361 - 13 FB6-3684-000 330 - 6
FB6-3555-000 361 - 3 FB6-3620-000 361 - 15 FB6-3684-000 360 - 25
FB6-3557-000 125 - 2 FB6-3621-000 361 - 16 FB6-3686-000 330 - 7
FB6-3561-000 100 - 24 FB6-3622-000 361 - 42 FB6-3686-000 360 - 26
FB6-3561-000 100 - 25 FB6-3623-000 361 - 17 FB6-3689-000 106 - 8
FB6-3562-000 100 - 26 FB6-3626-000 361 - 18 FB6-3693-000 106 - 9
FB6-3562-000 100 - 30 FB6-3627-000 361 - 25 FB6-3694-000 330 - 12
FB6-3564-000 351 - 13 FB6-3629-020 360 - 72 FB6-3695-000 330 - 13
FB6-3564-000 351A - 13 FB6-3630-000 360 - 73 FB6-3698-000 330 - 8
FB6-3566-000 100 - 32 FB6-3631-000 101 - 42 FB6-3698-000 360 - 29
FB6-3569-000 100 - 33 FB6-3638-000 330 - 4 FB6-3700-000 350 - 4
FB6-3572-000 360 - 2 FB6-3638-000 360 - 24 FB6-3702-000 350 - 5
FB6-3576-000 360 - 5 FB6-3643-000 810 - 6 FB6-3703-000 350 - 6
FB6-3577-000 360 - 6 FB6-3644-000 810 - 7 FB6-3705-000 350 - 8
FB6-3578-000 360 - 7 FB6-3645-020 810 - 8 FB6-3706-000 350 - 9
FB6-3579-000 330 - 1 FB6-3646-000 810 - 9 FB6-3707-000 350 - 10
FB6-3579-000 360 - 8 FB6-3647-020 810 - 10 FB6-3722-000 100 - 3
FB6-3580-000 360 - 9 FB6-3648-000 810 - 52 FB6-3728-000 360 - 31
FB6-3581-000 360 - 10 FB6-3649-030 810 - 43A FB6-3729-000 361 - 19
FB6-3583-000 360 - 11 FB6-3650-030 810 - 43B FB6-3765-000 100 - 4
FB6-3584-000 360 - 12 FB6-3651-000 810 - 13 FB6-3766-000 100 - 5
FB6-3585-000 360 - 13 FB6-3652-000 810 - 43G FB6-3767-000 100 - 6
FB6-3586-000 361 - 26 FB6-3653-000 810 - 15 FB6-3768-000 100 - 7
FB6-3588-000 330 - 2 FB6-3657-000 810 - 16 FB6-3769-000 100 - 8
FB6-3588-000 360 - 14 FB6-3658-000 810 - 17 FB6-3771-000 100 - 36
FB6-3589-000 360 - 15 FB6-3659-000 810 - 18 FB6-3771-000 100 - 50
FB6-3590-000 360 - 16 FB6-3660-000 810 - 19 FB6-3775-000 100 - 9
1-3
NUMERICAL INDEX
FB6-3776-000 100 - 10 FB6-3866-000 125 - 3 FB6-3961-000 102 - 9
FB6-3777-000 100 - 11 FB6-3866-000 125A - 3 FB6-3962-000 102 - 8
FB6-3778-000 100 - 12 FB6-3867-000 125 - 4 FB6-3963-000 102 - 7
FB6-3785-000 100 - 13 FB6-3867-000 125A - 4 FB6-3964-000 360 - 51
FB6-3788-000 100 - 17A FB6-3869-000 351 - 36 FB6-4849-000 315 - 10
FB6-3791-020 100 - 19 FB6-3869-000 351A - 36 FB6-4850-000 315 - 13
FB6-3792-000 100 - 20 FB6-3874-000 351 - 37 FB6-4851-000 315 - 23
FB6-3793-000 100 - 41 FB6-3874-000 351A - 37 FB6-4852-000 310 - 16
FB6-3797-000 192 - 1 FB6-3875-000 351 - 6 FB6-4862-000 361 - 4
FB6-3800-000 104 - 6 FB6-3876-000 125 - 14 FB6-4863-000 315 - 85
FB6-3801-000 104 - 7 FB6-3876-000 125A - 14 FB6-4867-000 106 - 6
FB6-3807-000 104 - 8 FB6-3877-000 351 - 8 FB6-4868-000 106 - 15
FB6-3819-020 101 - 27 FB6-3877-000 351A - 8 FB6-4869-000 106 - 16
FB6-3820-020 101 - 28 FB6-3878-000 315 - 34A FB6-4870-000 100 - 14
FB6-3821-020 101 - 29 FB6-3879-000 810 - 5 FB6-4873-000 315 - 25
FB6-3822-020 101 - 30 FB6-3880-000 360 - 30 FB6-4873-000 360 - 1
FB6-3827-000 101 - 11 FB6-3882-020 101 - 41A FB6-4873-000 361 - 2
FB6-3828-020 101 - 12 FB6-3883-000 101 - 41D FB6-4890-000 100 - 44
FB6-3829-000 101 - 13 FB6-3885-000 810 - 44 FB6-4908-000 330 - 9
FB6-3830-000 101 - 14 FB6-3886-000 100 - 52 FB6-4908-000 360 - 20
FB6-3831-000 101 - 15 FB6-3888-000 360 - 3 FB6-4909-000 810 - 41
FB6-3832-000 101 - 16 FB6-3889-000 360 - 4 FB6-4918-000 330 - 10
FB6-3833-000 101 - 17 FB6-3890-000 360 - 17 FB6-4918-000 360 - 27
FB6-3834-000 100 - 14 FB6-3891-000 360 - 18 FB6-4919-000 125 - 8
FB6-3835-000 100 - 15 FB6-3892-000 361 - 43 FB6-4919-000 125A - 8
FB6-3839-000 105 - 13 FB6-3893-000 360 - 34 FB6-4920-000 100 - 44
FB6-3843-000 361 - 20 FB6-3894-000 100 - 44 FB6-4923-000 100 - 44
FB6-3846-000 350 - 19 FB6-3895-000 100 - 44 FB6-4937-000 316 - 12
FB6-3846-000 361 - 21 FB6-3896-000 100 - 44 FB6-4938-000 315 - 80
FB6-3847-000 350 - 20 FB6-3897-000 351 - 27 FB6-5060-000 102 - 4
FB6-3847-000 361 - 22 FB6-3932-000 106 - 4 FB6-5450-000 100 - 45
FB6-3848-000 350 - 21 FB6-3933-000 106 - 2 FB6-5451-000 100 - 46
FB6-3848-000 361 - 23 FB6-3934-000 330 - 30 FB6-5781-000 351A - 6
FB6-3850-000 560 - 7A FB6-3934-000 360 - 40 FB6-5786-000 351A - 38
FB6-3853-000 560 - 4 FB6-3935-000 350 - 7 FB6-5787-000 351A - 39
FB6-3854-000 560 - 5 FB6-3936-000 350 - 22 FB6-5790-000 351A - 40
FB6-3855-000 560 - 6 FB6-3939-000 560 - 12D FB6-5791-000 351A - 41
FB6-3858-000 315 - 81 FB6-3944-000 130 - 5 FB6-5792-000 351A - 42
FB6-3859-000 315 - 82 FB6-3945-000 130 - 6 FB6-5793-000 125A - 2
FB6-3860-000 101 - 41B FB6-3946-000 130 - 7 FB6-5795-000 351A - 43
FB6-3862-000 101 - 10J FB6-3947-000 130 - 8 FB6-5796-000 351A - 3
FB6-3863-000 315 - 83 FB6-3950-000 100 - 16 FB6-5800-000 100 - 44
FB6-3864-000 315 - 84 FB6-3951-000 130 - 9 FB6-6213-000 130 - 21
FB6-3864-000 365 - 14 FB6-3953-000 130 - 20 FB6-6214-000 300 - 23
1-4
NUMERICAL INDEX
FB6-6215-000 300 - 25 FF6-2079-000 360 - 32 FG3-2312-000 360 - 69
FB6-6216-000 361 - 21 FF6-2081-000 330 - 15 FG3-2313-000 360 - 78
FB6-6217-000 315 - 81 FF6-2081-000 360 - 33 FG3-2314-000 101 - 10F
FB6-6218-000 315 - 82 FF6-2085-000 101 - 9 FG3-2315-000 321 - 9
FB6-6222-000 350 - 23 FF6-2099-000 101 - 31 FG3-2318-000 321 - 10
FB6-6222-000 361 - 45 FF6-2100-000 108 - 2 FG3-2319-000 103 - 6
FB6-6378-000 810 - 2 FF6-2101-000 365 - 16 FG3-2320-000 535 - 33
FB6-6379-000 810 - 3 FF6-2102-000 365 - 17 FG3-2321-000 535 - 34
FB6-6380-000 535 - 2 FF6-2104-000 130 - 10 FG3-2326-000 270 - 3
FB6-6381-000 810 - 36 FF6-2106-000 104 - 9 FG3-2340-000 305 - 4
FB6-6382-000 900 - 25 FF6-2107-000 104 - 4 FG3-2341-000 305 - 4
FB6-6385-000 100 - 44 FF6-2110-000 101 - 32 FG3-2342-000 305 - 5
FB6-6386-000 100 - 44 FF6-2114-000 101 - 10C FG3-2344-000 272 - 13
FB6-6387-000 100 - 44 FF6-2116-000 361 - 27 FG3-2345-000 107 - 3
FB6-6388-000 100 - 44 FF6-2117-000 361 - 8 FG3-2346-000 105 - 6
FB6-6389-000 100 - 44 FF6-2118-000 361 - 14 FG3-2347-000 102 - 18
FB6-6545-000 535 - 25 FF6-2127-000 560 - 7 FG3-2348-000 102 - 11
FC5-0166-000 100 - 37 FF6-2128-000 361 - 44 FG3-2350-000 108 - 9
FC5-0166-000 100 - 51 FF6-2129-000 365 - 18 FG3-2351-000 108 - 10
FC5-0166-000 125 - 1 FF6-2130-000 100 - 24 FG3-2352-000 105 - 21
FC5-0166-000 125A - 1 FF6-2131-000 351 - 14 FG3-2353-000 105 - 22
FC5-0563-000 300 - 26 FF6-2131-000 351A - 14 FG3-2354-000 105 - 23
FF2-5915-000 105 - 4 FF6-2132-000 100 - 42 FG3-2362-000 900 - 8
FF3-4436-000 910 - 4A FF6-2134-000 315 - 34 FG3-2363-000 900 - 9
FF5-6279-000 351 - 1 FF6-2136-000 315 - 28 FG3-2364-000 105 - 24
FF6-2016-000 103 - 13 FF6-2141-000 106 - 10 FG3-2365-000 535 - 28
FF6-2017-000 103 - 19 FF6-2143-000 330 - 22 FG3-2366-000 107 - 8
FF6-2032-000 537 - 3 FF6-2143-000 360 - 52 FG3-2367-000 535 - 35
FF6-2033-000 104 - 17 FF6-2145-000 351 - 9 FG3-2368-000 535 - 36
FF6-2034-000 105 - 11 FF6-2147-000 360 - 21 FG3-2372-000 251 - 1
FF6-2038-000 101 - 7 FF6-2344-000 351A - 15 FG3-2372-000 272 - 14
FF6-2039-000 104 - 5 FF6-2345-000 351A - 44 FG3-2374-000 101 - 10G
FF6-2044-000 280 - 1 FF6-2363-000 310 - 14 FG3-2375-000 101 - 10H
FF6-2046-000 321 - 5 FG3-2299-000 106 - 12 FG3-2380-000 260 - 3
FF6-2047-000 103 - 8 FG3-2301-000 316 - 10 FG3-2381-000 305 - 1
FF6-2054-000 365 - 15 FG3-2302-000 310 - 59 FG3-2383-000 107 - 5
FF6-2058-000 310 - 25 FG3-2303-000 315 - 75 FG3-2385-000 981 - 3
FF6-2059-000 310 - 26 FG3-2304-000 315 - 76 FG3-2387-000 980 - 1
FF6-2063-000 102 - 19 FG3-2305-000 365 - 29 FG3-2390-000 108 - 14
FF6-2064-000 300 - 17 FG3-2306-000 365 - 1 FG3-2392-000 251 - 2
FF6-2065-000 315 - 37 FG3-2309-000 105 - 19 FG3-2393-000 305 - 1
FF6-2070-000 351 - 15 FG3-2310-000 105 - 20 FG3-2395-000 305 - 2
FF6-2075-030 361 - 24 FG3-2311-000 351 - 32 FG3-2396-000 980 - 2
FF6-2079-000 330 - 14 FG3-2311-000 351A - 32 FG3-2644-000 900 - 10
1-5
NUMERICAL INDEX
FG3-2645-000 900 - 11 FG6-9000-000 101 - 8 FG6-9663-020 271 -
FG3-2646-020 900 - 12 FG6-9004-000 272 - 15 FG6-9666-000 900 - 18
FG3-2729-000 900 - 4 FG6-9005-000 101 - 19 FG6-9671-000 108 - 11
FG3-2854-000 900 - 15 FG6-9008-000 192 - FG6-9673-000 980 -
FG3-2855-000 900 - 16 FG6-9011-040 280 - FG6-9674-000 981 -
FG3-2856-000 900 - 17 FG6-9012-000 100 - 21 FG6-9676-000 900 - 18
FG3-3002-000 360 - 71 FG6-9013-000 120 - FG6-9678-020 900 - 20
FG3-3004-000 105 - 5 FG6-9015-000 107 - 6 FG6-9700-000 810 -
FG3-3005-000 105 - 26 FG6-9015-000 120 - 9 FG6-9749-000 305 - 7
FG3-3010-000 351A - 48 FG6-9016-000 194 - FG9-3986-000 102 - 26
FG3-3011-000 930 - FG6-9019-000 100 - 22 FH2-5006-000 100 - 23
FG3-3020-000 910 - 4 FG6-9021-000 365 - FH2-5824-000 108 - 13
FG3-3136-000 900 - 19 FG6-9022-000 365 - FH2-5825-000 B - J565
FG3-3287-000 900 - 13 FG6-9025-000 260 - FH2-6480-000 B - J950
FG3-3668-000 900 - 15 FG6-9028-070 310 - FH2-6488-000 910 - 11
FG3-3973-000 193 - 3 FG6-9041-000 300 - 28 FH2-6552-000 108 - 4
FG6-8927-000 100 - 17 FG6-9042-000 316 - FH2-6855-000 B - J565
FG6-8933-000 130 - FG6-9044-000 300 - FH2-7019-000 900 - 5
FG6-8934-000 130 - FG6-9050-000 351 - FH2-7019-000 B - J1210
FG6-8935-000 130 - FG6-9052-000 125 - FH2-7037-000 130 - 11
FG6-8936-000 130 - 16 FG6-9058-000 360 - FH2-7078-000 910 - 3
FG6-8937-000 130 - 13 FG6-9059-000 361 - FH2-7079-000 910 - 2
FG6-8938-000 130 - 14 FG6-9060-000 360 - 79 FH2-7080-000 910 - 1
FG6-8939-000 130 - 15 FG6-9065-000 193 - FH2-7081-000 910 - 8
FG6-8941-000 130 - FG6-9068-000 350 - FH2-7082-000 910 - 9
FG6-8942-060 535 - FG6-9069-150 810 - FH2-9249-000 108 - 8
FG6-8945-020 100 - 18 FG6-9070-150 810 - FH5-1033-000 900 - 6
FG6-8946-000 108 - 3 FG6-9079-010 280 - 11 FH5-1051-000 271 - 3
FG6-8956-000 107 - 2 FG6-9080-000 315 - FH6-0834-000 130 - 12
FG6-8960-000 321 - FG6-9081-000 315 - FH6-1253-020 360 - 74
FG6-8962-000 460 - FG6-9164-000 130 - 17 FH6-1579-000 194 - 1
FG6-8964-000 251 - FG6-9165-000 130 - 18 FH6-1972-000 260 - 1
FG6-8966-000 270 - FG6-9166-000 130 - 19 FH6-1973-000 270 - 1
FG6-8968-000 190 - FG6-9644-000 810 - 38 FH6-1973-000 315 - 38
FG6-8970-050 910 - 10 FG6-9645-070 810 - 43 FH6-1974-000 360 - 35
FG6-8971-050 910 - 10 FG6-9646-000 810 - 38 FH6-1975-000 351 - 16
FG6-8981-000 251 - 3 FG6-9647-000 810 - 38 FH6-1975-000 351A - 16
FG6-8989-000 537 - FG6-9654-000 351A - FH6-1979-000 192 - 2
FG6-8991-000 101 - 10 FG6-9655-000 125A - FH6-1979-000 910 - 6
FG6-8992-020 101 - 41 FG6-9662-000 271 - 2 FH6-1980-000 190 - 2
FG6-8993-000 560 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 4 FH6-1981-000 191 - 1
FG6-8995-000 191 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 9 FH6-1982-000 193 - 1
FG6-8997-000 560 - 12 FG6-9662-000 271 - 504 FH6-1984-000 351A - 49
FG6-8999-000 272 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 507 FH6-5052-000 360 - 36
1-6
NUMERICAL INDEX
FH6-5053-000 315 - 39 FS2-1544-000 351A - 19 FS6-1067-000 351A - 45
FH6-5054-000 101 - 43 FS2-2783-000 315 - 41 FS6-2785-000 120 - 7
FH6-5055-000 310 - 27 FS5-0353-000 351 - 20 FS6-3001-000 360 - 45
FH6-5056-000 360 - 37 FS5-0353-000 351A - 20 FS6-3002-000 360 - 46
FH7-4739-000 810 - 40 FS5-1209-000 315 - 42 FS6-3003-000 360 - 47
FH7-4742-000 305 - 6 FS5-1581-000 272 - 3 FS6-8116-000 300 - 27
FH7-6345-000 810 - 43D FS5-1595-000 100 - 22E FS7-0128-000 350 - 12
FH7-6357-000 107 - 7 FS5-1595-000 315 - 44 FS7-0128-000 361 - 30
FH7-7312-000 107 - 4 FS5-1595-000 315 - 44 FS7-0579-000 104 - 19
FH7-7312-000 120 - 5 FS5-1595-000 360 - 41 FS7-2360-000 360 - 48
FH7-7312-000 272 - 2 FS5-1595-000 361 - 29 FS7-2781-000 535 - 19
FH7-7312-000 310 - 28 FS5-1597-000 310 - 31 FS7-2782-000 535 - 20
FH7-7312-000 315 - 40 FS5-1597-000 315 - 46 FS7-2783-000 535 - 21
FH7-7312-000 316 - 13 FS5-3989-000 351 - 21 FS7-2784-000 535 - 32
FH7-7312-000 351 - 17 FS5-3989-000 351A - 21 FS7-2785-000 103 - 14
FH7-7312-000 351A - 17 FS5-3989-000 360 - 42 FS7-2787-000 315 - 51
FH7-7312-000 360 - 38 FS5-6488-000 280 - 2 FS7-2788-000 100 - 22F
FH7-7312-000 365 - 19 FS5-6945-000 315 - 47 FS7-2788-000 360 - 49
FH7-7312-000 365 - 19 FS5-6946-000 350 - 11 FS7-2788-000 361 - 31
FH7-7312-000 810 - 42 FS5-6947-000 810 - 45 FS7-2789-000 100 - 22G
FH7-7462-000 105 - 14 FS5-6948-000 330 - 18 FS7-2790-000 365 - 23
FH7-7527-000 910 - 7 FS5-6948-000 360 - 43 FS7-2791-000 365 - 24
FH7-7528-000 910 - 7 FS5-6949-000 101 - 33 FS7-2792-000 365 - 25
FH7-7586-020 810 - 43E FS5-6950-000 330 - 19 FS7-2793-000 365 - 26
FH7-7587-000 810 - 43F FS5-6950-000 360 - 44 FS7-2796-000 105 - 7
FH7-7600-010 316 - 14 FS5-6955-000 365 - 2 FS7-2796-000 365 - 27
FH7-7601-000 321 - 6 FS5-6957-000 537 - 1 FS7-2797-000 310 - 33
FH7-7602-000 103 - 7 FS5-9161-000 100 - 47 FS7-2798-000 310 - 34
FM1-0350-000 300 - FS5-9274-000 100 - 34 FS7-2800-000 310 - 35
FM1-0351-000 361 - FS5-9753-000 365 - 21 FS7-2801-000 310 - 36
FM1-0352-000 360 - FS5-9754-000 101 - 34 FS7-2802-000 310 - 37
FM1-0354-000 315 - FS5-9758-000 105 - 8 FS7-2803-000 310 - 38
FM1-0357-000 460 - FS5-9758-000 365 - 22 FS7-2804-000 300 - 20
FM1-0408-000 910 - 10 FS5-9760-000 105 - 15 FS7-2805-000 300 - 19
FM1-0409-000 910 - 10 FS5-9761-000 315 - 86 FS7-2806-000 300 - 18
FS1-1187-000 351 - 18 FS6-1055-000 315 - 48 FS7-2807-000 102 - 14
FS1-1205-000 310 - 30 FS6-1057-000 315 - 49 FS7-2808-000 102 - 13
FS1-1213-000 310 - 60 FS6-1058-000 315 - 50 FS7-2809-000 315 - 54
FS1-1465-000 330 - 17 FS6-1059-000 125 - 17 FS7-2810-000 315 - 55
FS1-1465-000 360 - 39 FS6-1059-000 125A - 17 FS7-2811-000 315 - 3
FS1-1512-000 315 - 43 FS6-1060-000 104 - 18 FS7-2812-000 315 - 56
FS1-9010-000 120 - 6 FS6-1062-000 535 - 18 FS7-2813-000 315 - 79
FS1-9010-000 537 - 4 FS6-1063-000 310 - 32 FS7-2814-000 810 - 46
FS2-1544-000 351 - 19 FS6-1066-000 560 - 12E FS7-2815-000 810 - 47
1-7
NUMERICAL INDEX
FS7-2816-000 810 - 48 FS7-2862-000 330 - 16 FU3-0304-000 272 - 8
FS7-2817-000 810 - 49 FS7-2862-000 360 - 70 FU3-0305-000 272 - 9
FS7-2818-000 330 - 20 FS7-2863-000 315 - 87 FU3-0306-000 272 - 10
FS7-2822-000 330 - 24 FS7-2865-000 102 - 25 FU3-0308-000 101 - 36
FS7-2822-000 360 - 54 FS7-2866-000 351A - 46 FU3-0309-000 101 - 37
FS7-2823-000 350 - 13 FS7-2867-000 360 - 50 FU3-0310-000 360 - 56
FS7-2825-000 272 - 5 FS7-5909-000 310 - 39 FU3-0311-000 360 - 57
FS7-2826-000 101 - 35 FS7-5910-000 310 - 40 FU3-0312-000 330 - 26
FS7-2828-000 350 - 14 FS7-8329-000 460 - 1 FU3-0312-000 360 - 58
FS7-2828-000 361 - 32 FS7-8332-000 100 - 53 FU3-0313-000 330 - 27
FS7-2829-000 330 - 25 FS7-8332-000 101 - 49 FU3-0313-000 360 - 59
FS7-2829-000 360 - 55 FS7-8335-000 460 - 1 FU3-0314-000 330 - 28
FS7-2830-000 361 - 33 FU3-0266-040 535 - 22 FU3-0314-000 360 - 60
FS7-2831-000 361 - 35 FU3-0267-000 535 - 23 FU3-0315-000 330 - 29
FS7-2832-000 360 - 76 FU3-0268-000 535 - 24 FU3-0315-000 360 - 61
FS7-2833-000 101 - 44 FU3-0270-000 315 - 58 FU3-0316-000 361 - 36
FS7-2834-000 125 - 18 FU3-0271-000 315 - 59 FU3-0317-000 350 - 16
FS7-2834-000 125A - 18 FU3-0272-000 315 - 60 FU3-0317-000 361 - 37
FS7-2835-000 280 - 3 FU3-0273-000 315 - 61 FU3-0318-000 360 - 77
FS7-2838-000 271 - 5 FU3-0274-000 315 - 62 FU3-0319-000 351 - 22
FS7-2839-000 315 - 57 FU3-0275-000 315 - 63 FU3-0319-000 351A - 22
FS7-2840-000 537 - 5 FU3-0276-000 315 - 64 FU3-0322-000 351 - 23
FS7-2842-000 104 - 21 FU3-0277-000 315 - 65 FU3-0322-000 351A - 23
FS7-2843-000 104 - 22 FU3-0277-000 361 - 34 FU3-0323-000 351 - 24
FS7-2844-000 101 - 10D FU3-0278-000 315 - 66 FU3-0323-000 351A - 24
FS7-2845-000 101 - 10E FU3-0280-000 310 - 41 FU3-0324-000 351 - 25
FS7-2846-000 560 - 8 FU3-0282-000 310 - 43 FU3-0324-000 351A - 25
FS7-2847-000 106 - 7 FU3-0283-000 310 - 44 FU3-0325-000 125 - 19
FS7-2848-000 105 - 16 FU3-0284-000 310 - 45 FU3-0325-000 125A - 19
FS7-2849-000 101 - 47 FU3-0285-000 260 - 2 FU3-0332-000 271 - 6
FS7-2850-000 321 - 7 FU3-0288-000 310 - 47 FU3-0333-000 271 - 7
FS7-2851-000 321 - 8 FU3-0289-000 310 - 48 FU3-0334-000 271 - 8
FS7-2852-000 810 - 50 FU3-0290-000 310 - 49 FU3-0337-000 270 - 2
FS7-2853-000 105 - 17 FU3-0291-000 310 - 50 FU3-0338-000 280 - 4
FS7-2854-000 120 - 8 FU3-0292-000 310 - 51 FU3-0339-000 280 - 5
FS7-2855-000 100 - 35 FU3-0293-000 300 - 21 FU3-0340-000 280 - 6
FS7-2856-000 560 - 10 FU3-0294-000 300 - 22 FU3-0341-000 280 - 7
FS7-2857-000 560 - 11 FU3-0295-000 315 - 67 FU3-0342-000 280 - 8
FS7-2859-000 351 - 30 FU3-0296-000 315 - 68 FU3-0343-000 104 - 23
FS7-2859-000 351A - 30 FU3-0297-000 315 - 69 FU3-0344-000 560 - 12F
FS7-2860-000 315 - 52 FU3-0298-000 315 - 70 FU3-0345-000 104 - 33
FS7-2860-000 315 - 52 FU3-0301-000 350 - 15 FU3-0347-000 310 - 53
FS7-2861-000 330 - 23 FU3-0302-000 272 - 6 FU3-0349-000 310 - 42
FS7-2861-000 360 - 53 FU3-0303-000 272 - 7 FU3-0350-000 310 - 52
1-8
NUMERICAL INDEX
FU3-0352-000 310 - 46 NPN B - J609 NPN B - J766
FU3-0546-000 271 - 10 NPN B - J610 NPN B - J768
FY7-0376-000 900 - 20 NPN B - J612 NPN B - J803
NPN 100 - NPN B - J613 NPN B - J804
NPN 101 - NPN B - J614 NPN B - J805
NPN 102 - NPN B - J616 NPN B - J806
NPN 103 - NPN B - J617 NPN B - J809
NPN 104 - NPN B - J618 NPN B - J810
NPN 105 - NPN B - J620 NPN B - J811
NPN 106 - NPN B - J650 NPN B - J812
NPN 107 - NPN B - J651 NPN B - J813
NPN 108 - NPN B - J652 NPN B - J814
NPN 305 - NPN B - J653 NPN B - J820
NPN 330 - NPN B - J660 NPN B - J854
NPN 900 - NPN B - J661 NPN B - J855
NPN 910 - NPN B - J662 NPN B - J856
NPN B - NPN B - J663 NPN B - J857
NPN B - J2 NPN B - J668 NPN B - J858
NPN B - J409 NPN B - J711 PCB B - J1
1-9
NUMERICAL INDEX
PCB B - J53 PCB B - J87 PCB B - J300
PCB B - J70C PCB B - J105 PCB B - J538
PCB B - J70K PCB B - J106 PCB B - J564
PCB B - J70M PCB B - J107 PCB B - J607
PCB B - J70Y PCB B - J108 PCB B - J611
PCB B - J73CK PCB B - J116 PCB B - J959
PCB B - J73YM PCB B - J117 PCB B - J992
PCB B - J84CK PCB B - J132 PCB B - J1207
PCB B - J84YM PCB B - J153 PCB B - J1208
1-10
NUMERICAL INDEX
PCB B - J1210 RB1-8945-000 310 - 55 VS1-0842-003 B - J308
PCB B - J1213 RB2-0493-000 361 - 38 VS1-0842-003 B - J313
PCB B - J1215 RB2-0493-000 810 - 39 VS1-0842-003 B - J314
PCB B - J1216 RB2-5850-000 315 - 72 VS1-0842-003 B - J315
PCB B - J1225 RB2-6925-000 321 - 5B VS1-0842-003 B - J316
PCB B - J1301 RB2-7043-000 272 - 11 VS1-0842-004 B - J155
PCB B - J1302 RB9-0255-000 361 - 39 VS1-0842-009 B - J53
PCB B - J1303 RG5-5469-000 251 - 4 VS1-0842-012 B - J1000
PCB B - J1304 RG5-5469-000 272 - 4 VS1-5057-002 105 - 28
PCB B - J1305 RH7-6037-000 105 - 18 VS1-5057-002 272 - 12
PCB B - J1309 RH7-7129-000 315 - 73 VS1-5057-002 305 - 2A
PCB B - J1311 RS5-1060-000 350 - 17 VS1-5057-002 310 - 59A
PCB B - J1315 RS5-1060-000 361 - 40 VS1-5057-002 315 - 75A
PCB B - J1316 RS5-1101-000 125 - 20 VS1-5057-002 360 - 69A
PCB B - J1318 RS5-1101-000 125A - 20 VS1-5057-002 900 - 11A
PCB B - J1336 RS5-1324-000 351 - 28 VS1-5057-002 B - J410
PCB B - J1342 RS5-1324-000 351A - 28 VS1-5057-002 B - J411
PCB B - J1342 RS5-1325-000 350 - 18 VS1-5057-002 B - J412
PCB B - J1400 RS5-1325-000 351 - 29 VS1-5057-002 B - J531
PCB B - J1401 RS5-1325-000 360 - 63 VS1-5057-002 B - J536
PCB B - J1501 RS5-1325-000 361 - 41 VS1-5057-002 B - J537
PCB B - J1502 RS5-1567-000 310 - 56 VS1-5057-002 B - J557
PCB B - J1503 RS5-1567-000 315 - 74 VS1-5057-002 B - J668
PCB B - J1504 RU5-8126-000 460 - 1 VS1-5057-002 B - J670
PCB B - J1505 SYS B - J512 VS1-5057-002 B - J672
PCB B - J1507 SYS B - J522 VS1-5057-002 B - J674
PCB B - J1508 SYS B - J524 VS1-5057-002 B - J707
PCB B - J1509 SYS B - J531 VS1-5057-002 B - J762
PCB B - J1510 SYS B - J539 VS1-5057-002 B - J805
PCB B - J1511 SYS B - J557 VS1-5057-002 B - J815
PCB B - J1512 SYS B - J560 VS1-5057-002 B - J857
PCB B - J1513 SYS B - J950 VS1-5057-002 B - J863
RB1-2152-000 315 - 71 SYS B - J1101 VS1-5057-003 105 - 19B
RB1-2152-000 365 - 28 SYS B - J1115 VS1-5057-003 190 - 3
RB1-6484-000 106 - 11 SYS B - J1122 VS1-5057-003 193 - 2
RB1-6486-000 125 - 5 SYS B - J1207 VS1-5057-003 272 - 13A
RB1-6486-000 125A - 5 SYS B - J1520 VS1-5057-003 305 - 2B
RB1-6539-000 310 - 54 VS1-0842-003 B - J301 VS1-5057-003 315 - 76A
RB1-6653-000 330 - 31 VS1-0842-003 B - J302 VS1-5057-003 351A - 48A
RB1-6653-000 360 - 62 VS1-0842-003 B - J303 VS1-5057-003 360 - 78A
RB1-6666-000 125 - 21 VS1-0842-003 B - J304 VS1-5057-003 900 - 12A
RB1-6666-000 125A - 21 VS1-0842-003 B - J305 VS1-5057-003 B - J407
RB1-6666-000 351 - 26 VS1-0842-003 B - J306 VS1-5057-003 B - J540
RB1-6666-000 351A - 26 VS1-0842-003 B - J307 VS1-5057-003 B - J669
1-11
NUMERICAL INDEX
VS1-5057-003 B - J671 VS1-5820-008 B - J962 VS1-6225-009 B - J603
VS1-5057-003 B - J673 VS1-5824-002 B - J66 VS1-6225-009 B - J604
VS1-5057-003 B - J675 VS1-5824-002 B - J74 VS1-6225-012 B - J115
VS1-5057-003 B - J700 VS1-5824-002 B - J106 VS1-6225-018 B - J117
VS1-5057-003 B - J716 VS1-5824-002 B - J559 VS1-6226-036 B - J117
VS1-5057-003 B - J721 VS1-5824-002 B - J805 VS1-6302-002 B - J91
VS1-5057-003 B - J757 VS1-5824-002 B - J1509 VS1-6302-004 B - J68
VS1-5057-003 B - J806 VS1-5824-003 B - J88 VS1-6302-004 B - J440
VS1-5057-003 B - J812 VS1-5824-003 B - J407 VS1-6302-006 B - J71
VS1-5057-003 B - J820 VS1-5824-003 B - J414 VS1-6302-007 B - J109
VS1-5057-003 B - J1120 VS1-5824-003 B - J564 VS1-6302-012 B - J560
VS1-5057-003 B - J1126 VS1-5824-003 B - J803 VS1-6302-012 B - J1311
VS1-5057-004 105 - 19C VS1-5824-003 B - J804 VS1-6302-012 B - J1504
VS1-5057-004 107 - 5A VS1-5824-003 B - J806 VS1-6302-014 B - J61
VS1-5057-004 B - J562 VS1-5824-004 B - J562 VS1-6313-009 B - J802
VS1-5057-004 B - J720 VS1-5824-006 B - J98 VS1-6313-010 B - J126
VS1-5057-004 B - J813 VS1-5824-012 B - J116 VS1-6313-010 B - J129
VS1-5057-005 105 - 19D VS1-5824-012 B - J120 VS1-6313-010 B - J801
VS1-5057-005 B - J708 VS1-5824-013 B - J114 VS1-6313-011 B - J109
VS1-5057-006 315 - 75B VS1-5824-013 B - J118 VS1-6313-012 B - J406
VS1-5057-006 360 - 69B VS1-5976-004 B - J154 VS1-6313-013 B - J102
VS1-5057-006 B - J98 VS1-5976-009 B - J153 VS1-6313-013 B - J108
VS1-5057-006 B - J413 VS1-5976-012 B - J54 VS1-6313-013 B - J127
VS1-5057-006 B - J756 VS1-5976-012 B - J69 VS1-6313-013 B - J403
VS1-5057-008 260 - 3A VS1-6084-007 B - J103 VS1-6313-013 B - J441
VS1-5057-008 B - J851 VS1-6197-014 B - J103 VS1-6313-014 B - J104
VS1-5057-010 900 - 11B VS1-6225-003 B - J309 VS1-6313-014 B - J442
VS1-5057-010 B - J521 VS1-6225-003 B - J310 VS1-6313-014 B - J852
VS1-5057-012 900 - 13A VS1-6225-003 B - J311 VS1-6313-015 B - J750
VS1-5057-012 B - J524 VS1-6225-003 B - J312 VS1-6313-015 B - J755
VS1-5057-012 B - J1000 VS1-6225-003 B - J607 VS1-6313-016 B - J107
VS1-5452-007 B - J103 VS1-6225-003 B - J611 VS1-6313-017 B - J105
VS1-5452-007 B - J950 VS1-6225-003 B - J615 VS1-6313-018 B - J510
VS1-5452-007 B - J963 VS1-6225-003 B - J619 VS1-6313-018 B - J511
VS1-5452-008 B - J950 VS1-6225-004 B - J605 VS1-6313-018 B - J1121
VS1-5452-008 B - J962 VS1-6225-004 B - J609 VS1-6313-018 B - J1304
VS1-5729-002 B - J96 VS1-6225-004 B - J613 VS1-6313-020 B - J92
VS1-5729-002 B - J1100 VS1-6225-004 B - J617 VS1-6313-020 B - J131
VS1-5729-004 B - J561 VS1-6225-005 B - J606 VS1-6313-020 B - J512
VS1-5820-002 108 - 10A VS1-6225-005 B - J610 VS1-6313-020 B - J1103
VS1-5820-002 B - J558 VS1-6225-005 B - J614 VS1-6313-020 B - J1309
VS1-5820-007 108 - 10B VS1-6225-005 B - J618 VS1-6314-002 B - J1316
VS1-5820-007 B - J963 VS1-6225-009 B - J600 VS1-6314-003 B - J752
VS1-5820-008 108 - 10C VS1-6225-009 B - J601 VS1-6314-003 B - J956
1-12
NUMERICAL INDEX
VS1-6314-003 B - J958 VS1-6314-011 B - J800 VS1-6314-020 B - J75
VS1-6314-003 B - J964 VS1-6314-011 B - J1110 VS1-6314-020 B - J88
VS1-6314-003 B - J965 VS1-6314-011 B - J1116 VS1-6314-020 B - J131
VS1-6314-003 B - J1124 VS1-6314-012 B - J76 VS1-6314-020 B - J512
VS1-6314-003 B - J1125 VS1-6314-012 B - J87 VS1-6314-020 B - J1102
VS1-6314-004 B - J404 VS1-6314-012 B - J703 VS1-6314-020 B - J1309
VS1-6314-004 B - J539 VS1-6314-013 B - J80 VS1-6318-003 102 - 26
VS1-6314-004 B - J953 VS1-6314-013 B - J89 VS1-6318-003 102 - 26A
VS1-6314-004 B - J1336 VS1-6314-013 B - J102 VS1-6318-003 321 - 10A
VS1-6314-005 B - J50 VS1-6314-013 B - J108 VS1-6318-003 365 - 29A
VS1-6314-005 B - J522 VS1-6314-013 B - J127 VS1-6318-003 B - J752
VS1-6314-005 B - J807 VS1-6314-013 B - J403 VS1-6318-003 B - J964
VS1-6314-005 B - J808 VS1-6314-013 B - J406 VS1-6318-003 B - J965
VS1-6314-005 B - J957 VS1-6314-013 B - J441 VS1-6318-003 B - J1124
VS1-6314-005 B - J959 VS1-6314-013 B - J702 VS1-6318-003 B - J1125
VS1-6314-005 B - J1508 VS1-6314-013 B - J1111 VS1-6318-004 103 - 6A
VS1-6314-006 B - J538 VS1-6314-013 B - J1117 VS1-6318-004 365 - 1A
VS1-6314-006 B - J952 VS1-6314-014 B - J51 VS1-6318-004 B - J404
VS1-6314-006 B - J960 VS1-6314-014 B - J104 VS1-6318-004 B - J953
VS1-6314-006 B - J1225 VS1-6314-014 B - J123 VS1-6318-005 102 - 18A
VS1-6314-006 B - J1318 VS1-6314-014 B - J128 VS1-6318-005 B - J807
VS1-6314-006 B - J1513 VS1-6314-014 B - J132 VS1-6318-005 B - J808
VS1-6314-008 B - J111 VS1-6314-014 B - J300 VS1-6318-006 105 - 25
VS1-6314-008 B - J535 VS1-6314-014 B - J442 VS1-6318-006 B - J952
VS1-6314-008 B - J769 VS1-6314-014 B - J850 VS1-6318-008 270 - 3A
VS1-6314-008 B - J1213 VS1-6314-014 B - J852 VS1-6318-008 900 - 11C
VS1-6314-008 B - J1315 VS1-6314-014 B - J951 VS1-6318-008 B - J535
VS1-6314-008 B - J1507 VS1-6314-015 B - J750 VS1-6318-008 B - J769
VS1-6314-009 B - J520 VS1-6314-016 B - J72C VS1-6318-009 106 - 13
VS1-6314-009 B - J701 VS1-6314-016 B - J72K VS1-6318-009 B - J703
VS1-6314-010 B - J73CK VS1-6314-016 B - J72M VS1-6318-010 102 - 18B
VS1-6314-010 B - J73YM VS1-6314-016 B - J72Y VS1-6318-010 981 - 3A
VS1-6314-010 B - J90 VS1-6314-016 B - J77 VS1-6318-010 B - J801
VS1-6314-010 B - J95 VS1-6314-016 B - J78 VS1-6318-010 B - J1104
VS1-6314-010 B - J97 VS1-6314-016 B - J79 VS1-6318-010 B - J1105
VS1-6314-010 B - J99 VS1-6314-016 B - J94 VS1-6318-011 105 - 20A
VS1-6314-010 B - J126 VS1-6314-016 B - J107 VS1-6318-011 B - J800
VS1-6314-010 B - J129 VS1-6314-016 B - J110 VS1-6318-012 106 - 14
VS1-6314-010 B - J801 VS1-6314-016 B - J755 VS1-6318-012 B - J701
VS1-6314-010 B - J802 VS1-6314-017 B - J105 VS1-6318-013 105 - 19E
VS1-6314-010 B - J1104 VS1-6314-018 B - J510 VS1-6318-013 B - J702
VS1-6314-010 B - J1105 VS1-6314-018 B - J511 VS1-6318-014 105 - 27
VS1-6314-010 B - J1305 VS1-6314-018 B - J1121 VS1-6318-014 310 - 57
VS1-6314-011 B - J109 VS1-6314-018 B - J1304 VS1-6318-014 B - J850
1-13
NUMERICAL INDEX
VS1-6318-014 B - J852 VS1-6321-003 B - J676 VS1-6321-004 B - J854
VS1-6318-014 B - J951 VS1-6321-003 B - J677 VS1-6321-004 B - J860
VS1-6318-020 980 - 3 VS1-6321-003 B - J678 VS1-6321-004 B - J961
VS1-6318-020 B - J1102 VS1-6321-003 B - J679 VS1-6321-005 B - J408
VS1-6318-020 B - J1103 VS1-6321-003 B - J700 VS1-6321-005 B - J704
VS1-6319-026 365 - 1B VS1-6321-003 B - J706 VS1-6321-005 B - J705
VS1-6319-026 B - J403 VS1-6321-003 B - J709 VS1-6321-005 B - J708
VS1-6319-030 105 - 6A VS1-6321-003 B - J710 VS1-6321-005 B - J809
VS1-6319-030 B - J750 VS1-6321-003 B - J711 VS1-6321-005 B - J810
VS1-6319-036 105 - 26C VS1-6321-003 B - J712 VS1-6321-006 B - J413
VS1-6319-036 B - J510 VS1-6321-003 B - J713 VS1-6321-006 B - J756
VS1-6319-036 B - J1121 VS1-6321-003 B - J716 VS1-6321-008 B - J514
VS1-6319-040 B - J512 VS1-6321-003 B - J721 VS1-6321-008 B - J814
VS1-6320-003 B - J764 VS1-6321-003 B - J754 VS1-6321-008 B - J851
VS1-6321-002 B - J1 VS1-6321-003 B - J757 VS1-6321-008 B - J1511
VS1-6321-002 B - J410 VS1-6321-003 B - J758 VS1-6321-010 B - J521
VS1-6321-002 B - J411 VS1-6321-003 B - J759 VS1-6321-010 B - J523
VS1-6321-002 B - J412 VS1-6321-003 B - J760 VS1-6321-012 B - J524
VS1-6321-002 B - J531 VS1-6321-003 B - J765 VS1-6361-002 B - J93
VS1-6321-002 B - J536 VS1-6321-003 B - J766 VS1-6361-004 B - J70
VS1-6321-002 B - J537 VS1-6321-003 B - J768 VS1-6361-004 B - J1505
VS1-6321-002 B - J557 VS1-6321-003 B - J811 VS1-6361-006 B - J59
VS1-6321-002 B - J668 VS1-6321-003 B - J812 VS1-6361-006 B - J1502
VS1-6321-002 B - J670 VS1-6321-003 B - J820 VS1-6361-008 B - J60
VS1-6321-002 B - J672 VS1-6321-003 B - J855 VS1-6361-008 B - J1501
VS1-6321-002 B - J674 VS1-6321-003 B - J856 VS1-6361-010 B - J1208
VS1-6321-002 B - J707 VS1-6321-003 B - J858 VS1-6361-010 B - J1503
VS1-6321-002 B - J714 VS1-6321-003 B - J859 VS1-6380-002 B - J10
VS1-6321-002 B - J762 VS1-6321-003 B - J861 VS1-6380-003 B - J57
VS1-6321-002 B - J815 VS1-6321-003 B - J862 VS1-6380-003 B - J95
VS1-6321-002 B - J816 VS1-6321-003 B - J864 VS1-6380-004 B - J58
VS1-6321-002 B - J857 VS1-6321-003 B - J865 VS1-6380-006 B - J56
VS1-6321-002 B - J863 VS1-6321-003 B - J1113 VS1-6407-080 B - J113
VS1-6321-002 B - J1122 VS1-6321-003 B - J1120 VS1-6407-080 B - J1216
VS1-6321-002 B - J1123 VS1-6321-003 B - J1126 VS1-6492-009 B - J600
VS1-6321-002 B - J1510 VS1-6321-003 B - J1512 VS1-6492-009 B - J601
VS1-6321-003 B - J405 VS1-6321-004 B - J650 VS1-6492-009 B - J603
VS1-6321-003 B - J407 VS1-6321-004 B - J651 VS1-6492-009 B - J604
VS1-6321-003 B - J409 VS1-6321-004 B - J652 VS1-6507-018 B - J117
VS1-6321-003 B - J540 VS1-6321-004 B - J653 VS1-6757-009 B - J802
VS1-6321-003 B - J669 VS1-6321-004 B - J720 VS1-6757-010 B - J802
VS1-6321-003 B - J671 VS1-6321-004 B - J761 VS1-6910-008 B - J654
VS1-6321-003 B - J673 VS1-6321-004 B - J763 VS1-6910-009 B - J655
VS1-6321-003 B - J675 VS1-6321-004 B - J813 VS1-6917-019 B - J802
1-14
NUMERICAL INDEX
VS1-6918-019 B - J802 VS3-5083-012 B - J64 WS3-5160-000 B - J64
VS1-6919-025 365 - 1C VS3-5083-012 B - J100 WS3-5160-000 B - J67
VS1-6919-025 B - J406 VS3-5083-013 B - J70C WS3-5160-000 B - J70C
VS1-6919-031 105 - 6B VS3-5083-013 B - J70K WS3-5160-000 B - J70K
VS1-6919-031 B - J755 VS3-5083-013 B - J70M WS3-5160-000 B - J70M
VS1-6920-025 360 - 64 VS3-5083-013 B - J70Y WS3-5160-000 B - J70Y
VS1-6920-031 B - J755 VS3-5084-002 B - J7 WS3-5160-000 B - J71C
VS1-6930-002 B - J660 VS3-5084-003 B - J3 WS3-5160-000 B - J71K
VS1-6930-002 B - J661 VS3-5084-004 B - J8 WS3-5160-000 B - J71M
VS1-6930-002 B - J662 VS3-5121-002 B - J10 WS3-5160-000 B - J71Y
VS1-6930-002 B - J663 VS3-5121-003 B - J95 WS3-5160-000 B - J81
VS1-6930-003 B - J660 VS4-0001-003 B - J12 WS3-5160-000 B - J82
VS1-6930-003 B - J661 VS4-0002-003 B - J12 WS3-5160-000 B - J83
VS1-6930-003 B - J662 VS4-0002-003 B - J13 WS3-5160-000 B - J84CK
VS1-6930-003 B - J663 VT2-5161-020 B - J126 WS3-5160-000 B - J84YM
VS1-6930-008 B - J124 VT2-5161-020 B - J129 WS3-5160-000 B - J85
VS1-6930-008 B - J654 VT2-5161-022 B - J109 WS3-5160-000 B - J86
VS1-6930-009 B - J125 VT2-5161-026 B - J102 WS3-5160-000 B - J96
VS1-6930-009 B - J655 VT2-5161-026 B - J108 WS3-5160-000 B - J100
VS3-0276-007 B - J108 VT2-5161-026 B - J127 WS3-5160-000 B - J561
VS3-5080-002 B - J52 VT2-5161-026 B - J403 WS3-5160-000 B - J1100
VS3-5080-002 B - J558 VT2-5161-026 B - J441 WS3-5160-000 B - J1101
VS3-5080-012 B - J608 VT2-5161-028 B - J104 WS3-5231-000 B - J108
VS3-5080-012 B - J612 VT2-5161-028 B - J442 WS3-5291-000 B - J10
VS3-5080-012 B - J616 VT2-5161-030 B - J750 WS3-5291-000 B - J95
VS3-5080-012 B - J620 VT2-5161-032 B - J107 WS3-5292-000 B - J10
VS3-5083-002 B - J62 VT2-5161-034 B - J105 WS3-5292-000 B - J56
VS3-5083-002 B - J96 VT2-5161-036 B - J510 WS3-5292-000 B - J57
VS3-5083-002 B - J1100 VT2-5161-036 B - J511 WS3-5292-000 B - J58
VS3-5083-002 B - J1101 VT2-5161-036 B - J1121 WS3-5292-000 B - J95
VS3-5083-003 B - J5 VT2-5161-036 B - J1304 WS3-5301-000 B - J96
VS3-5083-003 B - J71C VT2-5161-040 B - J131 WS3-5301-000 B - J561
VS3-5083-003 B - J71K VT2-5161-040 B - J512 WS3-5301-000 B - J1100
VS3-5083-003 B - J71M VT2-5161-040 B - J1309 WS3-5358-000 B - J66
VS3-5083-003 B - J71Y WA7-2645-000 900 - 14 WS3-5358-000 B - J74
VS3-5083-004 B - J81 WA7-3053-000 900 - 22 WS3-5358-000 B - J88
VS3-5083-004 B - J85 WC1-5129-000 305 - 3 WS3-5358-000 B - J98
VS3-5083-004 B - J561 WC2-5332-000 102 - 12 WS3-5358-000 B - J106
VS3-5083-005 B - J67 WM2-5210-000 900 - 21 WS3-5358-000 B - J114
VS3-5083-005 B - J82 WS3-5159-000 B - J3 WS3-5358-000 B - J116
VS3-5083-005 B - J84CK WS3-5159-000 B - J7 WS3-5358-000 B - J118
VS3-5083-005 B - J84YM WS3-5159-000 B - J8 WS3-5358-000 B - J120
VS3-5083-005 B - J86 WS3-5160-000 B - J5 WS3-5358-000 B - J407
VS3-5083-007 B - J83 WS3-5160-000 B - J62 WS3-5358-000 B - J414
1-15
NUMERICAL INDEX
WS3-5358-000 B - J559 WT2-5639-000 810 - 53 XB1-2402-007 910 - 503
WS3-5358-000 B - J562 X62-5133-000 B - J44 XB1-2403-007 910 - 504
WS3-5358-000 B - J564 X65-5854-000 B - J44 XB1-2403-009 900 - 503
WS3-5358-000 B - J1509 XA9-0605-000 100 - 18E XB1-2404-007 193 - 501
WS3-5569-000 B - J71 XA9-0624-000 537 - 6 XB1-3300-607 310 - 505
WS3-5569-000 B - J109 XA9-0633-000 100 - 43 XB2-4231-209 105 - 503
WS3-5592-000 B - J59 XA9-0656-000 310 - 58 XB2-4300-607 107 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J60 XA9-0724-000 351 - 35 XB2-8300-607 108 - 502
WS3-5592-000 B - J1208 XA9-0724-000 351A - 35 XB2-8300-607 130 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J1501 XA9-0774-000 100 - 29 XB2-8300-607 300 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J1502 XA9-0782-000 108 - 12 XB2-8300-607 535 - 502
WS3-5592-000 B - J1503 XA9-0783-000 100 - 54 XB2-8300-807 101 - 502
WS3-5596-000 B - J950 XA9-0838-000 101 - 6 XB2-8300-807 108 - 506
WS3-5680-000 B - J61 XA9-0896-000 900 - 7 XB2-8300-807 361 - 502
WS3-5680-000 B - J68 XA9-1030-000 107 - 9 XB2-8300-807 810 - 501
WS3-5680-000 B - J91 XA9-1401-000 106 - 505 XB2-8301-009 101 - 505
WS3-5680-000 B - J440 XA9-1412-000 330 - 11 XB2-8301-009 105 - 511
WS3-5680-000 B - J560 XA9-1412-000 360 - 28 XB2-8301-207 810 - 502
WS3-5680-000 B - J1311 XA9-1484-000 810 - 11 XB2-8400-807 105 - 504
WS3-5680-000 B - J1504 XB1-2260-407 272 - 501 XB2-8400-807 315 - 504
WS3-5721-000 B - J802 XB1-2260-807 900 - 501 XB2-8401-007 315 - 514
WS3-5730-000 B - J803 XB1-2300-407 101 - 506 XB2-8401-607 102 - 508
WS3-5730-000 B - J804 XB1-2300-407 330 - 501 XB3-6300-600 101 - 503
WS3-5730-000 B - J805 XB1-2300-407 360 - 501 XB3-6300-600 102 - 504
WS3-5730-000 B - J806 XB1-2300-407 537 - 501 XB3-6300-600 260 - 501
WS3-5759-000 B - J70 XB1-2300-409 900 - 26 XB3-6300-600 310 - 501
WS3-5759-000 B - J93 XB1-2300-507 104 - 509 XB3-6300-800 104 - 503
WS3-5759-000 B - J1505 XB1-2300-607 104 - 502 XB3-6300-800 106 - 502
WS3-5822-000 B - J802 XB1-2300-607 130 - 503 XB3-6300-800 106 - 505
WS3-5824-000 B - J802 XB1-2300-607 351A - 507 XB3-6300-800 107 - 502
WS4-0217-000 B - J12 XB1-2300-607 535 - 501 XB3-6300-800 120 - 501
WS4-0217-000 B - J13 XB1-2300-607 910 - 501 XB3-6300-800 270 - 501
WS4-0219-000 B - J12 XB1-2300-807 108 - 503 XB3-6300-800 272 - 502
WS5-5074-000 B - J1 XB1-2300-807 360 - 504 XB3-6300-800 315 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J52 XB1-2400-407 102 - 511 XB3-6300-800 351 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J558 XB1-2400-603 910 - 502 XB3-6300-800 351A - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J608 XB1-2400-607 105 - 502 XB3-6300-800 365 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J612 XB1-2400-607 107 - 503 XB3-6400-800 100 - 502
WT1-5155-000 B - J616 XB1-2400-607 108 - 504 XB3-6400-800 101 - 509
WT1-5155-000 B - J620 XB1-2400-607 305 - 501 XB3-6400-800 102 - 502
WT2-5565-000 102 - 18C XB1-2400-607 360 - 502 XB3-6400-800 103 - 508
WT2-5565-000 105 - 29 XB1-2400-607 900 - 502 XB3-6400-800 104 - 508
WT2-5565-000 260 - 3B XB1-2400-607 930 - 501 XB3-6400-800 105 - 501
WT2-5565-000 270 - 3B XB1-2400-807 100 - 505 XB3-6400-800 106 - 504
1-16
NUMERICAL INDEX
XB3-6400-800 107 - 504 XB6-7300-607 321 - 502 XD2-1100-502 315 - 510
XB3-6400-800 108 - 501 XB6-7300-607 900 - 504 XD2-1100-502 330 - 507
XB3-6400-800 271 - 501 XB6-7300-805 351A - 510 XD2-1100-502 350 - 503
XB3-6400-800 330 - 502 XB6-7300-807 103 - 506 XD2-1100-502 351 - 504
XB3-6400-800 351 - 502 XB6-7300-807 300 - 502 XD2-1100-502 351A - 504
XB3-6400-800 351A - 502 XB6-7301-607 900 - 508 XD2-1100-502 360 - 508
XB3-6400-800 360 - 503 XB6-7400-607 350 - 501 XD2-1100-502 361 - 504
XB4-5300-607 104 - 501 XB6-7400-607 361 - 508 XD2-1100-502 365 - 503
XB4-5300-607 560 - 502 XD1-1104-135 105 - 506 XD2-1100-502 535 - 506
XB4-5300-807 100 - 501 XD1-1104-135 321 - 503 XD2-1100-502 560 - 504
XB4-5300-807 101 - 501 XD1-1104-135 360 - 506 XD2-1100-642 103 - 502
XB4-5300-807 103 - 505 XD1-1104-137 365 - 504 XD2-1100-642 271 - 505
XB4-5300-807 125 - 501 XD1-1104-138 810 - 506 XD2-1100-642 315 - 512
XB4-5300-807 125A - 501 XD1-1104-635 351A - 508 XD2-1100-642 330 - 508
XB4-5300-807 130 - 502 XD1-1105-235 900 - 509 XD2-1100-642 351 - 505
XB4-5300-807 272 - 503 XD1-1106-212 270 - 503 XD2-1100-642 351A - 505
XB4-5300-807 321 - 501 XD1-1106-212 535 - 504 XD2-1100-642 360 - 509
XB4-5300-807 351 - 503 XD1-1106-222 102 - 503 XD2-1100-642 535 - 507
XB4-5300-807 351A - 503 XD1-1106-235 316 - 502 XD2-1100-642 810 - 504
XB4-5300-807 361 - 503 XD1-1108-212 535 - 511 XD2-1100-802 102 - 501
XB4-5300-807 535 - 503 XD1-1108-225 535 - 505 XD2-2300-402 350 - 504
XB4-5300-807 537 - 502 XD1-1108-239 100 - 508 XD2-2300-602 330 - 504
XB4-5300-807 980 - 501 XD1-3100-407 108 - 505 XD2-2300-602 360 - 510
XB4-5300-807 981 - 501 XD1-4200-402 910 - 505 XD3-1300-102 101 - 507
XB4-5301-007 130 - 504 XD2-1100-242 105 - 507 XD3-1300-102 360 - 511
XB4-5301-007 315 - 502 XD2-1100-242 351 - 506 XD3-2200-102 315 - 513
XB4-5400-807 100 - 503 XD2-1100-242 351A - 506 XD3-2200-102 361 - 505
XB4-5400-807 315 - 508 XD2-1100-282 315 - 516 XD3-2200-102 560 - 501
XB4-5400-807 316 - 501 XD2-1100-282 360 - 513 XD3-2200-122 310 - 504
XB4-5400-807 330 - 503 XD2-1100-282 361 - 509 XD3-2200-122 330 - 505
XB4-5400-807 350 - 502 XD2-1100-322 272 - 504 XD3-2200-122 360 - 512
XB4-5400-807 360 - 505 XD2-1100-322 321 - 504 XD3-2200-122 361 - 506
XB4-5401-007 100 - 504 XD2-1100-322 330 - 506 XD3-2200-142 272 - 506
XB4-5401-007 315 - 503 XD2-1100-322 360 - 507 XD3-2200-142 315 - 515
XB4-5401-207 310 - 502 XD2-1100-322 810 - 503 XD3-2200-162 280 - 502
XB4-5403-007 192 - 501 XD2-1100-402 361 - 501 XD3-2200-182 271 - 506
XB4-5403-507 190 - 501 XD2-1100-502 103 - 501 XD3-2200-202 535 - 508
XB4-5403-507 194 - 501 XD2-1100-502 104 - 507 XD3-2300-142 810 - 505
XB4-6260-807 105 - 510 XD2-1100-502 125 - 502 XF9-0733-000 360 - 65
XB4-7300-609 100 - 507 XD2-1100-502 125A - 502 XF9-0734-000 360 - 66
XB6-7300-407 103 - 507 XD2-1100-502 270 - 502 XF9-0735-000 360 - 67
XB6-7300-407 104 - 505 XD2-1100-502 272 - 505 XF9-0736-000 351 - 31
XB6-7300-607 271 - 502 XD2-1100-502 280 - 503 XF9-0736-000 351A - 31
XB6-7300-607 280 - 501 XD2-1100-502 310 - 503 XG9-0177-000 102 - 6
1-17
NUMERICAL INDEX
XG9-0211-000 315 - 7
XG9-0245-000 535 - 26
XG9-0264-000 271 - 11
XG9-0415-000 535 - 27
XG9-0476-000 102 - 5
XG9-0477-000 810 - 12
XG9-0478-000 810 - 14
XG9-0513-000 351A - 47
XG9-0520-000 330 - 21
XG9-0520-000 360 - 68
XG9-0532-000 280 - 10
XH9-0059-000 102 - 3
XZ1-1300-605 351A - 509
XZ9-0428-000 101 - 38
XZ9-0556-000 351A - 50
1-18
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER
C3200/C3220
100V 50/60Hz F14-2412-000MLF00001-

100V 50/60Hz F14-2413-000MLG00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2415-000JFM00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2415-000MLG00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2416-000MLU00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2417-000MLV00001-
120V 60Hz F14-2501-000MSN00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2512-000MLH00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2514-000MLT00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2516-000MLW00001-
100V 50/60Hz F14-2518-000MLX00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2521-000SSX00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2524-000LCK00001-
120V 60Hz F14-2531-000MSL00001-
120V 60Hz F14-2532-000MSK00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2541-000SSY00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2544-000JCL00001-
240V 50Hz F14-2551-000QLZ00001-
240V 50Hz F14-2554-000JBC00001-
240V 50Hz F14-2560-000RQY00001-
240V 50Hz F14-2561-000RLZ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2570-000RQZ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2571-000SLZ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2574-000JBQ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2581-000TLZ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2584-000JCJ00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2591-000UKF00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2594-000JAF00001-
100V F14-5501-000JNG00001-
100V F14-5516-000JLZ00001-
230V F14-5527-000JNL00001-
230V F14-5528-000JPK00001-
120V F14-5536-000JNC00001-
120V F14-5537-000JND00001-
120V F14-5539-000JPM00001-
230V F14-5547-000JNP00001-
230V F14-5548-000JNL00001-
230V F14-5557-000JNF00001-
230V F14-5558-000JPG00001-
230V F14-5567-000JNQ00001-
230V F14-5577-000JNJ00001-
230V F14-5578-000JPH00001-
230V F14-5587-000JNK00001-
230V F14-5588-000JPJ00001-
230V F14-5597-000JNE00001-
230V F14-5598-000JPF00001-
F24-2105-000
100V F24-5206-000
100V F24-5215-000XJV00001-
230V F24-5236-000
230V F24-5245-000
F26-3201-000
F31-9751-000
F32-3501-000
Contents
A ASSEMBLY LOCATION DIAGRAM ...................................................................2-1

100 EXTERNAL COVERS, PANELS, ETC. ..............................................................2-6
101 MACHINE FRONT PLATE................................................................................2-10
102 INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1 ..........................................................................2-14
107 MACHINE REAR PLATE 1 ...............................................................................2-27
108 MACHINE REAR PLATE 2 ...............................................................................2-29
120 DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY............................................................................2-31
125 VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (OLD) ..................................................2-32
125A VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (NEW) .................................................2-34
130 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY .......................................................................2-36
190 FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY ...............................................................2-38
191 CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY .........................................................2-39
192 MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY ...........................................................2-40
193 DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY ..........................................................2-41
194 MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE).......................................................2-42
251 DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY ...............................................................................2-43
260 PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY.............................................................2-45
270 DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY ..................................................................2-46
271 INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY.................................2-47
272 TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY .......................................................2-49
280 FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................2-51
300 CASSETTE .......................................................................................................2-52
305 CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY (OPTION) ..................................................2-55
310 PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY ..........................................................................2-56
315 MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY ................................................................................2-60
316 MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY......................................................................2-66
321 PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY .....................................................................2-68
330 FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE) ..................................................2-70
350 FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE) ...........................................2-73
351 DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (OLD) ............................................2-75
351A DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (NEW) ...........................................2-78
360 DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE).....................................................2-82
361 EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE) ......................2-88
365 MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASSEMBLY .....................................................2-91
460 LASER UNIT .....................................................................................................2-94
535 INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY.............................................2-95
537 TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY ...............................................................2-98
560 SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY...........................................................2-99
810 FIXING ASSEMBLY........................................................................................2-101
900 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY ...........................................................................2-105
910 DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY.................................................................2-108
930 DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY ............................................................2-110
980 H.V. TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY........................................................2-111
981 2ND TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY.....................................................2-112
B LIST OF CONNECTORS ................................................................................2-113
FIGURE A
ASSEMBLY LOCATION DIAGRAM
PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY
321
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY
130
DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
120
TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY
537
DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY

CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
351 351A
351
191
CASSETTE
300
TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
272
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER
BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY
271
FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
280
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
260 193
2ND. TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY
981
2-1
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY
535 316
SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
560
PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY
310
FIXING ASSEMBLY MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY
810 315
MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASSEMBLY
365
CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY (OPTION)

LASER UNIT
305
460
900
VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY
125 125A
2-2
DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY
DC
930
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
900
DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

DC H.V.TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY
910
980
DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
270
MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY

192
251 FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
190
2-3
PLAIN TYPE
FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY

FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY
350
330
DUPLEX TYPE
MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY
194
EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASSEMBLY
361 DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY
360
2-4
READER ASSEMBLY
SEE CATALOG
Color Image Reader-C1
2-5
FIGURE 100
EXTERNAL COVERS, PANELS, ETC.
PRINTER TYPE PRINTER TYPE
36 36 21
36
PRINTER TYPE 502 5 502
43 37
40 43 50 503
8
41
PRINTER TYPE 45
37
51
4 507
19 47 50
6 508 50 507
48
27 17A
502 17 47
508
12 9
42 501 46
38 51 14 53 23
20
7
502 51 56 49 10
100V
22D 11
49
52
22G 22B
27 501
39 22F 22C
22E
33 34 34
35
22F 502
29 2
33 22F
22A 22E 504 22C 22G
28 22E
22A 22F 1
25 32 35 22E
26 28 EXCEPT S3200,V3200 18C
16 22 18E
505 18E 55
24 505
SEE FIGURE
18A
125,125A 18B
SEE FIGURE 130
30 3 18E
PLAIN TYPE 15 54
EXCEPT S3200,V3200 18E18D 44
13
18
2-6
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.100 NPN RF EXTERNAL COVERS, PANELS, ETC.
1 FB6-3443-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, LOWER
2 FB6-3504-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, LOWER
3 FB6-3722-000 1 PANEL, PAPER DELIVERY, SMALL
4 FB6-3765-000 1 UPPER PANEL, 1
5 FB6-3766-000 1 UPPER PANEL, 2
6 FB6-3767-000 1 TRAY, FACE-DOWN
7 FB6-3768-000 1 LEFT PANEL, UPPER
8 FB6-3769-000 2 PANEL, SMALL, 1 PRINTER TYPE
9 FB6-3775-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, UPPER
10 FB6-3776-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, MIDDLE
11 FB6-3777-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, FRONT
12 FB6-3778-000 1 RIGHT PANEL, REAR
13 FB6-3785-000 1 LEFT PANEL, LOWER
14 FB6-3834-000 1 LEFT PANEL, REAR UPPER EXCEPT S3200,V3200
14 FB6-4870-000 1 LEFT PANEL, REAR UPPER S3200,V3200
15 FB6-3835-000 1 LEFT PANEL, REAR LOWER
16 FB6-3950-000 1 PEN, TOUCH PANEL EXCEPT S3200,V3200
17 FG6-8927-000 1 UPPER PANEL, LEFT
17A FB6-3788-000 1 PANEL, CARD
18 FG6-8945-020 1 PANEL, FRONT
18A FA2-7162-000 1 PLAIN WASHERS
18B FB6-2973-000 1 TAPE, FRONT PANEL SUPPORT
18C FB6-2994-000 1 CASE, SERVICE
18D FB6-3139-000 1 CLAW, SWING
18E XA9-0605-000 8 SCREW,P,M4X8
19 FB6-3791-020 1 REAR PANEL, UPPER
20 FB6-3792-000 1 REAR PANEL, LOWER
21 FG6-9012-000 1 PANEL, RACK, SMALL PRINTER TYPE
22 FG6-9019-000 1 RIGHT DOOR ASSEMBLY
22A FB6-3313-000 4 ROLLER, PAPER FEED
22B FB6-3503-000 1 PANEL, RIGHT
2-7
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
22C FB6-3331-000 2 HOOK, DOOR
22D FB6-3332-000 1 PANEL, DECK PATH
22E FS5-1595-000 8 BLOCK, ROLLER
22F FS7-2788-000 8 SPRING, COMPRESSION
22G FS7-2789-000 2 SPRING, TENSION
23 FH2-5006-000 1 CABLE, GROUNDING 100V
PLAIN TYPE EXCEPT

24 FF6-2130-000 1 TRAY, DELIVERY, 1
S3200,V3200
24 FB6-3561-000 1 TRAY, DELIVERY, 1 DUPLEX TYPE
25 FB6-3561-000 1 TRAY, DELIVERY, 1
26 FB6-3562-000 1 TRAY, DELIVERY, 2
27 FB5-8385-000 6 CAP, DUST-PROOF
28 FB2-4456-000 2 SEAL
29 XA9-0774-000 2 SCREW,RS,M4X16
30 FB6-3562-000 1 TRAY, DELIVERY, 2 EXCEPT S3200,V3200
32 FB6-3566-000 1 HOLDER, TRAY
33 FB6-3569-000 2 SPRING, TORSION
34 FS5-9274-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M5X2.5
35 FS7-2855-000 2 SPRING, TENSION
36 FB6-3771-000 7 COVER, RUBBER PRINTER TYPE
37 FC5-0166-000 5 SEAL, BLANKING PRINTER TYPE
38 FB6-3051-000 1 PANEL, EXHAUST
39 FB6-3105-000 1 PANEL, BREAKER
40 FB6-3106-000 1 PANEL, ASSIST
41 FB6-3793-000 1 PANEL, BLANKING, FAX
42 FF6-2132-000 1 DUCT, JOINT, FIXING
43 XA9-0633-000 6 SCREW,RS W/WASHER,M4X8
44 FB6-3895-000 1 EMBLEM MLF,MLU
44 FB6-3896-000 1 EMBLEM MLV,MLG
44 FB6-5800-000 1 EMBLEM JFM,MLG 90001-90500
MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
44 FB6-4923-000 1 EMBLEM
JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQY
44 FB6-4890-000 1 EMBLEM MSK,MSL
2-8
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
MLH,MLW,MSN,SSY,RLZ
44 FB6-3894-000 1 EMBLEM
, RQZ
44 FB6-4920-000 1 EMBLEM UKF,QLZ,SLZ,TLZ,SSX
44 FB6-6385-000 1 EMBLEM JLZ,JNP,JNQ
JNB,JPK,JNL,JPG,JPH,JP
44 FB6-6386-000 1 EMBLEM
J,JPF
44 FB6-6387-000 1 EMBLEM JNL,JNF,JNJ,JNK,JNE
44 FB6-6388-000 1 EMBLEM JND,JNC
44 FB6-6389-000 1 EMBLEM JPM
45 FB6-5450-000 1 TRAY, DOCUMENT, UPPER
46 FB6-5451-000 1 TRAY, DOCUMENT, LOWER
47 FS5-9161-000 2 SCREW, STEPPED, M4
48 FB6-3006-000 1 CAP, BLANKING
49 FB6-3376-000 2 COVER, LATCH, RIGHT
50 FB6-3771-000 3 COVER, RUBBER
51 FC5-0166-000 5 SEAL, BLANKING
52 FB6-3886-000 1 LABEL, BREAKER ON/OFF
53 FS7-8332-000 1 LABEL, LASER WARNING
54 XA9-0783-000 1 SCREW,RS,M4X12
55 FB6-2972-000 1 PLATE, MAGNET
56 FB6-3234-000 1 SUPPORT, CABLE
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
502 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
503 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
504 XB4-5401-007 AR SCREW,P,M4X10
505 XB1-2400-807 AR SCREW,MACH.,TRUSS HEAD,M4X8
507 XB4-7300-609 AR SCREW,TAPPING,TRUSS HEAD,M3X6
508 XD1-1108-239 AR SHIM
2-9
FIGURE 101
MACHINE FRONT PLATE
10F
(J714)
10A (J708) 10
10E (J713)
501 10J
501
10B 10G 509
10D 41C
10H
9 41B
509
41D
509
41D
7 6 10C
41A
509
6
46 501
20
40
506 18
47 41
502
(J707) 509 38
(SL2) 45
1 509
2
43 509 50 13 19
507
TO FIGURE 104 505
44 42 Z
38 509
502 19
505 17
509 509 19
509 3 509 5 505 16
SEE FIGURE 191 2
1 505
30 503 15 23
509 29 19
27 28 14
32 502
503
22
31 33
35 34
503 502
48
24
509
36 503
8 37
503 25
26
49
26 12
21
21 4
26 21 11
2-10
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.101 NPN RF MACHINE FRONT PLATE
1 FB1-7173-000 2 PIN, HINGE
2 FB6-2990-000 2 HINGE, FRONT PANEL
3 FB6-3158-000 1 COVER, CLEANING FAN
4 FB6-3195-000 1 HANDLE, DRUM UNIT
5 FB6-3196-000 1 COVER, INTERNAL, UPPER
6 XA9-0838-000 2 SCREW,W/WASHER,M4X16
7 FF6-2038-000 1 PLATE, POSITIONING
8 FG6-9000-000 1 DRUM UNIT COVER ASSEMBLY
9 FF6-2085-000 1 SUPPORT, LEAD CAM
10 FG6-8991-000 1 INTERNAL COVER, LOWER
10A FB6-3124-020 1 FLAG, BOTTLE DETECT
10B FB6-3127-000 1 COVER, SENSOR
10C FF6-2114-000 1 COVER, SWING
10D FS7-2844-000 1 SPRING, TENSION
10E FS7-2845-000 1 SPRING, TENSION
10F FG3-2314-000 1 CABLE, WASTE TONER SENSOR J708,713,714
10G FG3-2374-000 1 WASTE TONER SENSOR PCB ASS'Y
10H FG3-2375-000 1 WASTE TONER SENSOR PCB ASS'Y
10J FB6-3862-000 1 LABEL, ITB LOCK LEVER
11 FB6-3827-000 1 LABEL, ITB LOCK LEVER POSITION
12 FB6-3828-020 1 LABEL, PROCESS HANDLE POSITION
13 FB6-3829-000 4 LABEL, T.CRG. LEVER POSITION
14 FB6-3830-000 1 COLOR LABEL, LEVER, YELLOW
15 FB6-3831-000 1 COLOR LABEL, LEVER, MAGENTA
16 FB6-3832-000 1 COLOR LABEL, LEVER, CYAN
17 FB6-3833-000 1 COLOR LABEL, LEVER, BLACK
19 FG6-9005-000 4 LEVER, TONER CARTRIDGE
20 FB6-2987-000 1 LEVER, TRANSFER PRESSURE
21 FB2-7867-030 3 SHAFT, HINGE
22 FB6-3199-000 4 PLATE, CONTACT
23 FB6-3202-000 4 BUSHING
2-11
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
24 FB6-3203-000 1 CAM, LEAD
25 FB6-3205-000 1 PLATE, GROUNDING
26 FB6-3207-000 3 RING, HINGE SHAFT STOP
27 FB6-3819-020 1 LABEL, COLOR, YELLOW
28 FB6-3820-020 1 LABEL, COLOR, YELLOW/MAGENTA
29 FB6-3821-020 1 LABEL, COLOR, MAGENTA/CYAN
30 FB6-3822-020 1 LABEL, COLOR, CYAN/BLACK
31 FF6-2099-000 4 PIN, THRUST
32 FF6-2110-000 1 GUIDE, DRUM UNIT DOOR
33 FS5-6949-000 4 SPACER
34 FS5-9754-000 4 SCREW,MACH.,C.S. HEAD,M3X4.5
35 FS7-2826-000 4 SPRING, COMPRESSION
36 FU3-0308-000 1 GEAR, 44T
37 FU3-0309-000 1 GEAR, 22T
38 XZ9-0428-000 2 MAGNET CATCH
40 FB6-2988-000 3 PLATE, LEVER REINFORCEMENT
41 FG6-8992-020 1 BOTTLE, WASTE TONER
41A FB6-3882-020 1 LABEL, WASTE TONER WARNING
41B FB6-3860-000 1 LABEL, WASTE TONER BOTTLE
41C FB6-3129-000 1 GRIP, BOTTLE
41D FB6-3883-000 2 COVER, WASTE TONER SHIELD
42 FB6-3631-000 1 LINK, SOLENOID
43 FH6-5054-000 1 SOLENOID SL2, J707
45 FB6-3282-000 1 BUTTON, CLEANING
46 FB6-3283-000 1 HOLDER, CLEANING BUTTON
48 FB6-3194-000 1 COVER, DRUM UNIT DOOR
50 FB6-2995-000 1 MOUNT, CONTROL PANEL
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
502 XB2-8300-807 AR SCREW,W/WASHER,M3X8
2-12
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
503 XB3-6300-600 AR SCREW,RS,M3X6
507 XD3-1300-102 AR PIN,SPRING
509 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
2-13
FIGURE 102
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1
502
502
501
502 5
(J1125)
502 A
(J1125) 22 502
26A
26
26
OLD B
28
NEW 502
19
502 10
100/220/240V
(J12) 22
502 508 1
SEE FIGURE
305
23
502 504 (J11) 27 508
24
502
503 4 502
6 25
7 23
503 504
8 9 502 11
(J808) (SW2) 10
(SW3)
(J807)
(J810)
502 2
12 (J809) 5 A 502
(J810)
9 8 16 (J809) 501
18B 503 502 511
7 14 15
18C 6
503
(J801) (J808) (J11)
13
17
18
(J807)
B
18A SEE FIGURE
305
18A
100/220/240V
502
502
3
2-14
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.102 NPN RF INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1
2 FB6-3442-000 1 HANDLE, FRONT
3 XH9-0059-000 2 FOOT, RUBBER
4 FB6-5060-000 1 PANEL, HEATER PCB
5 XG9-0476-000 2 BUSHING
6 XG9-0177-000 2 BEARING, BALL
7 FB6-3963-000 2 SHAFT, ROLLER
8 FB6-3962-000 2 SUPPORT, ROLLER, LOWER
9 FB6-3961-000 2 SUPPORT, ROLLER, UPPER
10 FB6-3507-000 4 BLOCK, SWING
11 FG3-2348-000 2 CABLE, CASSETTE SIZE SENSOR J807,808 J809,810
12 WC2-5332-000 2 SWITCH, CASSETTE SIZE SW2,3 J810,809
15 FB6-3494-000 2 HOLDER, SWITCH, 3
18 FG3-2347-000 1 CABLE, LEFT LOWER CROSSMEMBER J801,807,808
18A VS1-6318-005 2 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J807,808
18B VS1-6318-010 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J801
18C WT2-5565-000 1 CLAMP, CABLE
19 FF6-2063-000 2 PLATE, SIDE REGIST. ADJUSTMENT
22 FB5-8385-000 4 CAP, DUST-PROOF
23 FB6-2986-000 2 CAM, LOCK
24 FB6-2985-000 1 SHAFT, SWING
25 FS7-2865-000 1 SPRING, TORSION
26 FG9-3986-000 1 CONNECTOR, SHORT OLD J1125
26 VS1-6318-003 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT NEW J1125
26A VS1-6318-003 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT OLD J1125
27 FB6-3497-000 1 RAIL, LEFT
28 FB6-3495-000 1 RAIL, RIGHT
2-15
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
501 XD2-1100-802 AR RING,E
502 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
503 XD1-1106-222 AR SHIM
504 XB3-6300-600 AR SCREW,RS,M3X6
2-16
FIGURE 103
6A
6
(J953)
7
507
(J961)
(EV1)
508 27
26
507
508
8
507
3 22
SEE FIGURE 535
4
505 506
25
24
23
506
21
508
508
2
508
1 508
15
508 17
502
502
10 508
19 14
14 9
12
501 508
11
502
502
11
501
12
13
2-17
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB6-2991-000 1 RAIL, TRANSFER, FRONT
2 FB6-2993-000 1 RAIL, TRANSFER, REAR
3 FB6-3288-000 1 BLOCK, REG. SENSOR POSITION, R
5 FB6-3371-000 1 SHAFT, POSITIONING
6 FG3-2319-000 1 CABLE, ENVIRONMENT SENSOR J953,961
6A VS1-6318-004 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J953
7 FH7-7602-000 1 ENVIRONMENT SENSOR UNIT EV1 J961
8 FF6-2047-000 1 PLATE, OPEN/CLOSE PIN
10 FB6-2961-000 1 ARM, PRESSURE, FRONT
11 FB6-2965-000 2 LEVER, LOCK
12 FB6-2968-000 2 CAM, SWING
13 FF6-2016-000 1 SUPPORT, SWING SHAFT, FRONT
17 FB6-2967-000 1 ARM, PRESSURE, REAR
19 FF6-2017-000 1 SUPPORT, SWING SHAFT, REAR
21 FB6-3278-000 1 CAM, CLEANING, 1
22 FB6-3279-000 1 CAM, CLEANING, 2
23 FB6-3280-000 1 SHAFT, CLEANING CAM
24 FB6-3281-000 1 SPRING, LEAF
25 FB6-3277-000 1 BLOCK, REG. SENSOR POSITION, F
26 FB6-3172-000 1 RAIL, DRUM UNIT
27 FB6-3285-000 1 COVER, ENVIRONMENT SENSOR
501 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
502 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
505 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
506 XB6-7300-807 AR SCREW,TP,M3X8
507 XB6-7300-407 AR SCREW,TP,M3X4
508 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
2-18
FIGURE 104
508
SEE FIGURE 120 32
33 508
508 507
508
D
C TO FIGURE
509
B 508
101
A 20 Z
D 31
5
C 509
3
508 508
509
508
2
508
501
B
502
11 SEE FIGURE 537
16 25
17 501
505
509 508
503 26
A 26
21 23 4 505
508
13 24
10 7 1 508
19
8
508 501
14
6
502 12
9
22 508
15
18
10
2-19
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB6-3187-000 1 RAIL, MAGENTA
2 FB6-3188-000 1 RAIL, CYAN
3 FB6-3189-000 1 RAIL, BLACK
4 FF6-2107-000 1 DUCT, T. CARTRIDGE SIDE PLATE
5 FF6-2039-000 1 PLATE, POSITIONING, LEFT
6 FB6-3800-000 1 PLATE, DUCT SEPARATION
7 FB6-3801-000 1 SEAL, DUCT, 1
8 FB6-3807-000 1 SEAL, DUCT, 7
9 FF6-2106-000 1 DUCT, DRUM UNIT
10 FA3-8727-000 2 RING, RETAINING
11 FB6-3116-000 1 SEAL, DUCT, UPPER
12 FB6-3117-000 1 FEEDSCREW
13 FB6-3118-000 1 SHEET
14 FB6-3119-000 1 CASE, FEEDSCREW
15 FB6-3120-000 1 SHUTTER, CLEANING
16 FB6-3152-000 1 GUIDE
17 FF6-2033-000 1 RAIL, CLEANING SUPPORT
18 FS6-1060-000 1 BUSHING
19 FS7-0579-000 1 GEAR, 25T
20 FB6-3190-000 4 BLOCK, TONER CARTRIDGE LEVER
23 FU3-0343-000 1 GEAR, 28T/28T
24 FB6-3172-000 4 RAIL, DRUM UNIT
25 FB6-3173-000 4 PLATE, TONER CARTRIDGE LOCK
26 FB6-3175-000 8 RAIL, TONER CARTRIDGE
31 FB6-3192-000 4 SHAFT, TONER CARTRIDGE LEVER
32 FB6-3193-000 4 BAR, SLIDE
33 FU3-0345-000 4 GEAR, 32T
501 XB4-5300-607 AR SCREW,P,M3X6
2-20
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
503 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
505 XB6-7300-407 AR SCREW,TP,M3X4
507 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
508 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
2-21
FIGURE 105
23 24
(J620)
29 (J115)
22 (J616) (J117)
(J604)
(J603)
21 (J612) (J601) (J619)
501
(J120) (J600) (J615)
(J611)
(J608) (J118) (J607) 502
29
501
(J116)
29
(J114)
29 (J952)
25 501
(J951)
27
A
SEE FIGURE460
5 510
B 12
511
511
501
(J750) SEE FIGURE
321 (J537)
28
6B 28
19E (J511) (J1123)
(J755) 6
(J702) 506 511 26C
7 6A 2 (J510)
19C 8 511
19 511 3 29
(J562)
1
(J708) 19D 26
4
(J709) 19B
(J707) (J716) 502
28
14 20A
(PS5)
503 (J709) (J800)
503 A
18 (J96) 11
(MSW5)
(MSW6) (J95)
501
13 18
15 (J802)
9
20
B 17 10
501 507
506
16
504
2-22
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB6-3261-000 4 PLATE, SCANNER ADJUSTMENT
2 FB6-3262-000 3 COVER, LASER, 1
3 FB6-3263-000 1 COVER, LASER, 2
4 FF2-5915-000 1 KEY, SWITCH
5 FG3-3004-000 1 CABLE, KEY SWITCH J537
6 FG3-2346-000 1 CABLE, DRAWER J750,755
6B VS1-6919-031 1 CONNECTOR, DRAWER J750
8 FS5-9758-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M3
9 FB6-3143-020 1 FLAG, FIXING/FEEDER SENSOR
10 FB6-3145-000 1 COVER, DRAWER CONNECTOR
11 FF6-2034-000 1 DUCT, CLEANING
12 FB6-3366-000 1 MOUNT, DRAWER CABLE
13 FB6-3839-000 1 SEAL, DUCT
14 FH7-7462-000 1 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER PS5 J709
15 FS5-9760-000 1 SCREW,RS STEPPED,M3
18 RH7-6037-000 2 SWITCH, INTERLOCK MSW5,6
19 FG3-2309-000 1 CABLE, FIXING CROSSMEMBER J562,702,707-709,716
19C VS1-5057-004 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J562
19D VS1-5057-005 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J708
19E VS1-6318-013 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J702
20 FG3-2310-000 1 CABLE, FIXING DRAWER J95,96,800,802
21 FG3-2352-000 1 CABLE, SCANNER, YELLOW J114,608
22 FG3-2353-000 1 CABLE, SCANNER, MAGENTA J116,612
23 FG3-2354-000 1 CABLE, SCANNER, CYAN J118,616
24 FG3-2364-000 1 CABLE, SCANNER, BLACK J120,620
2-23
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
25 VS1-6318-006 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J952
26 FG3-3005-000 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER J510,511,537,1123
28 VS1-5057-002 3 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J537,707
29 WT2-5565-000 5 CLAMP, CABLE
501 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
503 XB2-4231-209 AR SCREW,W/WASHER,M2.3X12
506 XD1-1104-135 AR SHIM
507 XD2-1100-242 AR RING,E
510 XB4-6260-807 AR SCREW,TAPPING,PAN HEAD,M2.6X8
2-24
FIGURE 106
504
S3200,V3200
504
16
SEE FIGURE 310
15
504
504 6
SEE FIGURE
315
504
SEE FIGURE 310
14
13
(J703)
(J701)
504
SEE FIGURE 365
2 5
SEE FIGURE
502
10 504
351,351A
504
504
504
4 504
504
502
SEE FIGURE 810
11 504 SEE FIGURE 560
504
DUPLEX TYPE
505
SEE FIGURE 360
504
9 7
1
8 1
12
8
505 (J442)
(J403)
(J404)
SEE FIGURE 330
2-25
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB6-3679-000 2 BLOCK, FIXING/FEEDER STOP
2 FB6-3933-000 1 ARM, CLICK, REAR
3 FB6-3232-000 1 PLATE, STOP
4 FB6-3932-000 1 ARM, CLICK, FRONT
5 FB6-3316-000 1 PLATE, REGISTRATION STOP
JPN EXCEPT
6 FB6-3526-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED
S3200,V3200
6 FB6-4867-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED JPN S3200,V3200
6 FB6-3527-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED US
6 FB6-3528-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED EURO
6 FB6-3529-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED GENE
8 FB6-3689-000 2 BUSHING, SLIDE SHAFT
9 FB6-3693-000 1 BRACKET, FIXING
10 FF6-2141-000 1 PANEL, DELIVERY, INTERNAL
11 RB1-6484-000 1 STOPPER, OPEN/CLOSE
DUPLEX TYPE
12 FG3-2299-000 1 CABLE, DUPLEXING CONNECT
J403,404,442
15 FB6-4868-000 1 LABEL, POSTCARD SET S3200,V3200
16 FB6-4869-000 1 GUIDE, SIZE FIXING S3200,V3200
502 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
504 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
505 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8 PLAIN TYPE
505 XA9-1401-000 2 SCREW,P,M3X10 DUPLEX TYPE
2-26
FIGURE 107
MACHINE REAR PLATE 1
SEE FIGURE 272 9 2A

504
504 SEE FIGURE 192
SEE FIGURE 271
504 5A 4
3 504
501 (J720)
(SW1) 504 5 (PS28)

(J768)
502
504
7 6
(J10) 504
8
SEE FIGURE 260
SEE FIGURE 251 SEE FIGURE 194
1
504
SEE FIGURE 280
504
504 504
504
SEE FIGURE 270

504 504
(J1105) 504
504 SEE FIGURE 193

SEE FIGURE 190 504
503
SEE FIGURE 981
2-27
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.107 NPN RF MACHINE REAR PLATE 1
1 FB6-3440-000 1 HANDLE, REAR
2 FG6-8956-000 1 DUCT, ELECTRICAL EXHAUST
2A FB6-3169-000 1 DUCT, EXHAUST, SMALL
3 FG3-2345-000 1 MEMORY PCB ASSEMBLY
5 FG3-2383-000 1 CABLE, REGIST. MULTI SENSOR J720,768
6 FG6-9015-000 1 DOUBLE SWITCH PCB ASSEMBLY
7 FH7-6357-000 1 SWITCH, MAIN SW1
8 FG3-2366-000 1 CABLE, MAIN SWITCH J10
9 XA9-1030-000 AR SCREW, RS, M4X12
502 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
504 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
2-28
FIGURE 108
MACHINE REAR PLATE 2
14 501
(J769) 501
(J111)
501 501
501
SEE FIGURE 930
501
3
1
504 501 501
PRINTER
TYPE 505
13 9 501
(J83)
(J561) 11
(J565) 501
503 10A
10C
504 506
(J558)
505 DUPLEX TYPE
(J963)
10B
10 (J962)
(J950) 2
501
503
501
501
SEE FIGURE 980
8 501 12
6
SEE FIGURE 910
502 5 502
501
SEE FIGURE 900
501 501
502
2-29
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.108 NPN RF MACHINE REAR PLATE 2
1 FB6-3109-000 1 SUPPORT, LOWER PANEL
2 FF6-2100-000 1 SUPPORT, RAIL ROTATING
3 FG6-8946-000 1 CABLE, TRANSFER H.V. TERMINAL J83
4 FH2-6552-000 1 COVER, CONNECTOR
5 FB6-3137-000 1 BLOCK, DISPATCHING
6 FB6-3138-000 1 PLATE, HV CONTACT, 1
7 FB6-3156-000 1 PLATE, GROUNDING, 1
8 FH2-9249-000 1 CABLE, SECONDARY TRANSFER HV
9 FG3-2350-000 1 CABLE, READER LATTICE J561,565
10 FG3-2351-000 1 CABLE, C. PEDESTAL LATTICE J558,950,962,963
11 FG6-9671-000 1 DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY DUPLEX TYPE
12 XA9-0782-000 1 SCREW, M4X8
13 FH2-5824-000 1 COVER, CONNECTOR, 1 PRINTER TYPE
14 FG3-2390-000 1 CABLE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNT J111,769
501 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
505 XD1-3100-407 AR WASHER,SPRING
2-30
FIGURE 120
DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
6
4 5
501
8 9
(PS23)
(J811)
(MSW1)
(MSW2)
3
501
2
7
1
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.120 FG6-9013-000 1 DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
1 FB4-3064-000 1 BLOCK, SHAFT PRESSURE
2 FB4-3066-000 1 HOLDER, DOOR SWITCH, FRONT
3 FB6-3216-000 1 HOLDER, DOOR SWITCH SHAFT
4 FB6-3218-000 1 BLOCK, SWITCH PUSH
9 FG6-9015-000 1 DOUBLE SWITCH PCB ASSEMBLY MSW1,2
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
2-31
FIGURE 125
VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (OLD)
4 8
3
19
502
20 5
7
501
21
12
20
17 17 6 13 502
18 18 14
17
17
18 13
18
17 9
6
18
17 16
18
15
10
11
501
2-32
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.125 FG6-9052-000 1 VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY OLD
2 FB6-3557-000 1 GUIDE, VERTICAL PATH RIB
3 FB6-3866-000 2 PIN, LATCH
4 FB6-3867-000 1 LEVER, COVER
5 RB1-6486-000 1 SPRING, COMPRESSION
6 FB4-5967-000 2 FIN, DELIVERY
7 FB6-3547-000 1 GUIDE, VERTICAL PATH DELIVERY
8 FB6-4919-000 1 GUIDE, SPACER
10 FB6-3552-000 1 FLAG, V. PATH DELIVERY SENSOR
12 FB6-3554-000 2 ROLLER, DELIVERY, 1
14 FB6-3876-000 1 ROLLER, VERTICAL PATH DELIVERY
17 FS6-1059-000 8 BUSHING
19 FU3-0325-000 1 GEAR, 17T
20 RS5-1101-000 2 BUSHING, CONDUCTIVE
21 RB1-6666-000 1 ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
502 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-33
FIGURE 125A
VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (NEW)
4 8
3
19
502
20 5
7
501
21
12
20
17 17 6 13 502
18 18 14
17
17
18 13
18
17 9
6
18
17 16
18
15
10
11
501
2-34
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.125A FG6-9655-000 1 VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY NEW
2 FB6-5793-000 1 GUIDE, VERTICAL PATH RIB
3 FB6-3866-000 2 PIN, LATCH
4 FB6-3867-000 1 LEVER, COVER
5 RB1-6486-000 1 SPRING, COMPRESSION
6 FB4-5967-000 2 FIN, DELIVERY
7 FB6-3547-000 1 GUIDE, VERTICAL PATH DELIVERY
8 FB6-4919-000 1 GUIDE, SPACER
10 FB6-3552-000 1 FLAG, V. PATH DELIVERY SENSOR
14 FB6-3876-000 1 ROLLER, VERTICAL PATH DELIVERY
17 FS6-1059-000 8 BUSHING
19 FU3-0325-000 1 GEAR, 17T
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
502 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-35
FIGURE 130
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY
3
4
9
7
21 1
8
6
12 19 10
(J1114)
(J1110)
18 (J1116)
(J3)
16
(J1111) (J1117)
(J2)
502
13
503
11 502
20
503
(J1112) 20
503
20
504 501
15
(J1) 14 503
503 (J1113)
17
2-36
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.130 FG6-8941-000 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY JPN
Fig.130 FG6-8933-000 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY USA
MSN,SSX,QLZ,SLZ,TLZ,
Fig.130 FG6-8934-000 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY UKF,JCK,JBC,JBQ,JCJ,
JAF
Fig.130 FG6-8935-000 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY SSY,RLZ,RQZ,JCL,RQY
1 FB5-2172-000 1 KEY TOP, START
2 FB5-3698-000 1 KEY TOP, RESET
3 FB5-3699-000 1 KEY TOP, POWER SUPPLY
4 FB5-3728-000 1 KEY TOP, ENERGY SAVE
5 FB6-3944-000 1 WINDOW, LAMP
6 FB6-3945-000 1 WINDOW, LAMP
7 FB6-3946-000 1 KEY TOP, STOP
8 FB6-3947-000 1 SHEET, ELECTROSTATIC
9 FB6-3951-000 1 KEY TOP, COUNTER
10 FF6-2104-000 1 KEY TOP, NUMBERS
11 FH2-7037-000 1 CABLE, FLAT J1112
12 FH6-0834-000 1 ANALOG TOUCH PANEL UNIT J1114
13 FG6-8937-000 1 CONTROL PANEL KEY PCB ASSEMBLY
14 FG6-8938-000 1 CONTROL PANEL CPU PCB ASSEMBLY
15 FG6-8939-000 1 C. PANEL INVERTER PCB ASSEMBLY
16 FG6-8936-000 1 LCD CONTROL PANEL UNIT J2,3
17 FG6-9164-000 1 CABLE, C. PANEL INVERTER J1,1113
18 FG6-9165-000 1 CABLE, C. PANEL KEY, A J1111,1117
19 FG6-9166-000 1 CABLE, C. PANEL KEY, B J1110,1116
21 FB6-6213-000 1 LABEL, PAPER SET CAUTION
502 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XB4-5301-007 AR SCREW,P,M3X10
2-37
FIGURE 190
FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
1
501
(J812)
(FM2) 3
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.190 FG6-8968-000 1 FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3167-000 1 DUCT, FIXING EXHAUST FAN
2 FH6-1980-000 1 FAN FM2 J812
501 XB4-5403-507 AR SCREW,P,M4X35
2-38
FIGURE 191
CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
(FM4)
(J716)
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.191 FG6-8995-000 1 CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
1 FH6-1981-000 1 FAN FM4 J716
2-39
FIGURE 192
MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
(J820)
(FM3)
501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.192 FG6-9008-000 1 MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3797-000 1 DUCT, JOINT
2 FH6-1979-000 1 FAN FM3 J820
501 XB4-5403-007 AR SCREW, P M4X30
2-40
FIGURE 193
DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
2 (FM5)
(J700)
1 501
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No.3
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.193 FG6-9065-000 1 DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
1 FH6-1982-000 1 FAN FM5 J700
3 FG3-3973-000 1 CABLE, DELIVERY COOLING FAN SEE NOTE
2-41
FIGURE 194
MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE)
(J721)
(FM6)
501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.194 FG6-9016-000 1 MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY DUPLEX TYPE
1 FH6-1579-000 1 FAN FM6 J721
501 XB4-5403-507 AR SCREW,P,M4X35
2-42
FIGURE 251
DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY
4
(J301)
(J303) (J302)
(J304)
1 (J311) (J309)
(J312) (J310)
(J70M) 2
(J70K)
(J70Y)
(J70C)
(J654)
(J655) (J663)
(J662)
(J661)
(J660)
2-43
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.251 FG6-8964-000 1 DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FG3-2372-000 4 CABLE, CONNECTING J301-304,309-312
2 FG3-2392-000 2 CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE J70M,K
3 FG6-8981-000 1 CABLE, ATR J654,655,660-663
4 RG5-5469-000 4 CONNECTING PCB ASSEMBLY
2-44
FIGURE 260
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 2
(M6)
501
2
(J854)
(J851)
(M7)
3
(J860)
3B
501 1 3A
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.260 FG6-9025-000 1 PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FH6-1972-000 2 MOTOR, STEPPING M6,7 J854,860
2 FU3-0285-000 2 GEAR, 80T/16T
3 FG3-2380-000 1 CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVE J851,854,860
3B WT2-5565-000 1 CLAMP, CABLE
501 XB3-6300-600 AR SCREW,RS,M3X6
2-45
FIGURE 270
DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
502
503
2
501 502
503
(M15)
(J653)
2
502
503
2 502
(M14) 503
(J652)
2
1
(J653)
501 1
(J652)
3B 501 (M13)
(J701) (J651)
(J651)
1
(J650)
3 501
(M12)
(J650)
(J769) (J110)
501 1
3A
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.270 FG6-8966-000 1 DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FH6-1973-000 4 MOTOR, STEPPING M12-15 J650-653
2 FU3-0337-000 4 GEAR, 42T/27T
3 FG3-2326-000 1 CABLE, DEVELOPING DRIVE J110,650-653,701,769
3B WT2-5565-000 1 CLAMP, CABLE
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
502 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
503 XD1-1106-212 AR SHIM
2-46
FIGURE 271
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY
10
506 505
1
11 11
1 504
505
2 4
507
9
507
5
505
8
505 501
506
6
(M1)
505
(J93)
(J814)
505
502
502
2-47
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.271 FG6-9663-020 1 ITB DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FB2-6285-000 2 SHIM
2 FG6-9662-000 1 SWING GEAR ASSEMBLY
3 FH5-1051-000 1 MOTOR, DC BRUSHLESS M1 J93,814
6 FU3-0332-000 1 GEAR, 100T
7 FU3-0333-000 1 GEAR, 30T/60T
8 FU3-0334-000 1 GEAR, 20T/50T
10 FU3-0546-000 1 GEAR, 42T
501 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
502 XB6-7300-607 AR SCREW,TP,M3X6
505 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
506 XD3-2200-182 AR PIN,DOWEL
2-48
FIGURE 272
TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
4
1
12
(J309)
(J310)
(M20) (J668) 14 (J311)
(J669) (M21) (J670) (J301) (J312)
504
(J671) (M22) (J672) 11
(J302)
13A (J673) (M23) (J674) (J303) 5
(J675) (J304)
13 15 505
3 504
(PS1) (J676) 503 11
8 (PS2) (J677)
(PS3) (J678) 5
(PS4) (J679) 505
2 501 3
505
6
506
502
505
7
506 10
9
3
505
3
505
2-49
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.272 FG6-8999-000 4 TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3163-000 1 MOUNT, ANTENNA
2 FH7-7312-000 1 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER PS1-4 J676-679
3 FS5-1581-000 4 BUSHING
4 RG5-5469-000 1 CONNECTING PCB ASSEMBLY
6 FU3-0302-000 1 GEAR, 58T
7 FU3-0303-000 1 GEAR, 30T
8 FU3-0304-000 1 GEAR, 28T/53T
9 FU3-0305-000 1 GEAR, 19T/38T
10 FU3-0306-000 1 GEAR, 19T/49T
11 RB2-7043-000 2 COUPLING
12 VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J668,670,672,674
J669,671,673,675 J676-
13 FG3-2344-000 1 CABLE, TONER CARTRIDGE
679
13A VS1-5057-003 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J669,671,673,675
14 FG3-2372-000 1 CABLE, CONNECTING J301-304 J309-312
15 FG6-9004-000 1 MOTOR, DC BRUSH M20-23 J668,670,672,674
501 XB1-2260-407 AR SCREW BH 2.6X4
502 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
503 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XD2-1100-322 AR RING,E
505 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-50
FIGURE 280
FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
503
1
503
7
8
3
503
6 10 501
2
503 503
5
9
5
503
2
502
4
503
11 10
(M24)
(J813) 501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.280 FG6-9011-040 1 FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 FF6-2044-000 1 ARM, FIXING SWING
2 FS5-6488-000 2 WASHER
4 FU3-0338-000 1 GEAR, 72T
5 FU3-0339-000 2 GEAR, 20T
6 FU3-0340-000 1 GEAR, 36T/18T
7 FU3-0341-000 1 GEAR, 23T
8 FU3-0342-000 1 GEAR, 33T/20T
9 FB6-3237-000 1 WASHER
11 FG6-9079-010 1 MOTOR, STEPPING M24 J813
501 XB6-7300-607 AR SCREW,TP,M3X6
503 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-51
FIGURE 300
CASSETTE
17A
28
501
14
14
17
501
27
5
10
3
21
2
19
6 8
19
21
7
16
22
4 12
502
18
13
15
16 26
25
20
11
23
24 1
9
NOTE : This assembly does not include the parts shown with key No. 26 and 28.
: Key No. 26, 28
2-52
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.300 FG6-9044-000 2 CASSETTE EXCEPT RQY,RQZ
Fig.300 FM1-0350-000 2 CASSETTE RQY,RQZ
1 FB6-3475-000 1 PANEL, CASSETTE, FRONT
2 FB6-3478-000 1 PLATE, SIDE GUIDE, FRONT
3 FB6-3479-000 1 PLATE, SIDE GUIDE, REAR
4 FB6-3480-000 1 PLATE, END GUIDE
5 FB6-3481-000 1 RACK, 1
6 FB6-3482-000 1 RACK, 2
7 FB6-3483-000 1 KNOB, SIDE GUIDE PLATE, 1
8 FB6-3484-000 1 KNOB, SIDE GUIDE PLATE, 2
9 FB6-3485-000 1 COVER, PAPER SIZE SELECT
10 FB6-3486-000 1 PLATE, LIFTER
11 FB6-3487-000 1 BUTTON, PUSH
12 FB6-3488-000 1 ARM, LOCK
13 FB6-3489-000 1 LINK, RELEASE
14 FB6-3490-000 2 CLAW, SIDE PLATE GUIDE
15 FB6-3491-000 1 PLATE, CASSETTE PAPER SIZE
16 FB6-3506-000 2 COLLAR, CASSETTE SWING
17 FF6-2064-000 1 PLATE, PAPER LIFTING
17A FB6-3499-000 1 SHEET, SEPARATION
21 FU3-0293-000 2 GEAR, 16T
22 FU3-0294-000 1 GEAR, 7T
23 FB6-3522-000 1 LABEL, PAPER SET EXCEPT RQY,RQZ
23 FB6-6214-000 1 LABEL, PAPER SET RQY,RQZ
24 FB6-3523-000 1 LABEL, CASSETTE SIZE
25 FB6-3524-000 1 LABEL, PAPER SIZE SELECT EXCEPT RQY,RQZ
25 FB6-6215-000 1 LABEL, PAPER SIZE SELECT RQY,RQZ
26 FC5-0563-000 2 LABEL, CASSETTE SIZE, PANEL SEE NOTE
27 FS6-8116-000 1 LABEL, 'PAPER HEIGHT'
2-53
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
28 FG6-9041-000 1 CASSETTE UNDER SHEET ASSEMBLY SEE NOTE
502 XB6-7300-807 AR SCREW,TP,M3X8
2-54
FIGURE 305
CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY (OPTION)
1
7 (J105)
2A
2
4 (J12) (J815)
3
(J13)
(J1120)
(SW53)
6
(J1120) 2B
5
(J816)
(J11)
(J11)
501
NOTE : These parts are included in the main body.
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.305 NPN RF CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY OPTION 100/220/240V
1 FG3-2381-000 1 CABLE, MACHINE CASSETTE HEATER SEE NOTE 100V J105,815
SEE NOTE 220/240V

1 FG3-2393-000 1 CABLE, MACHINE CASSETTE HEATER
J105,815
2 FG3-2395-000 1 CABLE, CASSETTE HEATER RELAY SEE NOTE J815,1120
2A VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT SEE NOTE J815
2B VS1-5057-003 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT SEE NOTE J1120
3 WC1-5129-000 1 SWITCH, ROCKER SW53
4 FG3-2340-000 1 CABLE, CASSETTE HEATER SWITCH 100V J12,13
4 FG3-2341-000 1 CABLE, CASSETTE HEATER SWITCH 220/240V J12,13
5 FG3-2342-000 1 CABLE, CASSETTE HEATER CONTROL J816,1120
6 FH7-4742-000 1 HEATER, CASSETTE 220/240V J11
7 FG6-9749-000 1 CASSETTE HEATER PCB ASSEMBLY 220/240V
2-55
FIGURE 310
PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY
52 504
503 56
23
53
32 29
504
(PS16,17)
(J858,864) 28
58 30
502
501 (SL3,4)
(J857,863) 56
43 35
27 18
(PS7,19) 19
(J859,865) 40
(PS14,20) 28 50 39
(J856,862) 24
(PS15,18) 45
(J855,861) 49
57 51 11
28 28 46
(J850,852) 39
(J858,864) 44
59 15 47
35 12
(J859,865)
(J857,863) 502 48
30 38
(J855,861) 42
59A 502 20
(J856,862)
16
8
6 4
35 33
10 31
9
37
7 5
54
3
35
504
25 2
13
55 502
36
26 60 22
34
14 17 1
22
505 41
21
2-56
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.310 FG6-9028-070 2 PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3380-000 1 HOLDER, PAPER PICK-UP ROLLER
2 FB6-3386-000 1 GUIDE, RETARD
3 FB6-3387-000 1 GUIDE, VERTICAL PATH
4 FB6-3388-000 1 ROD, SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE
5 FB6-3389-000 1 CLAW, PICK-UP
6 FB6-3390-000 1 CLAW, PAPER PICK-UP
7 FB6-3391-000 1 GEAR, RATCHET
9 FB6-3393-000 1 ARM, PICK-UP
10 FB6-3394-000 1 ARM, LIFTING
11 FB6-3395-000 1 ARM, PAPER FEED SHAFT
12 FB6-3396-010 1 LOCK, PICK-UP
13 FB6-3397-000 1 FLAG, PAPER SENSOR
14 FF6-2363-000 1 FLAG, PAPER DETECT SENSOR
15 FB6-3399-000 1 FLAG, REGISTRATION SENSOR
16 FB6-4852-000 1 ROLLER, VERTICAL PATH
17 FB6-3410-000 1 LIMITER, TORQUE
18 FB6-3402-000 1 GEAR, RATCHET
19 FB6-3403-000 1 COUPLING, FEED SHAFT STOP
20 FB6-3404-000 1 COUPLING, SEPARATION SHAFT
21 FB6-3405-000 1 ROLLER, PAPER PICK-UP
22 FB6-3406-000 2 ROLLER, FEED/SEPARATION
23 FB6-3408-000 1 SHAFT, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVE
24 FB6-3411-000 1 CAM, LOCK
25 FF6-2058-000 1 SHAFT, PAPER FEED ROLLER
26 FF6-2059-000 1 HOLDER, SEPARATION ROLLER
27 FH6-5055-000 1 SOLENOID SL3,4 J857,863
PS7,14-20
28 FH7-7312-000 4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER J859,856,855,858
J864,861,865,862
29 FB6-3413-000 1 COLLAR, PAPER PICK-UP SHAFT
30 FS1-1205-000 2 BUSHING
2-57
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
31 FS5-1597-000 1 BUSHING
32 FS6-1063-000 1 BUSHING
39 FS7-5909-000 2 SHAFT, IDLER, 2
40 FS7-5910-000 1 SHAFT, IDLER, 3
41 FU3-0280-000 1 GEAR, 15T
42 FU3-0349-000 1 GEAR, 41T
43 FU3-0282-000 1 GEAR, 21T
44 FU3-0283-000 1 GEAR, 21T
45 FU3-0284-000 1 GEAR, 16T
46 FU3-0352-000 1 GEAR, 16T/16T
47 FU3-0288-000 1 GEAR, 21T
48 FU3-0289-000 1 GEAR, 14T
49 FU3-0290-000 1 GEAR, 46T
50 FU3-0291-000 1 GEAR, 51T
51 FU3-0292-000 1 GEAR, 42T
52 FU3-0350-000 1 GEAR, 41T/41T
53 FU3-0347-000 1 GEAR, 41T
54 RB1-6539-000 1 DAMPER
55 RB1-8945-000 1 JOINT
56 RS5-1567-000 2 BUSHING
58 XA9-0656-000 1 SCREW,RS,M3X10
J850,855-859 J852,861-
59 FG3-2302-000 1 CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP
865
60 FS1-1213-000 1 BUSHING
501 XB3-6300-600 AR SCREW,RS,M3X6
2-58
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
502 XB4-5401-207 AR SCREW,P,M4X12
503 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
505 XB1-3300-607 AR SCREW,MACH.,C.S.HEAD,M3X6
2-59
FIGURE 315
MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY
501 77
B 83
503
79 78
504
501
A
502 84
16 82 52 SEE FIGURE 316
44
52
44
20
31
55
17 55
10 2
19
51 B
510 54
48
7 50 3
88
6
A
58
512
5
41
81
26
48
21 510
61 51
11 12
18
40
(PS26)
41
5
(J764) 512
(OHP1,2) 59
73 (J765,766)
NOTE : This assembly includes the assembly shown in Figure 316.
: Figure 316
2-60
501
1 39
4 (J762) 64
34A 40
501 (PS10)
38 (SL1) 67 35 36 80
(J760)
33
(M9)
(J761)
(M8) 34A
(J763)
28
34
501
508 57
63 9 8
38
D C 27 512
62 29
56 35
501
DUPLEX TYPE 14 37
510 65
513 66 30
68
512 13
60 88
7
510 32
71 46
43
504 47
510 72
65
513
510
43 C
75A 75B
42
(J762)
68
D (J756)
76
70
75
(J757)
(J760) 514
87 (J755) (J761) 76A 15
74
86 (J763) 515
(J766) 23 69
(J764)
516
87 (J765) 49
508
85 501
86 44
52 504
25 25
22
501 44 516 24
52
DUPLEX TYPE
2-61
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.315 FG6-9080-000 1 MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY PLAIN TYPE SEE NOTE
DUPLEX TYPE EXCEPT

Fig.315 FG6-9081-000 1 MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY
RQY,RQZ SEE NOTE
DUPLEX TYPE RQY,RQZ

Fig.315 FM1-0354-000 1 MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY
SEE NOTE
1 FB6-3314-000 1 DUCT, CORD
2 FB6-3472-000 1 PANEL, BLANKING
5 FA1-0056-000 2 BUSHING
7 XG9-0211-000 2 BALL BEARING, MF128ZZ1MC3D4M
8 FB1-8581-000 1 ROLLER, PAPER PICK-UP
9 FB5-0873-000 1 ROLLER, SEPARATION
10 FB6-4849-000 1 ROLLER, REGISTRATION, LOWER
11 FB6-3302-000 1 SHEET, REGISTRATION, LOWER
12 FB6-3303-000 1 FLAG, REGISTRATION SENSOR
13 FB6-4850-000 1 ROLLER, REGISTRATION, FRONT
15 FB6-3306-000 1 GUIDE, INLET
16 FB6-3308-000 1 GUIDE, REGISTRATION, UPPER
17 FB6-3309-000 1 ROLLER, REGISTRATION, UPPER
18 FB6-3310-000 1 LEVER, PRESSURE, FRONT
19 FB6-3311-000 1 LEVER, PRESSURE, REAR
20 FB6-3313-000 2 ROLLER, PAPER FEED
22 FB6-3320-000 1 GUIDE, DUPLEXING, EXTERNAL DUPLEX TYPE
23 FB6-4851-000 1 ROLLER, RE-PICK UP DUPLEX TYPE
24 FB6-3323-000 1 GUIDE, DUPLEXING, INTERNAL DUPLEX TYPE
25 FB6-4873-000 2 ROLLER, PAPER FEED DUPLEX TYPE
26 FB6-3317-000 1 SHEET, REGISTRATION, LOWER
27 FB6-3410-000 1 LIMITER, TORQUE
28 FF6-2136-000 1 SHAFT, ROLLER
29 FB6-3463-000 1 CLUTCH
2-62
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
30 FB6-3464-000 1 HOLDER, SEPARATION ROLLER
31 FB6-3465-000 1 ARM, LIFTING PLATE PRESSURE
32 FB6-3466-000 1 CAM, JOINT
33 FB6-3467-000 1 GEAR, 27T
34 FF6-2134-000 1 GUIDE, MAIN
34A FB6-3878-000 2 SHEET, PUSH-ON
35 FB6-3470-000 2 GUIDE, SUB
36 FB6-3471-000 1 FLAG, PAPER SENSOR
37 FF6-2065-000 1 SHAFT, SEPARATION ROLLER
39 FH6-5053-000 1 SOLENOID SL1 J762
40 FH7-7312-000 2 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER PS10,26 J760,764
42 FS5-1209-000 1 BUSHING
43 FS1-1512-000 2 BUSHING DUPLEX TYPE
44 FS5-1595-000 4 BLOCK, ROLLER PLAIN TYPE
44 FS5-1595-000 6 BLOCK, ROLLER DUPLEX TYPE
46 FS5-1597-000 1 BUSHING
47 FS5-6945-000 2 COLLAR, REGISTRATION MULTI
48 FS6-1055-000 2 BUSHING
49 FS6-1057-000 1 BUSHING DUPLEX TYPE
50 FS6-1058-000 1 BUSHING
52 FS7-2860-000 4 SPRING, COMPRESSION PLAIN TYPE
52 FS7-2860-000 6 SPRING, COMPRESSION DUPLEX TYPE
58 FU3-0270-000 1 GEAR, 63T
59 FU3-0271-000 1 GEAR, 32T
60 FU3-0272-000 1 GEAR, 23T/75T
2-63
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
61 FU3-0273-000 1 GEAR, 28T
62 FU3-0274-000 1 GEAR, 43T/31T
63 FU3-0275-000 1 GEAR, 39T/26T
64 FU3-0276-000 1 GEAR, 25T
65 FU3-0277-000 2 GEAR, 16T DUPLEX TYPE
66 FU3-0278-000 2 GEAR, 23T DUPLEX TYPE
67 FU3-0295-000 1 GEAR, 44T
68 FU3-0296-000 2 GEAR, 24T
69 FU3-0297-000 1 GEAR, 36T
70 FU3-0298-000 1 GEAR, 27T/18T
71 RB1-2152-000 1 ROLLER, ARM
72 RB2-5850-000 2 PRISM
73 RH7-7129-000 2 OHT SENSOR UNIT OHP1,2 J765,766
74 RS5-1567-000 1 BUSHING
75 FG3-2303-000 1 CABLE, REGIST. MULTI, 1 J755-757,761-766
76 FG3-2304-000 1 CABLE, REGIST. MULTI, 2 J757,760
77 FB6-3473-000 1 PANEL, REGIST. MULTI, RIGHT
78 FB6-3474-000 1 BUTTON, REGIST. MULTI PUSH
80 FB6-4938-000 1 PLATE, SHEET SUPPORT
81 FB6-3858-000 1 LABEL, SAFETY OPERATION EXCEPT RQZ,RQY
81 FB6-6217-000 1 LABEL, SAFETY OPERATION RQZ,RQY
82 FB6-3859-000 1 LABEL, JAM PAPER EXCEPT RQZ,RQY
82 FB6-6218-000 1 LABEL, JAM PAPER RQZ,RQY
83 FB6-3863-000 1 LABEL, MULTI HANDLE
84 FB6-3864-000 1 LABEL, GUIDE HANDLE
85 FB6-4863-000 1 HOLDER, CONNECTOR
2-64
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
88 FB2-6285-000 2 SHIM
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
502 XB4-5301-007 AR SCREW,P,M3X10
503 XB4-5401-007 AR SCREW,P,M4X10
508 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
510 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
512 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
516 XD2-1100-282 AR RING,E
2-65
FIGURE 316
MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY
501
12
(PS9)
9
(J759)
(J758)
13
(J756)
7
10 (J758)
11 502
14
6 501
NOTE : This assembly is included in the assembly shown in Figure 315.
: Figure 315
2-66
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.316 FG6-9042-000 1 MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY SEE NOTE
1 FB6-3450-000 1 TRAY, MULTI FEEDER, UPPER
2 FB6-3451-000 1 TRAY, MULTI FEEDER, LOWER
3 FB6-3452-000 1 TRAY, SECOND
4 FB6-3454-000 1 RACK, SIDE PLATE, REAR
5 FB6-3455-000 1 RACK, SIDE PLATE, FRONT
6 FB6-3456-000 1 GEAR, 46T/20T
7 FB6-3457-000 1 RACK
9 FB6-3459-000 1 BLOCK, SIDE REGIST. ADJUSTING
10 FG3-2301-000 1 CABLE, MULTI TRAY J756,758,759
11 FB6-3508-000 1 ROLLER, PAPER DETECT
12 FB6-4937-000 1 SHEET, SEPARATION
14 FH7-7600-010 1 SLIDE VOLUME SENSOR UNIT J759
501 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
502 XD1-1106-235 AR SHIM
2-67
FIGURE 321
PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY
502
3
502
4
502
7 2
503
504
501
7
1
501 503
504
(J964)
9
501
(J965)
(TPS1)
(J960) 6
501
9 5A
8
5B
(J952)
(J951)
5A
10
(J964)
10A (J957) 5
(J960)
10A
(J959)
(J965)
2-68
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.321 FG6-8960-000 1 PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3273-000 1 COVER, REGISTRATION SENSOR
2 FB6-3291-000 1 CAM, RELEASE, 1
3 FB6-3292-000 1 CAM, RELEASE, 2
4 FB6-3293-000 1 LEVER, RELEASE
5 FF6-2046-000 1 HOLDER, CLEANING
5A FB6-3275-000 2 PAD UNIT, CLEANING
5B RB2-6925-000 1 BRUSH, CLEANING
6 FH7-7601-000 1 SALT SENSOR UNIT TPS1 J960
9 FG3-2315-000 2 REGIST. SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY J964,965
J951,952,957,959,960
10 FG3-2318-000 1 CABLE, REGIST. PAPER DETECT
J964,965
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
502 XB6-7300-607 AR SCREW,TP,M3X6
503 XD1-1104-135 AR SHIM
504 XD2-1100-322 AR RING,E
2-69
FIGURE 330
FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE)
502
508
26
505 12
2
507 502
1
13 502
28
502
19
29 25 A
31
21
17
508 506 504
18
27
505 503
10
9
20 7
502
23 504 11
22
503
502 7
15 A 18
14
502 506
4
8
501
506 502
5 502
24
30
15 6
16
502
3
SEE FIGURE 350
2-70
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.330 NPN RF FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY PLAIN TYPE
1 FB6-3579-000 1 ARM, SWING
2 FB6-3588-000 1 SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, 1
3 FB6-3600-000 1 PIN, ADJUSTMENT
5 FB6-3683-000 1 COVER, PAPER FEED
6 FB6-3684-000 1 LEVER, CLICK, FRONT
7 FB6-3686-000 2 PIN, SLIDE
8 FB6-3698-000 1 PLATE, FIXING POSITIONING
9 FB6-4908-000 1 LEVER, CLICK, REAR
10 FB6-4918-000 1 ROLLER, LEVER, REAR
11 XA9-1412-000 1 NUT,HEX,M5
12 FB6-3694-000 1 DUCT, CONNECTING, UPPER
13 FB6-3695-000 1 DUCT, CONNECTING, LOWER
15 FF6-2081-000 2 SHAFT, DELIVERY OPEN/CLOSE
17 FS1-1465-000 1 BUSHING
18 FS5-6948-000 2 COLLAR, RAIL
19 FS5-6950-000 1 COLLAR
22 FF6-2143-000 1 PLATE, ADJUSTMENT
26 FU3-0312-000 1 GEAR, 30T
27 FU3-0313-000 1 GEAR, 20T
28 FU3-0314-000 1 GEAR, 15T
29 FU3-0315-000 1 GEAR, 15T
30 FB6-3934-000 1 ROLLER, LEVER, FRONT
31 RB1-6653-000 1 SHAFT, GEAR
2-71
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
502 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
503 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
504 XD2-2300-602 AR RING,TOOTHED LOCK
506 XD2-1100-322 AR RING,E
507 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
508 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
2-72
FIGURE 350
FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE)
16
18
503
12
502
13
503
11
15
B
6 502
A
22
22
5 19
22 8
20
502
504
21
3
C
2
501
502
A
C 9
4
10
1
23
17 14
503
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.350 FG6-9068-000 1 FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY PLAIN TYPE
2-73
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB6-3610-000 1 HOOK, DELIVERY, FRONT
2 FB6-3611-000 1 HOOK, DELIVERY, REAR
3 FB6-3612-000 1 KNOB, DELIVERY
4 FB6-3700-000 1 PANEL, DELIVERY
5 FB6-3702-000 1 GUIDE, FIXING DELIVERY
6 FB6-3703-000 1 DEFLECTOR, FACE-UP
7 FB6-3935-000 1 ROLLER, DELIVERY
9 FB6-3706-000 1 DUCT, DELIVERY, UPPER
10 FB6-3707-000 1 DUCT, DELIVERY, LOWER
11 FS5-6946-000 1 ROLLER, 2
12 FS7-0128-000 1 GEAR, 32T
15 FU3-0301-000 1 GEAR, 16T/13T
16 FU3-0317-000 1 GEAR, 21T
17 RS5-1060-000 1 BUSHING
19 FB6-3846-000 1 LABEL, FIXING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
20 FB6-3847-000 1 LABEL, FIXING LEVER OPEN/CLOSE
21 FB6-3848-000 1 LABEL, FIXING JAM
22 FB6-3936-000 3 PAD
23 FB6-6222-000 1 COVER, PROTECTION
501 XB6-7400-607 AR SCREW,TP,M4X6
502 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
503 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-74
FIGURE 351
DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (OLD)
(J710)
36 14
(J703) 32
(J706) 14
(J712) (J711) 506
(J701)
5
(J705) 506
13 A
7
(J704)
17 20 26
16 (PS8)
502 (J710) 20
20
A
20
(PS12)
23 (J711) 506
35 (M11) 22
(J705) 19 17 37 8
504 3
29 17 4
11
12 2
(PS6) 30
(J706) 8
501
(M10) 503
16 (J704)
502
28
25 15 505
24
29 1
(PS13)
(J712)
502 27 18
17
9 21
18
27 31
9 21
6
10
2-75
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.351 FG6-9050-000 1 DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASS'Y OLD
1 FF5-6279-000 1 PIN, GUIDE
2 FB5-4896-000 4 HOLDER, ROLLER
3 FB5-9570-000 4 ROLLER, FACEDOWN
4 FB5-9803-000 4 RING
6 FB6-3875-000 2 ROLLER, REVERSE
7 FB6-3534-000 1 FLAG, DELIVERY SENSOR
8 FB6-3877-000 2 COLLAR
9 FF6-2145-000 4 ROLLER,DELIVERY FEEDER
10 FB6-3541-000 1 GUIDE, INLET
11 FB6-3544-000 1 ARM, SENSOR
14 FF6-2131-000 2 PLATE, PAPER FULL SENSOR
15 FF6-2070-000 1 GUIDE, PAPER FEED
PS6,8,12,13
17 FH7-7312-000 4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
J706,710,711,712
18 FS1-1187-000 2 BUSHING
19 FS2-1544-000 1 BUSHING
20 FS5-0353-000 4 GEAR, 22T
21 FS5-3989-000 2 PULLEY, 32T
22 FU3-0319-000 1 GEAR, 16T
23 FU3-0322-000 1 GEAR, 17T/51T
24 FU3-0323-000 1 GEAR, 28T
25 FU3-0324-000 1 GEAR, 31T/17T
27 FB6-3897-000 4 RETAINER, FEEDER ROLLER
28 RS5-1324-000 1 BUSHING
31 XF9-0736-000 1 BELT, TIMING
2-76
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
32 FG3-2311-000 1 CABLE, DELIVERY PATH J701,703-706,710-712
35 XA9-0724-000 2 SCREW,RS,M3X8
36 FB6-3869-000 1 FLAG, PAPER FULL SENSOR
37 FB6-3874-000 1 ROLLER, FACE-DOWN DELIVERY
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
502 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
503 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
505 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
506 XD2-1100-242 AR RING,E
2-77
FIGURE 351A
DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (NEW)
36 14
(J710)
(J703) 32 14
(J706) 506
5
(J712) (J711) 506
(J701)
(J705) 13 A
7
26
(J704)
A
(PS12)
(J711) 506
22
19 17 37 8
4 3
4
2
30
8
(J1125)
503
28 42
501 505
17
(J1126)
(PS6)
11 (J706) 48
12
48A
507
503 (FM8)
(J1126)
503 43
503
49
510
503 508
50
(PS13) 503
(J712) 509
502 17
503
15
2-78
16 (PS8) 17 20
502 (J710) 20
20
20
(M11) 23
35
(J705)
504
45
501
(M10)
16 (J704)
502
15
25
24
45 41
46 A
40
45
21
B
44
A 47
6
47 46
40
45
31
21
38
41
46
40
44
B 47
47 46
40
39
2-79
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.351A FG6-9654-000 1 DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASS'Y NEW
2 FB5-4896-000 4 HOLDER, ROLLER
3 FB6-5796-000 4 ROLLER, PAPER DELIVERY
4 FB5-9803-000 8 RING
6 FB6-5781-000 2 ROLLER, REVERSE
7 FB6-3534-000 1 FLAG, DELIVERY SENSOR
8 FB6-3877-000 2 COLLAR
11 FB6-3544-000 1 ARM, SENSOR
14 FF6-2131-000 2 PLATE, PAPER FULL SENSOR
15 FF6-2344-000 1 GUIDE, PAPER FEED
PS6,8,12,13
J706,710,711,712
19 FS2-1544-000 1 BUSHING
20 FS5-0353-000 4 GEAR, 22T
21 FS5-3989-000 2 PULLEY, 32T
22 FU3-0319-000 1 GEAR, 16T
23 FU3-0322-000 1 GEAR, 17T/51T
24 FU3-0323-000 1 GEAR, 28T
25 FU3-0324-000 1 GEAR, 31T/17T
28 RS5-1324-000 1 BUSHING
32 FG3-2311-000 1 CABLE, DELIVERY PATH J701,703-706,710-712
35 XA9-0724-000 2 SCREW,RS,M3X8
36 FB6-3869-000 1 FLAG, PAPER FULL SENSOR
37 FB6-3874-000 1 ROLLER, FACE-DOWN DELIVERY
38 FB6-5786-000 1 GUIDE, INLET, UPPER
39 FB6-5787-000 1 GUIDE, INLET, LOWER
2-80
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
40 FB6-5790-000 4 BUSHING
41 FB6-5791-000 2 PLATE, STATIC ELIMINATOR
42 FB6-5792-000 1 DUCT, VERTICAL PATH FAN
43 FB6-5795-000 1 SHEET, CABLE RETAINER
44 FF6-2345-000 2 ROLLER, SLAVE
45 FS6-1067-000 4 BUSHING
48 FG3-3010-000 1 CABLE, VERTICAL PATH FAN J1125,1126
49 FH6-1984-000 1 FAN FM8 J1126
50 XZ9-0556-000 1 BUSHING
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
502 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
503 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
505 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
506 XD2-1100-242 AR RING,E
508 XD1-1104-635 AR SHIM
509 XZ1-1300-605 AR SPACER
510 XB6-7300-805 AR SCREW,TP,M3X8
2-81
FIGURE 360
DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE)
502 30
509
58
512
14 503
(M26)
(J408)
501 35 508
8
B 68
71 60
44
61
62 31
55 507
16 39
505 509
503 (J406) 59 38
512
79 (J407)
504
(J414)
507 64 (PS22) 73
43 510 78A
501
27 26 78
20 505
50 502 505 72
B 76
505 77
(M25)
(J413)
74
32 28
501 53 510
503 52
505 26
6 43
22 38 502
507 507
7 506
(PS21) 21
(J409) 54
23 505 24
511 29 501
51
503 502
19 501
503
48 504 40
37 70
SEE FIGURE 361
(SL5) 25
(J412)
33
503
NOTE : This assembly includes the assembly shown in Figure 361.
: Figure 361
2-82
9
49
34
513
49
41
1 513
63
508 63 1
508 41
2 17 18
5 63
508
46 508
4 63
508
507 (J411)
508 63
(CL2)
2 36
508 63 67
5 47
66 508
45
56
42
15 57
68 13
A 505
15 A
46
3 12
505
68 11 (J410)
505 (CL1)
57
10 (J406) 508 5
36 45 2
507 65
(J411) 5
2
69A 69
(J408) 69B
(J413)
(J409) (J407)
69A
(J410)
69A
(J412)
2-83
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
DUPLEX TYPE EXCEPT

Fig.360 FG6-9058-000 1 DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY
RQZ,RQY SEE NOTE
DUPLEX TYPE RQY,RQZ

Fig.360 FM1-0352-000 1 DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY
SEE NOTE
2 FB6-3572-000 4 SHAFT, DUPLEXING IDLER
3 FB6-3888-000 1 ROLLER, DUPLEXING FEEDER, 1
5 FB6-3576-000 4 SPACER
6 FB6-3577-000 1 HOLDER, DUPLEXING SENSOR
7 FB6-3578-000 1 FLAG, DUPLEXING SENSOR
8 FB6-3579-000 1 ARM, SWING
9 FB6-3580-000 1 GUIDE, DUPLEXING OPEN/CLOSE
10 FB6-3581-000 1 GUIDE, DUPLEXING, UPPER
14 FB6-3588-000 1 SHAFT, IDLER GEAR, 1
15 FB6-3589-000 2 GUIDE, DUPLEXING AUXILIARY
16 FB6-3590-000 1 SUPPORT, DRAWER CABLE
19 FB6-3595-000 1 LINK, SOLENOID, 1
20 FB6-4908-000 1 LEVER, CLICK, REAR
21 FF6-2147-000 1 PANEL, EX. DELIVERY FIX, FRONT
22 FB6-3599-000 1 PANEL, DELIVERY, REAR
23 FB6-3600-000 1 PIN, ADJUSTMENT
25 FB6-3684-000 1 LEVER, CLICK, FRONT
26 FB6-3686-000 2 PIN, SLIDE
27 FB6-4918-000 1 ROLLER, LEVER, REAR
28 XA9-1412-000 1 NUT,HEX,M5
29 FB6-3698-000 1 PLATE, FIXING POSITIONING
2-84
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
30 FB6-3880-000 1 DUCT, JOINT
31 FB6-3728-000 1 LINK, DELIVERY OPEN/CLOSE
33 FF6-2081-000 1 SHAFT, DELIVERY OPEN/CLOSE
34 FB6-3893-000 1 LABEL, DUPLEXING HANDLE
35 FH6-1974-000 1 MOTOR, STEPPING M26 J408
36 FH6-5052-000 2 CLUTCH, ELECTRO-MAGNETIC CL1,2 J410,411
37 FH6-5056-000 1 SOLENOID SL5 J412
39 FS1-1465-000 1 BUSHING
40 FB6-3934-000 1 ROLLER, LEVER, FRONT
41 FS5-1595-000 6 BLOCK, ROLLER
42 FS5-3989-000 1 PULLEY, 32T
43 FS5-6948-000 2 COLLAR, RAIL
44 FS5-6950-000 1 COLLAR
45 FS6-3001-000 2 PULLEY, 28T/GEAR, 35T
46 FS6-3002-000 2 PULLEY, 28T/GEAR, 24T
47 FS6-3003-000 1 PULLEY, 32T
51 FB6-3964-000 1 PLATE, POSITIONING, FRONT
52 FF6-2143-000 1 PLATE, ADJUSTMENT
56 FU3-0310-000 1 GEAR, 35T/24T
57 FU3-0311-000 2 GEAR, 35T
58 FU3-0312-000 1 GEAR, 30T
59 FU3-0313-000 1 GEAR, 20T
60 FU3-0314-000 1 GEAR, 15T
61 FU3-0315-000 1 GEAR, 15T
2-85
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
62 RB1-6653-000 1 SHAFT, GEAR
64 VS1-6920-025 1 CONNECTOR, 25P, MALE J406
69 FG3-2312-000 1 CABLE, DUPLEXING J406-413
69A VS1-5057-002 3 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT J410-412
71 FG3-3002-000 1 CABLE, GROUNDING
72 FB6-3629-020 1 RACK, SLIDE
73 FB6-3630-000 1 FLAG, REG. SENSOR
74 FH6-1253-020 1 MOTOR, STEPPING, DC24V M25 J413
77 FU3-0318-000 1 GEAR, 36T/12T
78 FG3-2313-000 1 CABLE, SIDE REGIST. SENSOR J407,414
79 FG6-9060-000 1 SIDE REGISTRATION DETECT UNIT
503 XB3-6400-800 AR SCREW,RS,M4X8
505 XB4-5400-807 AR SCREW,P,M4X8
506 XD1-1104-135 AR SHIM
507 XD2-1100-322 AR RING,E
508 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
509 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
511 XD3-1300-102 AR PIN,SPRING
2-86
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
513 XD2-1100-282 AR RING,E
2-87
FIGURE 361
EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX
TYPE)
503
43
38
19 506
501
42
21
44
38
506
26
26
24 33
18
26 23
17 25
37 508 502
26 41
24B 504
30
503
501
36
504 4
34
10 505
504 A 27
41
22
35
26
32 28 40
A 26
504
12
508
1 5
31 26
509 503
31
9 29
15 2
45 32 2
41 504 29
509
16
3
39
6 16 14
7
20 13
503
11 8
6
NOTE : This assembly is included in the assembly shown in Figure 360.
: Figure 360
2-88
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
DUPLEX TYPE EXCEPT

Fig.361 FG6-9059-000 1 EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASS'Y
RQY,RQZ SEE NOTE
DUPLEX TYPE RQY,RQZ

Fig.361 FM1-0351-000 1 EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASS'Y
SEE NOTE
1 FB6-3604-000 1 PANEL, EXTERNAL DELIVERY
4 FB6-4862-000 1 ROLLER, INTERNAL DELIVERY
5 FB6-3602-000 1 ROLLER, EXTERNAL DELIVERY
6 FB6-3603-000 2 PIN, ROLLER HOLDING
7 FB6-3606-000 1 GUIDE, EXTERNAL DELIV., LOWER
8 FF6-2117-000 1 HOLDER, EXTERNAL DELIV. ROLLER
9 FB6-3610-000 1 HOOK, DELIVERY, FRONT
10 FB6-3611-000 1 HOOK, DELIVERY, REAR
11 FB6-3613-000 1 ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE
13 FB6-3618-000 1 LINK, SOLENOID, 2
14 FF6-2118-000 1 DEFLECTOR, FACE-UP/DUPLEX
15 FB6-3620-000 1 SHAFT, FU/DUPLEX DEFLECTOR
16 FB6-3621-000 2 ROLLER, EXTERNAL DELIVERY
17 FB6-3623-000 1 LINK, DEFLECTOR
18 FB6-3626-000 1 LINK, FACE-UP DEFLECTOR, 2
19 FB6-3729-000 1 GUIDE, EXTERNAL DELIV., UPPER
20 FB6-3843-000 4 PIN, ROLLER HOLDING
21 FB6-3846-000 1 LABEL, FIXING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE EXCEPT RQY,RQZ
21 FB6-6216-000 1 LABEL, FIXING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE RQY,RQZ
22 FB6-3847-000 1 LABEL, FIXING LEVER OPEN/CLOSE
23 FB6-3848-000 1 LABEL, FIXING JAM
24 FF6-2075-030 1 GUIDE, FACE-UP FIXING
24B FB6-3617-000 1 SHEET, DUPLEXING REVERSE
25 FB6-3627-000 1 DAMPER, DUCT, 2
26 FB6-3586-000 10 DAMPER, NOISE INSULATION
27 FF6-2116-000 1 GUIDE, EXTERNAL DELIV., LOWER
2-89
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
28 FB6-3612-000 1 KNOB, DELIVERY
29 FS5-1595-000 2 BLOCK, ROLLER
30 FS7-0128-000 1 GEAR, 32T
34 FU3-0277-000 1 GEAR, 16T
36 FU3-0316-000 1 GEAR, 13T
37 FU3-0317-000 1 GEAR, 21T
38 RB2-0493-000 30 ROLLER, PAPER SENSOR
39 RB9-0255-000 1 ROLLER
40 RS5-1060-000 1 BUSHING
42 FB6-3622-000 1 DEFLECTOR, FACE-UP, DUPLEXING
43 FB6-3892-000 6 ROLLER, FACE-UP DEFLECTOR
44 FF6-2128-000 1 SHAFT, FACE-UP DEFLECTOR
45 FB6-6222-000 1 COVER, PROTECTION
501 XD2-1100-402 AR RING,E
503 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
508 XB6-7400-607 AR SCREW,TP,M4X6
509 XD2-1100-282 AR RING,E
2-90
FIGURE 365
MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASSEMBLY
21
501 7 25
17 501
26
26
1A
1B
(J404) DUPLEX TYPE
501 1
29A 16
(J403)
22
(J406)
2 27 29
504 (J752)
501
(J405) 15
1C
(J754)
2
18 DUPLEX TYPE (PS11)

10 (J754)
19
24
19
3
(PS24) 503
(J405)
DUPLEX TYPE
12
DUPLEX TYPE
501 6
9
11 14
13
28
501 501 4
8
DUPLEX TYPE
501
23
2-91
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.365 FG6-9021-000 1 MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASS'Y PLAIN TYPE
Fig.365 FG6-9022-000 1 MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASS'Y DUPLEX TYPE
1 FG3-2306-000 1 CABLE, DUPLEXING DRAWER DUPLEX TYPE J403-406
1A VS1-6318-004 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT DUPLEX TYPE J404
1B VS1-6319-026 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT DUPLEX TYPE J403
1C VS1-6919-025 1 CONNECTOR, DRAWER DUPLEX TYPE J406
2 FS5-6955-000 2 SPACER DUPLEX TYPE
3 FB6-3346-000 1 FLAG, OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
4 FB6-3348-000 1 HOOK, REGISTRATION, FRONT
5 FB6-3349-000 1 HOOK, REGISTRATION, REAR
6 FB6-3350-000 1 SHAFT, HOOK
7 FB6-3351-000 1 LEVER, RELEASE
8 FB6-3356-000 1 GUIDE, RE-PICK UP, UPPER DUPLEX TYPE
9 FB6-3357-000 1 GUIDE, RE-PICK UP, LOWER DUPLEX TYPE
10 FB6-3358-000 1 SUPPORT, DUPLEXING SENSOR DUPLEX TYPE
11 FB6-3359-000 1 FLAG, RE-PICK UP SENSOR DUPLEX TYPE
12 FB6-3360-000 1 SPRING, TORSION DUPLEX TYPE
13 FB6-3361-000 1 SPRING, TORSION DUPLEX TYPE
14 FB6-3864-000 1 LABEL, GUIDE HANDLE DUPLEX TYPE
15 FF6-2054-000 1 SUPPORT, OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
16 FF6-2101-000 1 RAIL, FRONT
17 FF6-2102-000 1 RAIL, REAR
18 FF6-2129-000 1 SUPPORT, FEEDER POSITIONING
DUPLEX TYPE PS11,24

J754,405
19 FH7-7312-000 1 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER PLAIN TYPE PS11 J754
22 FS5-9758-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M3 DUPLEX TYPE
27 FS7-2796-000 2 SPRING, COMPRESSION DUPLEX TYPE
2-92
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
28 RB1-2152-000 1 ROLLER, ARM
29 FG3-2305-000 1 CABLE, RAIL MOUNT J752,754
501 XB3-6300-800 AR SCREW,RS,M3X8
503 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
504 XD1-1104-137 AR SHIM
2-93
FIGURE 460
LASER UNIT
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No. 1.
Key No. 1
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.460 FG6-8962-000 4 LASER UNIT
Fig.460 FM1-0357-000 1 LASER UNIT
SEE NOTE EXCEPT

RQZ,RQY
1 FS7-8335-000 4 LABEL, LASER WARNING SEE NOTE RQZ,RQY
SEE NOTE EXCEPT

1 RU5-8126-000 4 LABEL, LASER WARNING
RQZ,RQY
2-94
FIGURE 535
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY
11
25
20
503 508
15
27 37 10
506 507
504
29 26 27
507
22 20
17
30 36 B
34 35
32
31
16
27
502 11 507 505
502 6 21
502 503 504
33 506
503 507 505
20
503 10 507
502 26
14 25
20
506 B
23 9
507 19 506
24
18
4
507 6 A 503
511 C 13
5 503
19 503
12
2
503 18
511 507
5
507 C
A 4 511 503
507
7 8
503
1
3
501
503
503 28
501
2-95
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.535 FG6-8942-060 1 INTER. TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-2930-000 1 BELT, TRANSFER
2 FB6-6380-000 1 ROLLER, TENSION
3 FB6-2934-000 1 ROLLER, TRANSFER, 2
4 FB6-2936-000 2 BUSHING
5 FB6-2938-000 2 COLLAR, LIMIT
6 FB6-2939-000 4 PLATE, CONTACT
7 FB6-2940-000 1 COVER, BELT
9 FB6-2942-000 1 HANDLE, FRONT
10 FB6-2944-000 4 BUSHING
11 FB6-2945-000 4 BUSHING
14 FB6-2951-000 1 COVER, GEAR
15 FB6-2957-000 1 ROLLER
17 FB6-2974-000 1 SCRAPER
18 FS6-1062-000 2 BUSHING
22 FU3-0266-040 1 GEAR, 42T
23 FU3-0267-000 1 GEAR, 18T
24 FU3-0268-000 1 GEAR, 40T
25 FB6-6545-000 4 ROLLER, TRANSFER
28 FG3-2365-000 1 CABLE, VARISTOR
29 FB6-2953-000 1 HOLDER, CONTACT
30 FB6-2954-000 4 CONTACT
31 FB6-2955-000 4 PLATE, SUPPORT SPRING
2-96
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
33 FG3-2320-000 1 CABLE, HV, YELLOW
34 FG3-2321-000 1 CABLE, HV, MAGENTA
35 FG3-2367-000 1 CABLE, HV, CYAN
36 FG3-2368-000 1 CABLE, HV, BLACK
37 FB6-2931-000 1 ROLLER, DRIVE
503 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
504 XD1-1106-212 AR SHIM
505 XD1-1108-225 AR SHIM
506 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
507 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
511 XD1-1108-212 AR SHIM
2-97
FIGURE 537
TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY
4
501 502
3
6
2
3
501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.537 FG6-8989-000 1 TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY
1 FS5-6957-000 1 WASHER, WAVE
2 FB6-3113-000 1 COVER, CLEANING
3 FF6-2032-000 2 SUPPORT, BLADE SWING
6 XA9-0624-000 9 SCREW,M3X4
502 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
2-98
FIGURE 560
SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
9 12G
501
9
12
12F
12D
12E
12B
12D
9
501
12A
9
12E
504
7A 4
11 502
1
10
8
10
502
2-99
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.560 FG6-8993-000 1 SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3135-000 1 PLATE, HV CONTACT, 2
3 FB6-3146-000 1 GUIDE, SECONDARY TRANSFER, 1
7 FF6-2127-000 1 PLATE, ATTRACTION
7A FB6-3850-000 1 SHEET, SECONDARY TRANSFER
9 FB6-3150-000 36 COLLAR, TRANSFER
12 FG6-8997-000 1 SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
12A FB6-3134-000 1 ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE
12B FB6-3149-000 1 HOLDER, STATIC CHARGE
12D FB6-3939-000 2 HOLDER, BUSHING
12E FS6-1066-000 2 BUSHING
12F FU3-0344-000 1 GEAR, 48T
12G FB6-3131-000 1 ROLLER, SECONDARY TRANSFER
502 XB4-5300-607 AR SCREW,P,M3X6
504 XD2-1100-502 AR RING,E
2-100
FIGURE 810
FIXING ASSEMBLY
53
502 38 52
(J802) 501
506 (J802)
(TH2)
(J805)
(J805) (J802)
(J804)
(J803)
(J806)
43F
(H1)
A
A (H2)
13 10
27
11 (TH1)
501
28 (J806)
501 506
23
501
34 43C 43E 43B 501
19 43G 506
501 506
501 (TP1)
501
43D
504
1 26 9
51 3 36 11
45 8 43A
501 504
25
12 24 49
16 6 B 2 43
4
30 46 501
48 15
33
35 (H3) 504
41 32
31 40
14 26
47 B 7
504 505
503 44
20 39
29 21
42
42 12
47 46 25
(PS25) 1
(J803)
5 18 33
(PS27) 37
(J804) 14
32 31
50 41
501
17
501
22
506
2-101
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.810 FG6-9700-000 1 FIXING ASSEMBLY 100V
Fig.810 FG6-9069-150 1 FIXING ASSEMBLY 120V
Fig.810 FG6-9070-150 1 FIXING ASSEMBLY 220/240V
2 FB6-6378-000 1 ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE
3 FB6-6379-000 1 BRUSH, GROUNDING
4 FA9-4035-000 1 ROLLER, FIXING
5 FB6-3879-000 1 LEVER, INLET
6 FB6-3643-000 1 SHAFT, PRESSURE RELEASE
7 FB6-3644-000 1 LEVER, PRESSURE RELEASE
8 FB6-3645-020 1 GUIDE, FIXING DELIVERY, UPPER
9 FB6-3646-000 6 RETAINER, DELIVERY COLLAR
10 FB6-3647-020 1 COVER, FIXING, UPPER
11 XA9-1484-000 2 SCREW,TP,M4X20
13 FB6-3651-000 1 MOUNT, DRAWER
15 FB6-3653-000 1 ROLLER, PRESSURE
16 FB6-3657-000 1 PIN, JOINT, FRONT
17 FB6-3658-000 1 SHAFT, INLET LEVER
18 FB6-3659-000 1 GUIDE, FIXING INLET
19 FB6-3660-000 1 RETAINER, UPPER HEATER
20 FB6-3662-000 1 LEVER, DELIVERY, 1
21 FB6-3663-000 1 GUIDE, FIXING DELIVERY, LOWER
22 FB6-3664-000 1 PLATE, CONDUCTIVE, 3
23 FB6-3665-000 1 COVER, FIXING, REAR
24 FB6-3666-000 4 CLAW, SEPARATION
25 FB6-3667-000 2 BUSHING
26 FB6-3668-000 2 SHAFT, PRESSURE, UPPER
27 FA9-3941-000 1 GEAR, 20T
28 FB6-3670-000 1 PIN, JOINT, REAR
29 FB6-3671-000 1 SHAFT, LOWER GUIDE
2-102
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
30 FB6-3673-000 1 LEVER, INTERNAL DELIVERY, 2
31 FA3-0652-000 2 BUSHING
32 FB6-3675-000 2 SHAFT, PRESSURE, LOWER
33 FB6-3676-000 2 PLATE, PRESSURE SLIDE
34 FB6-3677-000 1 SPRING, GROUNDING
35 FB6-3678-000 1 KNOB, GUIDE
36 FB6-6381-000 6 ROLLER, FIXING DELIVERY
37 FB6-3150-000 1 COLLAR, TRANSFER
38 FG6-9644-000 1 FIXING DRAWER CABLE ASSEMBLY 100V H1,H2 J802
38 FG6-9646-000 1 FIXING DRAWER CABLE ASSEMBLY 120V H1,H2 J802
38 FG6-9647-000 1 FIXING DRAWER CABLE ASSEMBLY 220/240V H1,H2 J802
39 RB2-0493-000 1 ROLLER, PAPER SENSOR
40 FH7-4739-000 1 QUARTZ HEATER H3
41 FB6-4909-000 2 SPRING, GROUNDING
43 FG6-9645-070 1 UPPER FRAME ASSEMBLY
43A FB6-3649-030 1 PLATE, CONDUCTIVE, 1
43B FB6-3650-030 1 PLATE, CONDUCTIVE, 2
43C FB6-3669-000 1 RETAINER, THERMISTOR
43D FH7-6345-000 1 THERMOSTAT TP1
43E FH7-7586-020 1 THERMISTOR UNIT TH1 J806
43F FH7-7587-000 1 THERMISTOR UNIT TH2 J805
43G FB6-3652-000 1 PLATE, FIXING
44 FB6-3885-000 6 RIB, PAPER DELIVERY
45 FS5-6947-000 1 SPACER
51 FA9-3942-000 1 GEAR, 45T
52 FB6-3648-000 1 PLATE, COVER FIXING, UPPER
2-103
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
53 WT2-5639-000 1 CABLE CLIP
502 XB2-8301-207 AR SCREW, W/WASHER, M3X12
503 XD2-1100-322 AR RING,E
504 XD2-1100-642 AR RING,E
506 XD1-1104-138 AR WASHER, SHIM MD4.1
2-104
FIGURE 900
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
11 11A
(J1122) 19 (J536) (J535)
(J1400)
(J512) (J521)
(J557) 11A 11C
(J539) 11B
(J1402)
(J536)
(J535)
(J1401)
1
(J521)
(J1121) 504
(J1304) (J1520)
21 (J1522)
(J1309) 504
(J1305)
(J1336) (J1315) A
(J1316) 20 504
25 504
EXCEPT
24 MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
26 JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY 502
5 503
(J1210) 504
509
(J1512)
508
12
18
A (J540) S3200,V3200
504 12A 503 (J523)
(J540) (J1510) S3200,V3200
2 (FM7)
7 13 504
(J524) 501 504
6 (J113)
8
(J1216) 13A
(J112) 504 15
(J44)
(J1208) (J1318) 9
3
(J1215)
(J514) 504
(J1311)
(J1225)
504
(J1213)
(J1202)
14
(J1513) 17 (J1201) 22
504
(J1505) 16 MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
(J1511) (J538) JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY
(J1504) 120/220/240V
(J1207)
(J1503) (J1507) 504
10 (J1203)
2-105
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.900 NPN RF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
1 FB6-3073-000 1 MOUNT, PANEL
2 FB6-3076-000 1 FILTER, DUST
3 FB6-3104-000 1 MOUNT, FILTER
MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
4 FG3-2729-000 1 UFR BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY
J1207
5 FH2-7019-000 1 FLAT CABLE, HDD, 2 J1210
6 FH5-1033-000 1 FAN FM7 J540
7 XA9-0896-000 4 SCREW
8 FG3-2362-000 1 FLAT CABLE, DDI-P, 1 J113,1216
9 FG3-2363-000 1 FLAT CABLE, DDI-P, 2 J112,1215
J44,514,538,1208,
J1213,1225,1311,1318
10 FG3-2644-000 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER-POWER SUPPLY
J1503-1505
J1507,1511,1513
J512,521,535,536,539
J557,1121,1122,1304
11 FG3-2645-000 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER-I/O
J1305,1309,1315,1316
J1336
12 FG3-2646-020 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER-FAN J540,1512
S3200,V3200
13 FG3-3287-000 1 CABLE, COIN VENDER
J523,524,1510
13A VS1-5057-012 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT S3200,V3200 J524
14 WA7-2645-000 1 DIMM, SMS-51228QN-H, SD-RAM iR C3220Series J1202
15 FG3-2854-000 1 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY iR C3200Series
15 FG3-3668-000 1 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY iR C3220Series
16 FG3-2855-000 1 SUB CONTROLLER BOARD ASSEMBLY
17 FG3-2856-000 1 SRAM BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY
EXCEPT
JLZ,JNL,JND,JPM,JNP,JN
18 FG6-9676-000 1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD ASSEMBLY
F,JNQ,JNJ,JNK,JNE,MSK
,MSN,MSL
2-106
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
JLZ,JNL,JND,JPM,JNP,JN
F,JNQ,JNJ,JNK,JNE,JNB,
18 FG6-9666-000 1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD ASSEMBLY
JPK,JNC,JNK,JPG,JPH,J
PJ,JPF
19 FG3-3136-000 1 DDI-S BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY J1400,1401,1402
J1520,1522 iR C3200
20 FY7-0376-000 1 NETWORK BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY
Series
J1520,1522 iR C3220
20 FG6-9678-020 1 NETWORK BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY
Series
21 WM2-5210-000 1 HDD, HDS722540VLAT20
iR C3200Series 120/220/
22 WA7-3053-000 1 DIMM, M390S3253DT1-C7A, SD-RAM
240V J1201
24 FB6-3072-000 1 MOUNT, HARD DISK
25 FB6-6382-000 1 SHIELD PLATE
26 XB1-2300-409 6 SCREW,MACH.,TRUSS HEAD,M3X4
501 XB1-2260-807 AR SCREW,MACH.,TRUSS HEAD,M2.6X8
504 XB6-7300-607 AR SCREW,TP,M3X6
508 XB6-7301-607 AR SCREW,TP,M3X16
509 XD1-1105-235 AR SHIM
2-107
FIGURE 910
DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
504
(J992)
(FM1)
501
6
10 501
(ELCB1)
(J69)
4
(J1000) (J1)
505
7 502
4A 503
(100V)
(120V)
3
(220V RQY) (220V RQY)
2 (220/240V)
(EXCEPT QLZ,JBC,RLZ)
(240V RLZ)
1
11 11
FOR Cassette Feeding Unit-X1 (240V QLZ,JBC)
FOR Plain Pedestal-C1 9
8
2-108
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.910 NPN RF DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
220/240V EXCEPT
1 FH2-7080-000 1 CORD, POWER SUPPLY
QLZ,JBC,RLZ J1
2 FH2-7079-000 1 POWER CORD 120V J1
3 FH2-7078-000 1 POWER CORD 100V J1
4 FG3-3020-000 1 DC FUSE PCB ASSEMBLY
4A FF3-4436-000 1 CABLE, HEATER CONTROL J69,1000
5 FB6-3235-000 1 SHEET, MESH
6 FH6-1979-000 1 FAN FM1 J992
7 FH7-7528-000 1 BREAKER, CIRCUIT 100/120V ELCB1
7 FH7-7527-000 1 BREAKER, CIRCUIT 220/240V ELCB1
8 FH2-7081-000 1 POWER CORD 240V QLZ,JBC J1
9 FH2-7082-000 1 POWER CORD 240V RLZ J1
10 FG6-8970-050 1 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY 100/120V iR C3200 Series
10 FG6-8971-050 1 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY 220/240V iR C3200 Series
10 FM1-0408-000 1 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY 100/120V iR C3220 Series
10 FM1-0409-000 1 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY 220/240V iR C3220 Series
11 FH2-6488-000 2 CORD, POWER SUPPLY 220V RQY
504 XB1-2403-007 AR SCREW,MACH.,TRUSS HEAD, M4X30
505 XD1-4200-402 AR WASHER,TOOTHED LOCK
2-109
FIGURE 930
DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY
501
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No. 501.
Key No. 501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.930 FG3-3011-000 1 DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY
501 XB1-2400-607 AR SCREW,MACH.,TRUSS HEAD,M4X6 SEE NOTE
2-110
FIGURE 980
H.V. TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY
501
(J1102)
3
(J75)
(J92)
2
(J1103)
501
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.980 FG6-9673-000 1 H.V.TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY
1 FG3-2387-000 1 CABLE, H.V. 1-SUB J75,1102
2 FG3-2396-000 1 CABLE, H.V. 1-SUB, 2 J92,1103
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
2-111
FIGURE 981
2ND TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY
1
3A
(J1105)
3
(J95)
501
501
2
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.981 FG6-9674-000 1 2ND. TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASS'Y
1 FB6-3095-000 1 CASE, 2ND TRANSFER H.V.T.
2 FB6-3096-000 1 COVER, 2ND TRANSFER H.V.T.
3 FG3-2385-000 1 CABLE, H.V., 3 J95,1105
501 XB4-5300-807 AR SCREW,P,M3X8
2-112
FIGURE B
LIST OF CONNECTORS
J117
J120 J115
J118
J116
J603
J620 J618
J604
J114 J616
J617
J612
J614
J608
J610
J606
J600 J619
J605 J615
J601
J611
J609
J613
J607
J106
J127
J769 J564
J710
J88
J703
J111
J701
J711 J100
J705 J98
J712
J706 J702
J704
J71 J64
J562 J708
J716
J707
J709
J714
J713
2-113
J512
J539
J1122
J536 J1304
J1121 J1309
J1315 J1305
J521 J1336
J1316 J3
J535 J1302 J511
J1318 J1210 J1113 J1116
J510 J1115 J1117
J520
J1114 J1123
J540
J537
J514
J1213 J1513 J2
J1511 J1
J1512 J531
J522 J1110
J1507 J1111
J1112
J557
J523
J1510 J811
J524 J720
J129 J768
J721 J953
S3200,V3200 J132 J961
J820 J104
J105
J851
J858
J854
J850
J812 J860 J859
J857 J852
J856
J855 J864
J700
J863
J865
J992 J861 J862
2-114
J951
J952
J560
J559 J128 J964

J956
J129
J103 J957
J61
J1509 J50 J561 J965
J1501 J108
J1502 J558
J565 J958
J60 J950
J59 J960
J1508
J963 J962 J959
J96 J66
J74
J67
J802
J95
J52
J62
J759
J756
J762
J758
J763 J757
J108 J760
J761
J107 J750 J752
J802 J800 J755

J765
J766
J806 J754
J805 J764
J803 J804
J801
J808
J810
J807
J809
2-115
J123
J124
J125
J126
J654
J655
J662 J663
J105 J667
J666
J661
J815
J665
J660
J12 J664
J8
J13
J1120
J816
J11
J102
J442 J403 J404

J440
J441
J405
J68
J406
J413
J407
J409 J411
J408 J414
J410
J412
2-116
J675
J673
J674 J670
J671
J672
J126
J679 J668
J653
J678 J669
J652
J676
J110 J677 OLD NEW
J105 J651 J650
J814 J1126
J93 J1125
J1125
J83 J1125
J91
J70 J813
J51
J1124
J123
J316 J315
J300
J308 J306
J307 J314
J304 J313
J303
J312 J305
J311 J302
J301
J310
J70K
J70C
J309
J70M
J70Y
2-117
J113
J1216
J1215
J1400
J1301
J112 J1401
J92
J94
J131 J79
J99
J109 J76
J78
J77
J75
J1103
J97
J72K J72M
J72C
J73CK J73YM
J88 J1102
J87
J72Y
J71K
J71C
J84CK
J81
J85
J71M
J71Y
J82
J80 J86 J84YM
J10 J89 J1105
J1104
J54
J95
J90
J1000
J69
2-118
J1313
J1209
J1342
J1204
J1303
J1302 J1520
J1101 J1521
J1207
J153 J109
J1100 J155
J154 J1522
J56
J53 J108
J5
J57
J58
J95
J7
J1
J3
J1311
J1208
J1202
J44
J1201
J1210 J1203
J1225
J1506 J1212
J1510 J538
J1505
J1503
J1504
2-119
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
Fig.B NPN RF LIST OF CONNECTORS
J1 PCB INVERTER
J1 VS1-6321-002 1 CONNECTOR, 2P, FEMALE
J1 WS5-5074-000 1 CONNECTOR, INLET
J2 PCB INVERTER
J2 NPN LCD CONTROL PANEL
J3 PCB INVERTER
J3 PCB HEATER DRIVER BOARD
J3 WS3-5159-000 2 PIN CONTACT, 18-22AWG
J5 PCB DCP1
J5 WS3-5160-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG
J10 VS1-6380-002 1 CONNECTOR, 2P, MALE
J10 WS3-5291-000 2 PIN CONTACT
J10 WS3-5292-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT
J11 PCB CASSETTE HEATER
J11 NPN CASSETTE HEATER
2-120
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J44 NPN HARD DISC 0
J44 X62-5133-000 4 SOCKET, MATE-N-LOCK
J44 X65-5854-000 1 CONNECTOR, 4P, FEMALE
J50 PCB FUSE BOARD
J51 PCB FUSE BOARD
J52 PCB FUSE BOARD
J52 WT1-5155-000 2 TERMINAL
J53 PCB FUSE BOARD
J54 PCB FUSE BOARD
J56 PCB FUSE BOARD
J57 PCB FUSE BOARD
J58 PCB FUSE BOARD
J59 PCB FUSE BOARD
J60 PCB FUSE BOARD
J61 PCB FUSE BOARD
2-121
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J62 PCB FUSE BOARD
J64 PCB FUSE BOARD
J66 PCB FUSE BOARD
J67 PCB FUSE BOARD
J68 PCB FUSE BOARD
J70 PCB FUSE BOARD
J70C PCB HVT1 CYAN
J70C VS3-5083-013 1 CONNECTOR, 13P, FEMALE CYAN
J70C WS3-5160-000 4 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG CYAN
J70K PCB HVT1 BLACK
J70K VS3-5083-013 1 CONNECTOR, 13P, FEMALE BLACK
J70K WS3-5160-000 4 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG BLACK
J70M PCB HVT1 MAGENTA
J70M VS3-5083-013 1 CONNECTOR, 13P, FEMALE MAGENTA
J70M WS3-5160-000 4 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG MAGENTA
J70Y PCB HVT1 YELLOW
J70Y VS3-5083-013 1 CONNECTOR, 13P, FEMALE YELLOW
2-122
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J70Y WS3-5160-000 4 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG YELLOW
J71 PCB FUSE BOARD
J71 WS3-5569-000 4 PIN, CONTACT
J71C PCB HVT1 CYAN
J71C WS3-5160-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG CYAN
J71K PCB HVT1 BLACK
J71K WS3-5160-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG BLACK
J71M WS3-5160-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG MAGENTA
J71Y WS3-5160-000 2 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG YELLOW
J72C PCB HVT1 CYAN
J72K PCB HVT1 BLACK
J73CK PCB HVT4 CYAN/BLACK
J73CK VS1-6314-010 1 CONNECTOR, 10P, FEMALE CYAN/BLACK
J73YM PCB HVT4 YELLOW/MAGENTA
J73YM VS1-6314-010 1 CONNECTOR, 10P, FEMALE YELLOW/MAGENTA
J74 PCB FUSE BOARD
J75 PCB HVT1-SUB
2-123
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J76 PCB HVT1-SUB
J77 PCB HVT1-SUB
J78 PCB HVT1-SUB
J79 PCB HVT1-SUB
J80 PCB HVT2
J81 PCB HVT2
J82 PCB HVT2
J83 PCB HVT2
J84CK PCB HVT4 CYAN/BLACK
J84CK VS3-5083-005 1 CONNECTOR, 5P, FEMALE CYAN/BLACK
J84CK WS3-5160-000 3 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG CYAN/BLACK
J84YM PCB HVT4 YELLOW/MAGENTA
J84YM VS3-5083-005 1 CONNECTOR, 5P, FEMALE YELLOW/MAGENTA
J84YM WS3-5160-000 3 SOCKET CONTACT, 18-24AWG YELLOW/MAGENTA
J85 PCB HVT2-SUB
J86 PCB HVT2-SUB
2-124
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J87 PCB HVT2-SUB
J88 PCB MICRO SWITCH
J88 PCB HVT2-SUB
J89 PCB HVT2-SUB
J90 PCB HVT2-SUB
J91 PCB HV2-SUB
J92 PCB HVT1-SUB
J93 NPN DRUM ITB MOTOR M1
J94 PCB HVT1-SUB
J95 PCB HVT3
J97 PCB HVT1-SUB
2-125
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J98 VS1-5057-006 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT
J99 PCB HVT1-SUB
J100 PCB DC CONTROLLER
J102 VT2-5161-026 1 HOLDER, CONNECTOR, 26P
J103 VS1-6197-014 1 CONNECTOR HOUSING
2-126
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J108 PCB DCP1
J109 PCB DCP2
J109 WS3-5569-000 5 PIN, CONTACT
J116 VS1-5824-012 1 CONNECTOR, 12P
J117 VS1-6226-036 1 HOLDER, CONNECTOR, 36P
2-127
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J120 VS1-5824-012 1 CONNECTOR, 12P
2-128
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J153 PCB DCP2
J154 PCB DCP1
J155 PCB DCP2
J300 PCB MEMORY SWITCH
J309 NPN DRUM UNIT ANTENNA YELLOW
J309 VS1-6225-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE YELLOW
J310 NPN DRUM UNIT ANTENNA MAGENTA
J310 VS1-6225-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE MEGENTA
J311 NPN DRUM UNIT ANTENNA CYAN
J311 VS1-6225-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE CYAN
J312 NPN DRUM UNIT ANTENNA BLACK
2-129
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J312 VS1-6225-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE BLACK
J313 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE ANTENNA YELLOW
J314 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE ANTENNA MAGENTA
J314 VS1-0842-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE MAGENTA
J315 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE ANTENNA CYAN
J316 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE ANTENNA BLACK
J403 VS1-6313-013 2 CONNECTOR, 13P, FEMALE DUPLEX TYPE
J403 VS1-6319-026 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT DUPLEX TYPE
J403 VT2-5161-026 2 HOLDER, CONNECTOR, 26P DUPLEX TYPE
J405 NPN DUPLEXING PICK-UP SENSOR DUPLEX TYPE PS24
J406 VS1-6919-025 1 CONNECTOR, DRAWER DUPLEX TYPE
J407 WS3-5358-000 3 SOCKET CONTACT, 22-26AWG DUPLEX TYPE
J408 NPN DUPLEXING FEED MOTOR DUPLEX TYPE M26
J409 NPN DUPLEXING REGIST SENSOR DUPLEX TYPE PS21
J410 NPN DUPLEXING REGIST CLUTCH DUPLEX TYPE CL1
J411 NPN DUPLEXING PICK-UP CLUTCH DUPLEX TYPE CL2
2-130
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J412 NPN CROSS PASS SOLENOID 2 DUPLEX TYPE SL5
J413 NPN SIDE REGIST MOTOR DUPLEX TYPE M25
J414 NPN DUPLEXING SIDE REGIST SENSOR DUPLEX TYPE PS22
J414 WS3-5358-000 3 SOCKET CONTACT, 22-26AWG DUPLEX TYPE
J440 PCB DUPLEX BOARD DUPLEX TYPE
J441 PCB DUPLEX DRIVER DUPLEX TYPE
J442 PCB DUPLEX DRIVER DUPLEX TYPE
J442 VS1-6314-014 1 CONNECTOR, 14P, MALE DUPLEX TYPE
J442 VT2-5161-028 1 HOLDER, CONNECTOR, 28P DUPLEX TYPE
J511 PCB OPERATION CPU
J512 SYS TO FAX BOARD OPTION
2-131
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J514 PCB ASSIST
J520 PCB ECO-ID BOARD
J522 SYS TO CARD READER OPTION
J523 VS1-6321-010 1 CONNECTOR, 10P, FEMALE S3200,V3200
J524 SYS TO COIN VENDER OPTION
J524 VS1-5057-012 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT S3200,V3200
J524 VS1-6321-012 1 CONNECTOR, 12P, MALE S3200,V3200
J538 PCB FRAM COUNTER BOARD
J540 NPN CONTROLLER FAN FM7
2-132
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J558 WT1-5155-000 4 TERMINAL
J559 NPN FAX PCIP
J564 PCB MICRO SWITCH
J565 NPN TO READER
J565 FH2-5825-000 5 PIN CONTACT, 16-20AWG
J565 FH2-6855-000 1 CONNECTOR, 12P, FEMALE
2-133
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J605 NPN SCANNER MOTOR YELLOW M2
J606 NPN LED MOTOR YELLOW M16
J607 PCB BD SENSOR YELLOW
J608 NPN LASER SCANNER UNIT YELLOW
J608 WT1-5155-000 12 TERMINAL YELLOW
J609 NPN SCANNER MOTOR MAGENTA M3
J610 NPN LED MOTOR MAGENTA M17
J611 PCB BD SENSOR MAGENTA
J612 NPN LASER SCANNER UNIT MAGENTA
J612 WT1-5155-000 12 TERMINAL MAGENTA
J613 NPN SCANNER MOTOR CYAN M4
J614 NPN LED MOTOR CYAN M18
J615 PCB BD SENSOR CYAN
J616 NPN LASER SCANNER UNIT CYAN
J616 WT1-5155-000 12 TERMINAL CYAN
J617 NPN SCANNER MOTOR BLACK M5
J618 NPN LED MOTOR BLACK M19
J619 PCB BD SENSOR BLACK
2-134
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J620 NPN LASER SCANNER UNIT BLACK
J620 WT1-5155-000 12 TERMINAL BLACK
J650 NPN DEVELOPING MOTOR YELLOW M12
J651 NPN DEVELOPING MOTOR MAGENTA M13
J652 NPN DEVELOPING MOTOR CYAN M14
J653 NPN DEVELOPING MOTOR BLACK M15
J660 NPN DRUM UNIT YELLOW
J661 NPN DRUM UNIT MAGENTA
J662 NPN DRUM UNIT CYAN
J663 NPN DRUM UNIT BLACK
J668 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR YELLOW M20
J668 VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT YELLOW
2-135
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J670 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR MAGENTA M21
J670 VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT MAGENTA
J672 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR CYAN M22
J672 VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT CYAN
J674 NPN TONER CARTRIDGE MOTOR BLACK M23
J674 VS1-5057-002 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT BLACK
J676 NPN SCREW ROTATE SENSOR YELLOW PS1
J677 NPN SCREW ROTATE SENSOR MAGENTA PS2
J678 NPN SCREW ROTATE SENSOR CYAN PS3
J679 NPN SCREW ROTATE SENSOR BLACK PS4
J700 NPN DELECT COOLING FAN FM5
2-136
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J704 NPN VERTICAL PASS MOTOR M10
J705 NPN FACE DOWN DELIVERY MOTOR M11
J706 NPN FACE DOWN DELIVERY SENSOR 2 PS6
J707 NPN DELIVERY SWITCHING SOLENOID 1 SL2
J709 NPN FIXING FEED OPEN SENSOR PS5
J710 NPN DELIVERY TRAY FULL SENSOR PS8
J711 NPN FACE DOWN DELIVERY SENSOR 1 PS12
J712 NPN DELIVERY VERTICAL OPEN SENSOR PS13
J713 PCB WASTE TONER DETECT
J714 PCB WASTE TONER LED
J716 NPN CLEANING FAN FM4
J721 NPN MANUAL COOLING FAN FM6
2-137
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J754 NPN VERTICAL PASS OPEN SENSOR PS11
J755 VS1-6919-031 1 CONNECTOR, DRAWER
J758 NPN MULTI FEED LAST SENSOR PS9
J759 PCB SLIDE VOLUME SENSOR
J760 NPN MULTI PAPER SENSOR PS10
J761 NPN REGIST MOTOR M9
J762 NPN MANUAL FEED SOLENOID SL1
J763 NPN REGIST FRONT MOTOR M8
J764 NPN REGIST SENSOR PS26
J765 NPN FRONT OHP SENSOR OHP1
2-138
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J766 NPN REAR OHP SENSOR OHP2
J768 NPN MANUAL FEED OPEN SENSOR PS28
J802 VS1-6757-009 1 CONNECTOR, 9P
J802 WS3-5822-000 3 PIN, CONTACT, AWG 14-18
J802 WS3-5824-000 2 SOCKET, CONTACT AWG 20-24
J803 NPN FIXING DELI SENSOR PS25
J803 WS3-5730-000 3 SOCKET CONTACT AWG 36-26
J804 NPN FIXING ENTRANS SENSOR PS27
J805 NPN FIXING SUB THERMISTOR TH2
J806 NPN FIXING MAIN THERMISTOR TH1
2-139
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J809 NPN CASSETTE 2 SIZE SWITCH SW3
J810 NPN CASSETTE 1 SIZE SWITCH SW2
J811 NPN FRONT DOOR OPEN SENSOR PS23
J812 NPN FIXING FAN FM2
J813 NPN FIXING MOTOR M24
J814 NPN DRUM ITB MOTOR M1
J820 NPN EXHAUST FAN FM3
2-140
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J854 NPN CASSETTE 1 PICK-UP MOTOR M6
J855 NPN CASSETTE 1 LEVEL B SENSOR PS15
J856 NPN CASSETTE 1 LEVEL A SENSOR PS14
J857 NPN CASSETTE 1 PICK-UP SOLENOID SL3
J858 NPN CASSETTE 1 RETRY SENSOR PS16
J859 NPN CASSETTE 1 PAPER SENSOR PS7
J860 NPN CASSETTE 2 PICK-UP MOTOR M7
J861 NPN CASSETTE 2 LEVEL B SENSOR PS18
J862 NPN CASSETTE 2 LEVEL A SENSOR PS20
J863 NPN CASSETTE 2 PICK-UP SOLENOID SL4
J864 NPN CASSETTE 2 RETRY SENSOR PS17
J865 NPN CASSETTE 2 PAPER SENSOR PS19
J950 SYS TO CASSETTE PEDESTAL OPTION
J950 FH2-6480-000 1 CONNECTOR, FEMALE
2-141
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J956 PCB REAR REGIST SENSOR
J957 PCB REAR REGIST SENSOR
J958 PCB FRONT REGIST SENSOR
J959 PCB FRONT REGIST SENSOR
J960 NPN SALT SENSOR TPS1
J961 NPN ENV. SENSOR EV1
J992 NPN DC POWER FAN FM1
2-142
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J1115 SYS TO FOOT SWITCH OPTION
J1116 PCB OPERATION KEY
J1117 PCB OPERATION KEY
2-143
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J1123 PCB KEY SWITCH
J1126 NPN RF VERTICAL PATH FAN NEW FM8
J1126 VS1-6321-003 1 CONNECTOR, 3P, FEMALE NEW
J1126 VS1-5057-003 1 CONNECTOR, SNAP TIGHT NEW
J1204 PCB CONTROLLER MAIN BOARD
J1207 SYS TO SURF BOARD OPTION
J1209 PCB PC INTERFACE
J1210 FH2-7019-000 1 FLAT CABLE, HDD, 2
2-144
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J1301 PCB CONTROLLER SUB BOARD
J1342 PCB SRAM BOARD
J1400 PCB DDI-S BOARD
J1401 NPN TO READER
J1401 PCB DDI-S BOARD
J1501 PCB DISTRIBUTE BOARD
2-145
R
FIGURE S
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J1510 VS1-6321-002 1 CONNECTOR, 2P, FEMALE S3200,V3200
J1520 SYS TO USB INTERFACE BOARD OPTION
2-146

Canon Copier iRC 3200 Series I PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Canon Copier iRC 3200 Series I PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Service Manual

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................... 2-6

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Chapter 4 Basic Operations (As a Printer)

Chapter 5 Main Controller

5.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-25

Chapter 6 Original Exposure System

6.4.6.5 After Replacing the CCD Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-24

Chapter 7 Image Processing System

Chapter 8 Laser Exposure

8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5

Chapter 9 Image Formation

9.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit .......................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.8.2.7 Opening the Main Controller Box ..................................................................................................... 9-54

9.8.12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ......................................................................................................... 9-78

9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit .................................................................................................. 9-96

Chapter 10 Pickup/Feeding System

10.9.1 Delivery ................................................................................................................................................ 10-32

10.10.8.7 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor .......................................................................................... 10-47

10.10.19.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................... 10-66

10.10.29 Fixing/Feeder Unit Open/Closed Detecting Switch ......................................................................... 10-86

10.10.36.21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ........................................................................................ 10-105

Chapter 11 Fixing System

11.3 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 11-7

11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................... 11-37

11.5.15.9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover ......................................................................................... 11-67

Chapter 12 Externals and Controls

12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................... 12-21

12.5.12.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ................................................................................................. 12-32

12.5.20 Main Power Switch ............................................................................................................................. 12-44

12.5.25.3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ......................................................................................... 12-58

Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection

14.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1

Chapter 15 Standards and Adjustments

Chapter 16 Correcting Faulty Images

16.2.2 Test Print TYPE ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16.3.10.34 E110-0x10 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-138

16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-180

Chapter 17 Self Diagnosis

Chapter 18 Service Mode

18.5.1.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................... 18-84

19.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................ 19-28

Chapter 20 Service Tools

1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 System Construction

A system may be configured as follows:

[1] Finisher-M1 [10] Slide Paper Deck-P1

[2] Saddle Finisher-N2 [11] Card Reader-D1

[3] Finisher-N1 [12] Plain Pedestal-C1

[4] Copy Tray-H1 [13] 2-Cassette Pedestal-X1

[5] Delivery Tray (standard) [14] Anti-Condensation Heater (100/230V)

[6] NE Controller-A1 [15] Cassette Heater Kit-A1

[7] DADF-K1 [16] Cassette Heater Unit-24

[8] Copyboard Cover [17] Cassette Heater Unit-25

[9] Original Tray